Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2023-076 - 4/25/2023 - Approved (18)
DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF O . N . STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO . 3 CITY PROJECT NO. 18131A 1852�a 10iii �i i� III 1`4iii���� ARDURR .................................................................................................................................................................................. COLLABORATE.INNOVATE.CREATE. 801 Navigation, Suite 300 Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 (361) 883-1984 TBPE Firm No. F-10053 11 ik"°' i e J�ant,iary 17,11, 2023 Record Drawing Number: WTR-477 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/Section Title Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 01 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev8-2019) 00 72 00 General Conditions (Rev 12-2020) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev 2-2020) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances (Rev5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev 5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications 02 10 20 Site Clearing and Stripping 021040 Site Grading 02 10 80 Removing Abandoned Structures 02 20 20 Excavation Backfill Utilities 02 20 21 Control of Groundwater 02 20 22 Trench Safety for Excavations 02 20 40 Street Excavation 02 20 60 Channel Excavation 02 20 80 Embankment 02 21 00 Select Material Table of Contents 000100-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Division/Section Title 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement 02 52 23 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 02 54 04 Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions 02 54 12 Prime Coat 02 54 24 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement 02 56 08 Inlets 02 56 10 Concrete Curb and Gutter 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 02 56 20 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02 62 10 PVC Pipe AWWA(4in Diameter and Greater) 02 64 09 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves 02 64 11 Gate Valves for Waterlines 02 72 02 Manholes 02 72 05 Fiberglass Manholes 02 74 02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts 02 76 02 Gravity Wastewater Lines 02 80 20 Seeding Division 03 Concrete 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 80 00 Concrete Structures Division 05 Metals 05 02 00 Welding 05 54 20 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Part T Technical Specifications Division 01 General Requirements 0142 00-T Codes and Standards 01 61 16-T General Equipment Stipulations 0175 00-T Testing,Training, and Facility Start-up 0175 16-T Starting of Systems Table of Contents 000100-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Division/Section Title 0178 23 -T Operating and Maintenance Data Division 02 Existing Conditions 02 40 00-T Building Demolition Division 06 Wood, Plastics&Composite 06 5100-T Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications Division 09 Finishes 09 9100-T Painting and Coating 09 9110-T Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 09 96 00-T Protective Coatings Division 13 Special Construction 13 00 00-T Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 3100-T Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System Division 26 Electrical 26 05 60-T Low-Voltage Electric Motors Division 33 Utilities 33 05 05.30-T Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.40-T Piping—General Requirements (Hydrostatic Testing) 33 05 05.50-T Piping—General Requirements (Service Pressure Test) 33 05 05.60-T Piping—General Requirements (Pneumatic Test) 331116-T Waterlines 33 1116.13 -T Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 1116.23 -T Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe 33 1116.33 -T Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials 33 1116.43 -T Polyurethane Coatings on Steel Pipe 33 12 13 -T Water Service Lines 33 12 16-T Butterfly Valves 33 13 00-T Disinfection of Water Lines Table of Contents 000100-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Division/Section Title Division 40 Process Interconnections 40 05 00-T Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 07 -T Pipe Supports 40 05 31 -T PVC, CPVC Pipe (Less than 4-inch Diameter) 40 05 32 -T Dual Contained Piping System 40 05 68.13 -T PVC and CPVC Valves (Less than 4-inch Diameter) 40 06 20-T Process Pipe Schedule 404213 -T Insulation 43 20 00-T Pumps General 43 23 17.2-T Sample Pumps - High Pressure Hose Type 46 00 00-T Equipment General Provisions 464142 -T Chemical Injection Assemblies Appendix Title 1 City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Specification & Detail Drawings 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report and Supplemental Letter 3 Asbestos NESHAP and Lead Survey Report END OF SECTION Table of Contents 000100-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 0001 01 SEALS PAGE 1'+w�►�11► , wry m � Zm�� wt v�wt F ad 40 yjow IvryI I orl, •................ 1[ �� aoi 404.0a voo*rr mroiu u+-mr ra dx,mwa wm;m GRADIY S. ATKINSON i DA �" d' AK 115461 S ila* umowwrm r l u h m m > % 14 �:��l 8/12/22 00112122 1/17/23 CIVIL PROCESS MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL, INSTRUMENTATION & ARDURRA HAZEN &SAWYER CONTROLS TBPE FIRM NO. F-10053 TBPE FIRM NO. F-13618 BATH ENGINEERING TBPE FIRM NO. F-829 Responsible Specifications: Responsible Specifications: Responsible Specifications: Division 00, 01, 02, 03, 05, 09, 13, 0651 00 All specifications in Appendix-1 33 26 05 60 City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP 40 05 00 Instrumentation and Electrical 40 05 07 Specification &Detail Drawings 400531 40 05 32 40 05 68.13 40 06 20 40 42 13 43 20 00 43 23 17.2 46 00 00 4641 42 18131A—O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 1 of 1 0001 01 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 000102 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. Sheet Name 1 G1 COVER SHEET 2 G2 DRAWING SHEET INDEX 3 G3 GENERAL TYPICAL LEGEND AND SYMBOLS 4 G4 EXISTING POST-FILTRATION PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM 5 G5 PROPOSED POST-FILTRATION PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM 6 G6 EXISTING MASTER SITE PLAN 7 G7 PROPOSED MASTER SITE PLAN 8 G8 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PHASE 1 9 G9 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PHASE 2 10 G10 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PHASE 3 11 G11 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PHASE 4 12 G12 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PHASE 5 13 G13 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 14 G14 C.O.C.C. STANDARD STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION STANDARD DETAILS 15 D1 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN 16 D2 DEMOLITION PLAN BASELINE A STA 0+00 TO STA 4+25 17 D3 DEMOLITION PLAN BASELINE A STA 4+25 TO STA 8+00 18 D4 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 DEMOLITION PLAN 19 D5 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(1 OF 5) 20 D6 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(2 OF 5) 21 D7 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(3 OF 5) 22 D8 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(4 OF 5) 23 D9 HIGH SERVICE NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(5 OF 5) 24 D10 PROPOSED CLEARWELL 1 ROOF DEMO PLAN 25 D11 CLEARWELL NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(1 OF 3) 26 D12 CLEARWELL NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(2 OF 3) 27 D13 CLEARWELL NO.1 REFERENCE SHEET(3 OF 3) 28 D14 CLEARWELL NO.2 REFERENCE SHEET(1 OF 3) 29 D15 CLEARWELL NO.2 REFERENCE SHEET(2 OF 3) 30 D16 CLEARWELL NO.2 REFERENCE SHEET(3 OF 3) 31 C1 CIVIL TYPICAL LEGEND 32 C2 GENERAL CIVIL NOTES 33 C3 PROPOSED CLEARWELL NO.3 SITE/GRADING PLAN 34 C4 PROPOSED CLEARWELL NO.3 PIPING PLAN 35 C5 PROPOSED CLEARWELL NO.3 SECTIONS 36 C6 PROPOSED PAVING AND DRAINAGE BASELINE A STA 0+00 TO STA 4+25 37 C7 PROPOSED PAVING AND DRAINAGE BASELINE A STA 4+25 TO STA 8+00 38 C8 PROPOSED BASELINE A SECTIONS (1 OF 2) 39 C9 PROPOSED BASELINE A SECTIONS (2 OF 2) List of Drawings 000102-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 7/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 40 C10 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (1 OF 8) 41 C11 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (2 OF 8) 42 C12 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (3 OF 8) 43 C13 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (4 OF 8) 44 C14 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (5 OF 8) 45 C15 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (6 OF 8) 46 C16 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (7 OF 8) 47 C17 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS (8 OF 8) 48 C18 CLEARWELL NO. 3 DETAILS(1 OF 3) 49 C19 CLEARWELL NO. 3 DETAILS(2 OF 3) 50 C20 CLEARWELL NO. 3 DETAILS(3 OF 3) 51 C21 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WATER DETAILS(1 OF 4) 52 C22 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WATER DETAILS(2 OF 4) 53 C23 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WATER DETAILS(3 OF 4) 54 C24 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WATER DETAILS(4 OF 4) 55 C25 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS(1 OF 4) 56 C26 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS(2 OF 4) 57 C27 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS(3 OF 4) 58 C28 C.O.C.C. STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS(4 OF 4) 59 C29 C.O.C.C. STANDARD STORM WATER DETAILS(1 OF 3) 60 C30 C.O.C.C. STANDARD STORM WATER DETAILS(2 OF 3) 61 C31 C.O.C.C. STANDARD STORM WATER DETAILS (3 OF 3) 62 C32 C.O.C.C. CURB, GUTTER,AND SIDEWALK DETAILS 63 M1 MECHANICAL PROCESS MECHANICAL LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS 64 M2 MECHANICAL INJECTION AND ANALYZER PIPE ROUTING PLAN 65 M3 MECHANICAL TIE-IN LOCATIONS FOR EXISTING CHEMICAL LINES(1 OF 2) 66 M4 MECHANICAL TIE-IN LOCATIONS FOR EXISTING CHEMICAL LINES(2 OF 2) 67 M5 MECHANICAL CHEMICAL INJECTION MANHOLE 2B PLAN AND SECTION 68 M6 MECHANICAL CHEMICAL INJECTION MANHOLE 1B PLAN AND SECTION 69 M7 MECHANICAL CHEMICAL INJECTION MANHOLE 1A PLAN AND SECTION MECHANICAL PLANT 1 AND PLANT 2 ANALYZER BUILDING PLAN, SECTIONS, AND 70 M8 DETAILS 71 M9 MECHANICAL HS2 AND NH3 ANALYZER BUILDING PLAN, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS 72 M10 MECHANICAL STANDARD DETAILS 73 E1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND 74 E2 GENERAL NOTES 75 E3 ELECTRICAL KEY PLAN OVERALL AREA 76 E4 ENLARGED AREA PLAN HIGH SERVICE#2 -ANALYZER SHED 77 E5 ENLARGED AREA PLAN CLEARWELL#3 78 E6 ENLARGED AREA PLAN HIGH SERVICE#3 ELECTRICAL ROOM 79 E7 ENLARGED AREA PLAN LIGHTING PLAN 80 E8 ENLARGED AREA PLAN GROUNDING PLAN List of Drawings 000102-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 7/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 81 E9 JUNCTION BOX 31-EJB-2001 @ CW#3 WIRING DIAGRAM 82 E10 POWER &CONTROL DUCTBANK SECTIONS& DETAILS 83 E11 480V POWER CONDUIT AND CABLE SCHEDULE 84 E12 120V/208V POWER INSTRUMENTATION CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE 85 E13 HIGH SERVICE#3 - ELECTRICAL ROOM PANELBOARD SCHEDULES 86 E14 WASH WATER SUPPLY PUMP BLDG. PANEL BOARD SCHEDULES 87 E15 PCR-3 & HIGH SERVICE 2 BLDG PANEL SCHEDULES 88 E16 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 20-SR-01 DETAIL 89 E17 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 90 E18 ELECTRICAL MANHOLE DETAILS 91 E19 STORMWATER LIFT STATION SUMP PUMP SCHEMATIC 92 11 INSTRUMENTATION LEGEND 93 12 ENLARGED AREA PLAN WAREHOUSE - DEMOLITION 94 13 ENLARGED AREA PLAN INSTRUMENTATION PLAN 95 14 JUNCTION BOX 31-IJB-2001 WIRING DIAGRAM 96 15 HIGH SERVICE#3 31-PLC-2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 5 97 16 HIGH SERVICE#3 31-PLC-2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 6 98 17 HIGH SERVICE#3 31-PLC-2000 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE#1 99 18 CLEARWELL#3 LEVEL INDICATION 31-LIT-2001 100 19 WASHWATER 31-PLC-1501 PANEL DETAILS 101 110 WASHWATER 31-PLC-1501 DIGITAL INPUT MODULE#2 102 111 WASHWATER 31-PLC-1501 DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE#1 103 112 WASHWATER 31-PLC-1501 ANALOG INPUT MODULE#1 104 F1 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ROUTING PLAN AREA 7 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH SERVICES/PCR BLDG - 105 F2 DEMOLITION 106 F3 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH SERVICES/PCR BLDG NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM ANALYZER FIBER 107 F4 INTERCONNECT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM ANALYZER FIBER 108 F5 INTERCONNECT-DEMOLITION NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM ANALYZER FIBER 109 F6 INTERCONNECT 110 F7 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FIBER CABLE SCHEDULES- DEMOLITION 111 F8 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FIBER CABLE SCHEDULES 112 F9 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM FILTER BUILDING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM FILTER OFFICE -OFFICE 113 F10 RACK NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM FILTER GALLERY-GALLERY 114 F11 RACK NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM CHEMICAL BUILDING - RACK 115 F12 2 116 F13 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS DIAGRAM H.S. #1 PCR BUILDING List of Drawings 000102-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 7/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 117 31-PID-0105 DEMO PLANT DRAINAGE SYSTEM PLAN - DEMOLITION 118 31-PID-0105 PLANT DRAINAGE SYSTEM PLAN 119 31-PID-0604 DEMO CHLORINE FEEDER SYSTEM P&ID - DEMOLITION 120 31-PID-0604 CHLORINE FEEDER SYSTEM P&ID 121 31-PID-1401 DEMO RETURN WASH WATER HOLDING TANK P&ID - DEMOLITION 122 31-PID-1401 RETURN WASH WATER HOLDING TANK P&ID 123 31-PID-1501 DEMO WASH WATER SUPPLY STATION P&ID - DEMOLITION 124 31-PID-1501 WASH WATER SUPPLY STATION P&ID 125 31-PID-1703 SODIUM HYDROXIDE FEED SYSTEM P&ID 126 31-PID-1705 DEMO EAST LAS STORAGE & FEED SYSTEM P&ID - DEMOLITION 127 31-PID-1705 EAST LAS STORAGE & FEED SYSTEM P&ID 128 31-PID-1706 FLUORIDE STORAGE & FEED SYSTEM P&ID 129 31-PID-1801 DEMO CLEARWELL 1 P&ID - DEMOLITION 130 31-PID-1801 CLEARWELL 1 P&ID 131 31-PID-1802 DEMO HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 PUMPS 1-4 P&ID - DEMOLITION 132 31-PID-1802 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 PUMPS 1-4 P&ID 133 31-PID-1803 DEMO HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 PUMPS 5-7 P&ID - DEMOLITION 134 31-PID-1803 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 PUMPS 5-7 P&ID 135 31-PID-1804 DEMO HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 FLOW METER P&ID - DEMOLITION 136 31-PID-1804 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 1 FLOW METER P&ID 137 31-PID-1901 DEMO CLEARWELL 2 P&ID - DEMOLITION 138 31-PID-1901 CLEARWELL 2 P&ID 139 31-PID-1902 DEMO HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 2 PUMPS 8&9 P&ID - DEMOLITION 140 31-PID-1902 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 2 PUMPS 8&9 P&ID 141 31-PID-1903 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 2 PUMPS 10& 11 P&ID 142 31-PID-2001 CLEARWELL 3 P&ID 143 31-PID-2002 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 12 & 13 P&ID 144 31-PID-2003 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 14& 15 P&ID 145 31-PID-2004 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 16& 17 P&ID 146 31-PID-2005 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 FUTURE PUMP#18 &ANALYZER SHED P&ID END OF SECTION List of Drawings 000102-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 7/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 0 °b�nnwo�Ay"v 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on April 25,2023, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and CSA Construction,Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant(ONSWTP) Clearwell No.3 City Proiect No. E18131A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Ardurra(Grady S.Atkinson, P.E.) 801 Navigation, Suite 300 Corpus Christi,Tx,78408 gatkinson@ardurra.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: City of Corpus Christi- Engineering Services(Brett Van Hazel, PMP) 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi,TX 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 970 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 1000 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $1,500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 36,454,000 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 005223-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 005223-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications,forms, and documents (including appendices) listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITYPF CORbPUS CHRISTI Qocusigned by: ocuwgned y: 5/18/2023 5/18/2023 c8 a r--- Rebecca HuertaM1 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2023-062 AUTHORIZED 4/25/2023 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL DocuSigned by: r � 5/18/2023 RH/SB Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR CSA Con eMflnet-yt. (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 2314 McAllister Road Financial Officer Address Houston,Texas 770 City State Zip (713) 686-8868 Phone Fax rmayfield@csaconstruction.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 No.3 RE-BID Report Created On:3/3/2023 9:05:05 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A-CLEARWELL NO. 3 IMPROVEMENTS(per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR $36,454,000.00 PAYMENT) Total $36,454,000.00 Part A-CLEARWELL NO.3 IMPROVEMENTS(per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization(Maximum of 5%of Part A LS 1 $1,600,000.00 $1,600,000.00 Contract Price) A2 Bonds and Insurance(Maximum LS 1 $300,000.00 $300,000.00 Allowance of 2%) A3 Clearwell No.3 Tank Construction LS 1 $24,978,791.00 $24,978,791.00 A4 Electrical, Instrumentation,and SCADA LS 1 $1,500,000.00 $1,500,000.00 Integration A5 72-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings,&Valves LF 404 $4,000.00 $1,616,000.00 A6 60-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings,&Valves LF 343 $3,600.00 $1,234,800.00 A7 48-inch Waterline Pipe and Fittings LF 76 $2,500.00 $190,000.00 A8 12-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings,&Valves LF 123 $375.00 $46,125.00 A9 60-inch Connection to Existing 72-inch EA 1 $550,000.00 $550,000.00 Pipe(72-inch Linestop and 72"x60"Tee) A10 60-inch Double Linestop w/ Bypass for EA 1 $450,000.00 $450,000.00 Tie-in to Plant 2 Existing 60"Tee All Pavement Repair for 60-inch Waterline SY 40 $60.00 $2,400.00 Crossing Al2 Chemical Injection Vaults/Sample LS 1 $350,000.00 $350,000.00 Manholes A13 Chemical Injection Piping&Equipment LS 1 $800,000.00 $800,000.00 A14 Pavement Excavation and Removal SY 2442 $30.00 $73,260.00 A15 7"Concrete Pavement SY 2442 $130.00 $317,460.00 A16 8"Crushed Limestone Flexible Base(TY SY 2442 $45.00 $109,890.00 A,GR. 1-2) A17 6"Curb&Gutter LF 1490 $15.00 $22,350.00 A18 Curb Inlet EA 6 $2,400.00 $14,400.00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 No.3 RE-BID Report Created On:3/3/2023 9:05:05 PM A19 18-inch Stormwater Reinforced LF 174 $240.00 $41,760.00 Concrete Pipe A20 4"Stormwater Drain Line(SDR 26 PVC) LF 80 $60.00 $4,800.00 A21 2"Stormwater Force Main(Schedule 80 LF 153 $50.00 $7,650.00 PVC) A22 Stormwater Tie-ins EA 4 $1,000.00 $4,000.00 A23 Stormwater Packaged Lift Station EA 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 A24 Erosion Control and Drainage Concrete LS 1 $500,000.00 $500,000.00 Structures A25 Trench Safety for Stormwater Pipe LF 407 $2.00 $814.00 A26 Trench Safety for Stormwater Manhole EA 4 $200.00 $800.00 Tie-in A27 Pavement Repair for Stormwater Pipe SY 2 $200.00 $400.00 Crossing A28 6"Wastewater Pipe LF 80 $70.00 $5,600.00 A29 6"Tie-in to Existing Wastewater EA 1 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 Manhole A30 6"Wastewater Cleanout EA 1 $1,500.00 $1,500.00 A31 Trench Safety for Wastewater Line LF 80 $2.00 $160.00 A32 Trench Safety for Wastewater Manhole EA 1 $200.00 $200.00 Tie-in A33 Pavement Repair for Wastewater Pipe SY 7 $200.00 $1,400.00 Crossing A34 CW 1 &HS 1 Concrete Structure LS 1 $380,000.00 $380,000.00 Demolition/Removal A35 48-inch Linestop and Blind Flange LS 1 $180,000.00 $180,000.00 A36 Abandoned and Grout Fill Existing LF 152 $220.00 $33,440.00 Drainlines from CW1/HS1 Structure A37 Clearwell 2 Baffling Retrofit LS 1 $700,000.00 $700,000.00 A38 Allowance for Unanticipated LS 1 $400,000.00 $400,000.00 Improvements A39 Storm Water Pollution Prevention LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 Subtotal:$36,454,000.00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 No.3 RE-BID Report Created On:3/3/2023 9:05:05 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE RFB 4578 Addendum No. 1 03/03/2023 13:45:54 PM RFB 4578 Addendum No 2 03/03/2023 13:45:55 PM DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 No.3 RE-BID Report Created On:3/3/2023 9:05:05 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans RFB 4578 Drawings 1/24/2023 1:19:28 PM Invitation To Bid RFB 4578 Invitation to Bid and 1/24/2023 1:19:15 PM Specifications Other Project 18131 A Clearwell 3 Geotech 2/23/2023 11:03:32 AM Report Addenda RFB 4578 Addendum No. 1 2/21/2023 5:23:43 PM Addenda RFB 4578 Addendum No 2 2/23/2023 11:02:02 AM DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 00 30 01 BID Project Name: Stevens Water Treatment Plant dear el( No.3 Project Number: 18131 r. City of Corpus Christi Designer: Arclurra Group, Inc. By its signaturebelow, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions id Acknowledgement,acknowledges r c i i of all Addenda to the Bidand agrees,if thisi is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordancei t ct Documents for the Bidrice. Bidder: CSA Constructim Inc. cell legal name of Bidder) Signature: " (signature of person with authority to blvd the Bidder) Name: Richard Mayfield (printed name of persona signing Bid Form) Title: President (title of person signing Bid Form) M a "��" �rtadartarrnp Attest: Geor�e Crai Secreta (signature) ; ®® a'����� State of Residency: Texas " Federal Tx ID No. 74-2041560 t' a Address for Notices: 2314 McAllister Road r,�� Houston,Texas 77092 ®��®� �����`% Phone: 713-686-8868 Email: bidmail( csaconstruction.com Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 3 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3-Project No. 18131A Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology.....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article 2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site.............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 007200- 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 007200-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 007200-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 007200-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 007200-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation.......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards ................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations.....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 007200-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 007200-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees.................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi(City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; C. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200- 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; C. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act,42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and C. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 007200- 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or C. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition -The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 007200- 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; C. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed -A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner -The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 007200- 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents -A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor -An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion -The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 007200- 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day" mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 007200- 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 007200- 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; C. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; C. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict,error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 007200- 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 007200-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLES—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 007200-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 007200-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 007200-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or C. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 007200-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 007200-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 007200-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 007200-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 007200-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 007200-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 007200-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 007200-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 007200-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds"for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 007200-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 007200-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 007200-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 007200-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 007200-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 007200-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 007200-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 007200-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 007200-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 007200-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or C. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 007200-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 007200-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occu r. General Conditions 007200-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 007200-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 007200-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 007200-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or C. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 007200-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. C. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 007200-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 007200-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 007200-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Anytime extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim(unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 007200-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 007200-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b) — Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or C. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 007200-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits,which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and C. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 007200-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 007200-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 007200-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 007200-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 007200-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 007200-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 007200-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 007200-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; C. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 007200-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 007200-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, C. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 007200-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 007200-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 007200-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 007200-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 007200-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 007200-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 007200-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 forthis part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 007200-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 007200-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, C. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 007200-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 007200-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 007200-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees' vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 007200-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles,guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 007200-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines,grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 007200-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 007200-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 007200-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 007200-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. C. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. C. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 007200-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 007200-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor"form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 007200-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 007200-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implementthe Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 007200-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 007200-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 007200-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 007200-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 007200-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 007200-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. C. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 007200- 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 007200- 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 007200- 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 007200- 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 007200- 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Article 25 for approval of product Certified Test Report Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 007200- 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 007200- 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers,and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 007200- 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges, materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 007200- 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 007200- 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal"products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 007200- 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 007200- 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. C. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. C. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 007200- 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. C. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 007200- 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 007200- 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 007200- 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 007200- 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement, model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges, materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal"products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 007200- 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel - Not Required." No further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 007200- 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 007200- 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and C. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.05 Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 007200- 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200- 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 007200- 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 007200- 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; C. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 007200- 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract, then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 007200- 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 007200- 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 007200- 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demo bilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 007200- 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 007200- 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Ardurra Hazen & Sawyer Bath Engineering Group Terracon Consultants, Inc B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. All project improvements except as listed in Section SC-1.01.13.2. b. Phases of work may be accepted under partial utilization provisions of the General Conditions. Par 17.12 and supporting references in document. 2. Only the following items not yet complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. Minor grading, and b. Project revegetation C. Demobilization ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when Supplementary Conditions 007300- 1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 135 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Report prepared by Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon Consultants Project Number—CD195015) on January 26, 2021 with supplemental letter issued on July 28, 2021-The Contractor may rely on the Technical Data included in the geotechnical report and supplemental letter that include but is not limited to the following: 1) Field Exploration Data 2) Subsurface Conditions 3) Boring Logs Data 4) Recommendations for Design and Construction 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: "None" Supplementary Conditions 007300-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: a. Asbestos NESHAP & Lead Survey Report- Revision 2- November 24, 2020 by Turnstone EHS. The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data in using this document: 1) Lead and asbestos presence in existing structures 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to known Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site include the following: None ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 6. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage X Required ❑ Not Required Supplementary Conditions 007300-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges 0 Required ❑ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required 0 Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. Monday through Friday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 25 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES Note to Specifier: Davis-Bacon Wage Rates can be found at http://www.wdol.gov/dba.aspx. Use the Wage Rates for Nueces County. Select the WD Determination that is appropriate for the Project Copy the Wage Rate directly from the DOL website to this Section or insert the Owner-determined wage rate schedule as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No Supplementary Conditions 007300-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) "General Decision Number: TX20230021 01/06/2023 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20220021 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658 . Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5 . 1 (a) (2) - (60) . lIf the contract is entered 1 . Executive Order 14026 1 linto on or after January 30, 1 generally applies to the 1 12022, or the contract is 1 contract. 1 lrenewed or extended (e.g. , an 1 . The contractor must pay 1 loption is exercised) on or 1 all covered workers at 1 lafter January 30, 2022 : 1 least $16. 20 per hour (or I I the applicable wage rate I I listed on this wage I Supplementary Conditions 007300- 5 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 determination, if it is 1 higher) for all hours 1 spent performing on the 1 contract in 2023 . 1 I I I 11f the contract was awarded onl . Executive Order 13658 1 for between January 1, 2015 andl generally applies to the 1 1January 29, 2022, and the I contract. 1 ) contract is not renewed or 1 . The contractor must pay alll lextended on or after January 1 covered workers at least 1 130, 2022 : 1 $12 . 15 per hour (or the 1 I I applicable wage rate listed ) I I on this wage determination, ) I I if it is higher) for all I I I hours spent performing on I I I that contract in 2023. 1 1 1 1 The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http: //www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts . Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2023 SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Supplementary Conditions 007300-6 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 9. 05 ** Concrete Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 7 .56 ** ELECTRICIAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 13.37 ** 2 .58 Laborers: Common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 7 .25 ** Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 7 . 68 ** Power equipment operators: Backhoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 9.21 ** Motor Grader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8 .72 ** ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($16.20) or 13658 ($12 . 15) . Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017 . If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Supplementary Conditions 007300-7 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https: //www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5 . 5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type (s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local) , a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate) . Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were Supplementary Conditions 007300-8 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014 . PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e. , Plumbers Local 0198 . The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014 . Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates . Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014 . SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates . LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Supplementary Conditions 007300-9 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 1000 of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014 . UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1 . ) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be. * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for Supplementary Conditions 007300- 10 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2 . ) and 3 . ) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2 . ) If the answer to the question in 1. ) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1. 8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party' s position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc. ) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3 . ) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor Supplementary Conditions 007300- 11 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4 . ) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Ardurra (361) 883-1984 Grady Atkinson, P.E XXX-XXX-XXXX Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste& Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centuryl-ink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Supplementary Conditions 007300- 12 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/ MBD/ DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 'REFER TO SECTION 0133 01—SUBMITTAL REGISTER' SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer at a rate of$300/hr. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description As-built information on all construction improvements SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 007300- 13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment,tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Base Bid a. New baffled 10 Million Gallon (MG) Clearwell b. Baffling for an existing Clearwell No.2 C. Sample pumps, chemical injection and analyzers d. Electrical, Instrumentation &Control Systems e. 48-inch, 60-inch and 72-inch Yard Piping f. Access Road Improvements g. Pavement and Drainage Rehabilitation h. Utility and Grading Improvements 2. Additive Alternates: NONE 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. ONSWTP Filter Improvements. 2. Others may be identified at the pre-bid meeting B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. Summary of Work 011100-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 011100-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. C. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 0172 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. C. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. C. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 012310- 1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. C. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES: NONE 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Bid Item A2— Bonds and Insurance 1. A maximum of 2%of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. Alternates and Allowances 012310-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Bid Item A38—Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements 1. The sum of $400,000.00 to be used for the purchase of Unanticipated Site & Utility Improvements. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 012310-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%of Part A Contract Price): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; C. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01- 1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allowance of 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item A3—Clearwell No. 3 Tank Construction 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the 10MG Clearwell No. 3 tank structure and appurtenances as described in the contract documents and shown on the plans. Bid item includes erecting, installing, and painting of a 10MG Clearwell No. 3 Tank including site clearing, site preparation, removal/hauling out of unusable soils, hauling in and installation of select fill and geogrid necessary underneath foundation, foundation, baffling, ladders, overflow piping, inlet/outlet/drain piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances as per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. D. Bid Item A4—Electrical, Instrumentation, and SCADA Integration 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation and successful testing and commissioning of all electrical, instrumentation and SCADA integration services for all improvements shown on plans and specifications. This includes but is not limited to electrical and instrumentation work for Clearwell No. 3, sample pumps, analyzer buildings, injection and sample locations. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. E. Bid Item A5-72-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings, &Valves 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install 72" waterline as described in the contract documents and shown on the plans. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, fittings, valves, and supports to complete installation of the 72" waterline per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. Bid Item A6-60-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings, &Valves 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install 60" waterline as described in the contract documents and shown on the plans. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, fittings, valves, and supports to complete installation of the 60" waterline per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. G. Bid Item A7—48-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings &Valve 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install 48" waterline as described in the contract documents and shown on the plans. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, fittings, valves, and supports to complete installation of the 48" waterline per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. H. Bid Item A8—12-inch Waterline Pipe, Fittings, &Valves 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install 12" waterline as described in the contract documents and shown on the plans. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, fittings, valves, and supports to complete installation of the 12" waterline per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. I. Bid Item A9-60-inch Connection to Existing 72-inch Pipe(72-inch Linestop and 72"x60"Tee) 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to perform a linestop and install a tie-in connection (72"x60" tee) to the existing 72" waterline. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, and testing to complete installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. J. Bid Item A10—60-inch Double Linestop w/ Bypass for Tie-in to Plant 2 Existing 60"Tee 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to perform a double linestop with bypass and install a tie-in connection to Plant 2 existing 60" waterline. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, and testing to complete installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. K. Bid Item A11—Pavement Repair for 60-inch Waterline Crossing 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the repair of existing pavement affected by the 60-inch Waterline Crossing construction activities per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. Measurement shall include all subgrade compaction, backfill, base material, prime coat, hot mix asphaltic concrete and other incidentals necessary to repair pavement to pre- construction conditions per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 L. Bid Item Al2—Chemical Injection Vaults/Sample Manholes 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation and successful testing and commissioning of the chemical injection vaults/sample manholes per the plans and specifications. Item shall include all necessary excavation, shoring and excavation safety, dewatering, backfill, concrete, testing, and appurtenances to complete installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. M. Bid Item A13—Chemical Injection Piping & Equipment 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation and successful testing and commissioning of all chemical injection piping and equipment. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, injection equipment, concrete trenching, piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to complete installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. N. Bid Item A14—Pavement Excavation and Removal 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the excavation and removal of existing pavement within the limits of the new pavement construction per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. O. Bid Item A15—7" Concrete Pavement 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of 7" concrete pavement per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. P. Bid Item A16—8" Crushed Limestone Flexible Base (Ty A, GR. 1-2) 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the existing subgrade preparation and installation of the crushed limestone flexible base required as per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. Q. Bid Item A17—6" Curb&Gutter 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install 6" curb &gutter required as per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. R. Bid Item A18—Curb Inlet 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install curb inlets required per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 excavation, shoring and excavation safety, backfill, dewatering, testing, and appurtenances to complete installation of the curb inlet in accordance to the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. S. Bid Item A19—18-inch Stormwater Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 18" stormwater reinforced concrete pipe as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the 18" stormwater reinforced concrete pipe. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. T. Bid Item A20-4" Stormwater Drain Line (SDR 26 PVC) 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 4"stormwater drain line as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the stormwater drain line. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. U. Bid Item A21—2" Stormwater Force Main (Schedule 80 PVC) 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 2" stormwater force main as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the stormwater force main. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. V. Bid Item A22—Stormwater Tie-ins 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor,equipment,and supervision necessary for completing the stormwater tie-in connections to existing stormwater manholes. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the stormwater tie-in connection per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. W. Bid Item A23—Stormwater Packaged Lift Station 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor,equipment,and supervision necessary to complete the installation and successful testing and commissioning of stormwater packaged lift station per the plans and specifications. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the lift station per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. X. Bid Item A24—Erosion Control and Drainage Concrete Structures Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of concrete structures necessary for erosion control and drainage improvements such as but not limited to the concrete rip rap and valley gutters as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary grading, backfill, subgrade prep, testing, and appurtenances to complete the installation of the erosion control and drainage concrete structures per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. Y. Bid Item A25—Trench Safety for Stormwater Pipe 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for all stormwater pipe installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. Z. Bid Item A26—Trench Safety for Stormwater Manhole Tie-in 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for all stormwater manhole tie- ins per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. AA. Bid Item A27—Pavement Repair for Stormwater Pipe Crossing 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the repair of existing pavement affected by construction activities for the stormwater pipe crossing per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. Measurement shall include all subgrade compaction, backfill, base material, prime coat, hot mix asphaltic concrete and other incidentals necessary to repair pavement to pre- construction conditions per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. BB. Bid Item A28—6" Wastewater Pipe 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the 6"wastewater line as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the wastewater line. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. CC. Bid Item A29—6"Tie-in to Existing Wastewater Manhole 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor,equipment,and supervision necessary for installing a wastewater tie-in connection to an existing manhole. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the wastewater tie-in connection per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 DD. Bid Item A30—6" Wastewater Cleanout 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a 6" wastewater cleanout as per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill, dewatering, testing, and fittings to complete installation of the wastewater cleanout. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each basis. EE. Bid Item 31—Trench Safety for Wastewater Line 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the wastewater line installation per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. FF. Bid Item A32—Trench Safety for Wastewater Manhole Tie-in 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for all wastewater manhole tie- ins per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per each. GG. Bid Item A33—Pavement Repair for Wastewater Pipe Crossing 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the repair of existing pavement affected by construction activities for the wastewater pipe crossing per the contract documents. Item shall also include all necessary traffic control to complete the work per the contract documents. Measurement shall include all subgrade compaction, backfill, base material, prime coat, hot mix asphaltic concrete and other incidentals necessary to repair pavement to pre- construction conditions per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per square yard basis. HH. Bid Item A34 — CW 1 & HS 1 Concrete Structure Demolition/Removal (Includes Demo of Electrical) 1. This item consists of all supervision, equipment, tools, labor, and materials to perform all demolition (all disciplines: site/civil, structural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and instrumentation/controls) work for Clearwell No. 1 and High Service No. 1 and misc. components. This item includes all work specified and/or shown on the contract documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that is not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. II. Bid Item A35-48-inch Linestop and Blind Flange 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to perform a linestop and install a blind flange on an existing 48"waterline per the contract documents. Item shall include all necessary backfill,dewatering,and testing to complete installation per the contract documents. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. JJ. Bid Item A36—Abandon and Grout Fill Existing Drainlines from CW1/HSI Structure 1. Measurement shall include all material, labor, equipment, and supervision necessary to abandon-in-place/fill the annular space of the existing drainlines from Clearwell No. 1 and High Service No. 1 with grout per the contract documents. 2. Measuring for payment is on a per linear foot basis. KK. Bid Item A37—CW 2 Baffling Retrofit 1. This item consists of all supervision, equipment,tools, labor, and materials to complete installation of baffling in Clearwell 2 (all disciplines: site/civil, structural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and instrumentation/controls).This item includes all work specified and/or shown on the contract documents, and all other items necessary to complete the work that are not specifically included in other bid items. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment will be based on the earned value of Work completed and as defined in specifications. LL. Bid Item A38—Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements 1. Payment will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning improvements as specified by the OAR. MM.Bid Item A39—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50% of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50% completion has occurred, minus retainage. NN. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-8 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 0133 01 Submittal Register 013500 Plan of Action 1.02 ✓ 015700 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP)and 1.01 ✓ ✓ Erosion Control Plan 015700 Erosion Control Plan 1.01 ✓ ✓ 0175 00-T Start-up Plan 1.03 ✓ ✓ 0178 23-T O&M Manuals 1.2 ✓ ✓ 02 40 00-T Demolition Plan,schedule,disposal means and location 1.2 ✓ ✓ 03 10 00-T Concrete Forming and Accessories 1.5 ✓ ✓ 03 20 00-T Design data for manufactured products and admixtures 1.5 ✓ ✓ etc. 03 30 00-T Concrete Reinforcing 1.3 ✓ ✓ 03 60 00-T Design data for manufactured products and admixtures 1.5 ✓ ✓ etc. 09 9100-T Coatings and color charts 1.3 ✓ ✓ 09 9110-T Surface Preparation and Painting 2.01 ✓ ✓ 09 96 00-T Protective Coatings ✓ ✓ ✓ 13 00 00-T Wire or Strand Wound,Prestressed Concrete Tank 1.03 ✓ ✓ 13 3100-T Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 1.03 ✓ ✓ 26 05 60-T Low Voltage Electric Motors 1.03 ✓ ✓ 33 05 05.30-T Piping 1.04 ✓ ✓ ✓ 33 05 05.40-T Piping Hydrostatic Test Records 1.06 ✓ 33 05 05.50-T Piping Service Test Records 1.07 ✓ 33 05 05.60-T Piping Service Pneumatic Testing 1.07 ✓ 331116-T Waterlines 1.03 ✓ ✓ 33 1116.13-T DIP Pipe&Fittings 1.03 ✓ ✓ 33 1116.23-T Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe 1.03 ✓ ✓ 33 1116.33-T Steel Pipe,Fittings,and Specials 1.04 ✓ ✓ 33 12 16-T Butterfly Valves 1.04 ✓ ✓ 33 13 00-T Waterline Disinfection Test Plans and Report 1.03 ✓ ✓ 40 05 07-T Pipe Supports 1.03 ✓ ✓ 40 46 22-T FRP Enclosures 1.04 ✓ ✓ Appendix 1-City of Corpus ONSWTP Electrical Fluoride Analyzers ✓ ✓ Specification& Detail Drawings 43 20 00-T Pumps 1.02 ✓ ✓ 43 23 17.2-T Sample Pumps 1.02 ✓ ✓ 46 00 00-T Equipment General 1.02 ✓ ✓ 46 4142-T Chemical Injection Assemblies 1.03 ✓ ✓ Sheet C12 Packaged Pump Station ✓ ✓ Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS A. Please note that the ONSWTP is a critical provider of potable water to the City of Corpus Christi,TX and is operating under the terms of a drinking water permit issued by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. This permit, which is posted at the ONSWTP for review, specifies the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of finished water. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the finished water quality established by the permit. The Contractor shall bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for water quality violations caused by actions of the Contractor. B. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the City of Corpus Christi Drinking Water Operations and the OAR throughout construction to maintain the required flow range and quality from ONSWTP at all times. The ONSWTP required flow range to be maintained during specific time frames of the year are as follows: ONSWTP REQUIRED FLOW RANGE TIME FRAME MINIMUM FLOW MAXIMUM FLOW November 1 through March 45 MGD 85 MGD 31 (all years) April 1 through October 31 50 MGD 130 MGD (all years) C. The Contractor shall schedule the Work in accordance with the sequence defined in the contract documents so that the facility is maintained in continuous operation. All processes shall be maintained in continuous operation during the construction period. D. Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer of planned shutdowns in writing at least 30 days in advance of any requested planned outage, unless otherwise noted.The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdown request depending upon required treatment capacity at the time. In addition,the Contractor's overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown dates and duration. The time of shutdown will be decided by the City as detailed in the contract documents. E. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner and Engineer a detailed tie-in plan for every interconnection with an existing facility, component, system, structure, panel, pipe ducts and conduits associated with the project. Every tie-in plan and its approval shall be identified as specific activities on the Contractor's overall construction schedule. F. Tie-ins and shutdowns shall not begin until all required materials are on site and ready for installation. Each tie-in and shutdown shall commence at a time approved by the Owner, and the Contractor shall proceed with the Work continuously, start to finish, until the Work is completed, and normal operation is restored. Tie-ins shall be fully coordinated with the Owner at least 72 hours before the scheduled shutdown. The time of day, schedule and duration of short-term shutdowns shall be during normal City work hours. (We may need to do it overnight in some cases, like 60-inch Tie-in) Special Procedures 013500-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. Any temporary work, facilities, protection of existing structures, piping, blind flanges, valves, equipment, etc. that may be required to maintain continuous and dependable plant operation shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. H. The Owner shall have the authority to order Work stopped, that will, in the Owner's opinion unreasonably result in interrupting the necessary plant operations. If the Contractor has shut down operations, but will not have sufficient time to complete work in the given time restrictions, the Owner or Engineer may direct the Contractor to stop tie-ins or demolition work and return the system to service. I. If the Contractor impairs plant performance or operation as a result of not complying with specified construction sequence, then the Contractor shall immediately make all repairs or replacements and do all work necessary to restore the plant operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. Such work shall progress continuously to completion on a 24-hours per day, seven days per week basis. J. The Contractor shall provide the services of emergency repair crews on call 24 hours per day during scheduled tie-ins and scheduled shutdowns until the system is returned to full service. K. An unobstructed traffic route on the site access driveway and parking area shall be maintained at all times for the Owner's operations personnel and maintenance equipment. A limited amount of parking space for personal vehicles of construction personnel is available at the site.The Contractor's use of this parking is to be coordinated with the Owner's requirements. If additional parking is required,the Contractor shall be responsible for providing access to and for preparing and maintaining this additional parking area. L. Owner's personnel shall have access to all areas that remain in operation throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall locate stored material, dispose of construction debris and trash, provide temporary walkways, provide temporary lighting, and other such work as directed by the Engineer and Owner to maintain personnel access to areas in operation. Access and adequate parking areas for Owner's personnel must be maintained throughout construction. M. Electric power, lighting service and communications systems shall be maintained in uninterrupted operation in all areas that remain in operation. N. Building ventilating if needed for the existing facilities shall be in service for the entire construction period. Additional ventilation shall be provided by the Contractor as required to maintain facilities under construction adequately vented. O. The Contractor shall be responsible for any associated permitting with discharges to the storm sewer. The Owner shall not be responsible for disposal of the drainage water or necessary permits related to the stormwater discharge. No uncontrolled spillage of a pipe or conduit shall be permitted. P. The Contractor shall unload equipment and materials in the designated staging area only. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all equipment and materials within 72- hour notice in the event of a weather event or as requested by the Owner. Q. The Contractor is to form around line stop sleeve and pour thrust blocks as required. It's is the Contractor's responsibility to design the thrust blocks. Special Procedures 013500-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: The following construction activities in sequence are proposed to accomplish the improvement work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. It should be noted that the construction sequence serves as an outline to the Contractor on how the construction of work shall be sequenced in compliance with the constraints of maintaining plant operation. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to develop a detailed construction plan per sequence below that outlines the specific details of proposed construction activities and submit to the City and Engineer for review and approval. Please refer to Sheets G8-G12 for construction sequence phasing as described in this section. The following acronyms are being used in the description below: • CW—Clearwell • HS—High Service Pump Station I. Phase 1: Clearwell No.3 Construction & Misc. Upgrades (Outlined in Sheet G8) 1. Construction of CW 3 structure will have minimal impacts on plant operations; therefore, this work shall be completed first. Existing CW1 and CW2 shall remain in service during the Phase 1 construction as shown on sequencing plans. 2. Construct new 72" piping including installation, pressure testing and disinfection.Tie-ins to the existing piping shall be coordinated with the City Staff in advance as defined in Section 1.01 of this specification. 3. The Contractor shall bypass the 60" section under consideration using line stops to isolate the section of pipe around the existing 60" blind flange.This will be followed by installation of the proposed 60" butterfly valve. At no time,filtered water flow from Plant-2 filters to the clearwell via the filtered water junction box shall be interrupted. 4. The Contractor shall close the new 60" butterfly valve and remove line-stops. 5. The Contractor shall construct 60"tie-in to the existing 60" stub-out and connection to existing 72" stub-out. 6. Construct of South Storm Water Improvements (stations as shown on plans) including new storm water inlets and new 18" stormwater lines.All demolition activities for removing the existing curb and gutter in the south area as shown on the plans shall also be completed alongside. An uninterrupted access to for an 18-wheeler to the existing caustic storage facility shall be maintained at all times. 7. Post successful testing/commissioning of Plant 2 60" and south stormwater improvements the contractor shall construct the south access roads. Special Procedures 013500-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. Construct North Storm Water Improvements including new storm water inlets and new 18" stormwater lines upgrades as shown on plans (stations as shown on plans).All demolition activities for removing the existing curb and gutter in the north area as shown on the plans shall also be completed alongside. An uninterrupted access for an 18-wheeler to the existing caustic storage facility shall be maintained at all times. 9. Post successful testing/commissioning of north storm water improvements, the contractor shall construct the north access roads. 10. Installation of new sample pumps, required tapping and piping improvements upstream of HS#2 and HS#3 shall be completed as shown on plans. No shut-downs will be allowed for this activity. Start-up and commissioning of these pumps will be carried out at the beginning of Phase 3 as described below. 11. The Contractor shall construct concrete trenches, stormwater lift station, force-main and drain lines. 12. Installation of new sample pumps required tapping and injection piping improvements upstream at location 2A and 2B shall be completed as shown on plans. No piping shut- downs will be allowed for installation of taps at location 2A. 13. Installation of new injection piping improvements at location 113 shall be completed as shown on plans. No shut-downs will be allowed for this activity. 14. Complete construction of concrete pad for relocating analyzer building near Wash-water pump station.Also, install the 6" drain line from the analyzer building to the existing manhole as shown on plans. 15. The Contractor and Owner's team shall conduct a substantial completion walkthrough to ensure Phase 1 components are substantially complete per stipulations of the Contract.The Contractor is obligated to substantially complete components under Phase 1 before commencing any work under the next phases. II. Phase 2: Clearwell No.2 Baffling Upgrades (Outlined in Sheet G9) 1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to have the ONSWTP reroute all plant flows through CW 3 as shown on sequencing sheets for Phase 2 by closing inlet and outlet gates at CW 2. 2. Fabric baffles shall be installed and tested in CW 2 as per plans and specifications.This work shall be completed within ten weeks from its commencement during low-demand months (November—January only). 3. The Contractor and Owner's team shall conduct a substantial completion walkthrough to ensure Phase 2 components are substantially complete per stipulations of the Contract.The Contractor is obligated to substantially complete components under Phase 2 before commencing any work under the next phases. Special Procedures 013500-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 III. Phase 3: 72" x 60" Connection and Misc. Upgrades (Outlined in Sheet G10) 1. The Contractor shall coordinate with ONSWTP to have the Owner open gates at CW2 to allow flows through both Clearwell No.2 and Clearwell No.3. 2. The sample pumps upstream (suction side) of HS 2 and HS 3 installed shall be commissioned as per plans and specifications.The sample lines on the discharge side of HS 2 and HS 3 shall be closed but shall remain in place for operations in future. 3. Relocate Analyzer building near Wash water Pump Station.The Contractor shall then coordinate with ONSWTP for closing all the gates in the Filtered Water Junction Box. 4. The Contractor shall install a 72" line-stop downstream of the proposed 72" X 60"Tee. 5. The Contractor shall then complete the construction of proposed 72" x 60"tie-in and install the proposed 60" butterfly valve as shown in closed position and remove the line-stop if desired. 6. The Contractor shall install injection manholes and sample taps at 113 and 113 per details shown on mechanical sheets. 7. The Contractor shall remove the 72" line-stop. 8. The Contractor and Owner's team shall conduct a substantial completion walkthrough to ensure Phase 3 components are substantially complete per stipulations of the Contract.The Contractor is obligated to substantially complete components under Phase 3 before commencing any work under the next phases. IV. Phase 4: Demolition of CW1 and Misc. Upgrades (Outlined in Sheet G11) 1. The Contractor shall coordinate with ONSWTP to close 48" valves on pipes going to CW1 and open gate valves in the filtered water junction box. 2. The Contractor shall demolish the CW 1 and HS 1 structures as per plans and specifications. 3. The Contractor shall construct the proposed extension for the two 48" waterlines and new 60" waterline connecting to the previously installed butterfly valve in Phase 3 shall be constructed. A butterfly valve at the in a closed position will also be installed. 4. The Contractor shall install injection manholes and sample taps at Manhole 1A as per details provided in the drawings along with the 60"waterline in activity 4 above. 5. 12" waterline improvements to replace the existing 48"waterline as shown on Sheet D2 and shall be carried out as shown on Sheet C12. Special Procedures 013500-5 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. The Contractor shall coordinate with ONSWTP to have the 48" and 60" valves open as shown on plans. 7. The Contractor and Owner's team shall conduct a substantial completion walkthrough to ensure Phase 3 components are substantially complete per stipulations of the Contract.The Contractor is obligated to substantially complete components under Phase 4 before commencing any work under the next phase. V. Phase 5: Start-up (Outlined in Sheet G12) 1. Post completion of punch-list items from the substantial completion for previous phases per contract documents, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and request consensus on final completion. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: NOT USED Description Time C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.03 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; Special Procedures 013500-6 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 1 month prior to beginning the Work. 1.04 CRITICAL OPERATIONS The Owner has identified critical operations in the previous sections and as below that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: NOT USED Max.Time Hours Operation Liquidated Critical Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) A. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. B. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. C. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. D. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to the plant operations and meeting the required permit. 2. Loss of operation can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. E. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: NOT USED 1.05 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The owner will be responsible for rerouting flows as per sequence specified in the contract documents. Special Procedures 013500-7 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 013500-8 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 015700-1 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI,or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 015700-2 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 015700-3 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 015700-4 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream, the CC Ship Channel. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER (NOT APPLICABLE) A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory Temporary Controls 015700-5 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 015700-6 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 021020 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project, and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground or 2 feet below base of subgrade, whichever is lower. Areas that underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six (6) inches of the soil. All material removed from the site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site clearing and stripping or clear right-of-way shall be measured by the acre. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for removing, handling, and disposing of objectionable matter from the site as indicated above. 021020 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 021040 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 021020 "Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six (6) inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay,but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 021040 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 021080 REMOVING ABANDONED STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall provide for the demolition,removal and disposal of abandoned structures or portions of abandoned structures, as noted on the drawings, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. METHOD OF REMOVAL Culverts or Sewers. Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select. Concrete Structures. Unwanted concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure outside of the limits designated for removal which is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored to its original condition at the Contractor's entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Portions of the abandoned structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor, shall be restored to its original condition entirely at the Contractor's expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete. Steel Structures. Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored if the members are to be salvaged and reused. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans, shall be removed by butting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method that will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss 021080 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions, and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-cutting will not be permitted, however, when the plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagrams furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling, and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. Timber Structures. Timber structures or timber portions of structures to be reused shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings,timber piles shall be either pulled or cut off at the point not less than five (5) feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor,unless otherwise specified. Brick or Stone Structures. Unwanted brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five(5)feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Salvage. All material such as pipe, timbers,railings, etc.,which the Engineer deems as salvable for reuse, and all salvaged structural steel, shall be delivered to a designated storage area. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites off of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic. Backfill. All excavations made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of abandoned structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the drawings. Backfill in accordance with applicable requirements of Sections 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and 022080 "Embankment". All open ends of abandoned pipe or other structures shall be filled or plugged as specified. That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, levee, or other structural feature shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing 021080 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 embankment, maximum 10" loose lifts unless otherwise specified. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise specified. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, or other structural feature shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude objectionable amount of settlement, maximum 10" loose lifts to minimum 95% Standard Proctor density unless otherwise specified. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the work governed by this specification shall not be measured for pay,but shall be subsidiary to the project. 021080 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 "Trench Safety for Excavations" of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water,the Contractor,prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height;and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum,for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer,and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 022020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing,pumping,or by installation of well-points,as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Abandoned Structures. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility,such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines, if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe (Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench, in layers not to exceed ten(10)inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans,but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe (Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one(1)foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten (10) inches in depth (loose measurement),wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95%Standard Proctor density,unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four(24) hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains, and reinforced concrete storm water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12) inches above top of the pipe)to three (3) feet below bottom of road base course, backfill shall be select material meeting the requirements of 022100 "Select Material". 022020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Asphalt Roadways The upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above, or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698)following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill,shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022021 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trenches, shaft excavations, structural excavations, and foundation beds in a stable condition, and controlling ground water conditions for tunnel excavations. B. Protection of excavations and trenches from surface runoff. C. Disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12-inch (304.8 mm) Drop. B. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). C. Federal Register 40 CFR (Vol. 55, No. 222)Part 122, EPA Administered Permit Programs (NPDES), Para.122.26(b)(14) Storm Water Discharge. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ground water control includes both dewatering and depressurization of water-bearing soil layers. 1. Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations, or into tunnels and shafts, and disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. The intent of dewatering is to increase the stability of tunnel excavations and excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations; reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures,piping and other installations. 2. Depressurization includes reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom or instability of tunnel excavations. B. Excavation drainage includes keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 022021 Page 1 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Surface drainage includes the use of temporary drainage ditches and dikes and installation of temporary culverts and sump pumps with discharge lines as required to protect the Work from any source of surface water. D. Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct subsurface investigations as needed to identify ground water conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of ground water control systems. B. Design a ground water control system, compatible with requirements of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1926 and City Standard Specification Section 022022 - Trench Safety for Excavations, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting: a) Excavations (including utility trenches); b) Tunnel excavation, face stability or seepage into tunnels. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C. Provide ground water control systems which may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D. Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E. Provide ditches, berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water away from excavations. F. Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 022021 Page 2 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures, and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells, or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H. Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. L Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J. Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use, if applicable. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ)regulations and Texas Water Well Drillers Association for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C. Prior to beginning construction activities, file Notice of Intent(NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the Texas Pollutant Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000, administered by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). The general permit falls under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code. D. Prepare submittal form and submit to TCEQ along with application fee. E. Upon completion of construction, file Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit with the TCEQ. F. Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of ground water and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. G. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. 022021 Page 3 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 H. Conduct sampling and testing of ground water and receiving waters as outlined in Article 3 below. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. B. Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, shall be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C. All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. D. Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 GROUND WATER CONTROL A. Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures, and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water bearing layers. B. Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C. Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the ground water control system design. Notify the City's Construction Inspector in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Revise the ground water control system design to reflect field changes. D. Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E. Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F. Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed 022021 Page 4 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the ground water control system design. G. Remove ground water control installations. I. Remove pumping system components and piping when ground water control is no longer required. 2. Remove piezometers and monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3. Grout abandoned well and piezometer holes. Fill piping that is not removed with cement- bentonite grout or cement-sand grout. H. During backfilling, dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. L Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical,provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J. Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced, such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means for draining the affected portion of underground system, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K. Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L. In unpaved areas, compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. In paved areas (or areas to receive paving), compact backfill to not less than 98 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A. For above ground piping in ground water control system, include a I2-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B. Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are pre-drained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for 022021 Page 5 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C. Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation (including trenching). D. Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations, but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is pre-drained by an existing system such that the criteria of the ground water control system design are satisfied. E. Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F. Provide additional ground water control installations, or change the methods, in the event that the installations according to the ground water control system design do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the ground water control system design and by these specifications. 3.3 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A. Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of a layer of crushed stone and filter fabric, and sump pumping in combination with sufficient wells for ground water control to maintain stable excavation and backfill conditions. 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A. Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area or seepage into tunnel is occurring. Keep system in good condition. B. Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C. Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D. Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3.5 MONITORING AND RECORDING A. Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 022021 Page 6 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when City Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Construction Inspector's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.6 SAMPLING, TESTING AND DISPOSAL OF GROUND WATER A. It is the intent that the Contractor discharge groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system in accordance with City Ordinance, Article XVI, Section 55-203, only if the groundwater is uncontaminated and the quality of the ground water is equal to or better than the quality of the receiving stream. B. The Contractor shall prevent ground water from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system prior to testing and authorization. Ground water from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, and disposed of by approved methods. C. Laboratory analysis of groundwater and receiving water quality is to be performed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense,prior to commencing discharge, and groundwater analysis shall be performed by the Contractor at a minimum of once per week. Contractor shall coordinate with the City Storm Water Department on all laboratory analysis. Laboratory analysis of groundwater shall also be performed at each new area of construction prior to discharge from that location. D. Sample containers, holding times,preservation methods, and analytical methods, shall either follow the requirements in 40 CFR Part 136 (as amended), or the latest edition of"Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater." Any laboratory providing analysis must be accredited or certified by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality according to Title 30 Texas Administrative Code (30 TAC) Chapters 25 for the matrices, methods, and parameters of analysis, if available, or be exempt according to 30 TAC §25.6. E. Analysis of the ground water discharge shall show it to be equal to or better than the quality of the first natural body of receiving water. This requires testing of both the receiving water and a sample of the ground water. All parts of this procedure shall be complete prior to any discharge of ground water to the storm water system. F. Steps to Determine Legitimate Discharge: 1. Identify the First Receiving Water. a) When the first body of water is a fresh water system (Nueces River or Oso Creek), the analysis typically fails because the local ground water will likely be too high in Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). In the case of a perched aquifer, the ground water may turn out fairly fresh, but local experience shows this to be unlikely. b) If the receiving water is a marine environment,proceed with Step 2 below to compare the ground water quality to receiving water quality. 022021 Page 7 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Compare Ground Water Discharge Quality to Receiving Water Quality. The following table, Ground Water Discharge Limits, indicates that the parameters to compare to the receiving water are Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) and Total Suspended Solids (TSS). If the ground water results are equal to or better than the receiving water, then the discharge may be authorized as long as the discharge does not exceed the other parameters which would indicate hydrocarbon contamination. Note that the receiving water only needs to be tested initially as a baseline and the ground water shall be tested weekly to ensure compliance. GROUND WATER DISCHARGE LIMITS Ground Receiving Water Water Monitoring Monitoring Maximum Parameter Frequency Frequency Limitation Total Dissolved Once Prior to Solids (TDS) Initial +Weekly Discharge <Receiving Water Total Suspended Once Prior to Solids (TSS) Initial +Weekly Discharge <Receiving Water Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Initial +Weekly 15 mg/L Total Lead Initial +Weekly 0.1 mg/L Benzene Initial +Weekly 0.005 mg/L Total BTEX Initial +Weekly 0.1 mg/L Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Initial +Monthly 0.01 m /L 3. Analyze Ground Water for Hydrocarbon Contamination. All other parameters listed on the Ground Water Discharge Limits table must be analyzed prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. If no limits are exceeded, ground water discharge to the storm water system may be authorized following notification to the MS4 operator(City of Corpus Christi) and all Pollution Prevention Measures for the project are in place. Analytical results shall be on-site or readily available for review by local, state or federal inspectors. Note that this step is frequently done simultaneously with Step 2 above to shorten analytical processing time. 4. Pollution Prevention Measures. A storm water pollution prevention plan or pollution control plan shall be developed and implemented prior to any ground water discharges to the storm water system. The plan's objectives are to limit erosion and scour of the storm water system, and minimize Total Suspended Solids (TSS) and other forms of contamination, and prevent any damage to the storm water system. Note that ground water discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the storm water system, the responsible party 022021 Page 8 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 shall remediate any damage to the storm water system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Storm Water Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. 5. MS4 Operator Notification. The MS4 operator shall be notified prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. Contractor shall contact the designated City MS4 representative to request authorization to discharge ground water to the storm water system. Notification shall include: Project Name: Responsible Parry: Discharge Location: Receiving Water: Estimated Time of Discharge: Linear Project: Yes /No Pollution Prevention Measures Implemented: Statement indicating all sampling and testing has been conducted and meets the requirements of a legitimate discharge. G. Discharges to Wastewater System In the event that the groundwater does not equal or exceed the receiving water quality, an alternative disposal option would include pumping to the nearest sanitary sewer system. Discharge to the sanitary sewer system requires a permit from the Wastewater Department. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a sanitary sewer or wastewater treatment plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Contractor shall contact the Pretreatment Group for City Utility Operations to obtain a Wastewater Discharge Permit Application for authorization to discharge to the wastewater system. Authorization approval will include review of laboratory analysis of the ground water and estimated flow data. Note that groundwater discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the wastewater collection system or wastewater overflows, the responsible parry shall remediate any damage to the wastewater collection system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Wastewater Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. H. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Engineer on a case by case basis. 3.7 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through the use of dikes, ditches, curb walls,pipes, sumps or other approved means. B. Divert surface water into sumps and pump into drainage channels or storm drains, when 022021 Page 9 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 approved by the City Engineer. Provide settling basins when required by the City Engineer. C. Storm water that enters the excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by manmade berm(s)prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is required to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering the storm water system. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, control of ground water will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 022021 Page 10 of 10 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials,personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022040 STREET EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Street Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (A) Stripping and Excavation Strip the top 6 inches in all areas to underlay compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing all humus, vegetation and other unsuitable materials. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving, pipe and structures and other items within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Engineer, provided that the material meets the requirements for roadway embankment as specified in Article 3 below. Unwanted or unsuitable roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Engineer. "Unsuitable" material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts, when declared unwanted by the Engineer, shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer with suitable material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. Maintain moisture and density until covered and protected by the subbase or base course. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, and recompact(especially utility trenches). (B) Subgrade Preparation That area shown on the drawings for street construction shall be cut to grade, scarified to a depth not less than 6 inches, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings, and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) to within 0 to +3% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 in 5 of the most recent moisture or density tests is beyond+I%deviation from the required moisture or density requirement. Irregularities exceeding 1/2 inch in 16 feet shall be corrected. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed, replaced with suitable material and compacted (especially at utility trenches). The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained until the subgrade is protected. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted and refinished and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 022040 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (C) Curb Backfill and Topsoil (Sidewalks,Parkways, Islands, etc.) Fill and compact areas behind curbs and adjacent to sidewalks and driveways within 48 hours after completion of concrete work. The top 6 inches (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finish earth grade shall be clean excavated material or topsoil capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. It shall be free of concrete, asphalt, shell, caliche, debris and any other material that detracts from its appearance or hampers the growth of grass. Topsoil shall meet the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 028020 "Seeding". (D) Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line Finish grade at the property line shall be as shown on the drawings. The Engineer may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation. Use suitable material from the excavation. Unless otherwise directed, cuts at right-of- way lines shall be made at a slope of three horizontal to one vertical (3:1) or flatter. (E) Drainag During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. All slopes which, in the judgment of the Engineer,require variation, shall be accurately shaped, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. 3. SELECTION OF ROADBED MATERIALS Where shown on the plans, Select Material shall be utilized to improve the roadbed, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately, and deposited in the roadway within limits and at elevations required. Material used for roadway embankment shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022100 Select Material. 4. GEOGRID If indicated on the drawings, geogrid shall be placed in the base layer according to the pavement details to provide a mechanically-stabilized aggregate base layer within the pavement structure. Geogrid shall be "Tensar TX5 Triaxial Geogrid", or pre-approved equivalent. Use (and approval) of a different product must be supported by documentation showing that the alternate pavement section will meet or exceed the required number of 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (ESAL) and structural number (SN) over the stated pavement design life, and the pavement design must be sealed and signed by a Texas professional engineer. Documentation must also include the structural design value used for the geogrid structural contribution, based on and supported by 022040 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 validated test data. Alternate pavement designs shall utilize the same structural design values for other pavement structural components (HMAC, base, sub-base) as used in the original pavement design, and the pavement designs must be approved by the Engineer and the geotechnical consultant. Contractor shall take care to protect geogrid from damage. Overlap edges of geogrid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than 12 inches. Do not drive tracked equipment directly on the geogrid. Provide at least 6 inches of compacted aggregate base material over the geogrid before driving any tracked equipment over the geogrid area. Standard highway- legal rubber-tired trucks may drive over the geogrid at very slow speeds (less than 5 mph). Avoid turns and sudden starts and stops when driving on the geogrid. Any damaged geogrid shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. Proper replacement shall consist of replacing the affected area adding 3 feet of geogrid in each direction beyond the limits of the affected area. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, street excavation shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings including excavation for street transitions. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, compacted subgrade shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, geogrid shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings, excluding overlaps. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. All work required for disposing of waste, including hauling will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary to the various contract items. 022040 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022060 CHANNEL EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Channel Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Trees, stumps, brush and other vegetation shall be removed and hauled away. Excavated slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. When completed, the average plane of slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the drawings, and no point on completed slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 0.5 foot measured at right angles to the slope. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the roadbed. The tops of excavated slopes and the end of excavation shall be rounded. The bottom and sides of the ditch or channel shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate topsoil for seeding, sodding, or slope protection, as indicated on the drawings. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used, insofar as practicable, in the formation of embankments in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022080 "Embankment", or shall be otherwise utilized or satisfactorily disposed of as indicated on drawings, or as directed, and the completed work shall conform to the established alignment, grades and cross sections. During construction, the channel shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. Unsuitable channel excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site and properly disposed of. 3. SELECTION OF MATERIALS Where shown on the drawings, selected materials shall be utilized in the formation of embankment or to improve the roadbed, provided that the material meets the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Sections 022040 "Street Excavation" and 022100 "Select Material", in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately and deposited in the roadway within the limits and at elevations required. Concrete for lining channels, where specified on the drawings, shall be Class "A" in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 'Portland Cement Concrete". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, channel excavation shall be measured in its original position and the volume computed in cubic yards by the method of average end areas, or by linear foot of channel or drainage ditch, as specified. Channel excavation shall include,but not be limited to, clearing and removal of vegetation, excavation, de-watering, embankment, compaction, hauling, and disposal. Channel excavation shall not include undercutting to accommodate topsoil, sod, or slope protection. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 022060 Page 1 of 1 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022080 EMBANKMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Embankment required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placing embankment, the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation and the material so removed shall be disposed of off the job site. Washes, gullet's, wet areas, and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 6 inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed ten (10) inches uncompacted (loose) depth for the full width of the embankment,unless otherwise noted. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed, the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an uncompacted layer. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, debris or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. Where layers of unlike materials abut each other, each layer shall be feather-edged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. Except as otherwise required by the drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density and moisture by any method, type and size of equipment that will give the required compaction. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. For each layer of earth embankment and select material, it is the intent of this specification to provide the density as required herein, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Soils for 022080 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 embankment shall be sprinkled with water as required to provide not less than optimum moisture and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Field density determinations will be made in accordance with approved methods. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete, tests, as necessary, will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to,the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. All irregularities, depressions, weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. Should the embankment, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or moisture before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of granular material. 3. SELECTION OF MATERIAL In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on drawings,with such modifications as may be directed by the Engineer. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than 0.10 foot from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. Select material, when specified, shall meet the requirements in City Standard Specification Section 022100 "Select Material". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, embankment shall not be measured and paid for separately,but shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 022080 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps,rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Liquid Limit(L.L.): <35 Plasticity Index (P.L)Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 022420 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTO M288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1) foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximum opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike - This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6-gauge, formed into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike,with a skirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. 022420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style C. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size (length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, placing, maintaining and removing the silt fence. 022420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025205 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" Section 022100 "Select Material" Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base" Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut,and all cuts into the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 025205 Page 1 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner,with like or better materials or per pavement repair details to be provided on the drawings. Pavement cuts in a street for any utility requires a permit from the Director of Development Services in accordance with City Ordinance 030040, Article III Cuts and Excavations (12-17-2013). The installation of a utility that crosses the ROW at a perpendicular or near perpendicular angle and has an OD of 6" or less will not be permitted to be installed by cutting the road section. Street excavation/cut for a utility in an asphalt roadway shall include a full lane overlay or pavement repair for parallel cuts, or a 12' wide pavement repair for perpendicular cuts. Street excavation/cut for a utility in a concrete roadway shall include full panel replacement. The drawings and/or permit application should include a site specific pavement cut and restoration plan that indicates the general nature of the pavement and roadway (for examples, concrete arterial, asphalt residential)to be cut and restored, the existing pavement section (if known), the location and approximate area of the excavation/pavement repair, including the approximate length and width of the pavement repair in relation to the roadway travel lane(s). 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six(6)inches. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement. Reinforcement shall be 44 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements,the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class"A"concrete slab four (4)inches thick. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" - W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the slab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete. Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three 44 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall,in general,be to original joint or score mark. For jointed concrete roadways,the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 025205 Page 2 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed, it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. The requirements of City Ordinance 030040 as stated above apply also to unimproved streets unless a specific variance is granted by the Director of Development Services. 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified; curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials,equipment,tools,and incidentals required to complete the work. No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course, geogrid, ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base,prime coat, hot-mix asphaltic concrete, etc. 025205 Page 3 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 025205 Page 4 of 4 Rev.11-9-2016 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025223 CRUSHED LIMESTONE FLEXIBLE BASE 1. DESCRIPTION This Specification shall govern all work for furnishing and placing Crushed Limestone Flexible Base required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL Crushed Limestone Flexible Base shall consist of crushed limestone produced from oversize quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source, meeting the requirements for Type `A' material as specified in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". Crushed gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources and/or additive materials will be allowed. The material shall be free of vegetation and shall be approved by the Engineer. All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced which meets all of the physical requirements for Grade 1-2 as specified in TxDOT Specification Item 247 "Flexible Base". 3. TESTING The City will engage a laboratory and pay for one test each gradation, liquid limit,plasticity index, modified proctor, moisture-density relation, CBR, and necessary field densities. The Engineer may call for additional tests at any time. The cost of all retests, in case of failure to meet specifications, will be deducted from the Contractor's payment. The City will pay for proctor and soil constants and abrasion tests at the rate described in the materials testing schedule. If material changes, the Contractor shall pay the cost of additional tests required by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing and/or lime admix for small amounts for unimportant uses. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placement of flexible base, the surface of the previous underlying course shall be finished true to line and grade as established, and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings. Grade tolerance shall be generally 1/2 inch, and highs and lows must approximately balance. If called for in the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents, geogrid, as specified in City Standard Specification Section 022040 "Street Excavation", shall be placed as indicated. Flexible base shall be delivered and spread the same day if possible (no later than the next day). Base shall be mixed as required to produce a uniform mixture with water. Base shall be placed in uniform lifts not to exceed 10 inch loose lifts or 8 inch compacted lifts. Moisture and density requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings, typical minimum 98% Modified Proctor 025223 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (ASTM D1557) under flexible pavements or typical minimum 98% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) under concrete pavement and to within + 2% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent moisture or density tests is outside of the specified limits, and the failed test is within+1%deviation from specified moisture or density requirements. The surface of the compacted base, after meeting moisture and density requirements, shall be primed in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". On completion of compaction and priming, the surface shall be smooth and conform to lines, grades, and sections shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material,reshaping, and recompacting by repriming and rolling. Moisture and density shall be maintained until the paving is complete. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the base, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted, refinished, and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, crushed limestone flexible base shall be measured by the square yard complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, royalty, hauling, placing, compacting, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. Prime shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. Geogrid shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. 025223 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025404 ASPHALTS, OILS AND EMULSIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for asphalt cement, cut-back and emulsified asphalts, performance-graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous asphaltic materials required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS When tested according to Texas Department of Transportation Test Methods,the various materials shall meet the applicable requirements of TxDOT Specification Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" (Latest Edition). 3. STORAGE, HEATING AND APPLICATION TEMPERATURES Store and apply asphaltic materials in accordance with TxDOT Item 300 (Latest Edition) at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for any agitation requirements in storage and in application and storage temperatures. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, asphalts, oils and emulsions shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 025404 Page 1 of 1 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025412 PRIME COAT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of an application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved area in accordance with this specification. Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60° F and falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above 50°F and is rising; the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphalt material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. 2. MATERIALS The asphalt material used for the prime coat shall be MC-30 medium-curing cutback asphalt or AE- P asphalt emulsion prime, unless otherwise specified, and when tested by approved laboratory methods shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions". Blotter material shall be native sand. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the area and/or base is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned of dirt, dust, and other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. If found necessary by the Engineer, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the asphalt material. The asphalt material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphalt material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphalt material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt material with foreign material. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated and the Engineer shall be furnished an accurate and satisfactory record of such calibration. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the asphalt material applied appear to be in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. Prime shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per City Standard 025412 Page 1 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions", with that range being 70 to 150 degrees F. Application rate shall be not less than 0.15 gallon per square yard, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the Engineer accepts the work. No traffic hauling or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. Spread blotter material before allowing traffic to use a primed surface. Allow sufficient time for the prime coat to cure properly before applying surface treatment or asphaltic concrete pavement. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, prime coat shall be measured by the gallon of asphalt material applied. Payment shall include furnishing, heating, hauling and distributing the asphalt material as specified; for furnishing, spreading and removing sand blotter material; for all freight involved; and for all manipulation, labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025412 Page 2 of 2 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025424 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Class A) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and laying Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) surface, binder and base courses required to complete the project. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Aggregate. The aggregate shall consist of a blend of course aggregate, fine aggregate and, if required, a mineral filler. 2.1.1. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of that fraction of aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of crushed furnace slag, crushed stone, or crushed gravel. Deleterious material in course aggregate shall not exceed 2% per TxDOT Test Method TEX-217-17. Course aggregate shall be crushed such that a minimum of 85%of the particles have more than one crushed face, unless noted otherwise on the plans. Los Angeles abrasion losses for course aggregate shall not exceed 40%by weight for the surface course and 45%for the binder and base courses per TxDOT Test Method TEX-410-A. Polish Value not less than 30 for aggregate used in the surface course per TxDOT Test Method TEX-438-A. 2.1.2. Fine Aggregate is defined as the fraction passing a No. 10 sieve and shall be of uniform quality. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings of material that pass the Los Angeles abrasion requirements in paragraph 2.1.1 above. Screenings shall be blended with a maximum of 15% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type D mixes, or a maximum of 10%uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type A, B, and C mixes. Grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight No. 10 100 No. 200 0-15 025424 Page 1 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.1.3 Filler shall consist of dry stone dust,Portland cement, hydrated lime, or other mineral dust approved by the Engineer. Grading of filler shall be as follows: Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing by Weight No. 30 95 No. 80 75 No. 200 55 2.2. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement(RAP). Reclaimed asphalt pavement maybe incorporated into the hot mix asphalt concrete furnished for the project, provided that the mixture is designed per the TxDOT Methods and meets the applicable provisions of said TxDOT Item 340 and this specification. 2.3. Asphalt. Asphalt Material shall be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions" and AASHTO. 2.3.1. Paving Mixture: APPLICATION ASPHALT GRADE Residential or low volume PG 64-22 Collector Surface Course PG 70-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Arterial Surface Course PG 76-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Base Courses PG 64-22 2.3.2. Tack Coat shall consist of an emulsion, SS-1 diluted with equal volume of water and applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard. 3. PAVING MIXTURE 3.1. Mix Design. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Bulletin C-14 and TxDOT Test Method TEX-204-F to conform to the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the j ob-mix to be used for the project,unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The mix design shall be submitted prior to placement of the mixture. The design procedures are actually intended to result at a job-mix with properties in compliance with these specifications,and when properly placed the j ob-mix will be durable 025424 Page 2 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 and stable. The sieve analysis of the job-mix shall be within the range of the Master Gradation and Tolerances specified herein. The job-mix shall meet the density and stability requirements as specified and shall be included with the mix design as submitted per above. If the specific gravity of any of the types of aggregates differs by more than 0.3,use volume method. Plot sieve analysis of job-mix; percent passing versus size on four-cycle semi-log paper or other appropriate type paper. Show tolerance limits and Limits of Master Gradation. 3.2. Master Gradation of Aggregate. The aggregate for the type of mix specified shall be within the following tabulated limits per TxDOT Test Method TEX-200-F (Dry Sieve Analysis): Type Sieve A B C D Size Course Fine Course Fine Base Base Surface Surface 1-1/2" 100 1-1/4" 95-100 1" 100 7/8" 70-90 95-100 100 5/8" 75-95 95-100 1/2" 50-70 100 3/8" 60-80 70-85 85-100 1/4" No. 4 30-50 40-60 43-63 50-70 No. 10 20-34 27-40 30-40 32-42 No. 40 5-20 10-25 10-25 11-26 No. 80 2-12 3-13 3-13 4-14 No. 200 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* VMA minimum 11 12 13 14 025424 Page 3 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 * 2-8 when TxDOT Test Method Tex-200-F,Part H(Washed Sieve Analysis)is used. 3.3. Tolerances. The mixture delivered to the job site shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances specified below. The gradation of the produced mix shall not fall outside the Master Grading Limits, with the following exceptions: for Type B material coarser than 3/8" and for Type D material coarser than 44. Variations from job-mix shall not exceed the following limits, except as noted above: Item: Tolerances Percent by Weight or Volume 1" to No. 10 Plus or Minus 5.0 No. 40 to No. 200 Plus or Minus 3.0 Asphalt Weight Plus or Minus 0.5 Asphalt Volume Plus or Minus 1.2 3.4. Mix Properties. The mixture shall have a minimum Hveem stability of 40 for Type A, B, and C mixes, and 35 for Type D mixes per TxDOT Test Method TEX-208-F at an optimum density of 96% (plus or minus 1.5) of theoretical maximum density per TxDOT Test Methods TEX-227-F and TEX-207-F. 3.5. Sampling and Testing of Raw Materials. The Contractor shall sample materials as necessary to produce a mix in compliance with these specifications. 4. EQUIPMENT 4.1. Mixing_ Plants. Mixing plants shall be either the weigh batching type or the drum mix type. Both types shall be equipped with satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, aggregate screens and bins (weigh batch only), and pollution control devices as required. 4.2. Truck Scales. A set of truck scales, if needed for measurement, shall be placed at a location approved by the Engineer. 4.3. Asphalt Material Heating Equipment. Asphalt material heating equipment shall be adequate to heat the required amount of material to the desired temperature. Agitation with steam or air will not be permitted. The heating apparatus shall be equipped with a recording thermometer with a 24-hour continuous chart that will record the temperature of the asphalt at the highest temperature. 4.4. Surge-Stora System.SySystem. A surge-storage system may be used provided that the mixture coming out of the bins is of equal quality to that coming out of the mixer. The system shall be equipped with a gob hopper, rotating chute or other devices designed to minimize segregation of the asphalt mixture. 4.5. Laydown Machine. The laydown machine shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section, of adequate power to propel the 025424 Page 4 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 delivery vehicles,and produce the surface tolerances herein required. It shall be wide enough to lay a 28-foot street(back-to-back of curbs) in a maximum of two passes. 4.6. Rollers. All rollers shall be self-propelled and of any type capable of obtaining the required density. Rollers shall be in satisfactory operating condition and free from fuel, hydraulic fluid, or any other fluid leaks. 5. STORAGE, PROPORTIONING AND MIXING 5.1. Storage and Heating of f Asphalt Materials. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. 5.2. Feeding and Dryin_ g of Aggregates. The feeding of various sizes of aggregate to the dryer shall be done in such a manner that a uniform and constant flow of materials in the required proportions will be maintained. In no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixing unit at a temperature in excess of 350 degrees F. 5.3. Proportioning. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. 5.4. Mixing. 5.4.1. Weigh Batch Plant. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box,such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 5.4.2. Drum Mix Plant. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 5.4.3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the j o> b-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one percent by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-212-F. 5.4.4. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250 and 325 degrees F. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25 degrees F. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 6.1. Construction Conditions. For mat thicknesses greater than 1.5 inches, the asphalt material may be placed with a laydown machine when the air temperature is 40 degrees F and 025424 Page 5 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 rising but not when the air temperature is 50 degrees F and falling. In addition,mat thickness less than and including 1.5 inches shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is placed is below 50 degrees F. All subsurface utilities shall be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to paving. 6.2. Prime Coat. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025412"Prime Coat", except the application temperature shall be as provided above. The tack coat or asphaltic concrete shall not be applied on a previously primed flexible base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6.3. Tack Coat. Before the asphalt mixture is laid,the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using materials and rates herein specified and/or as shown on the plans. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller as necessary. Tack coat is required before any pavement course not placed immediately following the previous course placement. 6.4. Transporting Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt mixture shall be hauled to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign matter. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulated truck beds may be necessary. The inside of the bed may be given a light coating of lime water or other suitable release agent necessary to prevent from adhering. Diesel oil is not allowed. 6.5. Placing. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a laydown machine or other approved equipment in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth and of uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross section as shown on the plans. 6.5.1. Flush Structures. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be slightly above the edge of the curb and flush structure. 6.5.2. Construction joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six inches. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Engineer,but shall not be in the anticipated wheel path of the roadway. 6.6. Compacting. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the plans. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. 025424 Page 6 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6.7. In-Place Density. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. Material should be compacted to between 96% and 92% of maximum theoretical density or between 4% and 8% air voids. Average density shall be greater than 92%and no individual determination shall be lower than 90%. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods TEX-207-F and TEX-227-F. Pavement specimens,which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture,will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. 6.8. Thickness. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the drawings. No more than 10% of the measured thickness(es)shall be more than 1/4 inch less than the plan thickness(es). If so,the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 6.9. Surface Smoothness Criteria and Tests. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade and cross-section. The surface shall be tested by the City with the Mays Roughness Meter. The Mays Roughness Value for each 600-foot section shall not exceed ninety inches per mile per traffic lane. For each 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Engineer shall have the option of requiring that section to be reworked to meet the criteria,or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: Adjusted Unit Price= (Adjustment Factor)X Surface Course Unit Bid Price The adjustment factor shall be: For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor= 1.999 - 0.0111 M For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential) Adjustment Factor= 1.287 - 0.0143 M Where M =Mays Roughness Value In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches per mile,prior to applying the above criteria. Localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) shall be tested with a ten-foot straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline. The maximum deviation shall not 025424 Page 7 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 exceed 1/8 inch in ten feet. Areas not meeting this criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Pavement areas having surface irregularities, segregation, raveling or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. 6.10. Opening to Traffic. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subj ect to the State laws governing traffic on highways. If the surface ravels, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of the type and thickness of"Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the "pay ticket" identifying the truck and showing the gross empty weight of the truck with driver as it arrives at the plant and the gross loaded weight of the truck with driver as it leaves the plant. The measured amount will be the difference of the loaded and empty trucks converted to tons. Payment shall be full compensation for quarrying,furnishing all materials,freight involved; for all heating, mixing, hauling, cleaning the existing base course or pavement, tack coat, placing asphaltic concrete mixture, rolling and finishing; and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work except prime coat when required. Prime coat,performed where required,will be measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions governing City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". All templates, straightedges, scales, and other weight and measuring devices necessary for the proper construction, measuring and checking of the work shall be furnished, operated and maintained by the Contractor at his expense. Any paving placed prior to inspection,testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. Pavement that fails to meet the in place density criteria may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense,or such pavement may, at the City's discretion, be accepted by the City and the unit price for payment shall be reduced as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 025424 Page 8 of 8 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025608 INLETS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of inlets complete in place and the materials used therein, including the installation, and the furnishing of frames, grates, rings and covers. 2. TYPES The various types of inlets are designated on the drawings by letters or by numbers indicating the particular design of each. Each type shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings and to the depth required by the profiles and schedules given. 3. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. Concrete for curb inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", and City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", except as otherwise provided on the drawings. Concrete for grate inlets, drop inlets and post inlets shall be Class "C" concrete in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (2) Mortar. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, sharp mortar sand suitably graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete" for fine aggregate. Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed 10 percent by weight of the total dry mix. (3) Reinforcing _SteelSteel. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". (4) Concrete Blocks. Concrete blocks, when shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 139. (5) Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 055420 "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers". (6) Cast Iron. Cast iron for supports and inlet units shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans. The castings shall be clean and perfect, free from sand or blow holes or other defects. Cast iron castings shall conform to the requirements of"Gray Iron Castings" ASTM A 48, Class 30. 025608 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) General. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", unless otherwise specified. Forms will be required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. (2) Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after sewer lines into or through inlet locations are completed. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and pointed up with mortar. Subgrade under cast-in-place and precast inlets shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. (3) Inverts. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the plans. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. (4) Finishing Complete Inlets. Inlets shall be completed in accordance with the drawings. Backfilling to finish grade elevation with native material, free of debris and compacted to over 95% Standard Proctor density. Backfilling shall be in accordance with the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, inlets shall be measured as individual units by each inlet, complete in place. Extension to inlets will be measured by each extension separately from the inlet. Excavation, backfill, frames, grates, rings and covers will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the inlets. Payments shall be full compensation for furnishing all concrete, reinforcing steel, mortar, castings, frames, grates, rings and covers, and for all other materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to perform the work prescribed above. 025608 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025610 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of Portland cement concrete combined concrete curb and gutter or separate concrete curb with or without reinforcing steel as required, constructed on an approved subgrade or foundation material in accordance with these specifications, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 'Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood material meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The foundation shall be excavated and shaped to line, grade and cross-section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. If dry, the subgrade or foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly with water and compacted to not less than 98% Standard Proctor density, or as required on the drawings. Flexible base shall be compacted to specified density and moisture immediately before concrete is deposited thereon. Outside forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free of warp, and of a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. They shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. Inside forms for the curb shall be approved material, shall be of such design as to provide the curb required, and shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. For reinforced concrete roadways, all jointing must be reflected through the curb, including redwood expansion joints and construction joints. Driveway gutter shall be placed integrally with the driveway as shown on the City Standard Details. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the typical details. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The curb and gutter shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the plans, and each section shall be separated by a premolded insert or board joint of cross-section specified for the curb and gutter, and of the thickness indicated on the drawings. 025610 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on the drawings. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter, or curb, shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented curing compound unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. The area behind the curb shall be backfilled, tamped, and sloped as directed as soon as possible and no later than 48 hours after the removal of forms. Backfill shall be placed to the full height of the curb, or as otherwise specified. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, concrete curb and gutter or concrete curb will be measured by the linear foot for each type of curb, complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; for furnishing,placing, shaping and tamping backfill; and for all manipulation, labor,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025610 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete,constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade,in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000"Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be "Greenstreak" or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight,free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings,no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet,and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. 025612 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board j oint of the thickness shown on the drawings, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer,placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools. For other widths of sidewalk,joints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed,the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2,white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete, reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025612 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025614 CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for constructing Concrete Curb Ramps required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete shall be Class "A" in accordance with Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete"of the City Standard Specifications. Reinforcement shall be 4x4 -W2.9xW2.9 welded wire fabric or 44 steel reinforcing bars spaced at 12 inches each way in accordance with Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade and cross-section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled with water to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. Subgrade compaction shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Ramps shall be constructed of Class "A" concrete to line and section as shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of 5 inches,prior to application of the detectable warning surfacing. Slopes, S, shall be as follows, unless shown otherwise on the drawings: RAMPS Ramp in direction of travel . . . . . S < 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare) . . . . . S < 1:10 Cross slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100 < S < 1:50 ADJOINING AREAS Landings adjacent to ramp . . . . . . S < 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalks . . S < 1:10 Width of ramp shall be 60 inches(minimum),exclusive of flare,unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. No ramp shall be less than 36 inches wide under any circumstances. Obstructions 025614 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. Detectable warning surface shall be polymer composite material detectable warning panels as shown on the drawings. Surfacing shall be flush with abutting areas and placed using a template as required to achieve an esthetic well-defined edge. Surfacing shall be subsidiary work and will not be measured for separate pay. Pavement markings for street crossings shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the curb ramp. See striping details for proper alignment of pavement markings with respect to intersection and curb ramp. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section and grade, and shall be free of loose material and irregularities. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,concrete curb ramps shall be measured by the horizontal square foot of ramp surface area, including side flares when used. Adjoining curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and driveways will be excluded from said measurement. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, subgrade preparation, formwork, concrete, rebar, detectable warning surfaces, borders, molding and curing required to complete the curb ramp, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 025614 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive(cylinder)tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be permitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 025620 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 025620 Page 3 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement(slipformed) 1.5 inches I inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength (7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural(Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Strength Strength Ratio Aggregate P* 450 psi(7 days) 3200 psi(7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No.2(1�/z") 570 psi(28 days) 4000 psi(28 days) 0.50 * 5%entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 025620 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 5 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 026210 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (AWWA C900 and C905)required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with an established hydrostatic-design-basis of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to ductile iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. 4. JOINT Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE CLASS AND DIMENSION RATIO Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 and in accordance with: Pipe Size Designation 4"to 12" AWWA C900 Over 12" AWWA C905 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with AWWA Requirements. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 026210 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. CERTIFICATION The contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification, to include gaskets. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, PVC pipe (AWWA C900 or C905) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to,but not include,the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation, backfilling and testing of the PVC pipe, together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place,per linear foot. 026210 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 026409 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for furnishing and installing tapping sleeves, sleeves and valves required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Tapping sleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B16.1 outlet flange of cast iron, ductile iron or stainless steel. Sleeves shall be of ductile iron or 304 or 316 stainless steel. Lugs, bolts, washers and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. Iron sleeves shall be of the mechanical joint or caulked joint type as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. Stainless steel sleeves shall be of the compression gasket type capable of providing full support of the tapped pipe, as manufactured by Ford, Smith Blair, Romac, or approved equal. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. The class of asbestos cement pipe that will most likely be encountered in the water will be Class 200 for pipes 6 inches in diameter and smaller, and Class 150 for larger pipes. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped may not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the drawings. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. Tapping valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". Valve boxes shall be as described in City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall adhere to those set out in City Standard Specification Section 026402 "Waterlines", and City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall be measured on a per each basis for each size installed. Payment for tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box,box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting,wrapping, cement-stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026409 Page 1 of 1 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 026411 GATE VALVES FOR WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and install all gate valves and valve boxes required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Gate Valves All valves shall meet the following requirements. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C515. 1) The gate valves shall be ductile iron resilient wedge (C515)with non-rising stems. 2) Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for bell ends and flanges. 3) Valves 16 inches and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation—lay over. 4) Stem seals shall be the O-ring type on valves through 12-inch size. Valves 16 inches and larger may be equipped with stuffing boxes. 5) Valves shall open left(counter clockwise). Valves over 18 inches shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. 6) Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. 7) No position indicator will be required. 8) Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate, for approval,the following: a) Certified drawings of each size and type of valve 16 inches and larger showing principal dimensions, construction details, and materials used. b) On all size valves, the composition of bronze to be offered for various parts of the valve, complete with minimum tensile strength in psi, the minimum yield strength in psi, and the minimum elongation in 2"per cent. 026411 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Gate Valves Gate valves shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Cast Iron Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. When valves are in the street right-of- way, the top of box shall be set flush with the pavement or surrounding ground. In cultivated areas, the top of box shall be set twelve inches (12")below natural ground and long enough to be raised to natural ground at a future date. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gate valves for waterlines will be measured as a unit for each gate valve and valve box installed. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement- stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting; and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentals required to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 026411 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 027202 MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing of all materials and construction of manholes composed of a concrete base and concrete walls as shown on the drawings,to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on drawings or established by the Engineer. 2. MATERIALS Concrete for cast-in-place storm water manholes and storm water junction boxes shall be Class C (3,600 psi at 28 days). Manholes for wastewater shall be made from fiberglass only, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes". Mortar for plastering shall be one (1)part Portland cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand, free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. Reinforcing steel, where used, shall conform to the requirements of Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". All wastewater manhole rings and covers for streets shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. product V1430 CV or V1420/1480 Z1, or pre-approved equal, and shall have the seating surface of ring and cover machined to secure a snug fit per the City Standard Wastewater Details. All storm water manholes shall be East Jordan Iron Works,Inc.product VI 168 assembly,and for school zones shall be a bolted assembly per the City Standard Storm Water Details. Steps are not required for wastewater and storm water manholes. Joint material for precast concrete manholes shall be Ram-Nek Flexible Plastic Gaskets as manufactured by K. T. Snyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. 3. EXCAVATION The Contractor shall do all necessary excavation for the various manholes, conforming to size and dimensions shown on plans plus a maximum of four(4)feet working room. Excavation shall not be carried to greater depth than required. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Shoring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be installed as necessary. Shoring shall not be removed or backfilled around until entire manhole is completed, unless authorized by the Engineer. Shoring shall remain in place at least twenty-four(24) hours after concrete work has been completed. 027202 Page 1 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. CONCRETE MANHOLES (STORM WATER ONLY) (1) Formed-in-Place Manholes: Where formed concrete is used, forms shall be built to dimensions shown on the standard details. Inserts and openings shall be formed so concrete will notbe injured during process of stripping forms. Forms shall be braced and tied to prevent spreading or bulging, and shall meet approval of the Engineer prior to placing concrete. Forms shall remain in place for minimum of twenty-four(24) hours, and shall be removed within a maximum time of seven (7) days after completion of concrete work. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall be as shown on the plans. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. (2) Precast Manholes Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. Precast manholes shall be designed to support HS-20 traffic loading and designed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. The upper 18 inches of the corbel shall be brick to facilitate subsequent grade adjustment. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. Where not specified,eccentric cones shall be used. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer. 5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS All items shall be installed as the work progresses and as shown on the standard details. Work shall be completed and finished in a careful workmanlike manner,with special care being given to sealing joints around all pipe extending through walls of the manholes. After finishing walls,the bottom of the manhole shall be completed by adding sufficient concrete to shape the bottom in conformity with requirements on the plans. Where old manholes are adjusted to meet new lines and grades, all old masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted before j oining new masonry or concrete to it. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used to match roadway grade. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. 6. BACKFILLING/LEAKAGE TESTING Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than six inches (6") and compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density before next layer is installed. Wastewater manholes shall withstand a leakage test not to exceed the values stated in City Standard Specification Section 027205 "Fiberglass Manholes", except that an additional 10 percent of loss will be permitted for each additional two feet head over a basic two-foot internal head. 027202 Page 2 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, manholes shall be measured by each individual structure built, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the manholes, excavation,compaction,backfilling,dewatering,concrete foundation,connections,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing,video inspection, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. Extra depth for wastewater manholes over six feet in depth shall be measured by the vertical foot and shall be paid for at the price bid per vertical foot for "Extra Depth for Manholes". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts,make connections,grout the annular space,backfilling,adjustment rings, ring and cover, concrete work, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027202 Page 3 of 3 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 027205 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for providing, installing and adjusting fiberglass manholes required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL Fiberglass manholes shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings. 3. MATERIALS A. Manholes Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D3753-"Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells,"latest edition, and the referenced design criteria as follows: 1. ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service 2. ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 3. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 4. ASTM C923 Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals 5. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor 7. ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins 8. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 9. ASTM F794 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter 10. ASTM C32 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made From Clay or Shale) The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be 0.50 inch. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be a minimum of 48 inches or as otherwise specified on the drawings,but shall not be less than 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, whichever is larger. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a 027205 Page 1 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 minimum inside diameter of 31.75 inches at the top, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Manhole Pipe Connectors Manhole pipe connectors for Sanitary Sewer Application shall be made of corrosion resistant plastic. The connector shall eliminate leaks around the pipe entering the manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity, and shall be in conformance with ASTM D3212. Material for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meetthe requirements of ASTM F477. Material for rubber sleeve shall meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Manhole pipe connectors between 4 inches and 15 inches shall be Inserta Tee from Fowler Mfg., or approved equal. Manhole pipe connection for Storm Sewer Application shall be made with Ram-Nek flexible plastic gasket material as manufactured by K.T. Snyder Company of Houston, Texas, or approved equal, and wrapped with Class `A' Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M288. C. Manhole Base Concrete shall be Class `A' in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Caulk for seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete cast-in-place base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy(gun grade consistency)as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi,Texas, or approved equal. Precast reinforced concrete manhole base shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C478, as shown on the construction plans and detail drawings. D. Inflow Inhibitors Inflow inhibitors shall be installed in sanitary manholes. They shall be of 316 stainless steel with an equivalent thickness of not less than 18 gauge, and load tested in excess of 3000 pounds. The inhibitor shall rest on the lip of the seating surface of the manhole ring and shall not exceed a depth of 6.5 inches. The seating surface of the inhibitor shall have an attached gasket on the weight-bearing side. The inhibitor shall have a gas relief valve made of Nitrite and shall operate at a one(1)psi differential pressure. The inhibitor shall be fitted with a handle of 3/16 plastic coated stainless steel cable attached to the insertbody with a 64 316 stainless steel rivet. The inhibitor shall be constructed of materials that withstand highly corrosive sewer gases. E. Ring and Cover Manhole ring and cover for all manholes shall be for street application and shall be as indicated on the drawings. Manholes 5 feet in diameter and larger shall require a nominal 3- foot ring and cover, as specified on the drawings. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used for 027205 Page 2 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 grade adjustments. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. F. Flowable Grout Flowable grout(or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand,water, and"Darafill"admixture (or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/ CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/ CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/ CY Sand 250 lbs/ CY Water 6 oz/ CY "Darafill" admixture,as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General: The limits of excavation shall allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, power poles, drainage structures,streets,etc. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Vertical Sides: When necessary to protect other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides on the excavation. The limits shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment,power poles, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled. Sloping Sides: In unimproved areas where sufficient space is available,the Contractor will be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation will be safe from caving. Safety requirements shall govern the back slope used. De-watering: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams,bailing,pumping,well pointing, or any combination, as the particular situation may warrant. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction,removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to 027205 Page 3 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 insure the safety of the structure,but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven(7)days after placing concrete. All de-watering methods and procedures are subjectto the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth,firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the City, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not create an unsafe condition. Unauthorized Over-Excavation: Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that rest on earth, shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried below the indicated elevation,the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc.,to the required grade by filling with concrete. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations: For sanitary sewer application,pipe penetrations for pipe sizes 4-inch through 15-inch shall be made with appropriately sized core drill bits recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe penetrations other than described above and as authorized by the Engineer shall be made as follows: cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus 1/2 inch. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with masonry blade. Impact type tools shall not be used. Handling: Manholes shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the manhole or the surroundings. If manhole must be moved by rolling,the ground which it traverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. Height Adiustment: If necessary,utilize HDPE adjustment rings to adjust the manhole to the correct grade elevation. A maximum of 18" of adjustment rings may be utilized. Installation: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper elevation, and a minimum of six (6) inches into concrete, then plumb. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, initial backfill around manholes (from subgrade to five feet (5') above the top of the concrete footing) shall be flowable grout. The remaining final backfill around manholes shall be cement-stabilized sand, or approved equal, containing a minimum of 2 sacks of standard Type I or Type H Portland cement per cubic yard of sand, free of large hard lumps, rock fragments or other debris. The material shall be free of large lumps or clods which will not readily break down under compaction. This material shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Topsoil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around the structure, if necessary. 027205 Page 4 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Schedule of Backfilling: The Contractor may begin backfilling around manhole as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and the forms removed. Compaction: Backfill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted thickness and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698). Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in City Standard Specification Section 027200 "Control of Wastewater Flows". 5. TESTING Manholes shall be tested for leakage by either of two tests as specified by the Engineer. Water Leakage Test: The Contractor shall provide water, labor, and materials for testing. Testing shall be as follows: I. With sewers plugged, the manhole shall be filled with water. 2. The manhole shall be checked after 24 hours have elapsed. 3. Water loss shall not exceed 2.4 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 4-foot diameter manholes, or 3.0 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 5-foot diameter manholes. Water loss shall not exceed 0.6 gallon per foot of diameter per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for all sizes of sanitary manholes. 4. If the manhole is within 9 feet of a waterline that is not or cannot be encased, the manhole shall be tested for no leaks and no noticeable loss of water shall be experienced for the 24-hour period. If water loss is excessive,the Contractor shall correct the problem and the manhole shall be retested. Vacuum Test: Vacuum testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027203 "Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures". 6. GRADE ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING FIBERGLASS MANHOLES The adjustment of the ring and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. If the ring and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole, this work shall be done as described below. Note that manhole repair kits are available for this work. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least 6 inches below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. 027205 Page 5 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. Mark, cut and remove the required section of the manhole. Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. Replace and align the top. Fiberglass a 6-inch strip along the outside seam all around with two layers of mat with one layer of woven roving sandwiched between. After the outside has set, go on the inside and fill any voids in the seam with epoxy or material provided by the manhole manufacturer for use in such application. After the putty has set, fiberglass a 6-inch strip on the inside as previously done on the outside. After curing,backfill with cement-stabilized sand,as described above,compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,fiberglass manholes shall be measured per each for each size (diameter) of manhole indicated. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to; excavation, dewatering, compaction, concrete foundation, manhole assembly,connections,cast iron frame and cover,adjustment to finish grade,concrete work,backfill, leakage testing, bypass pumping, and other work as required to complete the fiberglass manhole. Extra depth for a sanitary manhole over 6 feet in depth will be measured by the vertical foot of depth in excess of 6 feet and bid as "Extra Depth for Manhole (Wastewater)". Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials,tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts, make connections, grout the annular space with flowable grout, backfilling, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027205 Page 6 of 6 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 027402 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforced concrete pipe culverts and the material and incidental construction requirements for reinforced concrete pipe sewers. The culvert pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of these specifications to the lines and grades shown on the plans, and shall be of the classes, sizes and dimensions shown thereon. The installation of pipe shall include all joints or connections to new or existing pipe, headwalls, etc., as may be required to complete the work. 2. MATERIALS 1. General. Except as modified herein, materials, manufacture and design of pipe shall conform to ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. All pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. 2. Desi;n. All pipe shall be Class III (Wall "B") unless otherwise specified on the plans. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified class as summarized in ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. 3. Sizes and Permissible Variations. a. Variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement, placement of reinforcement, laying length and the permissible underrun of length shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to previously. b. Where rubber gasket pipe joints are to be used, the design of the Joints and Permissible Variations in Dimensions shall be in accordance with ASTM C-443. 4. Workmanship and Finish. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 5. Curin;. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to above. 6. Marking. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: 027402 Page 1 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. The class of pipe. b. The date of manufacture. c. The name or trademark of the manufacturer. d. Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 7. Minimum Age for Shipment. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein. 8. Inspection. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing plant. In addition, the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Engineer at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Causes for Rejection. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding. c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. d. Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. 10. Repairs. Pipe may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling, and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 11. Rejections. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 12. Jointing Materials. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the Contractor shall have the option of making the joints by any of the following methods: a. Ram-Nek, a pre-formed plastic base joint material manufactured by K. T. Knyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. Use of Talcote as joint material will not be not permitted. Ram-Nek joint material and primer shall be supplied for 027402 Page 2 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 use on pipe in the following sizes, which is the minimum that will be required. Additional Ram-Nek may be required if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a proper joint is not secured. Pipe Size Primer Per 100 Jts. Cut Lengths Per Joint 12" 1.5 gals. 1�/2 pcs 1" x 2'-5" 15" 1.9 gals. 2 pcs 1" x2'-5" 18" 2.7 gals. 1�/2 pcs 11/2 " x 3'-5" 21" 3.8 gals. 2 pcs 11/2 "x 3'-5" 24" 6.2 gals. 2 pcs 11/2 "x 3'-5" 30" 8.5 gals. 21/2 pcs 11/2" x 3'-5" 36" 9.5 gals. 3 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 42" 12.0 gals. 3�/2 pcs 13/4"x 3'-5" 48" 15.0 gals. 4 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 54" 20.0 gals. 41/2 pcs 13/4"x 3'-5" 60" 25.0 gals. 5 pcs 13/4" x 3'-5" 66" 30.0 gals. 5�/2 pcs 13/4"x 3'-5" 72" 32.0 gals. 6 pcs 2" x 3'-5" 84" 35.0 gals. 7 pcs 2"x 3'-5" b. TYLOX Types "C", "C-P" or "CR" rubber gaskets, as applicable, as manufactured by Hamilton Kent Manufacturing Company, Kent, Ohio, or approved equal. All gaskets, lubricants, adhesives, etc., shall be manufactured, constructed, installed, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer of the rubber gasket material and conform to ASTM Designation: C-443. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the City, for approval, manufacturer's brochures detailing the complete use, installation, and specifications of concrete pipe and rubber gaskets before any rubber gasket material is used on the project. All rubber gaskets shall be fabricated from synthetic rubber. c. Cement Mortar is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes, pipe junctions, etc., or where specifically approved by the Engineer. d. Geotextile for wrapping pipe joints shall be Class "A" subsurface drainage type in accordance with AASHTO M288. 027402 Page 3 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Reinforced concrete pipe culverts shall be constructed from the specified materials in accordance with the following methods and procedures: 1. Excavation. All excavation shall be in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities," except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the plans or permitted by the Engineer. When pipe is laid in a trench, the trench, when completed and shaped to receive the pipe, shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of the backfill and bedding material under and around the pipe. The Contractor shall make such temporary provisions as may be necessary to insure adequate drainage of the trench and bedding during the construction operation. Pipe shall be placed such that the identification markings are visible at the top prior to backfill. 2. Beddin;. The pipe shall be bedded in accordance with the bedding details shown on the drawings. Bedding shall not be measured for pay,but shall be subsidiary to other work. If the subgrade of the trench is unstable, even if this condition occurs at relatively shallow depths, full encasement of the pipe with crushed stone shall be required. 3. Laying Pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet (downstream) end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream, and shall proceed toward the inlet(upstream) end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. Where bell and spigot pipe are used, cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. These cross trenches shall be not more than two inches larger than the bell ends of the pipe. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. As each length of pipe is laid, the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed, it shall form a smooth, uniform conduit. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings "TOP" or "BOTTOM" shall not be more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. For pipe over 42 inches in diameter, the Contractor may drill two holes not larger than 2 inches in diameter, in the top of each section of the pipe,to aid in lifting and placing. The holes shall be neatly drilled, without spalling of the concrete, and shall be done without the cutting of any reinforcement. After the pipe is laid, the holes shall be filled with mortar and properly cured, and placed such that they are visible from the top for inspection prior to backfill. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the center lines of 027402 Page 4 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on plans, the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. Diameter of Pipe 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" to 84" Clear Distance Between Pipes 0'-9" 0'-11 " 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-5" 1'-7" 1'-1l" 2'-0" 4. Jointing. a. If the use of Portland cement mortar joints is allowed, all pipe shall be jointed tight and sealed with stiff mortar, composed of one part Portland cement and two parts sand, so placed as to form a durable water-tight joint. The installation shall be as required by the Engineer. b. Joints using Rubber Gaskets: Where rubber gasket pipe joints are required by the plans, the joint assembly shall be made according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. Water-tight joints will be required when using rubber gaskets. c. Joints using Cold-Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets shall be made as follows: A suitable prime of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket joint sealer shall be brush-applied to the tongue and groove joint surfaces and the end surfaces and allowed to dry and harden. No primer shall be applied over mud, sand or dirt or sharp cement protrusions. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. Before laying the pipe in the trench, the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power(backhoe shovel, chain hoist,ratchet hoist or winch) to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. The extruded gasket material shall be smoothed out over the joint on the exterior and interior of the pipe. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. (Pipe shall be pulled home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times.) Backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints may proceed as soon as the joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting backfill to 027402 Page 5 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 avoid damage to the joints. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F, or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Gaskets shall then be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in the trench, followed by connection to previously laid pipe. d. Pipe Joints for storm sewers shall be wrapped with geotextile material. The geotextile wrap shall be at least 2 feet wide and shall be centered on each joint. 5. After the pipe has been placed, bedded and jointed as specified, filling and/or backfilling shall be done in accordance with the applicable requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." If unstable conditions are encountered, fully encase the pipe with crushed stone as described above. When mortar joints are allowed, no fill or backfill shall be placed until the jointing material has been cured for at least six (6)hours. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the pipe or damage to the joints. For side drain culverts and all other culverts where joints consist of materials other than mortar, immediate backfilling will be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing by the Engineer, no heavy earth moving equipment will be permitted to haul over the structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed thereon. Pipe damaged by the Contractor's equipment shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 7. Cleaning and Television Inspection. All enclosed reinforced concrete pipe and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits." 4. MEASUREMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforced concrete pipe will be measured by the linear foot. Such measurement will be made between the ends of the pipe barrel along its central axis. Where spurs or branches, or connections to existing pipe lines are involved, measurement of the spur or new connecting pipe will be made from the intersection of its center axis with the outside surfaces of the pipe into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes,junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of pipe, that length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement but no other portion of the structure length or width will be so included. For multiple pipes, the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels measured as prescribed above. 027402 Page 6 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. PAYMENT Payment for reinforced concrete pipe measured as prescribed above will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear foot for the various sizes of "Reinforced Concrete Pipe" of the class specified. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and transporting the pipe; hauling and placing of earth cushion material where required for bedding pipe; for the preparation and shaping of beds; for hauling, placing and jointing of pipes; for furnishing and installing geotextile pipe joint wrapping; for end finish; for all connections to existing and new structures; for cleaning and television inspection; and for all other items of materials, labor, equipment, tools, excavation, backfill and incidentals necessary to complete the culvert or storm sewer in accordance with the plans and these specifications. 027402 Page 7 of 7 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 027602 GRAVITY WASTEWATER LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing, handling and installing gravity wastewater lines required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE and fittings shall be in accordance with the following: 6"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 8"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 10" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 12" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 15" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM D3034 DR 26 18" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 24" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 30" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 36"Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR 26 PS115 42" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 48" Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM F679 DR35 PS46 Pipe and fittings shall have push-on compression gasket joints in accordance with ASTM D3212 and shall be a non-blue color. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE shall be AWWA C900 or C905 integral green (non-blue color) with a minimum pressure rating of not less than 150 psi, made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784. One (1) 20-ft. section of PVC pressure pipe, with appropriate adapters or as an encasing pipe over the carrier pipe, shall be used for gravity wastewater lines at all waterline crossins, and shall be centered under/ over the waterline as indicated on the drawings. Maintain a minimum of 2 feet vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new non-pressurized wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of 6 inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a pressurized wastewater line. In all instances of water crossing wastewater, center a joint of water pipe over the wastewater pipe such that a minimum of 9 feet of horizontal offset exists from each water joint to the wastewater carrier pipe. 027602 Page 1 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Alternatively, at waterline crossings, the PVC gravity wastewater pipe may be encased in a 20-ft.joint of pressure pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that is at least two nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot(5) intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand. The casing pipe shall be centered under/ over the waterline as indicated on the drawings, and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. B. Bedding and Backfill Materials: 1. BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL is that material from beneath the pipe to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The bedding and initial backfill material shall be in accordance with Table 1 on Wastewater Standard Details, Sheet 3,unless otherwise specified. 2. FINAL BACKFILL is that material placed on the initial backfill. The material shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" and as shown on the standard details. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Trench Excavation: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." B. Handling of Materials: 1. HANDLING AND CARE of pipe shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Pipe shall be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site by the Contractor. Materials shall be handled with care and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. STORAGE AND SECURITY of materials shall be provided by the Contractor. Any material delivered to the site that is not to be incorporated into the work within 10 working days shall be properly stored off the ground. Stacking and handling of materials shall be done as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. REJECTED OR DEFECTIVE materials are those having cracks, flaws or other defects. Rejected materials shall be marked by the Engineer and removed from the job site by the end of the day by the Contractor. 4. DISTRIBUTION OF MATERIALS at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated into the work within 10 working days. Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the owner by the Contractor. Materials shall not be placed within five feet of the back of curb or edge of pavement without permission of the Engineer or the designated representative. 027602 Page 2 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Alignment and Grade: 1. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. 2. NO DEVIATIONS from design line and grade shall be allowed, unless authorized by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall provide offsets and cut sheets. The Contractor may use batter boards, laser, or other approved methods necessary to construct the wastewater line to design line and grade. D. Pipe Placement: 1. GENERAL: Proper implements, tools, etc., shall be used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of work. All pipes shall be carefully lowered into the trench by suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe be dropped or dumped into the trench. The Contractor shall not lay pipe in the trench until the bedding and condition of the trench have been approved by the Engineer. The trench shall be free of water and maintained in that condition until the pipe has been laid, the joints have been completed, and the initial backfill has been completed. All pipe markings shall be placed face up for inspection prior to backfill. 2. CLEAN PIPE: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering pipe into trench. The interior of pipe shall be maintained free of dirt during the remaining installation operations. E. Jointing Pipe: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) PIPE shall have mating surfaces of the gasketed joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter. A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigot mating surfaces just prior to joining. The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shoved home to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces. Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot. When the pipe is being thusly installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material. When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide for adequate support of the pipe. The spigot shall be centered within 1/4 inch of the home line marked on the spigot. F. Bedding and Initial Backfill: POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: Bedding and initial backfill of PVC pipe shall be in accordance with the details provided in the drawings. Bedding shall be well tamped regardless of type. The type of bedding required shall depend upon the depth of cut and ground water condition and shall be as specified below: 027602 Page 3 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 BOTTOM OF TRENCH IN GROUNDWATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone BOTTOM OF TRENCH NOT IN GROUND WATER Depth of Cut Required Bedding Less than 15 feet Sand, Gravel, or Crushed Stone Less than 20 feet Gravel or Crushed Stone Over 20 feet Crushed Stone G. Final Backfill: See City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." H. Bypass Pumping: Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in Specification Section 027200 Control of Wastewater Flows. 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Leakage Testing: (Required for all types of pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR LEAKAGE TESTING shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall test the entire system for leaks. This work shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 2. POLY-VINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)PIPE shall be tested in accordance with Uni- Bell Plastic Pipe Association - Standard UNI-B-6 "Recommended Practice for Low- Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe"; the requirements of which are summarized by the following equation: T=0.00237D2L [Equation 1] Where: T=Minimum allowable time(seconds)for a pressure drop of one (1)psi gage pressure D =Nominal pipe diameter(inches) L=Length of pipe run (feet) The test section shall be plugged and subjected to a test pressure not in excess of five (5)psi. The time required for a one (1)psi pressure drop shall be measured and shall not exceed the value obtained in Equation 1 above. 027602 Page 4 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Deflection Testing: (Required for PVC Pipe) 1. EQUIPMENT FOR DEFLECTION TESTING shall be provided by the Contractor. Mandrels shall be provided by the Contractor and will be of machined rigid corrosion-resistant pipe with a length not less than 1.5 diameters. Mandrels will be sized for SDR 26 PVC pipe at 5% deflection. The outside diameter of the standard mandrels shall be as follows: Nominal Size (inches) Mandrel O.D. (inches) 8 7.11 10 8.87 12 10.55 15 12.90 18 15.76 21 18.56 24 20.87 27 23.51 30 27.14 2. TESTING shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer. All pipe shall be tested for deflection no less than 30 days after placement of backfill. The Contractor may wish to check pipe immediately after backfilling for job control. However, this shall not qualify as acceptance testing. No pipe can be tested for formal acceptance until it has been in place, complete with backfill, for at least 30 days. 3. Belly: Pipe shall be rejected if belly exceeds 5%based on the readings from the video inspection. C. Retesting: ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable D. Cleaning and Televising: All wastewater lines and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits". 5. SOIL BORINGS The City does not assume responsibility for subsurface information. Soil data and other subsurface information, if shown on the drawings or in the appendix, are without warranty as to correctness of fact or interpretation. 027602 Page 5 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. BRACING AND SHORING Trenching operation shall comply with Worker Safety Requirements for Excavation and Trenching Operations. If, for whatever reason, the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Engineer to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gravity wastewater lines shall be measured by the linear foot for each size and depth of wastewater line installed, as follows: A. Between centers of manholes. B. From the center of a manhole to the end of the line. C. From the end of an existing stub to the end of the line or center of the existing manhole. Depth shall be measured from flow line of pipe to ground surface over centerline of the pipe at the time of construction. Measurements to be made at manholes, at intervals not to exceed fifty feet, and at breaks in ground profile. Bedding shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to pipe, unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, de-watering shall not be measured for pay,but shall be considered subsidiary unless included as a separate bid item in the Bid Form for well-pointing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, pipe, bedding, de-watering, hauling, trench excavation and backfill, leakage and deflection testing, cleaning, televising, bypass pumping, and all cleaning up and other incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in-place. 027602 Page 6 of 6 Rev.7-1-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 028020 SEEDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for tilling, fertilizing, planting seeds, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS 2.1 FERTILIZER: All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or clearly marked containers showing the analysis, name, trademark and warranty. The fertilizer is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas fertilizer law. Fertilizer shall have an analysis of 12-12-12 (percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash) as determined by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fertilizer shall be free flowing and uniform in composition. 2.2 SEED: Seed shall be labeled and meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Labels shall indicate purity, germination, name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop, and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve months of delivery to the project. The quantity of"Commercial Seed" required to equal the quantity of"Pure Live Seed" shall be computed by the following formula: Commercial Seed=Pure Live Seed x 10,000 %Purity x % Germination The quantity of pure live seed and type required are indicated below. Mixture A or C shall be used for this project, depending on the time of the year planting is performed. LB/ACRE OF PURE LIVE SEED FOR MIXTURES COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME A B C Green Sprangletop Leptochloa Dubia 1.4 1.4 - Sideoats Grama(premier) Bouteloua Curtipendula 0.6 - 0.6 Bermudagrass (Hulled) Cynodon Dactylon 7.0 7.4 - Bermudagrass (Unhulled) Cynodon Dactylon - - 30.0 K-R Bluestem Andropogon Ischaemum 1.2 1.2 1.5 Buffalograss Buchloe Dactyloides - 4.2 - Annual Ryegrass Lolium Multiflorum 5.0 5.0 20.0 Mixture-A: Recommended for clay or tight soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture-B: Recommended for sandy soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture- C: Recommended for all soils planted between May 2 thru November 30. 028020 Page 1 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.3 MULCH: Mulch shall be either the straw type or wood cellulose fiber type. Straw Type mulch shall be of straw from stalks of domestic grain, Bermudagrass or cotton hulls, or other approved by the Engineer. Wood Cellulose Fiber Type mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients and shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10% by weight. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry; when sprayed on the ground, the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds; the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 lb. gross weight and shall be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the dry weight content. 2.4 EQUIPMENT: The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: Seeder - Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne, homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator and capable of pressure discharge. Straw Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for straw mulch application shall be trailer mounted, equipped with a blower capable of 2000 r.p.m. operation, and that will discharge straw mulch material through a discharge boom with spout at speeds up to 220 feet per second. The mulch spreader shall be equipped with an asphalt supply and application system near the discharge end of the boom spout. The system shall apply asphalt adhesive in atomize form to the straw at a predetermined rate. The spreader shall be capable of blowing the asphalt-coated mulch, with a high velocity airstream, over the surface at a uniform rate, forming a porous, stable erosion-resistant cover. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs. of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 028020 Page 2 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 PREPARATION OF SEEDBED: The area to be treated along with requirements for seed, fertilizer and other treatments, shall be done as indicated on the drawings and as specified below. Clearing—Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021020, "Site Clearing and Stripping". Grading -Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021040, "Site Grading". Tilling -The area to be seeded shall be tilled to a depth of 4 to 6 inches by disking,plowing, or other approved methods until soil condition is acceptable. Topsoiling — If the native soils are not conducive to the establishment and maintenance of grass growth, or if called for on the drawings,topsoil shall be placed over the area to be seeded to a depth of 5 inches after tilling. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7; shall contain between 2 and 20 percent organic material content in accordance with ASTM D5268; and shall be free of stones larger than one inch, debris, and extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 3.2 FERTILIZING: Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre, after tilling. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry, the mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.3 SEEDING: The seed mixture shall be uniformly distributed at the rate specified above. Broadcast Seedin; - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After planting, the area shall be rolled on contour with a corrugated roller. Straw Mulch Seeding - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After placement of the seed and fertilizer mixture, straw mulch shall be uniformly placed at a rate of 2 tons per acre. As soon as the mulch has been spread, it shall be anchored to the soil a minimum depth of 3 inches by use of a heavy, dulled disk harrow, set nearly straight. Disks shall be set approximately 9 inches apart. Straw Mulch With Asphalt Seeding - Seed, fertilizer and straw mulch shall be placed as described in "Straw Mulch Seeding" with the following two exceptions: 1) An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied to the mulch near the discharge end of the boom spout at a rate of 300 to 600 gallons per acre. 2)Mechanical anchoring by disking will not be required. Asphalt Mulch Seeding - The seed and fertilizer shall be placed as described for 'Broadcast Seeding". After the area has been rolled, the area shall be watered sufficiently to assure a uniform moisture to a minimum depth of 4 inches. An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 1500 to 1800 gallons per acre, immediately after watering. Asphalt shall be applied to the area in such a manner that a complete film is obtained and the finished surface shall be 028020 Page 3 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 comparatively smooth. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - After tilling, mulch shall be applied. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seed, fertilizer, water and other approved materials are added. Application shall be 1500 Ib./acre on flats, 2000 Ib./acre on slopes up to 3:1, and 2500 Ib./acre on slopes steeper than 3:1. One hundred (100)pounds of fiber per acre shall be used when asphalt is to be applied over cellulose mulch. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. Asphalt Over Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - "Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding" shall be done as described above. After mulch has been placed, an asphalt-water emulsion shall be uniformly spread over the mulch at a rate of 1200 gallons per acre. 3.4 MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall water, repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days or until growth has been established, whichever is longer. This includes erosion damage. Maintenance does not include mowing or weed control, unless indicated on the plans. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seeds have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.5 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall assure 95% of the seeded area has established grass growth at 45 calendar days after seeding, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Where established, grass growth is defined as at least one plant per square foot with no bare spots larger than three (3) square feet. The Contractor shall re-establish grass growth as directed by the Engineer during the one-year warranty period. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, seeding will be measured by the horizontal square yard of area seeded within the areas designated on the drawings. Areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside of the designated areas (such as field office, laydown/ storage area, stockpile areas, etc.) shall be seeded by the Contractor for erosion control per the stormwater pollution prevention plan but will not be measured for payment. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, and shall include, but not be limited to, tilling soil, topsoiling, fertilizing, planting, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation. Payment shall be due and payable only after grass growth has been established as described above. 028020 Page 4 of 4 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (2) Mixing _Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as 5O4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof, free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-�/z 2 1-�/z 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1-�/z in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A)plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Agate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0to5 0to20 15to50 35to75 70to90 90to100 97to100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans,the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans,the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor,reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements,the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Desi_ng ation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength(f c) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs,piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type H Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete,the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum,the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge,the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching _Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. _ (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm)will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only,the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75,will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made,the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sq. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 43, 44, 45 4d 46, 47, 48 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 43 thru 48 6d 49, 410 8d -- 411 8d 8d 414, 418 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: Plan Dimon. a 3/4" 7/8" Bar or Smaller--Plan. Dimon. _ !/2' 1" Bar or Larger --P+an_ D+men. ; 1` H= over 6'.--Opmere.t Zero or -1/27 1.1 = 6� an less-Dimon- • Zero or -#/4' i# 7/8- Bar or Smoker--Pion. 2r Dimon. = 1/ r 1" Bar or L arger--Pian Dimon. = 1 Piro$ or Circular Tie Tie air Startup gPIan0ime;n.*IY Plan Cho-s 1/2 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection,provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements L,a Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d=bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer,the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meetthe requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)",exceptthatthe requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer,Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer,Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials,when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C,shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77°F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O°F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manuf.). Pass Flow at 200°F................................. None Water Content%by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158°F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 31/2"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D 1752"Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft' Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete",Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm,continuous,uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall,when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein,be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check,peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only)curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open j oints and j oints to be filled with expansion j oint material,shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber j oint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch(1") of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The j oint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term "monolithic placement" shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall betaken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For j ob fabricated forms,an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment,shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to preventbulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch(1/16"). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work,the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness,with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and j oists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical, i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch(3/4") on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork All moldings,panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2") from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2") from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design,mortar-tightness, filleted corners,beveled projections,bracing,alignment,removal,reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps,pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing,the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only,and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes Agitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work,the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started,the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet,except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors,pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes,troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary,the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold j oint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold j oints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically,at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to butnot againstthe joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary,to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four(4)full curing days. If carts are used,timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set,at least one(1)curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete maybe placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature,the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F,and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers,culverts walls,retaining walls,parapets,wingwalls,bottoms of slabs,and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed,prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms,and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities,may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for j ob site precast products,the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket,or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel;the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1)nor more than two (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article"Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted,if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer,and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case, measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off,the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working,the surface shall be approximately leveled,struck off and screeded,carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer,the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch(1/16")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep,with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen,the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for anyone test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8"), making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16") will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer, irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities,therefore,shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four(4) curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F,the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subj ectto the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Pondin;. This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2") of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 (1") depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curin;. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED MEMBRANE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNIT WATER FOR WATER FOR DESCRIPTION FOR INTERIM FOR INTERIM CURING CURING CURING CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, X* X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, X* X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects,or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage,an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing,curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 to the work,the Contractor,when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal,all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins,runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense,well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification,but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 050200 WELDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the field welding of structural steel and reinforcing steel. Provisions are made herein for the welding of the types of steel listed in Table 1, using the manual shielded metal-arc process, semi-automatic (manual) gas metal-arc welding and flux cored arc welding processes. Other welding processes may be permitted with the specific approval of the Engineer and with qualification of the welding procedure. 2. STRUCTURAL STEEL GENERAL Final welds including tack welds to be incorporated therein shall be by a certified welder; certified welder being previously certified by tests as prescribed in the "Code for Welding in Building Construction," ASW D1.0-69, of the American Welding Society, to perform the type of work required. Miscellaneous welds may be made by a qualified welder; qualified welder being an experienced welder who is capable of making good welds of sound quality, but does not have certification papers; miscellaneous welds being welds that have no load carrying capacity in the completed structure. Tack welds shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds shall be removed. Welds shall be as required by the contract or erection drawings. The location or size shall not be changed without approval of the Engineer. The welder shall place his identification mark with crayon or paint near the groove welds made by him. No welding will be allowed when the air temperature is lower than 20°F,when surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow or wind, or when operators are exposed to inclement conditions that will hamper good workmanship. Any moisture present at the point of welding shall be driven off by heat before welding commences. Windbreaks shall be required for the protection of all welding operations. There shall be no temporary welds for transportation, erection or other purpose on main members, except at locations more than one-sixth the depth of the web from the flanges of beams and girders, as approved by the Engineer. On A514 steel, all groove welds in main members and in flanges of beams and girders subject to tensile stress or reversals of stress shall be finished smooth and flush on all surfaces, including edges, by grinding in the direction of applied stress, leaving the surfaces free from depressions. Chipping may be used provided it is followed by such grinding. Parts joined by groove welds connecting plates of unequal thickness or width shall have a smooth transition between offset surfaces at a slope not greater than one in four with the surface of either part. The surfaces shall be ground so that the radii at the points of transition will be four(4) inches minimum. 050200 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 All groove welds, except when produced with the aid of backing, shall have the root of the initial weld gouged, chipped or otherwise removed to sound metal before welding is started from the second side, except that back gouging will not be required when welding steel piling or armor joints with E6010 electrodes. The back side shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing back-up pass. When backing for welds is left in place to become a part of the structure, it shall be a single length insofar as possible. Where more than a single length is needed, they shall be joined by full penetration butt welds. The surfaces of this butt weld shall be ground flush as necessary to obtain proper fit-up in the weld joint. Before welding over previously deposited metal, all slag shall be removed, and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be cleaned. This requirement shall apply equally to successive layers, successive beads and the crater area. Arc strikes outside the area of permanent welds must be avoided on all steels. Where they do occur, resulting cracks and blemishes shall be ground out to a smooth contour and checked to insure soundness. Stringer bead technique shall be used where possible for groove welds on all types of steel. Weaving will not be permitted for A514 steel except in welding vertically upward, when a weave not exceeding two electrode diameters is permissible for manual shielded metal-arc welding. In all welding processes,the progression for all passes in vertical welding shall be upward using a back step sequence. Groove welds shall begin and terminate at the ends of a joint on extension bars. Edge preparation and thickness of extension bars shall be the same as that of the member being welded and shall extend a minimum of three-quarter(3/4) inch beyond the joint. Extension bars shall be removed with a cutting torch upon completion and cooling of the weld, and the flange edges shall be ground smooth. Any defects exposed by the grinding shall be cleaned, filled with weld metal, and reground to a uniform finish. All grinding shall be parallel to the flange. Excess grinding of the parent metal shall be avoided. 3. FILLER METAL Electrodes for manual shielded metal-arc welding shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of "Specifications for Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes", AWS A5.1, or to the requirements of the latest edition of"Specifications for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes," AWS A5.5. All electrodes and combination of electrode and shielding for gas metal-arc welding for producing weld metal with a minimum specified yield point not exceeding 60,000 psi shall conform to the requirements in the latest edition of, "Specification for Mild Steel Electrodes for Gas Metal-Arc Welding," AWS A5.18, or "Specification for Mild Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding," AWS A5.20, applicable for the classifications producing weld metal having a minimum impact strength of 20 ft.-lb., Charpy V-notch, at a temperature of 0°F or below. For weld metal with a minimum specified yield strength exceeding 60,000 psi, the Contractor shall demonstrate that each electrode and flux or combination of electrode and shielding medium proposed for use will produce low alloy weld metal having the mechanical properties listed in Table A. 050200 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 The mechanical properties shall be determined from a multiple pass weld made in accordance with the test requirements of the latest edition of AWS A5.18 or AWS A5.20, as applicable. TABLE A Required Mechanical Properties for GMAW and FCAW Electrodes Impact Tensile Yield Elongation, % Strength GMAW FCAW Strength Strength in 2 inches ft-lb @ 0°F- Grade Grade psi -Min psi -Min Min Min E80S E80T 80,000 65,000 18 20 E90S E90T 90,000 78,000 17 20 E100S E100T 100,000 90,000 16 20 El l OS MOT 110,000 98,000 15 20 The mechanical property tests for Grades E100S, EllOS, E100T and EllOT shall be made using ASTM A 514 base material. Class of electrode required will be as shown in Table 1 (below). Electrodes shall be used with the type of current, the polarity and in the positions permitted by AWS A5.1 and A5.5 for manual shielded metal-arc welding. AWS A5.18 and A5.20 Specifications shall govern for gas metal-arc welding and flux cored arc welding. 050200 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATIONS OF ELECTRODES PERMITTED TYPE OF MAIN MEMBERS SECONDARY MEMBERS STEEL Groove&Fillet Welds Groove&Fillet Welds Steel Piling, E6010 E60T-8 E60XX E60T-8 E70S-2 A53 Pipe, E6011 E70S-113 E70XX E7XT-1 E70S-3 A500, E7016 E70S-2 E70S-113 E7XT-5 E70S-6 A501, E7018 E70S-3 E70S-2 E7XT-6 E70S-7 Armor Joints E70S-6 E70S-3 E7XT-8 E-705-7 E70S-6 E70U-1 A36, E7016 E70S-2 E7016 E70S-2 A441, E7018 E70S-3 E7018 E70S-3 A572-Grade 50 E7XT-1 E70S-6 E7XT-1 E70S-6 A588, E7XT-5 E70S-7 E7XT-5 E70S-7 A242 Deck Plates E7XT-6 E7XT-6 API Pipe E7XT-8 E7XT-8 A514 E11018M E110S E11018M E110S 21/2"Thick or Less El 10T El 10T A514 E10018M E100S E10018M E100S Over 21/2"Thick E100T E100T A588, A242, E8018, C-3 E8018, C-3 A618 Weathering E80T(3) E80S(3) E80T(3) Steel E80 S(3) Reinforcing Steel E7016 E7018 A572 Grades E8016 E80T 60 and 65 E8018 E80S for Light Towers 1. Use of the same type electrode with the next higher mechanical properties, in accordance with AWS A5.1 or A5.5,than those listed will be permitted. 2. In joints involving base metals of different yield points or strengths, low hydrogen electrodes applicable to the lower strength base metal may be used. 050200 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Before use, all electrodes with low hydrogen coverings conforming to AWS A5.1 shall be dried for not less than two hours between 450 and 500 degrees F and electrodes with low hydrogen coverings conforming to AWS A5.5 for not less than one hour at a temperature between 700 and 800 degrees F. Immediately after drying, electrodes shall be stored in ovens held at a temperature of at least 250 degrees F. E70 electrodes not used within four hours, E80 within two hours, and El 10 within one-half hour after removal from the storage oven shall be redried before use. Electrodes with flux which has been wet, cracked or otherwise damaged, shall not be used. When used for welding A514 steel, electrodes shall be dried at least one hour at temperatures between 700 and 800 degrees F before being used. Electrodes may be redried only once. Suitable facilities for drying and storage of electrodes shall be furnished at the job site, along with thermometers for checking and controlling the oven temperature. In humid atmospheres,the times allowed for use without redrying may be reduced. When gas or gas mixture is used for gas metal-arc welding, it shall be of a welding grade having a dew point of-40°F or lower. The gas manufacturer shall furnish certification to the Engineer that the gas or gas mixture is suitable for the intended application and will meet the dew point requirements. Welding wire coils removed from the original package shall be protected or stored to keep their characteristics or welding properties intact. Rusty coils, or portions of coils,that are rusty shall not be used. Preheat Preheat ahead of welding both groove and fillet welds (including tack welding) will be required as shown in Table 2. Any moisture present at the point of welding shall be driven off by preheating before welding begins. When the base metal is below the required temperature, it shall be preheated so the parts being welded are not less than the specified temperature within three inches (3") of the point of welding. Preheat and interpass temperatures must be sufficient to prevent crack formation. The preheat temperatures shown in Table 2 are minimum and higher preheats may be necessary in highly restrained welds. Preheating equipment shall be adequate to maintain the entire joint at or above the specified temperature. When possible, a joint shall be completely welded before it is allowed to cool below the specified temperature,but shall always be welded sufficiently to prevent cracking before cooling is permitted. Usually preheat and interpass temperatures shall not exceed 400° F for thickness up to 11/2 inches and 450°F for greater thickness. These temperatures shall never be exceeded on A514 steel. The welder shall have and use approved equipment for checking preheat and interpass temperatures at all times while welding is in progress. For all groove welds, preheat temperature shall be measured on the side opposite to which the heat is applied at points about three inches (3") away from the joint. 050200 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TABLE 2 MINIMUM PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE FOR MANUAL SHIELDED METAL-ARC WELDING, FLUX CORED ARC WELDING OR GAS METAL-ARC WELDING MANUAL OR SEMI-AUTOMATIC Thickness of GAS METAL-ARC WELDING, FLUX CORED ARC WELDING Thickness Part OR MANUAL SHIELDED METAL-ARC WELDING at Point of Welding (Inches) With Low Hydrogen Electrodes ASTM A36; A242; A441 A572 Grades 42, ASTM A514 45 and 50; A588 To 3/4, inclusive 50°F 50°F Over 3/4 to 1/z, inclusive 70°F 125°F Over 1�/2 to 21/2, inclusive 150°F 175°F Over 21/2 225°F 225°F (1) These temperatures are the minimum required for the thinner material shown for each increment, and higher preheat on a step basis will be required for the thicker material within each increment. Preheat and interpass temperatures must be sufficient to prevent crack formation and welding shall be carried continuously to completion or to a point that will assure freedom from cracking before the joint is allowed to cool below the minimum specified preheat and interpass temperature. Temperatures above those shown may be required for highly restrained welds. (2) When E7010 electrodes are permitted for tacking or temporary root pass, the material shall be preheated to 400°F. (3) When joining steels of different strengths or thickness with groove welds, the preheat and interpass temperatures for the higher strength steel and the average plate thickness shall be used. For fillet welds,the preheat shall be used for the higher strength steel and the thickest plate being welded. (4) When the base metal temperature is below 32° F, preheat to at least 70° F and maintain this minimum temperature during welding. (5) Heat input when welding A514 steel shall not exceed the steel producer's recommendations. (6) When moisture is present on the base metal, it shall be preheated to 200° F before welding is started. 4. QUALITY OF WELDS Weld metal shall be sound throughout. There shall be no cracks in any weld or weld pass. There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base metal and between successive passes throughout the joint. 050200 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from undercut more than one one-hundredth inch (1/100") deep when its direction is transverse to the primary stress in the part that is undercut. Undercut shall not be more than one thirty-second inch (1/32") deep when its direction is parallel to the primary stress in the part that is undercut. All craters shall be filled to the full cross section of the welds. All welds on A514 steel shall be visually examined for longitudinal or transverse cracks not less than 48 hours after completion of the welding. 5. CORRECTIONS When welding is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship, the following corrective measures will be required by the Engineer whose specific approval shall be obtained for making each correction. When requirements prescribe the removal of part of the weld or a portion of the base metal, removal shall be by oxygen gouging or arc-air gouging. Oxygen gouging shall not be used on A514 steel or A588 weathering steel. All surfaces shall be ground after arc-air gouging. Backgouging of splices in beams and girders or cutouts of defective welds shall be done by a welder qualified to make beam and girder splices. Where corrections require the deposition of additional weld metal, the sides of the area to be welded shall have sufficient slope to permit depositing new metal. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by removing and replacing the entire weld, or as follows: Excessive convexity. Reduce to size by grinding off the excess weld metal. Shrinkage cracks. Cracks in base metal, craters and excessive porosity. Remove defective portions of base and weld metal down to sound metal and replace with additional sound weld metal. Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity. Clean and deposit additional weld metal. Overlapping and incomplete fusion. Remove and replace the defective portion of weld. Slag inclusions. Remove the parts of the weld containing slag and replace with sound weld metal. Removal of adjacent base metal during welding. Clean and form full size by depositing additional weld metal. Where corrections require the deposition of additional weld metal, the electrode used shall be smaller than that used for making the original weld. Surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly before re-welding. 050200 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unless the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited, in which case the weld metal shall be removed 2 inches (2")beyond each end of the crack and repairs made. Where work performed after the making of a deficient weld has made the weld inaccessible or has caused new conditions making the correction of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual,the original conditions shall be restored by removal of welds or members, or both, before making the necessary corrections, or else the deficiency shall be compensated by additional work according to a revised design approved by the Engineer. Improperly fitted and misaligned parts shall be cut apart and re-welded. Members distorted by the heat of welding shall be straightened by mechanical means or by the carefully supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. Heated areas shall not exceed 1200°F as measured by Tempil-sticks or other approved methods for steel up to 65,000 psi yield strength. Parts to be heat straightened shall be substantially free of stress from external forces, except when mechanical means are used in conjunction with the application of heat. Heat straightening of A514 steel shall be done only under rigidly controlled procedures, subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no case shall the maximum temperature of the steel exceed 1100'F. Sharp kinks and bends shall because for rejection of the material. 6. RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION All groove welds designed to carry primary stresses shall be subject to radiographic inspection. When subjected to such inspections, the presence of any of the following defects in excess of the limits indicated will result in rejection of the defective weld until corrected. 1. Sections of welds shown to have any cracking, regardless of length or location, incomplete fusion, overlapping, or inadequate penetration shall be judged unacceptable. 2. Inclusions less than one-sixteenth inch (1/16") in greatest dimension including slag, porosity and other deleterious material, shall be permitted if well dispersed so that the sum of the greatest dimensions of the inclusions in any linear inch of welded joint shall not exceed three-eighth inch (3/8"). 3. Inclusions one-sixteenth inch (1/16") or larger in greatest dimension shall be permitted provided such defects do not exceed the limits shown on Figure 1 or in subparagraph(2) above. 4. There shall be no inclusion greater than one-sixteenth inch (1/16") within one inch of the edge of part or member at the joint or point of restraint. 050200 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 FIGURE 1 STANDARDS FOR ALLOWABLE INCLUSIONS 11/2 1/2 y 7/16 W = 11/4 (I) PROJECT(A) HORIZONTALLY TO(g) F AZ a (2) PROJECT INTERSECTION 3/6 V O VEPMICALLY TO(C) S 39 41 tsZ�N g�� _J C7 3/4 1/4- 3F=-a: a I � w fQ4 1- 1/2 _J = J Z41 69 F- li 1/4 1/(s a 0I I I I I I I I FO 1/2 1 11/2 2 21/2 3 3 I!2 4 41/2 C— MINIMUM CLEARANCE MEASURED ALONG THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE WELD BETWEEN EDGES OF POROSITY OR FUSION-TYPE DEFECTS ( INCHES) {I AnsER OF Aojju=KT DEri=rs GV%M Ns) NOTES: (1) The distance from the edge of an inclusion to the edge of a plate or to any intersecting weld shall be equal to or greater than the clearance between inclusions. (2) Inclusions with any dimension greater than 1/2 inch are not acceptable. (3) For joint thickness greater than 11/2 inches, the minimum allowable dimension and spacing of inclusions shall be the same as for 11/2-inch joints. (4) Values of(B) obtained by projecting horizontally from (A) are maximum values. Any value of(B) smaller than the maximum is satifactory. (5) Values of (C) obtained by projecting vertically from (B) are minimum values. Any value of (C) larger than the minimum is satifactory. Radiographic inspection shall be made of A514 steel not less than 48 hours following the completion of the welding. For other steels, nondestructive inspection may begin immediately after welding and cleaning or grinding is completed. Definitions: Porosity signifies gas pockets or any similar generally globular type voids. Fusion-type defect signifies slag inclusions and similar elongated defects. 050200 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. REINFORCING STEEL- GENERAL Provisions are made herein for the welding of reinforcing steel by the manual shielded metal-arc process. Other processes may be permitted with the specific approval of the Engineer or may be specified on the plans. Splicing of reinforcing steel by welding shall be done only at locations approved by the Engineer. 8. BASE METAL Reinforcing steel to be welded shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, and shall also conform to the following chemical composition: Maximum Carbon 0.40 Percent Maximum Manganese 1.30 Percent 9. FILLER METAL Low hydrogen electrodes as specified in Table A will be required for all welding of reinforcing steel. Drying of electrodes shall be as specified in Article 3, "Filler Metal" for Structural Steel. 10. PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE Minimum preheat and interpass temperatures for reinforcing steel shall be as shown in Table 3. TABLE 3 PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE FOR REINFORCING STEEL CARBON RANGE NO. 7 & SMALLER NO. 8 &LARGER Up to and including 0.30 None 100 0.31 to 0.35 inclusive None 150 0.36 to 0.40 inclusive 100 250 Unknown 250 400 For widening projects,use carbon content and bar size of new steel to determine preheat required. 050200 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 11. JOINT TYPES For all bars No. 8 and larger, butt splices shall be required. For No. 7 bars and smaller, lap splices shall be required. Fillet welds in lap splices shall be a minimum of 4 inches in length and shall be welded on each side of the lap joint. For bars No. 5 and smaller, welding from one side of the lap will be permitted by the Engineer when it is impractical to weld from both sides of the joint, and the weld shall be a minimum of 6 inches in length. Lap welds shall meet the requirements specified in Table 4. Where possible, all butt splices shall be made in the flat position. All butt splices, except horizontal, shall be as shown in Figure 2 with the back-up strip required. Horizontal splices shall be as shown in Figure 3. TABLE 4 REQUIRED DIMENSIONS FOR LAP SPLICES "b" "t" "c" ELECTRODE BAR SIZE "a" Max. Min. Max. SIZE No. 4 0.04 in. 1/8 in. 1/8 in. 1/16 in. 1/8 in No. 5 0.05 in. 1/8 in. 3/16 in. 1/16 in. 5/32 in. No. 6 0.06 in. 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/16 in. 5/32 in. No. 7 0.07 in. 3/16 in. 5/16 in. 1/16 in. 5/32 in. 050200 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4° a 99�! a .c t b t c I o SEC. A-A (ENLARGED) TABLE 4 Required Dimensions for Lop Splices D��o 221!2821/2° 0 41 1 o v� —�-� MAX.d/a SEC D-D 5/32 I 1 MIN.dA D � Butt weld in flat position 1/1e" I o " 71/e BUTT WELD WITH BAR IN HORIZONTAL POSITION FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3 050200 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 12. WIDENING PROJECTS In general, the new reinforcing steel shall be either lap or butt spliced directly to the bar to be extended. When the reinforcement in the old portion of a structure is found to be of the wrong spacing, dowel bars long enough to develop the welded lap or butt splice and also develop the bar in bond, as required in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel", shall be welded to the old steel, and the new reinforcement placed at the correct spacing without welding to the old steel. No measurement or payment will be made for the dowels but will be subsidiary to the other items in the contract. Both old and new reinforcement shall be cleaned thoroughly prior to the preparation of the joint. 13. RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION When so designated on the plans, welded butt splices shall be radiographed. Weld quality shall be as follows: There shall be no cracks and the sum of the greatest dimensions of porosity and fusion-type defects shall not exceed one-tenth of the nominal bar diameter in inches. 14. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, welding will not be measured for pay, but will be considered subsidiary to the various other bid items in the Bid Form. 050200 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 055420 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the furnishing and installation of frames, grates, rings and covers for inlets, manholes and other structures in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36 "Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel". 2. MATERIALS Welded steel grates and frames shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the plans and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36. Castings, whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron, shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans and shall be clean substantial castings, free from burnt-on sand or blow holes, and shall be reasonable smooth. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grates and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the perimeter contact area. Pairs of machined castings shall be matchmarked to facilitate subsequent identification at installation. Steel castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A27 "Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application". Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Cast Iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings", Class 30. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings". Grade 60-40-18 shall be used otherwise specified. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the plans, and shall be placed carefully to the lines and grades indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be given one coat of a commercial grade red lead and oil paint and two coats of commercial grade aluminum paint. 055420 Page 1 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Painting on gray iron castings will not be required, except when used in conjunction with structural steel shapes. Commercial grade galvanized bolts and nuts shall be used. The zinc coating shall be uniform in thickness, smooth and continuous. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, frames, grates, rings and covers will not be measured for payment,but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 055420 Page 2 of 2 Rev.3-25-2015 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 0142 00 CODES AND STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Whenever reference is made to conforming to the standards of any technical society, organization, body, code or standard, it shall be construed to mean the latest standard, code, specification or tentative specification adopted and published at the time of advertisement for Bids. This shall include the furnishing of materials, testing of materials, fabrication and installation practices. In those cases where the Contractor's quality standards establish more stringent quality requirements, the more stringent requirement shall prevail. Such standards are made a part hereof to the extent which is indicated or intended. B. The inclusion of an organization under one category does not preclude that organization's standards from applying to another category. C. In addition, all work shall comply with the applicable requirements of local codes, utilities and other authorities having jurisdiction. D. All material and equipment, for which a UL Standard, an AGA or NSF approval or an ASME requirement is established, shall be so approved and labeled or stamped. The label or stamp shall be conspicuous and not covered, painted, or otherwise obscured from visual inspection. E. The standards which apply to this Project are not necessarily restricted to those organizations which are listed in Article 1.02. 1.02 STANDARD ORGANIZATIONS A. Piping and Valves ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers AWWA American Water Works Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association FCI Fluid Controls Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NSF National Sanitation Foundation PPI Plastic Pipe Institute Uni Bell PVC Pipe Association B. Materials AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ANSI American National Standards Institute Codes and Standards 014200 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials C. Painting and Surface Preparation NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council D. Electrical and Instrumentation AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers EIA Electronic Industries Association ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IPC Institute of Printed Circuits IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISA The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association REA Rural Electrification Administration TIA Telecommunications Industries Association UL Underwriter's Laboratories VRCI Variable Resistive Components Institute E. Aluminum AA Aluminum Association AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association F. Steel and Concrete ACI American Concrete Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute NRMA National Ready Mix Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute G. Welding ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers AWS American Welding Society H. Government and Technical Organizations Codes and Standards 014200 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 AIA American Institute of Architects APHA American Public Health Association APWA American Public Works Association ASA American Standards Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASQC American Society of Quality Control ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers CFR Code of Federal Regulations CSI Construction Specifications Institute EDA Economic Development Administration EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCC Federal Communications Commission FmHA Farmers Home Administration FS Federal Specifications IAI International Association of Identification ISEA Industrial Safety Equipment Association ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters (NFPA) National Fluid Power Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NISO National Information Standards Organization OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SI Salt Institute SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. USDC United States Department of Commerce WEF Water Environment Federation I. General Building Construction AHA American Hardboard Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AITC American Institute of Timber Construction APA American Parquet Association, Inc. APA American Plywood Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association DHI Door and Hardware Institute Codes and Standards 014200 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 FM Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Company HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association HTI Hand Tools Institute IME Institute of Makers of Explosives ISANTA International Staple, Nail and Tool Association ISDSI Insulated Steel Door Systems Institute IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association NAAMMNational Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAGDMNational Association of Garage Door Manufacturers NCCLS National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFSA National Fertilizer Solutions Association NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association SBC SBCC Standard Building Code SDI Steel Door Institute SIA Scaffold Industry Association SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute TCA Tile Council of America UBC Uniform Building Code J. Roadways AREA American Railway Engineering Association TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation K. Plumbing AGA American Gas Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute SPC SBCC Standard Plumbing Code L. Refrigeration, Heating, and Air Conditioning AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ARI American Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers Codes and Standards 014200 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 CGA Compressed Gas Association CTI Cooling Tower Institute HEI Heat Exchange Institute IIAR International Institute of Ammonia Refrigeration NB National Board of Boilers and Pressure Vessel Inspectors PFMA Power Fan Manufacturers Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SMC SBCC Standard Mechanical Code TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers Association M. Equipment AFBMA Anti Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association ALI Automotive Lift Institute CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America DEMA Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association OPEI Outdoor Power Equipment Institute, Inc. PTI Power Tool Institute, Inc. RIA Robotic Industries Association SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 1.03 SYMBOLS Symbols and material legends shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Codes and Standards 014200 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 01 61 16 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. These general equipment stipulations apply, in general, to all equipment and piping. They supplement the detailed equipment Specifications, but in case of conflict, the detailed equipment Specifications shall govern. 1.02 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the coordination of the installation of all equipment, materials and products furnished under these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for verification that all structures, piping and equipment components furnished by the Contractor and/or subcontractors and suppliers are compatible. The Contractor shall start up each equipment system and shall make all necessary alterations. All such alterations shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 1.03 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY A. Equipment manufacturers assigned unit responsibility for systems comprised of several components shall be responsible for furnishing a complete system in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The manufacturer shall be responsible for all coordination between component manufacturers and shall provide all submittals, installation and start-up services and certifications on the system as a unit. 1.04 ADAPTATION AND LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT A. No responsibility for alteration of a planned structure to accommodate other types of equipment will be assumed by the Owner. Equipment which requires alteration of the structures will be considered only if the Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating all necessary alterations. All such alterations shall be made at the Contractor's expense. B. The Contractor shall install the work in such manner that the equipment, piping, vents, conduit, panels, ductwork and appurtenances be as neatly installed with adequate space for maintenance and passage of personnel. 1.05 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective materials, breakage or other failure. The warranty period shall be defined in Section 01 70 00 of these Specifications. 1.06 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated and assembled in accordance with the most modern engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall be new and shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Iron castings shall be tough, close grained, gray iron free from blowholes, flaws or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30 minimum. Plugging of defective castings shall not be permitted. Castings shall be annealed to remove internal stresses prior to machining and shall have the mark number and heat number cast on them. C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. D. All replaceable or expendable elements such as filters, screens, drive belts, fuses and lamps shall be easily accessible and replaceable without need of dismantling equipment or piping. All such items shall be of a standard type that is readily available from multiple suppliers. E. Threaded openings for drains or vents in pump volutes, compressor or fan scrolls, air receivers, and heat exchangers which are plugged during normal operation shall be provided with stainless steel plugs. F. All equipment delivered to the Project site shall include detailed installation instructions and a parts list. 1.07 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS A. The use of singular or plural terminology in the Specifications is not intended to define the number of units required to fulfill Contract requirements. Bidders must consult the Drawings and Specifications to determine how many units of a particular piece of equipment are required. This does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide all equipment specified when multiple units are specifically required in the Specifications. 1.08 SEAL WATER REQUIREMENTS A. Where seal water is provided for flushing of mechanical shaft sleeves or sealing of shaft seal packing, provide equipment with drip pans fitted with drains to contain the leakage and convey it to the nearest suitable floor drain. Route drain piping to minimize obstructions to the movement of personnel. 1.09 OPERATING FLUIDS AND GASES A. All operating fluids and gases recommended by the manufacturer and required for operation of the equipment shall be provided in sufficient quantity by the Contractor to fill all equipment and to replace all fluids and gases consumed during testing and start up. 1.10 LUBRICATION AND LUBRICATION FITTINGS A. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during start up or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. B. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient quantity by the Contractor to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all lubricants consumed during testing, start up and initial operation. The Contractor shall provide sufficient quantities of manufacturer-approved lubricants to lubricate all equipment for one year of normal service before final acceptance of the equipment will be made by the Owner. C. Where special run in oil or storage lubricants are used, they shall be flushed out and replaced with the required service lubricant by the Contractor. General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Tag each piece of equipment with a cloth tag showing proper type lubricant, period between lubrications, date of lubrication and worker's initials. Have space for 10 lubrication notations. E. Except for rotating shaft couplings, all lubrication fittings shall be brought to the outside of all equipment so that they are readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings or guards. Fittings shall be accessible from safe, permanent platforms or walk areas. Fittings shall be of the bull neck, check type for use with a portable high pressure grease gun. Connection from a remote fitting to the point of use shall be with minimum 3/16 inch stainless steel tubing, securely mounted parallel to equipment lines and protected where exposed to damage. 1.11 SAFETY GUARDS A. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gauge or heavier galvanized or aluminum clad sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Expanded metal safety guards shall be banded to eliminate sharp edges. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. All safety guards shall comply with OSHA General Industry Standards, Part 1910, Subpart O, Machinery and Machine Guarding. Provide tachometer access on shaft ends. 1.12 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Where shown on the Drawings, equipment shall be installed on a raised, reinforced concrete base. The base shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height and shall extend beyond the equipment baseplate approximately 2 inches on all sides. B. The Engineer shall be consulted concerning electrical conduit locations prior to pouring the concrete base. C. Unless otherwise specified, a cast iron or welded steel baseplate shall be provided for each pump, compressor and any other item of equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base. Each unit and drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a raised lip all around and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with epoxy or non shrink grout as specified in the grouting section. D. Centrifugal blower bases shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Unless manufacturer instructions direct otherwise, blower bases shall be set on resilient pads and not hard bolted to the concrete pad. Where anchor bolts are utilized, threaded embedments or adhesive or expansion anchor studs shall be used with two nuts locked with a minimum 1/8-inch gap between nut and base frame. E. On direct coupled equipment, motor and driven equipment shall be doweled to a common base with a minimum of two dowels each. 1.13 ALIGNMENT OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT A. In every case where a drive motor is connected to a driven piece of equipment by a flexible coupling, the coupling halves shall be disconnected and the alignment between the motor and the equipment checked and corrected. Machinery shall first be properly aligned and leveled by means of steel wedges and shims or jacking screws near anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall be tightened against the shims on wedges or jacking screws and the equipment shall again be checked for level and alignment before placing grout. Wedges shall not be placed between machined surfaces. General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. In general, checking and correcting the alignment shall follow the procedures published in the manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manual. In addition, pumps shall be set up in accordance with the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Instructions for Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Centrifugal Pumps, unless manufacturer's direction is contradictory. Equipment shall be properly leveled and brought into angular and parallel alignment. C. Equipment shall be installed in such a way that no strain is transmitted to the equipment by piping systems or adjacent equipment. 1.14 GROUTING A. A special epoxy, non shrink, or sand cement grout shall be used in the placement of all pump, motor and equipment baseplates or bedplates, column baseplates, other miscellaneous baseplates and other grouting applications as shown on the Drawings. 1.15 WELDING AND BRAZING A. All welds shall be sound and free from embedded scale and slag. All butt welds shall be continuous, and where exposed to view, shall be ground smooth. All continuous welds shall be gas and liquid tight. Welds in piping shall have full penetration and shall be smooth on the inside of the pipe. Intermittent welds shall have an effective length of at least 2 inches and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches apart. B. All welding of steel and aluminum, including materials, welding techniques, general safety practices, appearance and quality of welds, and methods of correcting defective work, shall conform to the latest requirements of AWS Specifications. Structural steel welding shall conform to the requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code. The general recommendations and requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code shall also apply to welded aluminum structures. The welding process and welding operators shall meet qualification tests and welding performance tests in accordance with the latest provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Welding process and qualification procedures for welding of pipe shall conform to the latest requirements of ANSI B31.1, Section 327, Welding, and Section 328, Brazing and Soldering. All welding qualification tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer, except as provided herein. All costs associated with the qualification or testing of welders and welding operators shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Welding of stainless steels shall be performed by the MIG or TIG process, in accordance with ASME and AWS recommendations. After welding is completed, the welds shall be ground smooth, where required, and all welds shall be pickled and passivated such that the weld will be no less corrosion resistant than the base metal welded. D. Reports certifying that the welding procedures, welders and welding operators that the Contractor intends to use meet the requirements specified above. These reports shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to beginning the work. In the case of welder qualifications for shop welding and for carbon steel field welding, welders presenting certified qualification papers validated within the preceding 6 month period will not be required to take the qualification tests. In the case of field welding of stainless steel or aluminum, all welders shall be required to take the qualification tests regardless of past experience or availability of certified qualification papers. E. Field welding practices shall conform to OSHA construction standards, Part 1926, Subpart J, Welding and Cutting. Shop welding practices shall conform to OSHA General Industry Standards, Part 1910, Subpart Q, Welding, Cutting, and Brazing. F. Welding electrodes for structural steel shall conform to the standard recommendations of the AISC. Welding electrodes for stainless steel shall conform to applicable AWS Specifications and shall be as recommended by "Welded Austenitic Chromium Nickel Stainless Steels, Techniques General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 and Properties", published by the International Nickel Company, New York, New York. Welding electrodes for aluminum shall conform to applicable AWS Specifications. G. Each welder and welding operator must identify all welds with welder's assigned symbol. H. Welders performing unsatisfactory work shall be removed from the welding process. I. The Owner may inspect any weld by radiographic or other means. Welds not in accordance with the requirements specified herein shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense. Excessive porosity, nonmetallic inclusions, lack of fusion, incomplete penetration and cracking shall constitute grounds for rejection of welds. 1.16 ERECTION AND SETTING A. In the erection and setting of all fabricated equipment, the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure that each item of equipment is adequately supported so as not to bend or distort under its own weight until adequate foundation support and anchorage are provided. Where lifting lugs, angles or clips are provided on equipment, they shall be used in erecting and setting the equipment. Erection and setting of equipment and structural steel shall conform to the requirements of OSHA Construction Standards, Part 1926, Subpart R, Steel Erection, Subpart H, Material Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal, and Subpart N, Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, and Conveyors. Erection of structural steel shall conform to the latest requirements of the AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. During placement and prior to any grouting or connection of adjacent piping, the equipment shall be leveled and aligned true to level, plumb, alignment and grade with all parts bearing or fitting the structure or equipment accurately and securely. It shall not be permitted to cock out of alignment, nor shall the Contractor redrill, reshape or force fit any fabricated items. Connections of process piping to mechanical equipment nozzles/fittings shall be brought into alignment, one to the other. When joints are made up, there shall be no force exerted on the equipment connection. C. The Contractor shall take all measurements necessary to properly fit Contractor's work in the field, and Contractor shall be governed by and responsible for these measurements and the proper working out of all details. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all work in the field and the accurate placement of all anchor bolts installed by Contractor. D. The Contractor shall bring all parts to be erected or assembled into close contact. Before assembly, all surfaces to be in contact with each other shall be thoroughly cleaned. Drift pins may be used only for bringing members into position, never to enlarge or distort holes. Torching or burning of holes or cutting of fabricated items to correct misalignment or shop errors shall not be permitted. Enlargement of holes necessary to make field connections shall be done only with the Engineer's approval by reaming with twist drills and in a manner acceptable to Engineer. E. All equipment shall be furnished with suitable eyebolt lifting lugs or lifting angles to facilitate handling. F. All flanged piping connections shall be "Two-Holed" such that the two upper-most flange bolt holes are horizontal. 1.17 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments and accessories required for proper maintenance. Special tools and accessories shall include those tools and accessories not normally available in an industrial hardware or mill supply house. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.18 GALVANIZING A. All galvanizing shall be done by the hot dip process after fabrication in conformity with requirements of ASTM A 123, Grade 100; ASTM A 153, ASTM A 384 and ASTM A 385. Articles to be galvanized shall be pickled before galvanizing. Articles to be painted shall not be quenched. B. Where galvanized bolts are specified or required by the Drawings, zinc plated bolts will be acceptable provided zinc plating conforms to ASTM B 633, Type II. C. Areas of galvanizing damaged at the factory by welding or burning or otherwise damaged shall be thoroughly stripped and cleaned and recoated with zinc to the required thickness by the hot dip process. Areas of galvanizing damaged in the field during transportation, handling or installation shall be stripped, cleaned, and recoated with zinc to the required thickness in accordance with ASTM A 780, Annex A3. D. Galvanized articles shall be free from uncoated spots, blisters, flux, black spots, dross, projections and other defects not consistent with acceptable galvanizing practice. E. Zinc and cadmium plating shall be subject to visual examination to determine uniformity of coating. The Engineer may require that the coating uniformity be tested in accordance with ASTM A 239 or ASTM E 376. 1.19 VIBRATION TESTING A. Unless specified otherwise in the Specifications, each pump or blower having a rated power of 50 HP, or greater, shall be tested in the field for acceptable vibration levels. Vibration testing shall be performed by an experienced, factory trained and authorized vibration analysis expert (not a sales representative) retained by the Contractor for this work. Each unit shall be tested separately without duplicate equipment running. All field testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall be furnished with four certified copies of vibration test data for each test performed. For vertical turbine pumps, acceptable motor vibration, measured with the motor mounted on the pump, uncoupled, shall not exceed 1/3 of the Hydraulic Institute standard for the pump. Motor site vibration tests shall be performed with all piping and appurtenances connected to the pump, but with the motor mechanically uncoupled from the pump. Vertical turbine pumps and motors shall be tested on-site, with readings taken at both the upper motor bearing housing and at the pump discharge head/motor pedestal top mounting plate. All tests specified below shall be performed and recorded at both locations for vertical turbine pumps. For constant speed systems, these vibration tests shall be performed with the pump coupled to the motor and at rated speed and flow. B. Where specified in the Specifications, equipment which is assembled and tested on the manufacturer's floor shall also be checked triaxially for vibration by the manufacturer. The results of these tests, along with location of vibration check points, shall be submitted to the Engineer. All readings shall be made on an X Y recorder with appropriate scales indicated and an explanation thereon of any recordings exceeding specified limits. The field tests shall include substantiation of the manufacturer's test data. Include in the vibration testing data the support condition of the equipment and a photo of the equipment mounted for vibration testing. C. For systems with variable speed drives, tests shall be conducted at various speeds between maximum and minimum speed, and at two speeds equally-spaced between minimum and maximum. Variable speed vertical pumps shall be tested at the full speed design condition, and then vibration shall be recorded as speed is slowly reduced to the minimum design speed to identify any peaks within the speed range. For systems with two speed drives, tests shall be conducted at both speeds. For systems with constant speed drives, tests shall be conducted under various loading conditions as determined by the Engineer. D. Rotating equipment shall be tested for vibration in the field after installation by the following method. Equipment, complete with drive systems, in place at the job site, shall not vibrate more General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 than the values allowed herein, unless otherwise specified in the detailed equipment specifications. All field tests shall be running tests with the equipment operating on the product for which it is intended or a substitute acceptable to the Engineer. The term displacement, as used herein, shall mean total peak to peak movement of vibrating equipment, in mils; velocity shall mean the peak velocity or speed of the vibrating equipment, in inches per second; acceleration shall mean the maximum acceleration which occurs during the vibration cycle, measured in Gs. Displacement and velocity shall be measured by a meter equal to IRD Balancing Vibration Analyzer Model 258, or Bently Nevada Model TK 8. Acceleration shall be measured by suitable equipment equal to IRD Mechanalysis, Bently Nevada, subject to approval of the Engineer. Frequency of vibration, in cycles per minute (cpm), shall be determined when vibration exceeds specified levels or as otherwise necessary. Vibration shall be measured on the bearing housing, unless other locations are deemed necessary by the vibration analysis expert and Engineer. E. For all equipment tested, vibration shall be checked in the radial and axial directions. For pumps, vibration shall not exceed that permitted by the Hydraulic Institute. F. Critical speeds of all rotating equipment shall meet the following: 1. For stiff shaft designs, the first critical speed of the rotating equipment shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum design operating speed. 2. For flexible shaft designs, critical speeds shall be at least 2 percent above or below normal design operating speeds. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for unit and system assembly vibration testing and their results, which shall be within the specified limits. Copies of test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Should the vibration field test results exceed shop test results or the limits specified herein, the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies within 30 days. After corrections have been completed, the vibration testing shall be rerun and the results resubmitted to the Engineer for review. 1.20 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS A. All pipes, tubes and hoses for hydraulic fluid shall be securely restrained against movement. All tubing and hoses shall be routed, shielded and supported such that rubbing or abrasion of the jacket shall not occur. B. All hydraulic fluid reservoirs for hydraulic power packs shall be equipped with a low level shut off mechanism which shall stop operation of the power pack when the level of fluid in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level. Reservoirs shall have a sight glass or tube allowing visual inspection of level and lubricant appearance. C. All hydraulic systems shall be equipped with an alarm to notify the operator of system malfunction. 1.21 NOISE CRITERIA A. Unless otherwise specified, noise levels for all operating equipment shall not exceed 90 dB at 5 feet from the equipment when measured on the A scale of a calibrated sound level meter at slow response. B. Noise criteria shall be met without the use of special external barriers or enclosures. 1.22 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. General: All equipment and piping specified to be painted shall be color coded as specified in Section 09 91 00 of these Specifications. B. Equipment: All major items of equipment shall have an identification nameplate and dataplate. General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Nameplates: The Contractor shall submit a suitable list of all items of major equipment to the Engineer, who will furnish the Contractor with an identification numbering system. The nameplates shall be of Type 304 stainless steel, No. 6 finish, and not less than No. 16 gauge with indented stamped lettering. Nameplates shall be attached to equipment bases in easily visible and accessible locations. Nameplates shall be fastened in a permanent manner, arranged not to damage the equipment, with not less than four stainless steel fasteners. 2. Dataplates: Each item of mechanical equipment shall be provided with a stainless steel dataplate. Separate dataplates shall be provided for motors, engines and driven equipment. Dataplates shall include the following minimum information: a. Name of equipment (from equipment specifications) b. Manufacturer C. Model designation d. Serial number e. Rated horsepower f. Service factor g. Electrical and insulation data h. Speed (rpm) i. Capacity and head (discharge pressure) j. Net weight k. Lettering shall be upper case, block style in size and spacing to suit the nameplate. The identification nameplates shall not be painted. C. Valves: All valves shall be identified with a round stainless steel disc, approximately 1 1/2 inches in diameter and not less than No. 14 gauge, coated with a clear lacquer. Discs shall be fastened to valves in a permanent manner; attachment by chain to handwheels or other operators shall not be acceptable. Discs shall be stamped using indented numerals and/or letters with a valve number corresponding to its identification number in the valve schedule to be included in the operation and maintenance manual. D. All pushbutton stations, switches, motor controllers, transmitters and other control equipment shall have identification nameplates of the engraved, laminated plastic type affixed to or adjacent to the switch, pushbutton station, etc. E. All manufacturer's nameplates, identification nameplates and ASME code plates located on areas of equipment to be insulated shall be removed and reattached on uninsulated areas in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 1.23 SAFETY SIGNS A. Permanent safety signs shall be furnished and installed on all mechanical and electrical equipment where a hazard may exist. Signs shall be made in accordance with current OSHA requirements and shall be suitable for exterior use. Mounting details shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; location in accordance with governing agency regulations. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. B. Safety signs shall be approximately 10 inches high by 14 inches wide, colored yellow and black on minimum 0.080 inch aluminum stock. C. Safety signs shall be furnished and will include, but not be limited to, the following: General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. The following sign shall be affixed to all equipment which may be started automatically from a remote location: CAUTION THIS EQUIPMENT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY BY REMOTE CONTROL 2. The following sign shall be affixed to all electrical equipment or instrument panels, as applicable: CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD THIS EQUIPMENT IS POWERED BY MULTIPLE SOURCES CONTACTS MAY BE ENERGIZED AFTER LOCAL POWER IS DISCONNECTED 3. The following sign shall be provided at all areas where oxygen or flammable materials are stored or used (colored red, white and black): DANGER NO SMOKING, MATCHES, OR OPEN FLAMES 4. The following sign shall be affixed to all entrance hatches or access manways on covered tanks and vessels: CAUTION OXYGEN DEFICIENT OR TOXIC CONDITIONS MAY EXIST FOLLOW PRESCRIBED PROCEDURES BEFORE ENTRY 5. The following sign shall be provided at all compressor vents and equipment blowoffs: CAUTION LOUD BLOWDOWN MAY OCCUR WITHOUT WARNING 6. All chemical or hazardous material storage tanks containing flammable, toxic, reactive and otherwise unstable materials, or materials representing a personnel safety hazard shall be labeled in accordance with NFPA 704. Signage shall be applied to the tank exterior at all four architectural elevations (N, S, E & W) as well as the filling station. The NFPA signs shall have the color coded diamonds and shall indicate the actual chemical name and emergency response info. END OF SECTION General Equipment Stipulations 01 61 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 0175 00 TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for equipment and system testing and facility start up, including the following: 1. Start-Up Plan. 2. Performance Testing. 3. General Start-Up and Testing Procedures. 4. Functional Testing. 5. Operational Testing. 6. Certificate of Proper Installation. 7. Services of manufacturer's representatives. 8. Training of OWNER's personnel. 9. Final testing requirements for the complete facility. 1.02 GENERAL TESTING, TRAINING,AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Contract Requirements: Testing, training, and start-up are requisite to the satisfactory completion of the Contract. B. Complete testing, training, and start-up within the Contract Times. C. Allow realistic durations in the Progress Schedule for testing, training, and start-up activities. D. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and operational testing. E. Provide competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment manufacturers for assembly, installation and testing guidance, and operator training. 1.03 START-UP PLAN A. Submit start-up plan for each piece of equipment and each system not less than 3 weeks prior to planned initial start-up of equipment or system. B. Provide detailed sub-network of Progress Schedule with the following activities identified: 1. Manufacturer's services. 2. Installation certifications. 3. Operator training. 4. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual. 5. Functional testing. 6. Performance testing 7. Operational testing. Testing,Training,and Facility Start-up 01 75 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 08/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Provide testing plan with test logs for each item of equipment and each system when specified. Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows, pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters. D. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are necessary to complete start-up of new equipment and systems. E. Revise and update start-up plan based upon review comments, actual progress, or to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities. 1.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Test equipment for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly when specified. B. When Source Quality Control Testing is Specified: 1. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements. 2. Provide certified copies of test results. 3. Do not ship equipment until certified copies have received written acceptance from ENGINEER. Written acceptance does not constitute final acceptance. 4. Perform testing as specified in the equipment specification sections. C. Include costs associated with witnessing performance tests in the bid price. Include costs for[2] OWNER's representative for travel, lodging, transportation to and from lodging, and 50 Dollars meal allowance per person per day. 1.05 GENERAL START-UP AND TESTING PROCEDURES A. Mechanical Systems: As specified in the individual equipment specification sections 1. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during construction. 2. Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. Recharge lubrication system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer. 3. Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up. 4. Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, 0-rings, and other seals. Replace defective seals. 5. Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection. 6. Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of moving parts before connecting driver. 7. Perform cold alignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances. 8. Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves. 9. Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage but permit valve stems to rotate without galling.Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction. 10. Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. Inspect screwed joints for leakage. 11. Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to operational testing. B. Electrical Systems: As specified in the individual equipment specification sections: Testing,Training,and Facility Start-up 01 75 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 08/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring except 120-volt lighting, wiring, and control wiring inside electrical panels. 2. Perform continuity tests on grounding systems. 3. Test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper operation. 4. Perform direct current high potential tests on all cables that will operate at more than 2,000 volts. Obtain services of independent testing lab to perform tests. 5. Check motors for actual full load amperage draw. Compare to nameplate value. C. Instrumentation Systems:As specified in the individual equipment specification sections: 1. Bench or field calibrate instruments and make required adjustments and control point settings. 2. Leak test pneumatic controls and instrument air piping. 3. Energize transmitting and control signal systems, verify proper operation, ranges and settings. 1.06 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Perform checkout and performance testing as specified in the individual equipment specification sections. B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have been completed. C. Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative. D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation and other equipment functions. Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each control mode. E. Conduct continuous 8-hour test under full load conditions. Replace parts which operate improperly. 1.07 OPERATIONAL TESTING A. After completion of operator training, conduct operational test of the entire facility. Demonstrate satisfactory operation of equipment and systems in actual operation. B. Conduct operational test for continuous 7-day period. C. OWNER will provide operations personnel, power, fuel, and other consumables for duration of test. D. Immediately correct defects in material,workmanship, or equipment which became evident during operational test. E. Repeat operational test when malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or partial operation of the facility or results in performance that is less than specified. 1.08 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. At completion of Functional Testing, furnish written report prepared and signed by manufacturer's authorized representative, certifying equipment: 1. Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated. Testing,Training,and Facility Start-up 01 75 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 08/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 3. Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions. 4. Operates within the allowable limits for vibration. 5. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning. 6. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning. B. Furnish written report prepared and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor certifying: 1. Motor control logic that resides in motor control centers, control panels, and circuit boards furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor has been calibrated and tested and is properly operating. 2. Control logic for equipment start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating. 3. Co-sign the reports along with the manufacturer's representative and subcontractors. 1.09 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide operations and maintenance training for items of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment. Utilize manufacturer's representatives to conduct training sessions. B. Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions.Arrange sessions so that individual operators and maintenance technicians do not attend more than 2 sessions per week. C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or systems 1 month prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system. D. Satisfactorily complete functional testing before beginning operator training. E. Coordinate with the Owner to schedule training sessions for each work shift. Pooling of shifts will not be permitted unless accepted by OWNER. F. The CONTRACTOR shall videotape all training sessions and provide a copy for the OWNER. G. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide one or more persons to be responsible for coordinating and expediting his/her training duties. The person or persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the OWNER. H. The CONTRACTOR's coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with OWNER personnel and manufacturer's representatives and shall submit a training schedule for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided. Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the current plan of operation. I. Maintain and submit following records generated during start-up and testing phase of Project: 1. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome. 2. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on the job site. 3. Equipment lubrication records. 4. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements. 5. Insulation resistance measurements. 6. Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and setpoints. Testing,Training,and Facility Start-up 01 75 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 08/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION Testing,Training,and Facility Start-up 01 75 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 08/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 017516 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL 1.1. SCOPE A. The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the provision of all labor and material required to perform installation inspection and start-up of all equipment and mechanical systems installed under this Contract. B. The work defined under this Section includes providing the services of a trained factory representative. C. Certification of start up and full testing shall be performed by the manufacturer using the services of a factory representative trained in this type service. D. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, water, air, oil, power, fuel, chemicals, test equipment and other items required to conduct the field tests, including any retests. E. The cost of all field testing shall be included in the Contract Price and no separate payment will be made. 1.2. COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall not proceed with any functional test or operating test until the operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment have been submitted and been designated "No Exceptions Taken". The Contractor shall coordinate all activities required for starting of systems including the visits by the factory representatives, particularly where an equipment item's operation is dependent on the operation of other equipment. Prior to calling the factory representative, the Contractor shall ensure that all necessary related equipment, structures, piping and electrical work is complete. Any required revisits to the site by the factory representative shall be provided by the Contractor. 1.3. PRE START-UP MAINTENANCE A. After installation and prior to start up, all grease lubricated joints, shaft couplings and bearings shall be flushed out and re greased. All oil reservoirs and sumps shall be completely drained and flushed and refilled with the proper lubricant. All operating fluid and gas reservoirs shall be filled with the proper fluid and gases. Screens and filters shall be checked for contamination and replaced if necessary. Belt drives shall be checked and tension adjusted, as needed. The equipment shall then be tagged, signed and dated, indicating that the equipment has been properly lubricated and prepared for start up. 1.4. INSTALLATION INSPECTION A. Prior to energizing any piece of equipment or performing a functional test, a factory representative of the equipment manufacturer shall inspect the installation of the equipment. The factory representative shall determine if the equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, pre-start-up maintenance has been performed, and is ready for start up and the initiation of the functional test. Starting of Systems 01 75 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Should the installation inspection indicate that the equipment has been improperly installed or prepared for start-up, the Contractor shall provide such modifications or adjustments as required for the equipment to operate properly. C. The factory representative shall certify that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and the manufacturer's recommendations and that the equipment is ready for start up and functional testing to be performed. 1.5. FUNCTIONAL TEST A. Following the installation inspection by factory representative, perform a functional test on each piece of equipment. The functional test shall consist of operation of the equipment on a normal duty cycle for a sufficient period of time to determine satisfactory operation. Time required for functional testing shall be as specified in the equipment specifications or a minimum one continuous eight-hour period, whichever is longer. To the maximum extent practical, exercise the full capabilities of all equipment including remote operation, instrumented control schemes, alternate modes of operation and emergency operation. Equipment shall be checked for any abnormal noise or vibration as part of the functional test, and any observed abnormal conditions corrected prior to certification. B. Should the results of the functional test indicate that the equipment has failed to perform in accordance with the Specifications,the Contractor shall make, at no additional cost to the Owner, all modifications or adjustments as required for satisfactory operation, including replacement of any or all components, if necessary. Following the modifications or adjustments,the Contractor shall repeat the functional test. This procedure shall be repeated until the results of the test indicate that the equipment has satisfied the requirements of the applicable Specification Section. C. After the functional test is completed, each manufacturer shall certify, in writing,that tests were made in accordance with the Specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations,that the functional tests and start-up operation have been satisfactory and that the equipment is fully operational and capable of meeting operating requirements. 1.6. OPERATING TEST PERIOD A. Following the functional test,the Contractor shall place each system into service and undergo an operational test under normal service conditions. The minimum time for the operating test period for each system shall be 30 consecutive days, excluding time that the equipment is taken out of service. B. Where required in the equipment specifications, process performance testing shall be performed during the operating test period in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specifications. The Contractor shall provide all materials and labor, including the services of a factory representative, necessary to perform the performance testing. C. The test period shall commence upon the initiation of operation of all systems and shall end after the successful operation of the equipment for the minimum time required. D. The Contractor shall repair and make all modifications required due to mechanical failure of the equipment during the operating test period. Should the equipment fail to meet the performance testing requirements, a factory representative shall evaluate the equipment and determine the cause of the process failure. The Contractor shall make all modifications recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7. CERTIFICATION Starting of Systems 01 75 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Upon completion of start up,the Contractor shall provide written Installation and Start-Up Report from all equipment manufacturers'factory representatives. Report shall address the equipment installation's compliance with manufacturer's requirements and note any problems noted that may affect the warranty, operation or longevity of the equipment. Written certification shall indicate that tests were made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,that the test and start up operation has been satisfactory completed and that the equipment is fully operational under design requirements. Written certification shall be filed with the Engineer on the manufacturers stationary. Manufacturer's Installation and Start-up Report GENERAL INFORMATION: Owner: Contractor: Facility: System: Location: Specification Number: Tag: MANUFACTURER: Manufacturer Name: Address: City/State/Zip: Phone Number: Fax Number: E-Mail: Manufacturer's Representative: 1. Required safety equipment available? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 2. Are equipment tags correct and attached to equipment? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 3. Are rotating equipment safety guards in place and secure? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 4. Shaft and couplings aligned? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 5. Have belt drives been aligned? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 6. Bearings lubricated? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 7. Oil reservoirs filled with proper lubricant? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 8. Rotation verified? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 9. Is equipment level? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 10. Equipment anchored properly? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 11. Equipment grouted properly? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 12. Required utilities available? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 13. Nozzles free from loads? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 14. Are required pressure and temperature Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] gauges and sensors installed? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 15. Have any shipping coatings/sealants been removed? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 16. Does any paint/coating damage need to be repaired? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 17. Have moving parts been checked for proper running clearance? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] 18. Is there any observed leakage of lubricants or fluids from equipment? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 19. Are all electrical power connections made and properly torqued? Y❑ N❑ N/A[:] Starting of Systems 01 75 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 20. Are electrical overloads properly set? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 21. Are current transformers properly wired for polarity? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 22. Are control enclosures per the specified NEMA classification and material? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 23. Are instrumentation connections terminated? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 24. Are signal cable shield leads grounded in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 25. Are required spare parts on-site, inventoried and properly stored? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 26. Are Operations and Maintenance Manuals on-site and complete? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 27. Are all installation requirements of the O&M Manuals performed? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 28. Does equipment have a record of maintenance and exercise as recommended by the manufacturer during storage? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 29. Are there any observed installation issues that impact the equipment warranty? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ Additional items noted during installation inspection by Manufacturer's Start-up Representative: I certify as an authorized Factory Representative, that the equipment is installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations, and is ready for start-up and initial operation. Factory Representative: Date: Representing: (If employed by other than the Manufacturer) Mailing Address: Phone Number: E-mail Address: Starting of Systems 01 75 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 START-UP REPORT: 1. Does equipment operate and perform in accordance with the specification? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 2. Have all specified modes of operation been tested and verified? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 3. Do all system indicators, readouts, controls and operator interfaces operate? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 4. Have variable speed units been tested throughout the available speed range? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 5. Have multi-speed motors been tested on all available speeds? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 6. Did equipment exhibit any abnormal vibration during operation? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 7. Did equipment exhibit any abnormal noise during operation? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 8. Are bearings operating at normal temperature? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 9. Do bearings display any roughness in operation? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 10. Prior to start-up, or during initial operation, was any leakage of lubricant observed? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 11. Was any leakage of process fluids observed during start-up? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 12. Has operation of equipment protective systems been verified? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ 13. Is the equipment ready to place into operation? Y❑ N❑ N/A❑ Additional items noted during start-up by Manufacturer's Start-up Representative: I certify as an authorized Factory Representative, that the equipment has been properly started up in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations, and is ready for initial operation. Factory Representative: Date: END OF SECTION Starting of Systems 01 75 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. GENERAL 1.1. SCOPE A. The Contractor shall provide five copies of a complete and comprehensive reference manual (Operating and Maintenance Manual) containing operating and maintenance data to enable operators and plant engineers to correctly operate, service and maintain all equipment and accessories covered by the Specifications and Drawings. The data contained in the manual shall explain and illustrate clearly and simply all principles and theory of operation, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, calibration procedures and safety precautions and procedures for the equipment involved. B. No separate payment will be made for the Operating and Maintenance Manuals and the cost of said manual shall be included in the Contract Price. 1.2. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, two preliminary drafts of proposed formats and outlines of contents of manuals within 60 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of any deficiencies in the manual and will return one copy of the manual for completion and/or correction. B. Submit two preliminary copies of manuals before the work covered by the Contract Documents is 35 percent complete. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of any deficiencies in the manuals and will return one copy of the manual for completion and/or correction. C. Before the work covered by the Contract Documents is 50 percent complete, the Contractor must submit five copies of the revised and completed manual, complete in detail as specified below. The Contractor shall also submit one copy of the manual in digital format as specified below. D. Digital Copies of Manuals: Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided by the Contractor in digital format. Materials available in digital format shall be furnished in accordance with the following: 1. All textual data shall be provided as an electronic file in searchable Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software to meet the Owners requirements in 01 33 00. 2. Materials not available in original digital format (available only in paper format) shall be scanned as noted above into a PDF format and cleaned to remove smudges, fingerprints, artifacts, and other extraneous marks. All notes, version stamps, etc. shall be preserved. Color maps shall be scanned in not less than the number of colors of the document or 16 colors, whichever is greater. Color photographs shall be saved in not less than 256 colors. Black and white or monochrome scans (non-text) shall not be less than 16 gray scale levels. Color maps, color photographs, and black and white and gray scale photograph files shall be saved as GIF or JPG files, compatible with Adobe Photoshop Version 4.0. Documents shall be scanned in the existing color format of the document, i.e. color documents shall be scanned in color, and black and white or monochrome in gray scale. 3. After the documents are in correct digital format, they shall be furnished to the Engineer as a 120 mm, 680mb, 74-minute CD ROM. All media transmittals shall be accompanied by a detailed paper printout of the files on the media. This printout shall consist of a file name, Operating and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 file size, date of creation, submittal number, and a brief but accurate description of the file. Files shall not be transmitted by modem. Two copies of the CD for each Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be provided to the Engineer. 1.3. SUBMITTAL FORMAT A. Each hard copy of the manual shall be assembled in one or more loose leaf binders, each with title page, typed table of contents, typed list of tables, typed list of figures, and heavy section dividers with reinforced holes and numbered plastic index tabs. Binders shall be uniform for all manuals and shall be 3 ring, hardback type, with transparent vinyl pocket front cover suitable for inserting identifying cover and with a transparent vinyl pocket on the spine for label. All data shall be punched for binding. Composition and printing shall be arranged so that punching does not obliterate any data. The cover and binding edge of each manual shall have the Project title, Specification Section number and title, and manual title printed thereon, all as approved by the Engineer. B. All copies of shop drawings, figures and diagrams shall be reduced to either 8 1/2 x 11 inches or to 11 inches in the vertical dimension and as near as practical to 17 inches in the horizontal dimensions. Such sheets shall be folded to 8 1/2 x 11 inches. The manual and other data shall be printed on first quality paper, 8 1/2 x 11 inch size with standard 3 hole punching. Binders shall be labeled Vol. 1, Vol. 2, etc., where more than one is required. The table of contents for the entire set, identified by volume number, shall appear in each binder. Text, figures and Drawings shall be clearly legible and suitable for dry process reproductions. C. Each submittal shall have a cover sheet that includes the following information: 1. The date of submittal and the dates of any previous submittals. 2. The Project title. 3. Submittal numbering shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications. 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Supplier C. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number, permanent equipment tag numbers and applicable Drawing No. D. The Engineer will not recommend final acceptance of the work until the Operating and Maintenance Manual is complete and satisfactory to Engineer. 1.4. CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Each manual shall include a title page which includes all information specified in Article 1.3, Paragraph C of this Section. In addition,the title page shall include manufacturer's address, phone number, facsimile number, and contact; manufacturer's equipment name and model number; supplier's address, phone number, facsimile number, and contact. Operating and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Each manual shall include a table of contents identifying the location of each item listed below, for each component supplied. For items not applicable to a component,the table of contents shall list N/A for the page number. C. For all equipment,the Contractor shall furnish a complete, detailed listing of all equipment, components and accessories showing component name, manufacturer, model number and quantity information shall be furnished for each component as outlined below: 1. A summary page shall be provided for each piece of equipment detailing the following information: a. Equipment Number b. Equipment Description c. Serial Number d. Model Number e. Manufacturer i. Address ii. Phone iii. Representative f. Supplier i. Address ii. Phone iii. Representative g. Local Service Provider i. Address ii. Phone iii. Representative h. Location of Equipment i. Equipment Design Criteria i. HP ii. Flow Rate, etc. j. Performance Data k. Normal Operating Characteristics I. Limiting Conditions 2. Detailed disassembly, overhaul and reassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions. 3. Detailed operating instructions for start up, calibration, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, safety, shutdown and emergency conditions. Detailed list of settings for relays, pressure switches, temperature switches, level switches, thermostats, alarms, relief valves, rupture discs, etc. 4. Detailed preventative maintenance procedures and schedules, including detailed lubrication instructions and schedules, identification of required lubricants and operating fluids (description, specification and trade name of at least two manufacturers), and diagrams illustrating lubrication points. Operating and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Detailed guide to equipment and/or process"troubleshooting". 6. Detailed parts lists identified by title, materials of construction, manufacturer's part number, list of recommended spare parts identified as specified above, current cost list for recommended spare parts, predicted life of parts subject to wear, and an exploded or concise cut away view of each equipment assembly. 7. Electrical and instrumentation schematics, including motor control centers, control panels, wiring diagrams, instrument panels and analyzer panels. 8. List of all special tools supplied and description of their use. Special tools include any tool not normally available in an industrial hardware or mill supply house. 9. List of names and addresses of nearest service centers for parts, overhaul and service. 10. Procedures for storing, handling and disposing of any chemicals or products used with the equipment or system. 11. For equipment and systems, also provide the following: a. Control and wiring diagrams provided by the controls manufacturer. b. Sequence of operations by the controls manufacturer. c. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 12. The supplier's operation and maintenance information will address the particular equipment furnished, with specific details on operation and maintenance practices. General data is not acceptable. Information contained in the manual which is not appropriate to the Project shall be marked out and noted as"N/A". END OF SECTION Operating and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 02 40 00 BUILDING DEMOLITION 1. GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Demolition of structures. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Demolition plan and schedule B. Disposal means and locations 1.3. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Conform to existing environmental requirements and regulations regarding noise, dust, and vibration. B. Existing Conditions 1. Verify that utility services are disconnected. 1.4. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Building demolition work sequencing and schedule shall be per Section 01 35 00 of the contract specifications. 2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3. EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall visit the project site to thoroughly examine the local conditions and constraints which may be encountered during the course of demolition. He shall perform the necessary research to ensure he is aware of all existing facilities to be protected, special project requirements, required permits and fees, and has a thorough understanding of the overall project. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Utilities: 1. Disconnect any remaining utility services. 2. Plug or cap cut pipes and conduits with removable plugs or caps acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Protection: 1. Use saw cutting and other methods acceptable to ENGINEER to protect adjacent facilities. 2. Provide berms and other means acceptable to ENGINEER to keep drainage from demolition areas. Building Demolition 02 40 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.3. DEMOLITION A. Completely remove from project site structures specified or indicated on the Drawings to be demolished. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, demolition includes removal of slabs, footings, foundations, piping, conduits, and appurtenances and backfilling of resulting voids with [suitable excavated or imported material, compacted to 95 percent relative density. END OF SECTION Building Demolition 02 40 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 06 51 00 GLASS FIBER AND RESIN FABRICATIONS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all fiberglass items as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination with related work specified elsewhere and to provide all hardware, accessories and appurtenances required for a complete installation, including all fabrication and mounting hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE N/A 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM D2996 —Specification for Filament Sound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe 2. ASTM D3647 —Standard Practice for Classifying Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes According to Composition 3. ASTM D3917 —Standard Specification for Dimensional Tolerances of Thermosetting Glass - Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes 4. ASTM D4385 —Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Thermosetting Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing fabrication details and a Performance Affidavit for all items specified herein in accordance with Section 01 33 01 — Submittal Register and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. 0 B. Certification of compliance with ASTM Standards. N 0 C. Where specifically requested, design calculations sealed by a currently Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications 06 51 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fiberglass items of the same type provided shall be the products of a single manufacturer for compatibility. B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the fiberglass items and appurtenances furnished shall be compatible and have the necessary operating clearances with the structural elements and equipment shown on the Drawings. C. Manufacturer shall provide a 3-year warranty on all FRP products against defect in material and workmanship. PART 2— MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. The manufacturer shall maintain a continuous quality control program and shall, upon request, furnish the Engineer with certified test reports consisting of physical tests of samples. B. Ultraviolet light resistive resins shall be used for all exterior locations and where specified. C. All FRP resins shall be flame resistant and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 635 and ASTM E 84, Class 1 with a maximum flame spread rating of 25. D. All edges shall be sealed in the mold where possible. Machined or cut edges shall be sealed with a compatible resin system. 2.02 MANHOLE LADDERS A. The ladders shall be of fiberglass construction with pultruded structural channel shapes, non-skid grit surfaces used on top surface of each rung and a synthetic surfacing veil for chemical and ultraviolet resistance and high strength. Ladders shall possess Class one fire retardant, with an ASTM E-84 flame-spread rating of 25 maximum and shall conform to OSHA 1910.27. Color shall be safety yellow (beige for immersed ladders). B. Ladders shall utilize channel side rails and 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter round rungs. Rung to side connections shall utilize a keyed, pinned and bonded joint for prevention of rung rotation and pullout. The ladders shall be attached to the bracket angles with two stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts per angle bracket. C. Concrete anchors shall be minimum 5/8 inch diameter with 3 inch. Fiberglass pultruded parts shall be ISOFR except for chlorine applications where VEFR shall be used. Shapes shall be manufactured by Strongwell, Inc., or equal. Ladders shall conform to OSHA requirements and to the details shown on the Drawings. Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications 06 51 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.03 FIXED LADDERS A. The Contractor shall provide fixed ladder systems with all safety cages, landings, mounting clips, fasteners, and necessary appurtenances for a complete and rigid installation. B. The ladder systems shall be designed to meet or exceed all OSHA requirements. C. Ladders shall be fabricated from pultruded shapes conforming to ISOM except for chlorine applications where VEFR shall be used. Shapes shall be manufactured by Strongwell, Inc., or equal. D. Ladder side rails shall be fabricated from channel members or 1-3/4 inch minimum square tube. E. Side rails shall be anchored with FRP standoff clips manufactured of polyester resin. except for chlorine applications where vinyl ester resin shall be used. Clips shall be placed at the top and bottom of the ladder and at 6 foot maximum vertical centers. F. Rungs 1. Rungs shall be 18 inches long, serrated and covered with a silica grit to produce an anti-skid surface. 2. Rungs shall be uniformly spaced at 12 inches on center. 3. Rungs shall be designed to support a 1,200 pound vertical load applied at midspan. 4. Rungs shall be both mechanically attached and epoxy bonded to the side rails. 2.04 CONNECTIONS A. All connections shall be non-corrosive, non-staining, and concealed where practicable, as detailed on the Drawings or specified herein. Fiberglass fasteners shall be "Fibrebolt", as manufactured by Strongwell, Inc., or equal. B. All metal fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. C. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled. D. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water. E. Design and installation of fiberglass items shall provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws and other fastenings, and provide close fitting of sections. Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications 06 51 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.05 STRUCTURAL SHAPES AND FLAT SHEETS A. Shapes shall conform to sizes indicated on Drawings and shall be ISOFR (isophthalic polyester fire retardant). Shapes shall be manufactured by Strongwell, Inc., or equal. B. Metal bolted connections shall be made with stainless steel bolts. C. Adhesive bonded connections shall be made with a compatible epoxy adhesive following manufacturer's instructions. Adhesive bonded connections shall only be used where bolted connection are not feasible. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All cut edges and holes shall be sealed with a compatible resin. B. All FRP items shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. C. All fiberglass items described in this Section shall be supplied by a manufacturer that normally fabricates such items so that appearance and quality control are first class. 3.02 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND STORING A. All FRP items shall be properly packed, labeled and stored in accordance with Specifications and where directed by the Engineer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation of all items shall be according to manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise noted. B. Exposed threads of FRP bolts shall be sealed with a compatible resin after installation of the bolts. Where bolts are attaching removable items, the exposed threads shall be sealed with a light coat of polyurethane sprayed onto the threads. END OF SECTION Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications 06 51 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, standards for cleaning and coating structures and equipment described in the Drawings and Specifications. Furnish all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the work. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS To the maximum extent possible, all coatings shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Guidelines for determination of acceptability of product substitutions are given in Section 01 31 14 of these Specifications. Contractors intending to furnish substitute materials or equipment are cautioned to read and strictly comply with these guidelines. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, the following information concerning the materials the Contractor proposes to use in work covered by this section: 1. A list of all components (coatings or other materials) to be used in each coating system required herein. 2. A complete descriptive specification, including manufacturer's data sheet, of each component. 3. Prior to completing the purchase and delivery of the coating material selected by the Contractor, the Contractor shall obtain a letter from the material supplier stating that the selected material is suitable and compatible for application and use as directed under these Specifications, and that if properly applied will provide metal protection and a pleasing appearance for five years or longer. 4. A color chart for each product to be applied. C. Submit test equipment in accordance with Paragraph 1.8 of this Section of these Specifications. 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS Prior to ordering any of the materials covered under this section, the Contractor, Engineer, coating subcontractor and coat manufacturer's representative shall attend a progress meeting and review the work to be performed under this section. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.05 COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Any surface that comes in direct contact with treated water or drinking water shall be NSF 61 certified. B. Finish coat all exposed surfaces except prefinished items, anodized or lacquered aluminum, stainless steel and copper surfaces. Exposures and surfaces are defined in 3.7 of this section. Items to be left unfinished or to receive other types of finishes, such as tile, are specifically shown on the Drawings or specified. 1. Uncoated Products: Full field cleaning and priming will be performed in accordance with Specification requirements for uncoated products. Maintain adequate equipment on the site to assure proper cleaning. 2. Shop Primed Products a. Manufactured products may be shop cleaned and primed. Shop cleaning must equal or exceed cleaning specified in the Coating Schedule. Clean as specified and reprime all abrasions, weld splatter, excessive weathering and other defects in the shop prime coating. b. Manufacturers furnishing shop primed products shall certify that cleaning was performed in accordance with Specification requirements and that the specified primer was used. c. Fully field clean and prime any shop primed products which the Engineer determines that were not cleaned in accordance with the Specifications prior to priming, that the wrong primer was applied, that the primer was applied improperly, or has excessively weathered, or that the product is otherwise unacceptable. 3. Finish Coated Products: Certain products such as electrical control panels and similar items may, with the approval of the Engineer, be furnished finish coated. Properly protect these products throughout the Project to maintain a bright and new appearance. If the finish surfaces are defaced, weathered or not of the selected color, recoat as necessary. 4. Existing Surfaces a. Properly protect existing finish coated items and surfaces from damage throughout the Project. b. Repair any damage to existing coatings repaired in accordance with the requirements of this section, at no expense to the Owner. 5. Hardware: Remove all electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to coating operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced upon completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Only those systems and components which are judged acceptable by the Engineer shall be utilized in the work covered by this item. No materials shall be delivered to the job site until the Engineer has evaluated their acceptability. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with a minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with a minimum five years' experience. 2. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects completed in the past 2 years. 3. Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator program. 4. Approved and licensed by elastomeric polyurethane (100 percent solids) 5. manufacturer to apply 100 percent solids elastomeric polyurethane system. 6. Approved and licensed by high performance epoxy (100 percent solids) 7. manufacturer to apply 100 percent solids epoxy system. D. The following information shall be included on the label of all containers of materials supplied under this item: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Type of coating or other generic identification. 3. Manufacturer's stock number. 4. Color(if any). 5. Instructions for mixing, thinning, or reducing (as applicable). 6. Manufacturer's application recommendations. 7. Safety and storage information. E. All coating material used on this Project shall be purchased specifically for this Project and furnished in new, unopened containers. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's review of the first finished room, space, area, item or portion of work of each surface type and color specified. The first room, space, area, item or portion of work which is acceptable to the Engineer shall serve as the Project standard for all surfaces of similar type and color. Where spray application is utilized, the area to be reviewed shall not be smaller than 100 square feet. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE DURING COATING OPERATIONS An authorized representative of each coating manufacturer shall be present at the start-up and weekly during coating operations. Such representatives shall instruct and observe the Contractor's workers on the manufacturer's application recommendations. Representative shall provide a written report of each site visit to the Contractor and the Engineer. 1.08 TESTING A. Testing Equipment: The Contractor shall furnish and make available to the Engineer the following items of testing equipment for use in determining if the requirements of this section are being satisfied. The specified items of equipment shall be available for the Engineer's use at all times when field coating or surface preparation is in progress: 1. Wet film gauge. 2. Surface thermometer. 3. "Surface Profile Comparator" as published by SSPC (with magnifier and three discs). 4. "Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel", as published by SSPC (SSPC-VIS 1- 89). 5. "Visual Standard for Power- and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel", as published by SSPC (SSPC-VIS 3). 6. Holiday (pin hole) detector(low voltage). 7. Sling-psychrometer or other on-site device used to calculate relative humidity and ambient air temperature. 8. Electronic dry film gauge, meeting the requirements of SSPC-PA2, Type I or Type 11, including calibration. 9. "Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Waterjetting" as published by SSPC (SSPC-VIS 4). B. Testing: The Contractor shall perform tests of painting surface preparation, material, and application when and where directed by the Engineer to determine if the requirements of this Section are being satisfied. Testing shall be performed by a technician in accordance with NACE and SSPC Standards. Technician shall be a Certified NACE Level III and a Certified SSPC Concrete Coatings Inspector. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials in original, sealed containers of the manufacturer with labels legible and intact. 2. Each container shall be clearly marked or labeled to show coating identification, date of manufacture, batch number, analysis or contents, and special instructions. At all times a copy of every component's MSDS shall be available. B. Storage 1. Store only acceptable Project materials on the Project site. 2. Store material in a suitable location and in such a manner as to comply with all safety requirements including any applicable federal, state and local rules and requirements. Storage shall also be in accordance with the instructions of the coating manufacturer and the requirements of the insurance underwriters. 3. Restrict storage area to coating materials and related equipment. 4. Place any material, which may constitute a fire hazard, in closed metal containers and remove daily from the Project site. C. Material Safety Data Sheets: A copy of every component's MSDS shall be available at all times on the Project site. 1.10 MATERIAL SCHEDULES Material Schedules at the end of this section list prime coats, intermediate coats, finish coats and cover coats that comprise a complete and compatible system of surface protection for the particular substrate. Maintain the unity of these systems, making sure all coats applied to any surface are from the same system and same manufacturer. Verify with the manufacturer the compatibility of the materials used. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. The abrasive used in the abrasive cleaning shall be a material acceptable to the regulatory agencies of the state of Texas for use in the described work. The material shall be of a shape and size to produce a uniform surface of acceptable profile to properly bond the prime coat. B. The abrasive may be a combination of materials, including additives such as dust inhibitors and Blastoxg. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. If Blastoxg is used, it shall be blended with the blasting abrasive by a blending facility authorized by the TDJ Group, Inc. 2.02 COATING MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The only acceptable manufacturers and products shall be those listed in the Material Schedules at the end of this section. B. All applicable data currently published by the coating manufacturer relating to surface preparation, coverages, film thickness, application technique, drying and overcoating times is included by reference as a part of this section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain and fully understand the appropriate data sheets for the coatings specified. C. Products 1. Coatings shall be factory mixed and delivered to the site in unbroken original packages bearing the manufacturer's name and brand designation and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed specifications. Two-component coatings shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All two-component coatings, once mixed, shall be applied within the pot-life recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise specified, coatings shall be of the best grade. All thinners, driers, varnish, etc., shall be of the best grade and shall be furnished by the coating manufacturer for use with the specified coatings. D. Colors: The Owner will select the colors to be used on the various portions of the work. Provide color cards for the coatings proposed. Where more than one coat of coating is required,job tint off-shade the coating for each undercoat to show complete coverage. 2.03 MIXING AND TINTING A. When possible, all coatings and other materials shall be mixed and tinted by the coating manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. B. When job site mixing and/or tinting is required, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper conduct of all on-site mixing and/or tinting. 2.04 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Different colors will be used on pumps, motors, valves, piping systems and other surfaces as shown in Table 1. B. Non-ferrous piping shall have identification pipe markers equal to Seton SetMark. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.05 OSHA SAFETY COLOR USAGE GUIDE A. OSHA Safety colors, in accordance with ANSI Z3.1, shall be used for marking physical hazards and safety equipment and locations. The following OSHA Safety Color Usage Guide will be used in determining the coating color and type of marking required. Safety Red Safety Orange Safety Yellow Safety Green Physical Hazard Safety Equipment CAUTION and Locations (Generally used with Black in checks or stripes) Fire protection Exposed box Unguarded edges First aid kits and equipment housings of platforms stretchers Fire boxes Exposed edges of Elevator door First aid signs, pulleys, gears, edges dispensaries and etc. drinking water stations Extinguishers Exposed box Bollards housings Exit signs Safety starting Pulley Blocks buttons Sprinkler piping Material handling equipment Portable containers of flammable liquids Emergency stop bars PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Protect other surfaces from coating and damage. Furnish sufficient shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. The Contractor's onsite representative shall keep a record of work performed each day and shall submit it to the Engineer weekly. The forms for this record will be furnished by the Engineer. C. No coat of coating shall be applied until the surface has been inspected and accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours notice to the Engineer when cleaning is Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 to be performed to prevent inspection delays. The Contractor shall provide the necessary access for inspection by the Engineer. D. Shop applied prime coatings which are damaged during transportation, construction or installation shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched-up in the field as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use repair procedures which insure the complete protection of all adjacent primer. The specified repair method and equipment may include wire brushing, hand or power tool cleaning, or dry air blast cleaning. In order to prevent injury to surrounding coated areas, blast cleaning may require use of lower air pressure, small nozzle and abrasive particle sizes, short blast nozzle, distance from surface, shielding and masking. If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch-up, then the item shall be re-cleaned and coated or coated as directed by the Engineer. 3.02 CLEANING AREA Construct a temporary shed no smaller than 40 feet wide and 60 feet long for field cleaning, including blasting and priming operations. Maintain this area for all coating operations until all such work has been completed and approved. Provide all fixtures and appurtenances required to perform the work, including fixtures to support the work off the ground and proper storage facilities. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental conditions which affect coating application include, but are not necessarily limited to, ambient air temperature, surface temperature, humidity, dew point and environmental cleanliness. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations regarding environmental conditions under which coatings may be applied. B. Surface preparation and cleaning of the exterior surfaces must be performed during periods of still air or only a slight breeze so that fallout of the dust produced does not drift onto adjacent property. The Owner reserves the right to temporarily stop the Contractor from exterior blasting (or coating)when by observation it is apparent that the wind direction or velocity prevents compliance with this requirement. Any clean-up of fall-out on adjacent property shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. No paint shall be applied upon damp or frosty surfaces, or in wet or foggy weather. No paint shall be applied in temperatures below 40 degrees F, when freezing (32 degrees F) is predicted within 24 hours of application, or under temperature or humidity conditions not recommended by the manufacturer. However, in no case shall coatings be applied when the surface temperature is within 5 degrees F of dew point, and in no cases shall coating be applied over a damp surface. 3.04 SAFETY A. General 1. The Contractor is responsible for the safety of all workers and subcontractors and suppliers performing work on this Project. 2. The Contractor shall protect the Owner, their agents, and the General Public from harm attributable to the Contractor's performance, or non-performance, of the work on this Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Project. The protection shall include, but not be limited to, providing the necessary safety equipment and instructions for its use by the Owner, and their agents. 3. The Contractor shall protect the existing structures and environment from damage attributable to the Contractor's performance, or non-performance, of the work on this Project. 4. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable standards of 29 CFR Part 1910 and 29 CFR Part 1926. 5. The listing of the following potential hazards shall in no way relieve the Contractor's responsibility for safety on this Project. B. The interior of tanks may be considered a confined space hazard. The Contractor shall confirm to the Owner in writing, prior to the start of the Project that the Contractor has training programs, trained personnel, and is otherwise in compliance with CFR 1910.146. 3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: All surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry, and free from oil, grease or dust. All concrete shall have cured a minimum of 28 days before coating. All fabricated metal products shall have all weld flux and weld spatter removed and sharp peaks in welds ground smooth. The Engineer will inspect the surface preparation prior to the application of coatings. If the preparation is found to be satisfactory, a written order will be given to proceed with coatings. B. Ferrous Metals: Standards for the surface preparation of ferrous metals required in the Material Schedules are the standards of the SSPC—The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC, SP-1 through SP-10). Inspection of these surfaces will be evaluated by field comparison with visual comparator panels. These panels shall be securely wrapped in clear plastic and sealed to protect them from deterioration and marring. C. Concrete Surfaces: For all concrete surfaces, the following surface preparation shall be employed: 1. CC-1 - Wash: Wash and scrub all surfaces with a solution of 1-1/2 ounces of soap chips and 1-1/2 ounces of trisodium phosphate in each gallon of water used. Flush away all soap and dirt with clean water. After this washing the surface will be re-checked and any rough areas not suitable for coating shall be sandblasted smooth. 2. CC-2 - Acid Etch: Surface preparation for coating shall not commence until 7 days after the concrete has been pronounced cured. Wash and scrub all surfaces with a solution of 1-1/2 ounces of soap chips and 1-1/2 ounces of trisodium phosphate in each gallon of water used. Flush away all soap and dirt with clean water and then etch the surface with a 15 percent or stronger solution of muriatic acid until an openfaced granular texture, similar to fine sandpaper, is obtained. Any areas that remain smooth are to be re-etched until the desired texture is achieved. Flush and scrub away with clear water all acid and loosened particles. 3. CC-3 - Blast Cleaning: Remove all form oil and dirt by washing the surface with a solution of 1-1/2 ounces of soap chips and 1-1/2 ounces of trisodium phosphate in each gallon of water used. Blast clean all Iaitance and other foreign material from the surface of the concrete until an openfaced granular texture similar to fine sandpaper is achieved. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 These results should be accomplished with blast cleaning similar to "brush blasting" steel surfaces. 4. Prior to the surface preparation noted in Paragraphs 1, 2, and 3 above, all concrete surfaces to be coated shall have a rubbed stone finish in accordance with Section 03 30 00 of these Specifications. D. Wood Surfaces: All wood surfaces shall be clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness. Sandpaper to a smooth, even surface, then dust off. After priming coat has dried, apply shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood. Putty all nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects; color putty to match finish coating or stain. 3.06 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: After specified surface preparation, all surfaces shall be brushed free of dust or foreign matter. Surfaces shall be completely dry before any coating is applied. All voids, open or hollow places in masonry shall be repaired with an epoxy patching compound. B. Application: Coating shall be evenly spread in the proper thickness, so that there shall be no drops, runs or saggings of the coating. Where runs and drops do occur, they shall be removed and the surface re-coated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Sufficient time, as directed by the manufacturer, shall be allowed for the coating to dry before the application of succeeding coats. C. Protection of Work Area: Use drop cloths or other suitable means to protect other surfaces of the structure or equipment in place. Upon completion of the work, remove all coating spots from surfaces as directed by the Engineer. D. Inspection: The Engineer will inspect each coat prior to the application of subsequent coats. If the work is found to be satisfactory, a written order will be given to proceed. E. Defective Work: Remove and replace, at the direction of the Engineer, any painting work found to be defective or applied under adverse conditions. Grit, hair, or roller fuzz in the applied paint shall be cause for rejection of the entire painted surface. 3.07 COATING SCHEDULE A. General: The Coating Schedule summarizes the coating systems to be applied to the various surfaces. Items which appear in the Coating Schedule are defined in following Paragraphs. B. Exposure terms refer to the environmental conditions to which different surfaces may be exposed. A surface may exist in more than one exposure, e.g. an exterior wall can be categorized not only as "above grade", but also as "below grade", where the exposure is delimited by the grade line. 1. Interior: All surfaces within the confines of a building or other enclosure not constantly exposed to weather, including concealed surfaces subject to trapped moisture, heat or other deteriorating conditions and all surfaces exposed to view. 2. Exterior a. Above Grade: All surfaces above finished grade and exposed to weather. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. Below Grade: All surfaces below the finished grade line. Building surfaces with this exposure shall only be coated when they are structurally common with an interior surface, e.g. exterior walls of a dry pit, not the exterior wall of a below grade tank. 3. Submerged: All surfaces below a water surface or exposed to spray. Surfaces exposed to spray include all areas within 6-inches of maximum water surface in quiescent tanks and within 18-inches of maximum water surface in mixed or agitated tanks. Building surfaces with this exposure shall only be coated when surfaces above water level have an interior exposure. C. Surfaces 1. Floors: Interior surfaces subject to foot or roller traffic. 2. Building Surfaces: All structural and architectural surfaces except floors. Building surfaces include, but are not limited to, doors and frames, windows and frames, floor doors and walls. 3. Piping: All plumbing and process piping and accessories including valves, fittings, pipe supports, electrical conduit and similar related items. 4. Equipment: All mechanical, electrical, and architectural equipment, items, and accessories installed in the work and not defined above. Equipment includes, but is not limited to: pumps, motors, cabinets, ducts, tanks and process equipment. 3.08 MATERIAL SCHEDULES Material Schedules list pretreatment coats, wash coats, seal coats, prime coats, intermediate coats, finish coats and cover coats that comprise a complete and compatible system of surface protection for the particular substrate. Maintain the unity of these systems, making sure all coats applied to any surface are from the same system and same manufacturer. Verify with manufacturer compatibility of the materials used. 3.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Furnish the Owner at least one gallon of each type and color of coating used for finish coats and one gallon of each type of thinner required. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled. 3.10 COATING REPAIR Where coatings have been damaged, the surfaces shall be cleaned and recoated. Surface preparation shall conform to SSPC-SP 11, and feathered into undamaged areas. Coating shall be performed as specified for the damaged surface. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Painting Schedule Exposures Surfaces System Schedules Concrete & Non-Ferrous Ferrous Wood Drywall Concrete Metals Metals Substrate Substrate Block Substrate Substrate Substrate Floors - - - - - Building 134 - [144] 221 160 Surfaces** 634 [147] Interior Equipment* - 157 [144] - - [147] Piping* - 157 [144] - - [147] Building 234 257 247 221 - Exterior Surfaces** Above Equipment* - 257 247 - - Grade Piping* - 257 247 - - Exterior Piping* - 257 247 - - Below Grade Submerged Piping* - 444W - - Water Equipment* - 444W - - Submerged Piping* 544S Wastewater FEquipment 544S * See coating, lining, and/or coating paragraphs in individual piping or equipment Specification Sections. ** See finish schedule for where each type shall be used. Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Schedule Numbering Guide First Number- Second Number- Third Number- Final Letter Exposure Substrate Coating Type 1 Interior and Weather 1 Non-Ferrous Metals 1 Alkyd S Sewage Protected 2 Exterior Weather 2 Wood 2 Asphaltic W Potable Water Exposure 3 Submerged in Potable 3 Concrete, Concrete 4 Epoxy F Floors Water but Protected Block, Masonry from Sunlight 4 Submerged in Potable 4 Ferrous Metals 5 Vinyl C Severe Water and Exposed to Chemical Sunlight Exposure 5 Submerged in 5 Galvanized Ferrous 6 Coal Tar Wastewater Metals 6 Interior Junction Box, 6 Drywall 7 Polyurethane Lift Station, and Headworks Submerged in Wastewater or Exposed to H2S Fumes 7 PVC Pipe and 8 Acrylic Plastics 9 Zinc 0 Latex Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Material Schedules System: 134 Type: Epoxy Use: Interior Concrete and Masonry Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Thickness Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams (Mils) 1 st Sanitile Epoxy- Polyfill Block Filler Amerlock 400 Kern Cati-Coat 600/600 Masonry BF HS TG Filler 54-660 Epoxy Filler 2nd 4.0 Sanitile Series 66 Armorguard Epoxy Amerlock Macropoxy 655 Hi-Build Series 646 FC Epoxy Epoxoline 3rd 4.0 Sanitile Series 66 Armourguard Amerlock Macropoxy 655 Hi-Build Epoxy Series 646 FC Epoxy Epoxoline System 8.0 System: 144 Type: Epoxy Use: Interior Ferrous Metal Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 3.0-5.0 Carboguard Series 66- Armorguard P-14 Amerlock Macropoxy 646 893 SG 1211 Primer Series FC Epoxy Epoxoline Primer 2nd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series Armorguard Epoxy Amerlock Macropoxy 646 890 N69-Color Series FC Epoxy Hi-Build Epoxoline I I 3rd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series Armorguard Epoxy --- Macropoxy 646 890 N69-Color FC Epoxy Hi-Build Epoxoline I I System 12.0 Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 System: 147 Type: Polyurethane Use: Interior Ferrous Metal Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1st 3.0 Carboguard Series 66- Armorguard P-14 Amerlock Macropoxy 893 SG 1211 Primer Series 646 FC Epoxy Epoxoline Primer 2nd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 66- Armorguard Epoxy Amercoat 450 Macropoxy 893 SG Color Series 646 FC Epoxy Hi-Build Epoxoline 3rd 2.0-4.0 Carbothane Series 1074- Indurethane 5500 --- Acrolon Ultra 134 HG Color Enamel High Endura- Performance Shield Polyurethane System 10.0 System: 157 Surface Preparation: SP-1 With Manufacturer's Recommended Pre-Treatment Type: Polyurethane Use: Galvanized Metals Minimum Coat Dry Film Carboline Tnemec Induron Ameron Sherwin Thickness Williams (Mils) 1st 5.0 Carboguard Series 66 Hi- Pretreat using Pretreat Macropoxy 893 SG Build Epoxoline Vinyl Wash using 646 FC Epoxy Primer Galvapret 5 Armorguard Amercoat Epoxy 370 or 385 Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2nd 2.0 Carbothane Series 1074 Indurethane Amercoat Acrolon Ultra 134 HG Endura-Shield IV 5500 Enamel 450 Series High Performance Polyurethane System 7.0 System: 160 Type: Latex Use: Interior Drywall Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1st 1.0 Sanitile 120 Self-Priming AC-210 Self-Priming ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer 2nd 1.5-3.0 Carbocrylic Series 6 Tneme-CryI AC-230 Amercoat ProMar 200 3359 220 Zero VOC Latex Primer 3rd 2.0 Carbocrylic Series 6 Tneme-CryI AC-230 Amercoat ProMar 200 3359 220 Zero VOC Latex Primer System 5.0 System: 168 Type: Acrylic Epoxy Use: Interior Drywall Minimum Coat Dry Film Carboline Tnemec Induron Ameron Sherwin Thickness Williams (Mils) 1 st 1.0 Sanitile 120 51-792 PVA AC-303 PVA Sealer ProMar 200 Sealer Zero VOC Latex Primer 2nd 2.0-4.0 Carbocrylic Series 113-Color Ac-303 Amercoat Pro Industrial 255 H.B. Tneme- 335 Waterborne Tufcoat Catalyzed Epoxy Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3rd 2.0-4.0 Carbocrylic Series 113-Color Amercoat Pro Industrial 255 H.B. Tneme- 335 Waterborne Tufcoat Catalyzed Epoxy System 5.0 System: 221 Surface Preparation: As Specified For Wood Type: Alkyd Use: Exterior Wood Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 2.0 Sanitile 120 Series 36-603 AC301 Amercoat Exterior Oil- Undercoater 5105 Based Wood Primer 2nd 1.5-2.0 Carbocoat Series 23-Color Amorlux 2500 Amercoat Industrial 139 Enduratone Enamel 5450 Enamel B-54 3rd 1.5-2.0 Carbocoat Series 23-Color Armorlux 2500 Amercoat Industrial 139 Enduratone Enamel 5450 Enamel B-54 System 5.0 System: 247 Type: Polyurethane Use: Exterior Ferrous Metal Minimum Coat Dry Film Carboline Tnemec Induron Ameron Sherwin Thickness Williams (Mils) 1st 3.0 Carboguard Series 66-1211 Armorguard P- Amercoat Macropoxy 893 SG Epoxoline 14 Primer 370 or 385 646 FC Epoxy 2nd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 66-Color Armorguard Amercoat Macropoxy 893 SG Epoxoline Epoxy 370 or 385 646 FC Epoxy Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3rd 2.0- 3.0 Carbothane Series 1074 Indurethane Amercoat Acrolon Ultra 134 HG Endura-Shield IV 5500 Enamel 450 Series High Performance Polyurethane System 11.0 System: 257 Type: Polyurethane Use: Exterior Non-Ferrous Metals Minimum Dry Film Induron Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 66-Color Amorguard Amercoat Macropoxy 893 SG Hi-Build Epoxy 370 or 385 646 FC Epoxy Epoxoline 2nd 2.0-3.0 Carbothane Series Indurethane Amercoat Acrolon Ultra 134 HG 1074-Color 5500 Enamel 450 Series High Endura-Shield IV Performance Polyurethane System 8.0 System: 444 Type: Epoxy Use: Submerged Ferrous Metal Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 66-Color PE-54 Epoxy Amercoat 561/561 LT Hi-Build 370 Dura-Plate 235 Epoxoline Multi-Purpose Epoxy 2nd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 69-Color PE-54 Epoxy Amercoat 561/561 LT Hi-Build 370 Dura-Plate 235 Epoxoline II Multi-Purpose Epoxy 3rd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 69-Color PE-54 Epoxy Amercoat Dura-Plate 235 561/561 LT Hi-Build 370 Multi-Purpose Epoxoline II Epoxy Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 System 12.0 System: 542 Type: Asphaltic Use: Below Grade Pi in Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 8.0- 12.0 Bitumastic 46-465 H.B. Ruff Stuff 2100 78HB Targuard 300 M Tnemecol 2nd As Needed System 10.0 System: 544 Type: Epoxy Use: Submerged Ferrous Metal Minimum Dry Film Ameron Sherwin Coat Carboline Tnemec Induron Williams Thickness (Mils) 1 st 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 66-Color Perma-Clean II Amercoat Dura-Plate 890 Hi-Build Epoxy 370 235 Multi- Epoxoline Purpose Epoxy 2nd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 69-Color Perma-Clean II Amercoat Dura-Plate 890 Hi-Build Epoxy 370 235 Multi- Epoxoline II Purpose Epoxy 3rd 4.0-6.0 Carboguard Series 69-Color Perma-Clean II Amercoat Dura-Plate 890 Hi-Build Epoxy 370 235 Multi- Epoxoline II Purpose Epoxy System 12.0 System: 634 Type: Epoxy Use: Interior Junction Structure, Lift Station, and Headworks Concrete Submerged in Wastewater or Exposed to 1-12S Fumes Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Minimum D Film Coat Dry Carboline Sherwin Williams Raven Lining stems Thicknes Systems s (Mils) 1 st 40- 80 Phenoline Dura-Plate 6100 Raven 405 309 2nd 40- 80 Phenoline Dura-Plate 6100 Raven 405 309 System 100 Pipe Identification and Color Coding Coating Colors Pipe System Pipe Letters Stencil Text and Arrows Air(Compressed) Light Green Black Air Air(Process) Light Green w/Black Bands Black Air Process Air, Instrument Light Purple Black Air Instrument Alum Dark Blue /w Light Brown Light Alum Bands Brown Ammonia Gas Yellow w/Dark Green Bands Dark Ammonia Gas Green Ammonia Solution Yellow w/Light Blue Bands Light Ammoniation Solution Blue Backwash Water Light Grey w/ Light Green Light Backwash Water Bands Green Chlorine Gas Yellow w/Red Bands Red Chlorine Gas Chlorine Solution Yellow Black Chlorine Solution Dewatering Black w/Orange Bands Orange Dewatering Digested Sludge Dark Brown w/Red Bands Red Digested Sludge Drains (Plant) Black w/White Bands White Drain Effluent, Primary Light Grey w/Black Bands Black Primary Effluent Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Coating Colors Pipe System Pipe Letters Stencil Text and Arrows Effluent, Secondary Light Grey w/Black&White Black Secondary Effluent Bands Filter Effluent Light Grey w/White Bands White Filter Effluent Filtrate Black w/Yellow Bands Yellow Filtrate Foam Spray Water Dark Green White Foam Spray Water Gasoline Orange White Gasoline Hydraulic Fluid Purple White Hydraulic Fluid Injector Water Light Grey w/Purple Bands Light - Purple Lubricating Oil/Grease Dark Blue w/Red Bands Red Lubricant Oil/Grease Mixed Liquor Light Grey w/Pink Bands Pink Mixed Liquor (Aeration Tank Effluent) Polymer Pink w/Dark Green Bands Dark Polymer Green Potable Water Light Blue White Potable Water(Cold) (Hot) Raw Sewage Dark Grey Orange Sewage (Wastewater) Scrubber Water Light Green w/Dark Brown Dark - Bands Brown Scum Light Brown w/Pink Bands Pink Scum Scum Decant Light Brown w/Red Bands Red Scum Decant Sump Drains (Plant) Light Grey w/Orange Bands Orange Sump Thickener Filtrate Light Grey w/Dark Brown & Light Thickener Filtrate (Supernatant) Light Brown Bands Brown (Supernatant) Thickened Sludge Light Brown w/Light Green Light Thickened Sludge Bands Green Utility Water Dark Green w/Yellow Bands Yellow Utility Water(Non-Potable) Vents (Plant) Black White Vent(Plant) Waste Activated Sludge Light Brown w/Black Bands Black Waste Sludge Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Color Coding General Notes 1. All banding to be 2-inches wide and four feet on center. 2. Sample, drain, vent, metering, blowoff, decant, and hot lines shall be coated the same color combination as the piping system from which the line originates unless specified otherwise above. The additional pertinent text shall be applied to the pipe. 3. Insulated pipe,jacketed with canvas, shall be coated with the color combination specified above. 4. Insulated pipe, jacketed with aluminum and/or stainless steel shall have the jacket uncoated. When valves and fittings for such lines are not insulated, the valves and fittings shall be color coded. 5. Building service lines such as plumbing lines, HVAC lines, and electrical conduit, shall not be color coded but shall be coated the same color as the background construction. 6. All sludge lines not otherwise specified above shall be coated dark brown and stenciled as directed by the Engineer. 7. All polymer lines not otherwise specified above shall be coated pink and stenciled as directed by the Engineer. 8. All lettering shall be done in capital letters of approved size and type. 9. Legend symbols shall be applied on piping on every run and spaced not greater than 8 feet apart. 10. Text shall be applied on piping in the middle of pipe runs for runs under 50 feet or in one room, whichever is the least distance. On runs greater than 50 feet, text shall be applied at third points in the run and no more than 35 feet apart. 11. Pumps, chemical tanks and other items of equipment to be coated shall be coated a color corresponding to their service, in accordance with the above schedule. 12. PVC valves, unions, and threaded fittings shall not be painted. 13. Plastic, Self-adhesive, stenciled pipe labels of specified colors shall be used to identify all plastic piping and all other piping 3-inches in diameter and less. END OF SECTION Painting and Coating 099100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 8/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 09 91 10.00 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Shall govern work required for surface preparation and shop prime painting as required to complete the project. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Not Used 1.03 REFERENCES A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SSPC-SP-6, Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP-10, Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. 3. NSF Standard 61 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry mil thicknesses. B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by the City Engineer. 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop primers on ferrous metals, excluding stainless steels, as specified herein. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All painting materials shall be equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec Company, Inc. or equal. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec products (unless otherwise noted) and Tnemec recommendations for application. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted to the City Engineer in writing for approval within 30 days after the signing of the Contract Agreement. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the fabrication site in unbroken packages, bearing the manufacturer's brand and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed,thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before using. C. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. D. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. 2.02 PAINTING SCHEDULE Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 09 91 10.00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. All colors will be selected by the City Engineer based on the color shown herein. The following surfaces shall have the types of paints specified below applied at the minimum dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat. B. The following types of paints by Tnemec, unless otherwise indicated, have been used as a basis for the paint schedule: 1. Hydro-Zinc (Series 91 H2O 2000) — organic vehicle zinc-rich (NSF Standard 61 Certified)N/A 2. Tnemec-Zinc (Series 90-97)—zinc-rich urethane primer/Carbozinc 859 C. All ferrous metals shall be shop coated according to the following areas of placement: 1. Submerged a. 1 Coat Series 91 H2O 2000 (3.0-5.0 DFT) 2. All Non-Submerged a. 1 Coat Series 90-97 (3.0-5.0 DFT) Carbozinc 859 D. Non-Primed Surfaces — Gears, bearing surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. E. Compatibility of Coating Systems—Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and finish coats specified in Section 09 96 00 for use in the field and which are recommended for use together. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING A. Non-submerged components scheduled for priming,as defined above,shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, immediately prior to priming. B. Submerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-10, Near White Blast Cleaning, immediately prior to priming. C. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease and other foreign material before priming. D. Shop prime in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommendations. PART4 MEASUREMENT 4.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. END OF SECTION Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 09 91 10.00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 09 96 00 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship, and furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for metallic, concrete, masonry and plastic surfaces. B. Color code painting of piping, equipment and piping identification signs and markers. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for protective coatings. Include payment for protective coatings in the lump sum base bid. B. REFERENCES C. ANSI A13.1 —Color Schedule D. ANSI/AWWA C213 — Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. E. Federal Specification TT-P-28— Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting 1200 degrees F. F. Federal Standard 595A—Federal Standard Colors. G. Military Specification DOD-P-23236 — Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank, Fuel and Salt Water Ballast, Class 2. H. NSF Standard 61 —Drinking Water System Components— Health Effects. I. SSPC-PA 1 — Paint Application Specification No. 1 - Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. J. SSPC-PA 2 — Paint Application Specification No. 2 — Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. K. SSPC-Paint 16—Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint. L. SSPC-SP 1 —Solvent Cleaning. M. SSPC-SP 2— Hand Tool Cleaning. N. SSPC-SP 3— Power Tool Cleaning. O. SSPC-SP 5/NACE 1 —White Metal Blast Cleaning. P. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3—Commercial Blast Cleaning. Q. SSPC-SP 7/NACE 4 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. R. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2— Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. S. SSPC-SP 11 —Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. T. SSPC-VIS 1-89—Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. U. SSPC-VIS 3—Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel. V. SSPC-QP 1 —Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 W. SSPC-QP 2-Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint. X. SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 — Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxies, polyurethanes, acrylics, zincs, and other protective coatings with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness. C. VOC means Volatile Organic Components 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See the Drawings and other Specifications to determine how coatings under this Section will be applied. Paint or coat new and modified surfaces in conformance with this Section. B. Coating system schedules summarize surfaces to be coated, required surface preparation, and coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on Drawings are used to show exceptions to schedules,to show or extend limits of coating systems, or to clarify or show details for application of coating systems. C. Do not apply protective coatings to the following surfaces unless specifically named or shown to be coated: 1. Concrete. 2. Stainless steel, bronze, or brass 3. Machined surfaces. 4. Grease fittings. 5. Glass. 6. Equipment nameplates. 7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces. 8. Galvanized steel electrical conduit and associated galvanized and factory-coated junction boxes and electrical panels. 9. Galvanized surfaces inside buildings and not exposed to view. 10. Manhole and valve covers and rings, storm water inlet gratings, covers, and frames. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 02—Submittal Procedures. B. Submit the following information at least 10 days prior to protective coating work. 1. Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list naming the manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems described in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal. 2. Paint Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, submit the following data: Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. Paint manufacturer's Product Data Sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation, application and curing. d. Colors available for each product, where applicable. e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable. f. Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used. g. VOC of each paint or coating proposed, stated in grams per liter. 3. Samples a. Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials on 8-1/2 inch by 11- inch sheet metal or heavy cardstock. Have each sheet completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material,type, and color. b. Provide two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the City Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom-mixed colors are indicated, prepare color samples using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the City Engineer. c. Submit one 15-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Submit five (5) references which show that the painting Contractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number forthe owner of each installation for which the painting Contractor provided the protective coating. As an alternative, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC- QP 1. B. For any project which involves removal or repair of lead based paints, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 2. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS A. Ventilate area where coating is being applied. Post and enforce NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME signs until coating has cured. B. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles (860 1x) measured mid-height at substrate surface. C. Restrict worker access and construction traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. D. Comply with all applicable OSHA confined space entry regulations including but not limited to OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space Standard 1910.146. 1.08 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Inspection: 1. A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer must attend the inspection. At the option of the City, the City may be represented by a NACE certified coating inspector. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. The City Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether.Cancellation of the warranty inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 3. Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in accordance with these Specifications. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATINGS CRITERIA A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Recommendations must be accompanied by test methods used to determine suitability and results of these tests. B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers, intermediate coats and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use. D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the coating schedules or as selected by the City Engineer. Make each coat a contrasting shade to the previous and following coats to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. The City Engineer will select finish colors from the manufacturer's standard color samples. E. Substitute or Equal Products: 1. To establish equality under Section 01630 — Product Substitution Procedures, furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent to or better in the following properties: a. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage. b. Resistance to chemical attack. c. Life expectancy. d. Ability to recoat in the future. e. Solids content by volume. f. Dry film thickness per coat. g. Compatibility with other coatings. h. Suitability for the intended service. i. Temperature limitations in service and during application. j. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats. k. Ease of application. I. Ease of repairing damaged areas. m. Stability of colors. n. VOC content expressed in grams per liter. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. For substitutions,submit protective-coating materials which are standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested, provide the City Engineer with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products, which comply with these requirements.Applications must be in similar service environments to the job being contracted. 2.02 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many of the specified industrial coating materials. Manufacturers and specific paint designations (numbers) are listed to indicate the required type and quality of coating. Contractors are to base their bid on the use of products supplied by one of the named manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the only manufacturers of products acceptable for use. Other manufacturers will be considered on an individual basis, and may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Document 0700, Article 3.8, Product Options and Substitutions (excluding 3.8.3), Section 01 33 02—Submittal Procedures, and this Section. 1. Akzo Nobel/International Paint (IP) Coatings LLC 2. Carboline Coatings Company 3. Hempel Coatings USA, Inc. 4. Tnemec Company 5. Sherwin Williams 6. PPG (selections are based on former Ameron designations;; now acquired by PPG) B. System 1 — Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Use a two-component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. As primer, use a rust inhibitive 2-component epoxy coating with minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume. It is common for most epoxies and urethanes to have a minimum 70 solid by volume @ this point. 1. Prime Coat: a. DFT=4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b. Products: IP-BarRust 231, PPG 385, Carboguard 60, Tnemec 69, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (one or more): a. DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns). b. Products: IP-DevThane 379, PPG 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, Tnemec 74, or equal. 3. Total System = 6-10 mils (150-250 microns). 4. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. C. System 2 — Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyurethane: For prime coat, use a 2-component water or solvent-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system.As intermediate coat, use a high-build,2-component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. For finish coat, use a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. 1. Prime Coat: Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. DFT= 2.5-4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b. Products: IP-Cathacoat 304L, PPG Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carbozinc 11 Solvent/Carbozinc 11 WB Water Base or D7WB, or equal. 2. Intermediate Coat: a. DFT= 4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b. IP-BarRust 231, PPG 385, Carboline 893Carboguard 60 series, or equal. 3. Finish Coats (one or more): a. DFT= 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b. IP-Devthane 379H, PPG 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, or equal. 4. Total System DFT= 9-14 mils (225-600 microns). 5. Apply intermediate coat in excess of 4 mils (100 microns) DFT using the mist coat/full coat technique to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and prevent bubbling of the epoxy or polyurethane finish coat. 6. Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. 7. If inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop-applied primer, and there are damaged or uncoated areas, spot blast the damaged areas with abrasive to an SSPC-SP 10 Near White Metal Standard and then coat with the specified material. D. System 3—Inorganic Zinc: Use a 2-component water-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(one). a. DFT= 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b. Products: IP-Cathacoat 305, PPG Dimetcote 21-5, Carboguard 11 WB, or equal. 2. Total System DFT=2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). E. System 4 — Acrylic Latex: Use a single component, water-based acrylic latex with a fungicide additive having a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Apply a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer. Select coating material, which is available in ANSI safety colors. 1. Prime Coat a. DFT=2-3 mils (50-75 microns). b. Products: IP-DevFlex 4020, Carboline D3358, PPG 148, Hemucryl 1803. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT= 6-8 mils (150-200 microns). b. Products: IP-DevFlex 4216, Carboline D3359, PPG 220, Hemucryl 4803, or equal. 3. Total System DFT= 8-11 mils (200-275 microns). F. System 5—Epoxy: Use a two-component, rust inhibitive, polyamide-cured epoxy coating material with a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors. Use a coating with a minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume and resistant to service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and frequent washdown and cleaning. 1. Prime Coat: a. DFT= 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b. Products: IP-Devran 224V, PPG 385PA, Carbomastic 90, Tnemec 69, or equal. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Prime Coat (where shop applied): a. DFT= 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b. Products: IP-Devran 224V, PPG 370, Carbomastic 90, Tnemec 161, or equal. 3. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT= 5-7 mils (125-175 microns). b. Products: IP-Devran 224V, PPG 385, Carboguard 60, Tnemec 69, Vor equal. 4. Total System DFT= 8-12 mils (200-300 microns). G. System 6 — Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiberglass: Use a two-component aliphatic polyurethane coating material with superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering. Use a primer, tie coat, or mist coat as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime Coat (Tie Coat): IP-BarRust 231, PPG 385, Carboguard 60, Tnemec P66, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more) a. DFT= 2-4 mils (50-75 microns). b. Products: IP-Devthane 379H, Ameron Amershield, Carbothane 134 HG, Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, or equal. H. System 7 —Alkyd Enamel: Use a high quality, gloss, or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd finish with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prime Coat: a. DFT= 2-3 mils (50 to 75 microns). b. Products: IP-Devguard 4180, PPG 5105, Carbcoat 115, Tnemec P4-55, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT= 2-4 mils (50-75 microns). b. Products: IP-Devguard 4308, PPG 5401 HAS, Carbocoat 45, Tnemec 2H, or equal. 3. Total System DFT=4-7 mils (100-175 microns). I. System 8—Aluminum Metal Isolation: Use one coat of a high-build polyamide epoxy paint. 1. Products: IP-BarRust 231,Tnemec P66, PPG 385, Carboguard 60, Tnemec P66, or equal. 2. Total System DFT= 6-8 mils (150-200 microns). J. System 9 — Aluminum Silicone Resin: Use an aluminum silicone resin material suitable for a service temperature of up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Coating must comply with Federal Specification DOD-P-28. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat(2 or more): a. DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns). b. Products: IP-Intertherm 50, Tnemec 39-1061, APPG 878, Thermaline 4700 Aluminum, or equal. C. Total System DFT=2-4 mils (50-100 microns). K. System 10 — Zinc Rich Epoxy: Use a polyamide Epoxy resin material that contains at least 76 percent zinc in the dried film. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coat (2 or more): Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. DFT= 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b. Products: IP-Cathacoat 313, PPG, Carbozinc 859), or equal. c. Total System DFT=3-5 mils (75-125 microns). 2.07 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: The manufacturers listed in this paragraph are materials, which satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful record for long-term submerged or severe service conditions. Proposed substitute products will be considered as indicated under paragraphs 2.01.5. B. System 100—Amine-Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build amine-cured epoxy with a solids content of at least 80 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed in the NSF 61 Standard. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a. DFT= 16-19 mils (400 to 475 microns). b. Products: IP-BarRust 233H, PPG Amercoat 395, Carboguard 891 HS Tnemec 139, or equal. 2. For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT= 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). C. System 101 — Polyamide Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build, polyamide epoxy resin with a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water or municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed under NSF 61 Standard. 1. Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a. DFT= 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). b. Products: IP-BarRust 233H, Tnemec 20, Carboline Carboguard 60or equal. D. System 102—Coal Tar Epoxy: Use a high-build, 2-component amine or polyamide-cured coal tar epoxy with a solids content of at least 68 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in wastewater or for coating of buried surfaces. Coating must conform to Mil Spec DOD-P-23236, or to SSPC Paint 16. Prime coats are for use as a shop primer only. Omit prime coat when both surface preparation and coating are performed in the field. 1. Prime Coat: DFT= 1.5-2.5 mils (38-65 microns). a. Products: PPG Amercoat 83HS, Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec P66, or equal. 2. Finish Coats (2 or more): a. DFT= 14-18 mils (350-450 microns). b. Products: IP-Devtar 5A, PPG 78HB, Carboline Bitumastic 300M, Tnemec 46H413, or equal. C. Total System DFT= 15.5-20.5 mils (387-513 microns). E. System 103 — Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Use a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in accordance with ANSI/AVVWA C213, except prepare surface as specified in the coating system schedule in this Section. Apply the coating using the fluidized bed process. 1. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs, use a 100 percent solids liquid epoxy as recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer to provide a DFT of 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). 2. Powder Coating: a. DFT= 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. Products: Scotchkote 134 or 206N, Napgard 7-0008 or 7-2500, or equal. C. Total System DFT= 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). d. For coating of valves, DFT=11-12 mils (275-300 microns). F. System 104—Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining: 1. Materials: Use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber, chloroprene polymer (neoprene) rubber, or chlorosulfonated polyethylene (Hypalon) rubber sheet lining material. Submit shop drawings containing technical information that confirms the suitability of the lining material system for long-term immersion in each chemical to be stored. Service temperatures are expected to be up to 1500 F (650 C). a. Neoprene Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 59688, or equal. b. Chlorobutyl Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 60924, or equal. c. Natural Rubber (soft) Sheet Lining Material: Use a soft natural rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 83160, or equal. d. Natural Rubber (hard) Sheet Lining Material: Use a hard, natural rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave curing. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 8631, or equal. e. EPDM Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulphuric acid solution and formulated for autoclave or steam curing under pressure. f. Hypalon Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution. 2. Primers: Use primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators, and other necessary materials as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer. 3. Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, prepare the base metal as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer's installation instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications, provide the highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation required by either instructions or specifications. Perform abrasive blast cleaning in accordance with this section. 4. Installation: Install lining materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's written installation instructions. Line interior surfaces including piping, vents, fittings, flange faces, manhole covers, and blind flanges. 5. Testing: Test the lining system for holidays in accordance with this Section before and after curing. 6. Curing: Cure the lining system by steam using the time and temperature as required by the material manufacturer. G. System 105—Vinyl Ester: Use vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment that is suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30 percent sulfuric acid solutions. 1. Coating (2 or more coats): a. DFT=40-45 mils (1000-1125 microns). b. Products: IP-Ceilcote 232, Plasite 4100, or equal. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Prime Coat:As recommended by the material manufacturer. H. System 106 — 100% Solids Epoxy: Use a solventless epoxy resin coating suitable for severe service areas subject to splash, spillage or intermittent immersion in wide range of industrial chemicals and wastewater. Coating to resist normal abrasion from rolling vehicles. 1. Coating (2 or more coats): a. DFT= 15-20 mils (325-500 microns). b. Products: IP-DevMat 101,Ameron, Carboline. c. Prime Coat:As recommended by manufacturer. I. System 107 — 100% solids Epoxy Sealer: Use a clear, unpigmented solventless epoxy suitable for application over marginal surfaces, including damp surfaces, tight rust and tight old coatings. Coating serves as primer for alkyd, acrylic, epoxy, and polyurethane finish coats. 1. Coating (1 coat only): a. DFT= 1-2 mils (25-50 microns). b. Products: IP-Devoe 167 PrePrime, Carboline Rust Bond, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's products. B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, require the paint manufacturer to furnish the following services: 1. Provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction on the proper surface preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems. 2. Observe the start of surface preparation, mixing, and application and curing of the coating systems. 3. Provide the services of a NACE Certified Coating Inspector at all times during the surface preparation, mixing, application, curing and testing of all coatings applied in submerged or acid spill areas. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. For all jobs involving lead based paint removal or repair, require the presence of a certified Competent Person, Lead per OSHA requirements. B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color,texture and finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Apply a brushed stripe coat to all edges and welds after priming submerged or severe service areas. C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, name plates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 preparation and coating operations. Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Perform spray painting under carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) form a part of this Specification: 1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from steel surfaces by cleaning with solvent, vapor degreasing, emulsion or alkaline cleaners, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of all loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by rotary or impact powertools, power wire brushing, or power abrading. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5/NACE 1): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface. 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating, all of which are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. 7. Near-white Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Removal of all visible oil,grease,dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface. 3.04 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. Provide the minimum abrasive-blasted surface preparation as indicated in the coating system schedules at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the coatings manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service,the higher degree of cleaning applies. B. Perform metal surface preparation in conformance with the current SSPC/NACE Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces must match standard samples in SSPC-VIZ 1. C. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning using solving cleaning as per SSPC-SP1. D. Round or chamfer sharp edges. Grind to smooth finish burrs, surface defects, and weld splatter prior to blast cleaning. E. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Do not use automated blasting systems and metal shot or grit for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned with hard,sharp-cutting slag. F. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil-free abrasives. In the abrasive mix, use at least 50 percent steel grit. Replenish abrasive mix with new shot/grit combination as necessary to maintain the anchor profile within 1/2 mil(13 microns)of the specified profile. G. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. For air-blast cleaning, supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well-maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators which delivers oil and water-free air as checked with white blotter, white cloth, or plastic sheets at the beginning of each blasting sequence. I. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air-blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. Vacuuming must be the final cleaning method immediately prior to painting areas that will go into submerged service. J. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and wipe it with a tack cloth. K. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast or power tool cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. If the specified abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP2 — Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 — Power Tool Cleaning, may be used. If the coated area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and will be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal may be used. M. Completely remove shop-applied coatings of unknown composition before the specified coatings are applied. Examine valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Completely remove temporary coatings by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 method before starting abrasive blast cleaning. Alternate cleaning methods such as Baking Soda Blasting or Sponge Jet Blasting may be used as appropriate. N. Use the solvent cleaning method (SSPC-SP1)to clean shop-primed equipment in the field before finish coats are applied. 3.05 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL A. For galvanized ferrous metal, use the alkaline cleaning method per SSPC-SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of protective coatings.Alternate methods with biodegradable surfactant type cleaners followed by fresh water washing may be used as appropriate. B. Apply pretreatment coatings of surfaces in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS A. Remove grease, oil, heavy chalk,dirt, or other contaminants by solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Determine the generic type of the existing coatings by laboratory testing. B. Provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, remove deteriorated coatings Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 by abrasive blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean areas of tightly adhering coatings to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, with the remaining thickness of pre-existing coating not to exceed 3 mils. C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings, apply intermediate coatings conforming to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the indicated coating system or completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Make a small trial application for compatibility prior to painting large areas. Allow the trial application to cure for 7 days at 50° F (10°C) or higher before determining compatibility. D. Completely remove coatings of unknown composition prior to application of new coatings. E. Where specified or where job site conditions do not permit dry-abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water jetting or wet-abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, use inhibitors approved by the manufacturer of the coating system, which will be applied over the cleaned area. Begin the coating application as soon as the surface has dried, and before the formation of any flash rusting. Perform water jetting with or without abrasive injection, as appropriate, to achieve the specified degree of surface cleanliness. Do not use water-jetting methods for submerged or severe-service coating systems, unless specified for that area. 3.07 PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS,AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, for equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service, shop-prime, and then finish-coat in the field after installation. For methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting, comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, apply the finish coating in the shop and then touch-up the paint after installation. B. Perform surface preparation and coating work in the field for equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves. C. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generatorsets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switch gear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the required quality in the field or as indicated by the individual specification section for finish coats to be applied at the factory. For such equipment, prime and finish-coat in the shop and touch-up in the field after installation. Use the identical material for touch-up that was used for shop painting. Require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. Submit the coating material product data sheet with the shop drawings for the equipment. D. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer may have a standard coating system, which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. E. Protect shop-painted surfaces during shipment and handling. Protect surfaces with padding or blocking. Lift equipment with canvas or nylon slings. Before being top-coated, do not expose primed surfaces to the weather for more than 2 months or less when recommended by the coating manufacturer. F. Repair damage to shop-applied coatings in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. Make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Submit copies of applicable coating manufacturer's product data sheets with equipment shop drawings. 3.08 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Coatings are to be applied to items requiring coating prior to placement into service. At no time will an equipment item be placed into service prior to receiving the finish coating. B. Apply protective coatings to steel substrates in accordance with SSPC-PA1 — Paint Application Specification No. 1. Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. C. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule inspections with the City Engineer in advance. D. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day unless the area to be coated is protected by humidity control equipment set to maintain humidity below 50 percent at all times. E. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. F. Give special attention to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thickness is likely to occur. Use stripe painting by brush, after application of the primer, for these areas. G. Give special attention to materials, which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surface prior to assembly or installation. Use only inorganic zinc primers on faying surfaces. H. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which will present uniform texture and color-matched appearance. I. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions: 1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum range. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Substrate or air temperature less than 5° F (3° C) above the dew point. 4. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40°F (14° C) or less than 5° F (3° C) above the dew point within 8 hours after application of the coating. 5. Wind conditions in excess of 15 MPH or dust laden. J. Determine the dew point by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with the U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. K. For steel piping which will not be buried, have the surface abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. L. Apply finish coats after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete and the work areas are clean and dust free. Concrete must have cured for a minimum of 28 days @ 75° F (24° C) unless an approved epoxy sealer has been applied to green concrete within 12 hours of finishing the concrete. 3.09 CURING OF COATINGS A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete curing before placing the coating systems into service. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation using heated air may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting to force air into all compartments and around baffles.After interior coating operations have been completed, provide a final curing period that meets the minimum temperature and time requirements of the manufacturer of the coating system being applied, while operating the forced air ventilation system continuously. 3.10 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Give the City Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the City Engineer, or his appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless the City Engineer has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence. C. Inspection by the City Engineer or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the City Engineer to facilitate inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. Remove or grind smooth all scaffolding clips welded to the structure prior to surface preparation of the structure. E. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness (DFT) of protective coatings. Make DFT gauges available for the City Engineer's use throughout the coating process until final acceptance of the coatings. Provide the services of a NACE certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the final acceptance of the coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of the City Engineer. F. Perform holiday tests on coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Perform holiday tests on surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Mark and repair or recoat areas which contain holidays in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then retest. DO NOT PERFORM HOLIDAY TESTING AFTER STRUCTURE HAS BEEN SUBMERGED. 1. Coatings with Thickness Exceeding 20 mils (500 microns): For surfaces having a total DFT exceeding 20 mils (500 microns); use a pulse-type holiday Detector such as Elcometer 136, or equal. Adjust and operate in accordance with NACE RP0188. 2. Coatings with Thickness of 20 mils (500 microns) or Less: For surfaces having a total DFT of 20 mils or less, use Elcometer 269 non-destructive type holiday detector, or equal. Instrument must operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250 and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. For submerged or severe service areas,the residue of the wetting agent must be removed with clean,fresh water prior to application of any additional coats. G. On ferrous metals, measure the DFT in accordance with SSPC-PA2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with magnetic gauges using either a pull-off type gauge (Elcometer 211) or constant pressure gauge (Elcometer 345F), or equal. Test each coat for the correct thickness. Calibrate the DFT gauge at the beginning of each workday or shift in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the gauge. Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 application. On non-ferrous metals, measure the DFT with positive pressure eddy current gages (Elcometer 345N) or equal. H. Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison with photographic samples contained in SSPC-VIZ 1. I. Evaluation of surface profile will be based upon the use of TesTex pressure sensitive tapes. 3.11 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Painting and Color Coding: 1. Use colors and signs to identify all piping and equipment which is exposed to view in buildings or tunnels, above suspended ceilings or exposed above grade, and all outdoor piping. Identify each pipe and equipment item by a color complying with the following schedule of colors and by applied markers. 2. Coat item with the number of coats and type of material specified. Base coats for item painting may be a neutral color. Make each succeeding base coat a contrasting color. For the final coat, comply with the pipe identifying color schedule. 3. Apply pipe identification markers to exposed piping, except for the following pipe at wastewater lift stations: a. Discharge piping for wastewater pumps. b. Vent piping. c. Any piping inside wet wells. B. Pipe Identification Markers: 1. Identify all pipes with applied signs or markers at 15-foot centers, at both sides of penetrated walls or floors, adjacent to valves, at connected equipment, at branch fittings, and in congested pipe layouts. a. Apply markers consisting of signs with legends as follows: OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF PIPE OR COVERING COLOR FIELD LETTERS INCHES INCHES INCHES 3/4 to 1- 1/4 8 1/2 1- 1/2 to 2- 3/8 8 3/4 2- 1/2 to 5- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 6 to 7- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 8 to 10 24 2- 1/2 Over 10 32 3- 1/2 b. As pipe markers, use semi-rigid outdoor grade acrylic plastic UV resistant with UV resistant ink, Seton Name Plate Corp., SetMark, or equal. Use Type SNA for outside diameters 3/4 through 5- 7/8 inches and Type STR for 6-inch outside diameter or larger. For pipes less than 3/4-inch in diameter, use applied marker of brass identification tags 1- 1/2 inches square with depressed letters 1/4-inch high,black-filled.Apply tightly to pipeline with metal or plastic straps. Pipe markers shall meet ANSI A13.1 —2007. c. For pipelines with operating temperatures above 150°F; Contractor shall paint pipe labeling with approved stencils. C. Pipe and Equipment Identification Color Schedule: 1. Color identification shall be in accordance with TCEQ Chapter 290.42(d)(1 3)A and Chapter 217.329. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. For pipe and equipment coatings, use the colors listed in the following identification color schedule: Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE WATER TREATMENT PLANT(WTP)/FACILITY SYSTEMS COLOR Plant Potable Water Light Blue Plant Process Water Light Blue with Dark Blue Bands Filter or Membrane Effluent Light Blue Filter or Membrane Backwash Supply Light Blue Filter or Membrane Backwash Waste Dark Grey Settled Water Green Raw Water Tan Filter Backwash Air Dark Green Raw Sludge Yellow Brown Thickened Sludge Brown Centrifuge Centrate Light Brown CHEMICAL SYSTEMS COLOR Chlorine (gas liquid, or vent) Yellow Chlorine (solution) or Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow with Red Bands Chlorine Dioxide Yellow with Blue Bands Ammonia (Gas, Aqueous, or Liquid Ammonium Yellow with Brown Bands Sulfate) Ozone Stainless Steel with White Bands Liquid Alum or PACI Yellow with Orange Bands Alum or PACI Solution Yellow with Green Bands Ferric Chloride Brown with Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Brown with Yellow Bands Polymers White with Green Bands Liquid Caustic White with Red Bands Caustic (solution) White with Orange Bands Fluoride White with Yellow Bands Oxygen Orange Sulphur Dioxide Gas Lime Green with Yellow Bands Sodium BiSulfite Lime Green with Brown Bands 3. For pipe identification colors not listed above, follow American National Standard (ANSI A13.1-2007) Color Schedule: Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. Materials inherently hazardous, flammable or explosive; chemically active or toxic; extreme temperature or pressure; radioactive:Yellow Field with Black Letters. b. Material of inherently low hazard — liquid or liquid admixture: Green Field with White Letters; gas or gaseous admixture: Blue Field with White Letters. c. Fire quenching materials, water, foam, carbon dioxide, Halon, etc.: Red Field with White Letters. d. For polymer systems provide different band sizes and/or alternate schemes to distinguish between neat and activated polymer. e. For other systems not covered by this specification develop color code chart for review by Owner and Engineer. 3.12 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES— FERROUS METALS A. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal— Not Galvanized SCHEDULE NO. AND SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATION SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FM-1: Surfaces indoors and outdoors, Near White Metal blast (2) exposed or covered, except those listed cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Inorganic zinc/epoxy/ below. polyurethane FM-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, chlorine Near White Metal blast (100) storage room, sodium hypochlorite storage cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Amine-cured epoxy room FM-3: Surfaces of pumps and equipment and White Metal Blast (100) other ferrous surfaces submerged or Cleaning SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 Amine-cured epoxy intermittently submerged in potable water, utility water, and wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water level in hydraulic structures, and surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures, pump state wet wells, and vents (excluding shop- coated valves, couplings, and pumps). FM-4: Surfaces exposed to high temperature Near White Metal blast (3) between 1500 and 6000 F (650 and 3150 C). cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Inorganic Zinc, water- based FM-5: Surfaces exposed to high temperature Near White Metal blast (9) between 6000 and 1000° F. cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Aluminum silicon resin FM-6: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast Cleaning (101) water passages of valves 4-inch size and SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 Polyamide-cured epoxy larger, exterior surfaces of submerged valves. FM-7: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in White Metal Blast Cleaning (101) water passages of pumps which have SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 Polyamide-cured epoxy discharge size of 4 inches or larger; exterior, submerged surfaces of pumps. FM-8: Ferrous surfaces of sleeve couplings. White Metal Blast Cleaning (103) SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 Fusion-bonded epoxy FM-9: Ferrous surfaces of sluice gates, flap White Metal Blast Cleaning (101) gates, and shear gates, including wall SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 Polyamide-cured epoxy thimbles. FM-10: Structural steel, miscellaneous metal Commercial Blast Cleaning (10) work, and supports for prefabricated metal (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Zinc Rich Epoxy buildings, not exposed to view in finished building. Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SCHEDULE NO. AND SYSTEM NO./ APPLICATION SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION FM-12: Ferrous metal exposed to view, inside Near White Metal blast (2) and outside of buildings. cleaning SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Inorganic zinc/ epoxy/polyurethane FM-13: Surfaces of indoor equipment, not Commercial Blast Cleaning (5) submerged. SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Epoxy, e ui ment FM14: Exterior(exposed) surfaces shop- Light abrasive blast to roughen (6) coated with fusion-bonded epoxy. surface Aliphatic polyurethane FMG-1: Exposed surfaces indoors and (1) or(4) outdoors, except those listed below. Alkaline cleaning SSPC-SP1 Aliphatic Polyurethane, or Acrylic FMG-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, (100) chlorine storage room, and sodium Alkaline Cleaning SSPC SP1 Amine cured epoxy hypochlorite storage room. FMG-3: Surfaces submerged in water or Alkaline cleaning SSPC-SP1 wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 followed by Brush-Off blast (100) feet above high-water level and surfaces cleaning SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 Amine-cured epoxy inside hydraulic structures and vents FMG-4: Surface exposed to view, inside and (1) or(4) outside of building. Alkaline Cleaning SSPC-SP1 Aliphatic polyurethane, or Acrylic B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal — Galvanized: Apply pretreatment coatings, barrier coatings, or washes as recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3.13 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES, NONFERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames, or hatches. Use primers recommended by coating manufacturer. SYSTEM NO./ SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATIONS SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION NFM-1: Exposed surfaces, indoors and Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (1) outdoors, except those listed below. Aliphatic Polyurethane NFM-2: Chlorination room, chlorine storage Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (100) room, sodium hypochlorite storage room. Amine-Cured Epoxy NFM-3: Aluminum surfaces in contact with (8) concrete, or with any other metal except Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 Aluminum Metal Isolation galvanized ferrous metal. NFM-4: Polyvinyl chloride plastic, indoors Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (4) and outdoors, not submerged. Acrylic Per paragraph 3.09, Plastic, (6) NFM-5: Fiberglass surfaces. Fiberglass, and Non-Ferrous Aliphatic Polyurethane Metals Surface Preparation Fiberglass END OF SECTION Protective Coatings 09 96 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 13 00 00 WIRE OR STRAND WOUND, PRESTRESSSED CONCRETE TANK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. This section specifies the design qualifications for the Tank Contractor and requirements for the construction of a tank with an AWWA D110 Type III wire or strand wound, prestressed, concrete circular core wall; including all site work, excavation, reinforcing, concrete work, appurtenances, disinfection, testing, and backfill directly related to the tank unless otherwise specified. 2. In the event of discrepancy between this section of the Specifications and any other section of the Specifications, this section shall govern. 3. The Tank Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to construct, disinfect and test the wire or strand wound, prestressed concrete tank and appurtenances as indicated on the drawings, and as specified. If Special Inspections and Observations are required, the Owner shall provide these services. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Appendix 1 —City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Specification & Detail Drawings 2. Appendix 2—Geotechnical Engineering Report and Supplemental Letter C. Description of System 1. The tank shall consist of a cast-in-place reinforced concrete floor, a wire or strand wound precast prestressed concrete wall, and a cast-in-place column-supported two-way slab roof. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications and Experience 1. Singular Responsibility: It is the intent of this specification to require single party responsibility for the design and the construction of the tank. The tank design and construction shall be performed by an established Tank Contractor of recognized ability, having at least ten years of experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III wire or strand wound prestressed concrete core wall as specified herein. The design and construction of all aspects of the foundation, floor slab, wall, prestressing, shotcrete and column supported flat roof with TCEQ minimum requirements or strand wound circular prestressed tank shall be performed by the Tank Contractor. The Tank Contractor may subcontract labor for reinforcing steel installation and for concrete slab placement under the Tank Contractor's direct supervision. 2. All tank work shall be performed by a company that specializes in the design and construction of wire or strand wound prestressed concrete tanks using the method of circumferential prestress reinforcing and with proven capability of meeting all the requirements of these specifications. No company is considered qualified unless it has designed and built in its own name or under one of its divisions at least twenty AWWA D110 prestressed concrete tanks with a Type III core wall in the last ten years. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with a Type I, II or IV core wall is not acceptable. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. The Tank Contractor shall have in its employ a design professional engineer with a minimum of ten years experience, registered in the state of Texas . The design engineer shall have been the engineer of record for a minimum of ten tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III core wall. 4. The Tank Contractor shall have in its employ for this project a team consisting of a tank superintendent, project manager, certified shotcrete foreman, prestressing foreman, and precast erection foreman, each of whom shall have constructed a minimum of three tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III core wall and a capacity of 5.0 MG or greater. 5. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type I, Type II or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild-steel reinforced tank core wall or tank core wall incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. B. Prequalification 1. All tank contractors are required to be prequalified. The bidder is required to state on the face of his sealed proposal the name of the prequalified tank contractor. Sealed proposals which do not state the name of the prequalified tank contractorwill be returned to the bidder unopened. 2. The following two Contractors are prequalified for the design and construction of wire or strand wound precast prestressed concrete tanks— a. DN Tanks, Inc., Delaware (Natgun Corporation, Massachusetts, and DYK Incorporated, California, Divisions of DN Tanks) b. Preload, LLC, Louisville, Kentucky 3. Additional Tank Contractors seeking prequalification shall make a complete submittal to the Engineer for review and approval no later than ten days prior to the date set for receipt of bid, in accordance with Section 1.03A. The submittal shall include detailed design drawings and calculations meeting the requirements of these specifications,the company's record of previous experience in the design and construction of AWWA D110 circular,wire or strand wound prestressed concrete tanks constructed in their own name, with a Type III core wall, including the experience of the design engineer meeting the requirements of Section 1.02 A.3 and a project team meeting the requirements of Section 1.02 A.4. Within five days prior to the date of receiving bids, the Engineer will publish a list of additional prequalified Tank Contractors. 4. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type I, Type II or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild-steel reinforced tank core wall or tank core wall incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. 5. All Tank Contractors not prequalified in accordance with Section 1.02 will be rejected. C. Codes &Standards All Codes shall be considered the most current version of that code unless noted otherwise. 1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting 3. ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting 4. ACI 309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 5. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary 6. ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary 7. ACI 350.3 Seismic Design of Liquid Containing Concrete Structures and Commentary Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. ACI 372R Design and Construction of Circular Wire- and Strand Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Structures 9. ACI 506R Guide to Shotcrete 10. ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 11. ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete 12. ASTM A416 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete 13. ASTM A421/A421M Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete 14. ASTM A475 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand 15. ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 16. ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 17. ASTM A706/A706M Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 18. ASTM A821 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Hard Drawn for Prestressing Concrete Tanks 19. ASTM A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable 20. ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 21. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 22. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 23. ASTM C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 24. ASTM C618, Type F Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 25. ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 Ft. —Ibf/ft3) 600 KN-M/M3) 26. ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 27. ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber 28. ASTM C1116/C1116M Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete 29. ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method 30. ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 Ft. —Ibf/ft3) 2700 KN-M/M3) 31. ASTM D2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 32. ASCE Standard 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 33. AWWA C652 Standard for Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities 34. AWWA D110 Wire and Strand Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks 35. TID-7024, Dynamic Pressure on Fluid Containers of Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes 36. US Army Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-572, Specification for PVC Waterstop D. Design Criteria 1. The prestressed concrete tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of AWWA D110 Standard for Wire or Strand Wound Circular Prestressed- Concrete Water Tanks, Type III core wall, ACI 350, ACI 350.3, ASCE 7 and IBC. 2. Horizontal prestressing shall be continuous. Discontinuous prestressing tendons or strands will not be allowed. 3. The Tank Contractor shall use the following loadings and requirements in the design calculation: a. Capacity: 10 million gallons. b. Dimensions: 322' inside diameter 16.5'water depth. c. Dead Load: shall be the estimated weight of all permanent imposed loads. Unit weight of concrete 150 pounds per cubic foot; steel 490 pounds per cubic foot. d. Live Load: shall be the weight of all the liquid when the reservoir is filled to overflowing. Unit weight of liquid 62.4 pounds per cubic foot. e. Wind Load: 150 mph, exposure C, Risk Category III. Design shall be in accordance with the adopted building code of the City of Corpus Christi and IBC-2018 for the Texas Department of Insurance, whichever is more stringent. f. Total Roof Live Load: 20 psf. g. Refer to Geotechnical Report and Supplemental Letter for backfill requirements. h. Backfill Pressure: earth loads shall be determined by rational methods of soil mechanics. Backfill pressure shall not be used to reduce the amount of required prestressing. i. Foundation Loads: the tank foundation shall be proportioned so that soil pressure shall be less than the soil bearing capacity. Reference geotechnical report for allowable gross soil bearing capacity. j. Seismic Criteria: i. Seismic Design Criteria: Seismic design shall be based on the applicable sections of AWWA D110-04, ACI 350.3, ASCE 7, TID 7024 and the local jurisdictional building code. The comparative value of 80% as specified in ASCE 7, Section 15.4.1 paragraph 6 shall be used to determine the total base shear from ASCE 7. Impulsive and convective forces, as well as, fluid spectral velocity shall be calculated utilizing each code and the maximum value of each component shall be used to calculate the total base shear. ii. ASCE 7/AWWA D110-13 Design Criteria: SDS= 0.0739, S01= 0.034g Site Class D, SDC =A iii. Sloshing Height: The sloshing height shall be calculated using AWWA D110, but need not exceed the fluid displacement calculation when determined using ACI 350.3, TID 7024 or ASCE 7. The effects of the "sloshing wave" shall be accounted for by increasing the freeboard between the normal Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 operating surface and the underside of the roof, or a roof capable of resisting the uplift of such a wave designed. A minimum freeboard height of 11 inches above the design liquid level shall be utilized. Any confined portion of the convective (sloshing) mass shall be calculated and applied as an additional impulsive mass. iv. Dynamic Effects of Backfill: Seismic design shall consider the additive effects of the dynamic backfill loading. V. Base Restraint Cable Design: vi. When allowable shear resistance of the bearing pad is less than the total base shear obtained from the maximum values of impulsive and convective components and the dynamic effects of backfill, base restraint cables shall be utilized. The allowable cable stress is 0.75 fpu vii. For the total base shear obtained from the loading conditions of ASCE 7 that incorporate an overstrength factor(Omega Factor), the allowable bearing pad shear or seismic cable stress (if required by design) shall be increased by 20%. The Omega factor shall be incorporated in accordance with ASCE 7 for all loading cases. i. Wind Loads: shall be as required by ASCE 7 j. Vent Capacity Requirements: i. Maximum Fill Rate: 100 mgd. ii. Maximum Draw Down Rate: 100 mgd. k. Overflow Design Capacity: 100 mgd 4. The Tank Contractor shall design the composite concrete wall with steel diaphragm and closure steel slot plate in combination with vertical mild steel reinforcement based on the following design criteria and requirements: a. The prestressed tank wall shall be considered as a cylindrical shell with partial edge restraint. b. The prestressed tank wall shall be reinforced vertically by deformed steel reinforcing bars. The steel diaphragm can be taken as effective vertical reinforcing. c. The prestressed tank wall shall be of precast construction. The minimum core wall thickness shall be 4 inches. The core wall is that area of the wall interior to all circumferential prestressing. Shotcrete or cast-in-place concrete core walls are not permitted. d. For wire wound tanks, a stress plate shall be required at all above grade locations where prestress wires are displaced 24 inches or greater. The stress plate shall be designed to transfer stress across the opening. e. No reduction in ring compression or tension in the wall will be taken due to restraint at the bottom. f. The long-term prestressing losses caused by shrinkage, creep, and relaxation in the prestressed reinforcement of the tank walls shall not be assumed less than 25,000 psi. g. Lateral soil pressures shall not be considered in resisting seismically generated shear forces between the wall footing and the wall. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Floor Slab a. The floor slab shall be designed as a membrane floor not less than 4 inches thick. Construction joints will only be allowed as shown on the shop drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Construction joints shall incorporate a horizontal 6 inch PVC waterstop. b. Wall footings may be constructed above or below floor grade. If required, the floor shall have thickened regions to facilitate transitions from under slab concrete pipe encasements into the floor,appurtenance loadings and temporary bracing requirements. C. Minimum cross-sectional area ratio of floor reinforcement to concrete shall be in accordance with the following paragraph: i. For tanks with diameters less than 100 feet, provide 0.5%. ii. For tanks with diameters 100 to 150 feet, provide 0.6%. iii. For tanks with diameters greater than 150 feet, provide 0.8% iv. For tanks with diameters larger than 100 feet, when shrinkage reducing admixtures are utilized, provide 0.5%. d. Polypropylene or cellulose fibers may be used at the Tank Contractor's discretion. 6. Flat Roof, Columns and Column Footings: The design of the flat roof column supported roof shall be based on the direct design method or finite element analysis: a. The flat roof shall be a cast-in-place, reinforced concrete roof and shall either be separated by solid neoprene bearing pads to allow free radial movement of the wall relative to the roof. b. The minimum thickness of the flat roof shall be 9 inches. The roof shall be reinforced with a minimum of two layers of non-prestressed reinforcing steel. c. The flat roof shall be supported by round spiral-reinforced concrete columns having a minimum diameter of 16 inches. d. The interior of the floor shall of sufficient thickness to accommodate column loads and footings without thickened footing sections above or below the floor. e. Nonprestressed mild steel reinforcement shall be provided to control shrinkage and temperature effects as well as edge effects as follows: i. Typical Roof Section: A minimum of 0.80% of the net cross sectional area shall be placed in two perpendicular directions. ii. Roof Edge:A minimum of 0.25% of the net cross section area with a minimum of two layers, one near each face. f. The roof of all tanks shall be designed and erected so that no water ponds at any point on the roof and, in addition, no area of the roof shall have a slope of less than 0.75 inch per foot. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prequalification Submittals Ten Days Prior to Bid Date 1. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit preliminary design drawings and calculations showing the dimensions of the tank, details of the type of construction, wire or strand wound prestressing methods, and sizes of principal members. The drawings and calculations shall be of sufficient detail to show compliance with the specification and all required standards and shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state the tank is to be constructed. The registered Engineer shall certify the design is in conformance with AWWA D110, having a Type III core wall. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit a complete experience record for the tanks they have designed and built in their own name. The record shall include the Tank Contractor's experience in the design and construction of wire or strand wound, prestressed concrete tanks conforming to AVVWA D110, having a Type III core wall. The record shall also indicate the size of the tank,the name and address of the Owner,the year of construction, and the name of the Engineer for each project. 3. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit the name of the tank designer, currently in its employ, and his/her experience as the designer of record for tanks with an AVVWA D110 Type III core wall, meeting the requirements of Section 1.02.A.3, including the size of the tank, seismic zone, the name and address of the Owner, the year of construction and the name of the Engineer. 4. Tank Contractors not previously prequalified shall submit the resumes for each member of the project team including the tank superintendent, project manager,shotcrete foreman,wire or strand winding foreman, and precast erection foreman that will be used for this project, meeting the requirements of Section 1.02.A.4. 5. Experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AVVWA D110 Type I, Type II, or Type IV core wall, tanks having a fixed wall base, mild-steel reinforced tank core wall or tank core wall incorporating internal stressing systems is not acceptable. B. Design Submittal after Execution of Contract 1. Design calculations and drawings in quadruplicate, showing details and procedures of construction, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval after execution of the Contract. After approval by the Engineer, one set of the drawings and calculations will be returned to the Tank Contractor,and any changes found necessary by the Engineer shall be made by the Tank Contractor. 2. Approval by the Engineer of the drawings and calculations submitted by the Tank Contractor will not in any way relieve the Tank Contractor of full responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the drawings and calculations. 3. Design calculations and drawings shall be stamped by a professional engineer experienced in the design of AVVWA D110, Type III wire or strand wound prestressed concrete tanks and registered in the state the tank is to be constructed. C. Construction Submittals for Review Prior to Use 1. Design proportions for all concrete and shotcrete. Concrete strengths of trial mixes. 2. Admixtures to be used in the concrete or shotcrete and their purpose. 3. Reinforcing steel shop drawings showing fabrication and placement. 4. Catalog cuts or shop drawings of all appurtenances, i.e. hatch, vent, ladders,waterstops. 5. Color charts and samples for "bluish-gray" tank color for City's review and approval per requirements in this specification. 1.04 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the 2018 edition of International Building Code (IBC). Contractor will be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Department of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 all tank and tank components to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. The Tank Contractor shall guarantee the structure against defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of completion. If any materials or workmanship prove to be defective within one year, they shall be replaced or repaired by the Tank Contractor at the Tank Contractor's expense. PART 2 MATERIAL 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall conform to ACI 301. B. Cement shall be Portland cement Type I or Type 11. C. Admixtures, other than air-entraining, superplasticizers, shrinkage reducing and water reducing admixtures will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. D. Concrete for tank wall and column-supported slab shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at twenty-eight days and a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. All precast wall and dome concrete shall be air-entrained. E. Concrete for the tank floor, footings, pipe encasement, and all other work shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at twenty-eight days,shall not be air-entrained, unless exposed to freeze thaw conditions, and have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. The coarse and fine aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate shall be No. 467 with 100% passing the 1'h inch sieve. Superplasticizers, water-reducing, and shrinkage reducing (if applicable) admixtures shall be incorporated into the floor concrete. If fibers are used, they shall be virgin polypropylene or cellulose fibers, Microfiber by Grace, Fibermesh 150 by Propex, UltraFiber 500 by Buckeye, or equal. Fiber lengths shall be a maximum of 3/ inches. The amount of fibers added to the concrete mix shall conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. F. Proportioning for concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 301. G. All concrete shall have a maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration of 0.06% by weight of cementitious material. 2.02 SHOTCRETE A. Shotcrete shall conform to ACI Standard 506, except as modified herein. B. The wet mix process shall be employed for shotcreting. C. Shotcrete used for covering prestressed wire or strand shall consist of not more than three parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Additional coats of shotcrete shall consist of not more than four parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Polypropylene fibers shall be included in the shotcrete used for the finish cover coat. Fibers shall be Fibercast 500 by Propex, Fibermesh or equal. Fibers shall be virgin polypropylene and comply with ASTM C-1116 performance level 1. Fiber length shall be'/ inch. The amount of the fibers added to the shotcrete used for the finish cover coat shall conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. Fly ash may be incorporated into the finish cover coat. Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Type F. Shotcrete shall have a minimum strength of 4,500 psi at twenty-eight days and have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. D. Rebound material shall not be reused in any form for shotcrete. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. If used by the Tank Contractor, the total volumetric air content of the shotcrete before placement shall not exceed 7% (±1%) as determined by ASTM C-173 or ASTM C-231. F. Fine Aggregates: 1. The fineness modulus shall be between 2.7 and 3.0. A well-graded coarse sand shall be used for all shotcrete applications. 2. The gradation forthe fine aggregates shall adhere to the"Grading No. 1"requirements listed in "Table 1.1 —Grading Limits for Combined Aggregates" of ACI 506. G. All shotcrete shall have a maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration of 0.06% by weight of cementitious material. 2.03 MORTAR FILL AND NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Mortar fill and non-shrink grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at twenty- eight days, have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42 and meet all requirements for concrete contained in this specification. B. Portland cement grout will not be accepted. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel Grade 60, as shown on the Drawings, meeting the requirements of ASTM A615. Welded wire fabric and weldable reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A185 and ASTM A706, respectively. B. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated and shall be free from loose rust, scale, and contaminants, which reduce bond. C. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned on supports, spacers, hangers, or other reinforcements and shall be secured in place with wire ties or suitable clips. Rebar chair supports may be either steel with plastic tips, turned up legs or plastic. D. Continuous reinforcing is required through floor and cast in place roof construction joints, where applicable. 2.05 BASE RESTRAINT CABLES A. Where required by design, the tank designer shall use base restraint cables to resist earthquake and/or wind loads. Base restraint cables shall be hot-dipped galvanized seven-wire strand and shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A416 prior to galvanizing, and ASTM A475 after galvanizing. Only seven-wire strand will be allowed. B. Hot-dipped galvanized seven-wire strand shall have a nominal strand diameter of 0.375 in, 0.50 in or 0.60 in. 0.375 inch diameter strand shall have an MUS after galvanization of 21.36 kips and a min. yield at 1% extension of 15.60 ksi. 0.50 inch diameter strand shall have an MUS after galvanization of 38.25 kips and a min. yield at 1% extension of 28.00 ksi. 0.60 inch diameter strand shall have an MUS after galvanization of 54.20 kips and a min. yield at 1% extension of 40.70 ksi. All strands shall have a minimum of weight of Zinc Coating of 0.85 oz/sq-ft. C. Neoprene sleeves for base restraint cables shall be closed-cell conforming to ASTM D1056,Type 2, Class A, and Grade 3. The sleeves shall have a compression deflection limited to 25% at 9 to 13 psi, hardness of 60 to 80 durometer, a minimum tensile strength of 175 psi, a minimum elongation of 180%, and a maximum compressive set of 35%. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.06 STEEL DIAPHRAGM A. The steel diaphragm shall conform to ASTM A1008 and shall be a minimum thickness of 0.017 inches. It shall be vertically ribbed with reentrant angles. The back of the channels shall be wider than the front, providing a mechanical keyway anchorage with the concrete and shotcrete encasement. B. The steel diaphragm shall extend to within 1 inch of the full height of the wall panel with no horizontal joints. Vertical joints within a wall panel shall be roll seamed or otherwise fastened in a fashion that results in a firm mechanical lock. Joints between wall panels that are not roll seamed shall be edge sealed with polysulfide or polyurethane sealant. C. No punctures will be permitted in the diaphragm except those required for pipe sleeves,temporary construction openings, or special appurtenances. The Engineer shall approve details of the openings. All openings shall be completely edge sealed with polysulfide or polyurethane sealant. D. Diaphragm steel may be considered as contributing to the vertical reinforcement of the wall. E. Steel closure plates shall be used at wall slots between precast wall panels on the exterior face to create a continuous steel diaphragm. 2.07 CIRCUMFERENTIAL PRESTRESSING STEEL A. Steel for prestressing shall either be cold drawn, high carbon wire orgalvanized seven wire strand. B. The wire shall meet the requirements of ASTM A821 and have a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 210,000 psi. C. Galvanized strand shall meet the requirements of ASTM A416 prior to galvanizing with zinc coating for galvanizing meeting the requirements of ASTM A641/641 M or ASTM A475. Each wire shall be individually hot-dipped galvanized before being stranded. The minimum weight of zinc coating per unit area of uncoated wire surface area shall be no less than 0.85 ounces per square foot. D. Splices for horizontal prestressed reinforcement shall be ferrous material compatible with the reinforcement and shall develop the full strength of the wire or strand. Wire or strand splice and anchorage accessories shall not nick or otherwise damage the prestressing. 2.08 ELASTOMERIC MATERIALS A. A 9 inch minimum waterstop with centerbulb shall be polyvinyl chloride meeting the requirements of the Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C 572. Splices shall be made in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations subject to the approval of the Engineer. Waterstop shall be manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products Company, Inc., or equal. B. Bearing pads shall be natural rubber or neoprene. 1. Natural rubber bearing pads shall contain only virgin natural polyisoprene as the raw polymer and the physical properties shall comply with ASTM D2000 Line Call-Out M 4 AA 414 Al 3. 2. Neoprene bearing pads shall have a hardness of 40 to 50 durometer, a minimum tensile strength of 1,500 psi, a minimum elongation of 500%, and a maximum compressive set of 50%. Pads shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2000 Line Call-Out M 2 BC 410 Al 4 B14 or M 2 BC 414 Al C12 F17 for 40 durometer material. C. Sponge filler shall be closed-cell neoprene or rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, and Grade 1 or 3. Compression deflection limited to 25% at 2 to 5 psi. D. Polysulfide or polyurethane sealant will be a two or three component elastomeric compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C920. Sealants shall have permanent characteristics of bond Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 to metal surfaces, flexibility, and resistance to extrusion due to hydrostatic pressure. Air cured sealants shall not be used. 2.09 EXTERIOR COATINGS A. A decorative coating shall be applied to the exterior roof surface using one coat of a primer for concrete product such as "Tamoseal H/P Primer" or equal, and two coats of a non-cementitious, high build, 100% acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth"textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156" or equal. A decorative coating shall be applied to the above grade exterior wall surfaces using two coats of a non-cementitious, high build, 100% acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth"textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156" or equal. B. The Contractor shall submit color samples per above specification for a "bluish-gray" color for the Engineer and Owner's review/approval prior to construction. 2.10 APPURTENANCES A. The Tank Contractor shall provide and install all appurtenances as shown on the drawings. Appurtenances shall include the following: 1. Inlet-Outlet Piping. Locate hatch as shown on drawings. 2. Overflow Piping and Weir, reference plans. Locate hatch as shown on drawings. 3. Roof Hatch: A 42 inch square aluminum hatch with lockable, hinged cover and curb frame. The hatch shall have a lift handle, padlock tab, padlock and a cover hold open mechanism. All hardware shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Locate hatch as shown on drawings. 4. Roof Ventilator: Fiberglass or Aluminum, with fiberglass insect 20 x 20 screen, minimum diameter 2 feet as specified in AWWA regulations 5. Interior Ladder: The ladder shall extend from the floor to the hatch. The ladder shall be made out of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) and have an OSHA-approved Stainless Steel fall prevention device(if required)consisting of a sliding, locking mechanism and safety belt. Location as shown on the drawings. 6. Exterior Ladder: The ladder shall be made out of 6061-T6 Aluminum and have an OSHA- approved Stainless Steel fall prevention device (if required) consisting of a sliding, locking mechanism and safety belt. Location as shown on the drawings. 7. Access Manway: A circular 37-inch diameter Type 304 stainless steel wall manway with a hinged cover. A Type 304 stainless steel grab bar and an aluminum ladder shall be installed at the manway location. Locate access manway as shown on drawings. 8. Handrail: Handrails shall be located as shown on contract plans. As a minimum handrails shall be provided for a distance of 10 feet to each side of the exterior ladder. All posts and rails shall be 6061-T6 or 6005-T6, Schedule 80, anodized aluminum pipe. All fittings shall be Hollaender Speed-Rail system or equal. Beveled toe board shall be installed at the front edge of handrail only and shall be attached using Hollaender clips or equal. 9. Safety Tie-Off Anchors: Provide three (3) permanent, OSHA compliant, anchorage connectors for a single employee to tie-off to shall be installed. The anchorages shall be located on the dome surface within 1.5 feet of the exterior ladder egress point, within 1 foot of the dome hatch and within 2 feet of the dome vent. Anchorages shall be Model 417 SS D-Bolt Anchors by Miller Fall Protection or approved equal. D-Bolts to be anchored to concrete using 316 SS high strength threaded rods, 316 SS Hex head nuts and suitable epoxy adhesive. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART 3 CONSTRUCTION 3.01 SAFETY A. Every precaution shall be taken to keep personnel and visitors outside the prestressing area. B. At no time shall anyone stand in the line of stressed wire or strand. C. No personnel is allowed outside of the tank, other than the prestressing crew, within 100 feet from the wrapping operation. Additional precautions shall be taken by Tank Contractor should specified clearance not be available. D. Where access to the site by unauthorized persons is outside the Tank Contractor's control, while prestressing work is in progress, Tank Contractor shall erect protective fencing. E. Tank Contractor to conform and enforce all Local and Federal OSHA safety rules and regulations. 3.02 CLEARING, GRUBBING,AND STRIPPING A. All trees, shrubs, brush, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable material shall be removed to a minimum distance of 12 feet outside the edge of the tank foundation, plus additional areas necessary for the tank construction. The limits of clearing shall be as shown on the drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer. B. No burning will be allowed unless approved by the Engineer and local authorities. All trees and vegetation shall be disposed of off-site, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. C. All topsoil shall be stripped from the proposed construction work area and stockpiled on site. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. The Tank Contractor is responsible for the removal of unsuitable soils and providing an engineered backfill foundation base to the contours provided in the drawings in accordance to the Geotechnical Engineering Report and Supplemental Letter. 3.04 FLOOR A. The floor and wall footings shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Approved Shop Drawings. B. Prior to placement of the floor reinforcing, a 6 mil polyethylene moisture barrier shall be placed over the leveling base material. Joints in the polyethylene shall be overlapped a minimum of 6 inches. C. Prior to placement of the floor concrete, all piping that penetrates the floor shall be set and encased in concrete. D. The vertical waterstop shall be placed and supported so that the bottom of the center bulb is at the elevation of the top of the footing. The waterstop shall be supported without puncturing any portion of the waterstop other than pre-manufactured holes, grommets or hog rings for tying at 12 inches o.c. The waterstop shall be spliced using a thermostatically controlled sealing iron and each splice shall be successfully spark tested prior to encasement in concrete. E. Floors over 20,000 sq. ft. in surface area, at the option of the Tank Contractor, may have one or more construction joints. Such construction joints shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placement and shall include a continuous waterstop and reinforcement through the joint. F. The floor shall be cured by applying one coat of curing compound, curing blankets and/or flooding with water, and shall remain saturated for a minimum of seven days. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. The minimum floor thickness at pipe encasements, sumps and under baffle walls shall be 8" and shall include two layers of reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be designed to accommodate anticipated differential settlement in these areas. 3.05 PRECAST WALL PANEL CONSTRUCTION AND ERECTION A. The precast wall panel shall be constructed with a continuous waterproof steel diaphragm embedded in the exterior of the precast panel. Horizontal joints in the diaphragm will not be allowed. B. No holes for form ties, nails, or other punctures will be permitted in the wall. C. Temporary wall openings may be provided for access and removal of construction materials from the tank interior subject to the approval of the Engineer. D. Wall beds shall be constructed to provide finished panels with the proper curvature of the tank. E. Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed between successive pours to provide a high moisture environment and a long slow cure for the concrete. F. The erecting crane and lifting equipment shall be capable of lifting and placing the precast panels to their proper location without causing damage to the panel. G. The precast panels shall be erected to the correct vertical and circumferential alignment. The edges of adjoining panels shall not vary inwardly or outwardly by more than 3/8 inch and shall be placed to the tank radius within±3/8 inch. H. Joints between precast wall panels shall be bridged with a 10 gauge steel plate edge sealed with polysulfide or polyurethane and filled with mortar as shown on the drawings. No through-wall ties will be permitted. 3.06 BAFFLE WALL A. Baffle walls shall be designed as shotcrete, precast concrete or cast-in-place concrete and meet the following requirements: 1. The minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 350. 2. The minimum amount and maximum spacing of non prestressed, mild steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 350. 3. The maximum spacing of lateral supports shall as required for stability and in accordance with the requirements of ACI 350. 3.07 CONCRETE A. All concrete shall be conveyed, placed, finished, and cured as required by pertinent ACI standards. B. Weather Limitations 1. Unless specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer,concrete shall not be placed without special protection during cold weather when the ambient temperature is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit and when the concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures before initial set has occurred and the concrete strength has reached 500 psi. Concrete shall be protected in accordance with ACI 306. The temperature of the concrete shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 306. All methods and equipment for heating and for protecting concrete in place shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2. During hot weather, concreting shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 305. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Placement of concrete during periods of low humidity (below 50%) shall be avoided when feasible and economically possible, particularly when large surface areas are to be finished. In any event, surfaces exposed to drying wind shall be covered with polyethylene sheets immediately after finishing, or flooded with water, or shall be water cured continuously from the time the concrete has taken initial set. Curing compounds may be used in conjunction with water curing, provided they are compatible with coatings that may later be applied, or they are degradable. C. Finishes The tank shall be given the following finishes: 1. The floor slab shall receive a bull float finish or Fresno finish. The top of the wall footing, exterior to the waterstop, shall receive a steel trowel or magnesium trowel finish. 2. The interior of the precast wall panels shall receive a light broom finish. 3. The exterior of the roof shall receive a light broom finish. The interior of the roof shall receive a form finish. 4. Exterior shotcrete shall receive a natural gun /nozzle finish. D. Curing 1. Concrete shall be cured using water methods, sealing materials, or curing compounds. Curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to which decorative coatings, mortar, or shotcrete is to be applied. Curing compounds used within the tank shall be suitable for use with potable water. E. Testing 1. For concrete placed in precast panels or wall slots, a set of three cylinders shall be made for each truck load of concrete placed. For concrete placed in the floor, dome ring, or dome slots, two sets of five cylinders for the first 50 cubic yards, and one set of five cylinders for every 100 cubic yards thereafter placed in the same day. Two cylinders shall be tested at seven days, two at twenty-eight days, and one held as a spare. 2. Slump, air content and temperature testing shall be performed on each truck where cylinders are taken. 3. All concrete testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39, at the expense of the City and shall be conducted by an independent testing agency approved by the Engineer. F. Baffle Walls: Concrete used for precast and cast-in-place baffle walls shall have a minimum 28- day compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days with the following properties: 1. Air Content: 4.5% +/- 1'h% 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.42 3. Fine and Course Aggregate: Meeting requirements of ASTM C33 4. Minimum reinforcing shall be 0.0025 times the area of the wall in each direction,vertical and horizontal. 5. Precast concrete baffle wall surfaces shall be form finish where formed and light broom finish on non-formed surfaces. 6. Precast, concrete baffle wall shall be constructed of curved or straight panels that are connected together with stainless steel bolts and connecting plates. The joint, between panels, shall be 1/2-inch± in width. 7. Wall surfaces shall have a form finish on the sides and a float finish on the top. 8. Joints in baffle walls are permitted and do not require waterstops. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.08 SHOTCRETING A. Weather Limitations 1. Shotcrete shall not be placed in freezing weather without provisions for protection against freezing. Shotcrete placement can start without special protection when the temperature is 35 degrees Fahrenheit and rising, and shall be suspended when the temperature is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and falling. The surface to which the shotcrete is applied shall be free from frost. Cold weather shotcreting shall be in accordance with ACI 506, ACI 301 and ACI 306. 2. Hot weather shotcreting shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 506, ACI 301 and ACI 305. B. Coating of Steel Diaphragm 1. The steel diaphragm shall be covered with a layer of shotcrete at least 1/2 inch thick prior to prestressing. 2. Total minimum coating over the steel diaphragm shall be 1'h inches including diaphragm cover, wire or strand cover, and finish cover coat. C. Coating Over Prestressing Wire or Strand 1. Each prestress wire or strand shall be individually encased in shotcrete. Shotcrete thickness shall be sufficient to provide a clear cover over the wire and strand of at least '/ inch and 3/8 inch, respectively. 2. Finish cover coat shotcrete shall be applied as soon as practical after the last application of wire or strand coat. 3. The minimum final shotcrete cover overthe outermost prestressing wire or strand layer shall be 1 inch. D. Placement of Shotcrete 1. Shotcrete shall be applied by an ACI 506 certified nozzleman. 2. Manually applied shotcrete shall be applied with the nozzle held at a small upward angle not exceeding five degrees and constantly moving during application in a smooth motion with the nozzle pointing in a radial direction toward the center of the tank. The nozzle distance from the prestressing shall be such that shotcrete does not build up or cover the front face of the wire or strand until the spaces behind and between the prestressing elements are filled. 3. Unless applied by an automated shotcrete process, total cover coat thickness shall be controlled by shooting guide wires. Vertical wires shall be installed under tension and spaced no more than two feet apart to establish uniform and correct coating thickness. Monofilament line (100 Ib. test) or 18 or 20 gauge high tensile strength steel wire shall be used. Guide wires shall be removed after placement of the cover coat. 4. Shotcrete applied by an automated shotcrete process shall be applied using the wet mix only. Nozzles shall be kept mounted on power driven machinery enabling the nozzle to travel parallel to the surface to be sprayed at a uniform linear or bi-directional speed. The nozzle shall be kept at a uniform constant distance from the surface, always insuring a right angle spray of the material to the surface. The high velocity impact shall be developed pneumatically by injecting compressed air at the nozzle. E. Curing 1. Shotcrete shall be cured using water curing methods, sealing materials or curing compounds at the option of the Tank Contractor. Curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to which decorative coatings, mortar or shotcrete is to be applied. Curing Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 compounds used within the tank wall shall be suitable for use with potable water. Intermediate layers of shotcrete shall be kept damp by water curing or other means no sooner than twelve hours after the shotcrete has been applied. 2. Water curing is not required should additional shotcrete be applied on the entire wall surface within the following twelve hours. 3. Indiscriminate use of continuous water cure for intermediate layers shall be avoided. 4. Complete shotcrete surfaces, which do not receive any additional coatings, may be water cured for a period of at least seven days by encapsulating the shotcrete inside of plastic sheeting. F. Testing 1. Testing of shotcrete shall be in accordance with ACI 506, except as specified herein. One test panel shall be made for each of the following operations: core wall,wire or strand cover, and cover coat. Test panels shall be made from the shotcrete as it is being placed, and shall, as nearly as possible, represent the material being applied. The method of making a test sample shall be as follows:A frame of wire fabric(1 foot square, 3 inches in depth)shall be secured to a plywood panel and hung or placed in the location where shotcrete is being placed. This form shall be filled in layers simultaneously with the nearby application. After twenty-four hours, the fabric and plywood backup shall be removed and the sample slab placed in a safe location at the site. 2. The sample slab shall be moist cured in a manner identical with the regular surface application. The sample slab shall be sent to the testing laboratory. Nine 3 inch cubes shall be cut from the sample slab and subjected to compression tests in accordance with current ASTM Standards. Three cubes shall be tested at the age of seven days, three shall be tested at the age of twenty-eight days, and three shall be retained as spares. Testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer and at the Tank Contractor's expense. 3. At the Tank Contractor's option testing of shotcrete applied with an automated process shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and conform to Section 3.07.E "Concrete Testing" of these specifications in lieu of that indicated in Section 3.09.F.1. G. Baffle Walls 1. Shotcrete used for baffle walls shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi with the following properties: i. The shotcrete shall consist of not more than four parts sand to one part cementitious material by weight. ii. Air Content: Entrained air may be used in wet mix shotcrete to facilitate placement in the amount of 6% +/- 1'h% iii. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.42 3.09 CIRCUMFERENTIAL PRESTRESSING A. Prestressing shall be performed utilizing continuous wire or strand. Prestressing wire/strand will be placed on the wall with a machine capable of consistently producing a stress in the wire/strand within a range of minus 7% to plus 7% of the stress required by the design. No circumferential movement of the prestressing along the tank wall will be permitted during or after stressing. Stressing may be accomplished by drawing the wire through a die or by another process that results in uninterrupted elongation, thus assuring uniform stress throughout its length and over the periphery of the tank. B. Each coil of prestressing shall be temporarily anchored at sufficient intervals to minimize the loss of prestress in case a wire/strand breaks during wrapping. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Minimum clear space between prestressing wires is 5/16 inch or 1.5 wire diameters,whichever is greater. Minimum clear distance between prestressing strands is 3/8 inch or 1.5 strand diameters, whichever is greater. Any wires or strands not meeting the spacing requirements shall be respaced. Prestressing shall be placed no closer than 2 inches from the top of the wall, edges of openings, or inserts, nor closer than 3 inches from the base of walls or floors where radial movement may occur. D. The band of prestressing normally required over the height of an opening shall be displaced into circumferential bands immediately above and below the opening to maintain the required prestressing force. Bundling of the prestressing steel shall be prohibited. E. For wire wound tanks, a stress plate shall be used at all permanent wall penetrations above grade that results in displacement of wire/strand equal to or greater than 24 inches in height. The stress plate shall accommodate a portion of the prestressing normally required for the height of the opening. The remaining prestressing normally required shall be displaced into circumferential bands immediately above and below the penetration. The effect of banded prestressing shall be taken into account in the design. F. Ends of individual coils shall be joined by suitable steel splicing devices capable of developing the full strength of the prestressing wire/strand. G. The Tank Contractor shall furnish a calibrated stress recording device,which can be recalibrated, to be used in determining wire/strand stress levels on the wall during and after the prestressing process. At least one stress reading per vertical foot or one stress reading for every roll of prestressing, whichever is greater, shall be taken immediately after the wire or strand has been applied on the wall. Readings shall be recorded and shall refer to the applicable height and layer of the prestressing for which the stress is being taken. The Tank Contractor shall keep a written record of stress readings. All stress readings shall be made on straight lengths of wire/strand. If applied stresses fall below the design stress in the steel, additional wire or strand will be provided to bring the force on the core wall up to the required design force. If the stress in the steel is more than 7% over the required design stress, the wrapping operation should be discontinued, and satisfactory adjustment made to the stressing equipment before proceeding. H. When a mechanical stressing system is utilized a continuous electronically (or substantial equivalent) monitored permanent recording of the applied force shall be made during the entire circumferential prestressing application. All such recordings shall be based on a continuous sensing of the applied force on the wire/strand between the tensioning system and the wall when, and as, the strand is being wrapped and laid on the wall. 3.10 DECORATIVE COATINGS A. All exterior roof surfaces shall be given a three-coat finish consisting of one coat primer for concrete product such as "Tamoseal H/P Primer" or equal, and two coats of a non-cementitious, high build, 100% acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth"textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156" or equal. All exterior exposed wall surfaces shall be given a two-coat finish of a non-cementitious 100% acrylic such as"Tammscoat Smooth",Tnemec Envirocrete 156 or equal. Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the application of these types of products. The Manufacturer's application instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Tank Contractor shall confer with the Manufacturer's representatives regarding application techniques and shall follow the Manufacturer's instructions implicitly. B. The concrete surface to be coated shall be clean, free of all Iaitance, dirt, grease, or other foreign materials. All defective surfaces shall be filled and/or repaired. Application shall be in full accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions or as amended by the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall submit color samples per above specification for a "bluish-gray" color for the Engineer and Owner's review/approval prior to construction. Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.11 DISINFECTION A. The Tank Contractor shall, at the completion of tank construction, thoroughly clean the interior of the tank. B. The Tank Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to disinfecting the tank. Disinfection shall meet with the approval of the Engineer, AWWA C652, and the appropriate local and state agencies. C. The tank floor and interior of the wall shall be disinfected by using a solution of chlorine and water per Method 3 of AWWA C652. D. Prior to placing the tank in service, a bacteriological test shall be taken, and successful results received. Testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory at the expense of the owner. 3.12 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST A. Upon completion, the tank shall be tested to determine watertightness. The tank shall be filled with potable water to the maximum level. Water will be furnished to the tank by the owner. The test shall consist of measuring the liquid level over the next twenty-four hours to determine if any change has occurred. If a change is observed and exceeds the maximum allowance, the test shall be extended to a total of five days. If at the end of five days the average daily change has not exceeded the maximum allowance, the test shall be considered satisfactory. B. The liquid volume loss for a period of twenty-four hours shall not exceed 1/20th of 1% of the tank capacity, 0.0005 x tank volume. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, it shall be considered excessive, and the tank shall be repaired and retested. C. Damp spots will not be permitted at any location on the tank wall. Damp spots are defined as spots where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand. All such areas shall be repaired as necessary. D. Damp spots or standing water on the footing may occur upon tank filling and are permissible within the allowable volume loss. Measurable flow in this area is not permissible and shall be corrected. 3.13 CLEAN-UP A. The premises shall be kept clean and orderly at all times during the work. Upon completion of construction, the Tank Contractor shall remove or otherwise dispose of all rubbish and other materials caused by the construction operation. The Tank Contractor shall leave the premises in as good a condition as it was found. B. The Contractor shall also remove all construction debris and thoroughly clean the tank interior floor and wall surfaces, and piping, using a low-pressure wash. END OF SECTION Wire or Strand Wound, Prestressed Concrete Tank 13 00 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 3/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 13 3100 SYNTHETIC FABRIC TANK BAFFLE SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all designs, labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified or required to furnish and install a tensioned-baffle system in the existing CLEARWELL NO. 2. 2. The Work includes but is not limited to the following: a. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) model confirming 0.5 baffle factor for submittal to ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing construction. b. Custom fabricated solid baffles. c. Baffle system supports, batten strips, fasteners and anchors. d. Baffle system reinforcement. e. Design and installation of the fabric baffle system and anchorage systems. f. Cleaning including but not limited to sediment deposits at the tank bottom. g. Provide adequate ventilation as per OSHA, state and federal regulations and making any necessary roof modifications for access and ventilations. Such modifications shall be clearly shown on the submittal. 3. The baffle panels shall be supplied by a sole source vendor for quality assurance and proper fit. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the baffle system. 2. Review installation procedures under other Contracts and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the baffle system. C. Related Sections: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience in producing substantially similar equipment and show evidence of at least five similar installations of baffles in water storage tanks in satisfactory operation. B. Contractors Qualifications: 1. The Tank Baffle Wall Contractor shall be a pre-approved specialist tank contractor experienced in the design, construction, and retrofit of AWWA D110-13 and ACI 350- 06 standard concrete water storage tanks, having designed and installed, in their own name, at least 10 synthetic baffle wall and anchorage systems inside of potable concrete water storage tanks in the last 10 years. Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 133100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Guarantee 1. The baffle system shall be guaranteed by the tank contractor for a period of5 year from final acceptance against defective materials and workmanship. This must be submitted in writing by the manufacturer and confirmed by the end user. Manufacturer guarantees that the baffle and associated components shall be replaced if damaged or found defective during normal clearwell operations. D. The sheets shall be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for installation in public drinking water supply systems. E. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ACI 350-06 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 2. ASTM A 320, Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low- Temperature Service. 3. ASTM D 413, Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Flexible Substrate. 4. ASTM D 751, Method of Testing Coated Fabrics. 5. ASTM D 1203, Test Methods for Volatile Loss from Plastics Using Activated Carbon Methods 6. ASTM D 1204, Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature 7. ASTM 2136, Methods of Testing Coated Fabrics- Low Temperature Bend Test 8. AWWA D110-13 Wire- and Strand-wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks 9. NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects. F. All sheets shall be obtained from a single material supplier and all sheets shall be manufactured by a single sheet manufacturer. G. ONSWTP utilizes chloramines for disinfection on a daily basis and free chlorine conversions intermittently. The manufacturer and contractor shall ensure that proposed baffle wall material and all the submerged appurtenances including bolts, anchors, strips, etc. are suitable and resistant against chloramines and free chlorine. H. The proposed baffle improvements must have a design life of minimum of 15-years. I. A tracer study to verify the baffling factor may be carried out if required by TCEQ. The contractorwill be required to make any necessary modifications to ensure that a minimum of 0.5 baffling factor is verified in the tracer study. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Computational Fluid Dynamic(CFM) Modeling 1. The Tank Baffle Wall Contactor shall submit evidence of efficiency factor achieved by the baffle configuration design as required by these specifications.Such evidence shall be verified via CFD modeling results. Diffuser walls at the inlet and outlet shall be provided if required at no additional cost to the Owner. The tank floor design shall consider the additional loads of the baffle wall system. 2. Design baffle factor is 0.5 and shall be achieved based on the following flow rates: Current Minimum Capacity Flow Rate 27 MGD Current Average Capacity Flow Rate 36 MGD Current Maximum Capacity Flow Rate 80 MGD Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 133100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Future Goal Maximum Capacity Flow Rate 100 MGD 3. The Clearwell operating levels are as summarized below: Overflow Elev. 67.5 Max Alarm 66.5 Min Alarm 58.5 Bottom Floor 51.0 B. Shop Drawings: Submit for Approval the following: 1. Tank Baffle Wall Contractor shall have a Professional Engineer on staff experienced in the design, construction, and retrofit of potable concrete water storage tanks with synthetic fabric baffles and registered in the state of Texas and submit sealed shop drawings for review prior to installation. 2. The Contractor is responsible for any access and ventilation improvements associated with this baffle installation and shall also submit sealed shop drawings for the same for review and approval prior to construction. 3. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations,specifications and engineering data,weighs and affidavits of compliance with standards and codes. 4. List showing five (5) existing similar installations including name of facility, facility address, name and telephone number of contact person at listed facility and date of installation. 5. Drawings showing fabrication details, assembly details and installation details. Provide proposed size, shape and number of openings in the perforated baffle walls. 6. Material Sample. Provide three (3) 12"x 12" material samples. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of material including unloading, storage and handling of sheets shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and shall be done in such a manner as to prevent damage. B. All sheets which has been ripped, torn, punctured or abraded will not be acceptable. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Baffle Material: 1. Provide a polyesterscrim supported membrane designed to function as a liquid barrier. The baffle panels shall be fabricated from polyester reinforced polymeric alloy material. Sheet materials shall have high tensile strength and conform to the following properties: a. Base Material Type: Polyester. b. Base Fabric Weight: 6.5 oz/yd2 (0.0451 lbs/ft2). C. Minimum Thickness (ASTM D 751): 45 mil. d. Finished Coated Weight(total): —42 oz/yd2 e. Minimum Breaking Yield Strength (ASTM D 751,Grab Tensile Proc A):550 x 550 Ib min. Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 133100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 f. Minimum Tear Strength (ASTM D 4533, Trapezoid Tear): 40 lbs. (initial), 55 lbs. (after aging). g. Minimum Ply Adhesion (ASTM D413 Machine Method): 15 lbs. per inch in each direction. h. Water Absorption (ASTM D741, 7 days at 70 degrees F): 0.025 kg/m2 max. i. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D1204, 212 degrees F, 1 hour): 0.5 percent maximum length change in each direction. j. Low Temperature (ASTM D2136, 1/8" mandrel,4 hours): Pass @-30 oF. k. Color: Black/White. 2. Product Material Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. XR-5PW as manufactured by Seaman Corporation. B. Baffle System Supports and Batten Strips: ASTM A 320,AISA Type 316 Stainless Steel. C. Baffle System Fasteners and Anchors: Baffle system bolts, nuts, washers, and anchors shall be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 320, AISI Type 316. D. Baffle System Reinforcement: Baffle panels shall include a minimum 3" wide two layer thermally welded perimeter anchoring hem. E. Baffle System Product and Fabricator: 1. Layfield Environmental Systems (EI Cajon, CA); Engineered Textile Products (Mobile, AL), or pre-approved equal. 2. Alternate manufacturers wishing to pre-qualify shall submit to the engineer, no later than 15 days prior to the bid date, a list of clearwell baffle projects with detail drawings meeting the requirements of this project specification. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble baffle system components in the shop to the greatest extent possible. B. Solid Baffles: 1. Fabricate each solid baffle from a single membrane in the configurations shown. C. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to releasing the baffle for fabrication. D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the conditions under which the baffle system is to be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a survey to field verify the correct baffle panel and support hardware dimension requirements. C. Upon completion of baffle wall installation, contractor shall visually inspect the baffle walls for damage from ground level. Any repairs shall be made with newly manufactured Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 133100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 material cut with rounded corners extending 4-inches in each direction from the damaged area. The entire repair shall be completely welded to the baffle wall. D. The manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified on-site installation supervisor to ensure proper installation of the baffle system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall install baffles in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Baffle walls shall be secured to the floor and walls with stainless steel or FRP angles with stainless steel anchors. Provide '/-inch stainless steel cable in double hem on the ends of the baffle, behind the angles at floor and wall locations. C. All hardware shall be supplied in ready to install kits with angle and batten cut and pre- drilled to minimize field cutting and drilling of attachment hardware. END OF SECTION Synthetic Fabric Tank Baffle System 133100 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 26 05 60 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into satisfactory operation all low voltage electric motors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All motors required for this Contract shall comply with this Section unless otherwise noted. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Motors and related accessories shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as applicable: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) a. IEEE 112 —Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1 — Motors and Generators 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 547— Standard for Safety Thermal Protectors for Motors b. UL 674 — Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations C. UL 1004-1 —Standard for Rotating Electrical Machines d. UL 1004-3 —Standard for Thermally Protected Motors e. UL 1004-8 —Standard for Inverter Duty Motors Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 01 - Submittal Register, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Spare Parts List. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Individual shop drawings for electric motors shall be submitted in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 01 - Submittal Register, unless submitted as a part of the shop drawings for the driven equipment. D. Shop drawings for electric motors shall include motor data sheets, dimensioned drawings, wiring diagrams for devices such as space heaters, temperature devices, and shaft grounding rings. Shop drawings shall identify electric characteristics and design, mechanical construction, manufacturer's name, type and pertinent specifications for the use intended, along with the name of the equipment to be driven. E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. 0 A_ J Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. Electric motors shall be manufactured by Baldor/Reliance Electric Company; Nidec Motors; Toshiba Industrial and Power Systems, Inc.; Siemens Energy &Automation, Inc.; General Electric Company; or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA, including, but not limited to MG-1 and MG-2, IEEE, ANSI and to the requirements specified herein. B. Type 1. Unless otherwise noted, motors specified herein shall be polyphase squirrel cage, NEMA Design B, or single phase capacitor or repulsion start induction motors. Special equipment requiring a motor drive with unusual characteristics shall be equipped with a definite purpose motor to meet the necessary requirements. 2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger shall be three- phase, 60 Hertz, NEMA Design B, squirrel cage induction motors designed for operation at 480 volts or greater as specified herein or shown on the Drawings. 3. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification for the driven equipment, or as required by the dynamic characteristics of the load as determined by the manufacturer of the machine to be driven, all polyphase squirrel cage motors shall be designed to withstand the starting voltage shown on the Drawings and shall have torque and locked rotor current characteristics as specified for NEMA Design B motors. 4. All motors 2 horsepower and smaller shall have windings encapsulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with the manufacturer's premium quality system which shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. C. Rating 1. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service through its acceleration range and throughout its rated load range. The rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower shown on the Drawings or Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 elsewhere specified. It should be noted that the motor sizes indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified herein, are motor sizes required to operate the specific equipment which is specified. Higher rated motor sizes may be determined from the actual equipment submitted, approved, purchased, and installed. Protective devices, motor starters, disconnect switches, and other necessary equipment shall be furnished and installed for the actual motor sizes required at no additional cost. 2. Motor ratings shall be based on continuous operation. The maximum temperature rise for open and drip proof type motors shall not exceed 90 degrees C, and for totally enclosed type motors shall not exceed 80 degrees C. D. Motor Winding Insulation 1. Insulation shall be as specified for each particular type or class of motor. The insulation system shall provide a high dielectric strength, long life covering for the windings which may be required to operate in a continually damp, corrosive, and/or chemically contaminated environment. The insulation shall be resistant to attack by moisture, acids, alkalies, abrasives, and mechanical and thermal shock. Leads shall be sealed with a non-wicking, non-hydroscopic insulation material. 2. Motor insulation resistance may be checked at any time after delivery to the job site or during the warranty period. Encapsulated motor stators may be subjected to insulation testing while completely submerged in water. Any motor not meeting the requirements specified herein will be rejected and shall be promptly replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3. Torque and locked rotor current characteristics for three phase motors shall be NEMA Design B. The locked rotor KVA/HP input at full voltage for 10 horsepower. motors and larger shall not exceed that permitted for Code Letter"J", except for specialized equipment requiring a motor drive with special definite characteristics. 4. Unless otherwise specified, non-inverter duty motors shall be furnished with a Class F insulation system. Unless otherwise specified, inverter duty motors shall be furnished with a Class H insulation system. In either case, temperature rise shall be limited to that for Class B insulation. Output torque and speed characteristics of each motor shall be suitable to operate the driven equipment through the full range of acceleration and operating load conditions without exceeding the nameplate current rating, and/or temperature rise. E. Nameplates 1. The motor manufacturer's nameplate shall be engraved, embossed, or stamped on a stainless steel sheet and fastened to the motor frame with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Printed or laser-etched nameplates are not acceptable. Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Nameplates shall include as a minimum, Items a through m as listed in Article 1.04 in addition to that required by NEMA standards. The nameplate shall be positioned so as to be readily visible for inspection as installed in the facility. F. Design 1. Motors shall be designed to accelerate and drive the connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings. 2. Motors specified for operation with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated. Motors shall be considered inverter duty rated only if they meet all of the requirements for NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 3. Motors shall be designed to output 100 percent of nameplate horsepower under continuous duty service without exceeding the temperature rise specified herein when controlled by the actual drives furnished. Inverter duty motors shall be designed to operate down to 10% of full load speed without the need for a line powered cooling fan. 4. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be furnished with service factors in accordance with NEMA MG-1 as follows: Type of Motor Service Factor Non-inverter Duty 1.15 Inverter Duty 1.0 5. Design selection with respect to the driven machine shall be such that the requirements do not exceed 85 percent of the motors' maximum rating modified by service factor, ambient temperature, enclosure, altitude and electrical service. The electrical service conditions shall be assumed to be 10 percent undervoltage, 5 percent underfrequency, and 3 percent voltage unbalance. Altitude shall be assumed to be the project site elevation plus 10 percent. Ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) within housings or enclosures; except where higher temperatures may be encountered within or on individual items of equipment. The applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG-1 shall be used in making the design selection. 6. Motors used with belt drives shall have sliding bases to provide for belt take up. 7. Terminal boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required quantity and size of conduits. Gasketed terminal boxes shall be furnished with all splash-proof and totally enclosed motors. NEMA ratings of the terminal boxes shall be suited for the application. Motors located in hazardous locations shall be furnished with terminal boxes suitable for the specific Class, Division, and Group Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 suitable for the application. Terminal boxes shall be sized to accommodate accessory equipment such as motor differential current transformers, where required. 8. Terminal boxes for horizontal motors shall be located on the left-hand side when viewing the motor from the drive shaft end and shall be so designed that conduit entrance can be made from above, below, or either side of the terminal box. G. Construction 1. Frames, mounting means, and shafts shall meet NEMA Standards for the horsepower, RPM, and enclosure selected. Enclosures shall be selected according to the degree of mechanical protection required and shall not be of aluminum construction. All motors shall have a manufacturer's standard shop machinery finish, consisting of a rust-resisting priming coat of zinc chromate and a finish coat of alkyd machinery enamel. Reference Division 09 Finishes. 2. Motors shall have cast iron frames and a heavy gauge steel terminal box, with neoprene gaskets between the frame and the box and between the box and its cover. A grounding lug(s) shall be provided inside the terminal box. 3. When located outdoors, or elsewhere if specified, motors shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) machines, unless otherwise noted. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with two (2) 1/4 inch drain holes drilled through the bottom of the frame, which allows complete drainage of the frame. Where specified, TEFC motors controlled by a variable frequency drive shall be provided with a separately powered cooling fan motor that runs at 6OHZ to ensure proper cooling of the motor at low speeds. Cooling fan motor shall be suitable for 12OVAC, single phase operation. Vertically oriented motors located outdoors shall be provided with a drip cover over the fan end to prevent accumulation of precipitation. 4. If so specified and when located in indoor areas which are heated and weatherproof, motors shall be open drip-proof machines. Ventilation openings shall be arranged to prevent the entrance of drops of liquid or solid particles at any angle from zero to 15 degrees downward from vertical. 5. Unless otherwise specified, or required, motors rated less than 200 horsepower shall be furnished with bearings of the grease lubricated, antifriction ball type with conveniently located grease fittings and drain plugs. A means of preventing bearings from becoming over-greased shall be provided. Bearings shall have a minimum B-10 life of 20,000 hours. 6. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotor windings shall be one-piece cast aluminum. Where applicable, rotors shall be constructed with integral fins. Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. Externally mounted motor shaft grounding rings shall be provided to protect motors against motor shaft and bearing currents. Grounding rings shall be provided for all motors controlled by VFDs, with the following exceptions: a. Motors located in hazardous areas b. Motors rated less than 1 horsepower C. Submersible motors 8. All motors shall be provided with factory-installed one-hole terminations (ring terminals) on the ends of all motor leads. Terminations shall be identified for use with cables that have stranding other than Class B and shall be the irreversible compression type. H. Power Factor and Efficiency 1. All motors, including vertical hollowshaft motors, in the range of 1-500 horsepower, inclusive, shall be designed specifically for energy efficiency and high power factor. The motor efficiency and power factor shall meet or exceed the values listed in the table below when the motors are tested in accordance with the NEMA preferred test method IEEE 112A, Method B, Dynamometer. Each motor shall meet the minimum guaranteed efficiency value indicated in the table below. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the procedures contained in NEMA Standard MG1-12.58. Table 12-11 FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES OF ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS ENCLOSED MOTORS 2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE 8 POLE HP Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Efficienc Efficienc Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 1 75.5 72 82.5 80 80 77 74 70 1.5 82.5 80 84 81.5 85.5 82.5 77 74 2 84 81.5 84 81.5 86.5 84 82.5 80 3 85.5 82.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 84 81.5 5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 82.5 Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Table 12-12 FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES FOR NEMA PREMIUMTm EFFICIENCY ELECTRIC MOTORS RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS (RANDOM WOUND) OPEN MOTORS 2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE HP Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Nominal Minimum Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 1 77 74 85.5 82.5 82.5 80 1.5 84 81.5 86.5 84 86.5 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 86.5 84 87.5 81.5 3 85.5 82.5 89.5 84 88.5 86.5 5 86.5 84 89.5 84 89.5 87.5 NOTES: (Motor data for continuous duty, NEMA Design B, 1.15 service factor,40 degrees Celsius ambient, Class F insulation,3 phase, 460 volt,at listed speed rating. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Motors shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Motors shall be properly protected from weather hazards. Motors shall not be allowed to be wrapped tightly in plastic while outdoors. Motors delivered to the site which will not be put in service for a time in excess of 30 calendar days, whether in storage or installed, shall have the shafts rotated a minimum of five (5) rotations every 30 days. B. Motors that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have not been properly protected shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative. Any required electrical corrections for testing shall be made at the Contractor's expense prior to acceptance and/or use. C. All motors shall operate without any undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of phase unbalance. 3.03 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01. The following tests are required: Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Witnessed Shop Tests a. All motors shall be shop tested and inspected in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's standard procedures. The manufacturer's testing and inspection procedures shall demonstrate that the equipment tested conforms to the requirements specified, all other applicable requirements, and shall be approved by the Engineer. At least 10 days' notice shall be given the Engineer prior to tests and inspection dates. b. In addition to the efficiency and power factor testing specified herein, each motor shall be tested to determine compliance with the applicable requirements of the IEEE, ANSI and NEMA. Tests shall be as follows: 1) Motors less than 50 HP: a) Each motor shall be subjected to a standard, short commercial test including the following: Running current, no load Locked rotor current High potential Winding resistance Bearing inspection 2. Field Tests a. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 26 05 00 - General Work Requirements for Electrical Specification. END OF SECTION Low-Voltage Electric Motors 26 05 60 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 05 05.30 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic administrative and testing requirements for piping. Specific piping materials, systems and related installation and testing requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 40. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Piping materials and systems are included in other Sections of Division 40. B. Valves are included in Section 40 05 51. C. Pipe insulation is included in Section 40 42 13. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, general submittals for piping and piping systems are listed below. It is not intended that all submittals listed below be provided for all piping materials and systems. Refer to individual System or Piping Sections for specific submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Piping layouts in full detail. 2. Location of pipe hangers and supports. 3. Location and type of backup block or device to prevent joint separation. 4. Large scale details of wall penetrations and fabricated fittings. 5. Schedules of all pipe, fittings, special castings, couplings, expansion joints and other appurtenances. 6. Catalog cuts of joints, couplings, harnesses, expansion joints, gaskets, fasteners and other accessories. 7. Brochures and technical data on coatings and linings and proposed method for application and repair. C. Samples D. Design Data E. Test Reports 1. Copies of certified shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard. 2. Copies of all field test reports, signed by Contractor and Engineer or City Representative. F. Certificates Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.30 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Copies of certification for all welders performing work in accordance with ANSI B31.1. G. Manufacturer's Installation (or application) instructions. H. Statement of Qualifications I. Manufacturers Field Report J. Project Record Document K. Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01 33 06. L. Warranties 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS B2.1 -Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA Manual M11 - Steel Pipe-A Guide for Design and Installation E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. Factory Mutual (FM) H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new and unused. B. Install piping to meet requirements of local codes. C. Provide manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Reference to standards such as ASTM and ANSI shall apply to those versions in effect at the time of bid opening. D. Coordinate dimensions and drilling of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps and other equipment to be installed in piping systems. Bolt holes in flanges to straddle vertical centerline. E. Reject materials contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuel, aromatic compounds, paint solvent, paint thinner and acid solder. F. Pipe joint compound, for pipe carrying flammable or toxic gas, must bear approval of UL or FM. G. Unless otherwise specified, pressures referred to in all Piping Sections are expressed in pounds per square in gauge above atmospheric pressure, psig and all temperature are expressed in degrees Fahrenheit (F). Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.30 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. During loading, transportation and unloading take care to prevent damage to pipes and coating. Carefully load and unload each pipe under control at all times. Place skids or blocks under each pipe in the shop and securely wedge pipe during transportation to ensure no injury to pipe and lining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Specific piping materials and appurtenances are specified in the respective Piping or System Sections. B. General installation materials shall be as specified below. 1. Unions shall be brass or bronze unions for joining nonferrous pipe; malleable brass or bronze seated iron or steel unions for joining ferrous pipe; PVC unions for joining PVC pipe; CPVC unions forjoining CPVC pipe. 2. Flanged Joints. Bolt and nuts,Grade B,ASTM A307 Type 304 stainless steel, bolt number and size same as flange standard; studs - same quality as machine bolts; 1/16-in thick rubber gaskets with cloth insertions; rust resistant coatings. 3. Temporary Plugs shall be standard plugs or caps which are suitable for permanent service. 4. Wall Sleeve Seals shall be a specified in Section 01172. 5. Flexible Connections shall be flanged spool type, 180 degree F maximum service, single filled arch with synthetic rubber tube and cover, steel ring reinforced synthetic fiber carcass, with flanges drilled to 150 Ib ANSI B16.5. Steel retaining rings, control rods and compression sleeves shall be provided where shown and as required for the working pressure of the system in which the joint is installed. All flexible joints shall be rated for the working pressure of the system in which they are installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All dirt, scale, weld splatter, water and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside and outside of all pipe and sub-assemblies prior to installing. Repair all coatings if damaged. B. All pipe joints and connections to equipment shall be made in such a manner as to produce a minimum of strain at the joint. C. Install piping in a neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines and with risers plumb. Run piping so as to avoid passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets and/or interference with other lines or extending beyond furring lines as determined by Architectural Drawings. All work shall be accomplished using recognized methods and procedures of pipe fabrication and in accordance with the latest revision of applicable ANSI Standards, ASME Codes and Pipe Fabrication Institute Standards. 1. Use full length of pipe except where cut lengths are necessary. Do not spring or deform piping to make up joints. 2. Pipe shall be cut square, not upset, undersized or out of round. Ends shall be carefully reamed and cleaned before being installed. 3. Bending of pipe is not permitted. Use fittings for all changes in direction. Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.30 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Do not use bushings except where specifically approved by the Owner's Representative. Reducers shall be eccentric to provide for drainage from all liquid bearing lines and facilitate air removal from water lines. 5. Verify the locations and elevations of any existing piping and manholes before proceeding with work on any system. Any discrepancies between the information shown on the Drawings and the actual conditions found in the field shall be reported at once to the Owner's Representative. No claim for extra payment will be considered if the above provision has not been complied with. 6. Where lines of lower service rating tie into services or equipment of higher service rating the isolation valve between the two shall conform to the higher rating. 7. Mitering of pipe to form elbow is not permitted. 8. All piping interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned after installation and kept clean by approved temporary closures on all openings until the system is put in service. Closures should be suitable to withstand the hydrostatic test. 9. End caps on pre cleaned pipe shall not be removed until immediately before assembly. All open ends shall be capped immediately after completion of installation. D. Test Connections 1. Provide 1/2-in female NPT test connection equipped with 1/2-in brass plug on all pump suction and discharge lines. Where indicated on the Drawings, test connections should be equipped with bar stock valve and gauge. Provide test connections at all steam traps. The connection shall be located on the discharge side of the trap between the trap and the first valve. It shall consist of a 1/2-in branch connection terminated with a gate valve. E. Unions 1. Unions screwed or flanged shall be provided where indicated and in the following locations even if not indicated. a. In long runs of piping to permit convenient disassembly for alterations or repairs. b. In by passes around equipment. C. In connections to tanks, pumps and other equipment between the shut off valve and the equipment. d. In connections on both sides of traps, controls and automatic control valves. F. Vents and Drains 1. Provide vents and drains in the following places: a. Water Lines-Vents at high points and drains at low points. b. Air Lines- Drains at low points. 3.02 UNIONS A. Use unions to allow dismantling of pipe, valves and equipment. 3.03 WELDING A. Welding in accordance with ANSI B31 and AWS B3.0. B. Install welding fittings on all welded lines. Make changes in direction and intersection of lines with welding fittings. Do not miter pipes to form elbows or notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction. Do not employ welder who has not been fully qualified in above specified Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.30 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 procedure and so certified by approved welding bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 3.04 FLANGED JOINTS A. Make flanged joints with bolts; bolt studs with nut on each end; or studs with nuts where one flange is tapped. Use number and size of bolts conforming to same ANSI Standard as flanges. Before flanges pieces are assembled, remove rust resistant coating from machined surfaces, clean gaskets and smooth all burrs and other defects. Make up flanged joints tight, care being taken to prevent undue strain upon valves or other pieces of equipment. 3.05 SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. Install tierods, pipe clamps or bridles when sleeve type couplings or fittings are used in piping system where indicated, and at changes in direction or other places as necessary, to prevent joints from pulling apart under pressure. Use bridles and tierods at least 3/4-in in diameter, except where tierods replace flange bolts of smaller size, in which case fit with nut on each side of pair of flanges. Joint harnessing shall conform, as a minimum, to the requirements for the bolts and tie bolt lugs as set forth in AVVWA Manual M11. 3.06 WALL SLEEVE SEALS A. Use expandable rubber segmented sealing device with corrosion resistant fasteners to make watertight the annular space between pipe and sleeve. Determined the required inside diameter of each individual wall opening or sleeve to fit the pipe and seal it to assure a watertight joint as recommended by the manufacturer, before ordering, fabricating or installing. Install pipe concentrically through wall sleeve. Install and tighten seal per manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 TESTING A. Test all pipelines for water/gas tightness as specified in the Piping or System sections. Furnish all labor, testing plugs or caps, pressure pumps, pipe connections, gauges and all other equipment required. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one or more of the testing procedures appended to this Section as specified in each Piping or System Section. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the owner's representative. B. Repair faulty joints or remove defective pipe and fittings and replace as approved by the Engineer. Retest. 3.08 DISINFECTION A. After satisfactory testing, all potable, and plant water collection and distributed systems downstream of the filters shall be thoroughly disinfected per Division 40 Specification as applicable. END OF SECTION Piping—General Requirements 33 05 05.30 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 05 05.40 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (HYDROSTATIC TESTING) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This test shall be used to hydrostatically test piping systems for structural integrity and leaks. The test shall be performed at ambient temperature unless otherwise specified. 1.02 Test Fluid A. Water should be used as the test fluid whenever possible. In those systems where water cannot be used the test fluid may be either the one to be used in the system or the one agreed upon by the Engineer and the Contractor. 1.03 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Water- Of sufficient capacity to deliver the required test pressure. B. Strainer- On inlet side of the pump to prevent foreign matter from entering the system. C. Valves - Shall be provided on the suction and discharge side of the pump. D. Heater-To allow heating of the test fluid when elevated temperatures are required for test. E. Relief Valve - Set at a pressure to relieve at 20 to 25 percent above the required test pressure. F. Pressure Gauge(s) - Capable of reaching 50 percent over the test pressure. These should be located at the pump discharge and any other place deemed convenient by the Contractor. G. Pressure gauges and relief valves shall be checked for accuracy before use in test procedures. 1.04 PREPARATION FOR TEST A. Determine the fluid to be used for the test, and, if other than ambient temperature is required, what the test temperature will be. B. When a fluid other than water is used for a test, the equipment used for the test shall be of a material compatible with the test fluid. Normally this would be equal to the piping material. C. Vents shall be provided at the high points of the system and drains provided where means of venting or draining do not exist. D. Remove or block off, all relief valves, rupture discs, alarms, control instruments, etc,that shall not be subjected to the test pressure. E. All discs, balls, or pistons from check valves shall be removed if they interfere with filling of the system. Open all valves between inlet and outlet of the section to be tested. F. Connect pump and provide temporary closures for all of the external openings in the system. Use caution to ensure that the closures are properly designed and strong enough to withstand the test pressure. G. All joints, including welds, are to be left uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. H. A joint previously tested in accordance with this Section may be covered or insulated. I. Piping designed for vapor or gas shall be provided with additional temporary supports, if necessary, to support the weight of the test liquid. Piping—General Requirements(Hydrostatic Testing) 33 05 05.40 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 J. Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for additional pressure under test or shall be isolated from the test. K. Flanged joints,where blanks are inserted to isolate equipment during the test, need not be tested. 1.05 TEST PRESSURE A. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1-1/2 times the design pressure unless otherwise specified in the System Section. 1.06 TEST PROCEDURE A. Allow the test fluid to enter the system. Open vents to allow displacement of all entrapped air. For all pipelines exceeding 500-ft in length, the maximum rate of filling shall be limited to that which produces a maximum nominal flow velocity of one foot per second in the pipe to be tested. B. Close vents and restrict personnel in the test area to those involved in the test. C. Raise the pressure slowly with the pump until the predetermined test pressure is reached. Maintain pressure for duration of time specified in System Section, keeping personnel at a safe distance. D. Reduce the pressure about 20 percent and hold it at that point while the entire system is carefully inspected for leaks, cracks, or other signs of defects. E. If defects are found, the pressure shall be released, the system drained, the defects corrected and the test repeated. F. After a satisfactory test has been completed, the line shall be drained. 1.07 FLUSHING A. Lines tested with water shall be completely drained. B. Lines shall be flushed, after test. 1.08 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1. Date of Testing 2. Identification of Piping Tested 3. Test Fluid 4. Test Pressure 5. Signatures of Contractor and Owner's representative 6. If leaks are found,they shall be noted, on the record. After correction, retesting as specified for original test. 7. Records of test shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer in accordance with Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION Piping—General Requirements(Hydrostatic Testing) 33 05 05.40 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Piping—General Requirements(Hydrostatic Testing) 33 05 05.40 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 05 05.50 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (SERVICE PRESSURE TEST) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This test shall be used to test piping systems using service pressure and the fluid for which the system is used. It shall not be used to test piping systems conveying combustible or flammable liquids or systems that comply with ANSI B31 codes. 1.02 TEST FLUID A. The fluid for which the system is designed shall be the test fluid. 1.03 TEST EQUIPMENT A. A pressure gauge capable of registering 25 psi over the design pressure shall be installed down-stream from the supply shut-off valve if one is not included in the system. 1.04 PREPARATION FOR TEST A. Insulated lines shall have all joints left exposed until completion of the test. 1.05 TEST PRESSURE A. The test pressure shall be equal to the maximum pressure that the line will be subjected to under normal operating conditions as determined by the Engineer. 1.06 TEST PROCEDURE A. Liquids 1. See that all personnel not involved in the test vacate the area. 2. Allow the system fluid to enter the system slowly while venting the air at the extreme far and uppermost points. For all pipelines exceeding 500-ft in length, the maximum rate of filling shall be limited to that which produces a maximum nominal flow velocity of one foot per second in the pipe to be tested. B. When the system is full and all air is vented, close the vents. 1. Allow the pressure in the system to build up to the full line pressure. 2. Inspect entire system for leaks. C. Gas or Vapor(Including Compressed Air and Steam) 1. See that all personnel not involved in the test vacate the area. 2. In systems that do not have a pressure gauge near the main shut-off valve, a gauge shall be installed. 3. Allow the system fluid to enter the system slowly until the full operating pressure is reached. 4. Shut off main supply valve. Observe the gauge for 15 minutes. The pressure gauge shall not drop during this time. Piping—General Requirements(Service Pressure Test) 33 05 05.50 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. If the gauge drops, indicating the presence of leaks, the systems shall be inspected visually and, if necessary, with soap suds or commercially available leak detectors to locate the leak(s). D. If leaks are found,the lines shall be relieved of pressure, purged if necessary, and repaired. Tests shall be repeated for repaired sections. 1.07 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1. Date of Testing 2. Identification of Piping Tested 3. Test Fluid 4. Test Pressure 5. Signatures of Contractor and Owner's representative. C. If leaks are found, they shall be noted on the record. After correction, retesting is required. D. Test records shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer in accordance with Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION Piping—General Requirements(Service Pressure Test) 33 05 05.50 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 05 05.60 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (PNEUMATIC TEST) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This procedure for a pneumatic test of piping systems shall be used when water, or other liquid, cannot be introduced into the line, or as a supplement to a hydrostatic test. IT SHALL NOT BE USED TO TEST NON-METALLIC (PLASTIC) PIPE. 1.02 GENERAL A. There is a hazard in using gases for test fluids because of their compressibility. B. Gases shall never be used unless there is ample justification and always in a safe manner. See Paragraph 3.0. 1.03 TEST GASES & PRESSURES A. Compressed air shall normally be used. Other gases may be used when specified or directed by the Engineer. B. Test pressures shall be 110 percent of the anticipated maximum operating pressure, but not exceeding 100 psig and not less than 5 psig at the highest point in the system. 1.04 SAFETY A. All pneumatic tests shall be done under the supervision of Contractor and in the presence of the Engineer. B. New Construction: The Engineer's permission shall be secured before testing. C. Renovation Projects: The Owner representative and the Engineer must be informed and their permission secured before testing. D. Only those people actively participating in the test shall be allowed in the test area. E. Safety glasses and hard-hats must be worn. 1.05 EQUIPMENT A. Building supply air to deliver the required test pressure if available, or Contractor shall provide a compressor capable of the required test pressure. B. Valves shall be provided on the discharge side of the pump. C. Relief valve to relieve at 10 to 15 percent over the test pressure. D. Pressure Gauge(s) capable of reaching 50 percent over the test pressure. A gauge shall be located on the pump discharge and other location as required. 1.06 TEST PROCEDURE A. Increase the pressure in the line gradually, in steps, to the specified pressure. Checks shall be made at 25 psig and at 10 psig intervals until the test pressure is reached using sound, soap solution or a drop in indicated pressure. Piping—General Requirements(Pneumatic Testing) 33 05 05.60 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. When the specified pressure for the test is reached, shut off the valve in the supply line from the pump. C. Maintain the test pressure long enough to visually inspect all joints or a minimum of 10 minutes. There shall be no drop in the test pressure in this time. D. Leaks shall be repaired and the line retested. All leaks shall be noted on the Test Record form. E. After satisfactory completion of the test, vent the line and allow it to return to atmospheric pressure. Connection can then be made to the supply line. 1.07 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1. Date of Testing 2. Identification of Piping Tested 3. Test Fluid 4. Test Pressure 5. Signatures of Contractor and Owner's Representative C. If leaks are found, they shall be noted on the record. After correction, retesting is required. D. Test records shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer per Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION Piping—General Requirements(Pneumatic Testing) 33 05 05.60 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 11 16 WATERLINES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water lines. B. Specifications identify requirements for both small diameter water lines and large diameter water lines.When specifications for large diameter water lines differ from those for small diameter water lines, large diameter specifications will govern for large diameter pipe. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.11/AWWA C111- Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile - Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. B. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System -Health Components. C. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings E. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. F. ASTM B 21 - Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes. G. ASTM B 98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. H. ASTM B 301 - Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Copper Rod and Bar. I. ASTM B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for General Application. J. ASTM E 165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination K. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination L. ASTM F 1674 - Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe. M. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. N. AWWA C 207- Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service- Sizes 4 Inches through 144 Inches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement—01 33 00 Document Management. B. Conform to submittal requirements of applicable Section for type of pipe used. C. Submit Texas One-Call notification transmittal number prior to beginning excavation. D. Submit, a minimum of 15 days before beginning pipe laying operations, layout drawing identifying proposed sections for disinfecting, hydrostatic testing and site restoration for entire project for review and approval. Layout drawing to identify sequence for: E. Disinfection: F. Disinfection and transfer of services; to immediately follow sequence of hydrostatic testing. G. Site restoration; not to exceed limits specified; Sequence in order of disturbance. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe shall be product of one manufacturer that has not less than five (5) years of successful and verifiable experience manufacturing pipe of the particular type and size indicated with proposed type joint. The Engineer reserves the right to request third party verification of this experience. Pipe manufacturer must have a certified quality assurance program. Certified program shall be ISO 9001: 2008 or other equivalent nationally recognized program as approved by Engineer. B. Where Carnegie joints are used in thrust restraint areas, weld bell and spigot ring onto steel cylinder, inside and outside. C. When adjoining proposed large diameter water line to existing large diameter water line of different pipe material and/or coating, provide a flanged connection. D. Provide electrical isolation when adjoining to pipe with different material or coating. Coating on the welded restrained portions of the piping shall be identical to the coating on the adjoining pipe sections. E. Provide bends and fittings as required to comply with invert elevations shown in profile view of Drawings. Call outs for bends and fittings are not identified on Drawings in profile view. F. Install pipe materials that conform to following: 1. Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.13- Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. Standard Specification Section 02 62 10—Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. 3. Technical Specification Section 40 23 10.00-Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 4. Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.23—Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe. G. Conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and have certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. H. Type of pipe materials used is Contractor's option unless specifically identified on Drawings. I. Provide minimum of 3/8 inch inside joint recess between ends of pipe in straight pipe sections. 2.02 WELDED JOINT PROTECTION FITTING FOR SMALL DIAMETER STEEL PIPE A. Cylindrical Corrosion Barrier: Provide approved cylindrical corrosion barrier. B. O-rings: Conform to National Sanitary Foundation requirements. 2.03 RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: See Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.13-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. B. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Steel Pipe: Welded joints 1. Where Carnegie joints are used in thrust restraint areas, weld bell and spigot ring onto steel cylinder, inside and outside. C. Restrained Joints where required on DIP and PVC pipe: 1. Restraint devices: Manufacture of high strength ductile iron,ASTM A 536 up to 24 inches, and ASTM A 36 for sizes greater than 30 inches. Working pressure rating twice that of design test pressure. 2. Bolts and connecting hardware: High strength low alloy material in accordance with ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.04 COUPLINGS AND APPURTENANCES FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATERLINE A. Flexible (Dresser-type) Couplings. 1. Install where shown on Drawings or where allowed by the Engineer for Contractor's convenience. Use galvanized flexible couplings when installed on galvanized pipe which is cement lined, or when underground. Provide gaskets manufactured from Neoprene or Buna- N. 2. For steel pipe; provide approved sleeve-type flexible couplings. Thickness of middle ring equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall. 3. Provide approved flanged adapter couplings for steel pipe. 4. Use Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers where flexible couplings are installed underground. Coat entire coupling with 20-mil of approved coal tar coating. B. Access Manways. 1. Provide access manways where shown on the drawings, at air valve locations, and as required for interior welding. 2. Access manways to be shop fabricated, 24-inch diameter, flanged outlets with blind flange covers. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, fabricate covers from steel plate with thickness as required. Fabricate two handles of 1/2-inch diameter steel rod. Field modifications to be made only by the manufacturer's representative. 3. Within restrained joint sections, provide access manways a maximum of 250-feet apart. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipe used. B. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. C. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings. D. Confirm that nine feet minimum separation from gravity sanitary sewers and manholes or separation of four feet minimum from force mains as specified in this Section in all directions unless special design is provided on Drawings. E. Where above clearances cannot be attained, and special design has not been provided on Drawings, obtain direction from the Engineer before proceeding with construction. F. Inform the Engineer if unmetered sprinkler or fire line connections exist which are not shown on Drawings. Make transfer only after approval by the Engineer. G. For projects involving multiple subdivisions or locations, limit water line installation to maximum of two project site locations. Maximizing 2 pipe installation crews shall be permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. H. City of Corpus Christi Utilities Department will handle, at no cost to Contractor, operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections and for chlorination. Contractor is responsible for handling necessary installations and removal of chlorination and testing taps and risers. I. If asbestos-cement(A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outlined in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them "mandatory practices" for this Project. J. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. K. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and, therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. L. Do not remove plugs or clamps during months of peak water demands; June, July and August, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3.02 HANDLING, CLEANING AND INSPECTION A. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load,transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe, lining and coating. Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Provide pipe and fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable,canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, leather, nylon, or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe, protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material. Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. C. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris,tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe. 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe and PCCP, permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches, measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. C. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. B. Cleaning:Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed. Do not place debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. C. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective,damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.03 EARTHWORK A. Conform to applicable provisions of City Standard Specification Section 022020—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Bedding: Use bedding materials in conformance with the Drawings and City Standard Specification Section 022020— Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. Backfill: Use backfill materials in conformance with Drawings and City Standard Specification 022020 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Backfill excavated areas in same day excavated. When not possible, cover excavated areas using steel plates on paved areas and other protective measures elsewhere. D. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum loose thickness and wet or dry material to approximately optimum moisture content. Compact to prescribed density; Water tamping is not allowed. E. Pipe Embedment: Including 6-inch pipe bedding and backfill to 12 inches above top of pipe. 3.04 PIPE CUTTING A. Cut pipe 12 inches and smaller with standard wheel pipe cutters. Cut pipe larger than 12 inches in manner approved by the Engineer. Make cuts smooth and at right angles to axis of pipe. Bevel plain end with heavy file or grinder to remove sharp edges. 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Lay pipe in subgrade free of water. 2. Make adjustments of pipe to line and grade by scraping away subgrade or filling in with granular material. 3. Properly form bedding to fully support bell without wedging or blocking up bell. 4. Open Cut Construction: Keep pipe trenches free of water which might impair pipe laying operations. Grade pipe to provide uniform support along bottom of pipe. Excavate for bell holes after bottom has been graded and in advance of placing pipe. Lay not more than nominal city block length of not more than 300 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. Cover or backfill laid pipe if pipe laying operations are interrupted and during non-working hours. Place backfill carefully and simultaneously on each side of pipe to avoid lateral displacement of pipe and damage to joints. If adjustment of pipe is required after it has been laid, remove and re-lay as new pipe. B. Install pipe continuously and uninterrupted along each street on which work is to be performed. Obtain approval of the Engineer prior to skipping any portion of Work. C. Protection of Pipeline: Securely place stoppers or bulkheads in openings and in end of line when construction is stopped temporarily and at end of each day's work. D. Perform Critical Location as shown on Drawings. Refer to City Standard Specification Section 022020— Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for additional requirements at critical locations. E. Laying Large Diameter Water Line 1. Lay not more than 50 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 2. Dig trench proper width as shown. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding, as determined by the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. 3. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment; employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as-built" horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. 4. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. 5. Before assembling couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or liquid vegetable soap to facilitate installation. 6. Prior to proceeding with critical tie-ins submit sequence of work based on findings from"critical location"effort. 7. For tie-ins to existing water lines, provide necessary material on hand to facilitate connection prior to shutting down existing waterline. Provide City a minimum of two weeks' notice prior to shutting down existing water line. 3.06 JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for Concrete Cylinder Pipe, PVC, Steel, and DIP: 1. After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe, equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. 2. Lubricate gaskets with nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. 3. Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. 4. After pipe sections are joined, check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. 5. Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. 6. Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. 7. Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. 8. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by the Engineer. B. Flanged Joints where required on Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe: 1. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. 2. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. 3. Use galvanized or black nuts and bolts to match flange material. Use cadmium-plated steel nuts and bolts underground.Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress.Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges.Tighten bolts alternately(180° apart) until all are evenly tight. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. Provide Densco petroleum based tape or approved equal for all exposed portions of nuts, bolts and pipe. 4. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. 5. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 smaller, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. C. Welded Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Steel Pipe): 1. Prior to starting work, provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. 2. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide eighteen (18) inches working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. 3. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 30-inch and larger pipe. 4. Bell-and-spigot, lap-welded slip joints: Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 'h inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used forjoint deflections of up to 5 degrees. 5. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints,align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps forthis purpose; however,take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. 6. Protect coal-tar-epoxy lining during welding by draping an 18-inch-wide strip of heat resistant material overtop half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. 7. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-70XX. 8. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. 9. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass. Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt, slag or flux. 10. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. 11. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. 12. Remove dirt,scale, and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings, or valves. 13. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: a. Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior or exterior welds for 36-inch and larger pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. b. Provide full circumferential welds on joints required to be welded. c. Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2'h degrees. d. For large diameter water lines, the City will employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. The testing laboratory will furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. i. Weld acceptance criteria: Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1) Conduct in accordance with ASTM E165- Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination and ASTM E709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. Use X-ray methods for butt welds, for 100 percent of joint welds. 2) Examine welded surfaces for the following defects: a) Cracking. b) Lack of fusion/penetration. c) Slag which exceeds one-third (t)where (t) equals material thickness. d) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. e) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. f) Four or more relevant 1/16-inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. 14. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. 15. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds, so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated.Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after re-certification. 16. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24-inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. a. In addition to welding requirements contained here in Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. b. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations.Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. c. All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. d. Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C 210 orAWWA C 213. e. All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. D. Harnessed Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe): 1. Use of snap-ring type restrained joints on pipe is limited to 20-inch through 48-inch diameters. 2. Position snap-ring joint bolt on top (12 o'clock portion). Provide minimum 2-inch joint recess. Use joint"diapers" minimum of 12 inches wide. 3. For field adjustments with deflections beyond manufacturer's recommendations: 4. Field trim spigot. 5. Do not engage ring. 6. Harnessed joints are not permitted in areas defined on Drawings as potentially petroleum contaminated material, in tunnels, or at bend greater than 5 degrees. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. Install harness type joints including snap rings at straight sections of pipe. E. Joints 1. Restrained joints within 2 feet of a casing or fixed point shall be restrained by clamps, bolts retaining rings, bolt harness assemblies,or other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. Design of harness bolts, if used, shall be based on a maximum stress of 40,000 psi over the tensile stress area of the bolt. A rolled type harness shall not be permitted. Welding joint rings at locations where the pipe enters or exits a casing or other fixed points will not be acceptable. All restrained joints at other locations shall be welded as described above. 2. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. 3. Thrust restraint lengths shown on drawings and/or in the Technical Specifications are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated. Adjustments in deflections may result in reduction or increase of required thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. 4. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. 5. For 16-inch lines and larger use minimum 16-foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. 6. Installation. a. Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Examine and clean mechanism; remove dirt, debris and other foreign material. C. Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA food grade approved lubricant. d. Verify gasket is evenly seated. e. Do not over stab pipe into mechanism. 7. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. F. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to City Standard Specification Section 030020 - Portland Cement Concrete for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. G. Joint Grout (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Steel Pipe): 1. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 2 cubic yard is required. When less than 2 cubic yard is required, grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes after mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. 2. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. 3. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 4. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations.Allow grouted exteriorjoints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. 6. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8- inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess.Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. 7. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 Inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot,strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Engineer for 20-inch pipe and smaller. 8. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing,by other approved coatings, or by pointing with grout.Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metallizing or other approved protective coatings. 9. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. 10. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. 11. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer, such as Flex Protex or equal, to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner afterjoint closure. 12. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 Inches and Larger: Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces, fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth.Accomplish grouting at end of each work day.Obtain written acceptance from the Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. 13. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line, must be completed before mortar is applied to interiorjoints. H. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick, use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling. Perform tests at no additional cost to City. I. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. 1. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent,repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. 3. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. 4. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Assessment of deflection may be measured by Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve,join pipe in straight alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. J. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel, Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Fittings: 1. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. 2. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with non-shrink grout. 3. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. 4. For large diameter water lines, provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. 3.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION APPURTENANCES A. Where identified on Drawings, modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line, or as shown on Drawings. B. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint. Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AWWA standard, as recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by the Engineer. C. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. 3.08 SECURING, SUPPORTING AND ANCHORING A. Support piping as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section, to maintain line and grade and prevent transfer of stress to adjacent structures. B. Where shown on Drawings, anchor pipe fittings and bends installed on water line by welding consecutive joints of pipe together to distance each side of fitting. Restrained length, as shown on Drawings, assumes that installation of pipe and subsequent hydrostatic testing begin upstream and proceed downstream, with respect to normal flow of water in pipe. If installation and testing differs from this assumption, submit for approval revised method of restraining pipe joints upstream and downstream of device used to test against(block valve, blind flange or dished head plug). C. Use adequate temporary blocking of fittings when making connections to distribution system and during hydrostatic tests. Use sufficient anchorage and blocking to resist stresses and forces encountered while tapping existing water line. 3.09 POLYETHYLENE WRAP FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Double wrap pipe and appurtenances (except fire hydrants and fusion bond or polyurethane coated fittings)with 8-mil polyethylene film. B. Do not use polyethylene wrap if pipe is cathodically protected. Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.10 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Provide cleanup and restoration crews to work closely behind pipe laying crews, and where necessary, during disinfection and hydrostatic testing, service transfers, abandonment of old water lines, backfill and surface restoration. B. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, comply with the following; 1. Water line is installed to limits approved in layout submitted, immediately begin preparatory work for disinfection effort. 2. No later than three days after completing disinfection preparatory work, submit to City appropriate request for disinfection. 3. Immediately after transfer of services, begin site restoration. 3.11 CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A. Remove construction debris or foreign material and thoroughly broom clean and flush piping systems. Provide temporary connections, equipment and labor for cleaning. City must inspect water line for cleanliness prior to filling. 3.12 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Technical Specification Section 33 13 00-Disinfection of Water Lines. 3.13 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. Conform to requirements of Technical Specification Section 40 05 00.40 — Piping — General Requirements (Hydrostatic Testing). END OF SECTION Waterlines 33 11 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3311 16.13 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS - PLANT PIPING BELOWGROUND PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water lines. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104) - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, for Water. B. ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110) - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-in.through 48- in. C. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111) - Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. D. ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C 115) - Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray- Iron Threaded Flanges. E. ANSI A 21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. F. ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C 150) - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. G. ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151) - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and Other Liquids. H. ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C 153) - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inches through 24 inches and 54 inches through 64 inches for Water Service. I. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. J. ASTM D 1248-Standard Specification Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. K. ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. L. ASTM G 62- Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings. M. AWWA C 105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. N. AWWA C 300-Standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type, for Water and other Liquids. O. AWWA C 600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. P. SSPC-SP 6- Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Q. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA) Manual for Railway Engineering. R. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement 01 33 00—Document Management B. For pipes 16 inches and greater submit shop drawings signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing the following: Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings—Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations. 2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fitting, flange, and special details, with plan and profile view of each pipe segment sketched, detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, restrained joints, and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by the Engineer. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD-ROM in Adobe portable document format(*.PDF). 3. Calculations and limits of thrust restraint. 4. Class and length of joint. C. Submit manufacturer's certifications that ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.51. D. Submit certifications that pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.11. E. Submit affidavit of compliance in accordance with ANSI A21.16 for fittings with fusion bonded epoxy coatings or linings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe Barrels: Shall conform to AWWA C115, C150 and C151 and bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval; minimum pressure Class 250 for water lines, or as shown on Drawings. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths, not less than 18 feet long, except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on shop drawings. C. For use of pressure class pipe for water lines, design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads and internal pressures. Base design on minimum of AASHTO HS-20 loading, AREMA E-80 loads and depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. Design pipes with Marston's earth loads for a transition width trench for zero to 16 feet of cover. Use Marston's earth loads for a trench width of O.D. (of pipe) +4 feet for pipe greaterthan 16 feet of cover. Use Marston's equations for a trench condition in both open-cut and tunnel applications. Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Pipe design conditions: 1. Working pressure= 100 psig; or greater if indicated on Drawings 2. Factory test pressure = 150 psig (for factory test sections) 3. Maximum pressure due to surge = 150 psi. 4. Minimum Pressure due to surge =-5 psi. 5. Design tensile stress due to surge or hydrostatic test pressure: No greater than 50% minimum yield. 6. Design bending stress due to combined earth loads and surge or hydrostatic test pressure: No greater than 48,000 psi. 7. Unit weight of fill>_ 120 pcf. 8. Deflection lag factor(DI) = 1.2. 9. Bedding constant(Fn = 0.1. 10. Moment coefficient= 0.16. 11. Fully saturated soil conditions hw= h =depth of cover above top of pipe. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings—Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Hydrostatic Test of Pipe: AWWA C 151, Section 5.2.1, at point of manufacture. Hold test for a minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of pipe. Repair or reject pipe revealing leaks or cracks. E. Pipe Manufacturer for large diameter water lines: Minimum of 5 years of successful pipe installations in continuous service. Manufacturer must maintain on site or in plant enough fittings to satisfy the following requirements: Line Diameter Required Bends* 20 and 24 inches four 450 (degree) bends per 5,000 LF of water line > 24 inches Four 22.50 (degree) bends per 10,000 LF of water line *Based on total length of contract (minimum of four). Any combination of bends may be substituted at manufacturer's option (i.e. two 22.5° bends are equivalent to one 45° bend) and will be counted as one fitting. F. Manufacturer or supplier must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12 hours of notification. Use fittings at direction of the Engineer where unforeseen obstacles are encountered during construction. These fittings are in addition to any fittings called out in construction documents and must be available at all times. G. Provide flange adapter with insulating kit as required when connecting new piping to existing piping and piping of different materials, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. H. Clearly mark pipe section to show location and thickness/pressure class color coded. 2.02 JOINTS A. Joint Types: ANSI A 21.11 push-on; ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint; or ANSI A 21.16 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or required by these specifications. For bolted joints, conform to requirements of AWWA C111; provide minimum 304 stainless steel for restraint joints. B. Where required by Drawings, provide approved restrained joints for buried service. C. Threaded or grooved-type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide restrained joints for test pressure or maximum surge pressure as specified, whichever is greater for water lines. Do not use passive resistance of soil in determining minimum restraint lengths. Provide restrained joints between stations identified in Article 3.3 RESTRAINED PIPE REQUIREMENTS. E. Electrical Bond Wires: Use stranded, copper cable furnished with high molecular weight polyethylene insulation (HMWPE). Use wire gauge (AWG) as shown on drawings. F. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer for pipe joints or restrained joints. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. When other methods are deemed satisfactory, install at no additional cost to City. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish,when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber(SBR)gasket material in accordance with ANSI A21.11 orASTM F 477(One Bolt only);for flanged joints 1/8-inch-thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A 21.15. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings—Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. For pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, see General Requirement 01 57 00— Temporary Controls. Notify Engineer prior to installation. 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they connect to. B. Push-on Fittings: ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) standard or ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153); ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets and lubricants; for all sizes and pressure rated at 250 psig. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI 21.10; ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets, and lubricants; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A 21.11; pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Lines: Shall conform to AWWA C153 and shall be: 1. Fusion bonded epoxy lined or 2. Cement mortar lined 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water line Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat;ANSI A 21.16 fusion bonded epoxy coating for interior; comply with NSF 61. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Technical Specification Section 33 11 16 - Water Lines, except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C 600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in double polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. D. Holiday Testing. E. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A 21.16. F. Provide electrical continuity bonding across buried mechanical and push-on joint assemblies, except where insulating flanges are required by drawings. 1. Provide minimum number of bond wires shown on drawings. Remove one inch of HMWPE insulation from each end of bond wire prior to attaching. 2. Secure wire onto pipe using approved Termite Welding procedures. 3. Coat bare metal and weld metal after weld is secure. Use coal-tar compound or other compatible coating. For polyurethane coated pipe, use compatible polyurethane coating. 4. Visually inspect Thermite Weld connections for electrical continuity, strength and suitable coating prior to backfilling or placing pipe in augered hole or casing. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings—Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.02 FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS A. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A 21.16. 3.03 Restrained Pipe Requirements A. Provide restrained mechanical joints 75' upstream and downstream of all pipe bends or fittings. END OF SECTION Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings—Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3311 16.23 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE EMBEDDED CYLINDER PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 11.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and installing new prestressed concrete embedded steel cylinder pipe and fittings for buried large diameter water lines. 1.02 REFERENCES The AWWA standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type (AWWA C301, latest revision) is made a part of these specifications. Documents referenced in AWWA C301, Section 1.3 form a part of AWWA C301 to the extent specified therein. Other standards applicable to the work specified herein are, but not limited to, the following: A. AWWA C301 — Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type B. AWWA C304— Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe C. AWWA C651 — Disinfection of Watermains D. AWWA Manual M9—Concrete Pressure Pipe E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement 01 33 00—Document Management. B. Submit shop drawings and certification signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing following: 1. Manufacturer's pipe design calculations. 2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details, with plan view of each pipe segment sketched,detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends,welded joints, and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by the Engineer. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD Rom in Adobe portable document format (*PDF). 3. Include hot tapping procedure. 4. Submit certification from manufacturer that design was performed for project in accordance with requirements of this section. C. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and assurance for materials and welding. Submit standard repair procedures that describe in detail shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc. D. Submit following within 45 days after manufacturing of pipe and fittings. 1. Steel: a. Steel reports as required in AWWA C 301. b. Results of other tests of steel reinforcement required in AWWA C 301. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Test Results. a. Hydrostatic testing,acid etching, magnetic particle and x-ray weld test reports as required. b. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for each type of coating and lining mix design. E. Submit certification for welder and welding operator demonstrating their certification within past 6 months in accordance with AVVWA C 206. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. F. Calibrate within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by the Engineer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finished pipe shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer which has had not less than 10 years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the types and sizes indicated. B. The manufacturer will be required to furnish mill test certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, steel plate, and cement. The manufacturer shall perform the tests described in AVVWA C301, for all pipe, fittings and specials. 1.05 INSPECTION A. The Engineer and/or Owner's representative may witness manufacture and fabrication of pipe and appurtenances. Independent testing laboratory under contract to the Engineer or Owner may perform tests at direction of the Engineer to verify compliance with these specifications. Provide assistance to accomplish such testing, including equipment and personnel, at no additional cost to City. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE A. Furnish pipe by same manufacturer. B. Provide prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe in conformance with AWWA C 304 and C301 and AVVWA M 9. The manufacturing facility shall be certified under the American Concrete pressure Pipe Association audit and certification program. C. Use of pipe from inventory is permitted only if specifications and certifications are met. Provide testing records for such pipe. D. Do not use prestressed concrete cylinder pipe in aerial crossings, exposed or other unburied areas. E. Pipe Manufacturer. 1. Must have minimum of 5 years of manufacturer's pipe installations that have been in successful and continuous service. 2. Must maintain on site or in plant minimum of four 22.5° bends per 10,000 linear feet of water line. Any combination of bends may be substituted at manufacturer's option (i.e.two 11.25° bends are equivalent to one 22.5° bend and will be counted as one fitting). Must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12 hours of notification. These fittings are in addition to any fittings called out on Drawing and must be available at all times. F. Pipe Design Conditions: Pipe shall be designed in accordance with the AVVWA C304 Design Standard, using the following design conditions; these conditions shall also be used in designing fittings and specials: Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 External Loading: 1. The earth load shall be taken as the greater of the following: a. Depth from existing ground level to top of pipe as shown on plans, or 2. The external load shall be determined by Marston's formula for positive projecting conduits provided the trench width equals or exceeds the transition width. If the trench width is less than the transition width Marston's formula for trench conditions shall be used.The following soil characteristics shall be used: a. Soil weight= 120 pounds per cubic foot(1920 kg/M3) b. Ku'= 0.130 3. Live loads shall be calculated as: a. Pipe in streets AASHTO HS-20 b. Pipe within railroad right-of-way Cooper E-80 c. Both HS-20 and E-80 load shall be completed in accordance with the American Concrete Pipe Association "Concrete Pipe Design Manual"and "Concrete Pipe Handbook". 4. Working pressure: 100 psig; or greater if indicated on Drawings. 5. Factory test pressure: 150 psig (for factory test sections) 6. Maximum pressure due to surge: 150 psi. 7. Minimum pressure due to surge: -5 psi. 8. Unit weight of soil: 120 pcf minimum, unless otherwise specified. 9. Transient pressure (Pt)shall be 40% of the working pressure or 40 psi,whichever is greater. 10. Minimum trench width: As shown on the drawings or indicated in City Standard Specification 022020 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers. G. The date of manufacture or a serial number traceable to the date of manufacture and the mark or trademark of the manufacturer shall be clearly marked by stencil with waterproof paint at the bell end of the pipe barrel. Unsatisfactory or damaged pipe will be either permanently rejected or returned for minor repairs. Pits, blisters, rough spots, minor breakage and other imperfections may be repaired, subject to the approval of the engineer, after demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs shall be carefully inspected before final approval. Cement mortar used for repairs shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa) at the end of 7 days and 4,500 psi (31 MPa) at the end of 28 days,when tested in cylinders stored in the standard manner. Major breakage or spalling from interior of pipe shall be reason for the rejection of pipe. H. Cement shall be Type I or Type II and shall be in accordance with ASTM C150. I. The pipe core shall be manufactured by the centrifugal or vertically cast process. J. Mortar coatings shall consist of one part cement to a maximum of 3 parts fine aggregate, by weight. Rebound, not to exceed one-fourth of the total mix weight, may be used provided the rebound is treated as fine aggregate. K. Bell and spigot joint rings shall be steel, self-centering type and otherwise as specified in AWWA C301. L. The rubber gaskets shall be in accordance with AWWA C301. M. Wall fittings shall be supplied with adequate bracing to keep them round and true during transportation and construction. N. Restrained joints, installed as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the engineer, shall be the clamp type; Snap Ring or welded joint type as shown in AWWA Manual M9. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 O. Radii for curved sections as specified on the drawings may be produced by joint deflection as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Deflections required which are in excess of those recommendations shall be produced by beveling the end of the pipe. P. Bends shall be fabricated to the deflection angle required. 2.02 LIMIT-STATES DESIGN CRITERIA A. The method adopted for the allowable combination of internal pressures and external loads is based on satisfying certain limit-states design criteria.This procedure is similarto design methods used for other types of concrete structures. The limit-states design criteria assures reliable performance of pipe (subjected to design factored loads) and also provides assurance that the state of specified prestress and safety margins will be maintained throughout the life of the pipe. 2.03 CALCULATION OF STRESSES AND STRAINS A. Stresses and strains in the pipe wall are calculated from moments and thrusts at critical locations (invert, crown and springline) resulting from internal pressures, external loads and the weight of pipe and fluid. Calculations of these moments and thrusts induced by the external loads are evaluated by the recognized "Olander"theory. The section of the pipe wall is then checked as an equivalent beam section. B. Unless otherwise specified, the materials and workmanship for pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C301 for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type. The design shall conform to AWWA C304 for Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe. 2.04 FITTINGS A. Steel thickness of all fittings shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual M9 and AWWA C301 specifications. B. Interior and exterior concrete/mortar coating shall be as per AWWA C301. 2.05 BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. The "Marston Theory of Loads on Underground Conduits" concludes that the load experienced by a buried pipe is affected by trench width, type of soil and density of backfill material. Bedding condition types are illustrated in Chapter 6 of AWWA Manual M9 for concrete pressure pipe. The bedding required for this project is type R4 for design of E-301 pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe is ruggedly constructed. It only requires a single sling around its midpoint when being installed. B. The pipe's rubber gasket joint affords many advantages. There is no need for caulking, welding or bolting, thus the use of expensive jointing materials and highly skilled labor is eliminated. The only joint materials required are an inexpensive vegetable compound soap solution to lubricate the inside bell surface and the gasket and a small amount of cement mortar to fill the inside and outside annular joint spaces. Depending on the manufacturing location and/or the product application,the inside annular space may be protected by shop-applied protective coating orjoint mortar. C. Prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M9, Concrete Pressure Pipe, except as otherwise provided herein. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. All prestressed concrete cylinder pipe shall have a minimum of 3' (0.9 m) of cover or as shown on the drawings,whichever is greater. Pipe shall be laid such that the invert elevations shown on the drawings are not exceeded. E. The pipe interior shall be maintained dry and broom clean throughout the construction period. F. Gasket, gasket groove and bell shall be cleaned and lubricated with a vegetable lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The lubricant shall be approved for use in potable water and shall be harmless to the rubber gasket. Pipe shall be laid to match existing pipe. As soon as the spigot is centered in the bell of the previously laid pipe, it shall be forced home with approved automatic equipment. After the gasket is compressed, verify the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge provided by the pipe manufacturer. G. Place a cloth diaper approved by the pipe manufacturer around each exterior joint recess and fasten it in place with either wire or steel strapping stitched into its edges. Mix a 1:3 mortar grout of sufficient liquid consistency to flow easily and pour it into the joint recess beneath the cloth band. To assist the flow and to assure complete filling of the entire recess completely around the pipe, fill the joint with mortar from one side in one continuous operation until the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the filling of the joint, pat or manipulate the sides of the wrapper to settle the mortar and expel any entrapped air. Close the joint recess at the top with a stiffer mix of the same mortar. H. Where applicable, pack interior joints of pipe 30" (750 mm) diameter and larger with mortar after backfilling is completed. Mortar grout shall be employed, consisting of one part by volume of Portland cement, 3 parts by volume of well graded coarse concrete sand meeting the requirements of ASTM C33, and sufficient water to make a stiff mortar suitable for overhead work. The mixture shall have a dry, crumbly consistency and shall be pushed into place and troweled to make a smooth joint. I. All pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plug or other approved means. Good alignment shall be preserved in laying. The deflections at joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the drawings, shall be provided, if required, in crossing utilities which may be encountered upon opening the trench or any other situation encountered that requires horizontal or vertical alignment adjustments. J. Have on hand a sufficient supply of assorted short pipe lengths, adapters and any other fittings necessary to prevent delays in pipe laying. K. Provide mechanical or welded joint restraint per AWWA Manual M9. L. Bolts, flange faces and steel joint rings shall be shop coated with rust preventative compound.All other metal surfaces shall be shop primed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. M. All operations described in this Guide should be performed in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) regulations, state and local codes, and industry safe practices. Material handling equipment shown or described in this Guide should have sizes and capacities determined by a qualified person. 3.02 PIPE HANDLING A. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings to the project site. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. Before lowering into the trench, inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe. Keep the pipe clean during and after the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, animals and trash, and at the close of each operating day, effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasket night cap. B. Excavation and Laying 1. A backhoe is most often used for excavation, but a rotary trenching machine may be used for some soil conditions. Usually, the pipe is installed by the same backhoe used for Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 excavation.The weight of the pipe and the force exerted by the laying equipment are usually enough to fit the spigot into the bell of the previously laid pipe section. C. Checking the Joint 1. Insert a steel feeler gauge about 1/2" (13 mm)wide and 0.010" (0.25 mm)thick into the joint recess and determine by feel if the gasket is properly seated in the groove. D. Interior Joint Protection 1. Unless protected by inorganic zinc or other protective coating,the inside joint recess should be filled with cement mortar and finished smooth with a trowel. E. Exterior Joint Space 1. Use a wrapper strapped around the pipe and over the joint to grout the exterior space. Pour wet cement mortar grout at one side of the opening on top of the pipe until the grout has advanced completely around the joint. F. Backfilling 1. After filling the exterior space of the pipe joint, begin backfilling immediately. This eliminates the delay between the laying and backfilling operations. 3.03 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTS A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for conducting a hydrostatic pressure test on the pipelines. The procedures and method for conducting the pressure tests shall be approved by the engineer. B. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, bulkheads, etc., as required in conjunction with testing portions of the pipe. Furnish test pumps, gauges, meters and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the tests. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests shall conform to AWWA Manual M9. C. All pipelines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 20% above the normal operating pressure at the lowest point of the section being tested and this pressure maintained for at least one hour. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with AWWA Manual M9. D. Lines which fail to meet the requirements of the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are met. Defective materials, pipe, valves and accessories shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the new pipelines by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, and pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period. If, after this cleaning, obstructions remain, they shall be removed. B. After the pipe lines are cleaned and if the ground-water level is above the pipe, or following a heavy rain,the engineer will examine the pipe for leaks. If defective pipes orjoints are discovered at this time, they shall be repaired or replaced. 3.05 DISINFECTION A. Before being placed into service, pipelines which will convey potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 END OF SECTION Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder 33 11 16.23 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3311 16.33 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALS PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install test, and disinfect (as required) all steel pipe and fittings (aboveground) as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Steel pipe shall include black steel and galvanized steel pipe and fittings. C. Steel pipe shall include steel pipe casing as shown on the Drawings as specified herein. 1.02 MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is specified in Section 03 30 00. B. Pipeline Testing and Disinfection of Water Lines is included in Section 33 13 01. C. Piping General Requirements are included in Section 40 05 00. D. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 50. E. Piping specialties are included in Section 40 05 70. F. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 40 05 76. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for Engineer's review. 1. Large—scale complete and dimensional working AutoCAD drawings of all pipe layouts. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, lining and coating systems, proposed welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Include location of any sample taps Contractor may require for sampling disinfection, etc. 2. Joint details; methods, and locations of supports; and complete information concerning type, size, and location of all welds. Shop and field welds shall be clearly differentiated, and welds will be clearly detailed with preparation procedures for all pipe and parent metal comprising each weld. Critical welding procedures shall be identified along with methods for controlling welding stresses and distortions. Locations and proposed joint details or butt straps used to control temperature stresses in the shop and field shall also be clearly identified. B. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C 200. C. Submit manufacturer's affidavits that coatings, linings,tape coatings, and heat shrink joint sleeves comply with applicable requirements of this Section and: Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Coatings were applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. 2. Coatings and linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. 3. Test Results: a. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day)test results for mortar coating. b. Hydrostatic testing, magnetic particle, and x-ray weld test reports as required. D. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, having Level III certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe furnished on the project was properly inspected and all defective coatings detected were properly repaired. E. Submit design calculations for all steel pipe and fittings including wall thickness and stress analysis. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. F. Submit manufacturer's hot tapping procedure, and a laying schedule of a pictorial nature with a plan view of each pipe segment sketched so that pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, and welded joints are detailed. G. Submit certification from the manufacturer that design was performed for the project in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Certification to be signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. H. Submit affidavits of compliance that materials and work furnished comply with the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and these specifications. I. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and assurance for materials and welding as indicated in Part 1.06. Submit at least 30 days prior to repair work, procedures that describe in details shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc. J. Submit following for non-shrink grout for special applications: 1. Manufacturer's technical literature included specifications for mixing, placing, and curing grout. 2. Results of tests performed by certified independent testing laboratory showing conformance to ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout and requirements of this specification. 3. Certification product is suitable for use in contact with potable water. K. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. Ensure welder and welding operator have been certified within the last 6 months in accordance with AWWA C 206. L. Prior to start of field-applied cement mortar lining operation, submit comprehensive plan which identifies and describes as minimum: 1. Equipment used for batching,weighing, mixing, transporting, and placing mortar. 2. Qualifications and specific experience of machine operators. 3. Source and type of cement, pozzolan,sand,and mixtures used and certifications from suppliers that materials meet specifications. 4. Mix proportions to be used and slump limits (maximum and minimum). 5. A quality control plan which identifies quality control material tests and documented inspections necessary to ensure compliance with specified requirements. M. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Project Manager. 1.05 REFERENCES A. AASHTO—Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. B. AREA— Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15. C. ASTM A 36—Standard Specification for Structural Steel. D. ASTM A 53—Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc—Coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM A 105—Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Pipe Forging for Piping Applications. F. ASTM A 106 — Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. G. ASTM A 120 — Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot—Dipped Zinc—Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. H. ASTM A 135—Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A 139—Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). J. ASTM A 234 — Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Services. K. ASTM A 570 — Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. L. ASTM A 1011 —Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. M. ASTM C 33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. N. ASTM C 150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. O. ASTM C 595—Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. P. ASTM C 1107—Standard Specification for Package Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink). Q. ASTM D 4541 —Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tests. R. ANSI B2.1 —Pipe Threads, Except Dry Seal. S. ANSI B16.1 —Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. T. ANSI B16.5—Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. U. ANSI B16.9— Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings. V. ANSI B16.11 — Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. W. AWWA C 200—Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger. X. AWWA C 203 — Coal—Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines —4 Inches and Larger—Shop applied. Y. AWWA C 205—Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe. Z. AWWA C 206—Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. AA. AWWA C 207—Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Sizes 4 in.through 144 in. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 BB. AWWA C 208— Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; Addendum C 208A. CC. AWWA C 209 — Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. DD. AWWA C 210 — Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. EE. AWWA C 213 — Fusion—Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. FF. AWWA C 214—Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. GG. AWWA C219— Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe. HH. AWWA C 602—Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines-4 in. (100 mm) and Larger- In Place. II. AWWA C606—Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. JJ. AWWA M 11 —Steel Pipe -A Guide for Design and Installation. KK. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1. LL. SSPC PA 2 — Paint Application Specification No. 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. MM. SSPC SP 1 —Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning. NN. SSPC SP 5—Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Blast Cleaning. 00. SSPC SP 6—Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. PP. SSPC SP 10—Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. QQ. SSPC VIS 1 —Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. RR. FS WW-P-521 F—Pipe-Fittings, Flange Fittings, and Flanges; Steel and Malleable Iron (Threaded and Butt Welded), 150 pound SS. FS WW-U-531 D — Unions, Pipe, Steel, or Malleable Iron; Threaded Connection, 150 pound and 250 pound 1.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. For large-diameter water lines, manufacturer shall have a permanent quality control department and laboratory facilities capable of performing inspections and testing required by the Specifications. Certification by the Steel Plate Fabricators Association (SPFA) or certification under International Standards Organization (ISO)quality control standards at the discretion of the Engineer. Material testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process shall be subject to inspection by Project Manager. Perform tests and inspections required by referenced standards and these Specifications, including but not limited to, the following. Correct all nonconforming conditions. 1. Steel Plate: Review mill certifications for conformance to requirements of Specifications; perform physical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to applicable ASTM standards. 2. Pipe: a. Inspect thickness, circumference, roundness, strength and size of seam welds (spiral or longitudinal), and squareness of pipe ends to verify compliance with AWWA C 200. b. Inspect physical dimensions and overall conditions of all joints for compliance with AWWA C 200, approved submittals, and Specifications. C. Finished pipe section shall be hydrostatically tested to 75 percent of specified minimum yield strength of steel being used with zero leakage. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 d. For wall thickness greater than 'h-inch, perform Charpy V-notch (CVN) test in accordance with AWWA C 200. 3. Linings: a. Inspect unlined pipe for overall condition of bare inside barrel. Inside barrel shall be free of corrosive products, oil, grease, dirt, chemical, and deleterious material. b. Inspect lined pipe for physical dimensions and overall condition of lining,visible surface defects, thickness of lining, and adhesion to steel surface. c. Review certifications by manufacturers of lining components for conformance to AWWA standards and these Specifications. 4. Coatings: Measure temperature and dew points of ambient air before applying coatings. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings. Inspect for visible surface defects, thickness, and adhesion of coating to surface and between layers. 5. Final Inspection: a. Before shipment, inspect each finished pipe, fitting, special and accessory for markings, metal thickness, coating thickness, lining thickness (if shop applied), joint dimensions, and roundness. b. Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for holidays. C. Inspect linings for thickness, pitting, scarring, and adhesion. B. Fabricated pipe and fitting items under this Section may be designed and supplied by multiple manufacturers to meet supply requirements provided all manufacturers meet the quality assurance requirements of this specification including the required experience clause. Coordination of design and submittal requirements for consistency will be the Contractor's sole responsibility C. The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection and testing requirements as specified in the referenced standards. Submit signed certificates of such test and their results at least 5 days prior to shipment of the goods. In addition, all pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant by the Engineer for compliance with this Section including using an independent testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least 14 days in advance of any phase of the pipe manufacture. D. All automatic and manual welding procedures used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be prequalified under Section IX of the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or AWS B2.1. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for harness and lug connectors. All factory welding shall be done by certified welders, who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWWA C206 by an independent local, approved testing agency in advance of any pipe production. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests and Contractor shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders. Submit welder qualifications. 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings B. Dimensions and elevations for all buried and above grade piping shall be field verified by the Contractor. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Note information in Pipe Schedule on Drawings, if any, and in this Section especially concerning pressures, coating and linings, minimum thickness, etc. In case of a conflict, the more stringent information in Engineer's opinion shall govern. D. Note that Contractor is responsible for compatibility between their pipe, flanges, valves, etc. E. Provide steel pipe casing where shown on the Drawings and as required to resolve a construction conflict where applicable. 1.08 MARKINGS, HANDLING, & STORAGE A. Legibly mark all pipes, fittings, specials, and appurtenances to be consistent with laying schedule and marking drawings. Each pipe shall be identified with sequential numbering and each marked pipe will appear on marking drawings in the identified locations for installation. Special fittings, bends, and appurtenances requiring a specific orientation will be appropriately marked with the words "TOP" in the correct position and in a consistent location. B. Care shall be taken in loading,transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. See also AWWA C214 and/or C222 and the referenced AWWA manual for shipping, handling, and storage procedures. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damage to linings or coatings discovered during examination shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's cost before the pipe is installed. Pipe shall be transported from the coating plant to the jobsite on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps or padded banding to adequately protect the pipe and coating. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its manufacturer. C. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned, and shall be kept clean until they are used in the work. D. Lined and/or coated pipe shall be suitably protected from exposure and heating of the sun at all times following procedures recommended by the coating system manufacturer. Exposure will not be allowed (except for short periods such as installation, assembly, and coating repairs). If the coating system includes UV inhibitors and the manufacturer will guarantee the coating against UV related damage, longer exposure may be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer. E. In handling the pipe, a double 2-ft wide cushioned sling shall be used or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges, cables, or levers shall be used in handling the finished pipe, fittings, or couplings. Care should be taken not to mar the pipe's outer coating. Padded wooden pipe cradles or chocks suitable for protection of tape or polyurethane coatings shall be used between fabricated pipes and beneath them on rough surfaces when pipes are stacked. Pipe shall not be stored on bare ground unless soft sand berms are used to support the pipe. F. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the finished coating. Workers will be permitted to walk upon the coating only when necessary, in which case they shall wear shoes with rubber or composition soles and heels. G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent damage to the linings or coating that might be caused by handling and/or storage of the completed pipe at low temperature (due to embrittlement)or high temperatures or direct sunlight. H. Adequate strutting (stulling) shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight pipe, so as to limit handling and storage damage to the pipe coating and lining. The strutting shall be installed by the manufacturer and shall remain in place while each pipe is loaded, transported, unloaded, and backfilled at the job site. Strutting shall be adequate for all handling, hauling, and storage. Struts shall be left in the pipe until backfill is complete. Additional strutting required to prevent damage and excess deflection of the pipe during installation due to loads imposed by backfilling and compaction equipment shall be the responsibility of the installation contractor. Pipe damaged during any phase of handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting will be Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 repaired or replaced at no expense to Owner. Submit informational review details on strutting assembly to Engineer prior to pipe manufacture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES A. Steel Pipe B. Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C 200, C 207, C 208 and AWWA M 11 except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A-36, ASTM A- 570 Grade 36, ASTM A-53 Grade B, ASTM A-135 Grade B, or ASTM A-139 Grade B. C. Black steel or galvanized steel pipe sizes 3—inch or smaller shall comply with ASTM 53. Unless otherwise specified, black steel or steel pipe sizes 3—inch up to and including 6—inch, may comply with any of the standards ASTM A53 and AWWA C200 for black steel or steel pipe. D. Method of Manufacture 1. Black or galvanized steel pipe may be seamless, electro-resistance welded or furnace- welded. 2. Steel Pipe a. Except for seamless mill-type pipe, all piping shall be made from steel plates rolled into cylinders or sections thereof with no more than two longitudinal butt-welded seams, or shall by spirally formed and butt welded. Girth seams shall be butt welded and shall not be closer than 6 feet except in specials and fittings. b. Circumferential deflection of all pipe in-place shall not exceed 2.0 percent of pipe diameter. c. Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 16 feet and no less than 10 feet for large diameter except as required for special fittings or closure sections, and no greater than 40 feet. d. Provide short section of pipe no less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings. E. Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be standard weight (Schedule 40) or extra heavy weight (Schedule 80)depending on service. See below for wall thickness validation requirements. F. Wall Thickness- Steel pipe 6-in diameter or greater. 1. Fabricated steel pipe shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA M11. References below are to the 2004 (Fourth edition)of AWWA M11. 2. Wall thickness design shall be based on: a. AWWA M11, Chapter 4, equations 4-6 and 4-7 concerning minimum handling wall thickness.Wall thickness for minimum handling shall be a minimum of D/T of 200 defined as outside diameter divided by wall thickness. b. AWWA M11, including Chapters 4, 5, and 6, especially Good Practice in Chapter 4 concerning pipe material stresses. c. Maximum internal static (working) design pressures, internal design pressures shall be equivalent to maximum static or working indicated on the Drawings and contained herein for factory test pressures. i. Working pressure = Minimum of 100 psig; or greater if indicated on the Drawings. ii. Factory test pressure = 150 psig (for factory test sections). Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 iii. Maximum pressure due to surge = 150 psig. iv. Minimum Pressure due to surge =-5 psig. V. Design water temperature: 95 degrees F maximum, 45 degrees F minimum. d. Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads, internal pressures, and surge contribution. Design of pipe and pipe joints to carry all loads including but not limited to: overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads,grouting,other conditions of service,thrust ofjacks,and any stresses anticipated during handling and installation of pipe. Maximum external loads for buried pipe design shall include: i. Base design on minimum ofAASHTO HS-20 loading, Cooper E-80 loads (where shown on Drawings or as indicated in Part 1.07), and depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. Loading at minimum earth cover (identified in Chapter 6, AWWA M11). ii. Maximum earth load of 125-Ib/ft3 with appropriate HS-20 loading, through 16-ft of cover. Representative types of soils are indicated in the soils information, as noted elsewhere. Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Design pipes larger than 20-inch with Marston's earth loads for a transition width trench for all heights of cover. iii. Other items in Chapter 6 of AWWA M11, including equation 6-4 for prism loading. Do not decrease dead load (Wc) by any factors. iv. For all piping, utilize E'factors based on having moderate compaction of bedding (per Table 6-1 —as modified by Errata July 2004 - in AWWA M11), unless lower E' values are indicated in the geotechnical investigation. In no case shall E' exceed 1,200 psi. Modulus of soil reaction (E') < 1500 psi. If E'> 1000 psi, silty sand (SM)shall not be used for embedment. Unit weight of fill (w)> 125 pcf. Deflection lag factor (D1)= 1.25. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw= h =depth of cover above top of pipe. V. Calculation for deflection shall be based on the modified Iowa formula (EQ. 6- 5, AWWA M11). Deflection of pipe, in place, shall not exceed 2.0 percent. Deflection lag factor shall be 1.0 and bedding constant (K)shall be 0.10. vi. Diameter (D)over thickness (t) ratio shall be no greater than 200. vii. Exclude any structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in tunnel installations. viii. Do not use internal removable stiffeners. ix. External welded steel stiffeners will be permitted in design calculations for steel pipe, provided wall thickness is a minimum of 1/2 inch. Minimum clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and tunnel liner shall apply to distance between outside diameter of external welded stiffener and tunnel liner. e. Design aboveground steel piping for spans as shown on the Drawings. Pipe wall thickness for a given aboveground system shall be based on the worst case span condition. Pipe manufacturer shall account for weights of valves,fittings, and other items attached to the pipe which provides an external loading condition to the pipe system. f. The stress due to design working pressure shall be no greater than 50 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel, the maximum combined stress based on design pressure shall never exceed 16,500 psi or 50 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). g. The stress due to test pressure shall not exceed 75 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel the maximum combined stress Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 based on test pressure shall not exceed 24,750 psi or 75 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). G. Provide shop-coated and shop-lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape- coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H. Standard or Special Sections: Within plus 1/8 inch of specified or theoretical lengths. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. I. Diameter. Nominal pipe diameter shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the diameter shall be as follows: 1. Fabricated Steel Pipe: Larger than 18-in nominal size, the diameter noted shall be equal to the actual clear inside diameter from lining surface to lining surface. 2. Manufactured Steel Pipe-6 inches through 16 inches nominal size: Outside Diameter shall match requirements of ANSI/ASME B36.10, B31.1 for a given nominal diameter. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Threaded Fittings 1. Malleable iron fittings shall comply with FS WW-P-521, Type 1 for use with black steel pipe and Type 2 for use with galvanized steel pipe. 2. Forged steel threaded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11 for Extra Heavy Weight Piping. B. Small Branch Connection "Fittings" 1. Pipe nipples shall be seamless black steel pipe,ASTM A53, standard weight(Schedule 40). 2. Welding fittings (for 4-in and smaller connections) shall be: For threaded outlets - Bonney "Thredolets," Porter "W-S Teelets," or Vogt "Weld Couplets;" for welded outlets - Bonney "Weldolets," Porter"W-S Teelets," or Vogt"Weld Couplets." 3. Provide small branch connections where required for use in pressure gauge taps, disinfection taps, passing hose or lead wires into pipe. Plugs shall be tapped with standard pipe threads and weld to pipe in approved manner and use solid forged steel plugs for closure C. Forged Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 20 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1. Forged steel fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2. Butt-welded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.9. 3. Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. D. Welded Fittings: Fittings and specials shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 4, including nondestructive testing in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 5 by NSF approved dye penetrant or wet magnetic particle testing of welds not previously tested in the straight pipe. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Fittings for steel piping larger than 20-inches in diameter: Fabricated steel fittings shall be of the same material as pipe and shall conform to the dimensions of AWWA C208. Wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the pipe to which fitting is to be welded 2. Fabricated from tested pipe in accordance with AWWA M 11, Section 13.3-13.7, and AWWA C 208. 3. Angles up to 5 degrees may be accomplished using joint deflections or mitered end joints as proposed by the manufacturer. 4. Elbows: 2-piece for 0 degrees to 22-1/2 degrees; 3-piece for 23 degrees to 45 degrees; 4- piece for 46 degrees to 67-1/2 degrees; and 5-piece for 68 degrees to 90 degrees. Radius: Minimum radius of one and one—half times pipe diameter unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required by site constraints subject to approval of the Engineer. 5. Outlets: Reinforced in accordance with AWWA M 11, Sections 13.3-13.7, AWWA C 200, and AWWA C 208. 6. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Minimum 12—inch—wide split butt strap; minimum plate thickness equal to thinnest member being joined; fabricated from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member being joined. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt strap, welded on both inside and outside, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. Provide minimum 6—inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section, unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section. 7. Dished Head Plugs: Design dished head plugs (test plugs)with withstand field hydrostatic test pressure from either side of plug. Design stress due to hydrostatic pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of minimum yield. Pipe on opposite side of hydrostatic test may or may not contain water. Manufacturer of the steel pipe to hydrostatically test plug at factory if the plug is made from multiple pieces of steel plate. 8. After fitting fabrication the pipe manufacturer shall hydrostatically test the completed fittings or alternatively test each weld non-destructively using radiography. All testing shall occur in pipe manufacturer's factory. 2.03 JOINTS A. Pipe ends/joints shall be: 1. Pipe Size/Type: Ends/Joints (if not noted otherwise) 2. Fabricated Steel: Single and double lap weld (buried only). Butt welded for thicknesses greater than or equal to 0.625-in (5/8-in) and all aboveground piping 3. Flanged: (aboveground, buried where required for valves or specials) 4. O-ring: (where allowed in specific locations on Drawings or Details) B. Welded/Fabricated Pipe End Joints. 1. Forged steel fitting shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2. Butt-welded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.9. 3. Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. 4. Fabricated steel fittings shall comply with AWWA C-200, shall be of the same material as pipe, and shall comply with AWWA C208. 5. Restrained joints where required at changes in direction or shown on the Drawings shall be single or double welded lap joints. Design of the joint and welds shall include considerations of stresses induced in the steel wall, the joints, and any field welds, caused by thrust at Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from the working and/or transient pressure. 6. For field welded joints, design stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of specified minimum yield strength of the grade of steel utilized for the part being examined when longitudinal thrust is assumed to be uniformly distributed around the circumference of the joint. C. Flanged Joints 1. Flanges will be provided at all valve connections and as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Flanges shall comply with the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125; AWWA C207, Class D. Flanges shall be machined to flat face using 1/8-in thick full face rubber gaskets suitable for potable water service and/or services described in Part 1.07. Flanges and gaskets shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the operating and test pressures cited in the pipe schedule on the Drawings. Gaskets shall not exceed OD or ID of piping flanges 3. Flanges for pipe 20 inches in diameter and smaller shall be AWWA 207 Class D or ANSI 150 Ib. flat face, slip on or weld neck flanges, meeting ASTM A105/AWWA Class D requirements. Where flanges are to join to valves with raised face flanges, use ANSI 150 Ib. raised flange face. 4. Provide same coating for non-wetted flange face and the side of the flange. Flange face to be coated with Rust Veto or equal suitable for NSF-61 potable water service. flange faces as interior of pipe when epoxy lining system is used. 5. Gaskets for air service shall be 1/8-inch thick, constructed of elastomers suitable for continuous temperatures to 300°F. Gaskets shall be full face. 6. Flanges shall be flat faced with a serrated finish. 7. Steel ring or flat plate flanges are only acceptable when cement mortar lined pipe requires a larger outer diameter pipe than nominal diameter pipe. Any attaching flanges will require an over bore. Pipe manufacturer shall coordinate as required to suit installation. 8. Flanges for 24-in connections and for blowoffs shall be compatible with ANSI B16.5 for ANSI class 300 service for test pressures greater than 275 psig. Blind flanges or dish heads furnished for testing purposes at valves shall meet the minimum test pressures. 9. Compatibility of flanges, including drilling and sizing of flanges and bolts, shall be coordinated by Contractor to insure compatibility with Owner and Contractor furnished valves. ANSI Class 300 valves may require raised flanges. 10. Flange faces shall be normal to the pipe axis with a maximum tolerance of 0.005-in/ft of flange diameter. Angular deflection (or Iayback) of the flange face shall not exceed 0.75 degree from a plane surface and shall be uniform within 0.010-in. All flanges, after welding to the pipe, shall be measured and shall be refaced, if necessary, to bring them within the specified tolerances. Flanges shall only be welded in the shop. 11. Bolts and hardware shall be per Part 2.06. 12. Provide same coating for exposed portions of nuts and bolts as flanges which they secure for aboveground piping. 13. Proper lubricants, washers and torque procedures shall be used on assembly of flanges in accordance with Chapter 12 of AWWA M11 and as required by the flange manufacturer. 14. Flange insulating kits shall be utilized between all dissimilar metals and where otherwise noted. Fabricate flanges with oversize bolt holes, with flanges drilled in pairs, to accommodate insulating sleeves. Test, coat, line and ship each shop—assembled insulated flange assembly to field as fitting. Use no less than two snug—fitting alignment pins to assist in aligning flanges during assembly. Do not remove pins until bolts have been installed in all remaining holes and have been drawn up tight. After insulating joints have been Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 assembled, subject each assembly (fitting) to test pressure and electrically test to ensure that insulated sections are effective. After assembly has been tested, coat insulating joint and adjacent steel pipe as specified for below—ground installation. Line assembly as specified for interior surfaces and in accordance with details shown on Drawings. D. O-Ring Joints (where specifically shown on the Drawings). 1. The spigot end of the pipe shall have a rolled in groove designed to retain the O-ring rubber gasket. Joints consisting of a Carnegie shape joint ring for spigot end or flared bell end and a grooved spigot end shall also be acceptable. Bell and spigot ends shall be sized by forcing over a sizing die or by expanding to stretch the steel beyond its elastic limit so that the difference in diameter between outside of spigot and inside of bell at normal engagement does not exceed 0.400-in measured on the circumference with a diameter tape. The O-ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill the area of the groove and shall conform to AWWA C200. Manufacturer shall submit test reports on gaskets to be used in construction consistent with section 4.13.6.3 of AWWA C200.The bell and spigot with flared bell and grooved spigot end shall be submitted for engineering review complete with dimension data and tolerances. Performance data shall be required demonstrating that the joint has performed satisfactorily under the anticipated operating conditions. 2. The joint shall be suitable for a safe working pressure equal to the class of pipe furnished and shall operate satisfactorily with a deflection (the tangent of which is not to exceed 0.75- in divided by D where D is the outside diameter of the pipe in inches) or with a pullout of 0.75-in. In no case will O-ring gasket joints be allowed for design working pressures in excess of 250 psig (maximum static working pressure of 250 psig, maximum test pressure of 350 psig). Note welding requirements for certain pipe. 3. O-ring joints shall be electrically bonded using bonding wire filter rings and brazing cartridges furnished by the pipe fabricator. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the continuity of this system before final acceptance. E. Lap Joints for Double Lap Welding (Buried Steel piping only). 1. All Iapjoints shall be double welded (inside and outside)as indicated on the Drawings unless pipe diameter is 24-in or smaller, in which case only single lap exterior weld or double exterior weld butt strap is acceptable. 2. All bell ends shall be formed by expanding with segmental dies using a hydraulic type expander, or by die pressing in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell. Preformed welded bell and spigot joints (Carnegie shapes) will not be allowed. The post formed section shall have a minimum radius of curvature of the bell end at any point of not less than 15 times the thickness of the steel shell. All longitudinal or spiral welds extending into the bell and spigot sections of lap joints shall be ground flush with the surrounding metal a minimum of 18-in from the ends. All burrs and sharp edges on the inside of bells and outside of spigots will also be ground flush or lightly chamfered. 3. Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Minimum sectional overlap of the joint shall be at least 1-1/2-in or four times the thickness of the thinner of the pipe wall thicknesses being joined, whichever is greater. The inside circumference of the bell section shall not exceed the outside circumference of the spigot section by more than 0.400-in in accordance with AWWA C200. No part of any field weld shall be closer than 1-in to the nearest point of tangency to a bell radius. F. Butt Joints for Welding (Aboveground and Belowground) 1. Butt joints shall be used for aboveground piping systems and where pipe wall thicknesses exceed 5/8-in. Butt weld joints shall be used for all steel casing pipe used at short tunnel crossing noted on the Drawings (butt welded or lap welded joints for carrier pipe). Butt joints Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 shall be single V-groove butt joints. The butt joints shall be complete joint"full' penetration welds. 2. Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Joints shall be accurately aligned and retained in position during welding operations so that the finished joint has abutting lining sections that are not misaligned by more than 20 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe or 1/8-in, whichever is smaller. 3. Welder qualifications shall follow requirements cited elsewhere in this Section. 4. Backing rings shall be used to assist in lining up pipe joints and for completion of welds. Rings shall be a minimum of 4-in in width and 1/4-in in thickness and shall avoid interference with internal joint finishing. 5. For all pipe greater than 1/2-in in thickness, field and fabrication welders and welding procedures shall be qualified to provide notch tough welds. A Charpy test will be performed on jointed specimens meeting a minimum CVN value of 25 Ibf-ft at 30 degrees F. Transverse specimen heat-lot testing for the steel shall be used, and all filler materials shall meet the same CVN requirements. G. Butt Straps 1. Butt straps shall comply with all requirements of AWWA C200 and C206 and SHALL have a minimum shell thickness equivalent to the greatest thickness of the pipe sections being joined. Minimum butt strap width will be at least 12-in for 24-in and smaller pipe and 18-in for 36 inch and larger pipe (greater than 24-in nominal). Minimum overlap on each section of pipe being joined shall be 2-in. For smaller pipes butt strap width shall be sufficiently wide to result in a minimum overlap of 1-in on each pipe or four times the thickness of the greatest shell thickness of the pipes being joined,whichever is greater. Butt straps will be welded on the outside only for 24-in and smaller pipe. For larger pipe double lap weld joint pipe is required unless special welded closures are needed. 2.04 COUPLINGS A. Flexible Coupling 1. Coupling shall be of a gasketed, sleeve-type, with diameter to properly fit the pipe. 2. Minimum sleeve length shall be 5 inches for pipe 5 inches and smaller, 7 inches for pipe larger than 5 inches and smaller than 36 inches, and 10 inches for pipe 36 inches and larger. Sleeves shall be supplied without pipe stop unless otherwise specified. 3. Couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 411, or equal. 4. Steel coupled joints,which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a. All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest edition), Section 13.8 for test pressure specified. b. Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs. c. Lugs(Type P and Type RR)shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. d. Bolt length and lug placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e. Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Gaskets for couplings on air service piping shall be suitable for use up to 300°F (Viton). 6. Coupling shall be provided with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating unless otherwise specified. 7. All bolting hardware shall be per Part 2.06. B. Advanced Flexible Couplings 1. All AISI 316L stainless steel construction. 2. Sealing element: EPDM rubber good for-4°F to 176°F for water service. 3. Minimum pressure capability of 150 psig minimum. 4. Steel coupled joints,which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a. All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest Edition), Section 13.8 for test pressure specified. b. Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs (Type P and Type RR). c. Lugs(Type P and Type RR)shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. d. Bolt length and lug (Type P and Type RR) placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e. Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. 5. Minimum deflection angle capability of 2°. 6. Products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to meet or exceed the design, materials, manufacture, and performance requirements set forth in AWWA C-219. 7. As manufactured by Straub (Flex model)or equal by Victaulic Depend-o-Lok. 2.05 UNIONS A. Unions shall be malleable iron complying to FS WW-U-531, Class 1, Type A for use with black steel pipe and Type B for use with galvanized steel pipe. Use dielectric union where specified. 2.06 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS A. Use Type 316 stainless steel when required by Drawings or buried or submerged service, otherwise use ASTM A307, Grade B, ANSI B18.2.1 painted in the field to match adjacent piping. Bolts to extend past nut at least 3 threads but not more than 5 threads maximum. Do not leave aboveground bolting exposed more than 5 days without finish painting. 2.07 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE,ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS A. Supply steel pipe with epoxy lining for aboveground and vault piping and shop applied cement- mortar lining for buried piping,capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F. Linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and shall be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Epoxy Lining: 1. AWWA C 210, White, NSF-61 listed for shop and field joint applied, except as modified in this Section. Provide materials from same manufacturer. Protect interior surface with approved liquid two-part chemically cured epoxy primer specified for interior surfaces. Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-5— 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile White Blast Clean Prime Coat NSF Certified Epoxy— 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Buff, or approved equal Intermediate Coat NSF Certified Epoxy— 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Buff, or approved equal Finish Coat NSF Certified Epoxy— 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT White, or approved equal 2. Total allowable dry film thickness for system: a. Minimum: 14.0 mils. b. Maximum: 18.0 mils. 3. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 5. Perform adhesion test on pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger in accordance with ASTM D4541. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. Perform test on actual pipe to be installed at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of epoxy lining. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752(solvent rub test)and ASTM D3363 (pencil hardness)for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. C. Shop-applied Cement-mortar Lining 1. AWWA C 205; shop-applied cement-mortar linings, except as specified herein: 1/2-inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger; 3/8-inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 36 inches and smaller. Cut back lining fromjoint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2. The inside of all pipe shall receive a cement-mortar lining applied by centrifugally spinning. 3. Application of cement-mortar lining to special sections, the shape of which precludes application by the spinning method, shall be accomplished by mechanical placement or pneumatic placement and finished to produce a smooth, dense surface comparable to centrifugally spinning. 4. Repairs of the cement-mortar lining for widths exceeding 6 inches shall be bonded to the steel and adjacent faces of the lining with a bonding agent conforming to ASTM C 881, Type II. 5. Restrict usage of sprinkler heads during moist curing to prevent overspraying onto lining. No alternative curing methods are allowed as described in Section 4.4.7.4 of AWWA C 205. 6. Use galvanized wire mesh when shop applied mortar is not applied by machine. Wire mesh not to extend across welded portion of mitered fittings. Crimp mesh to provide integral "chair"so wire does not fully rest against steel cylinder. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Field-applied Cement-mortar Lining: (For pipe > 48 inches in diameter). Provide field- applied internal cement-mortar linings in accordance with AWWA C 602, latest edition, except as modified in this Section. 1. Lining: Applied in a one-course application of cement-mortar by a machine that will centrifugally place mortar against wall of pipe and then mechanically trowel lining to a smooth finish. 2. Cement-mortar for lining. a. Cement-mortar: Dense, smooth, and of uniform quality and consistency to assure efficient machine operation and a uniform cement-mortar lining on pipe wall. b. Water-cement ratio: Kept as low as possible; consistent with proper plasticity for application, allowing slight variations dependent upon temperature, length of haul for mortar, and moisture condition in pipe. c. Mortar: Mixture of one part cement with not less than one or more than 1-1/2 parts of dry screened sand, by volume. When mixture has been determined, materials shall be controlled to within plus or minus 2-1/2 percent by weight throughout entire work. d. Materials for cement-mortar comply with following: i. Cement:Type II low-alkali Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150,or Type IP (MS) Portland-Pozzolan cement conforming to ASTM C 595, unless otherwise specified. Conform to low alkali requirements of Table IA of ASTM C 150. Type IP (MS) cement shall contain no more than 20 percent Pozzolan, which shall be inter-ground with clinker. ii. Use suitable facilities approved by Engineer when available for handling and weighing bulk cement. Otherwise, deliver cement in original unopened sacks that have been filled by manufacturer. Plainly mark sacks with manufacturer's name or brand, cement type and weight. iii. Store cement to permit ready access for inspection and sampling. Protect cement against contamination or moisture. Do not use or remove from site cement delivered with evidence of contamination or otherwise unsuitable. iv. Use Portland cement of same brand and type unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. V. Pozzolanic material:AWWA C 602, Paragraph 2.2. vi. Sand: AWWA C 205, Section 2.3, except gradation of sand shall yield a fineness modulus of approximately 1.7; having no material coarser than that passing a No. 16 sieve. Submit certification as to compliance of sand with these specifications at least 10 calendar days before start of lining placement. vii. Water: Clean; free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis or organic materials; total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I;ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure;ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.08 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) A. Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. SSPC-SP-10 Surface Preparation Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec—Zinc 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT Intermediate Coat TNMEC Series 20 Pota—Pox 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT 1255 Beige Finish Coat Tnemecc Series 1074 Endura—Shield II 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Color to be Selected B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness (DFT)for System: 1. Minimum: 9.5 mils. 2. Maximum: 12.5 mils. C. Clean bare pipe free from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminant. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC—SP-1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use only approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Use preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale,water, and ice provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. D. Remove surface imperfections such as silvers, scabs, burrs,weld spatter, and gouges, presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. E. Provide materials from same manufacturer. F. For submerged service in a Pump Well or a Treatment Structure minimum DFT thickness shall be 16 mils and per Section 09901-11 System 100 (NSF-61 approved coatings). G. Perform adhesion text on pipe in accordance with ASTM D4541. Minimum field adhesion: 1,000 psi. Perform test on pipe for project at frequency of one of every 1,000 square feet of polyurethane coating. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752 (solvent rub test)and ASTM D3363 (pencil hardness)for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. 2.09 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Supply pipe with one of the following coatings specified. ONLY use this section if buried system is not specified earlier in this specification. 1. Tape Coating: AWWA C214/C209. a. Where sleeve type or victaulic couplings, are required, bond coupling to adjacent pipes with bonding cables as shown on Drawings. b. Use approved filler putty type insulating putty to fill in gap and create smooth sloped transition between top of reinforcing plate and pipe, before tape coating is applied. c. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. d. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints to facilitate welding. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 e. Inner and outer tape widths: 12 or 18 inches. 2. Polyurethane Coating: Provide inspections by NACE trained inspector under supervision of NACE Certified Coatings Inspector having Level III Certification. Refer to Paragraph 2.08 (G.) of this Section for field testing requirements. See Specification 33 11 16.43 for Polyurethane Coating for Steel Pipe. B. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves: Canusatube, Canusawrap, or Canusa Wrapid Sleeve, or approved equal. For repairs to heat shrink joint sleeves, use Canusa Repair Patch Kit or approved equal. C. For steel pipe encased in concrete under treatment structures follow surface prep in 2.08A and apply prime coat only. 2.10 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING OR AUGER HOLES A. Provide exterior coating system of pipe in tunnel without annular grout in accordance with AWWA C203. B. For large-diameter water lines where annular grout will be used, shop prime external surfaces of steel pipe with 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Inhibited Epoxy Primer, unless pipe has cement-mortar coating. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10(64); Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT, or approved equal. 3. Coating procedures and dry film thicknesses for approved alternate product shall be in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 2.11 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS A. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of thick cream. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 Ib/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. C. Sand: 1. Inside joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D. Water: Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I; ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. Use water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides and sulfates. E. Non-shrink Grout: 1. Pre-blended factory-packaged material manufactured under rigid quality control,suitable for use in joints of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 2. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate and shall be nonstaining and noncorrosive. 3. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined; 5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined. 4. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Suitable for use in contact with a potable water supply. 6. Highly flowable so joint wrapper around exterior of pipe joint can be filled without leaving any voids or trapped air. Capable of being placed with a plastic consistency in interior of pipe joint. 7. Non-bleeding and non-segregating at fluid consistency. 8. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of steel pipe. 9. Free of gas-producing, gas-releasing agents. 10. Resist attack by oil or water. 11. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Upon 72 hours' notice, provide services of a qualified representative of non-shrink grout manufacturer to aid in assuring proper use of product under job conditions. Representative to be on site when product is first used. 12. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 17.7 Ib/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout to mixed cement grout or water to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. F. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller; minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33-inch in diameter; hemmed at edge to allow threading with a minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel strap; minimum 6-inch-wide wire Ethafoam strip sized, positioned and sewn such that two circumferential edges of Ethafoam are 1-'h inches from outer edge of wrapper. 2.12 COLD-APPLIED TAPE COATING A. Shop—applied Tape Wrap Coating 1. Use primer furnished by tape manufacturer. 2. Wrap,specials and fittings that cannot be machine wrapped due to configuration with primer layer and two layers of prefabricated tape each 35 mils thick. 3. Overlap machine applied tape with hand applied tape by minimum of two inches and bind to it. 4. Apply approved 30 mil filler tape parallel to spiral weld seams if weld height measures greater than or equal to 1/8 inch. B. Surface Preparation 1. Clean bare pipe from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminants. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC—SP-1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice may be used provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. 2. Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges by hand filling or grinding to prevent excessive number of holidays. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. 2.13 EXTERNAL TAPE COATING SHOP APPLICATION A. Separate tape dispensing equipment far enough apart to visually inspect continuous steps. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Make cutbacks straight and for total thickness of coating. C. State of dryness of primer prior to application of weld filler and inner layer of tape to be in accordance with written recommendation of manufacturer. D. Apply weld filler tape over primer and extend minimum of one inch on each side of weld seam. Filler tape may contact rollers as long as release liner is in place and adhesion requirements are met. Remove release liner before applying inner layer tape. E. Spirally apply inner layer of tape in direction of helix weld. Overlap each spiral of tape 1 inch or greater with next successive spiral of tape applied. F. Overlap end of new roll on top of previous roll minimum of 6 inches. G. Tape—roll body temperature to be greater than 70 degrees F; pipe surface temperature to be greater than 60 degrees F. H. Spirally apply outer layer tapes in direction of helix weld and use overlap width and application tensions as recommended by manufacturer. 2.14 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COATINGS A. Perform electrical inspection on inner layer of tape before intermediate layer of tape is applied. B. If holidays are detected, repair holidays immediately before applying outer layer of tape. Clear holiday area of material and reprime if necessary. Recoat area with inner wrap tape. Overlap inner wrap tape onto surrounding inner wrap coating by at least 2 inches. Perform electrical retest at repaired area after repairing holiday, and before outer wrap is continued. C. Shrink Wrap: Perform electrical inspection on shrink wrap to check for holidays. Perform peel tests over heat affected zone. Minimum acceptable result: 15 lbs—ft/in. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 40 05 00 — Piping — General Requirements, except as modified in this Section. B. Comply with the following: 1. Manufacturer shall make available services of a representative when deemed necessary by Project Manager. Advise in all aspects of installation, including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coating and lining repair, and general construction methods as applicable to the pipe. 2. For large diameter water line, install stulls prior to placement of pipe, bends, and fittings to prevent deflection during installation. Provide stulls consisting of timber struts with end blocks shaped to fit curvature of interior surface of pipe or other appropriate configuration and material. Firmly edge and secure stulls to blocks so that they will remain intact position during handling and installation. Provide stulls adequate to resist loads encountered without structural failure to stull members or damage to pipe. Where applicable, place stulls at such lengths so as to elongate vertical diameter of pipe as required to suit trench conditions encountered. 3. Handling and Storing (for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger): Install padded struts or stulls prior to shipping, horizontally and vertically by manufacturer at 10-foot intervals, or as proposed by manufacturer and approved by Project Manager. Spiders: Installed by manufacturer in joint ends of fittings. Stulls shall remain in place, horizontally and vertically positioned at all times during storage and shipping, and until all welding, backfilling and compaction has been completed. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Bedding and Backfilling: a. Conform to requirements of Section 31 23 16 — Excavating and Section 31 23 23.13 — Backfill. b. Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations to prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by more than allowable pipe deflection. Do not move trench support system(trench safety system)once the bedding material is compacted. 5. Pipe Deflection: After backfilling is complete, all pipe larger than 30 inches in diameter shall be tested for excessive deflection by measuring the actual inside vertical diameter. a. Deflection may be measured by Project Manager at any location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection are not acceptable. b. If deflection exceeds that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe as directed by Project Manager at no additional cost to the City or remove backfill and side support. Reround the pipe and properly replace compacted backfill and side support. Review cement mortar lining to assure that no harmful damage has occurred. C. Static Electricity: 1. Properly ground steel pipeline during construction as necessary to prevent build—up of static electricity. 2. Electrically test where required after installation is complete. D. Piping Exposed, 3 Inches and Smaller 1. Piping Layout a. Make provisions for expansion and contraction during normal operations. b. Provide unions to permit removal of equipment, pumps, and valves. c. Provide dielectric unions for connection of copper piping. 2. Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, using Drawings as guide. 3. Water Piping: Arrange so system can be completely drained. 4. Air Piping: Grade to points of drainage collection. E. Piping, Exposed, Larger than 3 Inches 1. Piping Layout a. Install as shown on the Drawings and per fabricator's shop drawings. b. In placing the pipe, hold pipe by one or more padded slings. Handle in a manner that will prevent damage to the pipe or the protective coating. Support pipe adequately while being fitted and joined with adjoining pipe section. c. After each section of pipe has been set into position, attach to the adjoining section as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide drains and high point vents to facilitate pressure testing. 3. Install valves with operator positioned to permit access for operation. 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED)AND EPDXY LINING INTERNAL LINING SYSTEM Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Safety: Paints, coatings, and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. B. Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces for painting by using abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges, pits,welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape,or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Project Manager for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences,or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with the use of SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC-V is 1. 7. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing a 3/4-inch by 4-inch piece of clear Scotch type tape on blasted surface, then removing and placing the tape on a 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue. D. Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating; or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs,sags,curtains,pinholes,orange peel, fish eyes, excessive overspray, or delaminations. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of undersurface occurs. 4. Cure a minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are applied. During curing process, provide force air ventilation in volume sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below the published threshold limit value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to application of additional coats. After interior coatings are applied, provide forced air ventilation in a sufficient volume and for a sufficient length of time to ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Tape Coating System: 1. Joint Protection a. Coating field joints,tie—ins, and other field—welded joints: Provide application of approved insulating putty at belt step—offs, and two wraps of Field Joint Tape Primer: Furnished by tape manufacturer. b. At Contractor's option, apply approved special heat resistant tape system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat entire pipe with shop—applied tape. Coat bell end with shop—applied heat—resistant tape. In field, fill joint step off area with insulating putty. Field apply two layers of field joint tape over joint followed by high shear strength outerwrap. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for field—applied tape coating. c. At Contractor's option, provide field—applied shrink—wrap coating system for coating field joints, tie—ins and other field welded joints. Apply heat—shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat— shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide shrink—wrap systems consisting of primer, tape coating and polyurethane coating and high—strength application of Aqua—shield Wrap for pipeline. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipelaying operations. Representative to advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. 2. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C 209 around joint cutbacks except as modified. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer, and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting, solvent or other method as approved by Project Manager. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. b. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP 6 in accordance with AWWA C 209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. c. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky" with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop- applied coating. 3. Joint Tape Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a. Apply joint wrap tape to uncontaminated primer at proper roll body temperature. If necessary, store joint wrap material in a heated box up to point of application. b. Joint wrap material may be applied to pipe in either a spiral or cigarette fashion dependent upon specification. Begin wrapping process 2 to 4 inches onto mill- applied pipe wrap and proceed wrinkle-free up over bell and across joint to spigot side pipe wrap. c. Applyjoint wrap under machine tension of 5 to 10 pounds per inch width. Joint wrap width should narrow (neck down)as material is applied tightly around pipe. d. Apply first 1/3 and last 1/3 turn of joint material around pipe with less tension to prevent wrap crawl back. Overlap of joint wrap material and system's total thickness as specified in this specification section. e. End joint wrap process such that its final edge is directed downwards when pipe is placed in ditch to prevent backfill from pulling an exposed joint wrap edge. 4. At Project Manager's option, Contractor may apply heat shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide Canusa Wrapid Sleeve or approved equal. Provide services of a technical representative of the manufacturer available on site at the beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative shall advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. 5. Do not expose tape coatings or heat-shrinkable joint sleeves to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove)and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings, remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. 6. At option of Project Manager, Contractor may apply tape coating system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat bell end with shop-applied Polyken #2036-25 heat resistant tape. Coat entire pipe with shop-applied Polyken #989-20, Polyken #955-30 and Polyken #956- 30. In the field, install joint and fill step off area with Polyken #935 insulating putty. Field apply two layers of Polyken #930 field joint tape over joint followed by Polyklen #2055 high shear strength outer wrap. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for field applied tape coating. B. At option of Project Manager, coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C 214. C. Cement-mortar Coating: AWWA C 205; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.04 JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints. 1. O-ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill area of groove and gasket material shall be in accordance with AWWA C 200. Check each splice in a gasket by stretching gasket to at least twice original length of gasket. Visually check stretched splice by rotating 360 degrees. Reject splices showing visible separation or cracks. 2. Equalize rubber gasket cross section after rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe by inserting a tool or bar such as a large screwdriver under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with a nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. Fit pipe units together in a manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. Check gaskets after pipe sections are joined with a feeler gauge to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred at any point around circumference after joining. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as if for new pipe. Remove old gasket and replace before remaking joint. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Threaded 1. Comply with ANSI B2.1, NPT. 2. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies,with not more than three threads exposed at each connection. 3. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs. 4. Use joint compound or thread tape on male threads only. After having been set up, a joint must not be backed off unless the joint is completely broken, the threads cleaned, and new compound applied. C. Welded 1. All welds shall be sound and free from embedded scale or slag, shall have tensile strength across the weld not less than that of the thinner of the connected sections, and shall be watertight. All field welds shall comply with AWWA C206. 2. Use butt-welds for fabrication of bends and other specials. Use fillet welds for flange attachment in accordance with AWWA C207. 3. After installation of pipe, fittings, and specials, all unlined or uncoated ends adjacent to welded field joints, including the weld proper, shall be cleaned, primed, lined, and coated as specified for the pipe adjacent to the weld. Preparation of surfaces to be lined and coated shall be as stipulated for shop application of coal tar primers and enamels except that all foreign matter, including all damaged lining or coating materials, shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing and the surfaces cleaned to bright metal free of all rust, slag, and scale by means of wire brushing or sandblasting. Entry for application of interior linings to unlined ends shall be from open ends. Pour holes shall not be provided. D. Flanged 1. Tighten flange bolts so gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed. 2. Do not distort flanges. 3. Flange bolts shall be coated with anti-seize compound. E. Flexible Couplings 1. Prepare ends of pipe square, removing all burrs from inside and outside pipe. 2. Prepare exterior surface of pipe in accordance with compression coupling manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install harness lugs on pipe as applicable. 4. Pipe gaps shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturer with a maximum gap of 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Pipe exterior surface and interior surface of compression sleeve ring shall receive required protective coating prior to assembly. F. Grooved or Shouldered Type Couplings (Split Couplings) 1. Cut grooves clean and sharp without burrs or chuck marks. 2. Ream end of pipe after grooving and before assembly to remove burrs. 3. Pipe shall be free of indentations, projections,or roll marks from the end of pipe to the groove to provide a leak-tight seat for the gasket. 4. Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 5. Split couplings used in lieu of flanges shall be of the rigid type. G. Shouldered 1. Assemble shoulder ring to pipe ends and weld. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2. Repair damaged pipe lining extending protective coating over pipe end and should ring. 3. Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 3.05 FIELD-APPLIED CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Entrances Into Pipeline: 1. Establish a means to permit entry and exit of labor, materials and equipment necessary for progress of work, as approved by Project Manager. 2. Provide dikes and channeling for diversion of flood and drainage waters away from these openings in pipeline. Use temporary airtight covers over openings to provide proper curing conditions in completed sections of lined pipe. Where operation of equipment requires that an end of pipe be left open, install a temporary bulkhead inside pipe to eliminate a direct draft through pipe over completed sections. 3. Brace closure sections of pipeline left out to facilitate field lining above ground to conform as nearly as possible to shape of pipe in ground and then place cement-mortar lining by machine or hand trowel to same thickness as in adjoining machine-lined sections. Bulkhead sections immediately after being lined to maintain proper curing conditions for a period of not less than 48 hours before sections are installed in pipeline. Install these sections of steel pipe. 4. Coat exterior surface of buttstraps and any uncoated exterior surface area of steel pipe within excavations in accordance specifications. Place cement-mortar lining inside areas of joints in accordance with specifications. B. Mixing of Cement-mortar: Mix ingredients for cement-mortar for not less than 1-1/2 and not more than 6 minutes; use mortar promptly after mixing for lining pipe. Do not use mortar that has attained its initial for lining. Do not retemper mortar. Add water to mix last. C. Placing Cement-mortar Lining: 1. Complete joint work, backfill and welding before cement—mortar lining begins. After cement—mortar lining has cured hydrostatic testing of pipe can begin. 2. Provide provisions necessary for Project Manager to conduct inspections of work in safe and thorough manner during and after initial application of mortar and after necessary repairs made. Include, as minimum, space on application machine, and adequate lighting to inspect gross surface areas. 3. Comply with ASTM C494 and with manufacturer's recommendations when using chemical admixtures, bonding agents, accelerators, and other additives. 4. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease and loose mill scale and rust from interior surfaces of pipe, and scrape or brush surface with stiff bristle brush and/or water blast as may be necessary, and approved by Project Manager, to ensure clean surfaces for successful application of cement—mortar lining. Interior surfaces to be approved by Project Manager prior to placing lining. 5. Provide cement—mortar lining uniform in thickness along entire length of pipe. Provide cement—mortar no less than 1/2—inch over all surfaces with tolerance of plus 1/8—inch, and no allowance for minus tolerance. 6. Mechanically control travel of machine and rates of discharge of mortar to produce uniform thickness of lining without segregation around perimeter and along length of pipe. 7. Check finished surface by placing 12—inch straightedge parallel to axis pipe along surface of straight section of lining. At no point will space between lined surface and straightedge be greater than 1/16—inch. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. Provide smoother finished surface, within tolerances specified. Repair or replace surface irregularities including corrugations, ripples, or pits in any direction, to satisfaction of Project Manager. Remove defective lining material, including, sand pockets, voids, oversanded areas, blisters, delaminations, or unbounded areas, cracked areas, irregular surfaces, and unsatisfactory thin spots. Remove to pipe wall and area repaired to full thickness of mortar lining. 9. Repair cracks 1/16—inch and larger to satisfaction of Project Manager. 10. Place cement—mortar lining by a machine having following features: a. An applicator head which can be centered within pipe and which will centrifugally project mortar against wall of pipe at a high velocity producing a dense, uniformly distributed mortar on wall of pipe. b. Equipped with mechanically driven, rotating steel trowels that immediately follow applicator, providing a smooth, hard surface without spiral shoulders. Compensate for torque so that machine will sit true in pipe and trowel faces will not vary in angle with mortar face during a complete 360-degree cycle. Clean trowels at frequent intervals to prevent accumulated mortar from obtaining initial set resulting in a sanded or unglazed finish. Continuously operate trowels during application of cement-mortar and forward progress of lining machine. c. Design applicator so that nothing will come in contact with troweled surface until it has attained final set, and so that forward progress of machine and mechanical placing of mortar can be controlled to assure a uniform thickness of lining. 11. Cement-mortar Lining: Adhere to steel at all points; finished thickness except that lining of bell end of pipe shall be thicker in order to fill depression and make a smooth surface. 12. Immediately prior to application of cement-mortar lining, sweep and clean off slime, dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and any other foreign materials. Free interior surface of pipe after cleaning of accumulated water on pipe wall or at joints. 13. After receiving its finish troweling, do not roughen lining by rebound material or by mortar direct from machine. 14. Temporarily close outlets in pipeline with easily removable stoppers to prevent spun mortar from being thrown into such openings. After lining is applied, remove stoppers from outlets and repair any lining damaged by removal of stoppers. Point outlet openings up to provide smooth flow. D. Hand Finishing: 1. Repair defective areas in machine-applied lining and unlined joints by hand patching to yield a lining equal to that required for machine-applied troweled lining. 2. Provide non-shrink grout for patching or lining joints as specified in this Section. 3. Clean defective areas of loose foreign material and moisten with water just prior to application of hand-applied mortar. 4. Use steel finishing trowels for hand application of cement-mortar. 5. Complete hand finishing required in a given pipe section not later than day following machine application of mortar lining to that particular pipe section, whether a normal working day or otherwise. Slow down or stop machine application of mortar lining to allow time for any hand patching. E. Curing of Lining: Begin curing operations immediately after completing any portion of mortar lining. Close pipe by airtight bulkheads, and maintain a moist atmosphere in completed section of pipe to keep lining damp and to prevent evaporation of entrained water from mortar lining. Humidify any air introduced into pipe for ventilating or curing purposes and maintain a moist atmosphere inside pipe until Project Manager accepts the Work. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.06 SMALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Branch connections 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be made with welding fittings with threaded outlets. Where there is some doubt as to the exact outlet size desired, but it is known that the size will be less than 1 inch, provide a 1-inch outlet and bush down as required. B. Branch connections 3 inches through 12 inches in size shall be made with pipe nipples or with welding fittings. Pipe nipples for branch connections shall be black, standard weight, Schedule 40, seamless pipe conforming to ASTM A120. Steel pipe nipples and welding fittings shall be welded to the pipe and shall be reinforced as required to meet design and test requirements. C. Small branch connections shall be located so as not to interfere with joints, supports, or other details. D. Coordinate disinfection tap connections with specification Section 02514 and the City Water Production Department. 3.07 TESTING (EXCEPT MORTAR COATED PIPE) A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for carrying out a pressure test on the pipelines. The procedures and method for carrying out the pressure tests shall be approved by the Engineer. The test gauge shall have minor graduations no greater than one percent of the specified test pressure. B. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, etc., as required in conjunction with testing a portion of the pipe between valves. Furnish a test pump, gauges, and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the hydrostatic tests. C. All steel pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 02515. D. Testing shall take place in the presence of the Engineer. If leaks are discovered, they shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner and approved by the Engineer. E. Holiday Test: 1. Perform holiday test in accordance with NACE Standard Recommended Practice, RPO 188- 90, Discontinuity (Holiday)Testing of Protective Coatings. 2. Begin testing of completed coating after coating has sufficiently cured, usually one to 5 days. Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule. 3. For coating thickness of 20 mils or less, test with a wet sponge low-voltage holiday detector. For coating thickness in excess of 20 mils, test with a high-voltage holiday detector. Select test voltage as suggested in table below. MINIMUM VOLTAGES FOR HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK TESTING Total Dry Film Thickness Suggested Inspection (mils) (V) 20 to 40 3,000 41 to 55 4,000 56 to 80 6,000 4. For large—diameter waterlines, perform test procedure in accordance with NACE Standard RP-02-74. Perform electrical holiday test with 60—cycle current audio detector. Use test voltage below: Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Total Coating Thickness Test Voltage (Mils) (Volts) 20 6,000 30/35 7,500 50 9,000 70 11,500 80 12,000 5. For large-diameter water mains, include cost of inspection described in Paragraph 3.08, Inspection, in contract unit price for water lines. Furnish copies of all certified inspection reports to Project Manager for review. F. Adhesion Tests: Adhesion testing may be directed by Project Manager on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section or for any other condition considered to adversely affect adequate adhesion. Perform adhesion test on pipe in accordance with ASTM D 4541. 3.08 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and the testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Project Manager is responsible for quality assurance and reserves the right to inspect or acquire services of an independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect surface preparation and application of high- performance coatings at all phases of coatings and linings work,field-or shop-applied. Contractor is responsible for proper application and performance of coatings and linings whether or not Project Manager provides such inspection. B. Cement Mortar Lining and Joint Finish for large diameter water lines: Finished surface of lining and joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring past to surface, to remove depressions and projections, and to produce a smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface past as necessary. Leave interior with a clean, neat and uniform-appearing finish. 3.09 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL FITTINGS APPLICATION FOR CEMENT MORTAR LINING A. Areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter: patch honeycomb and minor defects in concrete surfaces with non-shrink grout. Repair defects by cutting out unsatisfactory material and replacing with non-shrink grout, securely bonded to existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing concrete as inconspicuous as possible. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of shrinkage,strike off grout flush with surrounding surface. B. Areas greater than 6 inches in diameter: 1. Remove defective lining down to bare steel by chipping, making sure care is taken to prevent further lining damage. Ends of lining where defective lining is removed are to be left square and uniform not feathered. 2. Clean bare steel with wire brush to remove loose or other foreign matter. 3. Remove existing wire reinforcement and replace. Overlap new reinforcement to existing reinforcement by 1/2—inch. Secure reinforcement, against wall of pipe, at frequent intervals, by tack welding to pipe. 4. Prepare cement mortar mixture. Mixture to compose of Portland Type II cement, sand, and water. Proportions of sand to cement not to exceed 3 parts sand to 1 part cement, by weight. Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Use only enough water to obtain proper placement characteristics. Set up time before mixture is to be discarded is to be no longer than 1/2 hour. Non-shrink grout may also be used. Do not use combination of cement mortar and non-shrink grout within same repair. 5. Apply WELD—CRETE, or approved equal, concrete bonding agent to bare steel and interface of existing lining. After bonding agent is applied to steel and lining new mix must be applied within 10 minutes. 6. Apply cement mortar to repair area 1/2—inch thick then hand trowel to achieve smooth dense finish, making sure wire is not left exposed. To ensure proper thickness while placing new mortar, check thickness with 1/2—inch long wire gauge. 7. Curing: Place plastic sheeting over repair area, use tape to adhere plastic to area surrounding repair area. Let cure for 4 days then remove plastic sheeting. END OF SECTION Steel Pipe, Fittings,and Specials 33 11 16.33 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 06/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3311 16.43 POLYURETHANE COATINGS ON STEEL PIPE PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Two-component polyurethane coating system for use as external coating for steel. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost of polyurethane coatings in contract unit prices for steel pipe. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AWWA C 210 - Standard for Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. B. ASTM D 522 - Standard Test Method for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. C. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. D. SSPC-PA Guide 3 -A Guide to Safety in Paint Application. E. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00 -Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems. F. SSPC-PS10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.4 SAFETY A. Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B. Safety requirements stated in this specification and in related sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C. Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, prior to delivery of pipe. B. Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use standard containers to prevent gelling, thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B. Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C. Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D. Store material onsite in enclosures, out of direct sunlight in warm, ventilated and dry area. Polyurethane Coatings on Steel Pipe 33 11 16.43 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening or other action which may lead to product contamination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COATING MATERIAL A. CORROPIPE 3000 — Ultra High Design Life Pipeline Coating (two-component) or approved equal; mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter, brush apply. 2. For areas greater than 6 inches in diameter, spray apply. B. Coating System: Use Type V system which is 2-package polyisocyanate, polyol- cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. Components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C. Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE 3000, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc. D. Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 99 percent plus or minus 1 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 150 degrees F. 3. Minimum Adhesion: 1,800±200 psi for 4 hours; 3,000 psi for 24 hours. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 20 minute at 70 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi. 7. Hardness: 75 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 8. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 522 using 1-inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.2 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL A. CORROPIPE 3000 (Two-component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove deposits of oil, grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B. Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP10, near-white metal blast cleaning. Blast with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in mix. 3.2 THICKNESS A. External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 40 mils. B. Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSPC-PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings (consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified are not acceptable. 3.3 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A. Equipment: Two-component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B. Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. Temperature of surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. Polyurethane Coatings on Steel Pipe 33 11 16.43 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet requirements of Paragraph 2.1D, Cured Coating Properties, when relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D. Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. E. Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass, one-coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. F. Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush- blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry, high pressure compressed air. G. Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: Ambient Temperature Minimum Full Cure Time Over 70 degrees F 7 days 50 to 70 degrees F 9 days 0 to 50 degrees F 12 days 3.4 JOINTS A. Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B. Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch), maximum of 10 mils (0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.5 INSPECTION A. Project Manager may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B. Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C. Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with Paragraph 3.7, Repair and Field Touchup. 3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION A. When required by Project Manager, provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coatings repairs, and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B. Use nylon straps, padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. See Section 33 11 16.33 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C. Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into trench, conduct visual and holiday inspection. Repair defects in coating system before pipe is installed. Polyurethane Coatings on Steel Pipe 33 11 16.43 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.7 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A. Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. B. Repair Procedure - Holidays: 1. Remove traces of oil,grease, dust,dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper(40 grit). 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. C. Repair Procedure- Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil,grease,dust,dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40 grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D. Repair Procedure-Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: 1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F,apply protective coating repair material to weld, exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Polyurethane Coatings on Steel Pipe 33 11 16.43 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 33 12 13 WATER SERVICE LINES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and installing water service lines required to complete the project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Service fittings shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure rating, unless indicated otherwise. B. Fittings and materials shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C800. C. All service connections shall require service clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. See City Standard Specification Section 022020, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities ". B. Service lines shall be placed by the Contractor as indicated on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Water Service Lines Formatted 33 12 13 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3312 16 BUTTERFLY VALVES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal body butterfly valves and manual valve operators. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. ANSI/ASME B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,Class 25, 125,250 and 800. 2. ANSI/ASME B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 126-Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. D 429-Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3 Inches through 48 Inches for Water and Other Liquids. 2. C 504- Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. General Purpose Butterfly Valves: a. Design Standard: In accordance with AWWA C 504 as modified and complemented herein. b. Class: i. Valves 3"-20": AWWA Class 150B, when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. ii. Valves 24"-72": AWWA Class 75B, when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Design Requirements for General Purpose Butterfly Valves and High Performance Butterfly Valves: a. Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C 504 and its Appendix A, using the following values: i. Maximum Water Velocity: 16 feet per second with valve fully open. ii. Maximum pressure differential across the closed valve in accordance with AWWA Class designation, or as indicated on the Butterfly Valve Schedule. iii. System head loss characteristic, exclusive of valve, proportional to the velocity head. Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 iv. Coefficient for seating and unseating torque, dynamic torque, and bearing friction in accordance with valve manufacturer's published recommendations. b. Valve Disc: Seat in an angular position of 90 degrees to the pipe axis and rotate an angle of 90 degrees between fully open and closed positions. C. Do not supply valves with stops or lugs cast with or mechanically secured to the body of the valve for limiting the disc travel. d. Unacceptable Thrust Bearings: Do not provide valves with thrust bearings exposed to the fluid in the line and consisting of a metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing surface. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Tight shutoff at the AVVWA rated class with flow in either direction. 2. Suitable for the following service conditions: a. Throttling. b. Frequent operation. c. Operation atter long periods of inactivity. d. Installation in any position and flow in either direction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include certified drawings and material specifications in accordance with AVVWA C 504. B. Include description of the method of attachment of the edge to the valve disc. C. Product Data: Include manufacturer's published recommendations for seating and unseating torque coefficient, dynamic torque, and bearing friction for calculation of maximum operating torque. D. Test Reports: Records of tests performed in accordance with AVVWA C 504 requirements. E. Certificates:Affidavit of compliance specified in AVVWA C 504. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Butterfly Valve Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. DeZurik. 2. Henry Pratt Company. 3. Kennedy Valve. 4. VAG GA Industries 5. Val-Matic B. C. Valve Body: 1. Material: Cast-iron ASTM A 126, Class B. a. Flanges: 125 pound ANSI/ASME B16.1. Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 b. Mechanical Joint Ends: In accordance with AVWVA C 110. 2. Body Design: a. Provide short body or long body valves at contractor's option, subject to: i. Location in the piping system so that when the valve is operated, its operation will not interfere with, nor be impaired by, adjacent fittings, valves, equipment or other installations. b. Valves 30 Inches in Nominal Size and Larger:Valve port diameter not reduced more than 1-1/2 inches from the nominal valve diameter. 3. Valve Ends: Compatible with piping system. D. Disc Materials: 1. Stainless steel or nickel-chrome mating edge on a cast-iron or ductile iron disc. E. Shaft and Bearings: 1. Shaft: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Thrust Bearings: Self-lubricating, sleeve type; Teflon lined with fiberglass backing, or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)with phenolic or stainless steel backing. 3. Provide valves with polytetrafluoroethylene with phenolic or stainless steel backing. F. Disc Pins: Secure valve disc to shaft by means of solid, smooth sided, Type 316 stainless steel or monel, taper or dowel pin. 1. Extend pins through shaft and mechanically secure in place. G. Seats: 1. For valves less than 24 inches nominal size, bond or vulcanize seats into the valve body. 2. For valves 24 inches nominal size and larger, mechanically retain seats in the valve body. 3. Achieve retaining effect by an epoxy injection method that expands the seat into the body, or by segmented clamping tee lock ring with adjusting screws. 4. Provide means to prevent nuts and screws used to retain rubber seats from loosening due to vibration or cavitation. 5. Seat Retainers: Type 316 stainless Steel. 6. Resilient Seat:Withstand 75 pound pull when tested in accordance with ASTM D 429, Method B. 7. Do not provide valve with seats retained by a snap ring. 8. Seat Materials: 9. EPDM. H. Valve Packing: 1. Valves 4 Inch to 48 Inch in Nominal Size:Self-adjusting V-type packing or chevron type packing. 2. Valves 54 Inch in Nominal Size and Larger: Adjustable V-type packing with bronze packing gland or self-adjusting V-type packing. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide underground valves 6 inches in nominal size and larger with a totally enclosed worm gear operator mounted on the valve. Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Valve Shaft: Extend from the valve to the operator and be as specified for valve shafts. 2. Operator: Gasketed for watertightness. 3. Provide a 2-inch AWWA operating nut for those valves scheduled for portable operators. B. Manual Operators on Aboveground Butterfly Valves Larger than 6 Inches in Nominal Size: Worm geared; valves 10 inches in nominal size and smaller on low pressure air service may be lever operated. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop coat interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, except as follows: 1. Finished surfaces. 2. Bearing surfaces. 3. Stainless steel components. B. Surface Coatings: 1. Unfinished Surfaces: a. Interior Surfaces: High solids cycloaliphatic amine epoxy. b. Exterior Surfaces: i. Submerged Valves: High solids cycloaliphatic amine epoxy. ii. Buried Valves and Valves in Manholes and Vaults: Coal tar. iii. Other Valves: High solids epoxy and polyurethane system. 2. Polished and Machined Surfaces: Rust-preventive compound. 3. Actuators and Accessories: Rust-inhibitive primer. C. Coating Materials: 1. High Solids Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy: a. Application: Shop apply to iron and steel surfaces, except stainless steel. b. Product: Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval. c. Quality Control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts. i. Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. ii. Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected. d. Additional field coating, other than touchup coating of damaged surfaces, will not be required. i. Perform touchup coating within the recoat time recommended by the paint manufacturer. ii. When touchup coating is required after expiration of the recoat time, precede coating by blast cleaning or other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material for satisfactory adhesion between coats. 2. Rust-inhibitive Primer: a. Rust-inhibitive Primers: Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval. b. Surface Preparation: Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval. Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. Rust-preventive Compound: One of the following or equal: a. Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b. Rust-Oleum, R-9. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal, unless a vertical shaft is required to suit a particular installation, and unless a vertical shaft is indicated on the Drawings. B. Install pipe spools or valve spacers in locations where butterfly valve disc travel may be impaired by adjacent pipe lining, pipe fittings, valves, or other equipment. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. The Butterfly Valve Schedule is not a valve take off list. 1. Only major process control valves are included in the Schedule. B. Abbreviations: The following apply to the Butterfly Valve Schedule: 1. Valve Ends: 2. F= Flanged end. 3. MJ = Mechanical joint end. 4. VIC= Grooved coupling end. 5. AVWVA Class: In accordance with AWWA C 504. 6. Type of Operator: 7. M= Manual operator. 8. E= Electric operator. 9. P= Portable operator(2-inch square AVVWA operating nut). 10. Disc Orientation: 11. V=Vertical 12. H = Horizontal 13. Limit Switches: Provide limit switches on manually operated valves where indicated on the Drawings. C. See Drawings for locations of Butterfly Valves. Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 000uSignEnvelope ID: oo47EFoF-400c-400n+AnoE-000naonFoaoo VALVE BOX W/ COVER EXIST. AND FINISH CRA,DE FILL 0114DER' SLAB DOWN TO UNDISTURBED SOI,L BUITTERFLY VALVE W/ COVER PLAN VIEW SECTION A-,A 11- CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR THE BUTTERFLY VALVE AS REQUIRED AND RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACII)RER, TYPICAL BURIED BUTTERFLY VALVE DETAIL CORPUS TX TYPICAL BURIED ARDURA BUTTERFLY VALVE DETAIL END OFSECTION Butterfly Valves 33 12 16 18131A-0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant C|eunmeUNo.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 3313 00 DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Disinfection of water lines, bacteriological testing, and flushing of lines at completion of treatment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C 651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. B. APHA/AWWA/WEF- Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Disinfection Test Plan Which Details Procedure to be Utilized to Disinfect Water Lines Including: 1. Method and locations of disinfectant application. 2. Locations of sampling points. 3. Method of flushing and location of flushing ports. 4. Method of dechlorination. 5. Disposal location for dechlorinated water. B. Submit Disinfection Reports and Include the Following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project name and location. 3. Treatment subcontractor's name, address, and phone number. 4. Type and form of disinfectant used. 5. Time and date of disinfectant injection start. 6. Time and date of disinfectant injection completion. 7. Test locations. 8. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in parts per million for each outlet tested. 9. Time and date of flushing start. 10. Time and date of flushing completion. 11. Disinfectant residual after flushing in parts per million for each outlet tested. C. Submit Bacteriological Reports and Include the Following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project name and location. 3. Laboratory's name, certification number, address, and phone number. Disinfection of Waterlines 33 13 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Time and date of water sample collection. 5. Name of person collecting samples. 6. Test locations. 7. Time and date of laboratory test start. 8. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 9. Certification that water conforms or fails to conform to bacterial standards of Federal Safe Drinking Water Act. 10. Bacteriologist's signature and bacteriological laboratory's evidence of certification. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bacteriological Laboratory: Certified by state in which Project is located. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and contamination. B. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials. C. Maintain storage room dry and with temperatures as uniform as possible between 60 degrees Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit 1.06 PROTECTION A. Provide necessary signs, barricades, and notices to prevent persons from accidentally consuming water or disturbing system being treated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Disinfectant: Free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING WATER LINES A. Prior to chlorination, remove by flushing or other means, soil, and debris from the water lines. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Verify that water line system is completed and cleaned. B. Start disinfection of water lines when conditions are satisfactory. 3.03 SYSTEM TREATMENT A. Perform disinfection of water lines in accordance with AWWA C 651 and as specified in this Section. B. Starting at outlet closest to water source, bleed water from each outlet until water produces odor of disinfectant. Repeat process at each outlet throughout system. Disinfection of Waterlines 33 13 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Test for disinfectant residual at each of following locations and other locations in accordance with submitted disinfection test plan: D. Ends of piping runs. E. Remote outlets. F. Tanks. G. At least two outlets on each building floor where directed. H. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. I. When disinfectant residual is less than 25 parts per million after 24 hours, repeat system treatment. 3.04 FLUSHING A. Remove disinfectant from water lines. B. Flush water lines with potable water containing no more disinfectant residual than the active distribution system or 1.0 parts per million, whichever is greater. C. Continue flushing until water at designated flushing ports contains disinfectant residual equal to concentration specified above. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of chlorinated water in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and applicable requirements of federal, state, county, and city having jurisdiction over disposal of hazardous wastes in location of the Project and disposal site. 3.06 BACTERIOLOGICAL TEST A. The bacteriological test shall be performed by the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Laboratory and shall be paid by the City. B. Instruct bacteriological laboratory to take water samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing system. C. At the end of 24 hours and before the water main or structure is placed in service, collect bacteriological quality samples at each of following locations and other locations in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater: 1. Where water enters system. 2. Ends of piping runs. 3. Remote outlets. 4. Tanks. 5. At least two outlets on each building floor. D. Analyze water samples in accordance with Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. E. When bacteriological test proves water quality to be unacceptable, repeat disinfection treatment. END OF SECTION Disinfection of Waterlines 33 13 00 18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 CURIOUS ISECTION 40 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install to the required line and grade, all piping together with all fittings and appurtenances, required for a complete installation. Piping to be backfilled and/or encased in concrete is considered to be buried piping. Piping that is not buried is considered to be exposed. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fittings, couplings, connections, sleeves, adapters, harness rods and closure pieces as required to connect pipelines of dissimilar materials and/or sizes herein included under this Section and other concurrent Contracts for a complete installation. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required for the furnishing, installation and testing of all piping as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section and required for the Work. Piping shall be furnished and installed of the material, sizes, classes, and at the locations shown on the Drawings and/or designated in this Section. Piping shall include all fittings, adapter pieces, couplings, closure pieces, harnessing rods, hardware, bolts, gaskets, wall sleeves, wall pipes, hangers, supports, and other associated appurtenances for required connections to equipment, valves, or structures for a complete installation. D. Piping assemblies under 4-inch size shall be generally supported on walls and ceilings, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, being kept clear of openings and positioned above "headroom" space. Where practical, such piping shall be run in neat clusters, plumb and level along walls, and parallel to overhead beams. E. The Contractor shall provide taps on piping where required or shown on the Drawings. Where pipe or fitting wall thicknesses are insufficient to provide the required number of threads, a boss or pipe saddle shall be installed. F. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Connections to existing pipelines. 2. Test excavations necessary to locate or verify existing pipe and appurtenances. 3. Installation of all new pipe and materials required for a complete installation. N 4. Cleaning, testing and disinfecting as refer to the specification section herein. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 01 - General Requirements B. Division 02 - Sitework C. Division 05 - Metals D. Division 26 - Electrical E. Division 46 - Water and Wastewater Equipment 1.03 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner(through the Engineer) a Material Certification stating that the pipe materials and specials furnished under this Section conform to all applicable provisions of the corresponding Specifications. Specifically, the Certification shall state compliance with the applicable standards (ASTM, AWWA, etc.) for fabrication and testing. B. Shop Drawings for major piping (2-inches in diameter and greater) shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 01 -Submittal Register. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 01, the Contractor shall submit laying schedules and detailed Drawings in plan and profile for all piping as specified and shown on the Drawings. C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, complete piping layout, pipe material, sizes, class, locations, necessary dimensions, elevations, supports, hanger details, pipe joints, and the details of fittings including methods of joint restraint. No fabrication or installation shall begin until Shop Drawings are approved by the Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All specials and every length of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, class, and the date of manufacture. Special care in handling shall be exercised during delivery, distribution, and storage of pipe to avoid damage and unnecessary stresses. Damaged pipe will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pipe and specials stored prior to use shall be stored in such a manner as to keep the interior free from dirt and foreign matter. B. Testing of pipe before installation shall be as described in the corresponding ASTM or AWWA Specifications and in the applicable standard specifications listed in the following sections. Testing after the pipe is installed shall be as specified in Part 3. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Joints in piping shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe Schedules. D. All buried piping shall have restrained joints for thrust protection unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. All exposed piping shall have flanged joints, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. E. The Drawings indicate work affecting existing piping and appurtenances. The Contractor shall excavate test pits as required of all connections and crossings which may affect the Contractor's work prior to ordering pipe and fittings to determine sufficient information for ordering materials. The Contractor shall take whatever measurements that are required to complete the work as shown or specified. 2.02 WALL PIPES A. Where wall sleeves or wall pipes occur in walls that are continuously wet on one or both sides, they shall have water stop flanges at the center of the casting or as shown on the Drawings. Ends of wall pipes shall be flange, mechanical joint, plain end, or bell as shown on the Drawings, or as required for connection to the piping. Wall pipes shall be of the same material as the piping that they are connected to. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, waterstop flanges shall conform to the minimum dimensions shown below: Pipe Size Waterstop Waterstop Flange Diameter Flange Thickness 4"- 12" OD + 3.10" 0.50" 14"-24" OD +4.15" 0.75" 30"-36" OD +4.50" 1.00" 42"-48" OD + 5.00" 1.25" 54" OD + 5.90" 1.50" 2.03 SLEEVES A. Unless shown otherwise, all piping passing through walls and floors shall be installed in sleeves or wall castings accurately located before concrete is poured or placed in position during construction of masonry walls. Sleeves passing through floors shall extend from the bottom of the floor to a point 3 inches above the finished floor, unless shown otherwise. Water stop flanges are required on all sleeves located in floors or walls which are continually wet or under hydrostatic pressure on one or both sides of the floor or wall. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Sleeves shall be cast iron, black steel pipe, or fabricated steel in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the details of sleeves he proposes to install; and no fabrication or installation thereof shall take place until the Engineer's approval is obtained. Steel sleeves shall be fabricated of structural steel plate in accordance with the standards and procedures of AISC and AWS. Steel sleeve surfaces shall receive a commercial sandblast cleaning and then be shop painted in accordance with Division 09. C. When shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, the annular space between the installed piping and sleeve shall be completely sealed against a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. Seals shall be mechanically interlocked, solid rubber links, trade name "Link-Seal", as manufactured by Garlock Pipeline Technologies (GPT) or equal. Rubber link, seal-type, size, and installation thereof, shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For non-fire rated walls and floors, pressure plate shall be glass reinforced nylon plastic with EPDM rubber seal and 304 stainless steel bolts and nuts. For fire rated walls and floors, two independent seals shall be provided consisting of low carbon steel, zinc galvanized pressure plates, silicon rubber seals and low carbon steel, zinc galvanized bolts and nuts. D. Cast iron mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be Clow# 1429, as manufactured by the Clow Corp., or equal. Mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be provided with suitable gasket, follower ring, and bolts to affect a proper seal. In general, sleeves installed in walls, floors, or roofs against one side of which will develop a hydrostatic pressure, or through which leakage of liquid will occur, shall be so sealed. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange. 2.04 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING SADDLES A. Tapping sleeves shall be similar to JCM Industries, Mueller Outlet Seal, American Uniseal or Kennedy Square Seal. All sleeves shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. All sleeves larger than twelve (12) inches shall be ductile iron. All taps shall be machine drilled; no burned taps will be allowed. B. Tapping saddles may be used on mains sixteen (16) inches and larger where the required tap size does not exceed one-half the size of the main (i.e. 8-inch tapping saddle for use on a 16-inch main). Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of ductile iron providing a factor of safety of at least 2.5 at a working pressure of 250 psi. Saddles shall be equipped with a standard AWWA C-110-77 flange connection on the branch. Sealing gaskets shall be "O" ring type, high quality molded rubber having an approximate seventy durometer hardness, placed into a groove on the curved surface of the tapping saddles. Straps shall be of alloy steel. The tapping saddle shall be the JCM Industries, American tapping saddle, U.S. Pipe tapping saddle, or equal. All taps shall be machine cut, no burned taps will be allowed. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.05 UNIONS A. For ductile iron, carbon steel, and grey cast iron pipes assembled with threaded joints and malleable iron fittings, unions shall conform to ANSI B16.39. B. For copper piping, unions shall have ground joints and conform to ANSI B16.18. C. For PVC and CPVC piping, unions shall be socket weld type with Viton O-ring. 2.06 THERMOPLASTIC TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Thermoplastic tubing shall be manufactured from polyallomor tubing. Tubing shall be protected from ultraviolet radiation degradation with a black coating or integral color conforming to ASTM D-1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 3. Fittings and connectors used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the flareless tube type constructed of brass conforming to SAE CA377, SAE CA360 or equal. Brass sleeves shall be used. B. Assembly of the thermoplastic tubing shall consist of pushing the tubing into the fitting and hand tightening the nut with final tightening with a wrench. Care shall be taken not to overtighten the nut. Plastic tube racks and bend holders shall be provided for holding the tubing in position. Needle valves used with thermoplastic tubing shall be the globe type constructed with a brass body, stem and seat and Buna-N "O"-ring seals. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Thermoplastic tubing, shall be the Impolene (polyallomor) system and needle valves, fittings and connectors shall be the Poly-Flo with 261 UB Universal Nut and Sleeve system as manufactured by Imperial Eastman, or equal. 2.07 HEAT TRACED PIPING A. Exposed pipes to be insulated shall also be protected from freezing by heat tracing. Freeze protection heat tracing shall consist of twin 16 AWG copper brass wires with a semiconductor polymer core where electrical resistance varies with temperature. The heat tracing shall have a fluoropolymer outer jacket for corrosion resistance. The heat tracing shall be rated for three (3) watts per foot output, self-regulating with a maximum temperature of 150°F, equal to a Chromalox No. SRL3-1CT383400. Maximum length for tape shall be 300 feet for each circuit. Temperature controller shall be provided to sense pipe temperature to determine on or off condition of the heat tracing. Temperature control shall be equal to a Chromalox No. RTBC-2-384729. The heat tracing system shall operate on 120 VAC. See Drawings for installation detail. Heat tracing of piping shall be provided as specified in Section 40 06 20 —Schedules. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be installed by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard practice for piping installation as shown on the Drawings, specified or recommended by Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 the pipe manufacturer. Proper tools and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and installing of the pipe and fittings shall be used. Great care shall be taken to prevent any pipe coating from being damaged on the inside or outside of the pipe and fittings. All pieces shall be carefully examined for defects, and no piece shall be installed which is known to be cracked, damaged, or otherwise defective. If any defective pieces should be discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound one in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor and at his own expense. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean until they are accepted in the complete work. All piping connections to equipment shall be provided with unions or coupling flanges located so that piping may be readily dismantled from the equipment. At certain applications, Dresser, Victaulic, or equal, couplings may also be used. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Unless otherwise shown or approved, provided a minimum headroom clearance under all piping of 7 feet 6 inches. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all waste and vent piping shall pitch uniformly at a 1/4-inch per foot grade and accessible cleanouts shall be furnished and installed as shown and as required by local building codes. Installed length of waste and vent piping shall be determined from field measurements in lieu of the Drawings. C. All excavation shall be made in such a manner and to such widths as will provide ample room for properly installing the pipe and permit thorough compaction of backfill around the pipe. The minimum trench widths shall be in strict accordance with the "Trench Width Excavation Limits" as shown on the Drawings. All excavation and trenching shall be done in strict accordance with these specifications and all applicable parts of the OSHA Regulations, 29CFR 1926, Subpart P. D. ALL EXCAVATION REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE UNCLASSIFIED. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ROCK EXCAVATION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF PIPE OR STRUCTURES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. E. Enlargements of the trench shall be made as needed to give ample space for operations at pipe joints. The width of the trench shall be limited to the maximum dimensions shown on the Drawings, except where a wider trench is needed for the installation of and work within sheeting and bracing. Except where otherwise specified, excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides which will cause disturbance of the subgrade, damage to adjacent areas, or endanger the lives or safety of persons in the vicinity. F. Hand excavation shall be employed wherever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary for the protection of existing utilities, poles, trees, pavements, or obstructions. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 G. No greater length of trench in any location shall be left open, in advance of pipe laying, than shall be authorized or directed by the Engineer and, in general, such length shall be limited to approximately one hundred (100) feet. The Contractor shall excavate the trenches to the full depth, width and grade indicated on the Drawings including the relevant requirements for bedding. The trench bottoms shall then be examined by the Engineer as to the condition and bearing value before any pipe is laid or bedding is placed. H. No pressure testing shall be performed until the pipe has been properly backfilled in place. All pipe passing through walls and/or floors shall be provided with wall pipes or sleeves in accordance with the specifications and the details shown on the Drawings. All wall pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall have a water stop located in the center of the wall. Each wall pipe shall be of the same class, thickness, and interior coating as the piping to which it is joined. All buried wall pipes shall have a coal tar outside coating on exposed surfaces. I. JOINT DEFLECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 75 PERCENT OF THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED DEFLECTION. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 02 20 20— Excavation Backfill Utilities, and as specified herein. Maximum trench widths shall conform to the Trench Width Excavation Limits shown on the Drawings. All exposed, submerged, and buried piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of hangers, concrete piers, pipe supports, or otherwise as may be required by the location. J. Following proper preparation of the trench subgrade, pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench so as to prevent dirt and other foreign substances from gaining entrance into the pipe and fittings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ANY OF THE MATERIALS BE DROPPED OR DUMPED INTO THE TRENCH. K. Water shall be kept out of the trench until jointing and backfilling are completed. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely closed so that no water, earth, or other substance will enter the pipes, fitting, or valves. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged, or capped, and anchored as required. L. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and/or contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship. Pipes crossing within a vertical distance of less than or equal to one (1) foot shall be encased and supported with concrete at the point of crossing to prevent damage to the adjacent pipes as shown on the Drawings. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 M. The full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon the bed of the trench, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells, couplings, joints, and fittings. Before joints are made, each pipe shall be well bedded on a solid foundation; and no pipe shall be brought into position until the preceding length has been thoroughly bedded and secured in place. Pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid by the Contractor at his own expense. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work. N. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe convenient handling and laying of pipe shall be used and shall in general agree with manufacturer's recommendations. O. AT THE CLOSE OF EACH WORK DAY, THE END OF THE PIPELINE SHALL BE TIGHTLY SEALED WITH A CAP OR PLUG SO THAT NO WATER, DIRT, OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCE MAY ENTER THE PIPELINE, AND THIS PLUG SHALL BE KEPT IN PLACE UNTIL PIPE LAYING IS RESUMED. P. During the laying of pipe, each pipe manufacturer shall provide his own supervisor to instruct the Contractor's pipe laying personnel in the correct procedure to be followed. Q. Ordinarily only full lengths of pipe (as furnished by the pipe manufacturer) shall be used exceptions: closure pieces at manholes and areas where joint deflection is required. R. For gravity sewer installations, the Contractor shall use a laser device to maintain the trench and pipe alignment. The laser device shall be re-checked for correct elevation and pipe alignment prior to pipe installation if the device is left in the pipe overnight. Corrected invert elevations at each manhole and any adjustments will be coordinated and approved by the Engineer. S. ALL PIPING SHALL HAVE TYPE "A" BEDDING AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN OR INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 3.02 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. All piping shall be properly flushed and tested unless specifically exempted elsewhere in the Specifications or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Gas pipelines shall be flushed and tested with compressed air. All other liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed and tested with water. The Contractor shall furnish and install all means and apparatus necessary for getting the air or water into the pipeline for flushing and testing including pumps, compressors, gauges, and meters, any necessary plugs and caps, and any required blow-off piping and fittings, etc., complete with any necessary reaction blocking to prevent pipe movement during the flushing and testing. All pipelines shall be flushed and tested in such lengths or sections as agreed upon among the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. Test pressures shall be as specified in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe Schedules and shall be measured at the lowest point of the pipe segment being tested. The Contractor shall give the Owner and Engineer reasonable notice of the time when Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 he intends to test portions of the pipelines. The Engineer reserves the right, within reason, to request flushing and testing of any section or portion of a pipeline. B. The Contractor shall provide water for all flushing and testing of liquid conveying pipelines. Raw water or non-potable water may be used for flushing and testing liquid pipelines not connected to the potable water system. Only potable water shall be used for flushing and testing the potable water system. C. Gas piping shall be completely and thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, and dirt prior to start-up of the air or gas system. D. At the conclusion of the installation work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new liquid conveying pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered the pipe during the construction period. If after this cleaning any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Liquid conveying pipelines shall be flushed at the rate of at least 2.5 feet per second for a duration suitable to the Engineer or shall be flushed by other methods approved by the Engineer. E. Gas piping shall be flushed by removing end caps from the distribution lines and operating one (1) compressor, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. After flushing, all air piping shall be pressure and leak tested prior to coating and wrapping of welded joints. Immediately upon successful completion of the pressure and leak test, welded joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, scale, rust, and discoloration and coated in accordance with the Specifications. G. All process air piping shall be leak tested by applying a soap solution to each joint. Leak tests shall be conducted with one (1) blower in service at normal operating pressure. H. During testing the piping shall show no leakage. Any leaks or defective piping disclosed by the leakage test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. I. All buried process air piping shall be pressurized to 25 psig and tested for leaks by applying a soap solution to each joint. The air supply shall be stopped and the pipe pressure monitored. System pressure shall not fall by more than 0.5% of the 25 psig test pressure over a one-hour test period. Should the system fail to hold the required pressure for one hour, the cause shall be determined and corrected and the test repeated until a successful test of the entire system is obtained. J. Field leakage tests shall be performed for all submerged process air piping. The procedure shall consist of operating the system under clear nonpotable water for visual identification of all leaks. All field leakage tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. All submerged piping shall be installed free of any leaks. Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 K. After flushing, all liquid conveying pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested at the test pressure specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe Schedules. The procedure used for the hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with the requirements of AVWVA C600. Each pipeline shall be filled with water for a period of no less than 24 hours and then subjected to the specified test pressure for 2 hours. During this test, exposed piping shall show no leakage. Allowable leakage in buried piping shall be in accordance with AVWVA C600. L. Any leaks or defective pipe disclosed by the hydrostatic test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight. M. After flushing, all gas piping shall be leak tested in accordance with all local codes and regulations and in conformance with the recommendations or requirements of any National Institute or Association for the specific service application. 3.03 DISINFECTION A. All pipe and fitting connected to and forming a part of a potable water supply shall be disinfected in accordance with the procedures described in AVWVA C 651. Disinfection shall also be in accordance with the requirements of the TCEQ and the Owner. B. Disinfection shall be accomplished after the pipe has been flushed, if applicable, and passed the hydrostatic test. Such piping shall be filled with 50 parts per million (PPM) of chlorine and held in contact for not less than 24 hours. Final tests after 24 hours contact time shall show a minimum residual chlorine content of 10 ppm in all parts of the system. Disinfection shall be repeated as often as necessary, and as directed by the Engineer and/or the Owner until the minimum residual chlorine content of 10 ppm has been reached. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of satisfactory bacteriological tests and furnish them to the Owner before the request is made for acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall furnish and install, at his own expense, all means and apparatus necessary for performing the disinfection. The chlorine solution shall be thoroughly flushed out prior to placing the new sections of pipe in service. The Contractor is cautioned that the spent chlorine solution must be disposed of in such a way as not to be detrimental to animal, plant, or fish life. Chlorine residual tests will be made after flushing to assure that residual is not in excess of 1 ppm at any point in system. 3.04 PAINTING AND COLOR-CODING SYSTEM A. All exposed piping specified shall be color coded in accordance with the Owner's standard color designation system for pipe recognition. In the absence of a standard color designation system, the Engineer will establish a standard color designation for each piping service category from color charts submitted by the Contractor. END OF SECTION Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 05 07 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and design calculations required to provide pipe supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 03- Concrete B. Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pipe support submittals will not be reviewed prior to review and acceptance of pipe layout submittal. Pipe support submittal shall be fully coordinated with approved pipe layout submittal. Contractor shall use approved piping layout submittal drawings to show proposed pipe support type and location with accurate dimensions to demonstrate that supports meet all specified requirements. B. Applicable and associated cut sheets and drawings for materials and support components shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings in accordance with or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 01 - Submittal Register, Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and other referenced Sections above. 1. Catalog cut information on all system components such as pipe supports, hangers, guides, anchors, and channel-type supports. 2. Drawings of the piping support systems, locating each support, brace, hanger, guide, component and anchor. Identify support, hanger, guide and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number. 3. With each piping support system Shop Drawing, the Contractor shall attach calculations prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located, showing that the piping support system complies with the specified requirements, including all building code and seismic code requirements pertaining to support of piping and other non-structural components. 4. Table showing the manufacturer's recommended hanger support spacing for PVC and CPVC pipe for the services listed in Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe Schedules. PIPE SUPPORTS 04 05 07 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all piping support systems unless noted otherwise herein. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing a pipe support design sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Standard details for pipe supports have been included on the Drawings to define minimum requirements as to the types of Contractor designed pipe supports that will be acceptable. B. Where a specific location or type of support is shown on the Drawings, the location and type shall be incorporated in the Contractor's pipe support design. C. Existing piping support systems to support new piping shall only be used if the Contractor can show and demonstrate by submitting supporting calculations that they are adequate for the additional load imposed by the new piping, or if they are strengthened to support the additional load. D. Contractor's pipe support design should include, but not be limited to, the following criteria and loads imposed on the piping system: 1. Thrust Loads based on the design pressures as specified in Piping Schedules in Section 40 06 20 — Process Pipe Schedules. Pipe support design shall not utilize process equipment for thrust restraint or support of piping loads. 2. Dead loads and live loads per the latest version of ASCE/SEI 7 or the local building code if more stringent. Loads shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Weight of pipe b. Weight of pipe contents C. Weight of insulation d. Wind loads 3. Loads associated with thermal expansion and contraction of the piping system over the full range of potential temperatures the piping system could experience that should include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Ambient temperature range per local historical weather data (historic high and low obtained from NOAA) b. Process operating temperature range PIPE SUPPORTS 04 05 07 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Exposure to sunlight where applicable 4. Additional pipe support design considerations shall include the following: a. A minimum safety factor of 2 or as approved by the Engineer, based upon the yield strength of the support material, shall be used for pipe supports, braces, hangers, and guides as well as for beam and column members used in channel-type support systems. b. The horizontal pipe hanger and/or floor support spacing shall be as recommended by the pipe and/or hanger manufacturer but shall not exceed 10 feet on center unless indicated otherwise herein or on the Drawings. C. The design, sizing and spacing of anchor bolts, including concrete anchors, shall be based on withstanding shear and pullout loads imposed by loading at each particular support. The minimum anchor bolt size shall be %2 inches in diameter. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of steel hangers and/or supports, concrete piers, supplemental lateral bracing components, pre-fabricated brackets, or otherwise as may be required by the location and forces applied per governing code, including gravity and lateral forces from earthquake and/or wind (if outdoors). Generally, concrete supports shall be used where pipe centerline is less than 3 feet above floor, and hangers above 6 feet unless specified or shown otherwise. Supports shall be not more than 10 feet on center for steel and cast iron, 5 feet on center for plastic unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by the specific manufacturer. All necessary inserts or appurtenances shall be furnished and installed in the concrete or structures for adequately securing hangers and supports to the structure. Refer to Standard Detail Drawings. 1. Metal pipe supports indicated as standard type pipe hangers are designed and detailed for gravity loading only. Resulting lateral loads from wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads per code, or special loading conditions during construction, shall be applied to the pipe in accordance with the governing building code. Supplemental lateral stiffening members (when necessary) shall be provided along pipe or at gravity supports using appropriate supplemental members and connections when required by calculations. The Contractor shall include design calculations and details with all pipe hangar and support submissions for review by the Engineer. The main structure and structural components that will support the pipe hangers and other appurtenant components of the facility have been designed to resist all resulting secondary lateral loading from pipe hangers and other non-structural members for gravity and resulting lateral loads. B. Hangers and supports shall conform to the following requirements: PIPE SUPPORTS 04 05 07 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. All fabricated metal hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after installation. Different types of hangers and supports along a pipe length, including bends, shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap, or perforated bar hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from other piping. 3. Vertical piping shall be properly supported at each floor and between floors by stays or braces to prevent rattling and vibration. 4. Supports and hangers for plastic and FRP piping shall include wide saddles or bands as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer to distribute load and thus avoid localized deformation of the pipe. 5. Hanger and supports shall prevent contact between dissimilar metals by use of copper plated, rubber, vinyl coated or stainless-steel hangers. 6. Ferrous pipes to be painted shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00— Painting and Coating. Ferrous pipes that require painting or galvanizing shall be supported by galvanized hangers and supports. Stainless steel piping shall be supported by stainless steel saddles and straps (if required). 7. Plastic piping shall be supported by plastic coated steel hangers and supports. 8. Hangers and supports shall provide for thermal expansion throughout the full operating temperature range. 9. Expansion and adhesive type anchors used for pipe hangers and supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Metallic hangers and supports may be standard make by Anvil International, Inc., "Witch" by Carpenter& Paterson, Ltd., B-Line Systems, Inc., or equal; and data on the types and sizes to be used shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval. Metallic support system brackets, rods, support clips, clevis hangers, hardware, etc. shall be cast iron or welded steel construction. All gravity type hangers and supports shall be restrained laterally to resist seismic loading and other loading as required by the governing code. D. Non-metallic support system shall be a heavy-duty channel framing system. Channel frames shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process using corrosion grade polyester or vinylester resins. All fiberglass construction shall include suitable ultraviolet inhibitors for UV exposure and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84. Piping accessories, pipe clamps, clevis hangers, support posts, support racks, fasteners, etc., shall be constructed of vinylester or polyurethane resin. Non-metallic support systems shall be standard make Aickinstrut by Aickinstrut, Inc., Unistrut Fiberglass by Unistrut, Inc., Enduro Fiberglass Systems, or equal. The Contractor shall submit data on the types and sizes of approval. Unless otherwise shown or specified the Contractor PIPE SUPPORTS 04 05 07 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 shall provide support spacings in the conformance with the pipe and support system manufacturer's requirements. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. B. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, flow meters and appurtenances independently of the connected piping. C. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. D. Support piping at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints, expansion joints, and couplings, and where shown. E. The Contractor shall not install piping supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. F. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. G. Install pipe anchors (fixed supports and/or guides) where shown and/or as may otherwise be required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. The Contractor may install additional pipe anchors and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing location, pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted. END OF SECTION PIPE SUPPORTS 04 05 07 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 05 31 PVC AND CPVC PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 1785, D 1784 and F 441, "normal impact" pipe, Schedule 80 as specified. B. Fittings used with this pipe shall be socket type or flanged type as specified herein, in Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe Schedules, or indicated on the Drawings. Plastic piping shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific installation. No field bending or distortion of the pipe will be permitted. C. PVC pipe shall be Type 1 Grade 1 conforming to ASTM D 1784 and D 1785. Fittings shall conform to the following standard specifications: 1. Socket Type: (Schedule 80); ASTM D 2467 D. Provide flanged fittings of the same material as the specified pipe and material conforming to ANSI B16.5 at all valves and equipment except at true (double) union valves. Flange gaskets shall be natural rubber or other material fully compatible with the fluid being conveyed. Where flanged piping is used with chemical systems, the gasket material shall conform to the requirements of the following table. Flange bolts shall be type 316 stainless steel minimum, with higher grade materials used where necessary for fluid (chemical) compatibility. Chemical Elastomer Material Ammonium Sulfate(LAS) EPDM, FKM Chlorine Solution (from gas) FKM Sodium Hydroxide (Caustic) EPDM 0 Hydrofluosilicic Acid FKM N O_ O n W PVC AND CPVC PIPE 40 05 31 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 E. Solvent cement for socket type joints shall conform to ASTM D 2564 for PVC pipe and fittings. Solvent cement for chemical service shall be Weld-On 724 as manufactured by IPS Corporation, or equal. F. PVC pressure rated pipe (PR 160) shall be in sizes between 1 1/2 inches and 12 inches and shall conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241 and shall be a minimum of SDR 26 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures determined by the depth of burial in the field. 1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying lengths shall be 20-feet (1± inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths. Reruns of reclaimed materials shall not be accepted. 2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push-on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM 2672. Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 135 psi for all sizes when tested in accordance with ASTM D2241. 4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 500 psi applied in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced in ASTM D2241. 5. The pipe shall be designed to pass for 1000 hours a sustained test pressure of 340 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1598, as referenced in ASTM D2241. G. Fittings for PR 160, SDR 26 shall be PVC and designed for the pipe being supplied. H. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2661. Pipe and fittings shall have socket type couplings with solvent cement joints. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2235. I. Type PSM polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034 with a maximum SDR of 35. Pipe and fittings shall have bell and spigot ends with O-ring rubber gasketed, compression type joints. Joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Specification D 3212. Reruns of reclaimed materials shall not be accepted. Unless indicated otherwise, PVC wall pipes shall be provided for all piping passing through exterior walls. Wall pipes shall have a water stop solvent-welded to the pipe. Each wall pipe shall be of the same class and type as the piping to which it is joined. J. Perforated and closed drainage pipe and fittings shall be rigid PVC pipe, Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown or specified with solvent welded type joints, or approved equal. PVC AND CPVC PIPE 40 05 31 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Pipe shall be slotted or have two rows of 1/4-inch diameter holes spaced 4-inches apart along the circumference of the pipe. Longitudinal spacing of holes shall be 5-inches maximum. 2.02 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CPVC shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 1785, D 1784 and F 441, "normal impact" pipe, Schedule 80 or as specified. B. Fittings used with this pipe shall be socket type or flanged type as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Plastic piping shall be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific installation. No field bending or distortion of the pipe will be permitted. C. CPVC pipe shall be Type 4, Grade 1, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D 1784 and ASTM F 441. CPVC fittings shall be socket type conforming to ASTM F 439. D. Solvent cement for socket type joints shall conform to ASTM F 493 for CPVC pipe and fittings. Solvent cement for chemical service shall be Weld-On 724 as manufactured by IPS Corporation, or equal. 2.03 REINFORCED THERMOPLASTIC HOSE AND FITTINGS A. Reinforced thermoplastic hose shall be clear type, reinforced with polyester yarn. Hose material shall be PVC, EVA (Ethyl Vinyl Acetate), or Low-Density Polyethylene, depending on the application, as indicated in Section 40 06 20— Process Pipe Schedules. Hose shall be rated for the following working pressures: Internal Diameter Minimum Working Pressure(at 68°F) '/2" 200 psi(75 psi at 150°F) 1" 125 psi(50 psi at 150°F) 1'/2" 100 psi 2" 75 psi B. Hoses shall be continuous from the source to the discharge unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Splices shall not be allowed unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If allowed, splices shall occur only in handholes or manholes. Connections and splices, if allowed, shall be barb and clamp type using materials that are compatible with the chemical being conveyed. C. Reinforced thermoplastic hose shall be a manufactured product of Parker Nexgen or equal. PVC AND CPVC PIPE 40 05 31 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Wetted materials shall be completely resistant to corrosion by the specified chemicals. Hose manufacturer shall guarantee that the hose is suitable for the intended service. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall be laid and joints assembled according to the respective manufacturer's recommendation. PVC pipe installation shall comply with applicable sections of the Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association Recommended Standard Specifications. B. Plastic piping shall not be installed when the temperature is less than 60 degrees F except as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION PVC AND CPVC PIPE 40 05 31 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 05 32 DUAL CONTAINED PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 — Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 40 05 31 — PVC/CPVC Pipe 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to the guidelines for submittals as described in Section 01 33 00— Submittal Procedures, the manufacturer shall include details of interstitial support locations and arrangement. High point vent and low point drain details will be required. The manufacturer shall provide documentation that shows whether anchors and/or expansion loops are required. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Product Pipe-Inside Pipe/Carrier Pipe B. Containment Pipe-Outside Pipe 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Double containment piping shall be used for direct buried sample piping as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Each piping system shall consist of a product pipe supported within a containment pipe. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. The double-containment piping systems shall be of materials and pressure ratings as specified below. System product pipe shall be capable of transporting stated media under continuous exposure for 50 years. System containment pipe shall be capable of transporting stated chemical in the event of product pipe failure. 0 N O J B. Service Conditions N 0 Dual Contained Piping System 40 05 32 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1. Product pipe for all chemicals shall be PVC or CPVC, with a test pressure of 150 psi. Containment pipe shall be PVC, with a test pressure of 100 psi. Design temperature range for the piping shall be 0 to 150 degrees F. Both product and containment piping shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 31 — PVC/CPVC Pipe. All piping shall be butt or socket welded and conform to the guidelines specified in Division 15. Product and containment piping shall be sized as shown in the table below. Chemical Product Pipe Size Containment Pipe Product Maximum nominal Size nominal Operating Pressure Sample 3/" 2-inch 150 psi C. System Configuration 1. The double containment piping system shall consist of the product pipe suspended within a containment pipe. Interstitial supporting devices shall be used to center and support the product piping. Such supports shall be made from PVC or other suitable material. The manufacturer shall be responsible for proper arrangement and spacing of interstitial supports. 2. The system shall have suitable drains and vents to facilitate manual draining of the secondary containment pipe to inspect for leaks. All valves, vents and other fittings shall be constructed of PVC. All pre-fabricated pressure fittings/components shall be pretested by the manufacturer 3. Internal piping anchors and/or expansion loops shall be installed on long straight runs of pipe to control piping contraction/expansion, as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE TERMINATION FITTINGS A. Dual contained piping shall terminate using end seals or blind flanges. Pipe termination fittings shall be used in areas in which containment pipe is to be capped but the carrier pipe is continued. B. Pipe termination fittings shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers have been approved for the double-containment piping: 1. Guardian by Chemtrol IPEX 2. Spears 3. ASAHI/AMERICA Dual Contained Piping System 40 05 32 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 END OF SECTION Dual Contained Piping System 40 05 32 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 05 68.13 PVC AND CPVC VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Valves provided for chemical service shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended service. PVC valves shall be provided in PVC piping and CPVC valves shall be provided in CPVC piping. B. PVC valve bodies shall be constructed of PVC which shall meet or exceed the requirements of cell classification 12454 according to ASTM D1784. CVPC valve bodies shall be constructed of CPVC which shall meet or exceed the requirements of cell classification 23447 according to ASTM D1784. C. Materials of construction of other valve components shall be as specified below for the particular type of valve. Acceptable materials of construction of elastomers for chemical service shall be as follows: Chemical Elastomer Material Ammonium Sulfate(LAS) EPDM, FKM Chlorine Solution (from gas) FKM Sodium Hydroxide(Caustic) EPDM Hydrofluosilicic Acid FKM D. All flanged valves shall be flat face flanged end type conforming to ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern for 150 Ib. flanges. 2.02 PVC/CPVC BALL VALVES A. Ball valves shall be true union design with socket, flanged or threaded ends as required and as specified in Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe Schedules. All valves shall be full- o port design and allow for bi-directional flow. Valve stems shall contain double o-ring seals. Valves shall have removable handles and integrally molded mounting features for actuator installation. Ball valves shall have a pressure rating of 232 psi at 70°F. PVC AND CPVC VALVES 40 05 68.13 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. Valve bodies, stems, balls, and unions shall be constructed of PVC or CPVC as specified above. Ball seats shall be made of PTFE, and o-ring seals shall be as specified above. C. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, Chemtrol, IPEX, Hayward Flow Control, or equal. D. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite service shall be vented, with a single minimum 3/16" hole factory-drilled into the ball to vent in the upstream direction when the ball is in the closed position. Valves shall be color coded or marked to indicate vented ball design. 2.03 PVC/CPVC SWING CHECK VALVES A. Swing check valves shall be single-disc design with pivoting swing arm/disc clapper assembly and flanged ends. Valves shall be full flow, gravity operated, and suitable for either horizontal or vertical applications. Valves shall be capable of top entry to facilitate cleaning and repair without removal from the line. Swing check valves shall be pressure rated for 150 psi at 70°F. B. Valve bodies, bonnets, swing arms, and discs shall be constructed of PVC or CPVC as specified above. O-ring seals and shutters shall be as specified above. C. Swing check valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, IPEX, Hayward Flow Control, or equal. 2.04 PVC/CPVC BALL CHECK VALVES A. Ball check valves shall be true union design with socket, flanged or threaded ends as required and as specified in Section 40 06 20 - Process Pipe Schedules. Primary seat shall be square-cut design to ensure proper ball seating. Valves shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical applications. Ball check valves shall be pressure rated for 150 psi at 70°F. B. Valve bodies, balls, end connectors, and unions shall be constructed of PVC or CPVC as specified above. O-ring seals shall be as specified above. C. Ball check valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, Chemtrol, IPEX, Hayward Flow Control, or equal. 2.05 PVC/CPVC NEEDLE VALVES A. Needle valves shall be provided for accurate flow control applications. Valves shall have integrated stem/seat design and have fine pitch stem threads for precise adjustment. Valve ends shall be threaded or flanged. Needle valves shall be pressure rated for 150 psi at 70°F. B. Valve bodies shall be PVC as specified above, seats shall be PFTE, and o-ring seals shall be as specified above. PVC AND CPVC VALVES 40 05 68.13 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Needle valves shall be as manufactured by Chemtrol, Hayward Flow Control, or equal. PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PVC AND CPVC VALVES 40 05 68.13 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 06 20 PROCESS PIPE SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Reference Section 40 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 PIPING SCHEDULES A. Piping requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Piping Schedules. In the absence of a specified test pressure, pipe shall be tested at the greater of: 1) 150 percent of working pressure as determined by the Engineer or 2) 10 psig, unless the Schedule indicates no test is required. B. If the pipe material is not shown on the Piping Schedule or otherwise specified, the following materials shall be used. PIPE SIZE MATERIAL TYPE OF JOINT CLASS/DESIGN TEST PRESSURE FLANGED(EXPOSED) CLASS 53 4-IN AND LARGER DIP (1) RESTRAINED(BURIED) PRESSURE CLASS 350 LESS THAN 4-IN PVC/CPVC(2) SOCKET SCH 80 (1) (1)Test at 150 percent of working pressure or 10 psi,whichever is greater. (2)For all PVC/CPVC designations,if piping is exposed to direct sunlight or if heat tracing is required,CPVC shall be used. Otherwise, PVC shall be used. 1.03 VALVE SCHEDULES A. All valves shall be tagged by the manufacturer according to the control valve designations listed in this Section. B. Valves not listed in this Section shall be manually operated, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Process Pipe Schedules 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 40 06 20 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 WATER TREATMENT PLANT PIPING SCHEDULE BURIED PIPING EXPOSED PIPING DESIGN PRESSURE(PSI) TYPE OF CLASS/ TYPE OF CLASS/ HEAT WORKING FIELD PIPE DESIGNATIONS MATERIAL JOINT DESIGN JOINT DESIGN TRACE' TEST PROCESS DRAIN, <4" SOCKET/ PD GRAVITY PVC/CPVC, SOCKET SCH 80 FLANGED SCH 80 NO NA NA <4" SOCKET/ S SAMPLE PVC/CPVC, SOCKET SCH 80 SCH 80 NO 100 150 FLANGED <4" SOCKET/ PVC/CPVC3 FLANGED V VENT SOCKET SCH 80 SCH 80 N/A NA NA 1)Provide heat tracing and insulation as specified in Sections 40 05 00 and 40 42 13 on all exposed outdoor piping indicated. 2)For all PVC/CPVC designations,if heat tracing is required,CPVC shall be used.Otherwise,PVC shall be used. 3)Flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Process Pipe Schedules 40 06 20 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 CHEMICAL PIPING SCHEDULE BURIED PIPING EXPOSED PIPING DESIGN PRESSURE(PSI) TYPE OF CLASS/ TYPE OF CLASS/ ' HEAT FIELD PIPE DESIGNATIONS MATERIAL JOINT DESIGN JOINT DESIGN INSULATION TRACE' WORKING TEST CS CHLORINE SOLUTION PVC SOCKET SCH 80 SOCKET/ SCH 80 NO NO 100 125 FLANGED SODIUM HYDROXIDE/ <4" SOCKET/ CAS CAUSTIC PVC/CPVCZ SOCKET SCH 80 FLANGED SCH 80 YES YES 60 90 F HYDROFLUOSILICIC PVC SOCKET SCH 80 SOCKET/ SCH 80 NO NO 60 90 ACID FLANGED LAS LIQUID AMMONIUM PVC SOCKET SCH 80 SOCKET/ SCH 80 NO NO 60 90 SULFATE FLANGED 1)Provide heat tracing and insulation as specified in Sections 40 05 00 and 40 42 13 on all exposed outdoor piping indicated. 2)For all PVC/CPVC designations,if heat tracing is required,CPVC shall be used.Otherwise,PVC shall be used. 3)Flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Process Pipe Schedules 40 06 20 18131A-O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 6/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 40 42 13 INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install insulation as shown on the Drawings or otherwise specified. Insulation shall not be installed until piping has been field tested and approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall protect the insulation from moisture at all times. B. Reference Section 46 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATED PROCESS/CHEMICAL PIPING A. Fiberglass insulation shall be Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp., Fiberglass 25ASJ/SSC; Certain Teed Products Corporation, Certain Teed snap-on ASJ/SSL; or equal. Insulation shall be heavy density sectional pipe insulation with vapor barrier and self-sealing lap. Minimum density insulation density shall be 6 pounds per cubic foot. Contractor shall use manufacturer's recommended adhesives and tape for jointing material. Fittings shall be molded fiberglass. Minimum insulation thickness shall be 1-1/2 inches for 4" diameter pipe and larger, and 1 inch for smaller pipe. B. Weatherproof insulation jacket for process piping shall be Certain Teed Products Corporation; Childers Products Company, Lock On and Slip On; or equal. Jacket shall be smooth embossed aluminum metal jacket with minimum thickness 0.016 inches thick for interior installations and at least 0.031 inches thick for exterior installations. Fastening shall use preformed "2"-lock seam with 2 inch butt strap with sealant. Bonds shall be 1/2 inch aluminum with wing seals. Fittings shall be prefabricated 0.016/0.031 inches thickness aluminum. 1. Contractor shall install weather proofing for outdoor sodium hydroxide piping. The field applied jacket with moisture barrier shall be slipped around pipe into preformed 2-lock position. Butt next jacket section adjacent to previous section leaving 3/8 inch gap. Place preformed 2 inch butt strap with sealant over the seam and secure with 1/2 inch aluminum band and wing seal. Contractor shall install preformed fittings identical in composition to pipe jacketing at all fittings. N N C. Insulation fitting covers and jacket for chemical piping shall be Zeston 2000 PVC by W Manville, or equal. Fitting covers shall fit snugly over fittings, including all elbows and valves, etc. Jacketing shall be high-impact UV-resistant covering for insulated piping and shall match fitting covers. Fitting covers and jackets shall be white and suitable for INSULATION 40 42 13 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 painting. PVC jacketing shall be 30 mil thick and shall be factory curled to fit snugly. Fitting covers and jacketing shall be secured with tacks. D. The Contractor shall insure that surfaces of pipes, valves, heat tracing, and fittings are clean and dry prior to installation of insulation. Insulation shall be installed so as to make surfaces smooth, even, and substantially flush with the adjacent insulation. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's application instructions for the materials used. PART 3— EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION INSULATION 40 42 13 E18131A—O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CLEARWELL NO.3 REV 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 43 20 00 PUMPS GENERAL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and make fully operational all pumping equipment, complete with all necessary accessories, in compliance with the Contract Documents. B. All pumping equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment specified except where specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. D. The pumps shall be provided complete with all accessories, shims, sheaves, couplings, and other appurtenances as specified, and as may be required for a complete and operating installation. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings shall include the following information in addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. 1. Details of shaft sealing system 2. Pump performance curves at rated speed and reduced speed. Curves shall indicate flow, head, efficiency, brake horsepower, NPSH required, and minimum submergence. Curves shall identify minimum continuous stable flow (minimum flow to avoid suction recirculation), preferred operating region (POR) and allowable operating region (AOR) per the latest version of ANSI/HI 9.6.3. 3. General cutaway sections, materials, dimension of shaft projections, shaft and keyway dimensions, shaft diameter, dimension between bearings, general dimensions of pump, suction head bolt orientation, and anchor bolt locations and forces. 4. Foundry certificates and testing showing compliance to ASTM A 532 (where required in the individual pump specifications). Pumps General 43 20 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials employed in the pumping equipment shall be suitable for the intended application. Material not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall conform to the following requirements unless otherwise specified in individual pumping equipment specifications: B. Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI standard B16.1 or B16.5 dimensions. 2.02 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. All pumps shall be furnished with motors such that the motor shall not be overloaded throughout the full range of the pump operation, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer. B. Where variable frequency drives (VFDs) are specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between pump supplier and VFD supplier to ensure a complete and operational system. VFDs shall be furnished under Division 26 and shall be as specified in Section 26 29 23.02 — Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives. C. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual pump specifications. 2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to the requirements of Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions, nameplate data for each pump shall include the rating in gallons per minute, rated head, speed, and efficiency at the primary design point. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, and drains shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or trench drain with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets. B. Solenoid Valves: Where required, the pump manufacturer shall furnish and install solenoid valves on the seal water or oil lubrication lines. Solenoid valve electrical rating shall be compatible with the motor control voltage and shall be furnished complete with all necessary conduit and wiring installation from control panel to solenoid. 3.02 SHOP TESTING Pumps General 43 20 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Shop tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions, and except where stated otherwise herein, shall be conducted in accordance with the latest version of Hydraulic Institute Standard 14.6, Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. B. Pump rating point shall be within the tolerances specified for Acceptance Grade 1 U unless otherwise specified in the individual pump specifications. C. Pump shop testing shall be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer where specified in the individual pump specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before scheduling the testing. The Engineer shall be given at least 2 weeks advanced notice of the scheduled testing date. D. Certified test curves for shall be provided for all centrifugal pumps unless otherwise specified in the individual pump specifications. Certified tests will not be required for submersible sump pumps with motors less than 5 hp. Certified curves shall identify minimum continuous stable flow (minimum flow to avoid suction recirculation), preferred operating region (POR) and allowable operating region (AOR) per the latest version of ANSI/HI 9.6.3. E. Where required in the individual pump specifications, each individual casting shall be tested. F. Where required in the individual pump specifications, a certified hydrostatic test shall be completed on each pumping unit in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards latest edition. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions and additionally as specified below and in the individual pump specifications. B. Final acceptance tests shall demonstrate the following: 1. The pumps have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. The pumps operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. Vibration shall be within the limits identified in the latest version of ANSI/HI 9.6.4, or manufacturer's limits if more stringent. 3. The pumps can meet the specified operating conditions. All pumps shall be checked at maximum speed for a minimum of four points on the pump curve for capacity, head, and amperage. The rated motor nameplate current shall not be exceeded at any point. Pumps with drive motors rated at less than five horsepower shall only be tested for overcurrent when overheating or other malfunction becomes evident in general testing. Pumps General 43 20 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 END OF SECTION Pumps General 43 20 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 43 23 17.2 SAMPLE PUMPS - HIGH PRESSURE HOSE-TYPE PART 1 — PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, field test, complete and ready for operation hose pumps for chemical pumping systems and wastewater sample pumping, as indicated and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Electric motors shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 05 60— Low- Voltage Variable Frequency Drives. B. Concrete work is included in Division 03 Concrete. C. Piping, valves and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports other than those herein specified are included in section(s) 40 05 00— Piping General Requirements, 40 05 31 — PVC, CPVC Pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register, shop drawings showing details of fabrication and erection and details of installation as follows: 1. Certified shop and installation drawings including piping schematic, showing all details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of hose pumps for chemical metering. Data shall include performance curves, based on actual shop tests of similar units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, and brake horsepower. 4. The total weight of the equipment. 5. A complete bill of materials of all equipment. 0 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied in o addition to those specified in Paragraph 1.07 below. List may be submitted with operating and maintenance data specified below. Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 7. Complete motor data as required in section 40 05 00— Basic Mechanical Requirements. 8. Complete gear reducer data. 9. Data demonstrating compatibility of all pump materials of construction with chemicals pumped. 10. Description of surface preparation and paint. B. Operating and Maintenance Data 1. Furnish copies of an operating and maintenance manual to the Engineer. Prepare the manuals specifically for this installation and include all required cutsheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A322 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars. 4. ASTM A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bar, Hot-Rolled or Cold Rolled. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.1 - Standard for Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 125 Ib. C. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) D. American Welding Society (AWS) E. National Electric Code (NEC) F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single supplier and shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. B. Obtain certified statement of approval of installation from supplier prior to energizing system. Supplier's or manufacturer's servicemen may energize system for purposes of checkout. Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. Provide services of a manufacturer's service representative, specifically trained on type of equipment specified. Submit qualifications of service representative for approval. Man-day (1-man, 8-hours) requirements are exclusive of travel time, and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. Services are required for the following: a. Installation Supervision: Checking the installation of all components before power is applied. A minimum of (1) 8-hour days for supervision shall be provided. b. Startup and Testing Supervision: Placing equipment into operation and making necessary adjustments. A minimum of (1) 8-hour days for startup and testing supervision shall be provided. C. Operation and Maintenance Instruction: Instruction to Owner's personnel in the use, operation, maintenance, and safety of the equipment. A minimum of(1) 8-hour day of operation and maintenance instruction shall be provided. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. The following spare parts will be provided: 1. 3 Hoses per pump 2. Sufficient lubricant for two hose changes per pump B. Provide all special tools for normal maintenance. Package tools and clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Equipment provided should be warranted to be manufactured of first-class materials, and in a skillful and workmanlike manner. Pumps should be warranted against defective materials or workmanship and should perform in accordance with the agreed specification, assuming proper installation and care. The manufacturer's standard warranty terms shall apply for 18-months from date of shipment or 12-months from date of startup, whichever occurs first. The seller will repair or replace, at its expense, any products failing to conform to the above warranties. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. B. Provide equipment weighing over 100 lbs with lifting lugs. 2.02 HOSE PUMPS (PERISTALTIC PUMPS) A. Conditions of Service 1. Verderflex Dura 15 Pumps a. Number of Pumps: 3 b. Max Flow Rate: 2.6 gpm C. Operating Pressure: 45 psi d. Maximum Pump Rotor Speed: 120 rpm e. Fluid Temperature: 50°F - 90°F f. Fluid Specific Gravity: 1 g. Duty Cycle: Continuous h. Motor Type: VFD i. Maximum Motor Speed: 5400 RPM j. Maximum Horsepower: 1 B. PUMPS 1. Pump shall be of the gap-coupled, positive displacement, peristaltic hose type utilizing a flexible hose and a rotor with 2 integral pressing shoes. Pump rotor shall be directly bolted onto an internal drive shaft and the complete assembly shall be mounted in the pump casing via sealed for life deep groove 304L stainless steel ball bearings to ISO 15-1998. These bearings shall be press fitted into the pump casing and the bearings shall be protected by a Viton shaft seal. To ensure flexibility and efficiency of installation, pumps 1" and smaller shall have a maximum footprint of 150 square inches. 1.25-1.5" pumps shall have a footprint with a maximum size of 250 square inches. 2. The gear reducer shall be vertically mounted and shall lock onto to the drive shaft by an ISO standard key. The exterior of the pump casing shall be connected to the gearbox by a 4-bolt adaptor. The gear reducer shall be physically isolated from the pump casing via an air gap separation and shall have zero risk of contamination from the pumped fluid. Air-gap separation shall be no less than %2". 3. Each pump shall consist of a sealed lubricant filled housing, bolted housing cover, pump hose, rotor assembly, and one-piece connectors. The lubricant shall normally be a compounded food grade Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 glycerin/propylene glycol blend. Lubrication shall be filled to 40-50 percent of pump housing capacity. 4. The hose shall be constructed from an appropriate elastomer re-enforced by two or more braided nylon layers. Hose shall normally be constructed from a combination of a Natural Rubber outer and an inner made from Natural Rubber, Nitrile Buna Rubber or Hypalon. Where EPDM material is required the hose shall be constructed totally from this material. Hose shall have a permanent color-coded material identifier bonded onto the hose's outer cover and this identification shall be incorporated along the entire length of the hose. Identification of hose material by means of partial color coding or by labels of any form shall be unacceptable. Hose shall not require additional processing such as machining to maintain wall thickness and maintain consistent hose occlusion. Exterior surface of hose shall be textured to increase adhesion of lubricant on the portion of hose not otherwise submerged, in order to better cool and lubricate the upper half of the hose. All hoses regardless of size shall be rated for a minimum of 175 PSIG continuous operation and have a minimum burst pressure of 800-PSIG. 5. The hose shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the housing through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on the suction and discharge ports by individual one-piece #316SS flanges with integral hose inserts. Flanges shall be secured to the pump hose via a tapering compression fit forming a sealed pumping chamber that will contain product in the event of a hose failure. The front and rear of the pump casing shall include a pair of cut outs that allows the ends of the hose to be seen to confirm that it is correctly clamped without compromising the integrity of the sealed pumping chamber. Pumps using external or internal hose clamps, or pumps that do not offer product containment within the pump housing shall be unacceptable. The hose shall be replaceable without removing the pump or the pump housing cover. Inlet/outlet flanges shall be slotted to allow connection to pipe work complying with ANSI, JIS, & DIN standards. Assembly shall be located by and secured to pump housing by permanent BZP steel socket head set screws. Hose and flanges shall be compatible with the pumped fluid, for aggressive chemicals these flanges shall include a polypropylene wetted insert. 6. The rotor shall be constructed of cast iron with two integral pressing shoes, located 180-degrees apart for compression of the hose against the track twice per rotor revolution. Hose occlusion shall not need adjustment by the addition or removal of shims from under a shoe. 7. Each rotor assembly shall have ribbed spokes, which add to its structural integrity while creating constant circulation of lubricant upon rotation to enhance lubrication and cooling within the pump housing. Rotor material to be ASTM A35 Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 8. Flow through the hose shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed. 9. Each pump shall be completely self-priming with a suction lift capability of at least 27 feet of water. 10. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging effects to the pump or hose. 11. The pump shall be valve less and without diaphragms and not utilize any dynamic seals in contact with the pump age. 12. The pump housing shall be cast iron to ASTM A35 and the housing cover shall be steel with Polycarbonate window to view pump rotation. The seal between the housing and the cover shall be a Buna-N O-ring. 13. A fill port and a threaded drain plug shall be provided on the pump housing. The fill port shall be easily accessible, located on the backside of rotor case. The drain shall be located at the lowest point in the housing and allow for complete removal of all liquid from within the housing. 14. Pumps shall be produced in compliance with ISO 9001:2000. 15. Pump support frames shall be formed carbon steel ASTM A529 grade 43 and shall have a powder coated paint finish. 16. The peristaltic hose pumps furnished under this Section shall be Verderflex Dura-Series as manufactured Verder, Inc. of Macon, GA, or equal. C. PUMP MOTOR 1. The AC or DC drive motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated type (TENV), NEMA Premium Efficient as a minimum, and shall be designed as specified in Section 26 05 60 Low-Voltage Electric Motors. The horsepower shall be adequate to drive the pump when the pump is operating at its maximum capacity and maximum head condition for its prescribed application. D. GEAR REDUCERS 1. The gear reducer shall be of the integral motor/reducer design with worm gears and shall be of a non-proprietary design and can be supplied or replaced by any commercial gear reducer manufacturer. 2. Match torque rating of gear reducer to the pumping equipment being driven. 3. The input shall be flanged to accept NEMA C-faced motor. 4. Bearings shall be anti-friction, of heavy-duty construction and exceed AFBMA standards. Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Gear reducer bearings and gears to be greased-for-life and not require any re-lubrication or other maintenance for the life of the pump. E. LEAK DETECTION 1. Provide each pump with an over-pressure/hose burst device above the normal lubricant level to high pressure and detect leakage of pumped product into the pump housing for indication of hose failure. 2. Device shall be a field selectable NO/NC two-wire switch, work from a 110V power supply, and relay outputs to monitor high pumping chamber pressures caused by hose failure. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Variable Frequency Drive 1. Pumps to include NEMA 4X VFD for SCADA interface. Mount VFD directly to pump motor. VFD to accept remote run signal via dry contact and remote speed control via 4-20 mA analog signal. VFD shall be capable of returning a 'drive fail' signal to SCADA. VFD to include LCD display and keypad interface for programming and should display pump output in GPH. For pumps up to 1 horsepower, VFD power supply shall be 1/60/115VAC, with 3/60/230VAC output to motor. VFD shall be prewired to motor and include 6' power cord with three-prong plug. VFDs for pumps over 1 horsepower will accept 3/60/230VAC power. 2.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. Shop priming and surface preparation shall be manufacturer standard shop applied coating. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the hose pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in locations indicated. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Set anchor bolts in accordance with the shop drawings. Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. After all pumps have been completely installed, conduct in the presence of the Engineer tests to indicate that each item of equipment conforms to this Section. The manufacturer's representative shall oversee field testing: 1. Functional Test: Check for proper alignment, rotation, excessive or unusual noises, overheating, lubrication, and satisfactory performance 2. Vibration test: Check and verify that each operating pump does not have excessive vibration or movement during operation over the specified speed range. B. If the performance of any item of equipment does not meet the specified requirements, take corrective measures or remove the unit and replace with one which satisfies the conditions specified. 3.03 SERVICES A. After all pumps have been completely installed, and after Contractor has completed inspection, operation, testing, and adjustment, Contractor shall conduct a running test in the presence of the Engineer and pump manufacturer personnel or proxy, demonstrating the pumps' ability to deliver the rated capacity and operating pressure. Contractor to provide labor, piping, and equipment for these tests. B. Test pumps on product only. Make necessary adjustments to place equipment in specified working order at the time of startup and testing, and promptly correct or replace defective equipment revealed by or noted during testing at no additional cost to the Owner and repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. END OF SECTION Sample Pumps—High Pressure Hose-Type 46 23 17.2 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 46 00 00 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in acceptable operation all mechanical equipment and all necessary accessories as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operable system. B. The mechanical equipment shall be provided complete with all accessories, special tools, spare parts, mountings, and other appurtenances as specified, and as may be required for a complete and operating installation. C. It is the intent of these Specifications that the Contractor shall provide the Owner complete and operational equipment/systems. To this end, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all interfaces with related mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation and control work and to provide necessary ancillary items such as controls, wiring, etc., to make each piece of equipment operational as intended by the Specifications. D. The complete installation shall be free from excessive vibration, cavitation, noise, and oil or water leaks. E. The requirements of this Section shall apply to equipment furnished under Divisions 40, 43 and 46. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All equipment, materials, and installations shall conform to the requirements of the most recent editions with latest revisions, supplements, and amendments of the specifications, codes, and standards listed in Section 01 42 00 —Codes and Standards. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for all equipment in accordance with Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register and shall include the following information in addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register: 1. Performance characteristics and descriptive data. 2. Detailed equipment dimensional drawings and setting plans. 3. General lifting, erection, installation, and adjustment instructions, and recommendations. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4. Complete information regarding location, type, size, and length of all field welds in accordance with American Welding Society Standards. Welding shall be performed by qualified and certified welders only. 5. The total uncrated weight of the equipment plus the approximate weight of shipped materials. Support locations and loads that will be transmitted to bases and foundations. Exact size, placement, and embedment requirements of all anchor bolts. 6. Details on materials of construction of all components including applicable ASTM designations. 7. Information on bearing types and bearing life. 8. Gear box design and performance criteria and AGMA service factor. 9. Piping schematics. 10. Motor data sheet indicating motor horsepower; enclosure type; voltage; insulation class; temperature rise and results of dielectric tests; service-rating; rotative speed; motor speed-torque relationship; efficiency and power factor at %2, %, and full load; slip at full load; running, full load, and locked rotor current values; and safe running time-current curves. 11. Equipment and motor protective device details. Connection diagrams for motor and all protective devices. 12. Equipment shop coating systems, interior and exterior. 13. Panel layout drawings, schematic wiring diagrams, and component product data sheets for control panels. 14. A list of spare parts and special tools to be provided. 15. Any additional information required to show conformance with the equipment specifications. 16. Warranty documentation including statement of duration of warranty period and contact phone numbers and addresses for warranty issues. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION/MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register B. O&M manuals shall include instructions, equipment ratings, technical bulletins, and any other printed matter such as wiring diagrams and schematics, prints or drawings, containing full information required for the proper operation, maintenance, and repair of Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 the equipment. Included in this submission shall be a spare parts diagram, complete spare parts list, bill of materials, OEM part numbers and manufacturer's catalog information of all equipment components. C. Each set of instructions shall be bound together in appropriate three-ring binders with a detailed Table of Contents. D. Written operation and maintenance instructions shall be required for all equipment items supplied for this project. The amount of detail shall be commensurate with the complexity of the equipment item. E. Information not applicable to the specific piece of equipment installed on this project shall be struck from the submission. F. Information provided shall include a source of replacement parts and names of service representatives, including address and telephone number. G. Extensive pictorial cuts of equipment are required for operator reference in servicing. H. When written instructions include Shop Drawings and other information previously reviewed by the Engineer, only those editions thereof which were approved by the Engineer, and which accurately depict the equipment installed, shall be incorporated in the instructions. 1.05 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. All parts of the equipment furnished shall, be designed and constructed for the maximum stresses occurring during fabrication, transportation, installation, testing, and all conditions of operation. All materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be entirely suitable for the service to which the units are to be subjected and shall conform to all applicable Sections of these Specifications. B. All parts of duplicate equipment shall be interchangeable without modification. Manufacturer's design shall accommodate all the requirements of these Specifications. C. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ASTM, ASM E, Al EE, NEMA, and other generally accepted applicable standards. D. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected by bushings or other approved means against wear, and provision shall be made for accessible lubrication by extending lubrication lines and fittings to approximately 30 inches above finished floor elevation. E. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members, joints, corners, gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 F. Machinery parts shall conform within allowable tolerances to the dimensions shown on the working drawings. G. All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety codes of the USA and the State/Commonwealth in which the project is located. H. All rotating shafts, couplings, or other moving pieces of equipment shall be provided with suitable protective guards of sheet metal or wire mesh, neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as required to provide access for repairs. I. All equipment greater than 100 pounds shall have lifting lugs, eyebolts, etc., for ease of lifting, without damage or undue stress exerted on its components. J. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. 1.06 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES A. Warranty requirements may be added to or modified in the individual equipment specifications. B. The equipment furnished under this Contract shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship, design and/or materials for a period of one (1) year unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. The period of such warranties shall start on the date the particular equipment is placed in use by the Owner with corresponding start-up certification provided by the manufacturer's technical representative as specified herein, provided that the equipment demonstrates satisfactory performance during the thirty day operational period after the equipment startup. If the equipment does not perform satisfactorily during the thirty day operational period, the start of the warranty period will be delayed until the equipment demonstrates proper operation. The Equipment Supplier shall repair or replace without charge to the Owner any part of equipment which is defective or showing undue wear within the guarantee period, or replace the equipment with new equipment if the mechanical performance is unsatisfactory; furnishing all parts, materials, labor, etc., necessary to return the equipment to its specified performance level. C. The Contractor shall provide an equipment warranty log book prepared specifically for this project and submit two (2) copies of the document to the Engineer prior to final payment. The equipment warranty log book shall include a summary listing of all equipment warranties provided, date received, and start date and end date of warranty period. A copy of each equipment warranty and equipment start-up certification shall also be provided in the document. D. The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee to the Owner that all equipment offered under these specifications, or that any process resulting from the use of such equipment in the manner stated is not the subject of patent litigation, and that he has not knowingly Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 offered equipment, the installation or use of which is likely to result in a patent controversy, in which the Owner as user is likely to be made the defendant. 1. Where patent infringements are likely to occur, each Equipment Supplier shall submit, as a part of his bid, license arrangements between himself, or the manufacturer of the equipment offered, and the patent owner or the controller of the patent, which will permit the use in the specified manner of such mechanical equipment as he may be bidding. 2. Each Equipment Supplier, by submitting his bid, agrees to hold and save the Owner and Engineer or its officers, agents, servants, and employees harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses for, or on account of, any patented or unpatented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the work under this contract, including the use of the same by the Owner. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The materials covered by these Specifications are intended to be equipment of proven reliability, and as manufactured by reputable manufacturers having experience in the production of such equipment. The Contractor shall, upon request of the Engineer, furnish the names of not less than 5 successful installations of the manufacturer's equipment of the same size and model of that offered under this contract. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the industry accepted practices and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings and operated per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.02 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and protect all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances required for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Working Drawings for installation shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, and suitable templates shall be used by the Contractor when required in the detailed equipment Specifications. B. Anchor bolts and fasteners shall be furnished in accordance with Section 05 05 23— Metal Fastening, and with the individual equipment Specifications. All anchor bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2-inch diameter. All anchor bolts, guard bolts, washers, clips, clamps, and fasteners of any type shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise specified the individual equipment Specifications. C. The Contractor shall provide all concrete pads or pedestals required for equipment furnished. All concrete equipment pads shall be a minimum of 6" high, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and shall be doweled. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. Pipe sleeves or other means of adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated or required. Equipment shall be leveled by first using sitting nuts on the anchor bolts, and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with non-shrink grout, unless alternate methods are recommended by the manufacturer and are acceptable to the Engineer (such as shim leveling pumps, or chemical grout). Non-shrink grout shall be as specified in Section 03 60 00—Grouting. 2.03 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. All materials shall conform to applicable provisions of the AISC Specifications for the design and fabrication of structural steel, and to pertinent ASTM Standard Specifications. 2.04 DISSIMILAR METALS A. All dissimilar metals shall be properly isolated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2.05 STANDARDIZATION OF GREASE FITTINGS A. The grease fittings on all mechanical equipment shall be such that they can be serviced with a single type of grease gun. Fittings shall be "Zerk" type. 2.06 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical equipment and appurtenances, including but not limited to motors, panels, conduit and wiring, etc., specified in the equipment specifications shall comply with the applicable requirements of the Division 26 specifications and the latest National Electric Code. B. Motors shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 26 05 60— Low-Voltage Electric Motors. C. In the individual equipment specifications, specified motor horsepower is intended to be the minimum size motor to be provided. If a larger motor is required to meet the specified operating conditions and performance requirements, the Contractor shall furnish the larger sized motor and shall upgrade the electrical service (conduit, wires, starters, etc.) at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Where variable frequency drives (VFDs) are specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between equipment supplier and VFD supplier to ensure a complete and operational system. E. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under Division 26 and Division 40 unless otherwise specified in the individual pump specifications. 2.07 ACCESSORIES, SPARE PARTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A. Spare parts for equipment shall be furnished where indicated in the equipment Specifications or where recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Spare parts shall be identical and interchangeable with original parts. C. The spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. D. Painting requirements for spare parts shall be identical to those for original, installed parts. Where no painting or protective coating is specified, suitable provisions shall be made to protect against corrosion. E. Spare parts shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. Spare parts shall be stored separately in a locked area, maintained by the Contractor, and shall be turned over to the Owner in a group prior to substantial completion. All of these materials shall be properly packed, labeled, and stored where directed by the Owner and Engineer. F. The Contractor shall furnish all special tools necessary to operate, disassemble, service, repair, and adjust the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' operation and maintenance manual. G. The Contractor shall furnish a one-year supply of all recommended lubricating oils and greases. The manufacturer shall submit a list of at least four manufacturer's standard lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each type of lubricant required. All of these materials shall be properly packed, labeled and stored where directed by the Engineer. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 2.08 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with a substantial stainless steel nameplate, mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware in a conspicuous place, and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, and principal rating data. B. Each pump and other piece of mechanical equipment shall also be identified as to name and number by a suitable laminated plastic or stainless steel nameplate mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware; for example, "Raw Water Pump#1". Coordinate name and number with same on remotely located controls, control panel, and other related equipment. C. Nameplates shall not be painted over. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP TESTING A. All equipment shall be tested in the shop of the manufacturer in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that it will operate in the manner specified or implied. B. No equipment shall be shipped to the project until the Engineer has been furnished a certified copy of test results and has notified the Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. C. Five (5) certified copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof shall be forwarded to the Engineer for review. D. If required by the individual equipment Specifications, arrangements shall be made for the Owner/Engineer to witness performance tests in the manufacturer's shop. The Engineer shall be notified ten working days before shop testing commences. Expenses are to be paid by the Contractor. E. Shop testing of electric motors shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Section 26 05 60 — Low-Voltage Electric Motors and Section 26 05 00—General Work requirements for Electrical Specification. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.02 STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Contractor shall store his equipment and materials at the job site in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by the Owner or Engineer, and in conformity to applicable statutes, ordinances, regulations, and rulings of the public authority having jurisdiction. Equipment and materials shall not be delivered to the site prior to 90 days in advance of the scheduled installation. Partial payment requests will not be processed for materials delivered prior to 90 days before installation or for materials that are not properly stored. B. Material or equipment stored on the job site is stored at the Contractor's risk. Any damage sustained of whatever nature shall be repaired to the Engineer's satisfaction at no expense to the Owner. Stored electrical equipment is to be protected from the elements and shall have space heaters energized. C. Contractor shall not store unnecessary materials or equipment on the job site and shall take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a weight which will endanger its security or the safety of persons. D. Contractor shall observe all regulatory signs for loadings on structures, fire safety, and smoking areas. E. Contractor shall not store materials or encroach upon private property without the written consent of the owners of such private property. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified Technical Representative from each manufacturer or supplier of equipment who is regularly involved in the inspection, installation, start-up, troubleshooting, testing, maintenance, and operation of the specified equipment. Qualification of the Technical Representative shall be appropriate to the type of equipment furnished and subject to the approval of the Engineer and the Owner. Where equipment furnished has significant process complexity, furnish the services of engineering personnel knowledgeable in the process involved and the function of the equipment. When necessary, the Contractor shall schedule multiple Technical Representatives to be present at the same time for the purpose of coordinating the operation of multiple pieces of related equipment. B. For each site visit, the Technical Representative shall submit jointly to the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor a complete signed report of the results of his inspection, operation, adjustments, and testing. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 C. The manufacturer's Technical Representative shall provide the following services. 1. Installation: The Technical Representative shall inspect the installed equipment to verify that installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Where required by individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall also supervise the installation of the equipment. 2. Testing: After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the Technical Representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment as required to prove that the equipment is in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for startup and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. The report shall include date of final acceptance field test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests. 3. Startup: The Technical Representative shall start up the equipment for actual service with the help of the Contractor. In the event that equipment or installation problems are experienced, the Contractor and the representative shall provide the necessary services until the equipment is operating satisfactorily and performing according to the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Unless otherwise noted in the signed site visit report, the report shall constitute a certification that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. 4. Training: The Technical Representative shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in correct operation and maintenance procedures. The instruction shall demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment. Such instruction shall be scheduled at a time arranged with the Owner at least 2 weeks in advance of the training and shall be provided while the respective Technical Representative's equipment is fully operational. The Contractor shall have submitted, and had accepted, the O&M Manuals prior to commencement of training. Training shall be provided to two separate shifts of the Owner's personnel between the hours of 8:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. as necessary. The Contractor shall provide professional video taping of all training sessions. Completed, labeled tapes shall be provided to the Owner for each type of training session. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Services after Startup: Where required by the individual equipment specifications, the Technical Representative shall return to the project site thirty (30) days after the start up date to review the equipment performance, correct any equipment problems, and conduct operation and maintenance classes as required by the Owner. This follow-up trip is required in addition to the specified services of Technical Representative prior to and during equipment startup. At this time, if there are no equipment problems, each manufacturer shall certify to the Owner in writing that his equipment is fully operational and capable of meeting operating requirements. If the equipment is operating incorrectly, the Technical Representative will make no certification to the Owner until the problems are corrected and the equipment demonstrates a successful thirty (30) days operating period. D. Services of the Technical Representative will require a minimum of two (2) site visits, one for installation and testing and one for startup and training, and will be for the minimum number of days recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer but will not be less than the number of days specified in individual equipment sections. E. The Contract amount shall include the cost of furnishing the Technical Representative for the minimum number of days specified, and any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation. The times specified for services by the Technical Representative in the equipment Specifications are exclusive of travel time to and from the facility and shall not be construed as to relieve the manufacturer of any additional visits to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. F. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 14 days in advance of each equipment test or Owner training session. G. The Technical Representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer's Resident Project Representative on each day he is at the project. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain written installation manuals from the equipment manufacturer prior to installation. Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. A copy of all installation instructions shall be furnished the Engineer's field representative one week prior to installation. B. The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient personnel, proper construction equipment, and machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in work of this character. To minimize field erection problems, mechanical units shall be factory-assembled insofar as practical. C. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 D. All equipment sections and loose items shall be match-marked prior to shipping. E. For equipment such as pumping units, which require field alignment and connections, the Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's qualified mechanic, millwright, or machinist, to align the pump and motor prior to making piping connections or anchoring the pump base. Alignment shall be as specified herein. F. The Contractor shall furnish oil and grease for initial operation and testing. The manufacturer and grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. 3.05 ALIGNMENT A. Set equipment to dimensions shown on drawings. Dimensions shall be accurate to +/- 1/16 inch unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Wedges shall not be used for leveling, aligning, or supporting equipment. B. General Equipment Leveling: Non-rotating equipment shall be set level to +/- 1/16 inch per 10-foot length (.005 inch per foot) unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Shims shall be used unless equipment is furnished with leveling feet. Set shims flush with equipment baseplate edges. When grouting is required, equipment shall be shimmed to allow a minimum of one inch grout thickness. Grout shall cover shims at least 3 inches. Final level check shall be held for inspection and approval by Engineer before proceeding. C. Grouting 1. Fill anchor bolt holes or sleeves with grout, after bolt alignment is proven, and prior to placing grout under equipment bases. 2. Surface Preparation. Roughen surface by chipping, removing laitance, and unsound concrete. Clean area of all foreign material such as oil, grease, and scale. Saturate area with water at least 4 hours prior to grouting, removing excess water ponds. 3. Application. Place grout after the equipment base has been set and its alignment and level have been approved. Form around the base, mix grout, and place in accordance with the grout manufacturers published instructions. Eliminate all air or water pockets beneath the base using a drag chain or rope. 4. Finishing. Point the edges of the grout to form a smooth 45 degree slope. 5. After grout has cured (not before 3 days after placement) paint exposed surfaces of grout with shellac. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 6. Level Verification. After grout has cured, and immediately prior to drive alignment, recheck equipment for level and plumb. Re-level and square as necessary. Hold final checks for inspection and approval by Engineer. D. Inspect for and remove all machining burrs or thread pulls in female holes on mating surfaces of mounting frame and machine feet. E. Inspect and clean equipment mounting base pads, feet, and frames to remove all grease, rust, paint and dirt. F. Assembled equipment shafts shall be set level to .0015 inches per foot of shaft length (+/- .0005 inches) up to a maximum of 0.015 inches for any length shaft unless the manufacturers requirements are more stringent or unless otherwise noted in the equipment specifications. Use the machined surfaces on which the equipment sets for the base/mounting frame leveling plane. Use the machined shaft surface for equipment leveling plane. G. Sprocket and Sheave Alignment. Check shaft mounted components for face runout and eccentricity (outside diameter) runout by magnetically mounting a dial indicator on a stationary base and indicating over 360 degrees on a continuous machined surface at the outside diameter of the component. Maximum allowable total indicated face runout and eccentricity for sprockets and sheaves will be per ANSI Standard B29.1-1975. H. Belt tensioning. Set drive belt tension to manufacturer's specification for the belt type. Recheck alignment after drive tensioning. I. Thermal/Mechanical Growth. Thermal/mechanical growth corrections for driver and driven machines will be used in vertical and horizontal alignment where applicable. The equipment manufacturer will determine thermal/mechanical growth applicability for any machine and provide the correction offsets to be used. J. Rotating Shaft Alignment 1. Fixtures will be set up on the driver and driven machine, machines shaft surfaces. Machined coupling hubs may be used only if there is no clearance to mount fixtures directly on the shafts. 2. Primary alignment method for direct drive machines is when coupled. Uncoupled alignment will be used only when approved by the Engineer. 3. Account for possible coupling flex by always rotating coupled machines in the same direction during alignment. 4. Uncoupled machines must be connected so that both shafts turn together without relative motion during alignment. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 5. Indicator bar sag will be measured and included for each reverse indicator alignment setup. 6. Reverse Dial Indicator. The final maximum allowable misalignment: vertical and horizontal from the desired targets of .000 inches (for a non-thermal growth machine) or from the given target readings (for a thermal growth machine) must meet BOTH of the following conditions simultaneously: 1/2 the final total indicator reading at each indicator will be no more than shown in the table below AND the final remaining correction at each machine foot be no more than .001 inches of required movement. Machine Speed (RPM) Total Misalignment" (inches) Up to 1800 .002 1800 and greater .001 1/2 indicator reading 3.06 FIELD TESTING A. All equipment shall be set, aligned and assembled in conformance with the manufacturer's drawings and instructions. Provide all necessary calibrated instruments to execute performance tests. Submit report certified by the pump manufacturer's representative. B. Preliminary Field Tests, Yellow Tag 1. As soon as conditions permit, after the equipment has been secured in its permanent position, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the equipment is free from defects. b. Check for alignment as specified herein. C. Check for direction of rotation. d. Check motor for no load current draw. 2. Contractor shall flush all bearings, gear housings, etc., in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, to remove any foreign matter accumulated during shipment, storage or erection. Lubricants shall be added as required by the manufacturer's instructions. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3. When the Contractor has demonstrated to the Engineer that the equipment is ready for operation, a yellow tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer, or his assigned representative and attached to the equipment. The tag shall not be removed. 4. Preliminary field tests, yellow tag, must be completed before equipment is subjected to final field tests, blue tag. C. Final Field Tests, Blue Tag 1. Upon completion of the above, and at a time approved by the Engineer, the equipment will be tested by operating it as a unit with all related piping, ducting, electrical and controls, and other ancillary facilities. 2. The equipment will be placed in continuous operation as prescribed or required and witnessed by the Engineer or his assigned representative and the Owner or his assigned representative. 3. The tests shall prove that the equipment and appurtenances are properly installed, meet their operating cycles and are free from defects such as overheating, overloading, and undue vibration and noise. Operating field tests shall consist of the following: a. Check equipment for excessive vibration and noise as specified herein. b. Check motor current draw under load conditions. The rated motor nameplate current shall not be exceeded. C. Recheck alignment with dial indicators where applicable, after unit has run under load for a minimum of 24 hours. D. In addition to the above described field tests, any other tests specifically required by Section 43 20 00 — Pumps-General, the individual equipment Specifications, or by the manufacturer shall be performed. E. Until final field tests are acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes, readjustments and replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Upon acceptance of the field tests, a blue tag will be issued. The tag will be signed by the Engineer and attached to the unit. The tag shall not be removed, and no further construction work will be performed on the unit, except as required during start-up operations and directed by the Engineer. G. Defects which cannot be corrected by installation adjustments will be sufficient grounds for rejection of any equipment. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 H. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as lubricants, temporary instruments, labor, equipment, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor. Power, fuel, chemicals, water, etc. normally consumed by specific equipment shall be supplied by the Owner unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. I. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. J. Field testing of electric motors shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 60— Low- Voltage Electric Motors and Section 26 05 00, General Work Requirements for Electrical Specification. 3.07 VIBRATION TESTING A. Unless specified otherwise in the detailed equipment specifications, each pump, blower, compressor, motor or similar item of stationary rotating equipment having a rated power in excess of 40HP shall be tested after installation for acceptable vibration levels. B. Vibration testing shall be performed by an experienced factory-trained and authorized third-party analysis expert (not a sales representative) retained by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Each unit or pump system shall be tested separately without duplicate equipment running. All field testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall be furnished with four (4) certified copies of vibration test data for each test performed. C. For systems with variable speed drives, tests shall be conducted at various speeds between maximum and minimum. For systems with two-speed drives, tests shall be conducted at both speeds. For systems with constant-speed drive, tests shall be conducted under various loading conditions as determined by the Engineer. D. All field vibration tests shall be performed with the equipment operating on the product for which it is intended, or a substitute acceptable to the Engineer. E. The term displacement, as used herein, shall mean total peak-to-peak movement of vibrating equipment, in mils; velocity or speed of the vibration cycle, measured in G's. Displacement and velocity shall be measured by suitable equipment equal to IRD Mechanalysis, Bentley, Nevada. F. Frequency of vibration, in cycles per minute (cpm), shall be determined when vibration exceeds specified levels or as otherwise necessary. Vibration shall be measured on the bearing housing unless other locations are deemed necessary by the vibration analysis expert and Engineer. G. For all equipment tested, vibration shall be checked in the radial and axial directions. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, axial vibration shall not exceed 0.1 in/sec; and Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 radial vibration shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec. For pumps radial vibration shall not exceed that permitted by the Hydraulic Institute Standards except that, at vibration frequencies in excess of 8,000 cpm, the velocity shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec. H. Copies of test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Should the vibration field test results exceed shop test results, the manufacturer's recommendations, or the limits specified herein, the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies within thirty (30) days. After corrections have been completed, the vibration testing shall be re-run and the results re-submitted to the Engineer for review. I. Noise or vibration in any rotating equipment which the Engineer judges to be excessive or damaging, shall be cause for rejection. 3.08 FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM A. Any defects in the equipment, or failure to meet the guarantees or performance requirements of the Specifications shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise. B. If the Contractor fails to make these corrections, or if the improved equipment shall fail again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of said equipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor's expense. C. The Contractor shall then obtain specified equipment to meet the contract requirements or upon mutual agreement with the Owner, adjust the contract price to reflect not supplying the specific equipment item. D. In case the Owner rejects said equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay to the Owner all sums of money paid to him for said rejected equipment on progress certificates or otherwise on account of the lump sum prices herein specified. E. Upon receipt of said sums of money, the Owner will execute and deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all his rights, title, and interest in and to said rejected equipment; provided, however, that said equipment shall not be removed from the premises until the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of that rejected. F. Said bill of sale shall not abrogate Owner's right to recover damages for delays, losses, or other conditions arising out of the basic contract. Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 3.09 PAINTING A. All surface preparation, shop painting, field repairs, finish painting, and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall conform to applicable sections of Section 09 91 00 — Painting and Coating. B. All shop coatings shall be compatible with proposed field coatings. C. All inaccessible surfaces of the equipment, which normally require painting, shall be finished painted by the manufacturer. The equipment and motor shall be painted with a high-quality epoxy polyamide semi-gloss coating specifically resistant to chemical, solvent, moisture, and acid environmental conditions, unless otherwise specified. D. Gears, bearing surfaces, and other unpainted surfaces shall be protected prior to shipment by a heavy covering of rust-preventive compound sprayed or hand applied which shall be maintained until the equipment is placed in operation. This coating shall be easily removable by a solvent. 3.10 WELDING A. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. B. The Contractor's welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable. C. The Contractor shall perform all field welding in conformance with the information shown on the Equipment Manufacturer's drawings regarding location, type, size, and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society, and special conditions, as shown by notes and details. END OF SECTION Equipment General Provisions 46 00 00 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 SECTION 46 41 42 CHEMICAL INJECTION ASSEMBLIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, adjust, and place in satisfactory operation chemical injection assemblies as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions and Division 40 — Process Interconnections. 1.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Chemical Injection Assemblies Chemical Injection Assemblies 464142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Service Sodium LAS Fluoride Chlorine Solution Sample' Hydroxide No.of Assemblies 2 1 1 2 2 Type of Feed Device Injector Injector Injector Diffuser Injector Maximum Concentration 50% 38% 23% 3500 ppm NA Chemical Pipe Diameter 1" 1" 1" 2" 3/" Chemical Pipe Material CPVC PVC PVC PVC PVC Maximum Chemical Feed Rate 4 gpm 15 gph 24 gph 120 gpm 2.4 gpm Max Chemical Discharge 30 psi 30 psi 30 psi 50 psi NA Pressure Receiving Pipe Diameter 72" 60" 60" 72" 72" Receiving Pipe Material PCCP/Steel Steel Steel PCCP/Steel PCCP/Steel Maximum Receiving Pipe 10 psi 10 psi 10 psi 10 psi 10 psi Pressure Maximum Receiving Pipe 7.2 fps 7.2 fps 7.2 fps 7.2 fps 7.2 fps Velocity Injection Injection manhole 1B Injection manhole 1B Application Point manhole1B and Injection manhole 1A Injection Manhole 1A and 2B and 2B 2B Sample locations will be pump suction.Service will be potable water Chemical Injection Assemblies 46 4142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings in accordance with, or in addition to, the submittal requirements specified in Section 01 33 01 —Submittal Register and Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions: 1. Equipment specifications and data sheets, with identification of all materials of construction. 2. Complete assembly, layout, installation, and shop drawings, with clearly marked dimensions, tolerances, jointing and anchoring details. 3. Weights of equipment component parts. 4. Chemical resistance data for wetted parts PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The chemical injection assemblies shall be as manufactured by SAF-T-FLO Water Services, Inc., or approved equal. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS A. Each injection assembly shall be specifically designed for the particular chemical service for which it is being supplied. The materials of construction for the assemblies shall be compatible with the chemicals being fed and shall be suitable for the pressure in the chemical solution line and receiving pipe, the maximum velocity in the receiving pipe, and the insertion length. Acceptable materials of construction shall be as follows: 0 N N A N O Chemical Injection Assemblies 464142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Sodium Hydroxide LAS Fluoride Chlorine Solution Sample Corp Stop/Compression 316 SST 316 SST 316 SST 316 SST 316 SST Gland Valve/Connection Size 2" 2" 2" 3" 1" Solution Tube Material Hastelloy C276 316 SST 316 SST Hastelloy C276 316 SST Solution Tube Length (Lengths are based on 36" 30" 30" 72 36" depth into pipe) %"diffuser holes,12 Tip Configuration Open Open Open each side equal spacing Open (24 total)min spacing of 6"from pipe wall. Flexible Tubing Assembly PVC PVC PVC PVC Valve EPDM EPDM EPDM Viton No check valve Seal (No tubing) Tubing Reinforced PVC Reinforced PVC Reinforced PVC 'Solution tube shall be fabricated from SCH 80 hastelloy C276 to withstand deflection Chemical Injection Assemblies 46 4142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 B. The injection assemblies shall be retractable and furnished with a flanged connection, isolation valve assembly, solution tube assembly including check valve, locking device, and safety chains. The locking device shall connect the solution tube to the corporation stop on the receiving pipe to prevent accidental withdrawal of the solution tube. A stainless-steel safety chain shall prevent the solution tube from being withdrawn past the compression ring in the gland. Safety chain length shall be determined by the manufacturer based on solution tube length. C. The assemblies shall be sized to match the pump discharge line or injection flow rate and shall be of the same diameter as the chemical piping. The injection assembly solution tubes shall penetrate into the pipe a distance as indicated in the specification herein and shown on the drawings. Additional solution tube length shall be provided to accommodate process pipe flange neck length. D. Each injector shall be furnished with a flexible hose assembly consisting of flexible hose/tubing, connection fittings, seals and ball valve, specifically designed for the particular chemical service for which it is being supplied. Flexible hose assembly shall also be capable of withstanding maximum pump discharge line pressure. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in accordance with Section 46 00 00— Equipment General Provisions. Service Number of Number of Trips Days/Trip Installation, Testing, and Training 1 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall furnish the chemical injectors and all associated equipment and accessories as required and specified herein and shown in the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with Section 46 00 00 — Equipment General Provisions. B. Mounting racks shall be provided for chemical feed piping, valves, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. The racks shall be constructed of fiberglass channel members and shall allow valves and appurtenances to be mounted such that they are readily accessible by plant operations personnel for operation and maintenance. The mounting racks shall be as specified in Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Supports. Chemical Injection Assemblies 464142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 END OF SECTION Chemical Injection Assemblies 464142 E18131A—O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3 Rev 2/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 1 City of Corpus Christi ONSWTP Instrumentation and Electrical Specification & Detail Drawings DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 02 41 00 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DEMOLITION WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This specification is intended to define cutting, patching, demolition, removal and relocation of all mechanical equipment, conduit and wiring, and piping, specified or required for a complete demolition. B. The City Of Corpus Christi retains salvage rights to all demolished equipment and wire. 1.2 Definitions A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other work. C. Demolition is to be as described in the following: 1. The removal of all existing work so indicated specified or required. 2. The removal of existing work required to be removed for replacement by new work. 3. The removal of existing work required to be temporarily removed in order to erect new work. Work temporarily removed shall be reinstalled or replaced in a manner to restore the work to its original condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer. When such existing work is removed for the convenience of the various trades, such removal and replacement or reinstallation shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. 4. The removal and reinstallation or relocation of existing electrical work as required by the installation of new work of all trades. 1.3 Work Not Shown On Plans A. Work not shown on the plans which must be removed and reinstalled, shall be done with no increase in contract price. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bid and determine the existing conditions to verify the demolition or removal. This work shall be done with no increase in contract price. 1.4 Existing Equipment A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required to insure the continued service of any affected systems interrupted by the demolition or removals. This work shall be done with no increase in contract price. B. Existing conduits exposed by demolition work shall be relocated as necessary. Coordinate with owner such that no loss of time is incurred by the owner regarding facility operations and/or maintenance. C. Existing concealed conduits not reused in the work may be abandoned in place; however, all wires shall be removed. D. Existing exposed conduits not reused in the work shall be removed unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 1.5 Damage and Protection of Property A. Care shall be exercised while performing work under this section in order to assure there will be no damage to installations that are to remain in place. Any damage shall be repaired by the contractor at no increase in contract price. B. The Contractor shall remove, at his own expense, any part of the work that has been improperly executed. He shall be responsible for the care of all work until its completion and final acceptance, and he shall replace any damaged or lost material. The Owner/Engineer's opinion of improperly executed work shall prevail. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Page 1 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems. 3. Control systems. 4. Communication systems. 5. Electrical wiring systems. 6. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise and vibration-control elements and systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. Use materials identical to existing materials. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. C. Storage/Packing Containers 1. Shall be 28 inches long x 203/4 inches wide x 15 7/16 inches wide. 2. Shall be manufactured from high density gray polyethylene and be equipped with permanently attached flip up interlocking lids suitable for stacking up to three high. 3. Buckhorn Model NR422104 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Owner. E. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Fittings A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide at least seven (7) working days' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required Page 2 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed. 3.3 Preparation A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied areas. E. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. These items include the proper removal of any treated chilled water that is to be drained from the system. Receive proper written permission from the Owner if chilled water is to be drained into the sewer system. F. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. G. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior. Page 3 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction I. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. J. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. K. Camera Equipment Demolition 1. Each camera shall be neatly and securely packed in the containers noted in section 2.0 Materials of these specifications. 2. Each component of the camera system shall be packaged with the camera itself. This includes but not limited to the following: a. Camera VDP cable system b. Fiber transceivers C. Coax and Surge Suppression devices d. Camera controller 3. Each separate camera system component shall be neatly wrapped with at least two layers of bubble wrap and secured with packing tape. 4. Once all components of each camera system are properly stored in the containers, each container shall be sealed and labeled by the camera number. Contact Owner for proper disposition of camera containers. 5. All demolitioned camera VDP cable systems shall not be cut but shall be removed from the connectorized end of the cable. The cable shall be tie wrapped to secure the cable in a coiled manner. All cable connectors shall be bubble wrapped with a least two layers and secured with packing tape for storage. 3.4 Selective Demolition A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Owner reserves the "right of first refusal' for all demolished items as indicated on the drawings. Contractor is to take possession of demolished equipment and materials and verify the intent of the owner to refuse any items. Contractor shall dispose of refused demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. Page 4 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Owner, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. E. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.5 Performance A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original installer. Comply with original installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other sections of these specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of Page 5 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 May 2015 Technical Specifications for Construction patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION Page 6 of 6 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DEMOLITION—02 41 00 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 24 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 00 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This section applies to all sections of Electrical Division 26, of this project except as specified otherwise in each individual section. 1.2 General Description A. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all electrical installations. B. The Contractor shall submit his bid on the basis of executing all work as hereinafter specified, as indicated on the drawings, or as necessary to provide a complete and usable system. C. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans,wiring diagrams, layouts, etc.,to determine which electrical equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Approval of Equipment and Materials Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for each item listed under Submittal Data in all sections of Division 26 shall be submitted to the engineer of record, or his designated representative, for approval as soon as practical, but not later than 30 days after the award of the contract. A. Wherever a brand name or names are mentioned in the specifications and/or indicated on the drawings, they shall be understood to be followed by the words "or approved equal" unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the costs of all changes in his work and the work of other trades made necessary by the use of products and systems other than those of the first named basic manufacturers and systems specified in the Contract Documents. This cost shall include but not necessarily limited an hourly rate of$165.00 to the engineer for review of all changes as the result of manufacture substitutions. 1.4 Hazardous Areas There are no areas deemed to be hazardous from an NFPA electrical equipment safety prospective. 1.5 Submittals Submit shop drawings; manufacturers'data; certificates for equipment, materials, and finish; and pertinent details for each system where specified in each individual section, and obtain approval from the Engineer of Record before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Page 1 of 5 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 24 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. B. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable industry and technical society publication references, and other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish. C. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval. 1.6 Shop Drawings Shop drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size with a minimum scale of 1/8-inch per foot, unless specified otherwise. All shop drawings shall be submitted digitally. A. Drawings shall include floor plans, sectional views, wiring diagrams, conduit and cable routings and installation details of equipment. B. Drawings of all fabrication details shall include dimensions, methods of attachment to existing structures or poles, and indicate the actual mounting location number as noted on the plan drawing contract documents. C. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. D. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and resubmitted. 1.7 Manufacturer's Data Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cut sheets. 1.8 Standards Compliance All electrical equipment and material shall be listed, labeled and installed per a recognized electrical testing laboratory's standards. When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted for approval. A. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence unless otherwise specified in the individual sections. B. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, which is competent to perform an acceptable test. C. For materials and equipment whose compliance with organizational standards or specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer shall be submitted for approval. D. This certificate shall identify the manufacturer, the product, and the referenced standard and shall simply state that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to all requirements of the project specifications and the referenced standards listed. Page 2 of 5 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 24 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.9 Delivery, Storage and Protection A. Protect all materials and finished work at all times to prevent damage or breakage either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals or mechanical injury. B. Equipment and materials shall be handled, stored, and protected to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced. 1.10 Guarantee and Service This Contractor shall include a 100% guarantee against faulty materials, equipment, superintendence or labor and unauthorized substitutes for a period of 12 months (or for the terms of the extended maintenance and warranty period) from the date of final acceptance. Replacement of lamps is excluded. 1.11 Standard Codes, Fees and Permits The entire installation shall conform to all local, state, and federal ordinances, codes, and regulations applying to the work in this contract. Comply with the latest editions of applicable codes. A. In the event that there is conflict between the plans and specifications and the local code requirements of governing agencies, the code requirements shall govern. However, if the contract requirements are in excess of the code requirements, the contract provisions shall govern. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees necessary in connection with his work. C. At the completion of all work for each phase of the Project as defined in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, or Owner's Representative, a certificate of inspection from the inspection department having jurisdiction over the work. D. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all materials, workmanship, and tests shall be in conformance with the latest approved standard rules, regulations, and specifications of the following authorities: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). National Electrical Code (NEC). National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA). Underwriters Laboratory (U.L.) 1.12 Drawings Due to the scale of the drawings, it is impossible to show all fittings, offsets, and accessories. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions at all sites affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish all fittings and accessories as may be required to meet the conditions encountered. Page 3 of 5 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 24 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.13 Contractor's Responsibility A. The Contractor shall visit the proposed project site to inspect and familiarize himself with all conditions, obstructions and space limitations prior to bidding and before beginning construction. B. Refer to the civil, structural, and electrical drawings for construction details, and coordinate work with that of other trades so as to avoid unnecessary delays or damage to any part of the installation. If any omissions or discrepancies are found between the drawings and specifications or regulations, advise the owner, or his designated representative, prior to Bid Due Date. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Materials and Equipment Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of similar material, design, and workmanship. A. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. B. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. 2.2 Experience Required Two years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. A. Alternative Service Record- Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. 2.3 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. A. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. B. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. a. Owner shall determine criticality of device or process associated with the provided equipment to determine service representitive availability. 2.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Cutting, Patching and Repairing A. The Contractor shall pay for injury or damage to the work of another Contractor which may be done by him or his employees. 3.2 Coordination A. O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant operations and requirement to produce water for the Page 4 of 5 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 24 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction City of Corpus Christi supersede any scheduling conflicts that may arise and the Plant Manger reserves the right to be the final say in coordination conflicts. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the field coordination of his work with that of other trades and the ON. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. In the event of conflicts due to lack of field coordination, the Engineer shall be the sole arbitrator in resolving the conflict. 3.3 Manufacturer's Recommendations Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, copies of these recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation in both printed and digital forms. A. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved by the Owners Representitive. B. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. 3.4 Cleaning A. Clean up and remove all debris from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, remove from the project site all unused materials and equipment. Remove all visible labels, dirt, misplaced paint, grease and stains from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approvals shall be left in place. 3.5 Testing A. See Electrical Specification 26 05 04 "New Electrical Equipment and Systems Inspection and Testing". END OF SECTION Page 5 of 5 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL—26 05 00 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision A 23 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 04 NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS INSPECTION AND TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 PURPOSE A. This Practice provides the minimum requirements for field inspection and testing of new, installed electrical equipment and facilities. 1.2 SCOPE A. This Practice describes the inspection and testing procedures for new electrical equipment and systems after installation. This Practice provides minimum acceptable values for the testing results and forms for recording inspection and test values. B. Certain specialty equipment and packaged equipment are application specific and are not covered by this Practice. C. Some inspections and tests may require an independent testing organization or an equipment manufacturer's representative. This Practice does not specify which tests require a third party or designate responsibility for obtaining and coordinating these third parties. These tests, if required, shall be defined in the project scope. D. This Practice does not cover full compliance inspections required by various codes and regulations but does provide assurance of equipment integrity and compliance with project- specific documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Contractor shall refer to Specification 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for overall Project quality assurance requirements. 2. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B. Reference Standards: 1. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 2. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Distribution Equipment And Systems (Neta Ats) 3. ANSI/NETA ETT—Standard For Certification Of Electrical Testing Personnel PART 2 REQUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Testing and inspection shall comply with the provisions of this practice, neta ats, and the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Tests that are necessary to retain the manufacturer's warranty will be conducted in accordance with instructions from the manufacturer. Conflicts between these documents shall be submitted in writing to the owner's authorized representative for resolution. B. Contractor shall be required to develop and provide an inspection and testing plan and testing forms for electrical equipment and facilities to the Owner and Owner's Representitive for review and approval prior to beginning testing. The plan shall provide a means to define a scope of work for inspection and testing as well as define witness requirements. Page 1 of 3 NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT&SYSTEMS INSPECTION & TESTING—26 05 04 RA DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision A 23 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Contractor shall perform all inspections, measurements, and tests as indicated on the approved Contractor's Inspection and Testing Plan and in accordance with the Inspection and Testing Forms. D. Contractor shall comply with all federal, state, and local regulations and codes as well as with site-specific safety procedures and requirements. E. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and conducting the testing per the approved project schedule. F. Inspection, testing, and function test items shall be witnessed by Owner and Owner's Representitive unless specifically waived in writing. Contractor shall give sufficient notice before any witnessed test. 2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test equipment shall be suitable for the tests that will be performed in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 5.2. B. Contractor shall have a calibration program that assures all test equipment performs within rated accuracy. The program shall include traceability to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), calibration frequency, date calibration labels, and calibration instructions and procedures in accordance with the requirements of NETA ATS 2007 Section 5.3. 2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL A. Personnel conducting the electrical tests and inspections shall be qualified for the work by virtue of training and experience. B. Testing personnel shall be completely familiar with the manufacturer's instructions on the proper operation and application of the test equipment being utilized. C. If indicated in the Contractor's Inspection and Testing Plan, the test personnel shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NETA ETT. Where this certification is required, each on- site crew leader shall hold a current certification, Level III or higher, in electrical testing. 2.4 DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTS A. Unless otherwise indicated by the Owner, Contractor shall document test results on Inspection and Testing forms provided by the pproved Contractor Inspection and Testing Plan. Where alternate forms are provided, these forms shall contain all of the visual and mechanical inspection items and tests included in the Contractor's Inspection and Testing forms. B. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the individual test sheets as defined in the project scope. C. Test sheets shall be maintained in an up-to-date condition and are subject to review at any time. D. Copies of individual, completed test forms shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative within five (5)working days after each test. E. A complete set of test forms in electronic or hard copy format shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative at the completion of the test work. Where alternate forms are used, the use of hard-copy or electronic forms shall be agreed between the Owner and the testing contractor. PART 3 ACCEPTABLE MEASUREMENTS 3.1 All test values shall fall within the guidelines of NETA ATS. All components with test results that fall outside the acceptable range and individual measurements that fall outside the average of like measurements stated in NETA ATS shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Owner's Authorized Representative. Page 2 of 3 NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT&SYSTEMS INSPECTION & TESTING—26 05 04 RA DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision A 23 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction END OF SECTION Page 3 of 3 NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT&SYSTEMS INSPECTION & TESTING—26 05 04 RA DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 June 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 Action Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 Quality Assurance The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. (2) Alpha Wire. (3) Belden Inc. (4) Encore Wire Corporation. (5) General Cable Technologies Corporation. (6) Southwire Incorporated (7) Okonite Company (Preferred). B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN, Type THWN, Type XHHW or as indicated on drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Tray cable, Type TC with ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Page 1 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 05 19 -- DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 June 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction (1) AFC Cable Systems, Inc. (2) Gardner Bender. (3) Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. (4) Ideal Industries, Inc. (5) Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. (6) NSi Industries LLC. (7) O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. (8) 3M; Electrical Markets Division. (9) Tyco Electronics/Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 System Description A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Conductor Material Applications A. Feeders: Stranded copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded copper. 3.2 Conductor Insulation and Multiconductor Cable Applications and Wiring Methods A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway Tray cable. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. I. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. J. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. K. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. L. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. M. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicularto surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. N. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." O. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.3 Connections A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-4868. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Page 2 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 05 19 -- DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 June 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. 3.4 Identification A. General Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.5 Field Quality Control A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Contractor will perform a continuity test and megger test for each cable. 3. Perform all testing in presence of owner or owner's representative. D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 4. Procedures used. 5. Results that comply with requirements. 6. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 260519 Page 3 of 3 LOW—VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES—26 05 19 -- DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes: Grounding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Overhead-line grounding. 2. Underground distribution grounding. 3. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 4. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 Informational Submittals A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control"Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agencies field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 Closeout Submittals A. Submit final test reports: 1. Tests shall be conducted and results documented on installed new grounding systems immediately after installation and commissioning of grounding system to determine minimum and maximum values to compare subsequent test readings to. 2. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums of initial commissioning tests, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. Page 1 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Conductors A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 6. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: 1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC. D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.2 Connectors A. General Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2.3 Grounding Electrodes A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. Page 2 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Applications A. Conductors: All conductors shall be stranded conductors unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 Grounding Underground Distribution System Components A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. 3.3 Equipment Grounding A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. Page 3 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power- distribution units. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD-607-A. 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. H. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. 3.4 Installation A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Page 4 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each indicated item, extending around the perimeter of buildings or areas as indicated. Page 5 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and 2/0 for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation. 3.5 Labeling A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.6 Field Quality Control A. All Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness following test. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified or a maximum of 5 ohms, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Page 6 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction END OF SECTION Page 7 of 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—26 05 26 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts,etc.,to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metalic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Source quality-control reports. Page 1 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Metal Conduits, Tubing, and Fittings A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube &Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Form 7 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions were installed and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. Page 2 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric— (Preferred). 5. Approved equal. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged- and-gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company— (Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold /Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. Page 3 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with Form 7 gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 Ib (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 Ib (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). I. Gangable boxes are prohibited. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Rated NEMA 4X unless installation location dictates otherwise, 316 Stainless Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard coating. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Raceway Application A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit within any Containment Area: PVC Coated RGS. 2. Exposed Conduit: PVC Coated RGS or rigid Aluminum. 3. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: PVC Coated RGS or rigid Aluminum. 4. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. a. Flexible metal (steel/aluminum) conduit lengths shall not exceed 18" unless approved by Owner or by the Owner's Representative before installation. 6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4X as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm)trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72". D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid aluminum Form 7 conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use the sealant type as recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. Page 4 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Flexible Metal (Steel/Aluminum) Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. a. Flexible metal (steel/aluminum) conduit lengths shall not exceed 18" unless approved by Owner or by the Owner's Representative before installation. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 Installation A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. F. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. I. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. K. Terminate threaded conduits into boxes or cabinets with threaded hubs. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm)trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2- inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with threaded hubs. Install threaded hubs per the manufacturer's recommendations. M. Do not rely on threaded hubs to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the threaded hubs area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Page 5 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction P. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. T. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RGS that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 18 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 3. Flexible metal conduit lengths longer than 18" require Owner or Owner's Representitive approval prior to installation. Page 6 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 1. Instrumentation control panels shall be mounted in such a manner that the center of any primary control display screens or interface screens shall be no less than 66" (5'-6") or greater than 72" (6'-0") above grade or operator platform. Any deviation from these dimensions shall require Owner or Owner-Representative approval prior to any control panel installation. 2. Instrumentation, electrical or control junction boxes shall be mounted in such a manner that the center of junction box shall maintain the same elevations as defined in Paragraph 3, 3.2,Y,1 unless otherwise approved by Owner or Owner-Representative. 3. Enclosure conduit or cable entry into cabinets, junction boxes or panels shall be bottom or side penetrations only. No top or back penetrations into enclosures shall be allowed. Side penetrations shall occur in the lower 25% of enclosure side only unless otherwise approved by Owner or be the Owner's Representative. Z. Install drains at low points in all conduit runs. 3.3 Sleeve and Sleeve-Seal Installation for Electrical Penetrations A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.4 Protection A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Page 7 of 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM—26 05 33 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 3. Manholes. 4. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Definition The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape. 5. Warning planks. B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details. Page 1 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. D. Source quality-control test reports. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.8 Project Conditions A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: B. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. C. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.9 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect. Page 2 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1.10 Extra Materials A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Conduit A. As per section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 2.2 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color: Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." Or as indicated for each service. 6. Direct-Buried Wring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. C. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. e. Approved equal. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. C. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. Page 3 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction e. Approved equal. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. C. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Approved equal. 2.3 Precast Manholes A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products. 3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc. 9. Approved equal. B. Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application"Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. 1. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches(150 mm)from interior surfaces ofwalls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls. b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks. C. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening. 2. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable. C. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm)thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod. D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade. Page 4 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2.4 Cast-In-Place Manholes A. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod. B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Structural Design Loading: As specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article. 2.5 Utility Structure Accessories A. Pipe Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bilco Company (The). 2. Campbell Foundry Company. 3. Carder Concrete Products. 4. Christy Concrete Products. 5. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. 6. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 7. McKinley Iron Works, Inc. 8. Neenah Foundry Company. 9. NewBasis. 10. Oldcastle Precast Group. 11. Osburn Associates, Inc. 12. Pennsylvania Insert Corporation. 13. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc.. 14. Strongwell Corporation; Lenoir City Division. 15. Underground Devices, Inc. 16. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 17. Utility Vault Co. 18. Wausau Tile, Inc. 19. Approved equal. B. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole. 1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 36 inches. a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in paved areas. 2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system. a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV"for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less. b. Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV"for duct systems with medium-voltage cables. C. Legend: "SIGNAL"for communications, data, and telephone duct systems. 3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those of roof opening. a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. (60 L) where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used. C. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron. Page 5 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction D. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- (50- mm-) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt. 1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000-Ibf (58-kN) minimum tension. E. Pulling Eyes in Nonconcrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforced fastening, 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) diameter eye, rated 2500-Ibf(11-kN) minimum tension. F. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening. 1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-Ibf(180-kN) shear and 60,000-Ibf(270-kN) tension. G. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum at base. 1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 Ibf(53 kN) minimum. H. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch (13-mm) bolt, 5300-Ibf(24-kN) rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-Ibf(30-kN) rated shear strength. I. Cable Rack Assembly: Steel, hot-dip galvanized, except insulators. 1. Stanchions: T-section or channel;2-1/4-inch (57-mm) nominal size; punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) centers for cable-arm attachment. 2. Arms: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)wide, lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm)with 450-Ib(204- kg) minimum capacity to 18 inches(460 mm)with 250-Ib(114-kg) minimum capacity. Arms shall have slots along full length for cable ties and be arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any vertical location on stanchions. 3. Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms. J. Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglass-reinforced polymer. 1. Stanchions: Nominal 36 inches (900 mm) high by 4 inches (100 mm) wide, with minimum of 9 holes for arm attachment. 2. Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm)with 450-Ib(204-kg) minimum capacity to 20 inches (508 mm) with 250-Ib (114-kg) minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be nominally 4 inches (100 mm)wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable ties. K. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. L. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to wall of manhole. Ladder and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel. M. Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 Ibf(270 N) and greater. 2.6 Source Quality Control A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037. B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. Page 6 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A City provided qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Underground Duct Application A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. C. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. D. Underground Ducts Crossing paved paths, walks, driveways, roadways or railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete. 3.2 Underground Enclosure Application A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wring: 1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. 3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. 4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf(13 345-N) vertical loading. B. Manholes: Precast concrete. 1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17. 2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17. 3.3 Earthwork A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 017329 "Cutting and Patching." 3.4 Duct Installation Page 7 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts,with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet(6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. Page 8 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete- encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. 11. Concrete: The concrete shall be red in color, provide concrete with red pigment integrally mixed in. Dry shake or broadcast coloring agents are not to be used. 3.5 Installation of Concrete Manholes, Handholes, and Boxes A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation: 1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. B. Elevations: 1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches (380 mm) below finished grade or as indicated on drawings. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 3. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. 4. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure. C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated. D. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size. 1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder. Page 9 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney. E. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. F. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes. G. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (98 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion. H. Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard"warning sign on the inside surface of each manhole cover. 3.6 Installation of Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving or earth and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete,"with a troweled finish. 2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep). 3.7 Grounding A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.8 Field Quality Control A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of- round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Page 10 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 3.9 Cleaning A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION Page 11 of 11 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS—260543 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 9. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Comply with ANSI Al 3.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 Coordination A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. Page 1 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Power and Control Raceway Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI Al 3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm)wide. Stop stripes at legends. H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent,waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.2 Armored and Metal-Clad Cable Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI Al 3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: Page 2 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. 2.3 Power and Control Cable Identification Materials A. Comply with ANSI Al 3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-)thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear,weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent,waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Page 3 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.4 Conductor Identification Materials A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm)thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-)thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear,weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag. 2.5 Floor Marking Tape A. 2-inch- (50-mm-)wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.6 Underground-Line Warning Tape A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. Page 4 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.7 Warning Labels and Signs A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm)galvanized-steel backing;and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.8 Instruction Signs A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. 2.9 Equipment Identification Labels A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Page 5 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.10 Cables Ties A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C),According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.11 Miscellaneous Identification Products A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Page 6 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 Identification Schedule A. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service and feeder conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Black. (2) Phase B: Red. (3) Phase C: Blue. C. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Brown. (2) Phase B: Orange. (3) Phase C: Yellow. Page 7 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction d. Colors for 600-V and above Circuits: (1) Phase A: Red. (2) Phase B: Black. (3) Phase C: Blue. e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive- backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation. H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. Page 8 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Controls with external control power connections. M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line oftextwith 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment,fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. C. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. I. Enclosed controllers. M. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. Page 9 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Enclosed switches or breakers. S. Enclosed starters. t. Control devices and protective relays. END OF SECTION Page 10 of 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTMES—26 05 53 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 General 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. Page 1 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. Page 2 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.10 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry,work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F(minus 5 deg C)to plus 104 deg F(plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3000 feet (2000 m). B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 3000 feet (2000 m). C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12 Warranty A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 Products 2.1 General Requirements for Panelboards A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X316 stainless steel. C. Corrosive Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 stainless steel. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Page 3 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to boxwith concealed trim clamps. Forsurface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder or metal frame with transparent protective cover. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. Page 4 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 Distribution Panelboards A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: As indicated E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.3 Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.4 Disconnecting and Overcurrent Protective Devices A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. Approved Equal. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker(MCCB): Comply with UL 489,with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Page 5 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. C. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and Izt response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style,suitable for number, size,trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground- fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. 2.5 Accessory Components and Features A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. PART 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1 and as shown on drawings. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and Page 6 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Coordinate with owner to perform inspection and testing. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness inspection of components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Assist owner's agent in performing the following infrared scan tests and inspections: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: Page 7 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction (1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 Adjusting A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION 262416 Page 8 of 8 PANELBOARDS—26 24 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Description A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Wall-switch. 4. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. WP: Weather Proof C. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. D. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. E. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 Administrative Requirements A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.5 Action Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.6 Informational Submittals A. Field quality-control reports. Pagel of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.7 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Forwiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass &Seymour). 5. Approval Equal. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 General Wiring-Device Requirement A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 Straight-Blade Receptacles A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). 2.4 GFCI Receptacles A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. C. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590. 2.5 Toggle Switches Page 2 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Single Pole: b. Cooper; AH1221. C. Hubbell; HBL1221. d. Leviton; 1221-2. e. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 2.6 Wall Plates A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: 304 stainless steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.7 Finishes A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Page 3 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 125 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3.2 GFCI Receptacles A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 Identification A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 WIRING DEVICES—26 27 26 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All items of labor, material,equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.2 Related Sections A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 Informational Submittals Pagel of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components,and accessories,within same product category,from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. Page 2 of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.10 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Fusible Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2.2 Nonfusible Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled 2.3 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. Page 3 of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing,with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and IZt response. F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. G. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 2.4 Molded-Case Switches A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2.5 Enclosures A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS 3. Indoor Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Page 4 of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 Field Quality Control A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing: Assist owner representative to perform testing as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Assist owner representative to perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Submit all final testing reports and documentation to Owner and Owner's Representative upon completion of testing and before energizing equipment. 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 Adjusting a. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Page 5 of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction END OF SECTION Page 6 of 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS—26 28 16 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 3. All items of labor, material, equipment or procedures not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for,the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with,shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications ordrawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which electrical equipment, other devices or procedures are required for each individual Project to ensure the Project electrical system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1.3 Definitions The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. C. MCP: Motor circuit protector. D. N.C.: Normally closed. E. N.O.: Normally open. F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 1. Show tabulations of the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. C. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Page 1 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.5 Informational Submittals The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage solid-state controllers. 1.7 Materials Maintenance Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 4. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. Page 2 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.9 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service. 1.10 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Full-Voltage Controllers A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Rockwell Automation, Inc.;Allen-Bradley brand. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. Page 3 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT,with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA. 6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. C. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 7. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. C. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting. 8. N.C. isolated overload alarm contact. 9. External overload reset push button. C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. 2. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field- adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. 3. MCCB Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB,with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. 2.2 Enclosures A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X 316 Stainless Steel. Page 4 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Indoor Wet Locations: Type 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2.3 Accessories A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil-tight type. a. Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. C. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s). C. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. D. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures. E. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; unwired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural- steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full- load amperes after motors have been installed. D. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 Identification A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. Page 5 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.4 Control Wiring Installation A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 Field Quality Control A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 7. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 Adjusting Page 6 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 25 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. 3.7 Protection A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 262913 Page 7 of 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS—26 29 13 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 26 51 00 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 2. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 Definitions A. LED: Light Emitting Diode B. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. C. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 Action Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture,arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Energy-efficiency data. 3. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 4. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wring Diagrams: For power and control wiring. C. Installation instructions. 1.5 Informational Submittals 1. Lighting fixtures. B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. C. Field quality-control reports. Page 1 of 3 LIGHTING—26 51 00 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 Closeout Submittals A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include operation and maintenance manuals. B. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 Maintenance Material Submittals A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish at least 2 of each type. 2. Globes and Guards: Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 Quality Assurance A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 Coordination A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 General Requirements For Lighting Fixtures and Components A. All new lighting fixtures shall be LED technology. B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 liiinii;lh (3,175 lililililil) minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. B. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Page 2 of 3 LIGHTING—26 51 00 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 21 May 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.2 Identification A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 Field Quality Control A. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION Page 3 of 3 LIGHTING—26 51 00 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Contractor shall furnish any and all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational fiber optic communications system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and any existing fiber optic communications equipment or fiber optic communications equipment furnished and installed under other contracts B. Any and all supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the fiber optic communications equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all installations. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which communications equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project communications system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents 1.2 Quality Assurance A. Contractor Qualifications: An experienced contractor who has the following qualifications as a minimum: 1. Experience utilizing directional drilling (trench-less technology) methods as described within these specifications if these methods are required. 2. The installer and tester for the fiber premises and outside cable plant shall be RCDD (Registered Communication Distribution Designer) Certified. Reference BiCSi latest edition. 1.3 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals" for all required submittal requirements. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.4 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards" for all applicable standards. 1. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. Page 1 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction PART2 PRODUCTS This section contains the specifications and requirements for all communications and other devices currently approved for use in Projects initiated by the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which communications equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project communications system is fully functional and operational upon completion. A. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 2.2 Manufacturers A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, Corning Altos, or approved equal. 2.3 Fiber Optic Cable A. Fiber Optics Cable 1. Shall be all-dielectric loose tube and water-blocked. 2. Shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 3. Maximum attenuation shall not exceed .4 db per km 4. Shall be suitable for outdoor aerial and duct underground installation. 5. Shall be approved and listed by RUS 7 CFR 1755.900 6. Shall conform to all ANSVICEA S-87-640 test and design criteria. All fibers in each cable bundle assembly shall be tested and verify for continuity and light attenuation prior to leaving the factory. All test data shall be made available to the installation contractor upon acceptance of the cable. 7. Fiber optic cables shall be multi-mode type cable unless specifically noted otherwise. 8. Corning Altos or approved equal B. Connectors 1. All connectors shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 2. Fan out kits shall be outdoor buffer tube with a minimum of 24 inches tubing length. 3. Connectors shall be for use with the above multi-mode cables unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Below Grade Splice Closures (if required) 1. Shall be tested in accordance with Bellcore Testing Requirement GR-771-CORE and UL 1863. 2. Shall be suitable for submersion in 20 feet of water head. 3. Shall be configurable for future re-entry. 4. Shall be of a pre-molded port multi - section end plates with ports accepting cable diameters up to 1.25 inches. 5. Shall have the capacity of up to 72 single fusion splices. 6. Shall conform to and support the splice requirements as noted in the contract drawing documents. 7. Shall be Performed Coyote Splice Closure splice trays or approved equal. Page 2 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.4 Conduit A. PVC Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of A.N.S.I. Standard C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads with PVC external coating and urethane internal coating. Exterior PVC coating shall be a minimum of 40 mil thick, internal urethane coating shall be a minimum of 2 mils thick. 1. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds Form 7 or Appleton. All fittings shall be PVC coated. 2. Boxes: Cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or Appleton. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit with a 90°C UL rating, approved for direct burial and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or an equal. 1. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 900 elbows shall be from the factory. 2. Boxes: For use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same manufacturer as the conduit. C. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit: 1. Shall be constructed of polymeric materials, which are lightweight, flexible corrosion resistant and non-conductive. 2. The duct shall be pigmented throughout the entire cross-section so as to produce a uniform color. 3. Shall be smoothwall both inner and outer surface with a controlled outside diameter in accordance with ASTM Standard D 3035 4. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Certified. 5. Shall have a minimum plastic density (polymer range) of .940 - .950 g/cc tested in accordance with ASTM Standard D 1505. 6. Shall have a crush strength of 2020 lbs/ft length measured in accordance with a modified ASTM D 2412 test method. 7. 1-1/4 HDPE shall have a average wall thickness of .195 inches with an average OD of 1.660 inches and an average ID of 1.270 inches. 8. Shall be Dura-line SDR 9 or approved equal. D. Uses Permitted: Unless otherwise indicated, all conduit shall be as follows: 1. RGS: Exposed above grade outdoors and as a transition between HDPE underground and RGS above grade 2. HDPE: Underground direct buried via directional drilling methods (if utilized) 3. PVC: Underground, concealed in concrete. 4. Flexible Metal (Steel/Aluminum) Conduit: Equipment connection. (a) Flexible metal (steel/aluminum) conduit lengths shall not exceed 18" unless approved by Owner or by the Owner's Representative before installation. 2.5 Enclosures and Boxes A. Underground Locations: Pull boxes used in underground conduit runs shall be made of Page 3 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction polymer concrete, shall be UL Listed and shall be of a size and construction appropriate for the intended application. Concrete pull boxes intended for underground installation shall be precast in sections with parkway or traffic rated covers, clearly marked as indicated on the drawings. These boxes shall have a vertical design load of 22,568 lbs with a test load of 33,852 lbs. Their respective traffic rated covers shall contain the proper logo on the cover and be rated for a minimum design load of 15,000 lbs over a 10 inch square with a minimum test load of 22,568 lbs (Quazite Type PG or approved equivalent). B. Outdoor Locations: NEMA Type 4X and 3R boxes and enclosures shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel, and shall be furnished with a gasketed weathertight cover of the same material. Enclosures and cabinets for electrical equipment shall conform to NEMA Standard 250 and U.L. Standard 50. NEMA Type 4X waterproof boxes and enclosures shall be welded 316 stainless steel, of the sizes and materials indicated on the drawings complete with screw-fastened, gasketed covers and drilled and tapped conduit entries of the proper sizes and arrangements. C. All penetrations into boxes shall be made into the bottom of the enclosure or lower 25% of the sides of the boxes, utilizing fittings made for the specific conditions in which the enclosure is installed and sealed accordingly. Penetrations into the top or back of enclosures shall not be allowed 2.6 Equipment Racks, Fasteners and Supports A. All framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel. Hot dip after fabrication. B. Nuts, bolts shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. All stainless steel hardware shall be a minimum 316 Grade stainless steel. C. All conduit clamps shall be hot-dipped galvanized one-hole clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Pull Box Installation A. Pull-boxes shall be placed as shown on the construction drawings. Hand-holes may be moved to locations more practical when necessary upon approval by The Project Manager. B. The location of pull boxes shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only. The Contractor is responsible for verifying locations prior to placement. 3.2 Excavation and Backfill A. Excavation: 1. The trench shall be as straight as practical. The bottom of the trench shall be smooth and free from any sharp edges. The trench shall be kept clear of debris and loose rock. All changes in trench grade shall be gradual with no more than six (6) inches of vertical rise in every five (5) feet of horizontal run. 2. Any open trench shall be fenced, covered or otherwise barricaded. Exceptions are subject to approval by ONSWTP Project Manager. Good judgment and care must be exercised to prevent persons from falling into the open trench, or other damages to persons or property. 3. Roadways, which are open cut, shall be opened just prior to conduit placement. In no case shall the roadway be left impassable at the end of the day. Safety of the general public is paramount and appropriate steps shall be taken to ensure safety at all times. 4. The contractor is responsible for the haul off and proper disposal of all spoils materials removed from the trench. 5. The contractor shall provide the necessary means to carry storm water away from the work area and keep the work area free of obstructions. Page 4 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. A minimum clearance of twelve inches (12") shall be maintained between existing utilities and ONSWTP conduits. 7. Trenches shall be promptly backfilled with earth and tamped with a mechanical tamper in 6 inch (15.24 cm) lifts so that the earth is restored to original grade to assure no hazard exists to vehicular, animal or pedestrian traffic. Trenches will be properly guarded or barricaded to prevent damage or injury. 8. Select backfill shall be unfrozen material, free of rocks or other debris. 9. Select backfill shall be used as a cushion and shall extend 3 inches on the sides and floor of trench to 6 inches above top of conduit. 10. Trenching processes will comply with all established Federal and State Safety Standards. B. Backfill: 1. The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP, promptly following duct placement. 2. The backfill shall consist of the materials previously excavated or equal materials and shall conform to the following requirements: a. The backfill shall be placed and compacted in not more than 6" lifts, from the top of the installation to the ground line. The backfill shall be of suitable material free from boulders, roots, sod or other vegetation. In areas inaccessible to tamping type rollers, a mechanical tamper of a size suitable for the work involved may be used. b. Pneumatic tampers shall be operated at pressures no less than those recommended by the manufacturer. C. A 95% minimum density compaction of backfill is required or greater if required by the governing Federal, State, County, or City agency. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all compaction tests. If the proper compaction is not achieved, the Contractor shall remove all backfill materials and the backfill and compaction will be repeated at the Contractor's expense until the compaction tests are accepted. 3.3 Trenched Road A. Pavement replacement shall match existing paving in type of pavement appearance, wear surface and durability to the maximum extent practical. Replacement shall match existing structures and shall include curbing, walkways, or any other concrete structure(s) damaged during construction. Pavement repair shall be subject to approval by The Project Manager and must conform to the requirements of the local governing authority having jurisdiction including required cutbacks, or"T"topping. Pavement repair not installed in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications shall be removed and replaced. B. Roadways shall only be trenched as a last resort. The City of Corpus Christi will not approve the open trenching of roadways unless trench-less technology methods are not applicable. 3.4 Concrete Placement A. Cement: Portland Cement shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C150 for type II Portland Cement. The cement shall be free of lumps and contamination by water other foreign matter. B. Water: Water shall potable and free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, salts and other impurities. C. Sand: Sand shall be clear, hard and durable grains, free of excessive foreign matter. D. Aggregate: Nominal 3/"durable crushed rock or limestone, free of excessive foreign matter. E. Mixing: 1. Maximum water to cement ratio: 6.5 gallons per 94 pound sack of Portland Cement Page 5 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Mix Ratio: 1 part cement, 2 parts sand, 3 parts aggregate. 28 day compressive strength, 3000 pounds 3.5 Directional Boring A. This item includes all labor, equipment and certain materials required to install conduit using directional boring techniques. The running line of the conduit shall be kept straight and level. Any changes, either vertical or horizontal shall be gradual with no more than six(6) inches of deviation in every five (5) linear feet. Special care shall be taken to insure that the conduit connection between bores be kept straight and level. B. All utilities shall be pot holed for verification of location and depth prior to boring. C. The boring machines shall be grounded at all times during operation. The grounding method and operator's safety equipment shall comply with the manufacturer's guidelines and requirements. Adequate barricades shall be erected to limit access to the boring machine to operating personnel only. D. Excavation and backfilling of bore pits and potholes shall conform to that described in the sections noted above. E. Separation of Topsoil: Anywhere a bore pit, or other excavation exceeds 18" in width at the surface, the topsoil will be separated from the subsoil with topsoil to be placed back as the surface layer of soil when the hole is back-filled. F. Contractor shall provide the coupling machine required for the installation of the connectors on all HDPE conduits. G. The Contractor is responsible for all steel pipe and HDPE conduit broken off and lost in the borehole. H. If at any time the proposed running line crosses an existing utility, the excavated pothole shall remain open until the Project Manager or appointed representative is able to witness the bore head pass the existing utility. I. Where a pipe casing is utilized, the ends of the casing shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of water or other foreign materials. 3.6 Proving The Duct A. The duct shall be proved to verify continuity and integrity by pulling a solid rubber mandrel or a mandrel of other solid material such as steel or aluminum through the duct. The mandrel shall be a minimum of 3" long and 1" diameter. A City project representative must be present to witness all duct-proving operations. Duct that is not proved in the presence of a City Project representative shall not be considered complete. B. All duct systems shall be installed to allow for a sealed pneumatic system. The couplings are to be installed as per the manufacturer's instruction. It is the responsibility of the subcontractor to provide a clean, sealed, uniform duct to the cable placing crews. 3.7 Subsurface Obstructions A. Contractor is responsible for locating and avoiding all subsurface obstructions. It is the Subcontractor's responsibility to verify the locations of subsurface obstructions shown on the drawings as well as any additional obstructions not identified on the drawings. Contractor shall notify owners and operators of foreign pipelines or other utilities at least two working days prior to excavation near the utility. B. Contractor shall pothole all existing utilities or substructure crossings before excavation crosses their locations. If potholing does not expose the existing utility the Contractor shall request that the utility be located again to verify that the utility is beyond or deeper than the trench line or that the utility has been miss-marked. A minimum of twelve inches (12") shall be maintained between existing utilities and conduits. This shall be included in the lump sum price. Damage to existing utilities is not acceptable and termination of this Contract may result from this negligence. C. Where construction will take place in areas near existing utilities, it is imperative that the Page 6 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction Contractor meets with the approved representative responsible for the utility to resolve any depth or construction line conflicts prior to the start of construction. The City Project Engineer of Record must be notified of this meeting and may be present. D. DAMAGED UTILITIES 1. A copy of the contractors Cable Awareness Program must be submitted to the City Project Manager prior to construction. 2. Any utility damage will be reported to the utility owner and the City immediately. This includes any damage to the City owned cable. 3. Contractor will cooperate with the owner of the utility to facilitate any repairs necessary. 4. A copy of all documentation regarding the utility damage shall be submitted to the City Project Manager. 3.8 Roadway, Railroad and Other Bored Crossings A. In no case shall the completed crossing be less than 48 inches deep at its shallowest point. B. Contractor shall not excavate into the side slopes of raised track beds. C. Backfill for excavations shall be mechanically tamped in 6-inch lifts to the same density as adjoining earth. 3.9 Right of Way/Property Protection and Restoration A. General: 1. The Contractor shall protect the Right-of-Way/Property and minimize the damage from construction operations. 2. Good soil erosion practices shall be practiced during all construction operations. B. Restoration: 1. Contractor shall keep the premises where work is being performed in a neat, clean, and orderly condition, and on completion of the work hereunder, Contractor shall remove all of its tools and equipment from the premises and any debris shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor. 2. Right-of-Way/Property located in non-paved areas shall be restored to its original or better condition within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in the ONSWTP's opinion, following duct-placing operations. In areas where open trench methods were used and backfill mounded over the trench, grading or filling will be required for final restoration of the Right-of-Way/Property. All rock and debris brought to the surface and left after backfilling shall be removed and disposed of, as directed by the City. 3. All areas disturbed by the construction activities shall be restored and re-seeded per the requirements and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. 4. Right-of-Way/Property located in paved areas shall be restored to operation for vehicular traffic, with temporary paving or the permanent paving, within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in The City's opinion, following duct placing operations. 5. All unit prices include the cost of seed, mulch, hay, hydro-mulch, sod, water, gravel, soil, sand, rip-rap, and all other materials required by the City or any governmental authority for site restoration. C. All rights of way clearing are included in all buried and underground outside plant placement pricing. 3.10 Fencing and Other Excavation Barricades A. Temporary safety fencing erected around the Contractor's excavations shall be installed to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP. During any non-working hours, Contractor shall place steel plates over any open trenches that would pose a threat to vehicular traffic. The steel plates shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the weight of vehicular traffic and anchored in Page 7 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction place to prevent movement. Open trenches not exposed to vehicular traffic shall also be covered with plywood (or equal) sufficient to carry any pedestrian traffic, including motorcycles, bicycles, etc. and anchored in place. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to take all steps necessary to prevent all accidents and to protect the general public. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, maintaining and removing barricades, flashers, fences, plates, and ramps necessary to protect the public and property owner from involvement with excavations, open ditches, and other work areas 3.11 Fiber Optic Cable Installation A. The contractor shall comply with all fiber cable manufactures recommendations for the general installation of the fiber optic cable. The installation shall include but not necessarily limited to the pulling of fiber thru dedicated conduit / inner duct raceway systems, the bending of the fiber, the splicing and termination of the cable, and the testing of all cable, associated splicing and termination hardware. B. The contractor shall follow the manufacture spec#SRP-005-001 dated October 2002 entitled Fiber Optic Cable Placing — Duct from Corning Cable Systems for installation of outside plant fiber cable. C. The contractor shall use fusion splicing for all required splices. See field testing for quality control measures. D. The contractor shall use type SC connectors where required. All un-terminated cable shall be neatly coiled and bundled to prevent damage to fiber ends. E. All Fiber Optic Cable is to be placed inside duct system or in cable tray. F. Bends of small radii and twists that may damage the fiber optic cable shall be avoided. During cable placement, cable shall not be bent in a radius less than twenty (20) times the outside diameter of the cable or as specified by the manufacturer. Pulleys, sheaves or radius wheels shall be used to meet this requirement. G. Cable shall not be pulled with more than 600 lbs. of dynamic tension. Safeguards such as breakaway swivels, adjustable slip-clutch capstan winches, or pulling dynamometers shall be used. H. Cable lubricant shall be used to reduce the pulling tension on longer segments of the cable placement or at the discretion of the City. Cable lubricants must be compatible with the fiber optic cable's outer sheath. Verification of the compatibility between the fiber optic cable and the cable lubricant will be required before any application. After cable installation, the inner- duct shall be sealed at the strand level using approved foam. I. Slack coils of approximately fifty (50) feet will be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as splice locations and so noted on construction drawings. Fiber identification tags shall be attached. Slack coils of approximately twenty (20) feet shall be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as fiber pull boxes and so noted on construction drawings. J. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to plan each cable pull using information about splice locations, pull box locations, staging areas, conduit layout, manhole locations, etc. K. Each cable shall be placed in a continuous piece, with termination and splice locations as shown on the construction drawings. No additional splices are allowed, unless specifically added by the City in writing. L. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and storage of the fiber optic cable. If necessary, a competent security guard shall be maintained on site when fiber optic cable is kept on the street overnight. M. All tracer wires shall be installed in the HDPE in which the fiber is installed and each tracer wire shall be spliced within each pull box. N. A telecommunication test station shall be located at each fiber optic cable splice box and the corresponding tracer wire shall be properly terminated as noted in the manufactures instruction information. Page 8 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.12 Warning Tape and Line Markers A. Contractor shall place buried cable warning tape at all times when plowing, trenching, and backhoeing for burial of conduit for fiber optic cable. B. Buried cable warning tape shall be installed for optimum protection at a depth of twelve inches (12") below final grade. C. Contractor shall install line markers at all changes in cable running line direction, splices, waterways, subsurface utilities, hand-holes and at both sides of street, bridge or railroad crossings. At no time shall any markers be spaced more than 500 feet apart. Markers shall be positioned so that they can be seen from the location of the cable and generally set facing perpendicular to the cable running line. D. A readily identifiable marker shall be placed at each right of way line where it is crossed by the buried cable. A marker should be at least 4 feet above ground and at the right of way line. Additional markers shall be placed at least every 500 feet where the cable is placed longitudinally on the right-of-way. 3.13 Splicing A. Contractor personnel performing splicing procedures shall be properly trained to splice and test fiber optic cable. B. All fibers are to be fusion spliced. (Except mechanical splices are allowed within the appropriate splice housings either existing or proposed) C. All spliced fibers will be protected by a fiber optic heat shrink sleeve. A heat oven will be used to shrink these sleeves. A heat gun which is hand applied shall not be permitted. Care must be exercised to prevent damage to exposed fibers by overheating. The acrylic coating shall not be removed beyond the areas that will be covered by the heat shrink sleeves. D. To insure acceptable splices prior to closing and encapsulating the splice case, the Contractor will monitor the splice while it is being performed using an OTDR system. Encapsulation shall be performed immediately after testing is 100% complete and accepted. E. Each splice is to be tested bi-direction ally at the required cable operational wavelength. The maximum splice loss, in one direction, shall be 0.45 dB. The bi-directional average loss shall be no greater than 0.15 dB. F. Negative losses or Gainers, shall be added to positive losses and averaged to determine the bi-directional splice loss. Gainers or losses may not exceed 0.3 dB and must be within ten percent (10%) of each other when tested bi-directionally. G. If after five (5) attempts or where high negative loss values are being consistently obtained after many splice attempts, the Contractor is unable to meet the average splice loss objectives due to a gainer, the City Project Manager shall be notified and the Contractor shall: 1. In the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will make an additional three (3) attempts to splice the cable. If the splice meets the specifications, the Contractor will complete splicing activities at this location. 2. If the splice fails to meet the specifications after the Contractor attempts to splice the cable in the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will cut off and label one meter of cable from each of the cables being spliced. The Contractor shall then re- attempt to splice the cables. If after five (5) attempts the splice fails to meet City performance objectives, the Contractor will notify the City Project Manager that they were unsuccessful and complete the splicing activities at this location. H. If the second attempt to splice the cable fails (after the one meter sections have been removed) the City will pay the Contractor as if this were an additional splice point at the unit rates specified in the pricing forms. I. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the City Project Manager of an out of specification Page 9 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction splice. Failure to do so may result in the Contractor having to re-enter the splice location and re-splice the cable at their own expense. 3.14 Field Quality Control A. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 1. Fiber Cable Plant a. The fiber cable manufacturer shall not ship cable with any single strand failures in the cable bundle. b. The contractor shall field test each count of fiber optic cable individually prior to unrolling the fiber off the reel for field installation. The test shall be a continuity test utilizing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). All tests shall be documented. Tests that reveal a cable light reflection loss greater than 110% of the cable manufacture's published specifications or factory tests shall be rejected (typically 5db / km). A fiber cable bundle that has more than a 1% cable test failure shall be rejected and not used in this installation. Fiber cable count bundles less than 10 strands shall have 0% failures. In the event the bundle exceeds 0% failures the cable shall be rejected and not used in this installation. C. Once the cable is installed and prior to splicing or terminating, the cable should again be continuity tested as noted in paragraph B above. The same test criteria shall apply. d. Once the cable is installed and terminated all outside plant cable backbone shall be tested by: OTDR in both directions and at both wavelengths of light transmission in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.1 (an average of the two will be used). The test criteria shall then be based upon both sum of connector cable and splice attenuation. Connector attenuation shall not exceed the No. of connector pairs times the published nominal connector loss typically .75db and the splice attenuation shall not exceed the number of splices times the allowed splice loss of .3db.End to End Attenuation as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7. All fibers that are left un-terminated will be tested using an OTDR. e. The contractor shall use a high resolution OTDR for testing connectors and splices and shall furnish to the City Project Manager a signature trace of all tests performed. High resolution OTDR's provide accurate repeatable measurements to be taken from short distances (66ft) to several miles. f. The contractor shall test each fiber transmitter and receiver in a two stage process as documented in BiSCi Standards 2000 Edition Chapter 10 Fiber Cable Tests. 3.15 Documentation A. Test data results shall be submitted to the City Project Manager on Contractor supplied test data forms no later than 5 working days after the completion of the testing. The test data forms shall be completely and legibly filled out. Test data results shall be submitted as a neatly organized and indexed document for each segment (end point to end point). The document shall contain the following: 1. Copies of all OTDR fiber tests on computer disks, labeled with endpoints, optical length of splice location, and the date of the test. 3.16 System Warranty A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required warranty and support requirements. 3.17 Acceptance Testing The Contractor will be required to perform the following tests in order to confirm system acceptance: A. Bi-directional OTDR Splice Test Page 10 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Each fiber at each splice point will be tested bi-directionally at the required wavelength with an OTDR capable of long range and high resolution testing. This test will be from an end point designated by the City Project Manager. The maximum loss for each splice in one direction shall be 0.15 dB and the maximum bi-directional average loss shall be 0.10 dB. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a Contractor supplied "Splice Loss Worksheet". This test will be performed in conjunction with the bi- directional segment test after the closure has been closed, encapsulated and positioned. B. Bi-directional End-To-End Segment Test 1. Each fiber of each span shall be tested at required wavelength from end point to end point. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a contractor supplied "Segment Loss Worksheet". This test will be performed after all of the splicing within the segment has been completed, splice cases closed, encapsulated and positioned. C. Bi-directional End-To-End Power Test 1. Each fiber of each span shall be tested in both directions from end-to-end using the proper wavelength stabilized light source and power meter. The average end-to-end losses must be within the ONSWTP's specifications. The loss budgets for each loop includes: 0.4 dB/km @ 1310nm and .3 dB/ km @ 1550nm (fiber loss), 0.15 dB/splice, and 0.5 dB/connector. The results of this test are to be recorded on the contractor supplied test data sheets and submitted to the City's Project Manager. 2. Contractor shall arrange to have a City representative present during power testing. Power testing performed without a City representative present will be invalid and must be re-done at the Contractor's expense. 3. The Contractor is required to utilize an OTDR capable of producing fiber test documentation on computer disks and on a laser printer. These disks, along with the software needed to view and manipulate the test data, will be turned over to the ONSWTP two (2) days after testing is completed. The Contractor shall use one of the following OTDR emulation software programs: Siecor-1001-PC, Laser Precision PC- OTDR or PC-3000, or Tektronix FMTAP. 4. For the purposes of bi-directional OTDR testing, bare fiber adapters may be utilized. 3.18 As Built Drawings A. Contractor shall redline drawings during the course of construction to show the actual alignment, depth, and other variances to the construction drawings on a daily basis. The drawings will be available for review by the City's representative when requested on the job site. Additionally, all redline drawings will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a weekly basis including all actual construction to-date. B. A set of contract drawings shall be set aside for the sole purpose of redline "as built drawings". These drawings shall be maintained as outlined above. At the conclusion of the Contract, this set of drawings shall be turned over to the City Project Manager. C. All red line fiber drawings must also reflect any and all changes to the fiber cable plant interconnectivity. These notes should be reflected on the existing contract fiber interconnectivity drawings. D. Red line drawings shall be protected from the elements, as they will become part of Project records. Red line drawings shall be marked to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the work as originally shown using the following method: 1. All annotations will be made legibly with erasable red pencil. 2. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. 3. When changing text or dimensions, line through the old information and enter the new. 4. Use the same units of measure and the same precision as existing dimensions. 5. Dimensions will be referenced to the leased tract line. Page 11 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 2 18 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. When changing figures or details, annotate in the same drawing style as existing figures, and use a straight edge when creating lines and dimension leaders. 7. Provide any new information deemed important to the customer, but not shown on construction or shop drawings. 8. Note related change order numbers where applicable. 9. Show station numbers, offset and depth at all landmarks and 50 foot intervals. END OF SECTION Page 12 of 12 COMMUNICATION OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING—27 13 23 R2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of providing identifying devices for the following: 1. Piping 2. Equipment 3. Valves 4. Fire sprinkler and piping B. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and fully functional process identification system as described in this Specification. 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals" for all required submittal requirements. B. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Product data sheets for identifying devices. 2. A list of where devices are to be installed, and the data to be included on each identifying device. 3. Any and all other requested information or data. 1.3 Standards The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI A13.1 I Pipe Marking Specifications A. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes,specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive, adhesive-backed vinyl plastic label having the lettering indicated on background color as scheduled. Provide labels manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Corp. or Brady "Perma Code". Provide labels having an arrow to indicate the direction of flow. Provide 1-1/4-inch high letters. B. Outdoor Pipe Markers: Seton"Weather Code"Fade resistant, vinyl markers,2-1/4 by 9 inches. Pagel of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Valve Identification: Provide Seton [Style 2961, 1-1/2-inch round, plastic tag, Style 250-BL Black Filled, 1-1/2-inch round, brass tag, or approved equivalents] with proper identification stamped [or incised into plastic] on tag. Tag shall have the proper prefix followed by a code number that is unique and identifies the valve from all others in the project. Provide hole in top of tag for mounting chain. Provide brass jack chain, copper metal meter seals, or brass "S" hooks as appropriate. D. Equipment Nameplate: Seton Style 2060 "Seton-ply" engraved plastic plaque, approximately 3/4 by 2-1/2 inches in size. Plaque shall be 1/16 inch thick having beveled edges and drilled with two mounting holes when attached by screws. Mounting screws shall be stainless steel. Lettering shall be approximately 3/16 inch high. Text to include equipment mark and equipment description (Example: EXHAUST FAN EF-5). Identification label on nameplate shall correspond to a typewritten legend included in the O & M Manual which includes the following. 1. Equipment identifier. 2. Location inside building (or on project site) 3. Manufacturer's model number. 4. Brief description of function. 5. Reference to shop drawings, parts lists, or other data included in the O & M Manual E. Fire Sprinkler System Signs: Signs for fire protection system shall conform to NFPA-13 and shall be equal to Seton Style SFB, furnished in porcelain with "white on red" color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Install piping complete with insulation and valves in place prior to installing identification devices. Mount electrical components, including electrical control devices. Piping shall be dry and free of oil, grease, or other contaminants. Insulation shall be completely dry. 3.2 Installation A. Install pipe labels on piping exposed to view, in any location inside buildings or structures, or in underground vaults, pump stations, basements, or other exposed locations. B. Install pipe labels on piping exposed to view, in any location inside buildings or structures, or in underground vaults, pump stations, basements, or other exposed locations. C. Name the fluid flowing inside the pipe on color coded labels with text per the schedule below. Labels shall also include an arrow indicating the direction of flow. 3.3 Valve Identification A. Install a valve tag on all valves. Attach the tag to hand wheel of valve stem so that it does not interfere with operation of valve tag brass link chains or copper meter seals furnished by the Tag Manufacturer. B. Number valves to correspond to a typewritten list included in the Operational and Maintenance Manual and include the following information: 1. Valve Number 2. Description of piping fluid or purpose 3. Normal position of valve (Open or Closed) 4. Manufacturer's catalog number Page 2 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Brief description of valve specification 6. Brief description of valve's function in the system C. Valve identification shall be based on the following example: INS I 11111111 Domestic Crane Gate rising Shut off to P 1 Water Rm. 103 Open Fig. 315C stem heater 3.4 Equipment Identification A. Provide an equipment identifier on each separate piece of equipment, including process equipment, HVAC equipment, plumbing equipment (other than plumbing fixtures), and electrical equipment. Provide a nameplate for each separate piece of electrical equipment, including but not limited to panelboards,switchgear,starters,disconnects, control devices and control panels. Provide name tags for each separate switch, starter, contactor, or other compartment on electrical switchgear. B. Engrave lettering on nameplates corresponding to the identification marks. Install nameplates prominently on equipment not occurring in occupied spaces. Install nameplates on the inside covers of lighting panelboards. Install nameplates on all other equipment centered and at top of equipment. Nameplates shall not be installed in a location that interferes with the equipment's ability to operate. C. Attach nameplates to exterior equipment with two 3/8-inch stainless steel screws. Interior plaque may be attached by screws, or by the adhesion method when approved by the Engineer. 3.5 Special Gases A. Provide a nameplate at each outlet of special gases. Attach nameplates directly above and centered on the outlet or valve. The label shall correspond with the supplied gas, and the plate color shall correspond with the incised identification disk installed on the valve. B. Install a nameplate above each active gas cylinder location with the complete name printed followed by the chemical designation (Example: Helium HE). Colors shall correspond to the color used on the cylinders as used by the Compressed Gas Association, Inc. 3.6 Potable and Non-Potable Water A. Provide name tags at every water hydrant or outlet. Fabricate name tags of 3/4-by-1-1/2-by- 1/8-inch aluminum with a medium, duranodic finish and plexiglas face panel. The face panel shall have 1-inch high, white, helvetica medium lettering on blue background stating "Potable Water", or white lettering on green background stating "Non-Potable Water". Place signs on walls above the hydrant locations and attach to backplates. Yard hydrants shall have concrete piers which are 6 inches in diameter by 36 inches with signs attached to the face of the concrete directly in front of the hydrants. Extend the piers 4 inches minimum above finish grade. Signs shall be manufactured by Vomer Products, Inc., equal to Vocator Exterior sign series E9/12. 3.7 Schedules A. Prepare a typed schedule showing piping label requirements, valve tag identification, and equipment tags. Include each valve or piping type and the appropriate identification on the schedule. Submit the schedule to the Engineer for approval. B. Mark valve tags and pipe labels to conform with the following legend, or with requirements of standards noted. Include the full name, as appearing underthe column heading"Description", and the abbreviation under the column heading "Abbrev. Legend." Page 3 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Revise schedule for each individual project. Plumbing Sewer, Sanitary W SW Black on Green Sewer, Storm SS SS Black on Green Waste, Drain W DP Black on Green Waste, Acid W AW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Cold P CW Black on Green Water, Domestic, Hot P HW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Ret. P HWR Black on Yellow Water, Distilled P DW Black on Green Water, Non-potable N NPW Black on Green Fire Protection Fire Protection, Mains F FM White on Red Fire Protection, Sprinkler F FS White on Red Gas Piping Natural Gas G NG Black on Yellow Fuel Gas G NG Black on Yellow Acetylene G AC Black on Yellow Argon G AG White on Blue Hydrogen G HG Black on Yellow Nitrogen G NI Black on Green Nitrous Oxide G NO White on Blue Methane G MT Black on Yellow Oxygen G OX Black on Yellow Compressed Air G CA White on Blue Instrument Air G IA White on Blue Vapor G VG Black on Yellow Vacuum G VP White on Blue HVAC Refrigerant, Suction H RS Black on Green Refrigerant, Liquid H RL Black on Green Chilled Water H CW Black on Green Chilled Water Ret. H CWR Black on Green Hot Water H HW Black on Yellow Page 4 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction Hot Water, Ret. H jHWR Black on Yellow Condensate H CD Black on Green Process Piping Lime PP LI White on Green Chlorine PP CH Black on Yellow Ammonia PP AM Black on Yellow Primary Effluent PP PE White on Green Primary Sludge PP PS White on Green Raw Sewage PP SR White on Green Recir. Sewage PP RS White on Green Recir. Sludge PP RR White on Green Thickened Sludge PP TS White on Green Activated Sludge PP AS White on Green Electrical Panelboards LP-1 White on Black Starters for Exhaust Fan S/EF-1 White on Black Control Panels for Exhaust CP/EF-1 White on Black Fan Disconnects for Exhaust Fan DS/EF-1 White on Black Junction Boxes JB/101 White on Black Controllers for Exhaust Fan CI/EF-1 White on Black D. Piping Color Schedule: Potable Water Light Blue Compressed Air Light Green Instrument Air Light Green with Dark Green Bands Chlorine (gas, liquid, or vent) Yellow Chlorine (solution) Yellow with Red Bands Liquid Alum Yellow with Orange Bands Alum (solution) Yellow with Green Bands Ammonia Yellow with Brown Bands Chlorine Dioxide (solution) Yellow with Blue Bands Page 5 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 May 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction Ferric Chloride Brown with Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Brown with Yellow Bands Polymers White with Green Bands Liquid Caustic White with Red Bands Caustic(solution) White with Orange Bands Fluoride White with Yellow Bands Ozone Stainless Steel with White Bands Settled Water Green Filter Effluent Light Blue Backwash Supply Light Blue Drain Dark Grey Raw Water Tan END OF SECTION Page 6 of 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT-40 05 53 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Scope A. The General Requirements for Instrumentation and Control Systems Work as described below: 1. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall provide any and all hardware, software, and configuration and integration for a PLC-based Instrumentation and Process Control system. Contractor shall provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents: a. Provide any and all instrumentation, hardware, conductors, raceway and any other materials required for a complete and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract Documents. Provide any and all labor and materials specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide any and all required software and configuration and programming in the PLC for a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. C. Coordinate and fully cooperate with Owner to provide all required PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing HMI system. d. Provide all required personnel for check out, testing, calibration, commissioning and start-up of the provided new system. e. Provide personnel to train the Owner's staff as specified in this Specification. f. Provide any and all HMI software programming and configuration required to create new Operator HMI screens and modify any existing Operator HMI screens as specified. g. Provide any and all required drivers to receive and transmit data over the specified Ethernet data highway to fully communicate with the PLC system provided by the System Integrator Contractor. h. Coordinate and fully cooperate with the Owner to provide all required system programming necessary to interface with the existing SCADA system for a complete and operational system as specified. i. Create or modify all required data bases in Owner's existing SCADA system. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. General: 1. Contractor shall refer to Specification 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for overall Project quality assurance requirements. 2. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. B. Reference Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 2. Electronic Industry Association (EIA). 3. International Electro-Technical CoHMlssion (IEC). 4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Pagel of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM Al 53 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM B68 Seamless Copper Tube ASTM D1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable 6. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 7. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 8. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 9. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 10. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT-P- 645a. 11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. 13. Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards: RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate Chambers S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP12.1-1960 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 14. American Petroleum Institute (API) Standards: API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems API RP 520 Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation of Pressure- Relieving Systems in Refineries 15. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA) Standards: PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology RC5-10-1963 Resistance Thermometers 16. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 17. Factory Mutual (FM). Page 2 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 18. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313-1971), C37.90a-1974. 19. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 1.3 Guarantees A. Refer to Section 2.9 of this Specification, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for required guarantees for materials and support. 1.4 Contractor's Qualifications A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be regularly engaged in the design, installation and maintenance of PLC based control systems. PCSS must submit documentation listed in Section 1.4.B.5 below that verifies and demonstrates the following minimum qualifications: 1. Organization Facilities and Business Viability 2. Have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. 3. Maintain adequate appropriate insurance as required as determined by the Owner's representative. 4. Maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, programming, and testing of the products and systems 5. Have adequate financial resources to successfully execute projects 6. Have employee safety training program B. Organization and Personnel Experience 1. Have experience in the Water and Waste Water industry 2. Successfully completed at least three (3) projects of$250,000.00 in scope and containing at least 350 1/0 points in the last five (5) years 3. Employ at least one (1) full time licensed and registered Professional Engineer(P.E.) 4. Employ full time degreed engineers from ABET accredited universities that have a. A minimum of five (5) years of experience working on projects and systems of similar size and scope b. Completed at least two (2) projects utilizing Plant PAX from Rockwell Automation C. Has communications networking experience d. Has Rockwell certification e. Experience with the following software (1) FactoryTalk ME (2) FactoryTalk SE (3) FactoryTalk Historian (4) RSLogix 5000 (5) RSLogix 500 f. Experience with the following hardware (1) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley ControlLogix family of PLC (2) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley CompactLogix family of PLC Page 3 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction (3) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Flexl/O (4) MOXA network hardware g. Employ personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project capable of providing on-site response within four(4) hours. h. Be an authorized Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider. i. Employ a PMI or PMP certified project manager 5. PCSS shall submit three (3) hard copies along with an electronic copy of the Qualification Documentation to the Owner/Engineer. The following documentation is required for qualification purposes: a. Organization Facilities and Business Viability Documentation (1) Provide copy of State documents verifying the number of years that the firm has been in business (2) Provide a Certificate of Insurance (COI) verifying adequate insurance coverage including: Commercial General Liability $2,000,000.00 Aggregate Automobile Liability $1,000,000.00 Single Limit Transit Coverage $25,000.00 min up to the value of the equipment being transported Workers Compensation Employers Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 (3) Provide address and square footage of required fully staffed service facility (4) Provide a notarized statement from an officer of the Company verifying the size of the environmentally controlled space dedicated to the production, assembly and check-out of custom controls panels (5) Provide the company legal name, address as well as the Dun & Bradstreet D-U-N- S number for the company (6) Provide copies of the firm's safety program and certify employ participation b. Organization and Personnel Experience Documentation (1) Provide an overall Company Organization Chart and resumes for personnel assigned to the project indicating water/wastewater experience (2) Provide a detailed listing of at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity successfully completed within the last five (5) years. Information must include the following for each project: (a) Project name (b) Project location (c) Owner's name, address, and phone number (d) Owner's contact person and phone number (e) Consultant/Design Engineering Firm name and contact (f) General Contractor's name (if applicable) (g) SIC's order/contract amount (h) Date project started (i) Date project completed Page 4 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction Q) Technical description of provided control system in sufficient detail to verify equivalent size and complexity (3) Provide a copy of the Company's full time employed Professional Engineer's license/registration (4) Provide resumes of employees that show their experience level (5) Provide zip codes and resumes of personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project site capable of providing on-site response within four(4) hours (6) Provide copy of organizations Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider certification (7) Provide copy of project manager's certification C. Quality Assurance Requirements (1) Provide documentation that demonstrates Quality Assurance/Quality Control program, process or certification (2) Provide copies of ISA association documentation (3) Provide resumes of full time employees that would respond to perform warranty or maintenance work (4) Provide a current list with contact information of Municipalities for which the Company has current and on-going Maintenance Contracts and/or existing warranty agreements (5) Provide copies of Company's standard Maintenance and/or Warranty Contracts/Agreements (6) Provide a copy of the Company's UL-508 current certification (7) Provide a copy of documentation showing active membership in the Control System Integrators Association (CSIA) or equivalent organization d. All electronic components furnished by the Contractor shall be new products by manufacturers having an established reputation in the manufacture of such equipment with at least 5 years background. All PLC related equipment supplied shall be a proven product having been in field service for at least 1 year and in production for no less than 2 years. e. All materials are subject to the approval of the Owner and shall conform to all applicable state and federal codes and regulations. f. The Contractor shall warrant that all equipment will perform in accordance with published specifications, is suitable for the intended purposes and shall be free from defects in materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor shall also warrant all system configuration and programming for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance plus two (2) years of extended support. Where any product or system does not perform as specified during this warranty period, the Contractor shall correct any defect, including the non-conformance with any applicable specification and shall repair or replace any defective part or parts without charge to the Owner for parts and labor. g. Testing: A formal system test shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner or Owners representatives at the Contractor's test facility, prior to shipment. The purpose of the test shall be to verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. Refer to Section 40 90 03 "SCADA and Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning" for any and all SCADA and instrumentation testing and commissioning requirements. Page 5 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Acceptable Process Control Systems Suppliers 1. The following organizations comply with the Contract Documents and are approved as acceptable process control systems suppliers: a. Mission Automation, Inc. b. Prime Controls, Inc. 2. All personnel assigned to work on any and all projects shall comply with and conform to the minimum experience detailed in Paragraph 1.4.13 "Organization and Personnel Experience" of Specification 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems". D. Acceptable Power Protection SCADA Systems Suppliers 1. The following organizations comply with the Contract Documents and are approved as acceptable Power Protection SCADA systems suppliers: a. Easter-Owens Electric, Co. b. Electrical Power Products (EP2). C. System Controls, Inc. 1.5 Definitions A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1- 1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6. Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 7. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 8. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. 9. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. 10. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 11. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. Page 6 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 12. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 13. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 14. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 15. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within 5 horizontal feet from the field instrument. 16. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or 1/0 subsystems. 1.6 Submittals A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" and shall include: 1. Contractor shall submit a Project Execution Plan to the Owner and Engineer for approval. This plan shall include, at a minimum: a. A detailed work task breakdown detailing work to be completed during each phase of project. b. Estimated start and end dates of each work task listed an above work task breakdown. C. Estimated duration for each task listed in the above work task breakdown. d. A Gantt chart or equivalent scheduling report shall be acceptable. e. PCSS shall provide regular updates of the Project Execution Plan to Owner and Engineer. (1) Update schedules shall be agreed upon between PCSS and Owner / Engineer during pre-submittal meetings. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 01 - General Provisions. 2. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer's name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and conduit penetration and piping connection diagrams. 3. Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 6. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 7. Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. Page 7 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. 10. Technical Manuals: a. Supply six sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner's Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches. (1) Contractor shall provide a full, digital copy of the technical manuals with each bound set of manuals. b. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 01 - General Provisions. 11. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect "as-built" modifications. Wring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"shall be followed. b. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. 12. Spare Parts List: Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer's review a master spare parts list of all Division 40 items. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. Equipment shall be the manufacturer's latest and proven design. In the event of a compatibility issue, Contractor furnished equipment may match current configuration of equipment and software currently in use by the Owner, if approved by the Owners Representative. B. The Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system Page 8 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. C. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be a part of a standard off-shelf configurable system of components readily available in the marketplace and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. 1. Unless otherwise noted, specified PLC processors, 1/0 modules, PLC power supplies, chassis, etc. shall be sole-sourced from Allen-Bradley. Refer to Section 40 90 02 "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System"for additional requirements. D. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets, input/output equipment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. E. Equipment shall have adequate test points with controls or adjustments required for alignment and maintenance accessible from the front of the equipment. These test points shall provide sufficient isolation to prevent disturbance to the system due to accidental short circuit or other mismatch during routine test or maintenance practices. F. Alarm LED or LCD indicators shall be included and be clearly visible with covers in place to indicate any alarm or off-normal condition. G. Lamps, controls and test points shall be etched or clearly marked on all electronic equipment. 2.2 Operating Conditions A. Ambient Conditions: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of 5 watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. Field Locations: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5° to 60° C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C. Power Supply: Power supply will be 120-volt AC, 1-phase, 60-Hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system. PCCS shall provide a minimum of one (1) spare power supply per project. D. Equipment shall be designed to operate over the environmental, physical and primary power limits as specified herein without the use of blowers or other means of forced air circulation Equipment Limits Full Specification Performance 0° C (32° F) to +60° C (140° F) Storage -40° C (-40° F)to +80° C (176° F) Altitude 15,000 ft. Humidity 5% to 95% Maximum, non-condensing Duty Conditions Continuous Page 9 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.3 Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Equipment shall comply with the Contract Documents and shall be produced by one of the following manufacturers: a. PLC/Network Equipment: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) CompactLogix and ControlLogix (sole- source) b. Power Protection SCADA System Equipment: (1) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) (sole-source) C. Uninterruptible Power Supply: (1) APC. (Sole-source). (a) UPS systems shall be network compatible d. PC Interface Software: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) FactoryTalk(sole-source) (2) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) RSLogix(sole-source) (3) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL)ACSELERATOR (sole-source) e. Network Devices (1) Moxa (Preferred) (2) Phoenix Contact (3) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) (Power Protection System only) 2.4 Information on Drawings A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 3. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 4. Location of equipment being controlled by system. 5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings: 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied under this Contract. 3. Detailed enclosure, instrument panel and junction box layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, control console layouts, fabrication details, and wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed system configuration. 2.5 Spare Parts A. Contractor shall furnish all standard recommended spare parts as specified by the Owner for each component in the system. B. All supplied spare parts shall become the property of the Owner. C. All Division 40 spare parts shall be turned over to the Owner at one time and stored into Page 10 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction lockable cabinets. 2.6 Materials and Equipment A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. De-rate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted equipment with 2 mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-1-46058B. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. 2.7 Project Requirements A. As a part of this Contract, the PCCS shall coordinate with the Owner, and with all the sub- systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to assure that the instruments and sub- systems are in compliance with the Contract Documents and that the necessary tie-ins and interface signals with the Owner system are provided as specified or required. B. The PCCS shall provide the Owner's staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In-Plant SCADA training specified in Section 2.6 of this document. The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 01 - General Provisions of these Specifications. C. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer's field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer's recommendations and per these Contract Documents. D. Follow-Up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make four trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In-Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be 3 months after acceptance of the complete system, and thereafter every 3 months for a total of four trips. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. All trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. E. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. Page 11 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.8 Training A. General 1. A comprehensive training program shall be provided by the Contractor covering the operation and maintenance of all elements of the Control System. The cost of training programs for the Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract price. Where practical, the training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. 2. Training shall be conducted at the Owner's facilities. 3. Training shall be tailored to the specific needs and requirements of each individual project. Project- specific training requirements shall be defined by the Owner. Project- phase specific training shall coincide with the pertenant Project phase. 4. Training classes shall be tailored to the specific needs of the class participants. Separate curricula shall be developed for Operators, Maintenance Staff, and Control System Administrators. All Technicians, Operators, Engineers, and Managers of the Facility shall require training on the Process Control System (PCS). The training courses shall address operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the system provided. The courses shall be designed specifically for the type of personnel attending, such as Operators, Engineers, etc. 5. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. 6. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. 7. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to Owner. 8. Contractor shall videotape all training sessions and provide recordings in a digital format, either flash drive or externally powered hard drive as determined by the Owner, as a formal submittal to the Owner. All training digital recordings shall become the sole property of the Owner. 9. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only Control System functionality but also professional training techniques. Trainers should have no other duties that would interrupt training. Training shall not be combined with other activities such as Control System configuration or startup. Vendor Provided Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Resumes and evidence of Qualifications of Instructors shall be provided as part of the Test Plan and subject to the approval of the Owner/Engineer. 10. Complete, professional, training materials shall be provided for all training classes including training plan and schedule, training manuals (in addition to Control System documentation), and review/testing materials. The training manuals shall be designed to not only assists the student's comprehension of the course material but also to serve as reference documents after the completion of training. Training materials shall be provided to students one week prior to class. The Owner reserves the right to make additional copies of training materials. 11. Training courses shall be a combination of classroom and hands-on training. To the extent possible, hands-on training shall utilize components from the new Control System. 12. Prior to any training taking place, Contractor shall conduct workshops with the Owner and Engineer to identify specific training requirements, to define training courses, and to develop training plans for approval by Owner/Engineer. B. Training Plan 1. The training plan shall include complete descriptions of all training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of Page 12 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training tools available (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.). 2. Owner/Engineer shall review the training plan for assurance that the training planned by the Contractor shall meet the training needs. Special emphasis shall be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors. If a concern arises about the qualifications of particular instructors, the Contractor shall provide video tapes of classes taught by the proposed instructors. If the Owner determines that the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, the Contractor shall identify additional qualified instructors. C. Vendor Provided Training 1. Vendor provided training is intended to provide foundational training for equipment provided by the PCSS. This training shall be conducted by factory authorized trainers for each type of equipment discussed below: 2. Control System Software Training a. HMI Software b. System Administrator Software C. Reporting Software d. Historian Software e. Network Management Software f. PLC/RTU Software Training 3. Control System Hardware Training a. HMI Hardware b. Server Hardware C. Reporting Hardware d. Historian Hardware e. Network Management Hardware f. PLC/RTU Hardware Training D. Control System Specific Training 1. Training Manuals a. Comprehensive training manuals shall be provided for all training courses. The manuals shall be professionally written to present the course material in a format that is easy to comprehend. The manuals shall serve as teaching aids during presentation of the training classes and shall additionally serve as reference material after the training has been completed. It shall not be acceptable for the Contractor to use Control System technical documentation solely as the training manuals since Control System documentation is generally not written in an instructional format. Portions of Control System documentation may be incorporated into training manuals provided that the overall manual achieves an instructional format. b. If the Contractor proposes to use standard training manuals, these manuals shall be revised or appended to reflect Control System characteristics specific to this Contract. 2. Required Training Courses a. Training courses shall be tailored to meet the specific needs of several distinct groups of Owner personnel. The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are identified in the following paragraphs. Class sizes shall be restricted to the number of students that can easily be accommodated. Classes that involve extensive hands-on activities (such as operator training, maintenance training, and Page 13 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction software engineering) shall be limited to five students per class. Supervisor and overview courses may include up to ten participants. At least two sessions of each course shall be presented to satisfy class size restrictions and conflicts in Owner personnel scheduling. Additional sessions shall be presented if required to accommodate the total number of personnel identified for each course. b. All training classes shall be scheduled Monday — Friday. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for specific times. C. The intent of the training program is to provide the Owner's personnel with comprehensive instruction in all subjects and areas necessary for the efficient configuration, troubleshooting and repair, maintenance, and use of the Control System. If the Contractor's standard training curriculum includes courses in addition to those discussed below and which are necessary for the efficient configuration, maintenance, and use of the Control System, the Contractor shall also provide these courses. Following is a description of the categories of training to be provided. 3. Operator Training a. Training courses shall be presented that instruct the Control System operators in the efficient operation of all aspects of the Control System. The course material shall include not only the general operation of the Control System but also the operation of the specific Control System features require by this Contract. In particular, the operator training shall include instruction on the use of all operational functionality including, but not limited to alarm logging, trending, and the process displays, database, reports, and control software. 4. Software Maintenance Training a. Training courses shall be presented that shall enable Owner programmers to develop and maintain all aspects of the Control System software. Separate sessions shall be presented that deal with the following topics: 1). Process database development and modification 2). Historical database development and modification 3). Process display development and modification 4). Supervisory Control strategy development and modification 5). Report development and modification 6). Web Server Application development and modification 7). Supervisory control development and modification 8). General software maintenance, including Control System backup, restoration and archiving. b. These courses shall address the procedures for the standard Control System software, plus material explaining the specific conventions and procedures used by the Contractor in developing the new Control System applications. The courses shall provide instruction in techniques for developing and maintaining current, comprehensive documentation for all applications. C. Control Application Training 1). A dedicated course shall be presented which addresses the customized software development and control strategy programming. 5. Specific Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) Software Training. This training shall be performed by PCSS. (1) Provide one week's manufacturer's standard training course for three (3) of Owner's personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, and installation of Page 14 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction the HMI software supplied. (2) This training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test (WFT) (3) The following training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Database generation (b) Display generation (c) Alarm system and configuration (d) Historical data system configuration (e) Report generation (f) Security system (g) Trending system (h) Remote communications (i) Software configuration Q) OLE applications (k) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (1) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (4) Training shall include classroom and hands-on instruction such that a student with experience in process instrumentation can configure the HMI with no guidance or with only minimal supervision when attempting complex problems. b. Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Hardware and Software (1) Provide manufacturer's standard training course for three (3) of the Owner's personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, installation, and maintenance of the PLC hardware and software supplied. The courses shall be conducted in two groups for one week each. (2) The training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test. (3) The hardware and software courses shall not be concurrent. (4) The following hardware training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Hardware maintenance for the PLC equipment provided (b) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (c) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (d) Component removal and replacement (e) Periodic maintenance (5) The following software training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) System configuration (b) Application specific program development/programming (c) Uploading/downloading programs (d) Documenting program/configuration (e) System backups and reload procedures (f) TCP/IP addressing procedures (g) Network communications configuration Page 15 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Integrated Process Control System Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) (1) Integrated Process Control System Training shall be performed by individuals directly involved in development and implementation of the Process Control System for this project. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only HMI functionality but also professional training techniques. Training personnel shall be intimately familiar with the control system equipment, its manipulation, and configuration. Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Training personnel shall command knowledge of system debugging, program modification, troubleshooting, maintenance procedure, system operation, and programming, and shall be capable of transferring this knowledge in an orderly fashion to technically oriented personnel. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner's system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner's personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 10 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system- HMI for this project. (i) System backups and reload procedures Q) TCP/IP addressing procedures b. Project-specific Process Control System Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware and Software Configuration Training (1) Five (5) 1-day session for three (3) of the Owner's personnel shall be held before the FDT, but not more than one month before the FDT. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner's system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner's personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, Page 16 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 10 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system- PLC for this project. C. Network equipment and devices (1) Provide training on network switches, modems, and satellite radios. (2) The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, and backup procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation d. Integrated training (1) Provide integrated training on operating the SCADA network and Process Control System as a whole. Training shall demonstrate dependencies of system element, system-level troubleshooting, health monitoring, problem diagnosis, etc. E. Field Training 1. Field Instruments a. Provide a minimum of four (4) separate one 8-hour hardware training and instruction sections on the maintenance of the field instrumentation for six (6) of the Owners instrumentation technicians. The training will be broken up into separate groups — those that maintain, those that operate and those who own the system. This training shall be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but no more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owners facility. As a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis Page 17 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction (5) Periodic maintenance 2. Panel Instruments a. Provide a minimum of one 8-hour hardware training and instruction in the maintenance of the panel instrumentation for six (6) of the Owners technicians. Training should be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but not more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owners facility and at a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and configured for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (5) Periodic maintenance 3. Panel Functions a. Provide a minimum of two 2-hour training sessions for four (4) shifts of Owner's operations personnel on the detailed operation of the touch screen panel. This training shall be conducted within two (2) days of the completion of the Field Demonstration Test at times suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owner's facility and at a minimum, the following shall be included: (1) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract. F. Management Seminar 1. Provide Management Seminar for the Owner's personnel at the Owner's facility. The objective of this seminar is to provide non-operations/maintenance personnel with an overview understanding of the process control system. The attendees will be the Owner's management, engineering, and other non-operations personnel. The seminar shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. An overview of the process control system explaining how the hardware and software supplied under this Contract is used for the operation and control of the facilities. b. A block diagram presentation of the process control system showing how and what information flow within the System and what is done by each functional unit. C. An explanation of the operator interfaces including a demonstration of how to use an HMI to access displays, reports, control, etc. d. A walk-through of the installed system explaining each of the items covered in the functional unit's discussion. The features and functions of operator controls and interfaces shall be discussed. G. Follow-up Training 1. When requested by the Owner during the warranty period for the SCADA System and Instruments, one addition training session shall per provided for each type of training session as required in other sections of this specification. Requirements for follow-up training are the same as those stated in other training session sections of this specification. Follow-up training sessions shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner. Page 18 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.9 WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES A. Support Duration 1. All warranty, maintenance and support services specified shall be included in the Contract and shall be in full effect for a period of 36 months commencing upon Final Acceptance. The warranty for each piece of equipment shall transfer to the Owner and continue until expiration of the manufacturer's warranty, if period is longer. B. Technical Support 1. Technical support shall be available from a Factory Regional Office or local Authorized Trained Representative of the software Supplier. 2. Factory technical support shall be available from degreed Engineers familiar with the software and typical industrial applications. 3. Telephone technical support, voice and e-mail, shall be available weekdays and weekends and holidays. 4. Technical support shall be offered for the life of the product, and for a minimum of 1 year after it is discontinued. 5. The vendor must have a record of providing a continuous upgrade path for the product. C. Control System Warranty 1. The Control System warranty shall consist of a full scope, in-place warranty. All hardware, software and applications shall be covered by the warranty. Any failures in System functionality as compared to Final Acceptance shall be corrected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate any warranties provided by third party suppliers. 2. Warranty Requirements for Analog Devices: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of 6 months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than eight loops shall be considered a system failure. D. Preventive Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing preventive maintenance. All equipment shall be systematically inspected, cleaned, aligned, adjusted, lubricated, calibrated and otherwise serviced as required to assure proper performance. Equipment manufacturer service recommendations shall be followed where applicable. 2. A 3-year service contract for the purpose of preventitive maintenance for Contractor provided equipments shall be included in the Contract bid. 3. The preventive maintenance service interval (time-between-service activities) for each piece of equipment shall be that recommended by the equipment manufacturer in accordance with industry practice or six months, whichever is less. The cost to provide preventive maintenance during this period including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence, shall be included in the contract price. Prior to start of in-service use of each part of the Control System, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a schedule for this maintenance service. 4. All preventive maintenance activities shall be documented with service reports which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe all work performed, and list materials used. The report shall also include the name of the technician performing the work and his signature. A copy of all service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. 5. All preventive maintenance procedures shall be planned and accomplished in such a manner as to minimize disruption of the Pump Station Control System operation. No Page 19 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction preventive maintenance procedure shall be allowed to jeopardize the Owner's ability to monitor and Control System operation. 6. At the Owner's option, Owner's maintenance personnel may participate or assist in any preventive maintenance procedures. E. Corrective Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing corrective maintenance on all Control System hardware and software. 2. The Contractor shall provide for 3-year time periord a 24-hour, 7-day/week-service hotline for telephone notification of Control System malfunctions. Within two (2) hours from notification by the Owner of defective Control System operation, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative establish telephone contact with the Owner's maintenance personnel to discuss short-term corrective measures. 3. If it is not possible to correct the defective operation as a result of the telephone contact, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative at the location of the installed Control System within four (4) hours from initial notification. 4. The service representative shall perform all necessary inspections and diagnostic tests to determine the source of the defect and to establish a corrective action plan. The corrective action plan shall be developed such that the defect is corrected as quickly as possible and with the least impact on the operation of the Owner's facilities. Prior to beginning any repair or replacement procedure, the Contractor shall review the corrective action plan with the Owner in order to inform him of the planned course of action and to allow assessment of any impact that course of action might have on the operation of the Owner's facilities. At Owner's option, Owner maintenance personnel may participate in any corrective maintenance procedures. 5. If possible, the service representative shall effect replacement or repair of the defective component before leaving the site using replacement parts from the spare parts inventory delivered with the Control System. Otherwise, the corrective action plan shall include a detailed schedule for the planned course of action. Once the defect has been corrected, the corrective action plan shall be updated indicating the source of the defect and specific corrective action taken. A copy of the updated corrective action plan shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. Any spares from the onsite supply of spares used by the Contractor in correcting the Control System malfunction shall be replaced within 15 days. 6. If 24-hour response time is not provided, or other corrective maintenance requirements are not met by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to obtain corrective maintenance from other sources and charge the Contractor reasonable costs of the alternative maintenance services, including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence. Warranty shall not be affected. 7. The Owner, at Owner's option, may elect to employ its own maintenance staff to locate and remove a defective component. Warranty shall not be affected. 8. In this case the Owner shall return the defective component to a repair location as instructed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace the defective component and return the properly working unit to the Owner within 15 days. F. Software Maintenance 1. After any equipment has been placed in service and tested, Owner personnel shall be permitted, at no additional cost to the Owner; to add, modify, and delete Owner provided software. Performance of such actions by the Owner shall not release the Contractor from satisfying any guarantee or maintenance requirements, or any other specified requirements. Page 20 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction G. Software Update Services 1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test, and commission updates to the Control System software and computer provided software within 30 days from when such updates are announced and released by the manufacturer. 2. Execution of all updates shall be subject to review and approval of the Owner prior to commencement of the work. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring proper operation of all updates, including "bug fixes" or revisions to the update for 12 months after Support Duration for updates installed less than 12 months prior to Support Duration end date. 4. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The Contractor shall schedule and administer a minimum of three (3) mandatory coordination meetings. The Contractor shall make arrangements for these meetings; prepare agendas with copies delivered to the participants at least one (1) week before the scheduled meetings. These meetings shall be held at an Owner's designated facility and shall include, as a minimum, attendance by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor's Project Engineer, Process Control System Supplier(PCSS), Project Engineer and the Electrical Sub-Contractor. 1. The first coordination meeting shall be held after project award and in advance of the first PCSS shop drawings, PLC programming and HMI screen submittals. The purpose of the first meeting shall be for the PCSS to: a. Summarize their understanding of the Project. b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives. C. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates. d. Provide a forum for the PCSS and the Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues. e. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. 2. The second coordination meeting shall be held in advance of the first PCSS shop drawings, PLC programming and HMI screen submittals. The purpose of the second meeting: a. The PCSI shall bring draft versions of shop drawings, PLC programming and HMI screens to the meetings to provide the basis for the Owner or Engineer's input into their development. b. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. C. Provide a forum for the PCSS and the Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues. 3. The remaining coordination meetings shall be held no more than one month prior to site testing for each location. The purpose of these meetings is to discuss any remaining coordination requirements. 4. A typical agenda for the subsequent meetings may include, but shall not be limited to the following: a. Review minutes of the previous meeting. b. Review of the work in progress. C. Field observations, problems, and decisions. Page 21 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction d. Identification of problems or issues that may impede planned progress. e. Review development of testing plans and schedules. f. Review of submittal schedule and submittal status. g. Maintenance of progress schedule. h. Corrective measures to regain progress schedules. i. Planned activities for subsequent work period. j. Coordination of work progress. k. Effect of any proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. I. Other business relating to the work. 3.2 Installation A. Wire and Conduit: 1. Refer to the following specifications: a. 26.05.00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" b. 26.05.19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" C. 26.05.19.1 "Wire Connections and Devices" d. 26.05.26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" e. 40.90.01 "Instrumentation" f. Any and all other specifications pertaining to the installation, termination and grounding of instrument systems. 2. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 3. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 4. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 5. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes and equipment. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 6. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures. 7. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is #16 AWG, unless otherwise noted. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp-on connector applied on the wire end. Page 22 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 8. Use the following color code for 120/240-V, single-phase wiring: Wiring Color Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green 9. Ground paired shielded at the PLC end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. The shield of shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. 10. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, enclosures, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid PVC conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless steel connections. Wire connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 11. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. 12. Ground conductors shall be bare tinned copper where directly buried and insulated in all other cases. 13. Underground conduit which is not below a concrete slab on grade shall be sand encased. Conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. 14. At the transition from underground, protect PVC conduit from mechanical damage by extending rigid steel conduit a maximum of 12 inches and a minimum of 4 inches into the earth or concrete at the transition. 15. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3 inches from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1 inch from any reinforcement bars. 16. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. 17. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 18. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 18 inches deep to the top of the sand encasement. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacing's are maintained. 19. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. Provide for automatic draining at low points. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. 20. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. 21. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the approval of the Owner's representative. Page 23 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 22. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3-inch separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1 inch. 23. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces, strut channel clamps, or one-hole straps with clamp backs. 24. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. 25. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of channels with conduit straps or clamps. 26. Flexible metal (steel) conduit shall be used for final connections to any and all instrumentation, transmitters, video cameras and vibration producing equipment, control devices, and in locations where structural conditions make the use of rigid conduit impractical. Flexible metal conduit shall be of the liquid-tight type. A separate, external ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections in a spiral manner in accordance with NEC article 250-95. Flexible metal (steel) conduit lengths shall not exceed 18" unless approved by Owner or by the Owner's Representative before installation. 27. Enclosure conduit or cable entry shall be bottom or side penetrations only. No top or back penetrations into enclosures shall be allowed. Side penetrations shall occur in the lower 25% of enclosure side only unless otherwise approved by Owner or be the Owner's Representative. B. Cable Installation: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 2. Cable shall be laid straight without splices except in the case of accidental damage, but without tension applied at any time. Slight snaking of the cable will be permitted. Backfill on the cable shall be pulverized material free from stones, rock or other hard or sharp materials which might damage the cable. 3. All cables shall be handled with care at all times. The cable reel shall be shaft mounted or supported in such a manner as to keep the cable and reel from coming in contact with the ground or other foreign objects which might cause damage to the cable. At no time shall the wire be dragged along the ground or across objects. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 24 inches in all case of direction change. Care shall be taken to see that twists or bends of small radii do not occur. Any instance of damaged wire, observed at any time whether prior to installation, during installation, or discovered by test or observation subsequent to installation, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner's representative. 4. The method of repair or correction of such damage shall be in accordance with the written instructions of the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner's representative. 5. Minor damage to the outer jacket of the cable which penetrates to a depth not to exceed 0.02 inch, observed prior to or occurring during construction, may be repaired if approved by the Owner's representative by covering the damaged section of the jacketed with two layers of a suitable 10-mil vinyl tape, each layer half-lapped extending 6 inches beyond the end of the damaged section, and Glyptal coated. Page 24 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 6 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Damage to cable of greater severity than that set forth above, observed prior to or during construction, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner's representative. Any and all repairs requiring cable to be spliced shall be immediately documented by the Contractor, reported to the Owners representitive and documented on the final submitted drawings. 7. Damage to the cable subsequent to burial, discovered either through test or observation shall be repaired by a method approved by the Owner's representative. This may involve the replacement of a short section of cable with splices made in additional terminal housings, or the replacement of an entire section between terminal housings already installed. No buried splices shall be used for repairing damaged cable. 8. All splices of the cable shall be made in junction boxes or pull boxes. Where installation procedures require the Contractor to splice the cable, boxes or enclosures appropriate to the location of the splice shall be installed as required at the Contractor's expense. The location of such boxes or enclosures shall be directed by the Owner's representative. 9. Where cable is cut and box or enclosure is not immediately installed, the cable end shall be sealed by means of rubber boots, or plastic tape. C. Antennas and Coaxial Cable: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 2. Antenna shall be oriented for the correct polarization and securely fastened to the mast. Mast shall be aligned so as to be vertical and clear of obstructions or overhead lines. Mast shall be mounted at least 10 feet from any components of the system being monitored. Mast shall be adequately grounded. Orient the antennas in the direction required. Coaxial cable shall be restrained from movement on mast by clamps and hangers placed at 3-foot intervals. All coaxial connections, hangers and fittings are to be tightened to ensure good contacts and secure installation. Feedline losses shall not exceed 1 dB. 3. All connections shall be waterproof and weather resistant. A drip loop shall be provided at wall penetration to avoid water migration. Care shall be exercised to avoid exceeding the bending radius or number of bends for the coaxial cable as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. For wall penetrations, a penetration kit specifically manufactured for the purpose and specified herein shall be used. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. 5. Grounding of the coaxial cable shall be with the use of a manufactured kit specifically designed for that purpose. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. END OF SECTION Page 25 of 25 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS—40 90 00 R6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. Contractor shall furnish any and all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational instrumentation and controls system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing instrumentation and control equipment or equipment furnished and installed under other contracts. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C. Any and all supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. D. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. E130064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all instrumentation installations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel and with the Owner during construction,testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. F. This Specification lists and describes all instrumentation and control equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts,etc.,to determine which monitoring and control instrumentation and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project instrumentation system is fully functional and operational upon completion. 1. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. General: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer's latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B. Operating Voltage: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-Hertz AC nominal or 24-volts DC nominal, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. C. Power Supplies: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. D. Protection: 1. The instrumentation system supplier shall be responsible for input-output isolation of all Pagel of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction incoming and outgoing signals. 2. Each 4-20 mA DC process measurement current loop installed on this contract which extends outside control room shall be protected by insertion of a fuse, Buss Type MKB, or circuit breaker with the amperage rating as described in the drawings and specifications. Fuses shall be installed in standard fuse blocks with blown-fuse indicators. 3. The necessary fuses, circuit breakers or switches required by the Instrumentation Manufacturer for that equipment shall be provided with the equipment. The instruments requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal On-Off switch. E. Input/Output: 1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, analog inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. 2. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, digital inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 24-DC status / control signals. Loop isolators, repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make instrumentation system fully operational. a. Fordigital signals requiring input/control voltages otherthan 24VDC, interposing relays with the proper coil voltage ratings shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. 3. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, non-critical process analog and digital inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems transmitted via communications shown shall utilize MODBUS protocols. Any protocol converters shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as required to meet instrument specifications and to make the instrumentation system fully operational. a. Any analog and/or digital input or output signals transmitted via communications protocols shall be defined by the Owner, and shall be non-process critical unless otherwise noted. 1.3 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals" for all required submittal requirements. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards,codes,specifications,contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.4 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards,codes,specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Spare Parts: Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.5, Paragraph A: "Spare Parts" for all spare parts requirements. B. Special Tools: Contractor shall furnish a kit which contains any and all special size wrenches and/or any other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this Section of the specification shall be furnished to the Owner by Page 2 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction the Contractor. PART2 PRODUCTS This Specification lists and describes all instrumentation and control equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which monitoring and control instrumentation and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project instrumentation system is fully functional and operational upon completion. A. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID's) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer in the contract documents. 2.1 Remote Equipment A. Controls for remote electrically operated or motor driven equipment shall be complete, including any and all necessary auxiliary relays or controls so as to require only wiring and connections to the equipment control circuit. Contacts for control of remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall be rated not less than 10 amperes at 120 volts unless otherwise specified herein. B. Remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall have a separate 120-volt control circuit which operates through the dry contacts provided by the instrumentation system. 2.2 Junction Boxes/Instrument Panels A. Furnish and install any junction boxes and instrumentation panels at the locations indicated on the contract documents and drawings. Cabinets shall be NEMA 4X, made of 316 S.S.with an 11 gauge conductive mounting panel inside. Dimensions of the cabinets shall be as indicated on the plans. Cabinets shall have a hinged front door and shall be Hoffman or approved equal. B. Instrumentation control panels shall be mounted in such a manner that the center of any primary control display screens or interface screens shall be no less than 66"(5'-6") or greater than 72" (6'-0") above grade or operator platform. Any deviation from these dimensions shall require Owner or Owner-Representative approval prior to any control panel installation. 1. Instrumentation or control junction boxes shall be mounted in such a mannerthat the center of junction box shall maintain the same elevations as defined in Paragraph 2.2.13 unless otherwise approved by Owner or Owner-Representative. C. Any instrument or control panel located outside of a building or enclosed structure shall be mounted with a three (3)-sided sun shield enclosure to provide protection from the sun. 1. Any instrument or control panel with an exposed display or HMI screen located outside of a building or enclosed structure shall be orientated in such a manner that the display or HMI screen is faced away from direct sunlight at any time of day. D. Any front door mounted instruments shall be as indicated on the plans. In addition, cabinets may contain backplane mounted instruments and equipment. Instruments and equipment which are not indicated to be mounted on the front door by the plans shall be mounted on the backplane of the instrument panel. E. Indicating lamps on the front door shall be rated NEMA 4X, shall have a LED cluster type of lamp, operated on 120-VAC and shall be push to test. Indicating lamps shall be Square D SKT38LAA31 or approved equal. F. Pushbuttons and rotary switches shall be Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. G. Instrument control panel wiring shall conform to the following: 1. Single conductor wire shall be stranded, tinned 18 AWG and TEW insulation, as manufactured by American Insulated Wire or approved equal. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the color coding table as specified in Section 40 90 02"Supervisory Control Page 3 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Systems", Part 2, Paragraph 2.2A.3.a. 2. Shielded pair cable for 4-20 mA DC loops shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3. Ground paired shielded cables at the PLC end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. The shield of shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. 4. Each conductor terminated under a screw head shall have a crimp on spade terminal applied to its end prior to its termination. 5. Each conductor has its own number and no number is used more than once. 6. The number of each wire is placed at both ends of the wire next to its end according to wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 7. The wire numbers, as actually installed, shall match the numbers on the shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams of the instrument panel. 8. Wiring shall be run enclosed in plastic wireway wherever possible. Wireways shall be installed as required to enclose panel wiring. Where the use of plastic wireway is not practical, conductors shall be bundled and run open. Conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals not to exceed 6 inches with nylon ties, or approved equal. Wires within a bundle are to be run parallel to one another and not twisted. Bundles shall have a uniform appearance, circular cross-section, and shall be securely fastened to the panel framework. Conductors carrying different voltages that are from the same source may occupy the same wireway provided all are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the wireway. Wring carrying voltages that originate at different source shall not run in the same wireway. H. Instrument control panel components shall conform to the following: 1. Interposing relays contained in instrumentation and control cabinets shall be DIN-rail mounted-type unless otherwise noted. Relays shall be rated for both 24VDC and 120- 125VAC. Relays shall be Weidmuller Model TRS24-230-VUC1CO, P/N# 1984610000 or Model TRS24-230-VUC2CO, P/N# 1123580000. Cross-Connectors shall be Weidmuller Model TERMSERIES, P/N: 1391600000. Spacers shall be installed at an interval of 4 relays per spacer to provide heat dissipation. 2. Terminal blocks shall be installed for wire terminations. Terminal blocks shall be Allen- Bradley 1492-JDG3FB, with associated accessories (Cross-Connectors: 1492-SJ8A-4, End Anchors: 1492-GM35). Terminal blocks shall be combined on steel DIN rail to form terminal strips. DIN rail shall be mounted on 3.75" (minimum) stand-off to elevate it above the enclosure back panel. Each terminal strip shall have hinged marking surfaces which snap on. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Marking surfaces shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-GMC. 3. Any analog signal wiring terminating in equipment with AC voltage exceeding 120VAC shall require signal isolators. Isolators shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, and shall have the following part numbers: a. Active Isolators: 931 S-A1 Al N-DC, 931 S-A2A2N-DC b. Passive Isolator/Splitter: 931 S-A2A5N-OP 4. Instrument/ control panels requiring power supplies shall utilize SOLA 120VAC /24VDC 30W, P/N SCP30S24-DN or SOLA 120VAC/24VDC 240W, P/N SDN 10-24-100P. I. Provide a specification grade single pole circuit breaker, Siemens 5YS-series or approved equal, for incoming and panel 120VAC power inside the instrument / control panel. Circuit breaker rating shall be adequate to power all instrument panel loads but shall not be greater than 20 amps. Page 4 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction J. A print pocket shall be provided in the panel and shall contain an 11 x 17 control schematic and an 11 x 17 wiring diagram or diagrams. The wiring diagram shall contain all wire numbers, device names and terminal numbers. Drawings shall be laminated in clear plastic for preservation of the drawings. K. All penetrations into boxes shall be made into the bottom of the enclosure or lower 25% of the sides of the boxes, utilizing fittings made for the specific conditions in which the enclosure is installed and sealed accordingly. Penetrations into the top or back of enclosures shall not be allowed. L. Any programmable logic controller(PLC)enclosure or critical process instrument control panel located in an area without an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) source shall have a local UPS appropriately sized for the PLC or instrument control panel enclosure load mounted in a separate enclosure located adjacent to the PLC enclosure. 1. Local PLC or critical process instrument control panel UPS shall be network capable, manufactured by APC. Refer to Specification 40 90 02 "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System" for details on UPS specific requirements. 2.3 Tubing A. All instrumentation tubing shall be 316S.S. Stainless Steel unless dictated otherwise due to process considerations. Tubing shall be manufactured by Parker, Swagelok or approved equal. Allowable tubing sizes shall be as follows: 1. 1/4" O.D., .035"wall thickness, 5100PS1 working pressure @ 200° F. 2. 3/8" O.D., .035"wall thickness, 3300PSI working pressure @ 200° F. 3. 1/2" O.D., .049"wall thickness, 3700PSI working pressure @ 200° F. B. Tubing fittings shall be 316S.S. compression-type fittings as manufactured by Parker, Swagelok or other approved equal. C. Hydraulic connections to instruments shall be made with separable stainless steel Swagelok fittings so that fittings may be separated and reassembled without reworking tubing ends and without incurring any leaks. 2.4 VenturiFlow Tubes A. Tubes shall be of the pressure differential producing type constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B. B. The throat liner shall be constructed of bronze, ASTM B61. C. Uncalibrated accuracy shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent of actual rate. Head loss shall not exceed 6.0 percent. D. The entrance Section shall consist of the uniform arc of a circle, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat. E. Provide flanges that match the pipe on which the flow tubes are attached. The flanges shall meet the specifications for the pipe as specified in this document. Determine that the flow tube is compatible with the pipe as indicated on the plans and specifications. F. The metering element shall not have debris collecting cavities or annular chambers, but shall have a single pressure connection at the inlet and throat. In addition, vent ports and drains shall be included on a 90-degree plane to the metering taps. Brass of 316 stainless steel ball valve type process block valves shall be connected at the high and low meter taps. G. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values of tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. Page 5 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. H. The flow tubes shall be Type PMT as manufactured by the Badger Meter Manufacturing Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or other approved equal with a lab test of uncalibrated accuracy and loss measurement for each of the flow tubes furnished or an exact duplicate of each. 2.5 Insert VenturiFlow Tubes A. Furnish and install concentric low head loss type insert flow tubes complete with head recovery section as indicated on the plans. The upstream entrance section, holding flange, and downstream recovery core section shall be of carbon steel. The throat liner shall be stainless steel and shall include an internal annulus from which the low pressure metering taps shall be made through the holding flange, requiring no drilling or tapping of the pipeline itself. The entrance shall be nozzle type, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat section. There shall not be any protrusion, sharp-edged annulus, or slot, or other sediment collecting areas exposed to the flow stream. B. High and low pressure ports shall have isolation valves. C. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values and tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. D. The insert flow tubes shall be Type PMT-IF as manufactured by the Badger Meter Mfg. Company, Milwaukee,Wisconsin, or approved equal. 2.6 Orifice Plates A. Orifice plates shall be 316 stainless steel, concentric bored, with 300 psi forged steel flanges. Orifice shall be bored per ISA recommended practices RP3.2 for puddle type orifice plates. Flanges shall conform to ANSI pressure ratings, threaded type with raised face, and 1/2-inch NPT pressure taps. Holding rings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Orifice plates shall be Taylor model 7-20, Foxboro or approved equal. 2.7 Parshall Flumes A. Parshall flumes shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced polyester resin laminate. Throat size shall be in accordance with the contract documents. Flumes shall have accurate internal dimensions conforming to those shown in the latest revisions of United States Department of Agriculture Circular 843. Flumes shall be molded in one integral piece containing the approach, throat, and downstream section. B. The inside surface of the flume shall be smooth and free of any irregularities. Flumes shall have a minimum 1/4-inch wall thickness, be self-supporting and require no external supporting structure, and be provided with sufficient flanges, reinforcing ribs, and/or anchoring ribs to prevent distortion during shipment, installation, and operation as well as providing for permanent anchorage in the concrete. C. One-piece flumes shall be ready and suitable for setting in the channel formwork, prior to pouring the concrete or shall be suitable for grouting into place in boxouts provided in the structural concrete. Flumes shall be furnished with fiberglass tie strips or aluminum tie rods across the top of the flumes to retain the vertical sides during concrete placement. Depending upon configuration, ties can be removed or remain in place after construction and during operation. Unit shall be provided with an integrally cast level sensor mounting track. Mounting track shall be compatible with specified level instrumentation. Page 6 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Cook's gelcoat no. 9441_181 shall be used to produce a blue flame color. Parshall flumes shall be by Badger Meter, Inc., Tulsa, OK or approved equal. 2.8 Palmer Bowlus Flumes A. Palmer-Bowlus flumes for installation in the pipeline channel shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester including an integral approach section. Flumes shall have an integral mounting track for an ultrasonic sensor for flowrate measurement in the flumes. The inside surface shall be white gelcoat, smooth, and free form irregularities. The outside surface shall be provided with clips suitable for anchoring to concrete. B. Flumes shall be molded of isophthalic polyester resin and fiberglass to form a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch throughout(18 size and larger to 1/4-inch thick minimum). Flumes shall be as manufactured by Plasti-Fab, Tualatin, Oregon or approved equal. 2.9 V-Notch Weir Plates A. V-Notch weir plates shall be constructed of the dimensions indicated on the plans and shall be constructed of 1/4-inch thick 3003-H14 aluminum plate as sold by Reynolds Aluminum Co., Grand Prairie, Texas or approved equal. 2.10 Doppler Type Sonic Flow Transmitters A. Sonic flow meters shall be of the Doppler type consisting of a sensing element and a transmitter. Transmitter shall be powered by 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase. Transmitter shall provide for indicating,totalizing, signal strength indication and transmitting of flow rate in a full pipe. A signal strength meter with separate loss-of-signal indication shall be provided with circuitry to drive all outputs to zero upon loss of signal. The sensor shall be of the twin-crystal type containing a separate transmit and receive device designed to operate continuously at temperatures of 300° F and shall be supplied as a single submersible assembly with jacketed flexible armored cable. The sensing element circuitry shall be solid-state and transformer isolated and designed to meet intrinsic-safe requirements. B. Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure with gasketed shatter-proof window for rate indicator and analog signal strength indicator and shall be corrosion resistant. Electronic circuits shall to be Mil-Spec coated with anti-fungus compound. Transmitter shall include a calibration dial and adjustments for sensitivity, span and zero. Housing shall be suitable for wall and pipe stand mounting. Transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA DC proportional to flow and optically isolated. C. Each transmitter shall include integrally mounted transient protection to protect the instrument against lightening-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. D. Linearity shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent of full span; repeatability shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent accuracy shall be within plus or minus 2.0 percent full span. Transmitter shall be able to operate within a temperature range of-10 F to +140 F. E. Sonic flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the application described below orthe purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. Sonic flowmeters shall be Panametrics. 2.11 Transit Time Ultrasonic Flow Transmitters A. The flowmeter shall consist of two acoustic sensors, their associated mounting hardware, an electronic transmitter and accessories as required for the installation. The flowmeter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC signal, linear with the flow in the pipe over the specified flow range. Mounting of the primary element shall be certified acceptable for seismic qualification as specified in "IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1 E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" by an independent laboratory. Page 7 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Two flow sensors shall be permanently mounted to the pipe to insure accurate and stable measurement of flow. The sensors shall be positioned in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications with factory approved methods. Mounting templates and/or fixtures for sensor attachments shall be provided by the manufacturer. C. A junction box shall be mounted on the pipe, and each acoustic sensor shall be connected to this box. The electrical cables between the sensor mounting site and the junction box shall be contained in a flexible, water-tight, submersible electrically-conductive conduit. Wring between the junction box and the electronic transmitter housing shall be as described in these specifications and all cable and wiring from sensor to flow indicating transmitter shall be in conduit unless otherwise noted to be routed in cable tray. D. For external non-penetrating sensors, stainless steel mounting bands shall be placed about the pipe circumference to secure the sensor brackets;the mounting bands shall have sufficient strength to maintain accurate sensor position. Positioning of the sensor mounting brackets shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's specifications. E. The acoustic sensors shall be securely held in the sensor brackets and shall transmit acoustic energy through the(steel, cast iron, plastic) pipe wall for measurement of flow. The transducer design shall not penetrate the pipe wall, reduce or alter the process piping integrity. Installation or maintenance on the primary element shall not cause process shutdown. Sensor design shall allow for high pressure stream cleaning and/or pig cleaning in the pipe without damage to the sensor. F. The transmitter shall contain all circuitry necessary to utilize signals from the acoustic sensors and shall produce an isolated accurate 4-20 mA DC signal linear with the flow rate. The unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X outdoor housing suitable for wall or pipe mounting remotely for location up to 1000 feet from the primary element. G. Setting of zero and span of the unit shall be easily accomplished and shall be non-interactive. Flow signal response time and damping shall be adjustable. The meter shall be readily re- scaled for different flow ranges. H. Accuracy shall be unaffected by changes in suspended solids or fluid density for the application range. I. Each transmitter shall include integrally mounted transient protection to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. J. Flow sampling shall be at a minimum rate of 150 samples per second, and the unit shall be able to operate with as few as 2 percent of the samples taken successfully. Unit shall have local indication of signal strength. In the event of prolonged loss of acoustic signaling in the fluid, the unit shall indicate the condition by an internal status light and shall provide for an external alarm connection. During periods of loss of signal the unit shall indicate zero flow. K. The output flow signal from the electronics shall be 4-20 mA DC. The output signal shall indicate true volumetric flow to within plus or minus 2 percent if actual or plus or minus 0.02 fps, whichever is greater. L. A space heater shall be included to maintain the interior temperature of the electronics enclosure above the dew point temperature. M. The unit shall operate with 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase electrical power. Power requirements shall be less than 250 watts outdoor, with space heater. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of-40 F to +150 F (40 C to +65 C) outdoor. N. External wiring connections shall be made via well-marked terminal blocks. O. The electrical signaling cable shall be supplied by the Flowmeter Manufacturer and shall be installed in an exclusive 1-inch metallic conduit, electrically continuous from the sensor junction box to the transmitter housing with a conduit drain at the conduit entrance through the flow sensor vault wall as shown in detail on the plans. P. Electronics and circuit boards shall be coated with permanent(not topicalization or anti-fungus coating) clear plastic type coating, Plasite 7122 or equal, to prevent corrosion from hydrogen Page 8 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction sulfide, chlorine or moisture. Wiring conductors shall be tinned. Screws shall be stainless steel or plated with nickel. No exposed relay contacts, exposed copper, or exposed brass surfaces shall be allowed. Q. Flow indicating transmitter shall have a totalizer installed which integrates measured flow and displays this total at front face of enclosure. Totalizer shall be resettable by switch inside the enclosure and totalizer display shall be liquid crystal type with six digits, minimum. Totalizer reading shall be retained during power outage. Flow indicating transmitter shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosure. R. Flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the applications described above or the purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. The flowmeter shall be Panametrics DF 868. 2.12 Sonic Flowmeter/Indicating/Totalizing Instruments A. A sonic flowmeter instrument shall be installed in the piping as indicated on the plans and mounted in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. The unit shall have microprocessor-based electronics, a front panel menu-driven keyboard and shall produce an isolated 4-20 mA DC signal proportional to the flow, which shall be displayed on an eight digit totalizer after integration. The flowmeter shall be self-compensating for ambient temperature conditions. The flowmeter shall have as standard four relay outputs available for alarm conditions,sampling or pulsing external totalizers. The unit shall be capable of simulating flow without any external devices for verifying outputs and calibrations. Totalizer display shall always be retained after power failure without battery backup by the use of an EEPROM. B. Acoustic Sensor and Mounting Equipment: The acoustic sensor shall be permanently mounted at the measuring site and positioned according to the Manufacturer's approved method. Sensor mounting adaptor shall be supplied by the Manufacturer. The cable from the sensor to the electronics box shall be installed in an exclusive 3/4-inch rigid aluminum conduit. The sensor shall have built-in temperature compensation to maintain accuracy. The sensor shall be capable of an indefinite submergence of 30 feet without degradation. The sensor shall function over an ambient temperature of-20 F to +160 F. C. Transmitter Specifications: The transmitter shall contain all necessary circuitry and built in H/Q relationship for Parshall Flumes, Palmer-Bowlus Flumes and V-Notch Weirs to utilize the signal from the acoustic sensor and shall produce an accurate 4-20 mA DC flow signal. An RS-232 serial port connection shall be provided for computer interface for real-time communications. The transmitter shall be supplied with an LCD indicator to display flow rate and flow total and their respective flow units and multipliers. The display shall indicate if there is a fault or an alarm condition. The transmitter shall also produce four relay output connections for external alarms, sampling or pulse output to drive remote totalizer. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of-40 F to +150 F. Totalizer shall be such that display x 1000 = gallons. D. Unit shall be Panametrics DI 868. 2.13 Electromagnetic Flow Transmitters A. Flow element shall be of the electromagnetic type utilizing the pulsed DC type coil excitation principle with high preamp input impedance. The flow measuring system, consisting of flow element, transmitter, and appurtenances, shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate with pipe velocities of 0.5 to 30 fps. Stream fluid meter size and flow range shall be as noted. System shall operate on 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase electrical power. Unit shall have zero stability feature thereby eliminating the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. B. The flow element shall be of water-tight, NEMA 4X construction for above-ground installations and NEMA 6P construction for below-ground installations. Meter shall consist of a 304SS meter tube, 150 pound ANSI carbon steel raised-face flanges, and 316SS or Hastelloy Page 9 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction electrodes, unless otherwise noted. Electrodes shall be either flush or bullet nose type. Suitable covers shall be provided for flow elements ends to protect the tube liner during shipment. C. Meter liners shall be as follows: 1. Water/Waste water service: hard rubber liner 2. Chemical service: Teflon liner D. Remote flow transmitter shall be indicating, water-tight, NEMA 4X construction and suitable for wall mounting. The transmitter output shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal in linear proportion to flow and shall drive loads with impedances in the range of 0 to 800 ohms without load adjustments for a 24-VDC supply. Output span and zero shall be manually adjustable. E. Sufficient special cable shall be provided for interconnection between the flow element and the transmitter. Cable(s) shall facilitate both signal and power for the flow element. Special cables shall be installed in conduit. Cables shall not be spliced in the field. F. Manufacturer shall provide grounding rings for meter to perform properly. G. Electromagnetic flowmeters shall be Endress+Hauser, Siemens, Toshiba, Rosemount or pre-approved equal. 2.14 Differential Pressure Flow Transmitters A. Flow transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitter shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. B. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal,Zero, Blocked, Calibrate,and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.15 Filter Loss of Head Transmitters A. Filter loss of head transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitters shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have an adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box with an output meter reading of 0-100 percent, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. B. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal,Zero, Blocked, Calibrate,and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Each transmitter shall be provided with a sediment trap and strainer. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.16 Pressure Transmitters A. Pressure transmitter shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated pressure range. The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box and an accuracy of 0.25 percent of span. Page 10 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Range limits of transmitter shall be 0-40 to 0-200 psi unless specified otherwise in the contract documents and drawings. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. 2.17 Pressure Switches A. Pressure switches shall be a force-balance, piston-actuated assembly, with the sense elements sealed by a flexible diaphragm and static o-ring. Sealing o-ring shall be compatible with the application process. Switch range shall be adjustable within the specified pressure range of the switch and shall have an adjustable deadband with an accuracy of< 1% percent of full span. The switches shall have a weatherproof enclosure unless specified otherwise. B. Range limits of switches shall be 0-200 psi unless specified otherwise in the contract documents and drawings. Each switch shall include SPDT (Single-Pole, Double-Throw) electrical switches unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Each switch shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Switch mounting bracket shall be furnished. Switch manufacturers shall be SOR, Dwyer, or approved equal. 2.18 Pressure Gauges A. Pressure gauges shall be bourdon-type type unless specified otherwise. Dial size shall be a minimum of 4-1/2" with 'h" MNPT process connection. Ranges shall be within the ranges specified in the contract documents. All Wetted parts shall be 316L S.S. with all welded joints unless specified otherwise. All gauge dial cases shall be sealed with glycerin-fill unless specified otherwise. 2.19 Float Type Level Transmitters A. Transmitters shall be of the solid-state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities proportional to the measured level. Transmitters shall have a 6-inch copper float and stainless steel tape. Transmitters shall have an indicator reading 0-10 linear. Transmitters shall be furnished with a weatherproof enclosure and pulley cover for outdoor service. Transmitter shall be Bristol Series 2008, or approved equal. 2.20 Tape Level Transmitter A. Furnish and install a purely resistive type level sensor, Metritape Type LS-NC or equal, at the location indicated on the plans. Sensor shall be a resistance shorting type of 30.5 ohm/ft. resistance with a nominal actuation sensitivity of 0.2 psi. Sensor shall be installed in a 2-inch Schedule 80 perforated PVC still pipe having an 8-by-8-by-6-inch PVC top housing including a breather assembly and a plug-in compact 2-wire transmitter Series 710 convert sensor resistance into a linear 4-20 mA output signal. The level measuring system shall be as manufactured by Metritape, Inc. P.O. Box 23266, Littleton, MA 01460, or approved equal. 2.21 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter A. Unit shall be ultrasonic type, continuous level measuring system consisting of level element, transmitter, and cable for connection from level element to transmitter. B. Level element shall be ultrasonic type transducer. Transducer shall be of water-proof construction rated NEMA 4X with operating range of -10 to +120 F at 1 atmosphere. Transducer shall be furnished with 1-inch NPT nipple for mounting. Page 11 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Transmitter shall contain solid state controls to operate transducer and to provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal with HART capabilities in linear proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with output indicator meter and shall have an operating range of 30 to 120 F. Transmitter scale range shall be as noted. Transmitter shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for wall mounting. D. Level system shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of full scale and shall operate on 12-volt, 50/60-Hz, 1-phase power. E. Transmitter shall provide up to three discrete outputs, adjustable over the entire scale range. At the noted set point, unit shall transfer SPDT contacts which shall be rated for 5 amperes, continuous, at 120 VAC. Set points shall be screwdriver adjustable from inside the enclosure and shall be repeatable within plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. F. Interconnecting cable between transducer and transmitter shall be furnished with the unit with length as indicated. Splices in transducer/transmitter cable are not allowed. G. Level transmitter shall be Siemens Hydro Ranger 200/Probe LU. 2.22 Transducer Level Transmitter A. Level transmitter shall be submersible level transducer type. Transmitter may be either rod- or cable type depending on application. Rod-type shall consist of two (2) elements: sensing rod and transmitter assembly. Cable-type shall consist of three (3) elements: the lower assembly, the connecting cable, and the transmitter assembly. B. The transmitter assembly houses the system signal conditioning and transient protective electronics, and signal connections terminal block. The housing shall be epoxy-coated aluminum, with a NEMA 4 / IP65 ingress protection rating. Threaded process connections shall be 3/4" minimum, flanged process connections shall be 1" minimum, with 4" maximum. C. The transmitter shall be loop powered and shall provide a 4-20 mA DC level signal output with HART capabilities. Accuracy shall be <0.5% of span with an operating temperature range of -40 to 85°C. D. Level transmitter shall be Siemens Hydro Ranger/Probe LU. 2.23 Conductivity Level Type Switches A. Probe type conductivity level switches integrating a control relay, control and reference electrode probes as required, and electrode probe holder. Unless otherwise specified in the ISA data sheets, electrode probes shall be rigid stainless steel and probe holder pressure- tight. B. All components provided by the same manufacturer. C. Element: 1. Rigid type: For probe lengths of 6 feet and less provide Type 316 stainless steel rigid probes unless otherwise specified in the instrument schedule ISA Data Sheets. Electrode probe shall be threaded at one end to fit electrode holder threads and insulated with 1/32 inch PVC sheath down to 1 inch from the other end. 2. Electrode probe holder. D. Suspended probes: For probe lengths longer than 6 feet, provide wire suspended probes within a protective plastic shield suspended and PVC insulated wires. Provide suitable adapters for fastening upper end to electrode fitting. 1. Switch: The control relay senses the liquid level by conductance through electrode probes and the process liquid: a. Provide a solid-state general-purpose control relay designed for single level or differential control. Page 12 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Electrical connection: One 1/2 inch NPT conduit entry. C. Power supply: (1) 120 VAC. (2) Power consumption: 10 VA maximum. d. SPDT contacts rated 5 amps resistive at 120 VAC. e. Secondary voltage (applied to electrodes): 12 VAC, 1.5 mA maximum. f. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X. 2. Components: a. Adjustable time delay on increasing or decreasing level. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: (1) Standard applications: (a) Warrick Controls Model or 16 VM. (b) B/W Control High Sensitivity Series 5200. (2) Intrinsically Safe: (a) Warrick Controls Model 27. (b) B/W Control High Sensitivity Series 5200 N7. 3. Approvals: a. Class I Div 2. E. If wired as intrinsically safe- Class 1, Div 1, Groups A, B, C & D F. Conductive Level Switch manufacturers shall be: a. Gems Sensors and Controls/Warrick. b. Ametek B/W Controls 6013. C. Approved equal. 2.24 Capacitance Type Level Switch: A. Capacitance type level switches shall be made up of a control relay, mechanically rigid and rugged non-metallic probe and probe housing. B. Switch: 1. Provide a rigid, non-metallic element. 2. The control relay senses the liquid level by capacitance measurement between the electrode probe, the process liquid, and the equipment ground: a. Power supply: (1) 120 VAC. (2) Power consumption: 10 VA maximum. b. Outputs: (1) Relay outputs: (a) 1 Form C contact. (b) Rated at 6 amperes at 120 VAC. (c) Programmable. C. Electrical connection: One 1/2-inch NPT conduit entry. Page 13 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.25 Tuning Fork Type Level Switch: A. Tuning fork level switches comprised of a control relay, mechanically rigid fork, and transmitter housing. B. Switch: The control relay senses the liquid level by frequency attenuation at the probe fork when immersed. 1. Power supply: a. 120 VAC. b. 24 VDC. C. Power consumption: 10 VA maximum. C. Outputs: 1. Relay outputs: a. 1 Form C contact. b. 5 amperes at 120 VAC. C. Programmable. D. Electrical connection: One 1/2-inch NPT conduit entry. E. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X. F. Approvals: Class I, Div 1 - if wired intrinsically safe. 2.26 Ball Float Type Level Switch: A. Free hanging, encapsulated body with a switch to determine position of float. B. Element: 1. Mechanical switch encapsulated in waterproof floating ball of nominal diameter, supported by flexible PVC cable and jacket or heavy neoprene. 2. The length of the PVC cable shall be, at a minimum, equal to sump depth plus 5 feet. 3. Float: Provide Type 316 stainless steel or polypropylene, minimum 3 inches in diameter. 4. An operating temperature rating: -30 degrees Fahrenheit to +150 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. Mercury switches are not acceptable. 6. Lead wires: Mounted in flexible waterproof PVC cable from switch to junction box terminals without splices. C. Switch: 1. Single pole double throw contacts rated 10 amps resistive at 120 VAC. 2. Provide the number of floats per level system as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Suspend ball float and adjust for level setpoint as required. D. Components: 1. Floats shall include Type 316 stainless steel clamp and brackets and 1/4 inch cable to allow testing of the float without entering the basin or wet well. 2. Provide strain relief at both ends of the float cable. 3. Float anchors: a. Furnish 15-pound PVC coated anchor kit with 10 feet]of Type 316 stainless steel chain. b. Provide stainless steel shackles and float clamps. C. Ball Float Level Switch manufacturers shall be: Page 14 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction (a) Conery Mfg. Inc. (b) Approved equal 2.27 RTD Temperature Transmitter A. Transmitter shall accept an input from a 100-ohm platinum two or three wire RTD. Temperature measurement range shall be selectable with a DIP (dual inline package) switch. Transmitter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC output with HART capabilities proportional to the calibrated temperature range. Unit shall be capable of measuring and transmitting temperatures over the range 0 to 1000 F. Unit shall provide 80 percent zero and span adjustability within any user selected input range. If specified, a 3-1/2 digit, 0.8-inch high liquid crystal display (LCD) shall provide visibility up to 30 feet and the decimal point position shall switch selectable. B. In addition, the enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X and the NEMA 4X rating shall not void the explosion-proof ratings. Transmitter shall be Action Instruments F513 or approved equal. 2.28 Process Indicators A. Indicating receivers shall be of the high visibility type and shall receive and indicate a 4-20 mA DC signal on a vertical scale 4 inches long with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.6 percent of span. Each indicator shall have an engraved nameplate to identify the service. Indicators shall be Red Lion Model LD, or approved equal. 2.29 Current Loop Isolators A. Current isolators shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly proportional 4- 20 mA DC output signal. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.1 percent of scale. Isolators shall operate on 115 VAC,60 Hz. Output load capability shall be a minimum of 1500 ohms. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 816, or approved equal. 2.30 Rotary Shaft Position Indicator Transmitters (Encoders) A. Encoders shall be absolute multi-turn type. Encoders may be of mechanical, optical, or magnetic technology. Encoders shall operate on 8-32VDC input voltage and produce a linearly proportional 4-20 mA DC output signal. Encoders shall have an operating temperature range of-40°to 85°C @ 98% humidity with a minimum IP67 environmental rating. Encoders shall be manufactured be AMCI (Advanced Micro Controls, Inc.), Pepper-Fuchs, or approved equal. 2.31 Pump Control Switches A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.32 Flow Controllers A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.33 Level Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.34 Pressure Controller Page 15 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.35 Process Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. 2.36 Annunciators A. Annunciators shall be a 24-point solid state annunciator. B. Cards shall be provided for all windows plus five spares. Window labels shall be in Capital Letters and worded as indicated on the plans. C. Controls shall include warble tone horn, Test and Acknowledge pushbuttons. D. Annunciators shall be Panalarm Model 73664, or approved equal. 2.37 Turbidity Analyzer A. Instruments shall be a continuous reading low range nephelometer, utilizing a light beam passed through a water sample to measure the amount of light scattered by the turbidity particles. Each instrument shall consist of an instrument body and master indicator. The master indicator shall be of the indicating type with ranges of 0 to 0.1, 0 to 0.3, 0 to 1, 0 to 3, 0 to 10, 0 to 30, 0 to 100, 0 to 300, and 0 to 1000 NTLI. Master indicator output shall be 4-20 mA DC. B. There shall be furnished to the Owner one screw-in vial, grab sample curvette, light shield, spare lamp and fuse and accessory case, standard 0.12 NTLI. C. Turbidity analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, or approved equal. 2.38 Chlorine Residual Analyzer A. The chlorine analyzer equipment shall be Hach Model CL17, or approved equal. The analyzer equipment shall include a submersible sensor probe, complete with agitator, with sufficient interconnecting power and signal cable to connect to the analyzer. The analyzer and the agitator shall operate on 120V, 60-Hz, 1-phase power. The analyzer shall be enclosed in NEMA 4X enclosures with wall mounting hardware. The analyzer and sensor probe shall be installed as indicated. B. The residual chlorine shall be indicated on a mirrored scale front panel meter, having three switch selectable ranges of 0 to 1, 0 to 5, and 0 to 10 ppm. Alarm status shall be displayed by LED indicators. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent. Temperature compensation shall be automatic from 0 to 50 C. The analyzer shall provide output of 4-20 mA DC and 0-1 mA DC. The 0-1 mA DC output shall be used to position the recorder needle. The 4-20 mA DC output shall be used as a residual level input as indicated. C. Chlorine Residual analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. 2.39 Sulfite Ion Residual Analyzer A. Each sulfite ion analyzer shall provide a direct measurement of the sulfite ion concentration in a water sample. The analyzer system shall be comprised of a monitor, a flowcell assembly and a sulfite sensor. The analyzer monitor shall come complete with a direct reading digital LED display, two adjustable alarms with relays, an isolated 4-20 mA DC output and flashing LED indicating low sulfite ion level. The monitor shall be capable of being wall-mounted. B. The sulfite sensor shall be a voltametric membraned sensor, composed of polarized noble metal electrodes immersed in an electrolyte. The sensor shall be isolated from the waste Page 16 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction stream by a ion permeable membrane. The sensor shall not require reagents for operation and shall not be affected by other constituents normally found in dechlorinated effluent streams. C. The sulfite ion sensor shall be placed into a flowcell assembly which shall automatically regulate the sample flowrate and pressure past the sensor. The assembly shall consist of a constant head overflow tube and a clear sensor flow chamber. A 1/4-inch hose bib shall be provided forthe sample inlet and a 3/8-inch hose bib shall be provided forthe drain connection. D. The sulfite ion analyzer system shall have measurement range of 0 to 19.99 ppm sulfite ion concentration as a positive display and a 0 to 1.99 ppm chlorine concentration as a negative display. The chlorine indication shall be for relative value only. The analog output shall be an isolated 4-20 mA signal and shall correspond to a selectable output range of either 0 to 1, 0 to 2, 0 to 3, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, or 0 to 20 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent or 0.05 ppm sulfite ion concentration with a repeatability of plus or minus 1 percent or .05 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The analyzer shall operate on a 10 to 30 gph sample flow rate. E. The analyzer shall have high and low alarm setpoints with auxiliary relays and an independent zero crossover relay to indicate the presence of residual chlorine. The relays shall be SPDT rated at 3 A at 110-VAC resistive. The analyzer shall operate on 120V,60-Hz, 1-phase power supply and shall be housed in a NEMA 4X ABS enclosure. F. Two sensors and a 25-foot cable shall be provided with each unit. An accessory polarizer shall be supplied with each unit to maintain the spare sensors ready for immediate use. G. The sulfite ion residual analyzer monitor shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. 2.40 Suspended Solids Analyzer A. The suspended solids meter shall consist of an infrared measuring probe and a separate electronic transmitter. Suspended solids shall be measured using a four-beam infrared transmission system which is unaffected by or compensated for contamination, temperature, or sensor aging. B. The measuring probe shall have no moving parts, and shall be constructed of rugged materials capable of continuous operation in the process material within the specified environmental limits of the process. The measuring probe shall be designed for mounting for submersible installation in a basin, tank, or channel, or for insertion through a 2-inch ball valve into a pipeline. The measuring range of the measuring probe shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. C. The electronics unit shall provide a digital display which can be selected to show the output percentage, output current, probe signal level, power condition, and alarm levels. The electronics unit shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA DC output signal to drive 900 ohms maximum. The unit shall be calibrated by span and zero potentiometers. One high and one low limit alarm contact shall be provided (each adjustable over the full range by a potentiometer) with indicators showing when either is activated. One alarm contact shall be provided to indicate a full depletion condition, with an indicator showing when it is activated. The alarm contacts shall be rated at 3.5-A, 120-VAC general use; 2.5-A, 240-VAC general use; 5-A,30-VDC resistive, 5-A,240-VAC resistive. D. The electronic transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. A 25-foot cable, with quick-connect plug shall connect the measuring probe to the electronics unit. The unit shall operate over an ambient temperature range of-20 C to 55 C and shall be corrosion resistant. E. The suspended solids meter shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI, or approved equal. The unit shall come complete with probe and necessary hardware for mounting it. 2.41 Sludge Blanket Level Detectors Page 17 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction A. The solids level detector shall provide a continuous measurement of the depth of a liquid- solids interface in gravity or flotational separation systems. The system shall be of the ultrasonic type, and shall not require the transducer to come in contact with the interface. The system shall be capable of monitoring interfaces continuously 2 to 19 feet from the sensor with a resolution of 0.1 foot. B. The system shall consist of an analyzer and a swing bracket holding the sensor and transceiver. The analyzer shall be housed in a NEMA 4X lockable enclosure with brackets for wall or handrail mounting. The analyzer shall have a digital display and shall provide the following functions: 1. Run or operate mode. 2. Test mode. 3. Program mode. 4. Set point program mode. 5. Tank depth mode. 6. Self-diagnostics. C. The analyzer shall have a 4-20 mA DC isolated output scalable to all or any portion of the operating range. It shall also have four individually programmable SPDT relays at 7 amperes at 120 VAC. The analyzer shall also provide test outputs of 4-20 mA DC. D. The swing bracket assembly holding the sensor/analyzer assembly shall be capable of being located as far as 200 feet from the analyzer and be complete with the necessary length of connecting cable. The system shall be Royce Model 2500 with Model 25 bracket assembly. 2.42 Dissolved Oxygen Analyzers A. Furnish and install where indicated a complete dissolved oxygen monitoring system. The primary sensing device for the dissolved oxygen level shall be a galvanic, membrane type oxygen probe mounted as indicated on the plans and operated in conjunction with a dissolved oxygen analyzer. The complete system shall be as manufactured by Hach,or approved equal. B. The dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be dual range, manually selectable 0 to 15 or 0 to 3 mg/L, with a temperature range of 0 to 50 C. The output of the analyzer shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal and shall not output a temperature signal when the unit is switched to read temperature on the meter. The analyzer shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure and furnished with the necessary hardware for handrail mounting. The unit shall operate a 120V, 60-Hz, 1-phase power. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI or approved equal. 2.43 Oxygen Analyzers A. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall measure dissolved oxygen at the locations where they are installed and shall have two scales, a 0 to 3 ppm scale and a 0 to 12 ppm scale. The analyzer enclosure shall be made of styrene and shall be rated NEMA 4X. The analyzer shall provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal which shall represent the dissolved oxygen value currently sensed by the analyzer. The analyzer shall operate over a temperature range of-30 to +50 C with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. Analyzer display shall be 4-1/2-inch dual scaled meter and unit shall be capable of functioning with sensor to analyzer distance of 600 feet. B. Provide a self-cleaning, automatically temperature compensated submersion type sensor which uses two dissimilar metals as electrodes. Sensor electrodes shall continually be cleaned by a motor operated rotating whetstone and electrode materials shall be iron and silver. Membrane/electrolyte type sensor or sensors operating on a different principle shall not be accepted. C. Oxygen analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach,Swan,ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. Page 18 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.44 PH/Orp Analyzers A. PH/ORP analyzers shall provide PH measurements of 0 to 14 and ORP measurements of- 2000 to 2000 MV. Unit shall provide single or two point automated calibration and automatic recognition of pre-selected buffer valves. Unit shall provide diagnostic error messages for identification of abnormal conditions, shall have a 4-1/2 digit liquid crystal display (LCD) and be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Provide a 24-VDC power supply to supply instrument power and 4-20 mA DC loop power. Unit shall act as two-wire 4-20 mA DC transmitter to transmit PH or ORP values to remote locations. B. Provide sensor rated for-5 to +60 C operation and for insertion into liquid filled, pressurized process line without interrupting flow. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan, ATI or approved equal. 2.45 TOC (Total Organic Carbon)Analyzers A. TOC analyzers shall provide continuous, online monitoring of total organic carbon, total inorganic carbon biological oxygen demand and/or chemical oxygen demand via correlation in water. B. Analyzer shall measure total organic carbon by a two-stage advanced oxidation utilizing Hydroxyl and a manganese catalyst. C. Unit shall have internal sensors and utilize self-diagnostics to monitor analyzer status and produce alerts when maintenance or service is required. D. Unit shall have a measurement range of 0-25mgC/I. Detection limit shall be 0.06mgC/I. Unit shall have a repeatability of+/- 3% of span or+/-0.03mgC/I, whichever is greater. E. Unit shall be rated for 0 to +45°C temperature with a relative humidity of 5-85% operation and configured for 2°-60°C temperature, ambient-pressure process. F. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. 2.46 Ammonia Monochloramine Analyzers A. Ammonia Monochloramine analyzers shall provide continuous, online monitoring of total ammonia, Monochloramine and free ammonia in the process system. B. Unit shall have internal sensors and utilize self-diagnostics to monitor analyzer status and produce alerts when maintenance or service is required. C. Unit shall have a measurement range of 0.01-2ppm(as N), 0.1-10mg/L(as Cl). Unit shall have a repeatability of+/- 3% of span or+/-0.01 (as N), whichever is greater. D. Unit shall be rated for 0 to +45°C temperature with a relative humidity of 5-95% operation and configured for 5-50°C temperature, ambient-pressure process. E. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. 2.47 Fluoride Analyzers A. Fluoride analyzers shall provide continuous, online monitoring of fluoride in the process system. B. The fluoride analyzer shall employ an ion-selective electrode method of measurement using TISAB reagent and be capable of measuring fluoride every 4.2 minutes. C. The instrument shall provide resolution of 0.1 mg/L, repeatability within ±0.07 mg/L, and accuracy better than ±10% of reading or±0.10 mg/L, whichever is greater. D. The instrument shall be constructed with a temperature controlled, wall-jet flow cell to guide Page 19 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction the sample directly toward the surface of the electrode to assure fast wash out. E. The instrument shall be constructed with a temperature controlled, wall-jet flow cell to guide the sample directly toward the surface of the electrode to assure fast wash out. F. The analyzer shall be designed for 30 days unattended operation and use only 500 mL of each standard every two months when the calibration interval is set for 24 hours. G. Operating with a lanthanum fluoride crystal, the working electrode shall employ a removable sensor for easy replacement. H. Unit shall be rated for 0 to +40°C temperature with a relative humidity of 5-9% operation. I. The fluoride analyzer shall employ a two-point log/linear using 0.5 mg/L and 5.0 mg/L fluoride standards calibration method. J. The analyzer shall be microprocessor-controlled and provide a 4-20 mA recorder output as well as 2 alarms. 1. Each alarm shall be user-selectable for sample concentration alarms (high or low), analyzer system warnings, or analyzer system errors. 2. The sample concentration alarms shall be fully adjustable through the entire range. 3. The system warning shall activate for minor variations in analyzer performance. 4. The system alarm shall activate for major variations in analyzer performance and it shall shut down the analyzer until corrective action is taken. 5. The microprocessor shall provide self-diagnostic functions accessible through an alphanumeric, menu-driven keyboard. K. Two SPDT normally open/normally closed dry contact relays rated at 5 A resistive load at 230 Vac shall be provided. L. Analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Swan,ATI, ChemScan or approved equal. 2.48 Analyzer Controllers A. Single Analyzer Controllers 1. Controllers shall have provisions for a minimum of two (2) digital and/or analog sensor input devices. 2. Controllers shall have provisions for a minimum of two (2) 4-20mA analog sensor outputs. 3. Controller data management shall be SD card based. 4. Controller shall have MODBUS RS232/RS485, PROFIBUS DP v1.0 and HART 7.2 communications capabilities. 5. Controller manufacturer shall be Hach, Swan,ATI or approved equal. B. Multiple Analyzer Controllers 1. Controller shall have 320X240 TFT color Glas/Glas-Touch screen interface display. 2. Controller shall have up to four(4) SPDT, user-configurable contacts per probe module. 3. Controller shall have up to twelve (12) 0-20mA analog inputs per probe module. 4. Controller shall have up to twelve (12) 0/4-20mA analog outputs per probe module. 5. Controller shall have MODBUS RS232/RS485, PROFIBUS DP v1.0 and HART 7.2 communications capabilities. 6. Controller manufacturer shall be Hach SC1000 or ChemScan. PART 3 EXECUTION Page 20 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 8, 22 Feb 2021 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.1 Installation A. Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. 3.2 Field Quality Control A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and startup of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. B. Upon completion of installation of sample pumps, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be checked for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, general operation, etc. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. C. Upon completion of system installation Contactor shall perform a full check out and calibration of the system. D. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier's authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION Page 21 of 21 INSTRUMENTATION—40 90 01 R7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of the furnishing of any and all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and any and all labor and superintendence necessary for the installation of, or an addition to a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)- based Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. The SCADA System shall be comprised of an integrated PLC-based facility control system. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets suitable for the environment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be part of a standard off-shelf configurable system readily available in the market place and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of any and all equipment, programming, configuration and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and fully functional SCADA system as described in this Specification. 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals" for all required submittal requirements. 1.3 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards" for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. The system shall be a continuous polling, supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA), utilizing programmable logic controllers (PLCs). System shall be configured and programmed to meet the Owner provided Sequence of Operations. B. Primary communications shall be Ethernet (copper) or fiber-optic, using the PLC manufacturer's standard protocols. C. Automatic control functions shall reside in the station PLC such that, upon loss of the Plant HMI, control of the system shall continue without interruption. The Operator, through the Plant HMI, shall have the capability to set or change any automatic control or alarm variable in the software control program. D. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, and all other labor and materials required necessary to integrate the new control system with the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system. Integration shall be implemented in such a manner that the entire new control system can be operated from a single workstation in the O.N. Stevens Water Plant Operations Center. Page 1 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Installation of all equipment, programming, configuration and materials including, but not limited to interface equipment, additional network switches, additional development and programming of new HMI screens to be incorporated in the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system, any and all new network switch configuration and any other hardware, software, programming and configuration required to integrate new control system into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system. 2. Contractor shall conduct a series of interactive workshops with Water Plant Operations and SCADA personnel during preliminary SCADA design to develop all necessary screens and program control logic required to integrate new Station control into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Process Control Systems Suppliers: 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.3, "Acceptable Manufacturers"for all equipment manufacturer requirements. 2. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 1.4.C, "Process Control Systems Suppliers" for all control system supplier requirements. 2.2 Equipment A. Station PLC: 1. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system shall be the ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLC systems manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) only. Processor and associated 1/0 shall be selected as required to meet the minimum memory and 1/0 requirements of the final control programming with a minimum of 30% memory and a minimum of 30% spare 1/0 reserved for program and facility expansion. a. The PLC processor models approved for use in O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities control systems are: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-L72 (a) For control systems installed in critical service (as determined by the Owner in the contract documents) requiring redundancy, PLC system shall be configured so as to have a separate, redundant ControlLogix 1756-L72 PLC processor connected to the primary operational PLC processor in a fully-redundant configuration. Fully-Redundant is defined in this case as the Stand-by processor being directly connected to the primary control processor, running the identical program concurrently as the primary processor, and will fail-over to the Stand-by processor automatically. PLC system shall be configured in such a manner that the system where, upon the failure of the primary processor, the redundant processor shall continue uninterrupted operation of the pump station. (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-L33ER 2. The PLC power supply shall be the ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLC 24-volt DC power supplies manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) for the ControlLogix or CompactLogix family of PLC's only. 3. All control panel and field instrumentation wiring to 1/0 modules shall be through heavy- duty DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks. Compression-type screw terminal blocks shall be used to provide secure wire connections. Spring-type terminal blocks shall not be used in any control panel or junction box application. Page 2 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 24VDC + Blue 24VDC- Brown 120VAC H or L1 Yellow 120VAC N or L2 White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog input White Loo Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey HART White Loo Orange (Signal) Digital Input 120VAC Pink a. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the following table: 4. All types of input/output modules shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 5. The PLC shall contain discrete input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Discrete Input Modules: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-1B16 16-point discrete input modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IQ16 16-point discrete input modules b. Discrete Output Modules: (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-OB161 16-point discrete output modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-113161 16-point discrete output modules 6. The PLC shall contain analog input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Analog Input Modules (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF16 16-point analog input modules (2) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-IF8 8-point analog input modules (3) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF16C 16-point analog input modules (4) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-IF8C 8-point analog input modules b. Analog Output Modules (1) Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 1756-OF8 8-point analog output modules (2) Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-OF8 8-point analog output modules 7. Contractor shall provide any and all interface modules required to seamlessly communicate with other required station equipment such as VFD's, Machine Condition and Vibration monitors, etc. 8. The PLC programming software shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 with all associated required communications and configuration packages that match the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP included. B. Human /Machine Interfaces (HMIs): 1. Human machine interfaces shall consist of network interface, personal computers, monitor, event printer, computer software PC interface software and any and all other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative man machine interface. 2. The software shall be the version of Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk SE Client or FactoryTalk SE Station that match the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP for the Operator desktop workstations, and FactoryTalk Studio Enterprise on the Engineering Laptop workstations. 3. Computers shall be manufactured by Dell (sole source). Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the PCCS. 4. Monitors shall be microprocessor based, 24-inch flat-screen Color Monitor, 1280 x 1024 Page 3 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen. 5. Engineering Laptop Computer(If required): a. The computer shall have the same capabilities as the aforementioned desktop workstations. b. Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the PCCS. C. All software shall be provided by the Contractor and registered in Owners name. C. PC Interface Software: 1. General: a. Interface software for interfacing the HMI to the Station PLC shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 suite of configuration software, version matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP. b. All required licenses for all software and documentation shall be provided for each computer. All software provided shall be of the version of the software matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP with the latest patches and service packs applied. Licenses shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the project. C. Contractor shall modify, develop and provide any and all SCADA architecture drawings that determine clearly and unambiguously all supervisory system hardware and software requirements. 2. System Configuration: a. Graphic Displays: (1) The graphical display builder shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Studio Enterprise. (2) The system shall utilize Rockwell Automation PlantPAx as the standard set of graphic symbols library, as well as any existing libraries currently in the ONSWTP graphics inventory. (3) Complete graphical displays must be able to run on any system node in a networked system, without the need to edit and/or re-establish dynamic connections. (4) New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Operator graphical and control screens and displays. (5) A Pop-Up Window feature shall permit graphic displays, complete with dynamic connections, to be re-sized and popped up on command anywhere on the screen during runtime. Pop-Up Windows are required to give the Operator instant access to more detail of process operation, alarm listings, and guidance. (6) Utilities are to be available for import and export of graphic files to .DXF file format for use in AutoCAD Versions 2010 or later, or other software using the .DXF file format. (7) The system shall permit the import of .BMP files for use as objects in the graphic display builder. 3. Runtime: a. Runtime operation of the system shall execute the database strategy, graphic displays, and optional functions created during system configuration. For guaranteed data integrity, the system shall operate in a true prioritized, pre-emptive real-time multi-tasking operating environment for simultaneous execution of data collection, control, graphics, alarming, trending, data logging, file transfer, and other system activities. CPU operation shall be optimized during runtime for maximum system Page 4 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction efficiency and performance. b. The runtime system shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Client. Version shall match version currently in use at ONSWTP. C. New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Operator graphical and control screens and displays. d. A color coded Alarm/Event screen shall list pertinent information on all system alarms and events (Operator actions) as they occur, are acknowledged, and return to normal. e. Alarm/Event screens shall include date, time, alarm/event type, tagname parameter, description, value, engineering units, and return-to-normal, as applicable. f. Operator Events shall include: (1) Alarm Acknowledgement. (2) Block Parameter change (set point, output, etc.). (3) Block Auto/Manual change. (4) Block Setpoint Remote/Local Change. (5) Default Security Level Change. (6) Logging On and Logging Off. (7) Ability to take notes on individual alarms. g. Alarm and Event messages may be printed to the same printer, or to different printers, as selected by the user. h. An on-line Trend Window function shall permit display of multiple selected data points in real-time as graphs of the values versus time. The system shall support multiple Trend Windows. i. Pen assignments and time period shall be configurable on-line. j. A Zoom/Unzoom feature shall permit expanding and shrinking the amplitude scale. k. An unlimited number of variables may be selected for real-time trending. The system will automatically collect and save up to 60 samples of each parameter. I. Real-time trend points shall be buffered such that when a Trend Window is called up, it shall appear with previously sampled trend pen data, not blank. M. The Trend Window shall also permit X-Y plotting of up to four variable on the x-axis versus one variable on the y-axis. n. The system shall be supplied with a Historian for collecting, saving, and replaying selected system data. Historian shall be able to integrate with the existing ONSWTP historian system. o. The historian system shall be Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk Historian SE. P. Data logging may be started and stopped by the Operator, process conditions, or system events. q. Data may be logged to up to 100 History Files, each containing up to 100 data points. The logging rate may be manually or automatically switched between two settings on- line to permit high speed data collection during conditions of interest. r. Historical data file may be replayed on-line, and viewed in graphical or tabular form. The History Window time span and variable amplitude may be compressed or expended in logical increments by the Operator. S. The on-line Historical Replay function shall permit viewing previously saved files and/or currently active historical files. 4. Report Generation: Page 5 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction a. A consolidated Report function shall be furnished. It shall utilize a standard spreadsheet format for creation of system reports. A comprehensive built-in library of standard spreadsheet functions shall be included for selection and simultaneous manipulation of local or network data. At minimum, the library shall include mathematical, statistical, and Boolean operations. b. The Report generation function shall collect real-time and/or file data from the local node, or remote nodes via a network when used. File data shall include historical and alarm files at minimum. C. Report files shall be output on command to the local printer or to disk, as specified. Initiation of report output may be manual or automatic based on time of day, system event, or process condition. d. Freeform text may be integrated anywhere in the report. e. Provision shall be included for incorporation of Operator message fields. This shall permit capture and save of Operator comments made during runtime for inclusion in the report. f. The report shall also provide for capture and saving of text fields from system alarm and event messages. 5. Networking: a. An efficient high speed, real-time networking function shall be optimally available. It shall provide on-line real-time access to live data and file transfer simultaneously during runtime. b. The networking option shall support all Ethernet network topologies. C. Each network node shall operate independently to permit unrestricted assignment of system functions in a true distributed architecture. d. Network data exchange shall be "exception driven" rather than "polled" for maximum throughput during runtime. e. A network timekeeper function must be supplied to insure synchronization of all network node time clocks. Any node may be designated as the master timekeeper to which all other node clocks are synchronized. Should the master node fail, multiple backup nodes may be designated to continue network time synchronization. f. A global alarm capability must be provided which will allow alarms that occur anywhere on the network to be automatically broadcast over the entire network. Individual nodes may be configured to receive all alarms, only certain alarm types, or all alarms from a single or multiple pre-selected nodes. g. In order to exchange data between different networks, the networking option shall support use of more than one network adapter on a node. 6. Training: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training" for all required training requirements. 7. Support: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required support requirements. 8. Upgrades: a. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). Page 6 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 1. Contractor shall provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply. UPS systems shall be manufactured by APC only (sole-sourced). 2. Uninterruptible Power Supply system shall provide 30 minute standby 120/208-VAC power for all Contractor-provided equipment, including all HMI equipment and all PLC and control equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper calculation and sizing of the required UPS. 3. The uninterruptible power supply shall have the following features: a. Input- 240 V: 192-276 VAC. b. Output— 120/208 VAC: Regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. Depending on the size and configuration of the required UPS system, Output shall consist of: (1) Not less than three duplex receptacles (six receptacles). (2) Separate UPS power distribution panel. UPS distribution panel shall be mounted as close as reasonable to the HMI and / or PLC equipment to be supplied by the UPS. C. No-Break Power: The supply shall not allow any break in output power, regardless of what happens to the input power. Switching is not permitted. d. Lightning and Surge Protection: Passes ANSI-IEEE C62.41 Categories A & B. UL listed. e. Spike Attenuation: 2000:1. f. Galvanic Isolation: Qualifies as true, separately derived power source as defined by NEC Article 250-5D. Complete from line. Output neutral bonded to ground. g. Voltage Regulation: Output voltage regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. h. Output Waveform: Computer-grade sine-wave, less than 5 percent THD. i. Noise (RF) Isolation: 120 dB common mode, 60 dB normal mode. j. Output Protection: Current-limiting ferroresonant transformer. k. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum, on line. I. Audible Noise: 57 dB maximum, on line. M. UPS system shall be network compatible. 4. Contractor shall configure network and diagnostic notification as required and demonstrate their operation as part of the integrated system. 5. If required, external battery cabinets for extended run-time shall be in cabinets similar to the UPS. 6. Any programmable logic controller (PLC) enclosure or critical process instrument control panel located in an area without an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) source shall have a local UPS appropriatly sized for the PLC or instrument control panel enclosure load mounted in a separate enclosure located adjacent to the PLC enclosure. 2.3 Software Programming A. The Contractor shall provide a programmed database, using the equipment and software program specified, to accomplish the functions specified. B. For development of the HMI Graphics, the Contractor shall conduct a minimum of two (2) one (1) day workshops, at the Owner's facility. The Engineer will be in attendance, to help ensure compliance with the control strategies, treatment processes and that the system being developed follows the Sequence of Operations documents and the memorandum of understanding developed at the Development of Control Strategy meeting. Page 7 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 4 20 July 2020 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. The first workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the basic layout the graphic and popup screens, Help screens, roll-over Tooltip implementation and online Operations Manual access implementation for discussion and comment. The screens shall be at a stage that reflects the process and illustrates the required set-points for control. The Owner will be allowed to comment on layout of screens, but the not graphic standards. After the workshop and before the next workshop the Contractor shall make the agreed upon changes to the screens. 2. The last workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the final screens with database links complete. The Contractor shall show animation of screens by manipulating the HMI database. The Owner will be allowed to comment on the screens for process accuracy. The Contractor shall make corrections to the screens and shall be completed for testing at the Factory Acceptance Test. 3. Refer to Section 40 90 02.XX "Sequence of Operations" for project specific control sequence requirements and configuration. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 3, "Execution" for all execution requirements. END OF SECTION Page 8 of 8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02 R4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 02.1 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Work Included A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of the furnishing of any and all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and any and all labor and superintendence necessary for the fabrication, installation of, or an addition to a microprocessor-based Power Protection Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. The Power Protection SCADA System shall be comprised of information processors and controllers, motor, generator, transformer, bus, breaker, capacitor and distribution protection relays, metering, annunciation and all associated software. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets suitable for the environment (if required in the Contract documents) and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be part of a standard off-shelf configurable system readily available in the market place and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. B. Contractor shall furnish any and all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment required for a complete and operational Power Protection SCADA system. Contractor's work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Fabrication of any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between any and all equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing Power Protection SCADA system equipment or equipment furnished and installed under other contracts. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for the Power Protection SCADA system configuration programming if required by the Contract Documentation. Otherwise, configuration and programming of the Power Protection SCADA system shall be the responsibility of the Owner's representative. C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that the Power Protection SCADA is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the specified equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. D. Contractor shall reference and comply with the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Instrumentation and Electrical Standards Development Project (Prof. No. El 30064) in addition to all applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes for all power protection SCADA system installations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the work of the system manufacturer's service personnel and with the Owner during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the system. F. This Specification lists and describes all Power Protection SCADA equipment currently approved for use by the City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire and review any and all contract documents, including, but not limited to P&ID's, plans, wiring diagrams, layouts, etc., to determine which power protection SCADA monitoring and control equipment and any other devices are required for each individual Project to insure the Project Power Protection SCADA system is fully functional and operational upon completion. Page 1 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.2 Submittals A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.6, "Submittals"for all required submittal requirements. 1.3 Standards A. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 1, Section 1.2, Paragraph B: "Reference Standards"for all applicable standards. B. Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, contract drawings or documents, the Contractor shall issue a Request for Information (RFI) pertaining to the conflict immediately to the attention of the Owner's Representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. The Power Protection SCADA system shall be a continuous polling, supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA), utilizing programmable real time automation controllers (RTAC). System shall be configured and programmed to meet the Owner-provided Power Protection SCADA system requirements. B. Primary communications shall be Ethernet (copper) or fiber-optic, using the RTAC manufacturer's standard protocols. C. Automatic control functions shall reside in the station RTAC such that, upon loss of the Plant HMI, control of the system shall continue without interruption. The Operator, through the Plant HMI, shall have the capability to monitor only any automatic control or alarm variable in the software control program. D. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to integrate the new Power Protection system with the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant Power Protection SCADA system. Integration shall be implemented in such a manner that the entire new Power Protection system can be monitored or operated from a single, dedicated power protection system workstation in the O.N. Stevens Water Plant PCR building #1. 1. If required in the Contract documents, Contractor shall conduct a series of interactive workshops with Water Plant Maintenance personnel during preliminary Power Protection SCADA design to develop any and all necessary screens and program RTAC control logic required to integrate new Station control into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations Power Protection SCADA system. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Power Protection Systems Equipment Suppliers: 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.3, "Acceptable Manufacturers" for all Power Protection SCADA equipment manufacturer requirements. 2. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 1.4.D, "Power Protection SCADA Systems Suppliers" for all power protection system supplier requirements. Page 2 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.2 Equipment The Power Protection SCADA system equipment shall be manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. Automation controllers, protection relays and network equipment dedicated to the Power Protection SCADA system shall be selected as required to meet the specific project power protection system requirements. A. Real Time Automation Controller(RTAC): 1. The Real Time Automation Controller (RTAC) system shall be the SEL-3555 / SEL-3530 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. a. The RTAC models approved for use in O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant and associated facilities Power Protection SCADA systems are: (1) SEL-3550 Real Time Automation Controller(RTAC) (2) SEL-3530-4 Real Time Automation Controller(RTAC) b. The RTAC power supply shall be integral to the specified RTAC unit shall be rated for: 125-250VDC 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 2. The SEL-3530-4 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 3530BAl XX21 1 XOXXXXXX Configuration Key: 7172 B. Feeder Protection Relays: 1. Feeder Protection Relays shall be the SEL-751 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. 2. The SEL-751 power supply shall be integral to the specified relay and shall be rated for: 115-250VDC; 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 125VDC/VAC Digital Input 3. The SEL-751 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 751A51ACAOX74851231 Configuration Key: 0549 C. Motor Protection Relays: 1. Motor Protection Relays shall be the SEL-710 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. 2. The SEL-710 power supply shall be integral to the specified relay and shall be rated for: 115-250VDC; 110-240VAC, 50/60Hz 125VDC/VAC Digital Input 3. The SEL-710 approved configurations (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 071001ACAOX71850201 Configuration Key Code: 0344 Configuration Part Number: 071001ACA9X71850201 Configuration Key Code: 0434 Page 3 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Human/Machine Interfaces (HMIs): 1. Human machine interfaces shall consist of network interface, personal computers, monitor, computer software, PC interface software and any and all other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative man machine interface. 2. The software shall be the version of SEL ACSELERATOR suite of programming software that matches the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP for the Power Protection SCADA desktop workstations and Engineering Laptop workstations. 3. Workstation computers shall be manufactured by Dell (sole source). Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the Power Protection SCADA Systems Supplier. a. Power Protection SCADA control panel computers mounted inside control panels shall be the SEL-3360 Compact Industrial P.C. series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. (1) Computer requirements shall be determined by the Owner and stated in the contract documents upon the determination and approval of the Power Protection SCADA Systems Supplier. (2) The SEL-3620 approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: (TBD) Configuration Key Code: (TBD) 4. Monitors shall be microprocessor based, 24-inch flat-screen color monitor, 1920 x 1080 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen. Power Protection SCADA control panel computers mounted in the control panel door shall be microprocessor based, 24- inch panel-mount, touch-screen monitor, 1920 x 1080 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen and rated for industrial environments. C. Power Protection SCADA Interface Software: 1. General: a. Interface software for interfacing the HMI to the Power Protection SCADA system shall be SEL ACSELERATOR suite of programming software, versions matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP. b. All required licenses for all software and documentation shall be provided for each computer. All software provided shall be of the version of the software matching the current configuration and protocols at ONSWTP with the latest patches and service packs applied. Licenses shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the project. C. Contractor shall modify, develop and provide any and all SCADA architecture drawings that determine clearly and unambiguously all supervisory system hardware and software requirements. 2. System Configuration: a. Graphic Displays: (1) The graphical display builder shall be Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL- 5035 ACSELERATOR Diagram Builder software. (2) Complete graphical displays must be able to run on any Power Protection SCADA system node in a networked system, without the need to edit and/or re-establish dynamic connections. Page 4 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction (3) New graphical displays shall mimic the look and feel of current ONSWTP Power Protection SCADA system graphical and control screens and displays. 3. Report Generation: a. The Report generation function shall collect real-time and/or file data from the local node, or remote nodes via a network when used. File data shall include historical and alarm files at minimum. b. Report files shall be output on command to the local printer or to disk, as specified. Initiation of report output may be manual or automatic based on time of day, system event, or process condition. 4. Networking: a. An efficient high speed, real-time networking function shall be optimally available. It shall provide on-line real-time access to live data and file transfer simultaneously during runtime. b. The networking option shall support all Ethernet network topologies. C. Each network node shall operate independently to permit unrestricted assignment of system functions in a true distributed architecture. d. Network data exchange shall be "exception driven" rather than "polled" for maximum throughput during runtime. e. A network timekeeper function must be supplied to insure synchronization of all network node time clocks. Any node may be designated as the master timekeeper to which all other node clocks are synchronized. Should the master node fail, multiple backup nodes may be designated to continue network time synchronization. f. A global alarm capability must be provided which will allow alarms that occur anywhere on the network to be automatically broadcast over the entire network. Individual nodes may be configured to receive all alarms, only certain alarm types, or all alarms from a single or multiple pre-selected nodes. g. In order to exchange data between different networks, the networking option shall support use of more than one network adapter on a node. h. Power Protection SCADA System network switches shall be the SEL-2730M series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. (1) The SEL-2730M power supply shall be integral to the network switch and shall be rated for: 125VDC/VAC w/Euro-style connector (2) The SEL-2730M Managed Network Switch shall have the following port configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents): Ports 1-4: SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) (Standard) Ports 5-8: Copper 10/100 Mbps (Standard) Ports 9-24: Twelve (12) 10/100BASE-T Four(4) 100BASE=FX Multimode (3) The SEL-2730M approved configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents) shall be as follows: Configuration Part Number: 2730MOARAX1 1 12AAAAX1 Configuration Key Code: 3160 Page 5 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction i. Security Gateway: (1) Power Protection SCADA System Security Gateways shall be the SEL-3620 series manufactured by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) only. (2) The SEL-3620 power supply shall be integral to the network switch and shall be rated for: 125/250VDC/VAC 120/240VAC (3) The SEL-3620 Security Gateway shall have the following port configuration (unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents): One (1) 10/100BASE-T One (1) 100BASE-FX (Multimode 5. Training: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training"for all required training requirements. 6. Support: a. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all required support requirements. 7. Upgrades: a. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). D. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 1. Refer to Section 40 90 02 "Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System", Part 2, Section 2.2, "Equipment"for all required UPS requirements. E. Power Protection SCADA System Panels and Enclosures: 1. All control panel and field instrumentation wiring to 1/0 modules shall be through heavy- duty DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks. Compression-type screw terminal blocks shall be used to provide secure wire connections. Spring-type terminal blocks shall not be used in any control panel or junction box application. a. Control panel internal wiring shall conform to the following table: 24VDC + Blue 24VDC- Brown 120VAC (H or L1) Yellow 120VAC (N or L2) White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black(Signal) Analog Output Grey Digital Input(120VAC) Pink Page 6 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 121 February 2018 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 3, "Execution"for all execution requirements. END OF SECTION Page 7 of 7 POWER PROTECTION SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)SYSTEM—40 90 02.1 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 90 03 SCADA&INSTRUMENTATION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The purpose of the test plans and procedures is to bring order to the testing process and to illustrate that the PCSS is actively aware of the functional and performance requirements that must be met to properly test the equipment. B. Provide any and all testing and commissioning equipment, materials, incidentals and labor, necessary to perform and coordinate the system check-out and startup, commissioning, field testing and overall training for the Instrumentation and Controls System associated with the Project. C. The Contractor's Process Control Systems Supplier (PCSS) shall supervise and/or perform the requirements of this Section. As part of these services, the PCSS shall include, for those equipment items not manufactured by him, the services of an authorized manufacturer's representative to check the equipment installation and place that portion of the equipment in operation. The PCSS shall provide to the Owner/Engineer, prior to putting the equipment into service, installation checklists, certificates, and all manufacturer provided start-up and commissioning documentation. The manufacturer's representative shall be knowledgeable about the installation, operation, and maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment for this project. D. The PCSS shall perform any and all testing, verification, and validation of the Process Control System according to recognized and generally accepted good systems engineering practices such as V-model for systems development. System sub-systems and their respective components shall be tested, verified and documented individually by the PCCS by the same criteria described in this Specification before being assembled into the higher- order systems. When fully assembled, the entire system shall be demonstrated to perform the intended function, correctly and in stable and reliable manner. E. The PCSS shall coordinate with the electrical and instrumentation sub-contractor(s) to provide an integrated system test. F. The PCCS shall provide travel, accommodations, food, etc. for up to two (2) Owner representatives for Factory Acceptance Test witnessing, if required. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 "DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT" and shall include: 1. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall prepare and submit a complete overall system testing plan. The test plan shall describe clearly and unambiguously how the PCSS will ensure and demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the supplied system meets all the requirements of the specifications. 2. The Submittal shall contain an overall process control system overview. Each area as affected by this contract shall be included. The detail shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Displays Page 1 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Control strategies C. Database d. Trending e. Reports f. Programming B. Submittal Content 1. Testing Submittals shall cover the following: a. Programmable Logic Controller Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Diagrams of the process control functions by each strategy. (3) Listing of inputs to the control function. (4) A short narrative of each control strategy. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all 1/0, showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules, they are in. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) An annotated program, submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. (9) Logic flow charts that explain how the control strategy implementation logic works b. Operation Interface Terminal Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Listing of all Operator displays with inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Displays shall be illustrated to show data presentation. (3) Cross references of all 1/0, showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules, they are in. (4) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. C. Human Machine Interface Programming (1) 1/0 List with register assignments. (2) Displays for each process area including all necessary pop ups. (3) Listing of data points on each display. (4) A short narrative of each control usage. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all 1/0, showing which software module at each point used. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) A complete listing of all historical points. (9) Listing of all required configuration files for each SCADA client. d. Submit a proposed Training Schedule. Page 2 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Testing Documentation Submittals 1. Control System Test Plan a. The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a System Test Plan for preparing test procedures, for performing testing and for preparing test reports for all tests. The plan shall include the anticipated testing schedules. b. The PCSS's Test Plan shall be organized to provide for witnessed tests shall address support of the Owner's personnel in conducting the Operational Readiness Test and Functional Demonstration Test. C. The plan shall also discuss the type and extent of component and subsystem testing the PCSS performs prior to the formal witnessed tests. 2. Format a. The Test Plan shall consist of the following major components, as a minimum: (1) A description of each test and its objectives (2) A description of the test program organization and the responsibilities and qualifications of test personnel (3) A description of applicable prerequisites for testing including all unwitnessed testing (4) A description of the Owner's and the PCSS's responsibilities at various test sites and facilities (5) A description of the overall test schedules (6) A description of form and content of test reports (7) Where applicable, identification of the primary test agency if other than the Contractor (8) A description of the procedures for identifying, evaluating and correcting the causes of problems or failures which occur during tests and a description of procedures for reworking and testing. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a Control System Test Plan within sixty (60) days of the first witnessed test taking place. 3. Test Procedures a. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop test procedures for each witnessed test that clearly describe the test steps to be performed and the results expected after each step. (2) Any assumptions to be used in evaluating the test results shall be defined in the test procedure. (3) Each step in the test procedures shall be numbered and each test shall include a space for the PCSS and for the Owner to initial when the test is satisfactorily completed. (4) All equipment including communications, electrical, mechanical and computer systems shall be tested both individually and together as a system. The Owner/Engineer will not normally witness subsystem tests, but reserves the right to do so. (5) The PCSS shall prepare and document a test procedure for each type of test. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Owner for review before the scheduled start of the corresponding test. None of the formal witnessed tests shall be initiated until the corresponding test procedure has been Successfully Reviewed. Page 3 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (6) As a minimum, the following information shall be included in the procedures for each function tested: (a) A test identification number and name (b) A statement of test objective and scope (c) A cross reference to the paragraph{s) of the Specification that defines the requirements of the function being tested (d) A test description (e) A list of the make and model of all test equipment required to perform the test, including simulation hardware and software (f) A list of prerequisite tests that shall be completed before the test can be performed (g) A description of the required test setup including diagrams illustrating test equipment connections and identifying test points, where applicable (h) Step-by-step instructions for performing the test, identifying the points where data are to be recorded and the limits for acceptable data (i) Instructions for recording data on data sheets or verifying that procedure steps have been completed. Q) All blank test data sheets on which all results of testing are to be recorded; data sheets shall include a section for dates, make and model of all test equipment and signatures of witnesses. (k) Space for time and date of test (1) Pass/fail signature of both the Owner and the PCSS's Project Manager and Quality Control representative. (m) Test forms similar in content to those attached to this section shall be used for each system test. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit for review a detailed test procedure for each test activity. The test procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the scheduled test. No test shall be performed less than 7 days after the test procedure has been successfully reviewed and approved. If necessary, the PCSS shall reschedule the test, at no additional cost to the Owner, so that this requirement is met. All test procedures shall include inputs to be applied or simulated and expected outputs to be confirmed. 4. Test Reports a. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop, maintain, and update a test report for each test. (2) Test data sheets shall be used to record applicable drawing numbers, test equipment, including serial numbers and calibration dates where applicable, discrepancies, corrective action required, and test data. Data entries shall be referenced to the applicable procedures and allowable limits for each entry shall be indicated on the data sheets. The test data sheets shall be arranged in tabular form. (3) All discrepancies and/or anomalies shall be recorded on Discrepancy Report forms and entered into the Project DR Book. After commencement of Site Demonstration Testing, Discrepancy Reports shall be submitted weekly. (4) Test reports shall contain: (a) All test data sheets as completed at the time of test. Page 4 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction (b) The PCSS's analyses and conclusions of the test results. (c) A complete list of deficiencies, discrepancies and/or deviations from expected results including how and when each item is to be resolved. (d) When applicable, state system retesting requirements including a list of items to be retested and system design changes, if required, due to system testing, and verification after successful resolution. Retesting and other remedial work required as a result of failed tests shall result in no increase to the Contract price. (e) A revised test procedure if corrections or revisions were made during the test. (f) A general summary for the item tested indicating any open items that are yet to be resolved and any test that is yet to be conducted. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit test reports within 15 days after the completion of each scheduled test. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to delay or suspend follow- on project activities if an acceptable test report has not been provided in the required time period. 1.3 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND START-UP A. The Contractor, PCSS, and Instrument Suppliers, as applicable, shall perform the following: 1. Check and confirm the installation of all instrumentation, control components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. Installation shall be in accordance with the contract documents — Plans and Specifications and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all existing instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in startup of the various unit processes. B. PCSS shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the test during System checkout and startup. C. PCSS and/or system supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of the instrumentation and control system per the Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) requirements and shall make any required changes, adjustment or replacements for operation, monitoring, and control of the various processes and equipment necessary to perform the functions intended. D. PCSS shall furnish to the Owner/Engineer certified calibration/recalibration (for existing Instruments) reports for field instruments and devices specified herein as soon as calibration is completed. 1. Receipt of any calibration/recalibration certificates shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument. 2. Each calibration/recalibration certificates shall be signed and dated by a certified authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. Three copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to Owner/Engineer. Page 5 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. A typical form shall be as follows: CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Tag Number/Loop Number: Loop Description Instrument Location Manufacturer Model Number Adjustable Range Calibrated Range Remarks Installation Per Manufacturer's Requirements? Yes No Installation Per Contract Documents? Yes No If"No", explain Calibration Test: Input (Units) Output (Units) Accuracy 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Switch Point Switch Setting Switch Test Upscale Point Deadband Downscal Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 1 hereby certify that the above information is correct and accurate, to the best of my knowledge, and that the instrument indicated above has been supplied, installed, calibrated, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, unless otherwise noted. Authorized Mfg. Rep. Signature: Date: E. PCSS shall furnish to Owner/Engineer two copies of an installation inspection report certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall itemize the equipment or shall have inspection reports for each item attached to it. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both the Contractor and the system supplier. Page 6 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.4 TESTS (GENERAL) A. The PCSS shall test all equipment at the PCSS facility prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the PCSS shall be tested at the PCSS facility as a single fully integrated system. B. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Un-witnessed Test (UFAT) 2. Witnessed Test (WFAT) 3. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 4. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 5. 30-Day Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) C. Each test shall require input documentation to be prepared and approved prior to the test and the output ("work product") documentation to be generated by test activities. Test activities shall execute test scenarios defined and approved by Owner/Engineer prior to the test. D. Test scenarios shall cover all normal operation, all knowable abnormal process conditions, and all knowable abnormal Process Control System conditions and malfunction. Test scenarios shall force the execution of every logical branch of the control logic. E. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied. The cause and the correct effect shall be determined and documented in the test scenarios. The person conducting the test shall compare the actual effect with the expected correct effect with and shall document the outcome. F. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Owner/Engineer-approved procedures, forms, and checklists. A complete testing plan with the appropriate forms and checklists shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval prior to any testing taking place. The testing plan shall be submitted a minimum of three weeks in advance of the proposed testing date. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for sign off by the appropriate party after its status completion. G. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms, and check lists will constitute the required test documentation. H. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provides suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. I. The General Contractor shall require the Integration Subcontractor to coordinate all testing with the Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and the Owner. J. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures. K. The Owner/Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. L. No equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site until the Owner/Engineer has received all test results and approved the system as ready for shipment. M. The PCSS shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment Page 7 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction and labor to perform the field tests. N. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. All deficiencies shall be corrected in no more than 24 hours. If the Integrator is unable to resolve the issue in less than 24 hours to allow the test to proceed, acceptance testing should be rescheduled. The owner shall bear no additional costs of attending subsequent re-tests. 1.5 COMMISSIONING A. Following the instrumentation and control system checkout and start-up, the PCSS shall, under the supervision of the system supplier, perform a complete system test in the presence of the Owner/Engineer to verify that all equipment and software is operating properly as a fully integrated system, and that the intended monitoring and control functions are fully implemented and operational. 1. Commissioning shall begin only after all instruments, PLC, and control panels are installed, wired and previously tested by the Contractor, in accordance with Paragraph 1.04 of this Section. The testing as required per the Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) as described in paragraph 3.03 of this specification shall be completed prior to beginning the commissioning. 2. All spare parts must be on site and accepted prior to Commissioning. 3. PCSS shall submit to the Owner/Engineer a schedule for Commissioning, including a proposed start date, at least three weeks in advance. B. Commissioning shall include, as a minimum, the following checks: 1. All wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct wire size, type, color, termination and wire number. 2. All instruments and devices shall be checked to verify compliance with the specifications and approved shop drawings. The calibration of analog devices shall be verified including the zero and span. 3. Analog wiring shall be checked for correct polarity and ground continuity at each termination point in the loop. 4. All analog loops shall be verified at each termination point at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% signal levels. C. PCSS shall provide the following documentation for use during the Commissioning effort. 1. Checklist itemizing all required commissioning documentation, signed and dated. 2. Complete panel schematic and internal point-to-point wiring interconnect drawings. 3. Complete electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, latest edition, and applicable NEMA standards. 4. Complete panel layout drawings. 5. Complete field wiring diagrams. Page 8 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Complete instrument loop diagrams. 7. Completed Calibration/Recalibration Certificates for all field and panel devices that require adjustment or calibration. 8. PCSS shall provide one set of Commissioning documentation for the Owner's personnel, one set for the Owner/Engineer's use, one set for field use, and the required number of sets for the Contractor's use. 9. The drawings corrected and modified during Commissioning shall form the basis for the "As-Built" record drawing requirement. 10. All documentation generated during acceptance testing (WFAT, ORD, FDT). All certificates, installation checklists, and reports delivered by equipment manufacturers. 11. Issue tracking system, such as electronic spreadsheet or a paper log book D. All PLC/RTU hardware and software shall be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation as an integrated system. System testing shall include, as a minimum, the following: 1. All digital inputs shall be activated at the field element to verify proper response to the status change on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 2. All analog inputs shall be tested at the field transmitter over a full range to verify proper response on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 3. All digital and analog outputs shall be forced to verify proper control operation. 4. Communications, including PLC/RTU data highway, computer local area network, PLC/RTU remote 1/0, and serial communications shall be tested between all components, including existing equipment. 5. Alarm displays and printing shall be tested for all analog and digital alarm points. 6. All automatic control algorithms shall be completely tested over various ranges and input conditions to verify proper operation. Graphic displays shall be observed to verify proper response to automatic control operations. 7. All historical data collection, trending, computation, totalizers and reporting functions shall be checked and tested to confirm proper operation and accuracy of the data. E. Any defects or problems found during the Commissioning effort or field test shall be corrected by the Contractor and then retested to demonstrate proper operation. F. Following testing and demonstration of all system functions, the Instrumentation and Control System including field sensors/transducers and instruments shall be running and fully operational for a continuous 48 hour period. The Field Test specified below shall not begin until the continuous 48 hour proving run has been successfully completed and Owner and Engineer agree that the Field Test can begin. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Control System shall undergo comprehensive testing to demonstrate that the Control System performs as an integrated system to meet all the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall conduct all element and subsystem tests necessary to ensure the proper operation of all Control System functions. Page 9 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Test procedures and written notification to the Owner/Engineer of testing activities are required for all tests. C. Before the start of any test that will be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall have conducted all prerequisite testing as well as a dry run of the entire witnessed test to ensure the success of the test. The Contractor shall provide the Owner/Engineer with a copy of the un-witnessed test report before start of the witnessed version of the test. The test report requirements shall be the same as the witnessed version of the test. D. All tools and equipment necessary to perform all required tests shall be provided by the Contractor. Test instruments shall be suitable for the purpose of measurement, with a rated accuracy commensurate to the measurement value of the equipment being tested or calibrated. Each test instrument shall be certified by an established calibration laboratory prior to the commencement of testing and recertified, without adjustment, after completion of testing to verify accuracy throughout the testing period. If recertification without adjustment is not demonstrated, the calibration instrument must be adjusted and certified, the field calibration repeated, and the recertification without further adjustment verified. Certified calibration reports traceable to the National Bureau of Standards shall be included with the test report. 1. The major documents associated with the testing are: a. System Test Plan and Forms b. Witnessed Factory Test (WFAT) Procedures c. Operational Readiness Test (ORT) Procedures d. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) Procedures e. 30 Day Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Procedures f. Test Reports E. Each test shall be considered complete only when accepted by the Engineer and Owner. 3.2 UNWITNESSED TEST(UFAT) A. The entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested at the PCSS site to ensure the system operates as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions. B. All panels and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals, specifications, and Contract Drawings. PCSS shall submit a copy of the panel test records - point to point wiring check, etc. to the Owner and Engineer prior to scheduling the Witnessed Test. C. During the tests all digital system hardware and software shall have operated continuously or five days without a failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation. The un- witnessed test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the Witnessed Test (WFAT). D. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. Page 10 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of 1/0, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 8. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer's and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. 3.3 WITNESSED FACTORY TEST(WFAT) A. Before scheduling the Witnessed Test, the PCSS must determine through his own test and quality assurance program that the equipment is ready for shipment to the jobsite. B. All system tests specified for the Un-witnessed Test shall be repeated. C. The WFAT will be conducted at the PCSS facility. D. After receiving Un-witnessed Test approval, the PCSS shall notify the Engineer and Owner in writing that the system is ready for the Witnessed Test. In addition to notification, the PCSS shall submit to Owner/Engineer documentation from UFAT demonstrating that each test has been successfully completed and all issues have been resolved. The Engineer and/or Owner shall schedule a test date within 30 days of receipt of the "Ready to Test" letter. At the time of notification, the PCSS shall submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer. E. This test shall verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test, as determined by the Engineer, shall be the basis for approval of the system to be shipped to the site. F. The various tests performed during the Witnessed Factory Test shall be designed to demonstrate that hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Specifications and Contract drawings. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, the actual installed conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the Owner. G. The PCSS shall be responsible to simulate the 1/0 signals for any equipment or device communicating with any new or existing PLC through peer-to-peer network by using a computer system with appropriate simulation software. Simulating the 1/0 signals by forcing them from the PLC programming software will not be acceptable. Page 11 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction H. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of 1/0, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 8. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer's and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. 1. All analog control panels shall be included in these tests. J. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Witnessed Test as determined by the Owner/Engineer. K. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Witnessed Test: 1. All Contract Drawings and Specifications, addenda, and change orders 2. Master copy of the test procedure 3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number 4. Design-related hardware submittal applicable to the equipment being tested 5. Software license 6. Issue tracker log, indicating issue's severity and life cycle L. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Morning meeting to review the day's test schedule and status of outstanding issues. 2. Scheduled tests and signoffs. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. 4. Unstructured testing period by the witnesses. M. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged and certified copies of Page 12 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction the logs shall be provided and available throughout the test to the Engineer and Owner. N. All failed tests shall require re-test till successfully completed. 3.4 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS (ORT) A. Prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented)that it is READY for operation. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittal's and these Specifications. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and check lists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check off items with space for sign off by the PCSS. (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Tag Number for each component (4) Check offs/sign offs for each component b. Tag/identification C. Installation d. Termination —wiring e. Termination —tubing f. Calibration/adjustment—Check offs/sign offs for the loop g. Panel interface terminations h. 1/0 interface terminations i. 1/0 signal operation j. Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, and adjusted. k. Total loop operation — Provide space for comments 1. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each 1/0 module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign off by the PCSS: (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Component Tag Number of 1/0 Module Number (4) Component Code Number Analog System (5) Manufacturer(for Analog system element) (6) Model Number/Serial Number(for Analog system) (7) Summary of Functional Requirements: a. Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges b. Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges c. Computing Elements: Function Page 13 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction d. Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID) e. Switching Elements: Unit range, differential f. (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), Preset (AUTO/MANUAL) g. 1/0 Modules: Input or output 2. Calibrations: a. Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b. Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points C. Controllers: Mode settings (PID) d. 1/0 Modules: Required an actual inputs or outputs for 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (1) Provide space for comments (2) Space for sign off by the PCSS. (3) The General Contractor shall require the PCSS to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the job-site and make them available to the Owner/Engineer at any time. (4) These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer shall review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.5 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST(FDT) A. Prior to startup and the 30-Day Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the Operational Readiness Tests. The FDT will be a joint test by the PCSS and the Equipment suppliers. B. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis. C. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under Functional Demonstration Tests except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated. D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job-site both before and during the tests. In addition, one (1) copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Owner/Engineer at the job- site both before and during testing. See Section 01 33 06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, for O&M Manual requirements. E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the tests shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before this test shall be considered successful. G. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery. Page 14 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revision 1 October 2017 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.6 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST(SAT) A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the PCSS shall be responsible for operation of the entire system for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field repairable malfunction. B. During this test, plant operating and PCSS personnel shall be present as required. For this test, the PCSS is expected to provide personnel who have an intimate knowledge of the system hardware and software. C. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of and derive benefit from the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be logged into the issue tracking system, analyzed and corrected by the PCSS. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. E. During this 30 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by PCSS personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non-field-repairable malfunction. F. Upon completion of repairs by the PCSS, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. G. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSS shall perform repairs or replacement within 60 days. H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent (99.5%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as: 1. Availability = (Total Testing Time-Down Time) /Total Testing Time I. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or back- up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above. J. Upon successful completion of the 30-day site acceptance test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and the one year warranty period shall commence. 3.7 TRAINING A. General 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.7, "Training" for all training requirements to be provided by the Contractor. 3.8 WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES 1. Refer to Section 40 90 00 "Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems", Part 2, Section 2.8, "Warranties, Maintenance, and Support Services" for all warranty, maintenance and support requirements to be provided by the Contractor. END OF SECTION Page 15 of 15 SCADA& INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMISSIONING—40 90 03 R1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report and Supplemental Letter DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project Corpus Christi, Texas January 26, 2021 Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 Prepared for: City of Corpus Christi Corpus Christi, Texas Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Corpus Christi, Texas i �, % 111 111111 Jill I I lill It DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 January 26, 2021 Irerracon City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Attn: Mr. Marcus Flores Engineering Services Department Re: Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project 13101 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, Texas Terracon Project Number: CD195015R1 Dear Mr. Flores: We have completed the Geotechnical Engineering services for the above referenced project. This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this project and look forward to contributing to the ongoing success of this project by providing Materials Testing and Special Inspection services during construction. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon s t s, Inc. (Firm Registration: TX F3272) 106 Tariqul Anwar, P.E. ,... . .w. ... .a , TAR'S L Gregory P. Stieben, P.E., D.GE Project Engineer1129• . M.,, .., " " ° ' "" Senior Consultant 1 TA/GPS/mhb—CD195015R1 Terracon Consultants,Inc. 3606 WOW Road,Corpus Christi,Texas 78413 P (361) 420 6000 F (361) 420 6001 terracon.com Texas Professional Engineers No.3272 Envi ronmenta 1 6 F'aici litil eils 0 G cote ch nica I l DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY.............................................................................................................i 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION .............................................................................................2 2.1 Project Description............................................................................................2 2.2 Site Location and Description...........................................................................2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................2 3.1 Typical Profile ....................................................................................................2 3.2 Groundwater ......................................................................................................3 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ......................................4 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations............................................................................4 4.1.1 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR)....................................................................5 4.4.2 Existing Fill...............................................................................................5 4.2 Earthwork...........................................................................................................5 4.2.1 General Site Preparation..........................................................................5 4.2.2 Pad Preparation .......................................................................................6 4.2.3 Fill Material Requirements........................................................................8 4.2.4 Compaction Requirements.......................................................................9 4.2.5 Grading and Drainage..............................................................................9 4.2.6 Construction Considerations.....................................................................9 4.3 Foundation Design Recommendations..........................................................10 4.3.1 Tank Foundation ....................................................................................11 4.3.2 Tank Settlement Considerations.............................................................11 4.3.3 Slab-On-Grade Foundation Design Recommendations..........................12 4.3.4 Spread Footing Foundation....................................................................14 4.3.5 Shallow Foundations Construction Considerations .................................14 4.3.6 Foundation Construction Monitoring.......................................................16 4.4 Lateral Earth Pressure.....................................................................................16 4.5 Seismic Considerations ..................................................................................17 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS...............................................................................................17 APPENDIX A Exhibit A-1 Site Location Plan Exhibit A-2 Boring Location Plan Exhibit A-3 Field Exploration Description Exhibits A-4 thru A-12 Boring Logs Exhibit A-13 Subsurface Profile APPENDIX B Exhibit B-1 Laboratory Testing APPENDIX C Exhibit C-1 General Notes Exhibit C-2 Unified Soil Classification System IluaIR��,uIIA unatiti im DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This geotechnical exploration has been performed for the proposed 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project located inside Corpus Christi Stevens Plant at 13101 Leopard St. in Corpus Christi, Texas. The subsurface conditions at the site were explored by drilling nine soil borings to depths of approximately 30 to 60 feet below the existing grade. Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the site can be developed for the proposed project. Pertinent geotechnical considerations include the following: uki The subsurface soils at this site generally consist of: SILTY SAND (SM) and COARSE SAND (SP). Fill materials consist of SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL), SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) and CLAYEY SAND (SC) was observed in borings B-6, B-7 and B-8 to depths of about 2 to 8 feet. uki Groundwater was encountered in most of the borings between depths ranging from 24 feet to 38 feet below the ground surface. uki Expansive soil related movements are low to moderate at this site. The estimated Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) at this site is about 1 to 1 Y2 inches. The majority of the PVR is due to the presence of Fill: Sandy Lean Clay (CL) & Fill: Sandy Fat Clay (CH). The upper 2 to 4 feet of the soil is in relatively dry conditions. uki Ground supported foundation systems may be used to support the planned structures. Remedial earthwork measures will be required for ground-supported foundations for structures that are sensitive to movement. uki The subsurface conditions within the site are consistent with the characteristics of the Specific Site Class D as defined in the 2018 International Building Code (IBC). This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes. It should be recognized that details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section titled GENERAL COMMENTS should be read for an understanding of the report limitations. �eIliaIflVe um i DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 REVISED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT 18131A ONSWTP CLEARWELL NO. 3 PROJECT CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 January 26, 2021 1.0 INTRODUCTION Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) is pleased to submit our Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report for the proposed 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project located at 13101 Leopard St. in Corpus Christi, Texas. This project was authorized by Mr. J. H. Edmonds, P.E., Director of Engineering Services of City of Corpus Christi on November 4, 2019 by signing Task Order No. 1. This project was completed in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. PCD195015, dated September 24, 2019. The geotechnical engineering scope of services for this project included the advancement of nine test borings to depths ranging from approximately 30 to 60 feet below existing site grades. field work was delayed due to utility locates of the facility's underground utilities and wet weather. The purpose of this report is to describe the subsurface conditions observed at the borings drilled for this study, analyze and evaluate the test data, and provide recommendations with respect to: X11 subsurface soil conditions X11 groundwater conditions X11 subgrade preparation and earthwork X11 foundation design and construction X11 seismic considerations A site grading plan was provided to us on October 23, 2020. The grading plan was developed by LNV. Based on the provided required settlement data about the interior column supporting the tank roof, the previous submitted report dated October 23, 2020 was revised to incorporate the provided site grading information and revise the Pad Preparation recommendation section of the report. This revised report supersedes the previous reports. �ellial le� im im 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD1 95015R1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 2.1 Project Description Item Description Site layout Refer to Appendix A; Exhibit A-1: Site Location Plan and Exhibit A-2: Boring Location Plan. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... One new water tank will be constructed. Inside Diameter (ID) of the Proposed proposed tank will be approximately 322 feet. Total capacity of the tank will Developments be about 10 MG. The maximum height of the stored water is about 16.5 feet. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... The proposed foundation system is a circular prestressed tank foundation Foundation with thickened perimeter footing. The roof will be a column supported flat slab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... The anticipated contact pressures in the floor area are in between 1,000 to Bearing Pressure 1,500 psf. The anticipated bearing pressure for column supporting the roof is about 2,500 psf. ............................. Finished Floor El. 51.0 feet. ... Elevation...(F.F.E. ... ....... .... ...... 2.2 Site Location and Description Item Description Location The project site is located at 13101 Leopard St. in Corpus Christi, Texas. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Existing improvements Existing tanks, electrical building and associated structures. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Based on the provided grading plan and our site visit, the site has been Existing topography graded and gradually sloping downward from west to east. The site grades vary from El. 41 feet to El. 64 feet in the tank pad area. ...............................................................I.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3.1 Typical Profile Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions on the project site consist primarily of clays with an intermittent gravel layer over clay-shale. In general, the subsurface conditions are summarized below. e Il i�a I�fle um 2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 Approximate Depth (feet) Material Encountered Consistency/Density ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 0 to 2 FILL: SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL) 11 tan Very Stiff ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 0 to 8 FILL: SANDY FAT CLAY(CH)21 tan to gray, light gray Stiff to Very Stiff ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 0 to 4 FILL: CLAYEY SAND (SC) 3; light brown,tan Loose to Medium Dense ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 0 to 40 SILTY SAND (SM)3;dark brown, brown, light brown,tan Loose to Very Dense ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 0 to 6 CLAYEY SAND (SC)3; brown,tan Medium Dense ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... 2 to 60 COARSE SAND (SP)3;dark brown,tan, light gray Medium Dense to Very Dense The FILL: SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) materials could undergo low to moderate volumetric changes (shrink/swell)should they experience changes in their in-place moisture content. .......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ........................ z The FILL SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) materials could undergo moderate to high volumetric changes (shrink/swell) should they experience changes in their in-place moisture content. However, this stratum is below moisture variation zone and are expected to have undergo low volumetric changes. .......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ........................ 3 The FILL: CLAYEY SAND (SC), CLAYEY SAND (SC), SILTY SAND (SM) & COARSE SAND (SP) materials are granular in nature and are expected to be volumetrically stable. These strata are water bearing and prone to sloughing. Conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the individual boring logs. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in soil types; in situ, the transition between materials may be gradual. Details for each of the borings can be found on the boring logs in Appendix A of this report. 3.2 Groundwater Groundwater generally appears as either a permanent or temporary water source. Permanent groundwater is generally present year round, which may or may not be influenced by seasonal and climatic changes. Temporary groundwater is also referred to as a "perched" water source, which generally develops as a result of seasonal and climatic conditions. The borings were dry-augered to their termination depths in an attempt to observe for the presence of subsurface water. Subsurface water was observed in most of the borings; the measured water levels are summarized in the table below: �eIliaIflVe uo natiti 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 Depth of Groundwater in Feet Below the Ground Surface BoringNo. .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... During Drilling After drilling B-1 34 33 B-2 29 29 B-3 --- B-4 33 33 B-5 --- B-6 38 38 B-7 29 29 B-8 24 26 �.....................................................obs................................ No free water erved during and after completion of drilling. Groundwater levels are influenced by seasonal and climatic conditions which generally result in fluctuations in the elevation of the groundwater level over time. Therefore, the foundation contractor should check the groundwater conditions just before foundation excavation activities. The borings were backfilled with soil cuttings after the drilling operations were completed. Specific information concerning groundwater is noted on each boring log presented in Appendix A of this report. 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations We understand the proposed new tank will be supported on a shallow foundation system. The relatively small ancillary structures may be supported on conventionally reinforced slab on grade foundations. The anticipated foundation systems may be used at this site provided the structure pads and foundations are designed and constructed as recommended in this report. Terracon would be pleased to discuss other foundation alternatives with you upon request. The foundations being considered must satisfy two independent, engineering criteria with respect to the subsurface conditions encountered at this site. One criterion is the foundation system must be designed with an appropriate factor of safety to reduce the possibility of a bearing capacity failure of the soils underlying the foundation when subjected to axial and lateral load conditions. The other criterion is movement of the foundation system due to compression (consolidation or shrinkage) or expansion (swell) of the underlying soils must be within tolerable limits for the structures. �eIliaIluIVe uo natiti 4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 4.1.1 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Based on our findings, the subsurface soils at this site generally exhibit a low expansion potential. Based on the information developed from our field and laboratory programs and on method TEX-124-E in the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Manual of Testing Procedures, we estimate that the subgrade soils in the tank pad area exhibit a Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) of about 1 to 1Y2 inches in its present condition. The majority of the PVR is due to the presence of Fill: Sandy Lean Clay (CL) & Fill: Sandy Fat Clay (CH). The actual movements could be greater than the values presented in this report if inadequate drainage, ponded water, and/or other sources of moisture are allowed to infiltrate beneath the structure after construction. Based on the PVR results, subgrade modifications to provide a uniform soil support for foundation will be required and are discussed in this report. This report provides recommendations to help mitigate the effects of soil shrinkage and expansion. However, even if these procedures are followed, some movement and cracking in the structure slab should be anticipated. The severity of cracking and other damage such as uneven slabs will probably increase if any modification of the site results in excessive wetting or drying of the expansive soils. Eliminating the risk of movement and distress may not be feasible. However, soil movements may be reduced by implementing the recommendations presented in the Pad Preparation section of this report. Terracon would be pleased to discuss other construction alternatives with you upon request. 4.4.2 Existing Fill Fill materials consist of SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL), SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) and CLAYEY SAND (SC) was observed in borings B-6, B-7 and B-8 to depths of about 2 to 8 feet. Even with the recommended construction procedures, there is an inherent risk for the owner that compressible fill or unsuitable material within or buried by the fill will not be discovered. This risk of unforeseen conditions cannot be eliminated without completely removing the existing fill, but can be reduced by following the recommendations contained in this report. 4.2 Earthwork The following presents recommendations for general site preparation, pad preparation and placement of select fill for this project. The recommendations presented for design and construction of earth supported elements including foundations, slabs and pavements are contingent upon following the recommendations outlined in this section. Earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fills, subgrade preparation, foundation bearing soils, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during the construction of the project. 4.2.1 General Site Preparation Construction operations may encounter difficulties due to the wet or soft surface soils becoming a general hindrance to equipment due to rutting and pumping of the soil surface, especially during and soon after periods of wet weather. If the subgrade cannot be adequately compacted ��Ilii��IluIV;' um inatiti 5 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 to minimum densities as described in the Compaction Requirements section of this report, one of the following measures may be required: 1) removal and replacement with select fill, 2) chemical treatment of the soil to dry and increase the stability of the subgrade, or 3) drying by natural means if the schedule allows. Prior to construction, vegetation and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the construction area. Wet or dry material should either be removed, or moisture conditioned and recompacted. After stripping and grubbing, the subgrade should be proof-rolled where possible to aid in locating loose or soft areas. Proof-rolling can be performed with a fully loaded dump truck or equivalent pneumatic tired vehicle. Soils that are observed to rut or deflect excessively (typically greater than 1-inch) under the moving load should be undercut and replaced with properly compacted on-site soils. The proof-rolling and undercutting activities should be witnessed by a representative of the geotechnical engineer and should be performed during a period of dry weather. 4.2.2 Pad Preparation Based on the provided information, west portion of the tank will be graded down to a depth of about 10 feet below existing grade. As previously stated, the existing PVR is about 1 to 1Y2 inches in its present condition. However, the upper 2 to 4 feet of the materials were relatively dry and loose. Therefore, some subgrade preparation will be required. We have provided the following subgrade preparation recommendations. Based on the provided grading plan the site grades vary from EI. 41 feet to EI. 64 feet in the tank pad area. The tank FFE is at about EI. 51.0 feet. Based on a 6-inch thick floor slab, the Finished Tank Pad Elevation is at about EI. 50.5 feet. uit After completing stripping operations as discussed in the General Site Preparation section. The tank pad area is defined as the area that extends at least 3 feet beyond the perimeter of the tank slab. Any excavated sand free from organics and debris should be stockpiled for later use as moisture conditioned fill. Excavated existing clayey fill soil is not suitable for reuse and should be removed from the site. uit Balance the subgrade no higher than elevation EI. 48.5 feet using onsite soil as per recommendations provided below. Cut Areas uit Excavate the onsite soil in areas where cut is required to achieve a level subgrade of an elevation of about EI. 48.5 feet. Stockpile the onsite soil from the cut areas for later use as moisture conditioned fill in the fill area. uit After cut operations, the exposed subgrade should be proof rolled with at least a fully loaded dump truck or equivalent pneumatic tired vehicle to evidence any weak yielding zones. A Terracon geotechnical engineer or their representative should be present to observe proof rolling operations. ?eIHai� lulle inatiti 6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 uit Over-excavate any confirmed weak yielding zones, both vertically and horizontally, to expose competent soil. The upper 6 inches of the exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and then compact to at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D698. In the event this compaction cannot be achieved, the addition of some cement as determined by the earthwork contractor may help with the compaction process. Fill Areas uit In areas where fill is required to achieve the level subgrade to an elevation of about EI. 48.5 feet, proofrolling is required on the exposed subgrade after completing stripping operations before placing any fill material. A Terracon geotechnical engineer or their representative should be present to observe proof rolling operations. uit Over-excavate any confirmed weak yielding zones, both vertically and horizontally, to expose competent soil. The upper 6 inches of the exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and then compact to at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D 698. uit After proof-rolling and the replacement of weak yielding zones, place the onsite sand at the fill areas free from organics and debris to balance grades to an elevation not higher than EI. 48.5 feet. Excavated existing clayey fill soil is not suitable to reuse and should be removed from the site. uit The onsite soil should be placed in loose lifts of about 8 inches and compacted thickness not exceeding 6 inches. Onsite soil should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and should be compact to at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D 698. In the event this compaction cannot be achieved, the addition of some cement as determined by the earthwork contractor may help with the compaction process. IN After achieving a level subgrade at an elevation of about EI. 48.5 feet for both cut and fill areas, select fill and/or onsite soil meeting the criteria of select fill should then be used to achieve the FBPE at about EI 50.5 feet. 1 The select fill and onsite soil meeting the criteria of select fill should be placed in loose lifts of about 8 inches and compacted thickness not exceeding 6 inches. The select fill and onsite soil meeting the criteria of select fill should be moisture conditioned ��Ilii��IluIV;' um inatiti 7 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D698. 1 To provide a more uniform slab support and create a more all-weather working surface, we recommend constructing the final 6 inches of the pad with granular select fill. Details regarding select fill materials, placement and compaction are presented in the Fill Material Requirements and Compaction Requirements sections of the original report. This method should result in at least 2 feet of select fill and/or onsite soil meeting the criteria of select fill over reworked and compacted onsite soils free from organics, debris and materials larger than 2-inch in dimension beneath the grade supported slab. If the FTPE is raised above existing grades, select fill or on-site sand should be used to achieve the desired FTPE. 4.2.3 Fill Material Requirements Compacted structural fill should meet the following material property requirements: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Fill TypeUSCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement Granular select fill z See Note Below Upper 6 inches of the pad area. Select fill 3 CL, SC, SM All locations and elevations. Existing onsite CL and CH fill soils are not On-site soils CL, SC, CH, SM, SP suitable to reuse in the tank pad area. Onsite SC, SM and SP soil can be used as moisture conditioned fill in the tank pad area. Flowable Fill 4 --- Can be used under the foundations, foundation backfill and all grade adjustments. Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed borrow and on site materials should be obtained for laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in-place density tests during the filling operations to evaluate that proper levels of compaction, including dry unit weight and moisture content, are being attained. z Granular select fill should be non-cohesive, crushed, angular, well-graded pavement base material meeting the gradation requirements for TXDOT Item 247, Grade 1-2. 3 Select fill should consist of a low plasticity, cohesive or granular soils with a Plasticity Index (PI) between 7 and 20 percent. Maximum aggregate size should be 3 inches. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Plowable fill should have a 28-day strength between 80 and 150 psi and meet the requirements for 2004 TXDOT Item 401. Although usually more costly, flowable fill does not require placement in lifts or mechanical compaction. �eIliiaIluIVe uo 8 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 4.2.4 Compaction Requirements Item .... Description.. ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... Fill Lift Thickness All fill should be placed in thin, loose lifts not to exceed 8 inches, with compacted thickness of about 6 inches. ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... IN 98 percent of materials standard Proctor maximum dry Compaction of Granular Select Fill, density (ASTM D 698). Select Fill and Onsite Native Soil The addition of some cement as determined by the earthwork contractor may help with the compaction process. ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... Moisture Content of Onsite Sand, Granular Select Fill, Select Fill and The materials should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. Onsite Gravelly Soil 4.2.5 Grading and Drainage Effective drainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life of the development. After construction, we recommend verifying final grades to document that effective drainage has been achieved. Grades around the structure should also be periodically inspected and adjusted as necessary, as part of the structure's maintenance program. Water permitted to pond next to the structures can result in distress in the structure including unacceptable differential slab movements, cracked slabs, and roof leaks. Slab and foundation performances described in this report are based on effective drainage for the life of the structure and cannot be relied upon if effective drainage is not maintained. 4.2.6 Construction Considerations It is anticipated that excavations for the proposed construction can be accomplished with conventional earthmoving equipment. Based upon the subsurface conditions determined from the geotechnical exploration, subgrade soils exposed during construction are anticipated to be relatively stable. However, the stability of the subgrade may be affected by precipitation, repetitive construction traffic or other factors. If unstable conditions develop, workability may be improved by scarifying and drying. Overexcavation of wet zones and replacement with granular materials may be necessary. Lightweight excavation equipment may be required to reduce subgrade pumping. The individual contractor(s) is responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. Excavations should be sloped or shored in the interest of safety following local and federal regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards. OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR Part 1926 Revised, 1989) require that all trenches in excess of 5 feet deep be shored or appropriately sloped unless the trench sidewalls are comprised of "solid" rock. "Solid" rock was not was encountered in the soil borings drilled at this site. �eIliaIluIVe um inatiti 9 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 State of Texas legislation requires that detailed plans and specifications for trench retention systems meet OSHA standards for a safe construction environment during utilities installation. Our recommendations are intended for use in conjunction with OSHA safety regulations and not as a replacement of those regulations. Based on the laboratory tests results, the near-surface clay soils encountered at the site can be considered as Type B soils according to OSHA soil classification guidelines. However, if any of the soils become significantly wetter, saturated or submerged they should be considered as Type C soils. Clayey Sand, Silty Sand and Coarse sand soils are Type C soils. However, final determination of the soil type is the responsibility of the contractor. OSHA requires all soil trenches in excess of 5 feet be shored or appropriately sloped. Currently available and practiced methods for achieving slope and/or trench wall stability includes sloping, benching, combinations of sloping and benching, and installation of shoring systems (hydraulic, timber, etc.). Trench shields may also be considered for use. However, these shields only provide protection to workers; they are not a means for providing slope or trench wall stability. OSHA addresses construction slopes in large excavations that are less than 20 feet deep. The table shown below is a reproduction of the OSHA Table B-1: OSHA TABLE B-1 SHORT-TERM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Maximum Allowable Slopes (H:V)2 for Soil or Rock Type Excavations Less Than 20 ft Deep 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Stable Rock Vertical (90°) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Type A 4 3/:1 (53°) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Type B 1: 1 (45°) Type C 11/2.1 (34') The OSHA regulations define short-term as a period of 24 hours or less. z Numbers shown in parentheses next to maximum allowable slopes are angles expressed in degrees from the horizontal. Angles have been rounded off. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet shall be designed by a licensed professional engineer. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 A short-term maximum allowable slope of 1hH:1 V (63°) is allowed in excavations in Type A soil that are 12 feet or less in depth. Short-term maximum allowable slopes for excavations greater than 12 feet in depth shall be 3/H:1 V(53°). 4.3 Foundation Design Recommendations Based upon the subsurface conditions observed during our study, a shallow foundation system would be appropriate to support the structural loads of the proposed structures provided the subgrade is prepared as discussed above. Design recommendations for different foundation systems to support the proposed structures are presented in the following paragraphs. �eIliaIflVe um inatiti 10 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 4.3.1 Tank Foundation A membrane foundation with thickened perimeter footing may be used for the grade supported tank if remedial earthwork is performed as recommended in the report. The bearing depth of the membrane foundation may be controlled by the load requirements necessary to resist lateral load induced by wind or seismic loading. However, the perimeter footing of the membrane foundation should bear no shallower than 2 feet below the final exterior site grade. The membrane foundation for the tanks can be designed using a net allowable bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. The design bearing pressure include a factor of safety against a bearing capacity failure of about 3. The membrane foundation should be designed to resist hoop stresses created by internal lateral earth pressures resulting from the weight of the backfill confined within the foundation and the hydrostatic loads. The membrane foundation backfill options are listed in the following table, together with lateral earth pressure coefficients. ........... ..........._ ............ ............ ............ ............ ..........._ ............ ............ ............ ............ ..........._ ............ ............ ....................... Internal Fill Unit Weight, pcf Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficient ' .......... ........... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ...................... Sand Cushion ---2 ---2 Select Granular Material 130 0.5 ............ A lateral earth pressure coefficient of 0.5 may be used for the hydrostatic loads, resulting in a rectangular pressure distribution. Lateral earth pressures from backfill will be triangular. ........ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. z Assume the same values as the material used beneath the cushion. Overturning moments induced by wind loading might be considered during the foundation design. Uplift loading on the membrane foundation can be resisted by the weight of the membrane foundation, the weight of structure, and any soil overlying the foundation. Overturning should be analyzed for both empty and full tank conditions. A soil unit weight of 120 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) may be assumed for the select fill placed above the footing, provided that the select fill is properly compacted as recommended in the Earthwork section of this report. An allowable coefficient of friction across the membrane foundation base of 0.2 can be used to aid in the resistance of ground line shear loading. 4.3.2 Tank Settlement Considerations The maximum imposed tank bottom pressure for a 16%2-foot high tank will be on the order of 1,000 psf to 1,200 psf under hydrostatic loading. The total settlement of the proposed tank has two components, short-term settlement (elastic settlement) and long-term settlement (consolidation settlement). Total settlements, based on the indicated bearing pressures, should be about 1%2 to 2 inches for properly designed and constructed foundation. Settlement beneath slab will be primarily elastic with most of the settlement occurring during construction. Most of the settlement of these tanks is estimated to be short term. �eIliaIflVe uo natiti 11 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 The differential settlement of the tank shell depends on the local variability of the soil conditions below the tank. Based on the results of the laboratory tests, it is estimated that differential shell settlement due to consolidation of the bearing soils should be less than about 1 inch in 50 feet of wall length. Settlement response of membrane foundation is impacted greatly by the quality of construction. Improper membrane foundation design and construction or ground improvement methods could result in differential settlements that are significantly greater than we have estimated. It is anticipated that approximately 60 to 70 percent of the total settlement will occur shortly after filling of the tanks. We anticipate that the remaining settlement will occur over long-term or several years of service of the tank with fluids at or near the tank top. Anticipated total settlement at the center of the tank should be considered during the design and construction of the tank to achieve the desired bottom slope. Hydrotesting of the tank is recommended. American Petroleum Institute's (API) hydrotest guidelines might be followed for the hydrotesting. API call for not more than a 30-foot distance between peripheral settlement monitoring points. If API guidelines are not required to be met, we recommend that at least twelve elevation monitoring stations be established on the exterior surface of the tank membrane foundation. The elevations should be checked at 1/4, %2, % and full fluid level rise and fall during the hydro-test. Settlement of the tank should be monitored at least every six hours under a given incremental load. The final increment of load should be held a minimum period of 24 hours, and at least 12 hours without measuring additional settlement (>0.01 foot). The measurements should be taken to the nearest 0.005 foot. If differential movements are in excess of expected magnitudes, Terracon should be contacted immediately. Terracon Consultants, Inc. would be pleased to assist in this monitoring effort. According to the Boussinesq's elastic solution, the induced stress at the center of the membrane foundation will be higher than stress induced at the periphery. Therefore, settlement at the center will be higher than settlement at the periphery. Based on the observed subsurface conditions, results of the laboratory tests and our engineering judgment, we estimate that the center settlements will be on the order of 1Y2 to 2 inches. Edge settlements will likely be about one-half of the center settlements. 4.3.3 Slab-On-Grade Foundation Design Recommendations Ancillary structures such as control building may be supported on a conventional slab-on-grade with a perimeter beam. As stated previously, remedial earthwork measures will be required to reduce potential post-construction movements to a tolerable level as recommended in Pad Preparation section. Parameters commonly used to design this type of foundation are provided on the table below. The slab foundation design parameters presented on the table below are based on the criteria published by the Wire Reinforcing Institute (WRI). This is essentially empirical design method and the recommended design parameters are based on our understanding of the proposed ��Ilii��IluIV;' um inatiti 12 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 project, our interpretation of the information and data collected as a part of this study, our area experience, and the criteria published in the WRI design manual. ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ...................... Conventional Method Prepared Subgrade 1 .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... Net Allowable Bearing Pressures z 2,500 psf .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... Subgrade Modulus (k) 100 pci .......... .......... .......... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... .......... ...................... Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) ' About 1 inch ........... ..........._ ............ ............ ............ ............ ..........._ ............ ............ ............ ............ ..........._ ........... WRI Method .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... Effective Plasticity Index(PI) 25 ......... .......... ........... .......... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... Soil/Climate Rating Factor(1- C) 0.10 ............ ........... ......... ........... .......... ........ .......... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... Based on preparing the pad as discussed in the report. ....... .......... ........... ........... z The net allowable bearing pressure provided above includes a Factor of Safety(FS)of at least 3. We recommend that the grade beams be at least 24 inches below final grade. These recommendations are for proper development of bearing capacity for the continuous beam sections of the foundation system and to reduce the potential for water to migrate beneath the slab foundation. These recommendations are not based on structural considerations. Actual grade beam depths and type of slab should be properly evaluated and designed by the Project Structural Engineer. The grade beams or slab portions may be thickened and widened to serve as spread footings at concentrated load areas. For a slab foundation system designed and constructed as recommended in this report, post construction settlements should be less than 1 inch. Settlement response of a select fill supported slab is influenced more by the quality of construction than by soil-structure interaction. Therefore, it is essential that the recommendations for foundation construction be strictly followed during the construction phases of the tank pad and foundation. The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs-on-grade that will be covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slabs will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer and slab contractor should refer to ACI 302 for procedures and cautions about the use and placement of a vapor retarder. �eIliaIflVe um inatiti 13 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 4.3.4 Spread Footing Foundation Isolated footings may be considered to support the roof of the tank. Footings should bear in competent subgrade. The footings may be designed as follows: ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ...................... Description Column Wall ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... Net allowable bearing pressure' 2,500 psf 2,000 psf ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... Minimum dimensions 30 inches 18 inches ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... Minimum embedment below finished grade for Winches 30 inches bearing ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... Approximate total settlement from foundation <3/ inch <1 inch loads ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... Estimated differential settlement from <'h inch between <3/ inch over 40 feet foundation loads columns Allowable net passive pressure 3,4 200 pcf, equivalent fluid density Allowable coefficient of sliding friction 4 0.2 ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............ ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ....................... The recommended net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. Assumes any unsuitable existing fill or soft soils, if encountered, will be undercut and replaced with compacted structural fill. Based upon a minimum Factor of Safety 3. .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... z The foundation settlement will depend upon the variations within the subsurface soil profile, the structural loading conditions, the embedment depth of the footings, the thickness of compacted fill, and the quality of the earthwork operations. .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... 3. The spread footing foundation excavation sides must be nearly vertical and the concrete should be placed neat against these vertical faces for the passive earth pressure values to be valid. If the loaded side is sloped or benched, and then backfilled, the allowable passive pressure will be significantly reduced. Passive resistance in the upper 2 feet of the soil profile should be neglected. If passive resistance is used to resist lateral loads, the base friction should be neglected. .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...................... 4. Includes a factor of safety of 2. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .......................... The spread footings can provide some uplift resistance for those structures subjected to wind or other induced structural loading. The uplift resistance of a spread footing may be computed using the effective weight of the soil above the spread footing along with the weight of the spread footing and structure. A soil unit weight of 110 pcf may be assumed for the on-site soils placed above the footing, provided the fill is properly compacted. We recommend a minimum factor of safety of 1.5 be utilized for uplift calculations. 4.3.5 Shallow Foundations Construction Considerations The shallow foundations should preferably be neat excavated. Excavation should be accomplished with a smooth-mouthed bucket. If a toothed bucket is used, excavation with this bucket should be stopped 6 inches above the final bearing surface and the excavation completed with a smooth-mouthed bucket or by hand labor. If neat excavation is not possible um inatiti 14 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project ual, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 ual, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 then the foundation should be over-excavated and formed. All loose materials should be removed from the over-excavated areas and filled with lean concrete or compacted cement stabilized sand (two sacks cement to one cubic yard of sand) or flowable fill. Caving and sloughing should be anticipated when excavating the sandy onsite soils. To reduce the potential for water infiltration into the excavations and to minimize disturbance to the bearing area, we recommend that concrete and steel be placed as soon as possible after the excavations are completed. Excavations should not be left open for more than 36 hours. The bearing surface of the footings should be evaluated after excavation is completed and immediately prior to placing concrete. If not, a seal slab consisting of lean concrete should be poured to protect the exposed foundation soils. The bearing surface should be excavated with a slight slope to create an internal sump for runoff water collection and removal. If surface runoff water in excess of 1 inch accumulates at the bottom of the excavation, it should be pumped out prior to concrete placement. Under no circumstances should water be allowed to adversely affect the quality of the bearing surface. Backfill soils above the foundation should consist of select fill. Backfill soils should be placed in loose 8-inch lifts; moisture conditioned and compacted. Details regarding subgrade preparation, fill materials, placement and compaction are presented in Earthwork section under subsections Fill Material Requirements and Compaction Requirements. If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered in footing excavations, the excavation could be extended deeper to suitable soils and the footing could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavations. As an alternative, the footings could also bear on properly compacted structural backfill extending down to the suitable soils. Overexcavation for compacted structural fill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the footing base elevation with well graded granular material placed in lifts of 8 inches or less in loose thickness (6 inches or less if using hand-guided compaction equipment) and compacted to at least 95 percent of the material's standard effort maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). The overexcavation and backfill procedure is described in the following figure. r/// JJ Design W Design _2 Fcsadbng Level yy _v.. .._, Footing Level COMPACTED _1 LEAN STRUCTURAL Ck CONCRETE FdLL F{rcaarrAu�nxrrr�9ee1 d�ana:;�amor�e��rrodeel Excavation L.aveP y �. Excavation hwd I i L Leary Concrete Backfill Overexcavation Backfill NOTE:Excavations in sketches shown vertical for convenience Excavations should be sloped as necessary for safety. ?eIHaulVe unto into 15 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 4.3.6 Foundation Construction Monitoring The performance of the foundation system for the proposed structure will be highly dependent upon the quality of construction. Thus, we recommend that fill pad compaction and foundation installation be monitored full time by an experienced Terracon soil technician under the direction of our Geotechnical Engineer. During foundation installation, the base should be monitored to evaluate the condition of the subgrade. We would be pleased to develop a plan for compaction and foundation installation monitoring to be incorporated in the overall quality control program. 4.4 Lateral Earth Pressure The walls of any underground structures will be subject to lateral earth pressures from the surrounding subsurface materials. We anticipate, the magnitude of the lateral pressures will be dictated by the "At-Rest" earth pressure conditions. The magnitude of the earth pressure not only depends on the earth pressure condition, but also on the type of backfill and the drainage condition of the backfill. The installation of a drainage system to achieve a "drained condition" of the backfill is not expected to be practical for all structures at this site. However, the use of an imported granular free-draining material would reduce the equivalent fluid density of the adjacent backfill. It is anticipated that excavated on-site soils will likely be used as backfill. Equivalent fluid densities for lateral earth pressures associated with various backfill materials are presented below. The following values are based on submerged conditions. Recommended lateral earth pressure coefficients of the on-site soil and imported material are presented below: Total Unit Friction At-Rest Earth Weight, Angle, Pressure Equivalent Fluid Backfill Type pcf degrees Coefficient, Ko Densities ' ......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....I............................... On-Site Soils 120 32 0.47 100 ......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....................... Imported Clean Sand or Gravel 130 35 0.43 92 Imported Crushed Limestone 135 40 0.36 89 ........ ............ ............ ........... ........... ............ .......... ............. ............ ......... .......... ............ ............ .. The above equivalent fluid densities are based on an "at-rest" earth pressure condition and a worst-case condition where backfill soils are submerged. However, the above fluid densities do not include provisions for either surcharge on top of the structure or backfill, or for a sloping backfill condition. The lateral pressures that develop on temporary lateral bracing systems depend on the type of bracing system and the installation procedures. Thus, design lateral pressures and the design of temporary lateral bracing systems should be the responsibility of the contractor. As indicated in the Earthwork section of this report, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) ��Ilii��IluIV;' um inatiti 16 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 requires that temporary bracing systems for excavations greater than 20 feet be designed by a qualified engineer. The proposed bracing system should be reviewed by the design team prior to construction of temporary bracing systems. 4.5 Seismic Considerations Description Value 2018 International Building Code Site Classification (IBC) D The site class definition was determined using SPT N-values in conjunction with 2018 IBC and Table 20.3-1 in the 2010 ASCE-7. 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth-related construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. �eIliaIflVe uo 17 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 APPENDIX A DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 =X-4 IIII �" A-1 &V"°I`IL.: X)CA I'IUM II�L,XM Irerracon 18131A CINSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uii Corpus Christi, Texas January 26, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD1 95015R1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... a/1 77 7 U�s 4-1 W, C'7 'k 70 r r 4 r1�4 Ira 7 '31 Q011lllll 100) 1w If Sfioclanri 'rh, M 0 2019 Miaosaft Co;p on D 20=9HIIERE ................ ROAD MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 =X-4 IIII �" A-214B(IRHMG II.00A IUM F�'L,XM Irerracon 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project in Corpus Christi, Texas January 26, 2021 in Terracon Project No. CD1 95015R1 ow A #01 1A WW ............... Q 3, J OR-11 N"j (J!" 7 f,M1111" rd A0, -Approxi mate Boring Location ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,AND IS AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PROVIDED BY GOOGLE EARTH NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 Field Exploration Description The subsurface conditions at the site were explored by drilling nine soil borings to depths of approximately 30 to 60 feet below the existing grade. The proposed boring locations were located in the field by the client. Elevations of the ground surface at the boring locations were not provided to Terracon and should be determined by others prior to construction. Therefore, the references to depth of the various materials encountered are from the existing grade at the time of drilling. A truck-mounted, rotary drill rig equipped with continuous flight augers was used to advance the boreholes. Soil samples were obtained by both thin-walled tube and split-barrel sampling procedures. In the thin-walled tube sampling procedure, a thin-walled, seamless tube with a sharp cutting edge is pushed hydraulically into the ground to obtain relatively undisturbed samples of cohesive or moderately cohesive soils. In the split-barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140-pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18-inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the borings logs at the depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and transported to the laboratory for testing and classification. Our field representative prepared the field logs as part of the drilling operations. The field logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling and our field representative interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. Final boring logs included with this report represent the engineer's/geologist's interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on visual observations, laboratory observations and testing of the samples in the laboratory. The scope of services for our geotechnical engineering services does not include addressing any environmental issues pertinent to the site. eIliiaIluIVe um Exhibit A-3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %A .Ar AA%ft U<A6AA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PfQ 191 � P<;$976FAJ'4 MNA8;96FA%(I/�b a p O D F 0- P— �� PPUPUK X zz 191>WAr=6?.FA'A[S;.\ � > �z X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ z A!"#AA$°/a&AA()//U1234/A567895A7646A2A7646A!A ! A;<4AO@23VA6; #$A% &!A ! ! &.% A #$I' ".A !. ! A!” #$A% 1+ Q Q 5 A?(3@7646AO6;3664A!)A47AA*A>66; !& . .. a . #$'& 0 0 0 . A?(3 @7646AO6=2�A)A>66; 1 o .. V. 11 A — 1 A X a (*$+A AA$%&AA-)/lF8AB; /A76@A2A?6 7696 a #$' 0 :.`. .. Q A567895A7646AO6;3664A&)%47A"*A>66; A" * #$1 o : a +AA&' !&.' # O Z ' Boring Terminated at 60 Feet Q 1;1<;81^&,T4A816:A1%<E12J5<;6.AK,.B 9/A;BAj<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 614DffFAAK25<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #2;6:F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B4<A61AI9,,84A:.QE24AH5 E€1824 O *o IA L2111AI;<1;67FW A'A*I+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 A'A*I + 2 CO 'Irerr34 feet while sampling la n R18��A(VTX' R18=�1<512 Q 33 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-4FTA(RI+—I" TJEM8;F G& 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%V@m U<A6AA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.1'%4 bA24A8;96FA%(I%8hD a p O D F P— �� PPUPUK X zz 191>WAVS?.F*[S;.\ � > �z X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ z ( !$#.#AA$°/AAAI 1/)Ul234/A567895A7646 !A ! ' !! +.) A°/a &!' &! #$A& W! A;<4AOQ3,&f,6; #$A! V &( + O (*$+A,AA$o/AM-)/A<4/A567895A764:6 XI #$!" #$!& (.& Q : A764:6A;2A?gA7166AO&23,!)A>66; A* I) ' +"• ”% I* S a ' > %AAA' I. o ` .. .. #$&% c� 0 Boring Terminated at 30 Feet #$ 0 Q Q r 0 a Q a xc O 0 Q 0 Y O Q z Q 0 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<E12J5<;6.AK43;9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6ADffFAr�25<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B8\<A6'WE7;;84A:.QE24AH5 E€1824 0 *o IA L2191AI;11;67FW AI A*I+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 AI A*I + 2 CO 'Irerr29 feet while sampling la n R18��A(VTX' R18=�1<512 Q 29 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-4FTA(RI+—I" TJEM8;F G" 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 + %AAr AA%8"i U<A6AA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKf Z) PfQ 191 � P<;$976FA%.7'%4 bA84A8;96FA%(I)b a p O pz P- PPUPUK X z0 19 1>WAF='i?.F,7-A{S;.\ z X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ A!"#AA$°/AMNI/AF8AB;A314ZA=22:6A;2)W895,g64:6 ! AA !A.( && A.A !' #$! A.& %I* I A * #$AA %.A &( %IA I I #$A' %.°/ #$A Q Q a A?6@7646A06=2A!)A>66; !%' & S A* #$ + o . Q AP64AX=4&KPA:6<5:A<;AA'A>66; A "•” +' 0 Q . & * & o _ x ' A! ' %&* A!.! Boring Terminated at 40 Feet & #$%% Q 0 a 0 0 Q 0 0 0 O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<E12J5<;6.AK,.B 9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6'ADffFAr�35<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 641A\61E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B4<A61AI9,,84A:.QE24AH5 E€1824 0 a 0 G$", +A,L,!A * ,+ L$" *°/aA L2111AI;<1;67FW A'A'I+ + No free water observed a n L21�AAX5 E=6;6gA A'A' R18=NRWVTC' R18=�1<512 Q Y ( *(AV23AU o X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-4PXRI+"*I" TJEM8;F G( DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AA2A —+* E,(,,? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.)')b8kP4A8;96FA%(1%+b 0 a p O F- pz Z) YZ V* PPUPUK X z0 191>WAVS?.FAA[S;.\ � �� > U) X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ A!"#AA$°/AMNI//@1234/A567895A7646A2A7646 ( !A ! ! !' .A #$A' A=8AB;AM420C3664AAA<4M@; X %+ I' + I A' %( #$AA !A ! & ! A;<4AOQ3,(/66; X #$A &) & !* #$ % + 1• Al 1( AP94AX=4&(RAOFj3664A!'A<4A!"A>66; p ! %A) #$& Q ' a . +AN o . .. #$&* 0 0 0 . #$&A Q . Q : #$A X A a (*$+A,AA$%&AA-)/l8AB;A�/A��64:6 !%A' I ! Boring Terminated at 40 Feet #$ Q 0 a 0 0 Q 0 0 0 O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<ET2J5<;6.AK,.B 9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6'ADffFAr�35<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B4<A61AI9,,84A:)�)E24AH9E€1824 0 *o IA L2191AI;<1;67FW A*A*1+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 A*A*1 + 2 CO 'Irerr33 feet while drilling la n R18�&RA(VTC' R18=�1<512 Q 33 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-gFTA(RI+"*1" TJEM8;F G% 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AA2A —+* E,(,,? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8,AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKf Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.7'4 bA24A8;96FA%(I)8b a p O D 0z 0- P— �� PPUPUK X zz 191>WAVS?.FAA[S,.\ � > �z X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ z A!"#AA$ommNI/,4'<1^A01324/A=22:6A;2/W895A7646 x % !• .! #$!A #$!! & W. A764:6A;2A?nA7B6AOf 23,!'A>66; #$+ & Axl'16Al<47A[I U W06,3 664A)A<:4A!*A66; && ! %!' !A #$k !* ! +!% + #$ Q Q a AP64AX=4@(PA:6<5AO6;3664A!)X47AA*A>66; 1) A S A* #$„& o .. .. a . A°/o,* A.A 0 0 0 0 . Q . r AA x ' Q . Al &* >< &A%' Boring Terminated at 40 Feet Q 0 a 0 0 Q 0 0 0 O Q z Q 1<;81^&,T4AW:A4 <E12J5<;6.AK43;9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6ADffFAr�25<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64,A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64,A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B8\<A61AI9,,84A:)�)E24AH5E€1824 0 a 0 G$", +A,L,!A * ,+ L$" *°/aA L2191AI;<1;67FW A'A'I+ + No free water observed a n L21�AAX5 E=6;6gA A'A' 2 COR18=NRWVTC' R18=�1<512 Q Y ( *(AV23AU o X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-4PXRI+"*I” TJEM8,F G) DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.7')1 bA24A8;96FA%(1)Ab 0 a p O pz 0- P- 0 PPUPUK X z0 19 1>WAF=6?.FA&."A{S;.\ 0- �� � �z X � RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ Q!! °/a&#A' $-/A! # ! /A<4/A?6@A:;8> /o+ !( .A '% ! ' A& o A. A #$!( (*$+A.AA$°/AM-1/,4�<l^A01324/A567895A7646 &" " &. A;<4AOQ3\(F66; x #$A* ) + #$!& &.+ A!”#AA$°/AMN)/A<4/A567895A764:6 !! ! &! #$A% A?(3@7646AO6=2A!'A>66; !! A%&! !.( #$ =Q Q: . S A* o ' a F : 0 " * !) A! % A.* Q . Q . � . r + * & r X Q AX=@@AI<4A[IX\A6<5:A<;A')A>66; +!! ' + A&! a & . & &* #$ Boring Terminated at 40 Feet Q 0 a 0 0 Q 0 0 0 O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<E12J5<;6.AK43;9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6'ADffFAr�35<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B8\<A6'WE7;;84A:)�)E24AH5E€;824 0 *o IA L2111AI;<1;67FW A'A*1+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 AI A*1 + 2 CO 'Irerr38 feet while drilling la n R18�&RA(VTC' R18=�1<512 Q 38 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-gFTA(RI+"*i" TJEM8;F G+ 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.7')1 bA84A8;96FA%(1%'b 0 a p O pz 0- P- 0 PPUPUK X z0 19 1>WAF='i?.FAQ"A{S;.\ 0- �� � �z X � RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ Q!! °/u&#A "A(! # S/A<4A;2AA1 nA?6@:;8> &" %) (& A=8AB;A@AQ3664AAA-7,A)A>66; ( 1• + 1( 1 ( + (' A3�BA547AOf 23,&A@; #$!+ ( !! !• r & " 1*#$A!1( !A.+ %A A!”#AA$°/AMNI//U1234/A=22:6A;2)W895 964:6 * #$A #$!% %%+ W. #$1 ® . ( %( !! + 0 . AS<;AX=AlgQA:6<5:A<;AA)A>66',YAO<17 A." * !' !AA' A*.( "+ A( Boring Terminated at 30 Feet #$'A 0 Q Q r 0 a Q a xc O 0 Q 0 Y O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:A4 <E12J5<;6.AK,.B 9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6ADffFAr�25<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897R8 B4<A61AI9,,84A:)�)E24AH5E€1824 0 *o IA L21IAAI;11;67FW AI A*1+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 AI A*1 + 2 CO 'Irerr29 feet while sampling la n R18�&RA(VTC' R18=�1<512 Q 29 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H;A-gFTA(RI+"*i" TJEM8;F G1* 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AlA2A —+* E,(,,? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8;AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKf Z) PP(/HDI '8 P<;$976FA%.7'4 bA84A8;96FA%(1%fib a p O D 0z 0- P— �� PPUPUK X zz 191>WAVS?.FAA[S;.\ � > �z X RTU TPTQGD<1�# S'.\ � z Q!!A�1!$#.#/JA$%&AAI 1/l8AB;AC3k�A=22:6A;2�8�AZ64:6 ( ' !( .A &, A;<4AQ6664AAA<7SA&A>66; / #%) 1 & !A'! &) A!,,#AA$%&AAN)/R<1^A01324A;2A01 A567895A764:6A;2A764 #$! #$A& A;<4AOQ3,)F66; !' + ! !* #$. &. #$A' !A ! %A* #$'% Q Q a 1A 1,, A* A* A* #$ o . A?(3 @7646AO6;3664AAX47AA"A>66; 1* 1 0 > ) & A*./o o #$"A 0 0 0 . Boring Terminated at 30 Feet #$A! 0 Q Q r 0 a Q a xc O 0 Q 0 Y O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<E12J5<;6.AK,.B 9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 6'ADffFAr�35<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64;A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64;A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897X8$B4<A61AI9,,84A:.QE24AH5 E€1824 0 *o IA L21IAAI;11;67FW AI A*1+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 AI A*1 + 2 CO 'Irerr24 feet while sampling la n R18��ACVTX' R18=�1<512 Q 26 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU U 0 X21®:A)G18U12_6H;A-gFTACRI+"*1" TJ8M8;F G11 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO + %AAr AA%8W U<A6AlA2A —+* E,(„? AQF./.$ A*%AG'A(H14,9 1 HW62AM 2J1 K7 (! , %"?( -q(&DA 539:A(; 5<:7< ( 2539:A(; 5<:7<=M AAAAAAAAAAAA ,i . — — — — — -— — — — — -- AAAAAAAAAPAAA15sAcA : O 16 6AT1B9l8,AG A a F GDDTN_TNO PMXGDKF Z) PP(/HDI � P<;$976FA%.7'%bA24A8;96FA%(I%&b a p O D F 0- P— �� PPUPUK X zz 191>WAVS?.FA-eAj3;.\ � > �z X RTUDC TPTQGD<14S.\ z A!"#AA$°/AMNI//U1234/A=22:6A;2)W895 964:6A V A;<4AOQ3Vr3; #$+ #$!A & A764:6A;2A?gA7166A06=23,)F66; #$ !%o A.) ” ! I I I %A' !A A&W #$ + Q Q a !A ! %&( !&.( S .. A* #$ , . .. a . I& I) I( + #$'& 0 0 . 0 . * x 1& 1 ( 1+ Al ( „ #$ Q . A=22:6AQ3664A,,A<4AA>66; A&& A*.' o #$ x ' .A Boring Terminated at 40 Feet #$"A Q 0 a 0 Q 0 Y O Q z Q 1;1<;81^&,T4AW:Al%<E12J5<;6.AK43;9/A;BAI<4:8;T4A5<�0®A1<79<=. C<55 61ADffFAr�25<;8H C�7 G7?<41-65 64,A\6;E27F #216 F S=AB AGA61 0 xc Y G0;47245 64,A\6;L'27F Q L219AARFP>897X8 B8\<A61AI9,,84A:)�)E24AH5E€1824 0 *o IA L2191AI;11;67FW AI A*I+ L219AA)Q5 E=6;6gA1 AI A*I + 2 CO 'Irerr29 feet while sampling la n R18��A(VTX' R18=�1<512 Q 31 feet at completion of drilling Y ( *(AV23AU v X21®:A)G18;8/AD U12_6H,A-gFTA(RI+"*i" TJEM8,F GIA 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 co �2 X C) LU ............. U) W JO < z F-�X LL U)LU WO 0. LU Cr LL W <U) o 0, d L<LU U C) C) U) SO U) C) Z �O2 LL o o low t U.01 rmm ............................ �2 LL cm 1z z 0 -—-—-—-—-—- LL LL co oo o o o w 2o o- ....................................... E 2 —ou.. o'. o I of o.� z 8, CT, o o 0 5.5 --- ------- 16 n H =-% ............... j.E 1 488=1 UO!IBAO13 N/MLL i0eaiV�dNaiViVG NOOVa i PdeSLOSUGO�NadiaVNS iaOdaawNIelaONOadGaiVaVdaSd10nVAiONSle0�eNla09SIH DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 APPENDIX B DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Revised Geotechnical Engineering Report 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 Project uni, Corpus Christi, Texas Irerracon January 26, 2021 uni, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1 Laboratory Testing Samples retrieved during the field exploration were taken to the laboratory for further observation by the project geotechnical engineer and were classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) described in this Appendix. At that time, the field descriptions were confirmed or modified as necessary and an applicable laboratory testing program was formulated to determine engineering properties of the subsurface materials. Laboratory tests were conducted on selected soil samples and the test results are presented in this appendix. The laboratory test results were used for the geotechnical engineering analyses, and the development of foundation and earthwork recommendations. Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with the applicable ASTM, local or other accepted standards. Selected soil samples obtained from the site were tested for the following engineering properties: Moisture Content Atterberg Limits Percent Passing the No. 200 Sieve Sample Disposal All samples were returned to our laboratory. The samples not tested in the laboratory will be stored for a period of 30 days subsequent to submittal of this report and will be discarded after this period, unless other arrangements are made prior to the disposal period. eIliiaIluIVe um Exhibit B-1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 APPENDIX C DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A4 +AI A&A M" "A+'A! MM)(G$! #$ +" <_3-AB 189 _. (: 07; :1-,@ <=3,-A,43,4 83,- G "2>IiA 277: "2,015,(W,-17*BWI 5#b #7-4=-, <=3,-A,4,A 83,- 5KES "3=: 3 -37: _ =A 2,015,(#,-17(* 'L *k °� #,/34KIN/E-' = + "9,>K-0;K, A=0-7A/°7-, CD Y,-877 -- T/-,+AB,7,B6A2032@/-,3A;A `2BA<MD �a 5E0 s A9737( :1Ft3T1:A,1 031- B*D6A/+AAB,7,B6A;/6C+ 3A20A- �a - a �a <*+,.*B,A/-A,.,A-2; ,6A2032@/-,35 R+*C030/-,+AB,7,BA7//~22.06ACEW@@ +ice 5*c1 s * -C=10AG--27-A :=>?P,- )1:CA=. 2>- )70UJ%7-, *7,+A-2, 5ARB*04?,+; ,/<2132V2136E e /@@G-,A3,-,+- 20/-2*OAAJAD+*C030/-,+ B,7,B6A26ABr-@M<B,AQ86.*+-A +; O/-,+AB,7,BA*<6,+7/-2*065 H-=KA=. 2> +7 4,07 4,-? &#$3CA'*$ Ao! ....$1 Ed #2 + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - =*2R@S62a@2*GAS/6,3A*OA-.,A�U022,3A4*2 62E@a 2*0�:6-,;SAQ*/+6, AR+20,3Ak*2BA./7,A;* +,A-./OA!'1 A*A-.,2'-A3+: - - - A-A, - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0,2D.-A+,42,3A*OA/AA"A6 27,[A-.,2+AN_WB�6�2N*+, J#W<"CB3+6E�<B,EEAD+/BA4A6/035Al2,AR+/20,3P�*28,x./7, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B,a3A-/OA!' 1A�CJA-.,2i-A3+:Am.-A+,-/2,3A*OA/A#"A62,7,[A-., :A/+,AN+2B@'B:A3,6@<,3A6A@/:6AA�.,:A/+,ANDS-UPm3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62-BAfk-.,:A/+,AEB2DB:ANBD AO*0'NB/620)/^*+A*05-2C,0-6A;/:A<,A/33, 3A/6A*3 212,+(A03A;20*+A@r)-2C,0-6A;/:A<, /33,3A/@tX320&*A-A+,Ey-27AN+*W-2*0A</�3A*OAD+/A2 5AAOA/3�4-*Afl'3/-2*OEA�6, "D+/20,3A6*2BW+,A�)20,3 - - - - - - - - - _ - - - - - - *OA-., 4/626AA-.,2i-A20' At,B/-2,A3,062:-A/03Pa)0,"D+20,3Ak*2BAOA-.,A</626AA-.,2i-A@6Q6,0@5 * %!#$+A! +'A( (G! #$ +AF*# ( .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UOB,mA*-,+025,AO*-,3EA!�-a,A/03AH*(D2-C,i\/+,A(NN+*V2;/-,BA3,-,+; 20,3AC®A/A03"., B3A1R=A�,72agAW/@(g+/@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - *JA6C.@3,72�A6'AY+2/<,BAS+/J@,A-B,7/-2*OA3/4A/00*-/-, 3A(2-.AXA20 A,6A4./-AO*A/@C/BAN*D+/N.2(WAG+7:AC16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - @*OT,@�A-* ,OJ2+;A;A6C+L@,AB,7/-2*05AA�0,/ 3EA;A6&AgAAB,7/-2*OAm6ANN+*V21/-,BA3,-,+;2 0,3AY-,A-*N*D+/N.2@ ;/N6 A*,A-.,A(+,/5 )( !#$;(A'(+" 8 A*1�o ! )"(ON) ! $F(' A*$" %+,, +%8.A*I A$F(oi) ! $ . A.*$.. 0 *+,A-./oA!' 1 At 4 2),3A ok*5A#"A627,53 (!'1 A*.+A *t A W6 62)DA,A 4*5*,,A 627,53 9,062:4,-,+ 2),3A<:A-/031+3Az,0,- -W-ZOA?,6 254 0@ Q*0625-,0@)8,-,+; 2),3A<:�<*+/-*+/8.,/+ )6 -.A,6-DDlRQB3 )U(@3,6AD'+7,BE81!036 A/03A M65 72SC/B; /OC/BW @3Ct6 A*-*-/03/+3A,0,- -V-Z 04,6 254 0@ /0- 123U,A#,- ..3=: �, ,3-=317:EY-)1:CA=. 2>- ' ,/0-123U,A#,-. D:07:8t,@A(°7. 2-,//1 4, ..3=: �, ,3-=37:EY- )1:CA=. 2>- a 5 ,: /13?6 M0N ll'3S MIN/LL3S ff/°7:/ N1:O?6 "3•, :C39H-fr;EN8 M�u'� MIN/LL3S ,a G,+:k*6 *.4 AAl G,+:A*J- M 6A/oA'9t! *-A AA& H**6, wm KALL =*J- 'S#!kA 5, #AAA &AAM ),32 C;A906, 'A"A#$ $AAL ) ,3r,"= -2JJ 'S!'A A 5' WPA !AA 9, 06, &*A!, !$A,%L =-2JJ 5'k-45' LAA 'A"A L G,+:). ,06, %A °.7d$$ G,+:A=2JJ #5'A ANS' !A,,A&' $AA# F/+3 %9B, %R %7w u ! #$u(&*A *)# $'+••A I A! +,A! +'A H) ! GL ) ! $FA'$R(ko A$F**H& ' .10-12314.A#.-. 516 A.-0.:A A=B7A9. 2% :3 A=-310?kip 78139-A07:133.: 31 '_ ?X,1C93 78A!=. 2>. W+@ AA! P*CB3f6 '7 ,+A#A205A(4'; 8 T2-. ! A"A#$ Q*«B,6 #A205A&A2@�A; A=AK!; ; 8 *3212,+ %A&' R+/7, B &A205AZ%E2,7A(K;; A AMSK!A;8 =/03 ZNk-AZ# ACi,7,A(MiK!;; A A'S'K!; ; =2w+AQ:B/ >/66 20DAZ#Aa,7,A('5'K!; ; 8 u ! #r.(&*A *)# $'+"A I A$+( ,, A ! "# )/st&A'(,,yj A#$`+ ' .10-123k1.A#.-. 516 A.-0.: 3R8 #. -. A*3013-4 0(� 78739-A07:132.: 31 ?A•'c93 4*0"NB/6-2@ W+@ AA! H*O A"A T2-. !A"A# ), 3,; A"A&' *3212,+ %A# F21D %A&' Irerracon (Q91K1*O DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Soil Classification Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Group Group Name Symbol Gravels: Clean Gravels: Cu>>4 and 1 <Cc<3 E GW Well-graded gravel F .......... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ More than 50%of Less than 5%fines° Cu<4 and/or 1 >Cc>3 E GP Poorly graded gravel F .......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ coarse fraction retained Gravels with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F,G,H Coarse Grained Soils: on No.4 sieve o ° ....... ....a. ..... -g-r F G,H More than 12/o fines Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel Morethan 50%retained ............. ............ ............. ............. ........... ............. ............ ............ ........... ............. ............. ............ on No.200 sieve Sands. Clean Sands: Cu>6 and 1 <Cc<3 E SW Well-graded sand' .......... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............ ........... ........... 50%or more of coarse Less than 5%fines° Cu<6 and/or 1 >Cc>3 E SP Poorly graded sand' .......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ fraction passes No.4 Sands with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G"' sieve More than 12%fines° Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G"' .. ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............................................................... PI>7 and plots on or above A line' CL Lean clay K L M Inorganic: ............. ............. ......... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... Silts and Clays: PI<4 or plots below"A"line' ML Silt K L,M Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit oven dried Organic clay KL M N Fine-Grained Soils: Organic <075 OL KLM.. Liquid limit not dried Organic Silt 50%or more passes the ............. ............. ............. ........... .......... ........... .......... .......... .......................... .......... ........... ........... ........... No.200 sieve PI plots on or above A line CH Fat clayKLM Inorganic: ............. ........... ............. ............. ........... ............. ......... ........... Silts and Clays: PI plots below"A line MH Elastic Silt K LM .......... ......................... ......., .. Liquid limit 50 or more Liquid limit oven dried Organic clayKLM P Organic. ........... ........... .......... <0.75 OH ..... ........... ........... Liquid limit-not dried Organic Silt K,L,M,l .. ............................... ......... ............. ........... ..........., .............................................................. Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter,dark in color,and organic odor PT Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-inch(75-mm)sieve " If fines are organic,add"with organic fines"to group name. B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders,or both,add"with cobbles If soil contains>-15%gravel,add"with gravel'to group name. or boulders,or both"to group name. If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area,soil is a CL-ML,silty clay. °Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded K If soil contains 15 to 29%plus No.200,add"with sand"or"with gravel," gravel with silt, GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay, GP-GM poorly whichever is predominant. graded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. L If soil contains>_30%plus No.200 predominantly sand,add"sandy'to °Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded group name. sand with silt,SW-SC well-graded sand with clay,SP-SM poorly graded M If soil contains>_30%plus No.200, predominantly gravel,add sand with silt,SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay "gravelly"to group name. z " PI>-4 and plots on or above"A"line. E Cu=D60/D,o Cc= (D30) °PI<4 or plots below"A"line. D10 x D60 P PI plots on or above"A"line. F If soil contains>>15%sand,add"with sand"to group name. °PI plots below"A"line. G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM,or SC-SM. ... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............... 60 r, For classification of tine-grained f soils and fine-grained fraction •' 50 of Equationcs -gArained soils ��,' ze 0- Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5. f X 40 them P1=0.73(LIL- 0) - t" Q� W Equation of"Ll""-line ,' �ot Z Vertical at LL=16 to PII=7„ H 30 thein PI=0.9(LL-8)' U) 20 MH or OH CL 10 L = M 4 �- ML or OL 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT (LL) Irerracon Exhibit C-2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 July 28, 2021 Irerracon City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attn: Mr. Marcus Flores Engineering Services Department Re: 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis 13101 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, Texas Terracon Project No. CD195015 Dear Mr. Flores: Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) is pleased to submit this supplemental letter to our original geotechnical report for the above referenced project. This supplemental letter should be attached to and made a part of the January 26, 2021 geotechnical engineering report, Terracon Project No. CD195015R1. The original report provided recommendations for subgrade preparation and engineering design parameters for the proposed project. Based on the provided information, it is our understanding that a steeper slope (1:1) is proposed at the eastern portion of the proposed tank due to limited space. This letter report presents the result of the global stability analyses for the proposed slope. Proposed Mechanically Stabilized The following assumptions are made for proposed mechanically stabilized reinforced earth slope: The tank is minimum 7 feet away from the edge of the slope top. The edge of the tank foundations is at least 3 feet away from the slope top. The bearing pressure of the tank footing should not be greater than 2,500 psf. The primary reinforcement shall be Tensar UX11OOHS geogrid consisting of regular grid structure of select high density polyethylene or polypropylene resin. The minimum allowable junction strength of the geogrid should be greater than 1411 Ib/ft. The manufacturer shall provide certification of the ultimate strength and junction strength of the specified product (with accompanying test results if requested by Terracon Consultants,Inc. 3606 WOW Road,Corpus Christi,Texas 78413 P (361) 420 6000 F (361)420 6001 terracon.com Texas Professional Engineers No.3272 Environmental n: DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Supplemental Geotechnical Engineering Letter 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis Irerracon Corpus Christi, Texas uui July 28, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD195015 the Engineer). The manufacturer shall provide the certification that the ultimate strength of the geogrid as is equal to or greater than the ultimate strength called for this project. The mechanically stabilized reinforced earth slope should be continuing until a slope of about 3:1 or flatter can be achieved. A detailed construction drawing should be developed (by others) to properly convey the design to the contractor(s) and attention should be given while placing the Tensar UX11OOH S geogrid. For the mechanically stabilized reinforced earth slope of 1:1, the geogrid should be of minimum 20 feet long and should be placed every 1%2 feet (vertical spacing). Minimum 9 inches of granular materials should be placed below and above the geogrid. This report is limited to the results of global stability analysis. The surface of the slopes should be protected against erosion. Structural Geogrid Installation Geogrid shall be oriented with the highest strength axis perpendicular to the face of the reinforced slope. Geogrid reinforcement shall be placed at the elevations and to the extent shown on the construction drawings (by others) or as directed by the Engineer. The geogrid soil reinforcement shall be laid horizontally on compacted backfill. The geogrid shall be pulled taut and anchored prior to backfill placement on the geogrid. No tensioning of the geogrid materials shall be required. Geogrid reinforcements shall be continuous throughout their embedment length(s). Spliced connections between shorter pieces of geogrid will not be allowed unless pre-approved by the Engineer prior to construction. Tracked construction equipment shall not be operated directly upon the geogrid reinforcement. A minimum fill thickness of 6 inches is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geogrid. Tracked vehicle turning should be kept to a minimum to prevent tracks from displacing the fill and damaging the geogrid. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over geogrid reinforcement at slow speeds, less than 10 mph. Sudden breaking and sharp turning shall be avoided. uui is II R e II a],,°,ulVe 2 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Supplemental Geotechnical Engineering Letter 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis Irerracon Corpus Christi, Texas uui July 28, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD195015 No changes to geogrid layout, including, but not limited to, length, geogrid type, or elevation, shall be made without the approval of the Engineer. Reinforced Backfill Placement Reinforced backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes the development of slack in the geogrid. Reinforced backfill shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches where hand compaction is used, or 12 inches where heavy mechanical compaction equipment is used. Reinforced backfill shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. The moisture content of the backfill material prior to and during compaction shall be uniformly distributed throughout each layer and shall be within a range of 2% below, to 3% above optimum moisture content. Reinforced backfill shall be compacted in all areas to the lines and grades shown on the plans. Soil Parameters for Global Stability Analysis For evaluating the retaining wall global slope stability, the soil parameters used in the stability verification for the proposed reinforced slope are present below. Depth below .... Parameters FFE Stratum ..Drained Condition Undrained Condition Unit Weight= 130 pcf Unit Weight= 130 pcf EI. 39.0 feet Imported Granular Select Fill 1,2 Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle= 35" Friction Angle = 35° .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ . ........... ..... Unit Weight= 130 pcf Unit Weight= 130 pcf EI. 34.0 feet Onsite Clay Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle= 33° Friction Angle = 33° .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ . ........... ..... Unit Weight= 120 pcf it Weight= 120 pcf EI. 13.0 feet Onsite Silty Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle=28° Friction Angle =28° ........ ............. ......................... Granular select fill should consist of 2014 TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 1-2 crushed limestone or concrete base material. the, ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... z The materials should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and should be compacted to 95 percent of materials standard Proctor maximum dry density ASTM D698 is is is II R e II a],,�°,ulVe 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Supplemental Geotechnical Engineering Letter 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis Irerracon Corpus Christi, Texas uui July 28, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD195015 Unreinforced Slope (flatter than 3:1) The unreinforced slope should be flatter than 3:1. Concrete riprap at the exposed slope is considered in the global stability analysis. Two different backfill materials are considered for this condition and the soil parameters used in the stability verification are present below. Imported Lean Clay Select fill Depth below .... Parameters HE Drained ..Drained Condition Undrained Condition Imported Lean Clay Select Fill Unit Weight= 130 pcf Unit Weight= 130 pcf EI. 39.0 feet Z Cohesion = 1,000 psf Cohesion =200 psf Friction Angle = 0° Friction Angle =24° .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ . ........... ..... Unit Weight= 130 pcf Unit Weight= 130 pcf EI. 34.0 feet Onsite Clay Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle= 33° Friction Angle = 33° .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ ............ ............. ............ ............ . ........... ..... Unit Weight= 120 pcf it Weight= 120 pcf EI. 13.0 feet Onsite Silty Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle=28° Friction Angle =28° ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. . ............ ............. ......................... uki Ll-<_40 and 7<PI<_20 uki % passing#200 sieve z60% urti Maximum particle size 1'/2 ......... ......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... z The materials should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and should be compacted to 95 percent of materials standard Proctor maximum dry density ASTM D698 Clean Sand Select fill Depth below .. Parameters.. HE Drained Drained Condition Undrained Condition Unit Weight= 120 pcf Unit Weight= 120 pcf EI. 39.0 feet Clean Sand Select Fill 1,2 Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle = 33" Friction Angle = 33" .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ........... ..... Unit Weight= 130 pcf Unit Weight= 130 pcf EI. 34.0 feet Onsite Clay Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle = 33° Friction Angle = 33° .......... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ........... ..... Unit Weight= 120 pcf it Weight= 120 pcf EI. 13.0 feet Onsite Silty Sand Cohesion = 0 psf Cohesion = 0 psf Friction Angle =28° Friction Angle =28° ....... ............. ............ ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. . ............ ............. ......................... uki % passing#200 sieve <20% uki Maximum particle size 11/2" .......... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......................... z The materials should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and should be compacted to 95 percent of materials standard Proctor maximum dry density ASTM D698 is is is II R e II a],,�:,fl e 4 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Supplemental Geotechnical Engineering Letter 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis Irerracon Corpus Christi, Texas uui July 28, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD195015 Results of Global Stability Analyses The computer program SLOPE/WO 2018 (R2) developed by Geo-Slope International was used to evaluate stability. This program has several methods available that allow the user to model block-type failure surfaces (modes). The stability analysis is typically characterized by its calculated factor of safety against failure. The factor of safety may be generally defined as the ratio of the resisting forces to the driving forces. A factor of safety of 1.0 indicates the resisting forces are in equilibrium with the driving forces; therefore, the higher the safety factor, the more stable the slope. Further discussion of the trial failure modes that were analyzed is provided below. In the program SLOPE/WO, the Spencer method was selected to calculate the factor of safety. The entry and exit method function was specified to locate the critical slip surface, and then optimization of the failure plane was performed by the software to "probe" the possibility of a lower safety factor. The stability analyses were performed by inputting shear strength, friction angles, and unit weight parameters into SLOPE/WO. The long-term stability conditions were considered for these analyses. Figures showing the failure plane and the corresponding factor of safety are presented in attachment. The factor of safety shown on the graphical plot corresponds to the optimized failure surface. The table below summarizes the results of the slope stability analysis for the different conditions. Computed Factor of Safety Backfill Conditions Short-Term Long-Term (undrained) (drained) Reinforced Slope (1:1) 1.6 1.6 Imported Lean Clay Select Fill (3:1) 1.4 1.4 Clean Sand Select Fill (3:1) 1.4 1.4 Minimum Required Factor of Safety 1.3 1.3 As noted in Table, the calculated factors of safety for the proposed configurations exceeded the minimum allowable factor of safety established. The project site is not located in a seismic impact zone since the maximum horizontal acceleration in lithified material at the facility is less than 0.1g. Therefore, a seismic stability analysis is not required. ui uui is 5 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Supplemental Geotechnical Engineering Letter 18131A ONSWTP Clearwell No. 3 - Global Stability Analysis Irerracon Corpus Christi, Texas uui July 28, 2021 u11 Terracon Project No. CD195015 General This report does not reflect variations that may occur due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. Provisions to verify strength of utilized soil and geosynthetic materials and interfaces may be added as part of the construction quality assurance process as applicable. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted engineering practices. No warranties, express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. For changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing Conclusion Unless noted otherwise in this addendum letter, our recommendations for the project are as presented in our original report remain unchanged. If you have any questions regarding this addendum letter, please do not hesitate to contact one of the undersigned. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Firm Registration: TX F3272) 711 xra Www.w«.. ................. Tariqul Anwar, P.E. Gregory P. Stieben, P E., D.GE Project Engineer •" ° ""'"""'""" ' Senior Consultant TA/GPS—CD1950151 %..,.� i • w Copies to: Addressee: (1)Electro ", -,M-- ". Attachment: Global Stability Analysis Outputs ui is is II R e Il u„],-,,ulVe 6 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 LO O O O co LO N 00 pj co C?) N ... N � OM N 07 N 00 N +� N LO NN N�N U) L1. L a) O +� Q O col Q LO L cu C/) O i/) L U C� C: _. cu O O W LLQ M OM O M N M Q ++ 04-- Lr r-- 11 11111 1 C 04 >_ - II y o W U O N O O O O N O (6 t O j����j •� 'y V O O O O O O r Q L7 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 o N LO N �3 II N N c o LO I U m i U � � _0 Q U L m - OM Q U) "- c c m � �_ �_ U E coLO O � ' O U O O O O O N co UOIjen213 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 LO f� O O N T7 LO L Ln O co N Qco N O (n N co � N � O • • N �, LO LO �O LO N a O U N a) `1JI I LO 70 O p c C/) N L U O � cu U W N Q - oma O MilillIII O go 's Q = C � W LLQ M 0M N M CO M N a LO t/1 N a O � 0 0 >- W (� O N 0N O O O O ? AFL o � o 0 0 0 Ln E E E E E E ° O O O O O U U U U U U � ° N II © ° U o o N _ f,J} `.?+ _0 Q U U c m m Q = O M m ) U) i, E �+ z U U U) U) U) coLO o ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ M ❑ O O O O O O T- T- N co 't I I I I DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 LO 4- c N a0 07 r O L N � N +.r L) Q CO 0 N CO CO QM 0 N LO O O r CU N O O N � U � �I 1 116 c) LL Q77 cn r 77 (n 75 � U rt. a ; N cu a a � a� — LuL Q GSf LLQ M OM O M N W O,,,,;;L N J � o 70 4— w O Ln - w N 00 L7 ,,,,,I W U O N O O .� Q (n .+ Ot O w, ai LO � jj= Q O O O O O /%/ C 00 E E E E E T O O O O O 1 U U U U U L R 0 0 0 0 0 00 Q c a� 1 0 O O 7(6 0 J vI ^ LO N U �����, U II m C �"–L U) "– E c c_ ao � L a O M R N O N — — Z U U (n (n (n U L Ed 00 O O O O O 1 T T N co 1 1 1 1 uoijenaj::j DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 N LO co N c O ti 4t- 'V-- N N M M 'V-- V N C: a) N N 116 ' LL Q U) N T cu V\/ 5 U ca L) � N cu > c fn Q{ a a� w ._ W LLQ M �M N M N 4— C? .� fA N t O O to w0 � LO O W U O N N O O O O O O O O �= E E E E E � � � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 U U U U U 0 LL Q� 00 � 0 0 N � V7 0 n c Q r _ 0 m W O o o J U LO U) (14 „ U) U) Q U 2 — m Q IILL m c0 N M a � U U 1 �” Z U U (n (n (n L O (� U O O O O O ' T T N M 1 1 1 1 uoijena13 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 LO O N r O 4 O U C�1 N O C7 i�����������������% N M U) 00 N C,j ~ O N -r- i/i C7 N N N � � c r Q :g6 ca � cn CU N 70 cuc CU 'N > f cC/) ami a) Lu LLQ M OM M M N O C fn y 00 N t O w0y Ln O LU () CL O N O O O Cl) ! V O O O O O M V N N N 00 Ocua E E E E E v U 0 0 0 0 0 Cni _ 0 0 0 0 0 /�/) � U U U U U V •L i i i i '^ V, C G G G G G M O U) 0 N U) C\1 D J U CL L- U) LL m m M N U U of M M i z U U U) iA iA L O 0 Lj U O 00 O O O O O Wim.. N co uoijena13 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 3 Asbestos NESHAP and Lead Survey Report DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TURNSTONE EH&S, INC. Asbestos NESHAP and Lead Survey Report O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant 842200000000, Corpus Christi, TX 78410 For Work Performed . O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant 842200000000, Corpus Christi, TX 78410 Prepared For. Ms. Amy Hesseltine LNV Inc. 801 Navigation Blvd. Ste. 300 Corpus Christi, TX. 78408 Project C20-0322 Report Date. Revision 2 November 24, 2020 TURNSTONE 1322 Space Park Drive,Suite A-155 Houston,Texas 77058 281-470-0708 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Project Information PROJECT NUMBER: C20-0322 CLIENT: Project Location: Ms. Amy Hesseltine O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant LNV Inc. 842200000000, 801 Navigation Blvd. Ste. 300 Corpus Christi, TX 78410 Corpus Christi, TX. 78408 PROJECTFIELD WORK CONDUCTED BY: John Ideus EPA Accredited Asbestos Inspector October 13, 2020 REPORT PREPARED BY: 0""do &---> Andrew Steranko Senior EHS Consultant Asbestos Individual Consultant TIDSHS License No. 105854 TuRNSTONE , INC NOTE: This report is the sole property of Turnstone EH&S,Inc. and LNV Inc. and is intended for the specific use by these parties. Reproduction, reference or use of this document by others is prohibited without the express written permission of both parties and their legal representatives. This document represents the best professional judgment of Turnstone EH&S, Inc.based on the data contained herein and should be reviewed in its entirety. Turnstone EH&S,Inc. is not responsible for third party review of this document or for the use of this information outside of its intended purpose. DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Report Introduction PROJECT NUMBER: C20-0322 SCOPE OF WORK Turnstone EH&S, Inc. was contracted by LNV Inc. to perform an Asbestos National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) survey at O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant, 842200000000, Corpus Christi, TX 78410. The survey was conducted by John Ideus an Accredited Asbestos Building Inspectors under the EPA Model Accreditation Plan. Suspect materials were sampled: twenty-seven (27) bulk samples and twenty-one (12) paint chip samples were collected and analyzed for asbestos and lead, respectively. Project Location All the work described within this report was conducted at O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant, 842200000000, Corpus Christi, TX 78410. TESTING The survey was conducted in general accordance with the sample collection protocols established in EPA regulation 40 CFR 763, the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA). The existing buildings were assessed to identify suspect ACMs, which were then grouped into three categories according to their intended use: • Surfacing Materials — material that is sprayed on, troweled on, or otherwise applied to surfaces, such as acoustical plaster on ceilings and fireproofing materials on structural members, or other material on surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing, or other purposes. • Thermal System Insulation (TSI) —material applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching tanks, ducts, or other interior structural components to prevent heat loss or gain, water condensation, or for other purposes. • Miscellaneous Materials — interior building materials on structural components, structural members, or fixtures, such as floor and ceiling tiles, but does not include surfacing materials or thermal system insulation. VISUAL • Our survey activities began with visual observation of the interior areas of the building to identify homogeneous areas of suspect ACM (asbestos containing materials). A homogeneous area consists of building materials that appear similar throughout in terms of color, texture and consideration given to date of application. Interior assessment was conducted throughout visually accessible areas of the buildings. Building materials identified as concrete, glass, wood, masonry, metal or rubber were not considered suspect ACM. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 PHYSICAL • A physical assessment of each homogeneous area of suspect ACM was conducted to assess the friability and condition of the materials. A friable material is defined by the EPA as a material which can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. Friability was assessed by physically touching suspect materials. SAMPLE COLLECTION AND ANALYTICAL Based on results of the visual observation, suspect ACMs were collected in general accordance with AHERA sampling protocols. Bulk samples were collected, placed in plastic bags, and labeled with unique identification numbers. Chain-of-custody forms were completed, signed, dated, and along with the bulk samples transported to Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. for analysis by polarized light microscopy per EPA methodology EPA/600R-93/116. All Lead paint chip samples were submitted to ALS Environmental Laboratory for analysis. Analyte Method Description Asbestos EPA Method Bulk Samples are collected and shipped to the Lab. Bulk 600/R-93-16 Lead EPA SW-846 Paint Chip Samples are collected and shipped to the Lab. Paint Chip 3050B/6010C/7000B ANALYSISLABORATORY All PLM asbestos samples were submitted to and analyzed by Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. (TDSHS Asbestos License#: 30-0312 PLM/PCM and NVLAP Lab Code: 200633- 0 PLM) in accordance with the appropriate methods listed above. All Lead paint chip samples were submitted to and analyzed by ALS Environmental, 10450 Stancliff Road, Suite 210 Houston Texas 77099 (ELPAT No. 173190) in accordance with the appropriate methods listed above. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 OVERVIEWREGULATORY The asbestos NESHAP (40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M) and Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (Chapter 295, Subchapter C — Texas Administrative Code) regulates asbestos fiber emissions and asbestos waste disposal practices. It also requires the identification and classification of existing building materials prior to demolition or renovation activity. Under NESHAP, asbestos- containing building materials are classified as either friable, Category I non-friable or Category II non-friable ACM. Friable materials are those that, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure and contain more than 1% asbestos. Category I non-friable ACM includes packing's, gaskets, resilient floor coverings & associated mastics and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1% asbestos. Category 11 non-friable ACM are any materials other than Category I materials that contain more than 1% asbestos. Friable ACM, Category I and Category 11 non-friable ACM which is in poor condition and has become friable or which will be subjected to drilling, sanding, grinding, cutting or abrading and which could be crushed or pulverized during anticipated renovation or demolition activities are considered regulated ACM (RACM). Before performing any demolition in a public building, contractors shall ensure that all friable asbestos-containing material (ACM) or ACM which may become friable (i.e. Category I I nonfriable ACM) are surveyed and abated in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M. Before performing any renovation in a public building, contractors are required to survey and perform asbestos abatement for all asbestos-containing building material (ACBM) that could foreseeably be disturbed in the area to be renovated in accordance with these rules. The asbestos survey and abatement for the demolition and/or renovation shall be conducted by persons licensed in accordance with these rules, and according to the standards for removal specified in §§295.58 — 295.60 of this title. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Observations and Discussion PROJECT NUMBER: C20-0322 SUMMARY OF RESULTS The survey was conducted by John Ideus an Accredited Asbestos Inspector under the EPA Model Accreditation Plan. Suspect materials were sampled (27 bulk samples) representing 9 Homogenous Areas. Nine (9) of the twenty-seven (27) samples collected were POSITIVE for Asbestos, representing three (3) Positive Homogeneous Areas. Results of positive bulk sampling results are summarized below: Sample Number Description Result C20-0322-101320-11 Flashing / black tar/ South of building 5% HA-1 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-12 Flashing / black tar/ South of building 5% HA-1 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-13 Flashing / black tar/ South of building 5% HA-1 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-20 Door filler/ around door 3% HA-4 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-21 Window filler/around West window 3% HA-4 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-22 Window filler/around East window 3% HA-4 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-35 Black mastic on pipe West of building 20% HA-9 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-36 Black mastic on pipe West of building 20% HA-9 Chrysotile C20-0322-101320-37 Black mastic on pipe West of building 20% HA-9 Chrysotile Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Summary and quantification of positive asbestos homogenous areas are in the following table: Homogeneous Homogeneous Area Quantity, Area Description Number Location , HA-1 Flashing and tar around High Service Building 130 ft2 Miscellaneous, Category 1 Non-friable material HA-4 Door and window Filler 260 ft2 Miscellaneous, Category 1 Non-friable material HA-9 Black mastic on pipe, High Service Building 6 ft2 Miscellaneous, Category 1 Non-friable material Note: All quantifications are estimates. The abatement contractor is responsible for determining exact quantities of asbestos to be removed. Please see Appendix 1 for field documentation Please see Appendix 2 for laboratory results Please see Appendix 3 for photographs Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Lead Paint Chip Sample Results: Sample Description/Location Color Result Number % Lead— C20-0322-101320-1 Southeast of Clear Well Blue 0.00073 C20-0322-101320-2 Southeast pipe on Clear Well Blue 0.10 C20-0322-101320-3 48" pipe Northeast of High Service Blue 0.39 Building C20-0322-101320-4 Northeast of High Service Building Yellow 0.0017 C20-0322-101320-5 Concrete paint under pumps Tan/Red 0.019 C20-0322-101320-6 Inside High Service Building, South Maroon 0.21 side on wall C20-0322-101320-7 Inside High Service Building, South Gray/Orange 2.6 side on Structural Beams C20-0322-101320-8 Inside High Service Building on wire Blue 0.23 panels C20-0322-101320-9 Inside High Service Building on Yellow 0.47 window cranks C20-0322-101320-10 2" Piping Inside High Service Green 0.17 Building, Southeast side C20-0322-101320-0 Outside of High Service Building on Black 0.005 the South Side C20-0322-101320-100 Outside on the clear well foundation Peach 0.12 Twelve (12) of the twelve (12) samples collected and analyzed were found to have a lead content at or above the level of detection and are therefore POSITIVE for lead. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Please note, OSHA (in the Construction Standard for Lead) 29 CFR 1926.62, does NOT have a trigger concentration for lead in paint. Instead, the OSHA action level of 30 pg/m3 is based on air sampling. If any detectable level is present, then the OSHA standard uses a task-based table to presume exposures, which can be found on the following page. LEAD-RELATED CONSTRUCTION TASKS AND THEIR PRESUMED 8-HOUR TWA EXPOSURE LEVELS: > 50 to 500 /m3 > 500 /m3 to 2,500 /m3 > 2,500 /m3 • Manual demolition • Using lead-containing . Abrasive blasting mortar • Dry manual scraping • Lead burning • Welding • Dry manual sanding • Rivet busting • Torch cutting • Power tool cleaning • Heat gun use without dust collection • Torch burning • Power tool cleaning systems with dust collection • Cleanup of dry systems expendable abrasive blasting jobs • Spray painting with • Abrasive blasting lead pain enclosure movement and removal OSHA standard for Lead in Construction (29 CFR 1926.62) requires the employer to comply with the exposure assessment measures and any other requirements of the standard for coating containing any level of lead. If the employer is working with surface coatings that may contain any level of lead in such a way that would generate airborne levels to which employees may be exposed, it is the employer's duty to conduct exposure monitoring (or use objective or historical data as defined in 29 CFR 1926.62(d)(3)(iii) through 1926.62(d)(3)(iv)(B) and in 29 CFR 1926.62(n)(4)) to demonstrate that the Lead in Construction standard's action level (30 micrograms/cubic meter of air) is not exceeded. The results of the exposure assessment then determine whether the employer would need to apply the further protections of that rule. If the levels of lead to which employees are exposed are below the action level (which may occur when the levels of lead in paint are very low and work is being done in such a way as to not disturb the paint and, therefore, generate airborne concentrations of lead), then the further requirements of the standard would not apply. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Survey Limitations DESCRIPTION OF SURVEY AND REPORT LIMITATIONS Survey findings and recommendations are subject to the following limitations: 1. This sampling was based on conditions existing at the time the sampling was conducted. 2. The samples collected are representative of the specific time and location where they were collected and may or may not be indicative of conditions throughout the entire facility. The recommendations and conclusions contained within this report represent the best professional judgment of Turnstone EH&S, Inc. based on the data contained herein and should be reviewed in its entirety. Turnstone EH&S, Inc. is not responsible for third party review of this document or for the use of this information outside of its intended purpose. All occupational health inquiries should be referred to an occupational physician knowledgeable in the chemical and/or physical exposures found in the workplace. Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendices TECHNICAL DETAILS AND ATTACHMENTS AppendixlDocumentation AppendixLaboratory i AppendixPhotographs Project No. C20-0322 October 2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 1: Field Documentation DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 i Sample Location d 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite A-155 Diagram Houston Texas 77058 Project Name: Stevens Water Treatment Plant TS Job No: C20-0322 TS Associate John Ideus Unit/Location: High Service Building/Clear Well Date: 10/13/2020 Cont.Supervisor: Brice Thomas Contractor: LNV Inc. Job scope Asbestos Survey Pumps High Service 35,36,37 Building 29 30 31 �T 32,33 34 14 20 17 11,12,13 21 16 23,24,25 18,19 22 15 TS SOP AMP PF 16 Sample Location Diagram 5.1.19 Rev 2.1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Standard � TURNSTONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite Operating Frw1RQraM[N7,,Ai, H MH ANU,.M i Y A-155 Houston,Texas Procedures 77058 BULK SAMPLING FORM 11 P 111 g 11, Project Name: Stevens Water Treatment Plant Inspection Date: 10/13/20 Project Address 842200000000 Corpus Christi Texas Client/Address Inspector(s) : John ideus License#: Inspector(s) : John ideus License#: Client PO# Client Project# Client Contact/Project Manager C20-0322 Brice Thomas HA#: 1 Material and Desc.:Flashing i Tar TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description(where material is found ex. -break room,rms.2,4,7) C20-0322-101320-11 Flashing/Tar around High Service Building, South of Building Condition G D S 12 Flashing/Tar around High Service Building, South of Building Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 13 Flashing/Tar around High Service Building, South of Building 130 Friable Non-Friable HA#:2 Material and Desc.:Brick Mortar TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description(where material is found ex. -break room,rms.2,4,7) 14 Brick Mortar West Side of High Service Building Condition GD S 15 Brick Mortar East Side of High Service Building a eLnlAm uFt 16 Brick Mortar Middle of High Service Building 8500 Friable Non-Friable HA#:3 Material and Desc.:Window Caulking TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description(where material is found ex. -break room,rms.2,4,7) 17 Window Caulking, West Side Window Condition G D S 18 Window Caulking, East Side Window Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 19 Window Caulking, East Side Window 320 Friable Non-Friable HA#:4 Material and Desc.:Door Filler TSI SURF MISC TS SOP AMP PF 22 Asbestos Bulk Sample Data Sheet 5.1.19 ver 02.01 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Standard TURNSTONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite Operating a 114VIN'k 1P8t^/id N7AI,���n7�i+ANC)$AI¢,JY Ir��,'� A-155 Houston,Texas Procedures f 77058 BULK SAMPLING FORM a 1 P a g n. Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 20 Door Filler around Southeast Door 21 Window Filler around West Window Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 22 Window Filler around East Window 260 Friable Non-Friable HA#:5 Material and Desc.:Vent Sealant TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description(where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 23 Vent Sealant South Side of High Service Building 24 Vent Sealant South Side of Hi h Service Buildin g Material Amount g Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 25 Vent Sealant South Side of High Service Building 12 Friable Non-Friable HA#:6 Material and Desc.:Cement/Foundation TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 26 Cement/Foundation North Side 27 Cement/Foundation Middle Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 28 Cement/Foundation South Side 32,500 Friable Non-Friable HA#: 7 Material and Desc.:Cement Under Pumps TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7) 29 Cement Under Pumps, West Side 30 Cement Under Pumps, Middle Material Amount p Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 31 Cement Under Pumps, East Side 300 Friable Non-Friable TS SOP AMP PF 22 Asbestos Bulk Sample Data Sheet 5.1.19 ver 02.01 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Standard Jr TURNSTONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite Operating rwwtlo,�t•dr�i p�x a HUALTH ANN S,MUY rda'_ A-155 Houston,Texas Procedures f 77058 BULK SAMPLING FORM Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft Friable Non-Friable HA#:8 Material and Desc.:Tile & Grout TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description(where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 32 Aqua Tile/Grout West Side 33 Aqua Tile/Grout West Side Material Amount a Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 34 Aqua Tile/Grout East Side 200 Friable Non-Friable HA#:9 Material and Desc.: Black Mastic on pipe TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7 35 Black Mastic on pipe west side of High Service Building 36 Black Mastic on pipe west side of High Service Building Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft 37 Black Mastic on pipe west side of High Service Building 6 Friable Non-Friable HA#: Material and Desc.: TSI SURF MISC Sample#'s Homogeneous area description (where material is found ex. -break Condition G D S room, rms. 2, 4, 7) Material Amount Sq Ft/Lin Ft/Cu Ft Friable Non-Friable TS SOP AMP PF 22 Asbestos Bulk Sample Data Sheet 5.1.19 ver 02.01 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 a Sample Location TURNSTONa 1322 Space Park Dr.,Suite A-155 Diagram Houston,Texas 77058 Project Name: Stevens Water Treatment Plant TS Job No: C20-0322 TS Associate John Ideas Unit/Location: High Service Building/Clear Well Date: 10/13/2020 Cont.Supervisor: Brice Thomas Contractor: LNV Inc. Job scope Lead Bulk Sampling 3 1 4 2 High Service to Building 0 0 Clear Well 0 0 N26 27 TS SOPA PF 16 Sample Location Diagram 100 5.1.19 Rev 2.1 28 Note: Sample 26,27,28 were sampled for asbestos DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 StandardTURNSITONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite A-155 Operating ston Texas 77058 P g �i�u���u��,�������wi��u. r�ir����o fl �.r����;:�����a�,o�°�. INCi.r��n�°� ' Procedures Lead Bulk Sample Data Sheet TS Project No: C20-0322 Client:LNV Inc. Project Location: Stevens Water Treatment Plant unit: High Service Pump BLDG #1 Type of Bulk Sample Collected: 8 Paint Chip ❑ TCLP ❑ Other: Date: 10/13/2020 Sample No: C20-0322-101320-1 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Blue Qty >1 (LF/SF) Sample Southeast of Clear Well, Please see map provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-2 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Blue I Qty >1 (LF/SF) Sample Southeast pipe on Clear Well, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-3 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Blue Qty >1 I (LF/SF) Sample 48" pipe Northeast of High Service Building, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-4 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Yellow I Qty I>1 (LF/SF) Sample Northeast of High Service Building, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample Collector/Date: John IdeuS 10/13/2020 Page 1,,,,,, of,3,,,, DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 StandardTURNSITONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite A-155 Operating ston Texas 77058 P g �i�u���u��,�������wi��u. r�ir����o fl �.r����;:�����a�,o�°�. INCi.r��n�°� ' Procedures Lead Bulk Sample Data Sheet TS Project No: C20-0322 Client:LNV Inc. Project Location: Stevens Water Treatment Plant unit: High Service Pump BLDG #1 Type of Bulk Sample Collected: N Paint Chip ❑ TCLP ❑ Other: Date: 10/13/2020 Sample No: C20-0322-101320-5 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Tan / Red Qty >1 (LF/SF) Sample Concrete paint under pumps, Please see map provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-6 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Maroon I Qty >1 (LF/SF) Sample Inside High Service Building, South side on wall, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-7 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Grey/ Orange Qty >1 I (LF/SF) Sample Inside High Service Building, South side on Structural Beams, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-8 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Light Blue I Qty I>1 (LF/SF) Sample Inside High Service Building on wire panels, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good N Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample Collector/Date: John IdeuS 10/13/2020 Page 2..... of.3.... DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 StandardTURNSITONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite A-155 Operating ston Texas 77058 P g �i�u���u��,�������wi��u. r�ir����o fl �.r����;:�����a�,o�°�. INCi.r��n�°� ' Procedures Lead Bulk Sample Data Sheet TS Project No: C20-0322 Client:LNV Inc. Project Location: Stevens Water Treatment Plant unit: High Service Pump BLDG #1 Type of Bulk Sample Collected: 8 Paint Chip ❑ TCLP ❑ Other: Date: 10/13/2020 Sample No: C20-0322-101320-9 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Yellow I Qty I>1 (LF/SF) Sample Inside High Service Building on window cranks, Please see map provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-10 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Green I Qty I>1 (LF/SF) Sample 2" Piping Inside High Service Building, Southeast side, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-0 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Black Qty >1 I (LF/SF) Sample Outside of High Service Building on the South Side, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample No: C20-0322-101320-100 Substrate Material:Metal Color/Layers: Peach I Qty I>1 (LF/SF) Sample Outside on the clear well foundation, Please See Map Provided Location: Condition: ❑ Good 8 Peeling ❑ Chalking ❑ Other: Sample Collector/Date: John IdeuS 10/13/2020 Page 3,,,,, of,3,,,, DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 2: Laboratory Analytical Results DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision m , I 0CPAS1 Lab An Independent Laboratory Providing Reliable Analysis with Professionalism and Honesty ASBESTOS BULK ANALYSIS REPORT Date: October 20, 2020 Turnstone EH & S, Inc. (Corpus Christi) Report: 5620-4821 C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc. / Brice Thomas This document shall be considered a duly signed original report of the results obtained from the analyses performed. All analyses are done within government guidelines and regulations. 10 Gary R. Simmons Laboratory Manager Lab Comments on Project: N/A Analytical results and reports are generated by Apex Precision Analytical Services at the request of and for the use of the person or entity(client)named on such report. Result,reports or copies of same will not be released by Apex Precision Analytical Services to any third party without the written request from client. These results only repesent the materials submitted. Supporting laboratory documentation is available upon request. This report cannot be used to represent conditions at any other location, date or time and does not imply that this space is free from these or any other contaminants. No responsibility or liability is assumed for the manner in which these results are used or interpreted. This must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any government agency of the United States.Apex Precision Analytical Services reserves the right to dispose of all samples after a period of thirty(30)days,according to all state and federal guidelines,unless otherwise specified. Page 1 of 8 306 W. Edgewood Dr.,Suite D, Friendswood,TX 77546 www.apasi.net Office(281)648-9918 1 Fax(281)648-9595 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-11 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-01A Black I Material I Fibrous l Chrysotile 5% Fibrous Glass 2% Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Flashing I black tar I South of building 5620-4821-01B Black I Material I Fibrous l Chrysotile 5% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material C20-0322-101320-12 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-02A Black I Material I Fibrous I Chrysotile 5% Fibrous Glass 2% Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Flashing I black tar I South of building 5620-4821-02B Black I Material I Fibrous I Chrysotile 5% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material C20-0322-101320-13 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-03A Black I Material I Fibrous l Chrysotile 5% Fibrous Glass 2% Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Flashing I black tar I South of building NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 2 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-13 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-03B Black I Material I Fibrous l Chrysotile 5% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Flashing I black tar I South of building C20-0322-101320-14 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-04 Gray I Material I onFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Bride mortar West of building C20-0322-101320-15 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-05 Gray I Material I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Bride mortar East of building C20-0322-101320-16 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-06 Gray I Material I onFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Bride mortar middle of building C20-0322-101320-17 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-07 Light Grey I Caulking I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Window caulking I West side NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 3 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-18 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-08 Light Grey I Caulking I NonFkbrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Window caulldng I East side C20-0322-101320-19 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-09 Light Grey I Caulking I NonFkbrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Window caulldngIEast side C20-0322-101320-20 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-10 White I Material I Fibrous I Chrysotile 3% None Detected Material Homogeneous Material Location:Door filler I around door C20-0322-101320-21 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-11 White I Material I Fibrous I Chrysotile 3% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Window filler I around West window C20-0322-101320-22 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-12 White I Material I Fibrous I Chrysotile M sotile 3% None Detected ateral Material Homogeneous Material Location:Window filler I around East window NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 4 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-23 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-13 Black I Sealant I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Vent sealant I South of building C20-0322-101320-24 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-14 Black I Sealant I onFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Vent sealant I South of building C20-0322-101320-25 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-15 Black I Sealant I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Vent sealant I South of building C20-0322-101320-26 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-16 Tan,Off White I Material I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Foundation I North C20-0322-101320-27 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-17 Tan,0ffWhite I Material I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Foundation I middle NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 5 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-28 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-18 Tan,0ff White I Material I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Foundation I South C20-0322-101320-29 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-19 Gray I Material I onFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Pump foundation I East side C20-0322-101320-30 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-20 Gray I Material I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Pump foundation I middle C20-0322-101320-31 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-21 Gray I Material I onFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Pump foundation I East side C20-0322-101320-32 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-22A Green I Ceramic Tile I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Aqua tile and grout I West side NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 6 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-32 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-22B Grey I Grout I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Aqua tile and grout I West side C20-0322-101320-33 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-23A Green I Ceramic Tile I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Aqua tile and grout I West side 5620-4821-23B Grey I Grout I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material C20-0322-101320-34 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-24A Green I Ceramic Tile I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Aqua tile and grout I East side 5620-4821-24B Grey I Grout I NonFibrous I None Detected None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 7 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Apex Precision Analytical Services. Inc. PASI306 W. Edgewood Dr., Suite D Lab Friendswood,TX, 77546 PLM (Bulk)-Asbestos Analysis Report-Visual ID (EPA Method 600/11ti93-116 Visual Area Estimation) Turnstone EH&S,Inc.(Corpus Christi) Report Number: 5620-4821 226 Enterprize Parkway,Suite 116 Report Date: October 20,2020 Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Collection Date: October 13,2020 361-289-2510 Date Received: October 15,2020 Contact:Sergio Sanchez/Luis Hernandez Turn-around time 72 Hour Job ID/Site: C20-0322/Stevens Water Treatment Plant/LNV Inc./Brice Thomas Lab Sample Asbestos Non-Asbestos Client Sample Unit Line/ Color/Description/Fibrous/ Unit P&ID/ISO# HA# Number Content Fiber Matrix Number Section Equip# (by layer) NonFibrous/Homogeneity Type&% Type&% C20-0322-101320-35 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-4821-25 Black I Mastic Wrap I Fibrous I Chrysotile 20% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Blade mastic on pipe West of building C20-0322-101320-36 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-26 Black I Mastic Wrap I Fibrous I Chrysotile 20% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Blade mastic on pipe West of building C20-0322-101320-37 NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA 5620-0821-27 Black I Mastic Wrap I Fibrous I Chrysotile 20% None Detected Binding Homogeneous Material Location:Blade mastic on pipe West of building NVLAP Lab Code:200633-0 PLM Page 8 of 8 TDSHS Asbestos License#:30-0312 PLM/PCM 9/1/2015 Form 101 Rev 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Third Party 'harp ofCustody TURNSTONE 1322 Space Park Dr,Suite AA 55 �, am �, emnwummn 'te .� 77058 Apex leu°tujut#d 1"Uaumu:a � S.uu¢ue Day 24 I-la;uurs, Standard 13 Days] Apply S uroupl Cu.t �dC�1'ut u]uAuu�:t 0 V Ap ly pcuLai) F s � 1 tCc��� G i� a�ped yethe r,ra �V � PlC Contact ����on "hone#: d a 82-946-Luis Hernandez 36 1 2 Special Instructions mit results to lak,hernanaer a arnsollncclaw.aam u cindi.esro, ms"nsioncehN.com write sample descraa6on & l(wamtion on sample,m"Wits sample Thile Volume Nammmataer Sample Description, r.,tucamtmmamu Allatlyte 0 I AO— 3 µ wla m We 4 Nr 1" J" r Ecsi 0-( a l< Mmm" �'c 7 y NM m" �. aLj IK" 0j r�)Jzr mw P � � a al o ads Date/Tinge: Sampled 13,- Relinquished y. Accepted y4 ...e t" .M �114 . Cr VAR USE 0N11 Lab Ref No� Ana�yst IS SOP AMP Pf ?dl"third Parry Chain cad"Custody y-w-l9 Rev 2.C DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 A L SI /, 20-Oct-2020 Luis R. Hernandez Jr. Turnstone EH&S 1322 Space Park Drive Suite A-155 Houston, TX 77058 Re: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc./Brice Work Order: 20100552 Dear Luis, ALS Environmental received 12 samples on 15-Oct-2020 11:50 AM for the analyses presented in the following report. The analytical data provided relates directly to the samples received by ALS Environmental and for only the analyses requested. QC sample results for this data met laboratory specifications. Any exceptions are noted in the Case Narrative, or noted with qualifiers in the report or QC batch information. Should this laboratory report need to be reproduced, it should be reproduced in full unless written approval has been obtained from ALS Laboratory Group. Samples will be disposed in 30 days unless storage arrangements are made. The total number of pages in this report is 10. If you have any questions regarding this report, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, ,lit LL�ti VF/�Y.�it/ti Electronically approved by:Danielle Strasinger Danielle Strasinger Project Manager Report of Laboratory Analysis n 1', PUP�,,� /,l,"j'1' 1'% r r,1 r ,r I;: 1- ✓�i.rr, /, •)!1}i ,iii r.�'1111�, ,rl 1 mtma r m;�wp"(111-ISV�l ,,y;r DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ALS Environmental Date: 20-Oct-20 Client: Turnstone EH&S Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc./Brice Work Order Sample Summary Work Order: 20100552 Lab Samy ID Client Samole ID Matrix Tap- Number Collection Date Date Received Hold 20100552-01 C20-0322-101320-1 Blue paint/12" Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El pipe/SE of founda 20100552-02 C20-0322-101320-2 Blue Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El paint/Southeast/See map 20100552-03 C20-0322-101320-3 Blue paint/48" Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El pipe 20100552-04 C20-0322-101320-4 Yellow paint/on Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El hand wheel 20100552-05 C20-0322-101320-5 Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El Tan/Red/Concrete under pumps 20100552-06 C20-0322-101320-6 Maroon Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El paint/Inside/South 20100552-07 C20-0322-101320-7 Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El Grey/Orange/Inside/Structural Be 20100552-08 C20-0322-101320-8 Light Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El blue/Inside/Wire panels 20100552-09 C20-0322-101320-9 Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El Yellow/Inside/Window Cranks 20100552-10 C20-0322-101320-10 Green paint/2" Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El piping/Inside/SE 20100552-11 C20-0322-101320-0 Black Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El paint/Outside/South of bui 20100552-12 C20-0322-101320-100 Peach Paint 10/13/2020 10/15/2020 11:50 El paint/Outside on foundat Sample Summary Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Date: 20-Oct-20 LX J►J lJll V 11 V111111.111.C11 Client: Turnstone EH&S Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc./Bric Case Narrative Work Order: 20100552 ALS is an EPA recognized NLLAP laboratory for lead paint, soil, and dust wipe analyses uner its AIHA-LAP accreditation. - ENV-60106- "Determination of Trace Metals in Solution by Inductively Coupled Plasma- Atomic Emission Spectroscopy by EPA Method 6010B Non-VAP." The U.S. Government defines "lead-based paint" as any "paint, surface coating" that contains lead equal to, or exceeding, one milligram per square centimeter, or 0.5% by weight. ALS is an EPA recognized NLLAP laboratory for lead paint, soil, and dust wipe analyses under its AIHA-LAP accreditation. Case Narrative Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ALS Environmental Date: 20-Oct-20 Client: Turnstone EH&S Work Order: 20100552 Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc Lab ID: 20100552-OIA Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-1 Blue paint/12" pipe/SE of founda Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.00073 0.00029 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:20 PM Lab ID: 20100552-02A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-2 Blue paint/Southeast/See map Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.10 0.00027 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:24 PM Lab ID: 20100552-03A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-3 Blue paint/48" pipe Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.39 0.00031 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:29 PM Lab ID: 20100552-04A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-4 Yellow paint/on hand wheel Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.0017 0.00024 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:33 PM Lab ID: 20100552-05A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-5 Tan/Red/Concrete under pumps Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.019 0.00033 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:46 PM Note: AR Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ALS Environmental Date: 20-Oct-20 Client: Turnstone EH&S Work Order: 20100552 Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc Lab ID: 20100552-06A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-6 Maroon paint/Inside/South Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.21 0.00027 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:50 PM Lab ID: 20100552-07A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-7 Grey/Orange/inside/Structural Be Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 2.6 0.00022 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:54 PM Lab ID: 20100552-08A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-8 Light blue/Inside/Wire panels Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.23 0.00030 wt% 1 10/19/2020 01:59 PM Lab ID: 20100552-09A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-9 Yellow/Inside/Window Cranks Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.47 0.00031 wt% 1 10/19/2020 02:03 PM Lab ID: 20100552-10A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-10 Green paint/2" piping/Inside/SE Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.17 0.00027 wt% 1 10/19/2020 02:07 PM Note: AR Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ALS Environmental Date: 20-Oct-20 Client: Turnstone EH&S Work Order: 20100552 Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc Lab ID: 20100552-11A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-0 Black paint/Outside/South of bui Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.0050 0.00023 wt% 1 10/19/2020 02:12 PM Lab ID: 20100552-12A Collection Date: 10/13/2020 Client Sample ID: C20-0322-101320-100 Peach paint/Outside on foundat Matrix: PAINT Report Dilution Analyses Result Qual Limit Units Factor Date Analyzed LEAD PAINT BY ICP SW6010B Prep: SW3050B 10/19/20 10:51 Analyst: AZ Lead 0.12 0.00027 wt% 1 10/19/2020 02:16 PM Note: AR Page 3 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ALS Environmental Date: 20-Oct-20 Client: Turnstone EH&S QC BATCH REPORT Work Order: 20100552 Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV i Batch ID: 69589 Instrument ID ICP3 Method: SW6010B MBLK Sample ID: MBLK-69589-69589 Units:mg/Kg Analysis Date: 10/19/2020 12:41 PM Client ID: Run ID: ICP3_201019B SegNo:2331751 Prep Date: 10/19/2020 DF: 1 SPK Ref Control RPD Ref RPD Analyte Result PQL SPK Val Value %REC Limit Value %RPD Limit Qual Lead 2.826 3.0 J LCS Sample ID: LCS-69589-69589 Units:mg/Kg Analysis Date: 10/19/2020 12:58 PM Client ID: Run ID: ICP3_201019B SegNo:2331753 Prep Date: 10/19/2020 DF: 1 SPK Ref Control RPD Ref RPD Analyte Result PQL SPK Val Value %REC Limit Value %RPD Limit Qual Lead 3731 2.9 4309 0 86.6 68-99.2 0 MS Sample ID: 20100552-12A MS Units:mg/Kg Analysis Date: 10/19/2020 02:21 PM Client ID: C20-0322-101320-100 Peach Run ID: ICP3_201019B SegNo:2331770 Prep Date: 10/19/2020 DF: 1 paint/Outside on foundat SPK Ref Control RPD Ref RPD Analyte Result PQL SPK ValoREC Limit Value %RPD Uual Lead 2821 2.9 1965 1156 84.8 53.8-135 0 MSD Sample ID: 20100552-12A MSD Units:mg/Kg Analysis Date: 10/19/2020 02:25 PM Client ID: C20-0322-101320-100 Peach Run ID: ICP3_201019B SegNo:2331771 Prep Date: 10/19/2020 DF: 1 paint/Outside on foundat SPK Ref Control RPD Ref RPD Analyte Result PQL SPK ValoREC Limit Value %RPD Limit Qual Lead 2963 2.6 1701 1156 106 53.8-135 2821 4.89 20 The following samples were analyzed in this batch: 20100552-01A 20100552-02A 20100552-03A 20100552-04A 20100552-05A 20100552-06A 20100552-07A 20100552-08A 20100552-09A 20100552-10A 20100552-11A 20100552-12A Note: See Qualifiers Page for a list of Qualifiers and their explanation. QC Page: 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Date: 20-Oct-20 r11J IJ ■J11 I'll it it 111 t.11 LKl Client: Turnstone EH&S QUALIFIERS, Project: C20-0322 / Stevens Water Treatment Plant / LNV Inc ACRONYMS, UNITS WorkOrder: 20100552 Qualifier Description * Value exceeds Regulatory Limit a Not accredited B Analyte detected in the associated Method Blank above the Reporting Limit E Value above quantitation range H Analyzed outside of Holding Time J Analyte detected below quantitation limit n Not offered for accreditation ND Not Detected at the Reporting Limit O Sample amount is >4 times amount spiked P Dual Column results percent difference > 40% R RPD above laboratory control limit S Spike Recovery outside laboratory control limits U Analyzed but not detected above the MDL Acronym Description DUP Method Duplicate E EPA Method LCS Laboratory Control Sample LCSD Laboratory Control Sample Duplicate MBLK Method Blank MDL Method Detection Limit MQL Method Quantitation Limit MS Matrix Spike MSD Matrix Spike Duplicate PDS Post Digestion Spike PQL Practical Quantitaion Limit SDL Sample Detection Limit SW SW-846 Method Units Reported Description wt% QF Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Sample Receipt Checklist Client Name: TURNSTONEEH&S-HOUSTON Date/Time Received: 15-Oct-20 11:50 Work Order: 20100552 Received by: RDN Checklist completed by �❑ 15-Oct-20 Reviewed by: ❑H�❑�� � � 16-Oct-20 eSignature Date eSignature Date Matrices: paint Carrier name: FedEx Shipping container/cooler in good condition? Yes d❑ No ❑ Not Present ❑ Custody seals intact on shipping container/cooler? Yes ❑ No ❑ Not Present ❑d Custody seals intact on sample bottles? Yes ❑ No ❑ Not Present ❑d Chain of custody present? Yes d❑ No ❑ Chain of custody signed when relinquished and received? Yes d❑ No ❑ Chain of custody agrees with sample labels? Yes d❑ No ❑ Samples in proper container/bottle? Yes d❑ No ❑ Sample containers intact? Yes d❑ No ❑ Sufficient sample volume for indicated test? Yes d❑ No ❑ All samples received within holding time? Yes d❑ No ❑ Container/Temp Blank temperature in compliance? Yes d❑ No ❑ Sample(s) received on ice? Yes ❑ No ❑d Temperature(s)/Thermometer(s): Cooler(s)/Kit(s): Date/Time sample(s) sent to storage: Water-VOA vials have zero headspace? Yes No L No VOA vials submitted ❑� Water- pH acceptable upon receipt? Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A ❑d pH adjusted? Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A ❑d pH adjusted by: Login Notes: Client Contacted: Date Contacted: Person Contacted: Contacted By: Regarding: Comments: CorrectiveAction: SRC Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Third Party C h ta i n 0f, Civitody, TURN ,soraNE 1 322 Spa(!e Mark I)r,Suite A-155 ENIvIRONMENW,HEALTH AND SAFETHaIRastoi%,Te%as 77058 .............. ........ .......... ..........e ............ .............. ........................................r"cl qj ........./.......... .............. 11'roject N Jot)site/Unit, , 1?`�Ife0l S �,14, v,�?u nce- Vwjnq.S .............. ............. TtLIRgNAROUM)TIME EJ Same Day 24 Hours adard[3 Days] Apply Open Lab Fees INOIF .......... M" ........................... Date �Ntqnber'pf Samples,I Type of Sample Contact Person: Phone ............. ............ #: I.,uis Hernandez 832-946-3602 ........... Email, miggils to rilm�'I ftsherr/",ItIn rgs s III onech sx*m& Write j w ............... ——----- 111 Sample Sawpie� F)escripfioriI, (�eajoj jjjj Number Analyte ......... or mi .............— 3 - LA. , 11,111111 Ir , 13)4 A( ................. . ................ ....... .................. . ................... ............................... qlu Zg, ........... ...... 7 . ........... .dry ......Ane ;1 c z/_ . . .... .............. .............. ........... ............ ............. )7 ..... e _411 Ax ................ . .................. ........... ...............................................f ......................... Datel Time: Sampled By,- Relinquished 13Aceq:Aeid"!"I'l ,e .................... .......................... ............... ------- s ................ ................... 1AB('SE ONLA' Lab Ref No: ......... AnMyslkl 20 T'h i—rd P a-r"t YCh,2"in of( Iy 5-kI9 Rev 2,11 DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Appendix 3: Photographs r DocuSlgn Envelope ID D247EF3F 422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 r /rh r I qow ,r i 11 1. fI w� tri � 1 uF Dry ca, �nS a �w b u 1 , llr r m "ti, � rr be l a nk 4➢ r �r� ��'„ ,,, �`�� �� 0/1 I F I fdd� �/� iir � r rrr u�4 rr�a� �P�r�j•� :ri ,.r'�� r/��/�//��� ,r, `; ��;,� �r % I� ,„,e;,, + iN r w; i i n f l/ > r sir / � r uvw u , U IL / IIUIp IU U / III � c III w V U �IIUIIJ�IIIIUIU�IIIIUIUU�I�IIIIUuo / DocuSi n 9 Envelo e ID: D247EF3F 422C 4309-A53E 3329809FD8D0 p /%, uuu uuuuuuuuuuuuumiiiiiuu Am / r VVV 1 r r, s ,rii l(M m I Illll�l r / I 1 Illus �I+ III I DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 J fJ V J , r f G Jf r r ( / r l f fir ;' ' V, ;� ✓li/���//%' /: H�Ir r �,�.' /u '(;.� � "M"� •., � � i� 'II � » ,�y r':� ". „f, //Y� ,��� '��, � j".;t �//J ���'"� rl ,' �r 4rW r m"� 4 ✓� ,�%; af� uti �. ar /i% �W�r n'�I'Ihli II (w, �+.. I �",�,. �,Y/t/� wr, n' 7%' 6� " u � V w , l I 04 I + r J j, m -4, , / I • .1 q/1 NO' " %p0// i /, j viz IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 TOW r rr 1 of , �a 19 r/ f p 0 Y l I w' P''-5 „1% DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 . � � I �Iluuu � I IIVllllfld"Ihdlfi iN�li a, it r � 14 1 'p - r d IN I r ' r � % o rrl uumuuuuuuuuluuiluuuuuuVVV it / d wr:/ ( N u 1' i r r r/ m u' J r uuul••• rf P V tIIlVillll �'��, r WY i r r r r � � r 1 r r lr /r, //✓o,/� ,r ///,/./ri ,,,,, r,� rrr.!%/ r ,, ./r ✓ m, � �. riW / � r. ,,. /. ////...� / r./r r f //.c,r r ,,., r rr, r / / ✓( r r r /i r/, r r r � rr ✓ /r./ /, / 1 rr, 7, r�i i � Iv rgp%r...Y � '-" !°, ,,, �,, t((W� 1 •, ,� /ir�r//�/r/��/ /% �f�� /r/ /r r i 1 frr nJl it o/J/„Oi J r x roir" �� l���/�%/�9�11����/�fairi/if/iiiurJ r✓iii/// // t ;,, ',r� `� �F ,,,,;,,' �� �, /i ,,! �� �"; I r ri �l����fr,��/l rr/ir/ r % „; „„ r W ,� r+Nnti �w r ,, /✓ � ` , All �r/��{'�/�//i iii///%i//ir,;, w� /� aY: �, „ �l,x �, r rr "�, �a�Yr��J�J" arr / ,t xo,�/r✓, i;i m //�� /�O /rill//�/////%// r✓i; � �///ir/' r /% , / r r ' �..' ��/ p�/i/i����%/xiiiiii�r ,"r � � 'r'" ,;, �,�ai /%%i�x///t/�/�✓imJ /,���i�i��� ,��, �4�/��r�rll�/,�I� r'����Jr r����; , 1 1 �r/j,r/�/�//�rill / i%w✓iiij/ii +^ I /ri a� % �/ /%%� r r ,HrJ r r/�a /i//lar/�� /i /%ii////i/ir,1✓r / y//n�J, �1%v � ! aA 9 III y9�7Kx ar r f 0 ii r, IGS / /err' r f IId , u' , / r .rrr �MM 11 I - a r v u/� �11 I f Y I f 1 r l I( %RAI,I (1DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F 422C 4309 A53E 3329809FD8D0 / f, Ff Jj '` � % � /( f✓ YV �//������r t r�� rr��f��� �///I%/��/ ��%/lel �"�,�, r / / r y 1✓'ia � r r/ L r ., M✓w,,' r � wMaNw��rs9ir a R I/ , � / Or � r ✓�U / �:°(�i/ilii "��l'°' ir/ J ,ray,,,,.r/✓r y � /r,�runr( /� ,✓, «�f � �;�'Ifou;� 1 i, ' i' / '+' ���,,i„ r i,:;rr/>irlYlr/��'�,,. I'✓l qr�r ,,, ';�, f/%� %%' 7 ,i, rr' ,.�� .1 �. ,,, ✓� ,. �,� �//.. ,gip✓���/,, � '✓ �,�%//�� �:li/ / ,- o , ,r,,, / �„ / / /�%/ ✓ ,r/////ri �, i r � r � /J ff�✓ �fj�� y<,N /. r lr ✓,�' //,� �/ly��,p, h /r✓/�r i,! � �� ,fir �rr ��'��/��/ j� '%,✓ ���� /����` "✓/�� u.Yb f r rN�Gri r n" ri/�//�� �� �/ ��/ r �/ �'//% ��/r�r ��rGYr �io '�!Y � � p yr���Ua'ly✓r1 / l/jl�'l� /,/�r�%�" �� �� r�� r!! $rM• U r A���i ii'rrav�Y�()����m r , I V 411"'ilk'1 I II I I l d sur Ali �„ ','/r �// �I //////✓ '� � vvv I I���V� � r W Ur 1 a P u Urlr� //���/ i � ,,,✓j �r m1/, I „1.� r H�/,I;✓lwl1,���1/%�(fn l N r ��l .I;' , VIII V�I IIIIIIIII /�j � l✓, r �Ul�(,u�, Ur, /�� 'raj r ' N;JIIf/� ��i r/�� 1'a" �' �„ �a ",a �8r III �. I � / yl �w r✓r„`��irrlrif yi J�%�. � I ,. v., r VV I s II 1111111 `I �I I��I�IIII� ' >!1VY ��iiii�/� �r Ilfr %� I �. v�I,��q�+IN"r�&�'�/yay„ ��'/ E1 �f1"� ��� r�✓�/ir/a r �� �� / jj��l�� if �� ✓o � yr Jr1q r' ,��i y/ d i r '� N✓ ��� � � / +� abs � ✓ � �y��Ux� ✓ ru ' ��ri 'ellllr / ��J/'ii/��, �, ry✓ � %f✓G' C r ��ir�r r 9�✓ tyi /r1 r%ii/j✓�I/� �fi'l ✓' � /� rHi /r/�l�/ � �/ ""1 G, �i / r / 'i r' ��ii%i ✓ r ri 'eU " '�aq /il ✓li r �� / � �'l �r� �����J(1�VI�V� � � w a`frr ' rl Jwilli w rE Try j"� //I I � /dl rl��ay.%"1 ✓�,dl/�" X, A l ///i°� /' ;� G/ i// / / wfr ✓r rr'f' /��'Y w n U�w rY!ul�/r rI1;'Ua r,o��'// f � � ,rJl l��/ w�(/ r f h r;✓ P r �''d ,r m+rr/s �� ii �,/�' �`✓ // VV1�r ✓�� ✓r 1 '�`�� �)1 w w rwk r tl�y kaM m, aka'l r �lr f/. w ' ' r✓/ ,lr 1��i�/ � 7V y U����r� '��,�1 r ( � � �a/ �r ✓"(t n w �1w, `� ✓ �� ��% mgr IdGo�r, U` iia����, /�� r', ���u2 „/A ✓� �( ����� � & '"�°r "All �� l/r I.. �' l/ 4 rY/ P�f/!/✓r f a' /r� �� 3 �� Y / ✓( t ! 5 t �u r< I ^r, � rli�l � i / i r ✓ �t! 4r�,, / �(l I� r�in�d r�ll✓YP�� I I 9 ( r// r✓ �� rYx�„!V v rl, r /1 r G/ w�// t ✓ I vi � �I //1 �,i kllr�' /�yy ar���w� � � � a y ��r/� 1 r,' rr� � � r'" U ��' �� ) P� 1 'w°'✓ 'lllia r/l;/✓..� V�," �nr r ,r� �,�nU U. a e6... � ✓ P>�,, I � J e rl � � 'h'*' p1�1� �' I �,�.'/ �. Ii✓��yw'�i�ll�/Py�:/�Ywr�/illi JJ�r� �.r r ', �� a �r ,v, .I ���'rrl n�U fir" Y,,.,w; � f ✓ � pr ✓ '„'U;.1'U ( � �, d/i(17��'r'r"'r'rr^wr✓✓r Irl j�Jlti�ir��,���I'l � Xiyy r �, ,W1 �� d, ' 1/�/illi��✓ �1 u / / E; � (",,,I v<1 va"`�J 1 i y� �� r /rohll✓w� '�l U � 1 f, illy I 11 r I I� � � i�rJY,�r�✓ t/U Ur";'�rr /a,�aT/✓/I/ err � �, 'I IGrr�`I"I��I 'IIYIVI��� V II ��% y, y� '% ' ✓/r �J%,,/✓ �.� ' rr d%Ir'�,,�ir�r I rl ���, � iI/ per � '`( � y� ro1 da ul� �; u f � 0 r I u u y 1 � r.; r �, r�, r�, �r�rfr�f/y /r ,A! �,lr aN �,. ai,� �, r ti;�'✓i�) r ,q �w�,� � r,I,Y,. Q a ,f'�' l '�IJ��q", 'l � (�i l�w�' a,���,% r �" IBF w N), 'X� I �` //,, �'� r„y,� �r ;i���`✓�`if, i�t � iI✓ 1J” ,,Y;r, �,,. �GH l//,/ ,��/ ��>' ✓�. ',�'...)�.,6. � I /�r,,;b !''�;}�orb ) v„J� "��r ;a �r.,i i � ✓r r / , » �„r�,1 �l��I�al';, � �,�"a.��a/a�>',, rr � I�rtyl,V�`/�rA✓ a;r��;,4 ° �i ! ,�wr/,� , �`////l �rll� (' a"r,����,�� ��. ,. / /, "r Y ir. �` �/,�r T✓/✓r1II�r(, ;n rx�, IW �/,JY wrr r'r„ /%.. ''m � �Y.✓/6�v�1�� 1 �� Vyr,rgD( „ /(p rc V �, �,"wn ;,�/�J rr 'I � .'Y��i�,rj /r�c: a..'� W�ti�';m yr' ` ro „( i J�/" �✓'r✓1, r�r /�is ..J 6 Tq ' r � � rf 9� � ° r r ✓ rJ�Y/ all 'Y!/ ✓ �, ', / r 10Yir P, Y ✓ ��� p/ DocuSi9 n Envelope ID D 247EF 3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 r of ,i,� i J� l%/n'� �� � ✓fl J �� ;, e f f'� WA r I_ nv ry oil ��uViti4��'�Vj, �?) //, ,'" Jig M�f��/girl/rr 11 All/1�yrirrrr lr� r��rel��s�f,� >) b�,",� ; �, , �°�h d�y,�✓f y�frr��j�;i,u�°� y;�,r�nw,� r�,,°� n�i✓1���.:., l � ✓� 11�)�„ 1 / ,✓arc/f„roi� d��,�f�, �' , I '�u��r '?�,"%rj�Ir��n✓���z �"'%Jt /''�,1 +,,� �� � ,./� „n/ % J,' r'ai 1 %fr,r; v � ,� �%��� �✓,Y `l✓6n >� f'G�i�✓fir✓�e��� �i�l� /!T �,„ ,,,,,,r /p ,F.r�?//1 �,-, � r ��r! � /, ,`�/� n �,✓� %<, i!'i, r � � � �r , C,�"r,��e�/�' ����� //���,h��� , J, -;� / � rJ ,�r /ir(„��� n r � W�� �r. „�o till ,::K ti^ ,!... �� � l J✓� °` G�y'"�'rlrr”'�..yi F��,/fyYy �1 Y�✓���f( �rt �y��� �� W„ ,r,t�,� r YWfWuu,. IL, Fkr a ,.H,� �,/ ,���'G, ✓�'„ r A: n+ �ri, �/1 uii.�� � i ih �,' r,/t ?, 'dYy/r� ,�„f ;,W�,.rr ” �^,� 1- ,, � /e;i/. o u9""�° ,. /�,. (0 ��„� Y �"tt%:� � !�,ri �� ;� ," ..WS �b ��dy,,.,� � r ,:j �nf jrk �yi��✓i'd�� �" ;A.r njyY,`I�°` n'�k'��'� ,. %�I � �' r�y. / d. ,1%.�H✓G9 /�y Z'n/i f ! ,[ r,,,r, r.,,I��fii �J, 19�„ IJ„ ,l �, ��r�W?�IWI���i n lY; f,,i� d �;r'nSYt��+�m�� �e� Y %� f ' SIV ✓ , aril i➢hy Jn I71 d � n ���" n '1d wit, r f n„ roof iffiffill ff I a of a, x y -o r " y✓ � � �"�'� l„� `�° ` � '” ^ , � lei/tr�ii//;�i��/�,y���iirr /�✓/✓y//C✓✓ii���N� ✓�w��� ,1 �,, �a �, lh"n' W ,� W, �, � / ��i i I ' r �/� rk' '/%!�f � ��✓ r `al J 'W �,n ^n�� � , d � /�%�r'r/ ver✓, irn '� / fin; ,f1/,. �r r',- � � �l �;,�4��' �; �✓� t �'�� �✓/✓'%1'��n / , raw r , u'N o' � ! � � d r � ✓ r r 1 y r �e � ✓ i h n✓ W" f� 4� b ,�fp ;✓ r � '�'rf Y✓° � ;fir ru �0 ( 1 l✓4/i'/K / /// ii,./ rr f � � �° � h � y 1 r�J�i��rnva���w�x�����rr��✓�r� m f � jW �vI ��� � n041y r�i Ar raivi i v lv of � W r �, f '�j r w,✓, l' �'^� <ti�i „,; � .� � ,w,f�,/ i f lWi/fr�(ui,',%/ n � / rbrorronavraW q ✓ 4 0, 001 91./ r r ;`f /Y r;, i✓�/J i c r,, f r'w f r, yf,..,1&/„�, '' ruk J M �Wwnr!'du!!auk y / f d a , f roP�r�!W^tir Jwrta - 1 f. r i� � 'Y �` �m a✓,E�ri; � �F, y Y �� f •w ,r. cuSig n Envelope ID D247EF3F- 422C-4309-A111� 353E- 809FD8D0 Do ✓ l �SYtYi, r r n r �N��a �✓ ✓YW� � ry N �a,r�i� ,� , i fir,,; r �r r dela ���� �1� r a k '" p � p" ✓ ✓Id,,� �Yi ri � � �.� r'✓r✓� ��� �hi � , u i N/a � a ,��? d��iu'oY�"���y� ��J � � ✓� �� ra��, r ��� bb"fEr �r� "�� p � ✓w�f"� �� i � r U � ✓a �rel i i d i +� a M` � R r ����,� r ',f��a i� ✓�; � �� m ��� � ✓��' ��. � p. � � ✓r�✓N'ry`f r u Y �, �', :" )r 1'9�i � ,",��w �o r»i� i I tl � Y`bw ✓.A 7 � I ✓, ��4F rw� ��y��d J ,�� r ��" � m�'rCl'p Mrd '� p nA N��^. ���1�/rrm , F ,�' ��;t; �� F� �� `�✓ r� �kf� �11l�d'��^� r� p��r ��v l� �� r r �����1' t �� ��J,4 m�i l ,,�"i �`YiY a d !✓ d7 i ��!1 r W�,�d� „ti r� � t I� f!���'1>; ,�' � r.H�*r g r Ir �+�M✓ i � r�r �rf�`` rrr��jU � I�r ✓' 'r � "c � ?^n41•' rr;✓I,, �ai, �ru••�m(nn�° ��✓�,j rrr7 � �.,. '✓N" r� �,;"r"'h"��If ��" I i f�!�r�""'"� �r�� ����1b1 �P r�7 N ` %�� � xr �a��ilr, � ✓� ;r� �yJF r° ,i �J t�" �� �l� �� �Y��y r �� �r �� �✓ �r���%� �� i, r/ Id Dd, ��:�'✓(� r✓. 'pf '��/I "n !/r' I F`C "� ✓ �u�4� �N a P�Id, r� Grr✓ `; r A, ��r m l���U�� ��� ,� '�rr�✓P 7�". ��v'- r�✓xN�-d ��✓"��r�r�✓� ✓��di��:��„��,��,��p I�Y1l�, ,G��r, ��� � '�Y�l,'�Yyj""� ,�� {1 �� ` .� "✓.°,�Q�i� l y,.,. Y W �r / r� +ru�'�� �ff'"� ���✓'� yore r�✓p�����N�r ��.� rI `". 4 � 'A(0 I �; J ✓NV r H lli r✓ � �1,y @� R p ✓'' ��"� ti„;' ,�`F � fy��,�ju, +u �i � � y�r"�i ✓���� f r��,✓�✓�✓rr rr°,,y ✓ rr �` j,(Y^' r'� ' J+. i „� +fl„� """�"rd` » eft ���✓ d�;,1 N ✓ ✓�N✓ i '��"�„r� �" i0 r � a✓I r�✓'� �"Jr��� 1✓� 1��`� �l✓ r�rl � �r � ! � l V�,� w Vi rwra r ��,✓� � � r,v. !rr � �l ti;" � r 1'� � ��:. ✓✓yrs Jr � pry r,,:k r l �r>� � 1�� '¢,�, � u r ,b ' y�, i r� o r� �� �� r� l,, r,�- rr , W f �dy 6 �/ r;����Y �,�r �� � ✓ �`u r w r �` "�✓r/,�r �",� u ai(✓ 1. N lame ! r� �' l�, �` � f' N, ✓ � r f r �' v0 ✓r J," r � � �� � t°! / ✓ t� ✓r r„r� r �t� � i �' ''a G�'� Y✓r N i /r �R -r ,� 7f / '� ''� �i Iii l !� i ,�Y 1p'� ;✓�' °Y���„ r, ,rr ,,� � i ✓✓ � � 6v d� Y im � f t' A �r l' I : y r ed{ / �� /Yl�) ✓ e.., yl b r ,� p�r ��! rD N it r �)� � 8" if ✓ �/ / I �r G r r"; ( i I �t� + Wray 'r ✓ D� N , , ���"` �✓�+ d' r v "/r✓r��fYr ,rel fir" �, �,✓�_' �r`� lr � �� "��; , �yi � N, ,� 1 W, ' A k✓r��r � �,�,!%�r'�1� ��'%q,i�r r, i,. I /r �". �,,,, v� / �„�i ✓✓rp -j� ✓ �I N' r' '� V� �� dl i � Y'b J P �>o"l kii✓,�q2 pry f �!' ✓�i f.� i �� -�,,,r4,y r"�a/f��"A/: t ���i 5ir( ��i l r�''- ,r°��i `d'p�llf / ,� � fi N'�}��fll,Sr %��°�� �;/i,l� �'�r � r �, r�' �J �� °✓ ✓!��-� ��,�a��,��✓ �Ni�"i`b i�tlr✓ b�r y r",� ii 1 ,4� �"..u�r� � d<a� V�� � r'��,J 1JyN ✓ r��� ,r,/,V r - r �r 9 �i��,yNl �N,li,,.�1`�l PW rr. N 'N NJF /il�f'! .;�I l�r✓ � ��i � �✓ � ��� �,;.i 7����""����5�; ��)Y✓l�rld�ri'�r��RS��,Y/r�i" �r���� � r ,. !(�r�G,/vy,� r I��e,,.��l�`,". � r ` �„,�� r” r ',.r, ,�,✓ ," ✓✓ ,, rr r„J�,D�„ �'�`uu�N✓yr��6�� N � I. ;,r ✓ r r✓',� '�✓r„ r C .ti., `ur^ A r INr Def v� y r��� +� �,v,.: r W!c°,. r�!Y,,, � ��,,,, c 1 V>Y rrry �' 1� ���r,�✓ Ire��r r �� r ��r� i �"��wYli�� r �, r; �Nf /r f �e i a ! ✓i tl �' i r. VAS' :.I f P�'��J'SPA r r ,,�',e f/ ✓✓Wr i�/ ✓�W✓// /l.. .. rte v r � � Np/� .� � l�✓a��f�✓✓ o� Oi�'y�'� �r�� i� ,rn� iI✓ c. ,��dr�',%i ���' ;� :- ✓ �Y, "/Na 11 i rc J! 1 �,r r m✓�A 7 i rr �^i r.r i � Y ✓ r si �,�, n'✓ �� l�� ,?,irk',R "�! ��� � �:�� v�{�>,l„� fir�fr Nor�Yrr� �'y � r 4�ly,� u ” ' � �'!! ` r ' �' �r !i i rk i� ,��Iyk�!✓�� l y�f ✓�, +��r 7�i9� �r 41�1k'✓ "Jli �l i '�P��/ >y m Y % �� Y �, r.. i ✓ I� r ✓ Hr � h Y7,''/o R ,•.. ��♦�' r" ,u � t � ��r roN�,,✓u kw rr,/�l� �41"X�+��, �Vit/ r✓Y�, ��i'' I, r�,, '�` ( �1 j Ar �� � r'�!r (iwlr� r� o J<+r f r �� / v � rN' I✓r sir° w! a I Ii,..u. � 1 1 r�✓ Po ''� � � f w''r vr^r� ✓f F✓u� � V'i� b ui'G�✓,�✓Yj l rH '' �J � �, "� a;-� r� s;'f�m N,y� w�� (rm .I 0 �✓Y,",°o Y .r%'! �`��+ �� � Y ,,. �I � � � �! ` " � ,t r r %;Y/��� �Nrc d �Nr N+✓, ry f✓ ✓I i s p l � '✓ f '� U I ✓ r� � // �� l�� 11✓ r 14X�If a � k'rn� a ry �r��i 4✓)�?aN" i ✓(+/� i ✓ {�'�� rl r ����" {)G9fle'�r rFri✓% � r� ✓�`' r✓' V N �:, rr r NN r✓I° ��I`, r , r I � ✓��� � r,��' r �r riN ✓ I d � r�,N �'r'rrr ✓ �� �1N � r(,h'� 4 d Y �N ✓ro'w d fii�✓s✓ u�✓i a�vq� Jr i""0:iN�,��i � I � I����d �i�ls f N��d� I �r �, ( , r � i �)) r ��uG�}� � �'4+r rr� � r✓F�rrl«Yt rra i I ��� � ���� �i�lilii��Y�i i��W�������1 ��i���Att N� rN✓(ry,�Yi ,�E 7>r �'�;�' �l�r, r wi�lrr 7�'. k ov ,�; r n1 �" w:a / e ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 �j /�%��/�j � IIIIVVdVy� uu,I' iuiiu I' � Y� �I X11(( Ilm ;7 iii oii/% y ELI 4 I � .✓�/ . �,i. pie, �'�rct. 11 i Ir' rcurc ""Amu Y. i orz iii� �JU)��� Iii 11��IMUu Y�VI 91Ws<a 61ir li0 i' � DocuSlgn Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 NNNNNNINNN� �NNNNNN7NIu �NINfNNfINkNNNNdwNNNNI(NNNNNrrNNrNNNNANN�NNNrNNIN�NINNNy(NNNN 4(tNNYNNNNNN ��Yiuur k r / / r / rrr / rrrr r � ✓iii / r r/ r J / f I r/ r rf r r r r r" ✓ r r r ✓r �r r // /r/ ///,ri:. i r 'r ' ri„ /j/iii r ✓ r r ,./ �- , r r / 1, 1 ✓ r r , r / � // r9/..:/i/ Yr %//6 -/N/Ili rl f , /✓I I lrrj iii r H �r� l / / / r /� f/,,. r r r ' r r /',t/rr '///r %i r. rf r/ lflj(/N// .r}/ r//'�d � l/i� i/✓i/ ' '� � '�/ r / r r a 1 � / / r , ✓ �//iii/� %f%✓ J,O� r 1 / �/�, %r r �il/f ✓✓;,, bio// rt ri,�ff r/ ����/��� y~uuuuuuuuu ryii� yuuuuuuuuuuuui � u ' ����I/ hhuuuuutllllll ' i✓ J /irllr� � /i / rr/� l /, � �,e i 1 /�/✓��4j�/I�ri�/�s- r(i r///r�i��i%/ f�J�r/�'/i✓ '�N ✓ / r i 1 ( elope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8DO '�XOVO,, �Wlj' W"'Ok""', 1101, W, A IASRL UTOw& f4ATI%,; ART EO% UIPMENT 0 06w 01 'AM DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 ��� �r��� ,��• •-"� � �,�7 �%�. , "��„ � ����ur�,':, � N �"✓ x��m�u"✓% w y������„x,� �-�"�1�„+aw�rc �� �,���W�,ro � m r;glil:. � ." - �' m ,.., ,"*. „+';- �'�try��,�.,,s 4i�' � � >w` 'r�9"^a �'�� .��"df ° w�""� � ;r, VN ,< a »1 w * d ✓ * kkr n r `"" r R� r u , 6 �r.m",`, b *w� ,, """ ;;" ,y max, ,,•"' -,; m 'c,. pph7 r�1 a ,6.., Ir,•L"aY,�Mw,e,'' m 'ti I' ,6 nwtr a1 � ` ;»K�r w ✓`.� I� >. 'w,w h"' aH �k'a`4 � p r W,".ww"�^;t;'^�,� 1 n�; �"V Ja",r wpb,� �, � � '�.7: r L�s, a,�k'��+c �r Y„fir,; w 1 J, � ,✓,°,✓ s� 1^P l'.'�'I( ,fin;,r�,w4wryt'",.�1E�,"v„, "µY ,� "s»r"" �w n„' �:�.;"�" a+wr� ,� ,`�, r!V r v„, !p ;hr,»"..�q x;�.ra ro;ti rn��,P a 1 Jr.I::µ;^ 7"•r �' ,�, w e"�",„�,h ^ � ^,fi,. '� ,',' 'y ^ate.." �"'s*w".;y a�rh�r,"I* ay 'x* .;:'A + ��." a,"wr»"�, if ,W" 'ur� Nay•d�ar,+,''.d"� �a � ,Pah„ ,„�w ne k^ "^ ,,,?••..uw r.�('�wr.,��+* ^t"r ,rd r- rw �r * ,&," r' bw;^T., ^aar i /' ,�,»«+.�; �.�.m �' 7., Y.�"g"' �'uR P r r;'< �a� r,,�l r R ?'�'y*+�•,, r � v,f-'�,t " "' "xh" r�w�*r�'1,.:,, via �4' �. b�".o i . i"„ { ;� '"t,,i �' ��„� ;."�, ,'" a v'".�} w,;�i:wa,'ly%' �7wr 55 �'�F>wx �� ,�:"''"�r r .*a i"�� ✓ r,�5,: rr r�""�' e bµ�,.x �rN@ � k.""'�u" "2' .yew r 1 p9' a„�, 4 �%. a� .wv� �,. � ,„�� ,�nN4Y a ,«r,.;� rr �b,°,.k qr. ,X�.;,-. µw,✓Ywy:� r r�,!^„..,r�� ,Iw��n a;,�t.,7 q,Mda*'�w" ", 'ti.', +N'* m'�,P,�n,r4 rw'G�. ,`"�✓r w to nh?'r" vrb a�, ,^ ;,�„ d S;c�,y�r^k'�",:: f"'. ,*"w'✓rai .w'ww"",L,s ,��,",,�: '�r,y�r° w,�. �. �,,,-,3 , „rqr.,9 r .N, sn ti�:�E ,C e i h "✓�!',Gbh..,"w ,„�I b7 :rr�„� q,ti�i;y�,.*aan.r„ �� w' %I'dn r 1 �"` ;'M �"'„� y"�arpk<., '� ,rM�k':'�5 '�' f"`;''^r**""i9` ,�yrJ d'` '"�a yi9�'' r trl 9 µ!� �:G��` ^'��;$n ""M"�N"fr ✓q^"�r N " r W� �^N '4P I'm 'X,� �,'� 4" °.`,K � Y4 ."' „✓p,�,,r r' a ,µa X I „� a�1, W^'rf '� 3� rrr ��' x .,xrv.„✓ �u"w„ + �l ax a ru"r rVr rwa �w° �" `��� r 7 as x 3 �r� d� t .,., w �a „ �,:,.:. r� �', ...,�,, may,,y `w"" .rt aras✓� �,rr sM ,n r A µMr�"rb wrd�✓ �" F x i bAr 4 �%maa i f wrow ^ r ;,. >,..' .�r�fi y , �ir5**� p>;.� � Thr, � y b � ^�,�, "r�,P�•"✓tl;f w�,x �� �,y � yy,; ^ a,;:a,,�'�t,r µ� � r�'"�k b „µ ' v ,r k>fb ,, a a,��" W'w k^ 'wW,. y W�°w $ �r� W✓r� �sµi � r r� � � �� � V 'a.a, '" �d wa�✓"'°�rgl�r^ �„ ra ,«�„ i �"��I�arA^' ~��' r'� r rq„;�'�*� rN N� r •. � w4 f� ,ma � m ,6' " '? h= err"� �% ''X��, r 'Aµt"µ �; m '�` � � �^` �*""µr'�'uJ�hr�%� C� d M ',�r./" is 'wY r ,"p'•' etir , � r ,dot t ,�wS ,l., �kr<.n,.: "` ?��a; x,,wr w µa^wi,P^`a,� „KK. ,"�"W"�^a�"w r✓��` i,. ��,s,a`-w,.;.:. �a-r" r�„.�� y9 �J'>1 l'Jw,�,�,, � rk�� �' 1 s� wr *w 'R„ r �.a� � wµ';" �r� w '" � .b� w.��Nr pYw k 'p^�enr•,rk 1;x,^w ,p ,.,C'b , rv., +� d ,.. oda w a::r N � a Po fir, r Jt"rr 4, sn,« 9" ";I"r .b, ,""✓✓v,,,v;��'d ;-�a� r,�, ., ,w r,,"n.'�, ram`. �,,4Nk� r� e r ^1 w � rri� rT„"^✓ I,r`b 4' +,,,,�� s;. m;� ,r b;u:,tib- �, r'U( N" r,, w f µ,r a7 .���dwq ,�? �,,�`"� ;M,; ,''�y`& v e ",,,� � r ^,ry �, tww� ,"�vi wrx.' .=�a ,,, r:`$� "„rr.y�r4.y� ,,,,emw, '�„ui, ��'x M-4m '��+✓,,, :h 1 ;r'�"i d r, �'G✓, �N^ ,wraY v�'Z't, C .+r, .-..dr: a, „�•. �'(r�u r�•r, ;,,��r 1..., ,;a r,� paa;,, ;d,� ^,-,,,�r�a ✓irr,w. s, rA.:.�� .� v,a ��..y„ "+✓w� ,.;r &rW�. �, ,r,� r` r�, mw'�;" �.. " o-ar^ r.:` ;r,.. .„,*."P,µ'"k, r ,. 'r r,,r'✓ an;, �,�.w. ,,.�raw� r,µr .^„ r � r PF hr �` ;rm:: a ""^!�,w>.J, ,.,„: s^,, ,. ',��,� "'+„,^µ( w,aw�" „y�� 7'�W„^� "ryoa r� µr✓�y d ,,, .,.u, ,�^, akr s ' laP�� , m�f �,.:: r,A ^q .. +r'*i&� "ra J� „r{a,: },w 'aar. q ,?�. �,w�v "t.. ' ;,, ,�, i1)°,: �y?,wr �, w^x�x ,u"; kr' u rw"��. •ww, r.,, y'x „, :�w n v`�. .:w 'P ��^I r „ r,r, '-aµ w 1i�r 1,,,^ a �t ;�,1 „va,✓ r+r""� ,,,�'' w a.�rM, "gra�', � ,au" �;"kkr„%r •.�,; "�q�;�, �„+�"'k;%,,,r, k ri,��it �'t" �'�` �"N"ar*�:*w dpi*r � "�,�r;a„`', �,. �a ��^q� ��c*'k" i��a � � , � ,h u��,�"'^* s� �"a� ua a , ', ^ a r , 1 C t B r a ?�,+a". r,vv a „ �y' nkrvd�r� tMe, �{�w � dr,,� u6xd, y zr * ✓v, 1 ,;x� '�a, a�'+ � w "�� ,"� M i n "�+ar m 1 � nwx' ,a; �' "xe.^ "e. �irh "�;, xd l",M:x: ,'"� rorlrarr�� Ix ,,,„^„ aqy r.:b ,✓i ,,;far m � r7 as �;,N.-. v ^G "�«P �, aw, r`"x „fir w 1 ✓"„.r �^ �Y„ � ;.» ��., r. Iw«,%��'�nm, "ar,� r., .:, � ✓i,i%, 'k s! ,6ar � /' � �s rvA: .."~.., �,. .,, Via, Mfr,.^, �� r„ ��adw r b a �;=1� ,,,✓-,,. r�,' a w m 1 �^ r> ✓ „v >x ���x `v"✓rwr ro�,�.,. �/� ,» �4,� ,�,, rn� �, �� r fir, 'e,r^„vm �ry m, :v�ar4 r«zr°,' .,f»�„ �;�r d� dk�rx � v� v�, � ^'•� �rkt.; �,r,. rvw �.�;, "�'" v' '.;`�{P i�L,"i ,.qry {'.; '' r 7b �,� �"y,��„ r ,y r ".,.m x.�'u' ,^u'tik �.,µ b� ,"i k �.r,;, h ,; a .�• .w..� r,�w� .,.'✓""�" Jr r ~:rm. �; x�.; r, a, �,; f '�w,,m tv,'�"''m..� *t w -'ry ,� v � �, W�;a ,x✓r nr; r'" ,d ,+, w'`,.: �' �'.,,, � ,�: ^ "µ ^r.,., Pyr, ��.„r.,.;,, ,, ^i , • �;,�r rlw,:'„ ,.�'. ,rL lw C�e kv`If+a� a,,, r it u`,'.,xV lxd,r,,n „r �'* ^^m,,r,�k, m I��ti �r Nb=.� 'v.✓a„ Ir ,� va �,. r 'r'�"'.»,. .�mmY�Y , ✓µ ;. ^,�°,ly ,.v,,,..v ,m r ; 7�',»"ha,aa ' ', w,�4J . a4 ,, m ,r Nh.., ,�r8 ��r� ^ rr� % ,: r'�". ,�-,"„"',, el �, :' �^W ti"n',rt fl: µg ,P�s �,�'; ,,.,Y �n r ' �,:rr?'. ;,e� µ,* �^;�.:.,;.7,0 l�" -1r",�'m:.: !( ,�, ,,yv,,, n„ ,i ' �.,,wf,aM m , r..Y. .. Yk » VW � ,, ,y..,x,..N'S ,„(Nr .TM p .,e'rl•S �..,x, � 4 ri �d 11,F„M/ tiN'Z �� e�Y�'.x r,A'�.Y ,y4 A "{.'I„ 4�t.,ro, r,y,r !„1,�, <„,^�a .r r �.;^x., a, �b hP"> r.u, "„�w: ,, � ,,..,,r n.. r-p,'Y, r""r,7 b'� e:, F„,r'� �'"r. 1 w, ;" x,,� ,�,a�'✓',"�« rr, �6^w �w,,.,n'4 "~t l..w w "�� �: ,"ry,, d "" r�� !" -;'i rh, „„�,�w'' P,,s ",,. d.,.. ,✓w�,v n;,,max rrW,.. �,f,�, wa�„"�,.,, ,R.,J�,::. �r�,,,✓ .�rw ✓ ,.'A� r+ wsRr:'4 x u!, e F"''�r"1�" ",?�b^'. 1 ,, hi rr."9 � a�ry"r^ ,...,.;^, ��. ;:, ;�tk a ,,4 ,* v�r x',"V „✓ � µ^ :a" fr „ 'n«:„� „r au �r��a et� , ix�l „b, ✓,fry M�"+,`��S w '"`^4 r,H'u a ,, ^ ,r ,,, � �' .,r' ,> r ,:,, �,h, w.,b, r� r7�,r� E,,,,,,, � r ,,," r k, � a✓i d", F,. •: a«,r" w?^�>a� .9.. ,va*"�x,: ,"r '7, ,:k '�, w=w., �', -✓ „k. ''kr ,, '� x.�r��rr'^„ a, ar' r,� rr ,y t'a ^�''c-'ra �:` t- � '�., °� "� � ` xj�r"� ti,�N' ���r �,, r � r �b a�✓ °'f ��w A d h rf N drr �- a"r a 'i`1 ✓, ^a'n,y '�` a, �* r�� k, �µy +p J+~n��, ;i, �a� raw 4 f 'a"r,,, M1r"r k� ',r�;�xry r��r'�1 :x '��ra*,'„;-o r "wdix ✓rN;Y ,'µ��ba wl✓r '^'y ""w,�' ,� ' v` af~xr ''" ' °°� k' r d nw Anf errlr1, ,,' „✓� 4 r. ' .�,µn t«A'.. b rryn<, "✓a r 'u„y�"'rl "aW�!»a ,7�r r( ..✓ �r✓ q"7 P 's r � ^,✓�, .r-� �'�; � � 8 b'✓^ '�, r 8j� � ,1 v.n!�y" ✓"�"rea�' �� n "��� � a�'nw fir% � ✓'� " ��✓,a Y,,;�nNli� '.:.a� '�;r � C ;�kl rryr^ b � !: N �"„�, � y /da r✓r�w�rµ��,. a +.r r�" r� r+/'� N&'��P W:. 'lw„ av,,,,y r;ea��,� 1„ ,„ �"� °r✓"�m ��is��Fti 7)• l'au r„x,?� � V ,w:�➢a�,�' w'. .r ,� a r,�. ^� w �� �.�ar ti�� /u��'� i �`� wdd � r n;a"`"au Y;r � ,� ti�ra�✓�✓r+� rr r r✓h rx* re *x ��a $,r'� rv� d ,, r;,�r r r�+d r`a�„,h. ,-iu �, r w �; 7'�„ µ �' u � �`✓ r" ^�Ds'„'F1'' ><C !�, , '� at �,w � P 6• Vd w lb ,.- � ii i :j�'7�'r � rr: �� 'r�^,� 14��w,r„�i�Y� h�t+ c" ✓ r b ";'r� � � � b f,i�k �r�x�. a�'p/rwr��;r, nl^� „r �"�;� �"' 7 ^�ls^r t�' ✓�a°rr v�j�ry'1;�7W��r3nP 4aa '��✓)m/r� "��,". w7ti!,r�r^,,. ,n .' ,: �a� � ��,!"r i'N"" P-:r�, ✓i A wh ,,M. syr,y�, 1f '�'Jm l"*`�f �"r'w '�,��`µ''�✓�✓✓!kN4 1 ''^��'�4aN^�'dM��61L+� r �^, k! w,/ ,dm ✓r .� A`il l'^f a yJ/ I.a� 'x N. � 1 ✓^ h(,^..N' `���,",x t�'�aat,'�-, 'ayx�'M.�r � 1�^N r��M,��°"w�Y�� ,w� �>�N �! �"� �,� .r I�h�y'�'i ;;i"���yp/' , •,,;la,+' , w^ uw� 5y,� "" fir. ,yr ,.. �x �@ rw4r, p,' �... y�d�;�a�j'9�r , n � $ K sµr�d�"�, r''''d^ d 1✓� day 'd, nl/b �,. �i �', ^r*u 111 ".;.W���'E!wl�,'"M1,�vl�',� ��� �� dr,yi N?.r "2r✓fupms 5 W"k �L��N b ,,,;;,,3ra, '`a w � m°,r�;�^ir,,, fr,b' "^ys� � rr7a r "uv nM.,r�' ;,ro�mA.�, ,r, ,,. h „+G:,: lr'�P w✓ i,,P 1',+�` r„, � a„p Ip�.d w. � r�r' ,;vw�a arc n.::, '�,mu,^�w r,.w'xr +�, �' „l s,, � nw �;,r w� d „w " � w „v � k ,', 4 �'g" ��, a�wh ,wr, „�, y w r�,.r �� % ,,. � N,���r�` �`„,✓�° r,z;,"„ x5r,r„ '��,"w ,y,rr k✓q,:�7a` t, ,,t9N,'�'fi�wp +; �,r �P',,, , nod v.,: o�. :;, „ �,� �" � �" ,�w- �h ,i Xwrd�81✓i� �e„ �� r� S 4 :�1�„rr. Y,_ ,r,, ,GN:���"� „�,. ,ru�Cr✓nor �;"uw. .&1 rix ✓ M;;. ,r, ,„:.r µ,,, �-..a. gyp;" ,r�rw,�' b, r �w '�', w� --r �"r ';�4"ro r�r f^, ,� .�.fi,"�hww� ,��.,r ✓rv,.hx d .,r. ,ly;,,�„�,. a;�Yw Vj vv✓,,a��, - vw�.: r X „�6 �'µ�sw, u.,�n �y. r r , °"r�, ,�i. N},; '.; �':. �w ,�w� r /ir r�, " wl,� 7^,r'�r, ,r,�,,'�„ v '�''Wi '9w W•kra.*�'✓ !:!�C �' MI � V e% 1 r.r w,, i ,."w:l� rJ°r'�,. �,' „'",'„�' L f��,r^ ,� � n rw��a �,�„n. !� �. t „',�'. � ,r k,'� x ✓, ,,, ��n„ J � a ,i,... l,�rm, � �r, Y a1 a it b . ms"µ w�.✓`. p,, ,,,.- � � !a-^ +'` t; r�'r'::," d^`a"ro��';�'r,:Wk ', k r, ;f,. ° i"' r„P �'., ar ",.r k'� n, „��,, k/ %�,y , rha.w.rl'', "�f' w.'�: .,4 4d, '�,.^ G,�^n,y, ✓6,�,P��i,a;,�: 'i �v�u� "��",�" ""`��`��?' "1�� �,�, �' ,7^, xi wr ,1 �^, ,Ir rw .u. rr ,��„ n 'Sr� ��✓'"',�",��iy "u' ;,�u �' x' ''ri''U;,`Q 'r ;✓�"`:�� ;`';�a r '` N „r,.`r r�� 'w"w lk.rr;'� !`x,�tlrw�l; it P ,1^� _;F ,PN�w*fir, ol����ry ,rae, ` M, ,.�',,�x '' 1 � M Y1r„ �';����",�� �!'.r w�"�r� �r `.',r � 'vJJ�tx i'+ �,��✓""r"�r, � ,�r.r; rr s kr y4,:'�""r (�w`�i!� r��^� �' ��� �y N �r,1„rmw. ���*,a��'w" " � "�^4r .� p� r�q r+�� # ,✓ ` x�+ h�w� µe�"��u '✓ � r r^b , µf4 h i , �� ✓ � •✓ +{,,. I' � ° wry,r�'1, ^a „Dr „a:�„. r r h ,d ' �� ��' ,;,,.. �r NI� bptq"... i j� '�,P4 • rr ,,`re, r '. ""' ,w.'r" �,^„,yr: �" �"a�,"vrm�'w a;Ph,"rNe "Y�'"'P'„,a a�', a,� l r l ✓i. P e a w ar,r"' :,�„ r Vra r a�16�.:Pat�'i� r r thr... la $ J ,M� ,,'�u,m � -✓�..�� Wy w x^a.,�°:^.rr,'",w�'"^r w� ,r,r bw �+ 'd� d r,���'✓� �x rah ;;� °w ,�.,N�r :�, ,�k "+r*» l�r� ,k' 'b '.;art r ' >H�,Y u.r Nay � f k+. + ^t� n�,Irk � �k, "'� "'�x"�f� ,o, '''��° �r � r 1:'W �t 'wa°- �� �� B���„`s�,ve �r'n✓;'H „ 7r",v a ,� r, , � � e „'��1*d "' 'a, w �a'��N ��`rw �x,�w llr,�"'v��y(^;6i✓rr,,. e,µr'>pry ,�; :9r�G° � I>"M,n x,�" ✓'"a aiG��'�,�,, ''�'';���,a5� '"'�*""ur" �rN, I,�af�, + '�1„ r"' ti'kP *P,dT.�• a,�� bv� � �, n;;,. spa,. ,,.r "nlY;",. ,,,A;) b'r n � ,Ml *�,,'y�k, �k�'�^„�'�`a'�4,�rv�, ,',�'� �Y"«'s, p,r,�,' „'�f^?° �'w',',� `��,, „g, r„µ�t'",� rr9.. a r,�a.,, ✓�k✓�,,��r� �+'r� w„� h '°. � � x r u k �1�nrr„� Ali a ?✓ r"rgb^w, 1��(y��1 ads r �r ,°,,�,"'�,. bw.�tiw��'�!��4��,; "'��,e Mwfr�b;'y „:M x' w+w x. w.Wr,,� �'p/�,`,'�+ ", ,n �'r�",: ��Vj�u,µ rr ,�-, 1�.+ h �n�Y r "wr;�,.' °u�,;,, { ^,Nrr✓Oi '�!� �!�'"� I�."'' M�y','k � �,q''a'sr����41f�y1 Wu. "Y����. r ;.v �,,.�,v.r✓fW�^'y/�,./a�wr PY;� ..r, Ir'ir "g"� 'h"x � a u a;:,>� ,,,„ ,Ir''�" � � ;. �"`� p��?�.�w^� r4�,a�'�"� �,{r,� M14 prr+: m �` r'kr r x r r "",1'" :.e, r. x w;; ,a!� �� ✓ m� ;Nr� s L,„ , p;r"7 � M"^ w wn.,�" ;�: ''is rr°arra, „" ;. � �� ,�.. `1 � � �*,,, y r $r r,, rir✓''� v"a?'rG,„i�"'a '"�r� �';tw✓r�; ;, r,,�� ��✓ o- I �w � Tf/r i r '� ���U r � "„, !r �x� ri ;���"» '�"µP ;� n^w:fir" � , , <P I n� l Mr,. '� ✓& w r rb41� ,err ^",, rrrr ' �� aWf���ro aw �w ��n✓�; �r'rr�i lN�,, ��7f � ,;`. ...V,'�'."� ���'! �.,@�,!� r��' P b�b 1,,„11 `r,,�:w��"�;� �r6✓ryr�.0 ¢„�"; < ,�< 'i°�' %;a! �✓p�,;, �r w � :vier. rs x i�,r � �'� ✓a�r ✓.,r^ �,ry,., � w.',k'r'b� k �" � ur' ,; r,„ x„' a x ,r"�u, 1 r",b � ✓" .m r ,w , r ,�r �s �' „ ,fG, 'r�' ✓ �"�` r `�r,,,» G,r' n�wr � r a �, -, r °��r' I� ,, ,,,.r, �, i , .. �'a , „ it ✓ i,t r. �, r r„ ,.r": � rr,,, ��Ar �,,�'� ,rl rH ^��':'{ ,�; dr 9� �'� ;:t,.➢ �,.,r,,... m�,,�h ,.::; ,� t ,v,ukp!±� ✓ x 4 r ,� �r� ri (F x „ �"�ll!� .,� uh , � *'n, +�r:W 1� G�d �„, cr,fx r ,� � � w ;r ., d, „, P,°y ",`�,„ r �r" ,, „,:, „Y rrr ��Pl.,u a,��,� rr x, br„d ✓i m, �edM„ rr ) n^ ;';, ,. ✓� �'`^. n "� ,., ".»,w ✓ u{,. ., apl''I a tt�, ,.. , crr,„ ad r '^r ,. :w '14. ,.,w,r W ,� Wr,r' anlY x Vr� Ni"� �'r rfi�„ ;rvr :1�1yr h,y ,z �` ,r w,,.(,.r' �, �'" �,�� � v, ria�. ,�,, lr„n�.,, (q F���N✓1✓`,1' � {I /r! r ,��. �rry,�„^',,, r...: ;;:,,; '" ,�',r�!^° ", i. '� ''xiy, ,,, ;,r'r r i w N°1 ,^f � �I V�FGx xi't-✓. , "'17",l ,,; ,"'&, W�' ," r ,,,,. f�1�" 'v;nm,:. r r� ,.,rynr jY ' r ,.. ,, rk: ",c,r ,"„ ;,, „.,,, „a r (�''„,s,., , 1,..r{ ,r,^ „pp��"(�V,"dr ri°� i- r,�x ,,,✓'&.�,. x, �p. �i°r'..✓ ,�"r�'�+^' N I�r�" ,rv,�...m ,x��'r? ro^"R^ :�', n �'r e :h "'aSx, r fdyu✓)y •�4✓ t�/fa�pr�,}µ r r�,! '�y udar,ry l'Y".yr,�,r ,o, , 1»! °i...ir�! , �'� .6 � :,. ✓��7�h n Po ,yPn' �� ,.r r �'a q" n,:w *✓ ,, fµ^1 ', � fp I`'"� r F� � � � �7r'",%" :w�% v ;,. ,r ^�.,.'�.�,' r ,,�;^," ,.,,aW„»'^ ,r-- r.: ; r ,, y..h d �"�� °a�, ✓ 'biY ✓� )�;�� � rJ�,��d,rr�rl-, � ., ,,..'„wb +�"'�':x' 'x✓(",:. ✓^l> K"r� rwr"{/.d al ..'W„... ,'�r,^o- r, :^%� Yr` ..,�":..�' ,�,`",..,. 1�x7 'rq„„''.'I,(m�� '"�I✓r��°,:� � ��a r'� w,;,. -1,�� ,m9� ;..rl ,. ✓. !�w i'" In ti`n I,'k,l�. ,.. v;;d,-� h'�i '"�fl rk � � 'Mu �,,4 „;" �,. " `�'` �"1,t' ;'i, ��1„� 3'�„r'�"*""�`r a,' y. �,-.�%a ✓a,� fir .,�; �c IVA',Y- ,� 1 "� 'wvs a,.0 T'�r. r:�krw. , 1� Mr m, rx ' wwi� 4,✓� h,tw' ',u y,!A ;"�.:.1. 'k�,✓,,hr ,✓�� 1 ;,� .:,f, w• r rr r�r . r �' ,,M.i r"' � � � �✓ r 1r ry"� �"w"� � R� h rN w� r' b� w ,a' � c � h,"-r �...' �, "' 'xsrvaw d .r "�°s,^✓ � ,�Iral�,. r v d� µ„:,r�rrydf�" „ '. ar.. , x'a �',�ap 1e:s ,✓ ���%Fr ` n* aJ'Si,',�x '�ap2},�� v,�.. r wr '"�`'»" ;k%i r, �r '�w ,1 rri 4� r",,, ,,,,r.„ ,4v � ^, a+aro4 (p ,,.,. , '�,,s✓�', a , � ;, ' wr, ., r ,�,�,. ar,w "G " ? "# w '�� ,an«:� �dw,,.adr .,, „"r°r✓�..;.v � "'s"�hd'+�,, 9a ,(+;, ' rr'�N�'«w (l-xi;-. 6W"� nw u�' *„,� ro �%i" ✓,x kd„� ��,�< wy k" ,� � ,r w �� j r, 6aP��';.� ,'� n,1M °�r a, ��pq y; �it r nl W ` DocuSlgn Envelope ID D247EF3F-422C 4309 A53E 3329809FD8D0 o m�yr.. �a 'r// %I)t �(y`+ l�" � :� rr i/',>�/J y ,'d, 'Po� to rm vyl�l''�I ,�j dii%', ,� M, rud✓' Ir.,�iyw UP%VYv a ,,,e�J;mw rrr ' ✓N,ow„�i d ,�Ic ,� '� r ," �ic ,'��',,; i y ® ra� � 'h / ,?���a �»l���yJ"l/1/ry, "°�. / I°/� „Iw,f � '�l/G% ✓�rl � r� ,r, r r Ir', '6,� 1� ri< I r» ,!o, r '" „i" ,y /i,d rn,%°i"YJ( �,v �,� !� ,,I�N/�; �� "', ' 1'',r1 '' F � �, ,. ,, rt ', „%� /'awr:. M%i, 4T,/,�✓ ,'6'I✓',. r��rr,'�,� lrr"%'r fPKK`� `>,w }yI�W,!row' .�rlo rr`' ;e ,ra:: ✓ ,'I� a I:iwl'! d ��d �' ., ,, r» Iw,f ��, «a�m�J� )J Irr� r�fd%« > � Jr�� � „rr '�1` ! �✓ �k,; /a� ,4�" rv,. r M r`�, 'i�� ^#°r ,�^ ��✓ i'wvi, ,n `" l"w wfG , ✓q', � /�� ;«'iu'��'r YM r� Wn 7 r p, f"� a yP� "11'� J �a ' '�rdfr � a% ,I ra u�`°' rv�p ei' � r»awr '�� m P ✓`:^ '� riff✓, 'a nr :"(/< er G ;' ,� ryj 1!„ rM, lryly;�'�rdr ,i/ `;, bfd, "Nk�N>(n ,�,av,l✓r� #"y �I,s w^dr G, �L, ,I yr' ger r,?"y�urv, e'�1 ,r� o r�✓ �,v,�l'/'�"" #'"; rvry �° „div �� f"xw �r-„a ,�,,,: ..rtm � I '; r �r�'nP':.� .m "°�� f�'4f IlV;q, r� r v w✓ %A � ��✓, v f'�, u� �"'�' 'ra�u� P;,��-� d,sr, ,fir G+ Y�� w� - / r `'» I „�'' %jti) .,�!c ,!�>;_, IV �'r•!.+rr)�. mi .r r,�, f' ;,�;, �i r>"KK,�� � r � „% %F�� ",��,. ,P�. �' ,'�',� P. �, a. ra�'JI / I „d'r /d �d"�" �`� Y � ,e„:.Dov :,el'I` r°rq�s;' M'm"' ✓/I(�; ,Iqr, f «J°rm„",tiG�":•'" Pr ry,���w, w „ ;�w^ ��., �/v sly m � a�"✓r r,;u M °" 2r,.ww�'�""„vVii` � �-, ,-«w �� r �rerY : x ,�//" rm,�� ' ' ,',v � /�I ,� r,,,.r�u>�il. „��;�,�� r i w� ,mfr �„+�'/n � +�'dW r� ';� �i. w, (il s 1 �u +': ,✓,a ',�� l a�/x'y •: x�,y !#',£%r T;���w� j'�, r ,Sw, �I �,: w y r, �r� r a„"a a�' r�°; � ,,.r �`, •,,wn„/iM ,� /,v r' !WI s;,,, prt��'w ;. ,'rr•• G,+',;" ✓.fG „ " ,✓,�' I 1"' ""d r r try' # � ���v � �r wlr 1 w r � yr �", e,� w {l�v � "H� ""j v� ,,a" ✓:r�9ii ;, ,a "na «; `��� � ,rl'` ", Mr � n % r'� raer,�r�a, �» � rr�tr, e ,�a1M WnwC��u� °"' �r+, a� rn r; ;'r ✓" � „� a wf"' rl� #r�#w � � ,9 ra !" ;r;r � ,; rv, r,. � q;< :J. � �"r r�IG � �°# w»•r tr�fm',lyT, i ,'�� #r ,%f rr��l «, /��✓ �r�r rl rt dm'#, 11 Jh rap��ti r ;, ,,�1 �, A ,�f r:;r;,an'W P' (m I' �'^ „ ".,Id% y`,r .."'Z,I f r fir' ,+"g. ✓�"�„qr I���'*n+Y✓'I`^f, � '�� �rG, « M� :� V" r y; ,IrTM""rIW7"✓r, ✓G, „„D,r� ,e� Y,,n�'Prj;: ra' ;a'?X'„ r "dry; r� ryr�5" u I �, wJw �rw �J '' " ,/,;. � "� G/X, Ul "� ,,,,. ��" �I ,e, d k,✓ ,. ed, rm "rT oKK� I w°; u r �'.,,*',r � rr,�r.rf; r ,Y ;. d"1/ n���: %rvPra`,„ra $' " , /�I ,.Jr � dw r w"n!", a'� dl' x � /"'�/' f KK t#ro, rat. y�� /,; "� s4 r,'.✓G ��.w"7�C"HNry "e✓ ,+,., ,»�r,rt +,^''� raw x�f, " „%"� «.: I r" l�rk /,;,F,;.r-"`r s t I ,,Y'"° �r� �� r /, "^�r !dN '7w" �G� , u r d '�; 1!`'+�✓r 7, � wr /,,ra 4/ .1-r✓ �»;r. r, ra Jr � � ✓ r onr�,», /,xA ' (rKK w�,r , r # � w w. '"ro„ '. t ,n II„ -.� �,w.,",:. w �,„y ✓!� / r �' � � p� ;�vr( r%' '�'�" � rY '�.,df' d l �, „�(.. ' y�.. usw "r�i ✓�� i lrl�� ,1, ,v;�r. ,=���„�� r,F'm+ �' ,w' g��A �"s,:(('��0r y 1°.p, "l L�r�.,'":y rM ,lr�/`1'` �'r� „rGy'rj✓ v, .,6M r`T. .«w, a�' ,�y�, r r,l,i�"� 'rr'+ 'tiYi,, l i� � 'd A�' ,! '�' I/'„AL ^d d` '�W / ° ;11,' �4x'a�+ �h ,�r✓s��`: d "'��' �° °"° rte:` *n Ir � r«.r rt„ "vr�'Y%' r,rm,/n y yl 5/ ;�^:✓ "��fir:%,i* „d r y;cnrt fP+l�I� %,uP,rr,, r x ,�ry3' %° „�r�,..%,rr91'" e, „W;,w,.. r ;fix„a„�,,P.< ��y q�,u,r�� ry ��L '�,+�°,h°o "�rl '„KKr, 1� #.�,�Jq ✓"�r,� ,, ,r rfi "W%,�` vrm„G rr,ei +,�" ar,?� y#y�y1 ,rv' x,d °�i :;;",. �'z, 1 ?n7 r. � %' �,, q ", r� ., ,,rtr,� KKr '!.r wl �� ,m., '� d,r..; rw" fC� �`�✓» � �'�,eV" "w" rr P; N`'w a �"„'" �I��rwypp ,rcr.. «�;� r'r { 0)1-�' ,F� i'' u�,>M'�P+ "',+ �r rw'� J :w.�, ,�',rM� 1• w"� ;,�;,»,,�,nF '�;��r'�KK,C?y vl..B � ,#. dr/ re�/ r' ¢ � rlr� /% ✓rai r i�"�q',xp rl'��✓� ��,: "✓ W»nnsr,�Glr'?'1!#,old,: r& ,.d,�mr r �� «y,Gl"y 1,:KKK�aG M yak ar, '7k `;P ✓ , % ; ra�i✓ lu''� w y 9 ;. dapra-. ,'9,, Wur'Iv �,-r«Y„ W .,,«ry ,. ✓.. w Lr#, ,�„r. w,.i.,,, ,r„ nrJ"/✓ u,(w 9 i"` rr;'Y { �'/,1�� r. k/1 /° '�Y I.....�rr ra,r ,,.:. r.�✓' /i � .,/.6, &u,lt. �«m, r, t, Vii.,- n',,, M'"» ✓„ �nWr" � «n,,,rP =� ,,, �. vd�,m,,„ ,I„f r,,#,.�t✓�dr»; a/ „rn r �r�19 „rml, "1�W, rd r, ,err'' m,'�' �,,w!w%,,, �»y w,r„a:I ,w�4"o �� �p /'a,r i. I rw�!°.J"". ". rw„ r,.r✓i>f ror,v?r,�,v*,ror. 'T�n :,,,.., v:;:'�r, n V.M.�d',nrf N.„���`�Iv "lrrar �', ,,(,;m= Wlrr �'rwY KK //rY,,.f„ ,r; .;.„ yr �r rt,,: .� .r�, � ,�.� ��,,�,,: yr„ ',ii.,✓ � a dr �lrr r n.,x ,� �„v,,; .,,xe,'�' ,x w#.,:w W r, Wr' rrt .✓L ra,.av �r� ✓ rlv. Pray ro� ,!G'„r Ir n ;�W ap'"l,r�^r1.,m Y��, qd)r ,✓,r �, �w p�/ 'Nf r�� .;�„ ,e„„ '�, I ;,f,;rrc, Wr'�,�u.; I-, rc :�'n :xr, ✓ l;'�%'rr- r..g. t v �}r d�cl� rml 'r,w ',r; ,f, / ,�c:, 1"�9" ,#,,;,,�w�"',V�'. ,w',, .r, a, �"ir-.:;er'"" /r l � .�fi ,,,('` wrv' .rw «e'Y Pi„ '� v ., �, ue�, ,`;r'" �.�,�,Drd„�„a�r✓"" '� �rw ��'+.G""^,,.n: ,wrr,w,/.. '*'#' v n a ,.s, `"""4»«',^'7, rk.^r'� wr� KK M drr r� r �,1 ,w�, dFr,. r#", »�;� r�' ✓ > ""A°. r 'a; ,�a wn n�fa:,,.:W,. r ;»c, ,. ...;t,.. ra ,.,, ,'� ,r. ,Iµr I >;.r 1v1"':rMr''� , r,� ' u+# « r< r,°�%'`.", % ✓ T`,;� »� ;�"., b:� ra, 1 /r 1 �'rw,.,nl�/Y���„�:,✓ ✓ern r a,A<,' rt,� r,� A,,, mP „Ir ,1�r� w�i « s d ✓I, ' r✓,1 <,wF, � 1;.�'i �r,m, �� ,'�" �,, / w ! ,� . , 1, r/,r �r>�,,, . . �, � �"�. . ra ra, ✓, � r, �' ,✓ ,1'�KK�;���ry ,rte,,,� � , ,Mr.n' ;;� „'M a,r ,m, r4m ,�•, x� ntJ a, ,�r ., <m�✓, ,KK '% I ,,;*� °w, i ti i>>r, C, � r„r r, /s„«, N1 r,�,^ '�, ,rG.Gt,; « w�' nr,-W,, ";.t,.rG ;W u. � ,/,.,n,., ., ,.,rl. rv� I'�r, r r�Ybr,,: r rr.,;�, 5 r,IG,'P;",, ?7"rii` ✓ rs I r A r,a~KK'.vrvl: a„�' � ,��»/" , .,,,.,m„ r w•"'�^ � j ,.,n v"�.. '� i g,,, ✓ �1 ra..,r., �, :,. ,,, ✓,„IKK .�x. !d�, r � diriri, ;� „#. r�/dr.'Wvr:r � 1� �I s'� ,, ,,„"d ',n r. i,"F'U ,J,;.✓e,r I �:, a.' ,Jv ��. ,.,, Im� , Pr d.x.I�, ,p,# e%a„w s.,r.d` r�� 1ryp,,� in 9� �( tar.. .,r �r ,qlr�rt�M'"".A�- '" /. r,,,rt, „r re ";, r.; a Vi ,hr,�#'% a ,, 9. '�! r r,Ar ,r�f,/,,,, rN, I;. ,, » rlll/r, ,,?!,r d':., r�/ ,� ,yr r`�.,. ✓#;'..✓' � :rlv, w ./% N „Yr .�. �",r ' .rl .w.,t .wA ,✓�. ', !�wy'/ Nr � f,5f,<,, >(r A ` '�y,r ,'9V,.#� ,,; �",»., ✓„ ,'�,�IVr �..,� a+„ r� .. *�,,r✓° ;, .,r, 'r, I ,d%' # ,✓ y.. #./x��,rrr; PiG, w%"' 1 .,,,,,r .A�,o +, rwa ,NS° �.,1 a.�.;r, ",... ,�;,; nr'..:, <.�. , C r. %/,x, r�>F, „,'��,w r� r 1rG .v"�y i, ,N"y FG# ✓ ,� Irl:p 'ri,r (•' r�"�d,, „� '� �"!w .YG,s, #�� m I f,�rm�/I �y« ,dr.. r+ „?, wA r r �!, � ., l w#(,�,, �,wr w„ r„, r z: /�� �i ,, ,>ti,"Yl"�", ,ri r»r r" ✓* v ,:,rr, rt, �rW°� ✓ ,r, ., /r,n,. �; '� v✓', ,,�. f „ a m ,rT, f ,„ro,�%;;, „�? ,/G'�✓/,", ,P ��,. fi,w ,� r �r�/r r »!..,m�v ax%::,w ra„ �rr�;�e y%, ,,�./,d,yy:,, „ ,: ✓,;� , v r r✓r�1,r�vv, % ,:, '+' /uv- �i�a'� li,,:r-'. r I, �/ r,r''`GGh �',l�/ �''%ir; f, ! KK;,Y"p r r, �,,;I,; v,„+r«v I,x� � ,,�,- d ,I r r,✓ r,m P � v„ I v dY„„ w, /�, �,<, tt^ �'++ n,rrz,r«,�,,,yr „rr, ,../ ,a v, � i, „M o �;. I :;, Nl rn, / ,N "Y!' , ,� r �i,IdbY r�yP,u (e 'r ;u,,� n;. ,,N svu,W'r/'✓" 9 � l %F: �„ ,..r 1 ,, .^r. r, P,W '�.,.; ,r,# ,Iry, y.�. ,..m r+ r,r, � ,,dl�,... �w ,. ro.; rod!c ,Q ,ro,l l, r ;m✓'dro %,�N%S" ' 1 :(„�a,� „u � ;�« » ),. �," #�,/, hr,,. r,:,,,, . r'c Pr I�r ,,, ,��,.; �,/ r' e�m"�f, �'NJ �✓ �I,.. / r. rt a. v: ., I:� ;i , )!,,.L ;,, �.Y IM +/. lrr"C °: %yrr... .l ,✓ mvi Li Jd1 r , ,.v'� W�.,.mY /� :,, („. I ,� :.I kh. o. . ..,.✓ r r��l. ra W.).a„ ,:, Ci ,, ,r:>, l'?d. 1 ,,. ,. (. / i�. y,,a. /,.,,, ( ,r sr„ ,yy r ,, i ,. NrJ�;., ,-r ...,F „ .�, ✓ ,r ,,. r I, ,r/.,, ,;�1, ,/.� #:. � �u, ,#w, «n. .m ,y wG; uG wn �G#' x, r/,.. :;9f. ,. ;�✓' �! r.1/Ir4�.. ,a.,ra z ,. J. m,til rrarC :u I«a r�a,�,f( �. �,r v>�,r G°',w „� xJ r r�6.,. "':^v r,� !, // L. ✓,'.'"', „ ,, ».# r,,, rr rr<. r,, I�;o �„�,,'.. r vlv 7.. w. I��� /' ,,:,..,�'� �"; l�G';;w.r ,y".�o r,c„ / r, d�. I�t�rm p ?rP'P# ,��1 v"# ^' v r<. � I�,,.,,,, ✓ r,,.. anµ;,.,,,� i /, ,Ai N�' ,r, ,rro v��fm- � r�/irr� rf" ., ,�, rf �, �' ,/ �;"�Y „, /, „/v-�, r�; x e, x, r' ,.A, {✓ 1 Irl %r Z � $qIW /r,.r 6N.Na r„G � /r /w ,1 J //'" J �,"vi;` ,.: ,r�r»,N',.� x, � �, i. ;, r:r-u � ,,,.,# „._.�r ,: � r, �. „A �1�,; r,,xr:.v, ax -rnroG' ✓i�, � rl,C �/sac r v„�rr n,,Mrx✓v ,rt,�- o}�x, r,�,,, y^'Y.. :.I✓, ,,, ,m. fY ,d y, i7,.,ra 41a�4;i.uf. :,,r rat ,,, a! ,r rr. %/f ;D., r, ,..,%° ,r !w?LL. Y .,,r, ,�` ;�r,r rot, „�«e��ro' �,/ r/'I«P �/r, ✓; nt � �1a, ,r„r4v„d,: �/✓#n r, a laa9 ,% „a�J „ rm ;n �;;tl�, ��n r r '/py/ �6�� G "�rw� �/� I*'G 1 ,.. r�, 'Siw ,, ;� r,�' ;,, ( ,:;", ,,,.,,.,,t , +;/ ,a. rs%"r« ,➢ sr�, � r frr rrr�( /I! �:{ al° �wl'i rr, d. l�r 7 Mw�u�� o y, v m x,:r. / :I� ', �, «' ✓ ,. ;r,� ,»d% ;r �,1,/;r, ,' T",�f ✓A_..c � '/ir,rrtab ,� n. w»i� `'9,dY,'r r„�'"7 ,/ ;✓ rw� ;p. #, ,/, �..,r r '�,, 'r,»� F r�, a „ .r„„r,r< k r t 'rtl ✓1 �r I� /,,, 6 rrd i m o i,, „-,,,, „», #, ,(i #r �« „m, „ , r ✓ "f d I » '„ �" , ,�»/ .,r�7 .l „</ l ra, ; �,hr�, r arrr r61,,h, r,�. ,f," r u», rr', w�, i.,.. rr r „^, ,dxr .r;. ,.I r., .,, ,vw , llar,,wl ..ra.;d"`� ^�l r� /, �«'pro ". �# �-: ✓�! �y + r� [! �! a 'd ra r„r'�w.w ,»,.,--r r ,"' „,,„///� ,,,�;,, rah(r art. r,, r „/J/ lnr�i dY✓. , �_.� r�, ;, ", ,,,, r/ /r,,�: , «,.. r 4,,,,7 rr,9'r�l , ,«r J✓,,:ar ,,,+w ,,a;r, ,a.. a ,> ,1N„r„ N �/� r;',rd%, wh/'�i'„ ,.,.r r�/i,,,. r,l �//, ,,, ,,,./�' � r,.,,;r ✓/r, (.;;�, ✓f`�%''�/ %�' !�ry�, M r „/ I �r y✓yrr"er yrr:, ,� r,,,,✓,� /�� ;;M r „`� ,r; � ra r, „�, +r; KK,„ ,rro (ira, p,P,, , ,, � , %/1 r, -� v rat, <' 1r7,r �,:,� �%«�� w � M .»^A, xnr r%,.,a,�"" ,;;,,�� � ,.,'�-lydrrG�A�r!�Hdw.,!��Mr%7,r..�,,:. ,; ', �- ra,d", !1 ,,'��wvre ✓ .,, ,'�/ %, / / /l;; ,:1 ,/ J�„( x �/ ,;..fir` „',' r /rir,rs�'r,»�° d�' ,7�,r a,'„/, r,- ,,,v im, +#',,,/I r � �''' ,�l ra / ,' rai°' rsm ,, ��"vv v;,;, P✓ ,#w!�i r^ ( � /'!! J %" � �"" � r~rr✓ uII Mr � #ro1d %fir ,��° .KK" lf0o4 , u A a'�llw/IyW�#���Nry,� a ! ,,,Nim ,k; W' drr !�„yr »ra-„ ,a„ ;r✓ P,✓� Irr, "� w„h �° �N Mfr� )�r,;f mdtll r,, rr d 1' re Y '#, I,..:,'�, ,1#�, r , ✓r »,,., ,,. y,�, r r ✓ � �✓ ,Ad"„d,rrV r%�i�;, ,#"..,!"ur vnuor� ,r r;. d#w ur„ rw4 , ;�; �;<„� r,ra/J..�ii rr;. I, ,l`� rK'° � #,I� :fit, ,,, >xwo~ , '�, , ; � �� .; r.4 .,�J� „��.�.�� / rr ma,,",,h ro/ ✓ I, s r�,',, ���r d' 'fir y `,�,I� /i. %rt,Ire r, ;r,�.. !,' ,, rr 'Yr ,,,✓, !,� :,-,� "r '��'; r/✓ /r%'ra., »c,it ....; ,,r,> /Vr� /✓, I��� ,,,q ",< ,� ,r,�. / w. (r ,....r` :r r�;� 2 rai ,.:"IJ'.,/�,./ / ara, ,v/�ii ,. ,.. ( " Ira„�r� ,..� 'fir d`,. In j/, ./rj r. /M" ,ra;o,� �PfG„,rai/14,". r, r %u'1✓ «,'m�..f ✓r 1 r > n J�� P n( r r„t( rr/ ,Wr r6/, (,ll, / �"� �'!� # o k/a).r �Nw rP/! ,cra. ,;q r.: r '.,.../l a ,fnrora r.'- of ,/ I Iw;' r ?,: // r✓rr �', ,,,, r 'r% r,/ � // ��r f,dj✓o-;rry w,wd�r r 1�% Gr' �r r'� r � ,/� � Ir yik,, K r/ f,, /i , r q„�v� /r; / �i R ,-G>5°" ''� ,✓. »r ,,rr,>ri , d ,( :,.„ wP' ,e /,r/%I,'*',a evf, ,r /,,/,^#1i', / i"""", Gr furor,���/i./,, r^r rr..��, /' "^N'( : -; ,.,d e�,„ ,., ��,yy, ,,,. /�% , ,A „✓.rr ,��rr ,/ ,�r/m!1 ,,,. m ,.✓,/ ,I wl'/�.",., ✓, r> r/V%i ,. Ar. iM r, r r. ,I�1 d, ;, 9, '.� �;Irto,- .., .? r �� :iv r,,,, � ✓a, o, ....,,,/ ,x.r f /rr� r. J ,"^N ,. a,;)�., r ,-;,e r „w. . ✓ Pr,i ,/ urr, ,,,.,,r,p,, ,� „ ✓�; r w /:, riiH�p/,� m r/ -w mY1,,, ,. r, ,r ,rr ,. � / ,,,,.. ,/. r ✓> „�� /r,i� ,.,, � ,,,, ,,, �,,,./i ✓�, /„ ,.:r � /,4i ...p H r 1 /,I ,l/r w » ( �r,,rJ�rot .! KK r .,,. .r � ,/, d,rr, <r � w;:./ r 1 i ,,/ », ✓ ra� r r 1 ,- „i/w,„,r,," � . I �/, r6 ,,, �, r ,.,,r / I,, »r�fr�w I ,✓,,, li /!r, / r�,�"° ,vo, F „i ,�/1/r=l ,:., �C„o,;,,,>r l ,I/ ...x ✓�i11, ! L., /, „, ..r/. 1, / a N ,1 ,�/, # `F.,.r ' /"r J, �%' ,. .� ,, ,.m,rJ .,,rr IP,. / 9 r r ,/ r ,:, .,, r 9 ',✓../»/ ,, �., v, 0 ,,. I,�;J/ I< r.. ,dr /.% GAJ,;,.:,� ,D I,... (r,rl, r I Ir...r. ,/ „ ; F(r oP,..,„� rtc, 7/ � ,ra, �, I„/ /, a%�, r ,,., r / „ir�,.% ..,. ill ,✓,w. w, ., >, � r6„ ,�„„ «, ✓/ r 9 ,, � r,.�r r ,/ %A /fy, r J�. ,�„l mw /e✓/ U ,:. �✓ r, �., 11/ � ,/' ,.y ,d...., yr ,.LJ , „, ,,.. i rr ,. / ,,yr »,,.r ���� � r / rro:.. sur/,1.�, r P ..'#„/ ,.. ;'. ;, /,. ✓, r�''�!^%II J;H 1!�;. �4 ;I I r r, l� r i m'a � N r,/ r ,r .% / r, L /,INy;� � r /��/✓ 1 / ' ;, r >r. ,r ��,,,lf fir, r r (, Ir ✓ar r¢,, ro, d ,l � ��, ,,, / p/ r ,,.; ,, ✓, >rl,. �� /l C� ,,< r I J,,1, � V; /,�r✓ o I HI ,, J,�r ,/-,» / ,,/ �� rrr, / r � 1 ,r„� / �rai �r KK yr ,, ,, -., ,1 -, ;,r I ,.r rr ,,:» / �,�,�1 a�, l �/ :,f,/ r/n l/i/// _✓ r../ I/l,, rPlw�r, ", lJlf✓llr,/r ,, „. ,, >b`�,.. ✓ rtr 1 ,_ // ,,G v&,/„,. dN ,,✓,,r ;Ir,r, ,,,.1/ r, '� : 1 „1, /� r,i' N� �,,1VA,;, '' l ,r- .; '/, 1 <-, w, nr ,i- ,rrd,. �° r ��e(� ��t ✓,, r1 r2a/ r, ,,, r i�, dr iP rrfi„ ,r%e a r � ✓ b D Gi e ,1� s! ,u �,I '� „ �/ �`, ,�i, N /ir/ %ri/r //,.'»Y „�� � r �dPi �i� � r� ��,�,d 9 r,� l>vti ;'/ h, r � z% � �! i/1r,., r� elru /, �/✓', / �I �✓Ar�(A'd������ r ��9r�1# r rr» dW„ a#„, ,r /, Y✓ ,C ':;r,'rol� i.%, , , �„// l r I, / r, ,./ „�f J "� S" I;� r, ?m',' ra »t ,„ ,,, ,/,.r r p/✓/1W/ »I */,,h ,�i,,,� �� ,,,, �l�n/�, ,;," ��lrllr o, �r�!r' J1,1 �, /f�1D�w,.,, „!"�,/ r,' �/r „G�' r : ✓/�<r�, �%/i,:rY�r%/o�i ,/ ;,, /i�.r li ,✓/,I ���1� rr,,..f ra r i,.,, r or r e,� �r (,../ � T r ./.., / � r '/� /f mi�/� i rte' % >i// �,•,, � ' ��� I�'�/� �''1 l� � ��„'W//r���, � '�"'� �� UJ r,. � ✓r ' P� r / ',.. '/' `Y,I r✓ ',. � e ' /„ r, i, ��,' r1 /,//Gl,,,,,����% ��, �� 're %i///9� �i/'�°I�Vr %/" �I ��le1. r,�Y1 G' l ..., 1,' ✓r, ��,", r../r � �J ✓ ✓✓i,I,T%%/�'i % r� r/�ifr,; � ��hii %»Y, ,:. rrau �/.:AY /r/9i/; r//v�Y%i iii, I I 'I# „ ,, »,,y !ra !.r /i,, ,'f; ;r%,rr//�/r//'/r „a ';�l i� /✓i���r r / � r rji: ��� �1%,pi,....; � „r„y� �, rW' remri / ,Ir f rAii/nr/!�»,/>�i, ; ii✓� �„/�o '/i '%iri%, %,'" ,,,/ P i� 1r», %/ r �,, l/ / / G/,,"„'_" ,,,w vr, r "�:,� %%i� ��Y✓// // �,o%)rr, 1 r,,,:r%�,� %r r;: ,D�/ r✓ ,r//,rai r is le/'�i tlr,�%/d/ rl r rm ✓% ,; /i�i� r/v �.: ✓ � r" ✓f, i r I� c, /ra r l r , ,r''r rr„i%1'el / r,� %,�/r r�: / !/� ,Z i 4/G, r 6 I.»ry ��//,' �/; /� ,� r c�+'/'w h r'' u«r fl ✓^�rr, I���'f� e ✓/lrJ 1 � b'r /: Jf w r / / drJl r ..r ,fr » mer � �. � 7J/✓,/ r ar � // ; �'✓//hell / / r %�-r /rr / /# r/ �//ir //i /,r 'rr / � y� 0,;, JJUw✓ i,;a2er w� /wr! dira m�;,KK(y1l/„/ rrr (/ f("ar,%//, � �n'N�' !i a, : � ✓,i�,r� «r ,;��rr�i! %: � / /IVr �C�l ice/ r'� r 'w� /,"r9f . o v' r'drb✓�/�,r19r;, #i !l A w/ Y�/,.. ,r/�,r1r c ?'f ✓r� j// %� ,,! /,'�'r// "r, �IPi//I, r'%� /�,�1//�rrr%//,//P /%{,,,,,J� / /y y�/>,..;,a g/� ,��fi�/,%y,,�lf/ri rr ux�/ � Ir ;.r��rxr 'W „r ;% � r�/�` rr,. w / :.,r/I(r � ;�,f /f>r1;-/��� ,; ✓���/� /, '��// Irl/, ill /��'"r ( � 1YrS,r s/��„ ,1 ✓ �! r/ ;�h,//%,./r%«�'G�r,�/��� e �. I ,�,.r/« p ��r%;fir /,/, l/%�'�„'/'%� ✓(,,,,' r.�%"� rA rY��� �'w ��� ",'.°I%ikrr, m y ��5i/� r//✓"vef'�r'ti'"" ��/'°/ ff��� ��ff„ ��I ,r �� rd;/r,��/s /IJ,/ �ir, ��r/�3,� ,,��;���1 yj'� ( l ,��'%'' �� �i rr;r;r #f✓//��.f l'/f//r�,/i rq�trill% "1'f rf �li//1�� ,/�,%,1„�;% i/'r o��r r� 1;�1/��� � � �,� I�)/ I asKK i%✓KK � '" � j��'�,ypl�%��/ 1� y✓,,r �/l/il1f ��//` 0 l �r ,l! 1��� � / ��i ,{�� , r» (e / rp � ,rrr%r!,/��N?m J ,�b,,,ii✓ ,,,u,;ro,r %p ! i ����V�`�� lyr I41rKKr,, 1rA,j�f i- IN alrr»I� /1�, � „��///�i �W to J, % /� ➢ l 0 rii' In I l 1�1� //Y/ ,rr %I „�i r !f rll(off%id#// f � �rl ,,i ��il '� I '�I,�, /r, rV I r�,.. ,. �I(���..� � `./ rl lui>,I ,,,, '.,/1�, ,r,I,r: 1N� ��... � �i4..'✓,�r, ��W�r rr ✓r rl, !ii/,r��% II �fs/�/���I/j,,. 1 i' I�jl � irro,, o,7P)r",i /,,P;/r//i r//, ;Gr f t/i /�qi ✓f,/r /%%,�° �%//,�/���% ,j ",,, r r, / /ml rr / �I�, ,;f ri rf,/��,� ��l�,e»���'l/ ✓,� f/r�i�:`�„�rrr %�;�x rig✓vl✓rally„ ,;m"W!Dili/;r,�„/ir Idrtu rr��,iel�,�irr, /rr�'�,l DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309 A53E 3329809FD8D0 / ✓ �/ �/�� '� %''���� r r roc%/�!� / ,,. � ������/�i 1���' f Jar /ri I .a i rr f ai 1 ZIP 42/ t f / ao� / / r / l / l f / ✓ON� / ,,io �,./ lit/a.✓/�„ l r // ,,,.., F r, � � r«r, r r✓/�1Jr r �� rir ii"mm ii ri�irvirrrr,rrv«rr�Jni«nUrJ«� ME w u mry91„tri c Ali ���ir,r a �Ysni/d /„�rii ✓i, ,J/?1�,,1, ,Vl, � )1 ,!,,,,, i�r „�,I' ,,�!I%�/?f �!F” W”" J)f1 ,(' ,.i„ /� i /, r ,. wvo�riirinw» r,,,h v�rm«,�rram i iur ;ui,"7rd ivir�lrc�rr;�rirKFw� Flf flr�? ''h^ r�rk�anA gum r famA6',�+ wJNto+;r1ow?�f of 'pao, r��kMJdrrv;Wliyfail, �h��«y"'�J„"�««rmrogy"�f ii�brr y; M iwyi Nrw J wy alrrsrm f 4" ry d i/ r DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 i,,, ✓ ,, ����/ �/ / /���� it/%��� �', ✓ , / ///// //i//i /��/� %//,rr /f/ 1 ��ir i, '� / ✓ �rr/or/i/r rrr � �� // i�� /; 15, P' » d! r J / r ,,.,/, ✓ �' V r r f �I r J 3111 i r �� ! �, IIIIIIIIIII I I �Ir / "'Iu 'im liuullll r "f �� I� �� t l�ivmuumuuuuu V41h �iliiVViVumu u���uu�uuuuuuuuuuuu rG �' I' / Y uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu V VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV>I VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV r / r r / uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuum uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu ""' ,�%/°: q "'r'rr `` vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvm� /. �//, IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII r r / I r' l r r I r r r ,r r / ✓ � r it r r ��i,r,,✓,.. /r, r ,. /�r /� / ,�/. / ,l I_.. � i� c r,11��(„G'��/. ISI��,.„„ �✓l��r�����"M/r�G�i - r r r ,,, rrr✓�il,r �. / r / f „� r� c r �„Nr r sr r rrii � ///..., ...../// ., / r /i /�// r F r i ,,,,,,•;:: � "i.,� .ro, ,-.'..., ' �.., � ', � .,, + �sii ..,,. "�i% T" air , (r,ii�J��jl r 1��,��s. / eli�slJ �/rrr l �/�� r'/it%r-:. r r r � � / / r ,,rN /, a,, ,r�%�r o„ ./�,;//�ii�/�/���� Iii ���✓H i%,ir,,;,,,./1f�/��////O�„"d��l /g' � / ///�� i�l 1�6 ,� 7j"N / I/y,.. DocuSlgn Envelope ID D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 n L, � . ,i/lie�/,�/f� V I o I y✓/ilii//a //�%� ;,, f Ir ri "�° �1ri�,1�/ � �;,�� �`/i, r / ✓,���„ v'%�;i,,'%� � I n r;/i ,iii//a,', � �,io� ��?��I�r al� �r ,a / / l / 11 ill Illiol�ll��u �"�IIII �-;ILII I / / I rr J f u � oia i0/ ��l�ar/� /,+/✓%N�/%��P6�%//�f�r(//D{rJirJ, iry%I//r '+ANlIY '/ / rr^ Y i„ /l/ /%oi//// !tt ,,,, �/.,,. l ✓I f , / 11/1/,.�� r ��� / �, i,.% �,. �� r Je ter „ d/ ////// / /, %/' /ter,, ,ii�� 11t��//i�,y ,,,,� ,y� i / /. /; iii/r ���� '// �/�%���✓/�///il�%�/%'' ?% f,,,.a,�,'//,r� r N�'�h�'�'(Nffl�lllll��1���l�P��f lif»� �1�11111111111U�I�OVI( 'f � �"��'�K����IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIh(��I�1��1 ����144 �1����(�V �l����?1�61��� ""'' "" DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 rt' l/ ,,,, .< ,rir„ „oi //iii/,,,00i i, ,,,,,,,r.✓////i//%/ill//////O ,/✓ %ri /i////l/,/i�rririp/rrol�/[ l�/ ,.,,..,,.., �, ,,�, ,,.,,r,,,,.. ..,/,,,, l it if /, fi�Aih RANVf 411 ( Ill fV1t'p IPp�'G ..ill, pfti%ii e a ,...�� r,,r r � rr y w ,�, �s,H� v r� wN r»»imer,,.n F o, ,,� �N.. � u__r� or � i —,.i i_. � M�ro+hwNa,. ➢r` V Nu..'v v VONT. i� ,..,n ily,„,„...,� ,„r,,,�er„, ,,;;., ....r,�.ry iP+v�n.,��Nf. r�m�rrr,«mri�nn�.„/y, ,"n ,r N➢, ^..., ��,n... 1 ,,..,., °"f ,.,, li� 0��1,Wi�J ,r,.�i�7�,�� iBW,rirV.vi,,ww�r�rv�;N'-.�/rJl I ,,,, � /J i',y' "iii 7Yi�✓'"yw�r"rn7�'m` ,i, i7��7j l�iw�mV^i�r �o,...,,...rrr �I . /i, ,.,. r7 r i/,../r ,iL;!„ ,��' i rr.,, /i ��! / v, ,,:,, �- / ,:1/n r ,�,r l �O;� � � J, � i � a ai//�� �N,l/ r�i r�ll �l/;✓e Ir �, ' G' � �� }. i lr✓ � �' �I ��;-1r/ l p�/,;,%//�/r��rr r�//%IyY r ����/gggti/�r I�/„/din .�' r , i r✓,%, u, Nr/;;m � �„r � �-��i� /4/rs�/��/ l�r/�//��,�/ /e�, a 1, V y 1' ��y ./. r. 1/,1'Y� � v y�r n('^ r I��V���i 1!� :�� �� r' ,� �,.r / % /ir�,r J,✓i/'.;l.;�lri 1'. ('; ��.,�V ,r�/p I% i�/lJ� %', � / l � � ,n V! �, r ,i �r/% jr ,��/Ir✓r ii �,���I. �/ Vi9�/IY,,, .i/9/r e� / X11 /1 I ✓r f /� I�, � sJ i � � of � lf�Nlu�`r �, l�drn���lP�� �ip fl/� o r, u i U 1 J,� , I l /1 r DocuSign Envelope ID: D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 4/4 f / ���, ` is � �� � / ��' � , ��,6�'i ry � ✓ � �'�: l: �� � l/�l � � ' ✓ uurr���r ,� � u✓r vii, °, ,. I %��/� !%�ri�/ � � r r r ,� !(N,✓ar'Y f� T �� rrr �6'U,y 'U'trr� �p �G'r>% ���, yor n � "l�i r 5�J+"mb' vr�ii � � ,'rr /i �✓/I Ir / r,ii�rii� "/ � Il -�r �r �r+.% �r�' l✓n✓n/w,�?; "� ��iii a. /�"`lkl r '��ir il'r, ��/✓� � �;' � r � �Y`�1�`.. ?�� i�rifOr � „�r� J ��CI ,r��41� r r ! I 1141 � ,/ / �/�� � (U '� /�i,� i /'✓�Y�f '� r!i�/ r � rrr ��rn r , rf/ i �� y�rrr /✓ ��. � � ""% `� � r�� r � !✓ r .rr Wei Ur r� �fr l �'�I� d .. qq r 4 �r Yq (i� p �/j r,' F�%� I,1�1��19��urs l� s� /�!�,f i✓�� lir //��I(/�' N r�� q i P / � r� r, h r°r�✓ Dr d I III I I 'gym fMMr' VMS JIM MEN ME DocuSign Envelope ID D247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 Ay %' ir/ r� r ../ rfl f � i 4��'� /' ��I� f ,� j/ r '/f/� r/�/'/✓ 1 /i//1 �/„ ��J%/ I s i �� .r,,��' ✓`, /' (/rr ���//%/rr��///,i%//i �rf�i/r/r/u/ G��,�%/� /�;;..�xr , r I � IIIIIIIIIIIII // / I I sY / l� � ii iu "" i�lllllllllllllll uuuu,,,uu f VIR 41,4.7 /l/Po ra III IIII I V, uluu um u i IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII � ' a o 1 //DocuSign Envelope ID D,247EF3F-422C-4309-A53E-3329809FD8D0 / TF Oi / !J i I II L. I. i I I wl� 1 1 i i/ r /! 1611u11g I � Q/ II� II 141 I � ilw a�llllllllllll���� ���uuulu 1i' IVI i 1,7 top „ mrrfi/wIlltWi PROJECT LOCATION O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT .. 131.1 LEOPARD ST CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS,78410 P �s p NUECES BAY ® NUECES COUNTY O.N.STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT z +` VICINITY MAP 4 z N SCALE: NTS ° W F Q— LOCATION MAP g w ffeo m C1 1—1=Q � FOR DRAWING INDEX SHEET SEE SHEET G2 � r PREPARED FOR: zQ CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI s w O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT �� ;GN�llI°°°G� I rllV l w CLEARWELL NO.3 DZAWlll'4GS www U > 3w� o zU� U PREPARED BY: IN ASSOCIATION WITH: IN ASSOCIATION WITH. CALL BEFORE YOU DIC! w BATH ENGINEERING HAZEN AND SAWYER / A 5656 S. STAPLES, SUITE 110 500 N. SHORELINE BLVD., SUITE 1102 ^ '+ vxa c.i a s 11 y o � .a,..,.a�„,...... CORPUS CHRISTI, T% 78411-4655 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78401 TBPE FIRM NO. F-829 TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO. F-13618 THE LONE sna ARDURRA NT i,F,CAi,N 3COMPANY 14 sa �cl AT 1 800 869-8344 co.a.o..�.�..o.- —E..E. ,1„�_,w,,m 1 146 WTR-477 d �ano�Ecrx 18131H cEHmw M-1— INSMUMEMMM . M M—W.W.W. S— Z 11.21 1 —T.Sl M. mmwNE WDRn Dor ON n F—E =2=21-M ltx= 2 =2 —E E llE-- w I 11 El =�rl lu , Iry P&ID E .0.1=I p1t:29W. I E ==Ml—I'll T,srn arm .1 E —EL O =1 MMIP 121= P.I. =1 M.P 121= mL 1. CQNm I L E IU I.- ail TYPICAL LEGEND/SYMBOLS LINETYPES SYMBOLS PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM SYMBOLS --y ` a r � .... .a x xw rox ® Eaae ;:• w wow r ¢c rant o rauxorc xx � moffsssm�rxmr xcw $'.._. 11 .':.........____.... w�P nme rare E----------7 ewro woro armors* a„, s wart uro .n omrt 9 mx warn nuamon qua tarn are � nxe ® a ru •o�m p wore mx��wauim � mmnrtr vxsc 3 aD smug arra n.wce _ aP Dort �oP m r xwxr ®w" � F-o-3 5uoe are _ _ E-5 awn art�e � _ ®mrm vrua ur mreosm in.[ena eognrry .. aow vPe merti xrt xao axrm ® ..r a� $uart ra[ urt wv[ wI ,TE ,Frrraartr eamrtnexen a�,.exr � HATCH PATTERNS GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS DETAIL SECTION ID SYSTEM r; N Usti Q nT rMrnsuxrMrrvn _ d W ExI51lNG(PLAN) PROPOSED(PLAN) L p(5) ewsr.wr aver raEwmr o eroa newoarvso iry P�aGeuree L. -111 viM xu� N— rn.c X r�xw w 1 P ANrVIEW TITLE � U e P x uue en xu�ro�r,ro` NORTH ARROW` � ��� E rver .s uaN c ec rP Tx aMrry N IF 11111 FlIT `7 MESNILMLINT D s sr erre D ee rwwvvrt a Eory IPE xu N u rauorvs �,I�rrT X DTAIL TITLE N2 NI —MO�IEI LITAE'l Ll s rvm, 1 .1rvEIL—IL °� T�seE re�xEry , . ``oT nre �� wy o�c(sI orenry Ec1p" PO J— 4 E rn L w ovarewn w U g w� —> �ry a Pon oxaMx. w p x N IL ELE—N U SECTION/PROFILE E.ws o�E+E.wsirve u �ua'9�Eg1�Prr�F,E rv4J�P` 3 w a Q Z F r x avEre Z U 2 W Q a r rw.>rr erre✓rt«n „o, too.OEN rrE, va.�ory T.Ere"�rvw xrvI. EZM. o z w c < r..mEar sw al .rlo>w °,u"r ore sarvnarev 1-1norm nme evr wv.ff crrm wort..nam roer z o x rorvs PEre xrvxTE IIAIA noEal EN POLIT-LENE aE ®� 7�ii%i r as w.me., xrM , rv�re�P 1-10—N 111— xn x�ox sEre�oE PuxPs,<,�oryre,o $� < rxcrrn wawrus rota irvsor oixrrvsiory a nre rrvT ccau oanxnry°rvc. 5 �I LI�I �ro wrtwe SPS- �re°ry PAPE E11F �ucv „�,e,,,.TPre,reEaxEM P� ° WTR-477 J ra �urvcPiary aax .—I � ran°rECTx 18131H m&e ^^ OLMM .�% . . ) �» ) . . ¢ � { _ i �\} r_ _ . . ., __ <| w dd = ` - d ` � � \\ _ & § __® 12' ` ^ ^ � , ` ^ 21- } \ ) &§ z�« } z�» ( , � tt \ �5 /® } , ac KKrss_ o r.G6 E.x e�_ as it n ei s L" TIT IjU 8 x� TTT - CONTROL PLAN - „exrsr n.xr mss m xrsr mx. wrs�'-am tress s a a�rsn) rmt wrs��-smesu sa a�rsn) — _ 'ew an° 1O° in enc e�vsmogrurwv ,o � I➢ i`K �W oUQ1=ti w U e,.vn xo• � r"stn calx[1r smwc � r��� t e � w wz_ a w g rx aru na_ws xxm m w xc .s ��i�r w z srmr�rmn ,II v `"x s mro�iesvmar m mxmnm.yvacx� w 5 i �i ZOa o W 0 4 xc�ss xoro l 1 o er5x n0♦ N z mu9wiuxar�n se mepnxm F I ersx no• I i.r1c axmarat rut unuzc mus xor aswrurm rat mxm rxa[crs �o uu sroxxcs mrrs mo n snuwn ro wm mnavx.rox x ImIIIIIIII M __ __J c.nE aamxrox n ssroxne.s rm wsmnc rxc s�x.ayxa mo 6 0, 146 xR umxxc.wwi.a�c iaaxc xirvaxc mus mo xann.a�c uscrxmx Pondc�w xc xo. mnmwxnrs wrs ar axrscnoxs mx ants.xusraxcc mrs 1 EXISTING MASTER SITE PLAN ea ------------ - ____ sem:�•-� si`"�,s� nx WTR-477 INSETA "'° "cn"'°'n"c mrs s" a" vPxax�r. retain z � o Eo �re a�oa. ress°xE, � s.� amore re� ,.,,�.,... ��rere�.oPre �oMEre.re,re � �S 0 0 sEo II T T El IIIHIIE 7— E Ir j � lu, -- LID,I .Ere re a �.reEw I—E ....: . o a.o iii=c z l; —11=IPPL. m �re �P nre,ore 3 ka s rem�,m��Ire e s �° I—T-1— ID— ... re..E suE..� w� EoI. o �P� log sore�,E.mow $ ° a I w¢v p ryo U� i 'Ip�"H Z IE I Uly O a I I 7 146 PROPOSED MAST ER SITE PLAN mreo D—.Na Bp E,=reo fru s=E re`psi re WO-477 0 la ]TMw nii I w I`�' I I (�) r amr suiu�s S I n�'LIEa nn nna - ° -� a�ry �aa,a°.a II .II .11 ` asry rva.z 1) ..Ec iou,e Y —_ - ) e J l j � � � nxrt i fzm / Q.wur s wv o CC CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PFD-PHASE 1 - FlIT1111 o s ry eox srnau rnscmu�s fnn�uunzw>.ce III I,.I as ry L ( 1 c,cvz,xuo 10 o� �a smu _ o �A w s,n°�n�.Pnwn.ann 0 I. 1 1 '� ....... maa�aa� w<,Ea soPPl. � � ry Po s,„.°ry uof°.�kms.a� � 3 n c°asmnrna s°�rww.na° �'� ,,. z�� E n P�ate's a° p A.rv,���>a•�,�°�Aar a z X” '� Q mss b°nns rox u.n°nn. 'w m 0 £F o N "s A SEQUENCING 6 1 146 /—J,PLAN-PHASE1 —rv.— WTR 477 - a..................... v,�..r-. �c•,szc sas) it 4 area t. c uv� YAA .4 a fa, a mss° usz }�„sns, s ------------ r„ n =a� n �° k1 eEoc ._. ° .�� Ta wnsu wnTEa °w 3 vEa '— � suvvE.vuua uc� Hi�p � Eorewcu nnT°ry &"�" "' eHEo aow CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PFD PHASE 2 ° �°1� �>ii�i �.xo°PPnc�Pcrenoss n Pxns� or Aruna I:. �>�,>� E aErEa,o suEE,cE roa Pro s+ueaEs. � Ton eow , all o " T>TiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiTiT> _ MllrT'.1 lk Q� J' 'I� ��e w i ° III IN 0 0 sR°�° N— =Ero� ° °aE�P° �EM= E o o° P�E,E° w a rm _.._ aEaoaE Pw„,aow,o IL—ILLE Z n P ,a I a° 0 A3'Io T.°E°EE ATE„T ILE�w<EE 5 a Z -- --- --. z aTua°EE°S°°E°E°a°wEE ,s w a z "v2, reEEErecxcE.u,o PECErn,ox n a, m w w —EM, E,c E,arec Tu,c a,rac O O w Jg w� =,—E Tar. �°� o x wa n Z U Q Q n.. F a � �u O �u Z U ■ Z e � O ' \ N €` \ CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING 46 PLAN PHASE 2 a � :D.:oEsu s�EET5........n...... EEE � ain i 11M Erv.<,ory -- I re�ry rva, � � resrearv.rvry reo, i 1112, �rvrv� nrvROF �� on, �- I ,� �renr cm caLc w acw I>m -II"""-- —""-- 1.1 M F�ow o ' nM m z couenm aow CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PFD-PHASE 3 6 "e`ox sPFcx Pre IEIIFI Fs Fare unxrervwa -. os _ or awn oa�w.=oxs ouc rvc " mns,reun on. z.IEFEI,o s,En cl Fore Pm s—LI," m I El ;FIFnn _ x °RE "���_" x � � FuareouEuwFs xn Fre o 0 IT"i con=,rex�on n,xs Fx„FF ,,,�, srennxreF o w o \ � w rv�xxvrvaxouErvon� J sre ory a E,Ere 3111 i �ry �� LI ary ......... aarvo IIS a Ma X"'.LN e _.._....._.._._. o now,o 5 CrvoasMMawrvorvfG x,of�n rFrvF� (Dz a wecF ory rze "v�} I 0 orvsma*a e�nsF u�siu c�an.Es ry w ¢ Z a.oo ^w p } - Fore ree�oenF ory of v"wirure eu�raia) w Z F U S �” - rvsuu*ary of n;rvF soa N W B a ous ¢J Z w�,wn�Ea Eicvn.E � ewwwEu rva Ernn � soreoor*orvr \ I _ - 0 Ll vuvFNw coua�-1 wnu 4 U 0 au = 3w a a Q�f Ore ,„.,a orvxo�,rvo z� Q Su O z Z 0 coa�[F on°N not Pwux.xreoucx Z O Mry e _ � p €` \ CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING . 10 0� 146 r3�PLAN PHASE 3 n. e _ a � reemreo or,xw rva rvc. o aursu sxe�F� 6 a. a;. nn;.n.;.n.nw � cFc«s�E swEEsi o WTR 477 .a � weFreace.. �p 7 .:. goo- � P•R e:.�.�r:::.,«. .i�. 1,•. `�. a ILI rea � • ,Tarea,: -0o- � i. �u em nsas� o=,rereu,ore reo. owe > JT�uw w I �\ ooearem aaw w 3 0 z >; CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PFD PHASE 4 e `\ c ws Pwn u�rss reo __ rCEmF i. were,o svecr n„ux o as ooIE5 NTE_ 7. reEEEre'o IHE Fore EFD !Q 0 2 W J= a ECErvo: V a ti W w I reire,i „ P��E O m m re reo�areE aaoEre o 9 �..... , o _ � R o s0oaTo oMP Eo E.,ZIII o I' II IIS o a .51N ,,,.,,.,.,,, PaoPa�a PP�o � a LII .,- areE,P,o�a .e �reorea To« .11, re z v 11111 w<,E0 o=,00u,IN ore aow 5 — E_<P- 1 rea (D °!R°�ore oT 000 reo a�oa z Z_ — IT—IC IIPNo�o w a z weoiory ae Y',.: t vuv�c 2 m x w I�INEwo \ N=LL—re oT a w<,EParea © are—P,o—N.a ere v 1 m v o x w v a ti s w�.,000°00 N v a � • � 0o0P0Rore �� Q \ ° z � o � U Z � O ~ CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING ET 11 0� 146 \q\PLAN PHASE 4 a reEmreo orrsw Na Na o tour su sHEE,s� B i................... cEu«sEE s~EEs� o WTR 477 .a � �eEreaEo.. ieiain �N=uET�NT=snEET NI m m 7 i . X0.4. L 115461 e M El IN 1 1 +• FE,E„Eo w„TEn v J I N=,nNNTIN n� ETEN I�Ia i .- =EIMENT„,IN � FENINIE ILII 2 z cane NEo aow CONSTRUCISON SEQUENCING PFD PHASE 5 w aow 1' ucEss reo ---- NIT' o a • sPEcx PreoEo're —`N'N 01 35TEr-IE - - or aarn oaEw.T oxs ouc NI -- I' mns,reucn oN. reEEEI To INEn c�core PF srMea�s. ti m m m WWW 1 � II1 _ c m use m Ln 1 „oFIL ,EE o W TENiN NNEA TN„� o EEnENI o =Ero EEIPE, �NnE NNIEn�N nl�nN III E E� N,sPIE�NsEE o I IIS o X11 N- -IN E Mr EI .._.._....._.._._. z v =EnIEN�E nF�T� E s P�r aEEE==nI a � Z — o �I.PEETIN w a Z a0� � wzF o w � oa z 3w Va a Z U F r PTi� ww W O Z \ � O 00 ° � N €` \ CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING T 12 0� 146 PN PHASE 5 o snE _ LE 1�.o a � nEmno oraow Na Na o auEsu a. a..n.nn..n......w LA 'FIFE sEE sNEEs� o WTR 477 .a � �cFnaEz.. ieiain ; m °".oo"" o �- TE..EM E°To„°=°MlaRYIE M(-E=) Pcry 1a€=,°,M E1,111LI ae°o 12L I ,o aME= e€=FfR 11 `1"I T" °°"T"«, �. =ao°PRS=°o=Fo'E«Po=o"°o: E". K"o E�"°�. E , T�E aPP«P°LE SEE" °a ry P"°TE %j �° =a sE°ME�T<,°� p i CE EryEE T°11"10°"E°E E°"T"E°° °"°„"E P"°,Ea o M°=,°E"E,„"E°<, s u�u =E°ME"T„, \, EEE"°".°E .�"TEE. ,�°FEII— °"E°" l�1LJLu II I i o"GI P—C °c o�iE<P k @ � �re°,��w,","E reE°°"E�,EMs°E,"E�"s<"°°T°„"E"E�sE"MT. TTS 1 : s \ , a °> osoA. -r �- � Q E��°E°" w."Ew° ... LEA—L : S w �T� _ W oroM o" - u� a 3w m —IIS ID o - a z a w 5z o �m wzF Oa s r a z OF- SEE w = 3w �w �• / /� zci0 o �Q Q a + i 5 � :D.:46 e0 \a --- STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN ssusEfsE 117 awc�G14 EE.rva .w,� wererv,�i _ vas y r�1,ere cess <,a„„.arc�e rver s �rvA—D�ea ceao .. ee ae= tl�ru1 sEr mreE �” g�� - e�re�e ,-a�Ps eorery krePo57s >:+:;:....is�ei_.... �re Vs,s �F+ ES°�cc�`Pa a arrcnx v s""°" cossnucna ivos cra cosw.nm rr axx,m�sE.fEscc =-� TEMPORARY.'&TERFABR/C CURB/NLET-PLAN AMAI LE-PLAN /NLETPROTECT/ONBreETA/L sowrerrr,.-o-�, ZFF� ,wCH E I,,,F reE s—e rver.o s-ew,ax ePerv�rvc s�rF�swr"E�i�,. Ew,"p aos<IF-w,llrv. TEiLfPORARYSEO/iHENTCONTROL FENCEDETA/L - l Q F—A J \ <a on a.l`a'nd "; g . lo a I II mwm 4K �2 ouvarv¢eo wovery xnaz uesu ev rxx yr El "wE�nE-na"s.Er xa wr...F. U R ndreic sPeiees a uw.see nate s LA U w�ae�ora�c s<ae�eaei4�ree`��oP oeww ROCKF/L TEROAM.4T EARTNENBOTTObfC/1ANNEL \La���) nas�'x,_ rvo=,c�E 1-111 cc, — = ALS ))) LIE —1(111FE F—D) .a m— 1".aara aro aaae�c a,cu,r eo r s<oau"ic"�cp1 a w¢ arw ami"c xo�"s,Hc� m ¢a smr sEe rvo:°, .......::::. Mores: __ -- .. ... x__________ m ¢y erverv,oe _ x, _..3_.i._.^.._:7_..:.fY,P_.P �Xaowurve -1 ~ p z l ao a 1"11ua 1-1 ma. —N e ¢ F rn a rn PLAN w¢ CURB � /NLETPROTECT/ONOETA/L SECT/ONAv7 STAB/L/ZED CONSTRUCT/ONENTiPANCE o w w rva,.c s—E rvo,,c s—E rvo.,c A—E w z a _ _ zU¢ r~i1 z x rte,m wue.cs swx ex csxn.r x oca wsc vr.sw s s�w�n ff aYm"E.s _ a m i'0—%Z tl1"°'sc �"s.xr "�.°Rm 11 "�c A. µ°o:""p�.nx.ao�xs."o$°ro""°u�s�ro c�"�wFc"°smr°v°.rmsr�..>.ox..nbx ss m r,m. s o"�"s''Fr`m"roxoo in'ows°rs"m''mm'a'.""`m r" x p. gu�umanE z pa .,�.Fgwc -E�TME .TMs"Emm. "n1 nE .o IN. r sron. E m r e. wn nE s an o ro.E n�" .m w.1sZ"es rrcm„>. ocA"o FEE �,.�ex sxcE—EMIL l 10 ME s�em mrn ro .�" rm..nr w"vr mw�E...,.n roc consmccna sre—EN CE EEa• acg4 rvG rv,146 e. "ur morEcnm�c sw.nE iax mEo.s sca.s roc sm"a of smear.s sne�nn.�r 'a er ME III roc cc�ouv"n s,o ry"Erew.ee scaEmurs ca.�w w,r nE smnlm WTR-477 d raa Ell 18131H oar.��mEE.ry Mrax"1—ME vm me I ME rt ME µ sties I Ie eE moimnam ro x n u n:xarorawus ro rxc runt asry rva.� ��� .I �^_ � e .. o x n mxmown umrEa xu nr w me eQ 1U111.ME Wl I x M E—osroasx �� IIUUII II�L.� rvom p ;� e \ t` xlp M°=L UITL��Ml va�a�agnI I E 'Cry rva z �rL,ca e�oc'I 1 I rxe coxixraixuac°mnxro sterno.°Fick es r 110uxc om°nnmrm d' �f�,J I -, o p ,o\ r°vr Eial s sus nu EE su�nm�m�e=11E yen mw e s�o�°M°�:ory _ n nn <i f _ sem ��P PEva. a P4 _ a � � � nsnwuwrs wnnv arm an�u�� _ of n.n xx n .°mwa.wME orvrvm U.r14iaw u�xrc�w sau�m °i aosry rvo.s Eq °b c InC—u—. �cn u......umn x J aswnsu ro vn� l. E,R ap� RAMeP m�x�wxr rw0nn 1r=man oustaaax� —M�M rvoRm—uw—1 or. 121 zE aEsam�,�ME 1.w.��waE�rox�na�awxa� I J w a a __— �mw z o was mnc o U W srorewss swan �i o 3 w p a Z WOO O � O § F / N 146 elo1 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN . �nxx �rva rva ep // __ s �•-w I°ro"w`v sn WTR-477 �n 81 aIA a 1 • i EA n na ni��� P x so on,ono� �x• w , --- i ex aeau ontw h e� um o � � `w. 1 A ° P \4 E-1 ti � �T F Iii ' � e,�' � �fj 9 \� i✓'' ` \° �/' v�\�i� / ✓ � 0 \ v t , W P i �, '✓�✓ , %,/��✓ ✓ / /> � ��?-..� , i� v �v✓ �� v�� �'� � III o ✓r✓� / �e ✓ �j� T I° " �s�a.a.no „En • .o ff wawn 3 1 N Z. ,w o E'l d A ? w>2 Q o �l 11 111 `[w5i Q EUSi l6 MP Q F 0 es�sr R � ,vn=Ear I—TVIm c:s a2 orenry LNnE 3 z U w Z EllO w ®6 5 Q Ell 1�R a,evum ° O .. w�. u[u Exss' o an.n�L,En Lo� _N LINE n 16 „146 s J (1 DEMOLITION PLANsa BASELINE ASTAO+aOTO STA4+25 �w ��aooauven�n�. __ ' a' M�szc s,¢�s) inns swu ec nvn.4n coxws,uv >oMLL snsEzs) q°'11z°` WTR-477 o �.D3mEn,ry -- _______________________ __ °.::, xry ___________________ ____ s"uPP,.w 7 o��x �x �p��rvx ry so;x II o � � e J �3 o W Kz 02�W W o, w w n o c:is s vm urvE (� 000 z o «e�a o En n =<c i0 X000 �� o a 00 - — wa mmx z� w0W a0 zN e Oma+ U Q N d .d 3wa 2� rvry mss,no wxnre�rvn R''� �U o w a o as as as xs sPQ'�u: s u: y W e }}I €`°q, ry r,�� s.�ry cxs ssrry�Euxrvoscre,nosryryj'sxemorvsx�,cvx�sa srvE ❑ r5i� s� oxes's 1 rvW-- ¢rvE II _II - o--- —ET co,ryo_ 17 146 DEMOIONABASELINEASTA4+25TOSTA8+00 uu WTR-477 aw r..D4 reEE.rea 9 casmc aunnEu s > e „ „ a �� SECTION A-A e �� ' F - wzf:i--s' (ruu aze arms) IS' z rvl.i f Exs E�Ecrre cu e�oc — W 4 K �Z `( t ' •n - --- g �m z g w i w— >4 cXr6WUFLL U (7 E: � ZQ W A a £F ~ y 18 146 s �3,DEMOLITION PLAN BASELINE A STA.1W TD STA 4+25 ��ao oauveH�n�. _. m' pwr sa sx¢rs) oru.spa sxms) WTR-477 a .Pno,E�,re rararn r ✓ � � ��i. 2a"�"�,'sn,.�„Cd - �� � a +as °^a .i� �f,.r,..a �9 'x /� je w �a y ,vY OhIII}ff F l WT p O$ .r n� �, '.� *"'��.. ter•, on 'JR4'-�1° x;; t, � a� a_ � �� .� " �m uYl o iol T rw> .r..y"'4.�G i ,,"`°}�'_ f�� `1� ! j _`{.�'� 1��• '+..I�pl \�� � �� fix-. � _:#-"-—H I ��u..�, � �J� �_ T} Rt. Ui "'"..�,. w4ax1^� R v ull acuaa �..@av cep.fa Mmtnc-�saonw, "� P'ass, d $ SMm, - KKL4TER P'�`IXCt,Pfif}NI PLANT.. HIGH 9ER,�1CS�"R'UiFN-S�N40i .i �,19 146 a1 NOTE: — ' .. 6TE2U'C"I"l�l8�1L THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS .m,S'E$4W00 r, A WTR 477 *� wudwn�s�a s ,ef..p+'pea.,excexa WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, -- w-----'+- -* -•--- — s,a,n AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. Hm •_-'hl.x}fey . (iters J- T r a 'a 1 hl— T", A�, sme, AT n� � ' xiu�',' / r a ss t: a ,�= Py. y�{ I r , � � {^ � � �o = p— z a x w w f T3�� � 1 � �"-,. 1-, ~" � caarens•�s+�w.rii c kp � � ear WAX99, e�anr d ens'mevax�saaRRLP 'f�sltara ?'1'�Ss' m "a,�'s4+',: r/Mg ..CSL.F'a tis f"kVW oaSN SmaSA a,wiisya2 £� 20 146 d� NOTE: .,a •: =:,. ".r ens THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS A°WTR-N477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, y Isla/n AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. D:7:i?,=,�. ! n «,na • �%4s' � s9 o a eta � ..' ,R. v -, �.2 ,x-a �;._ q L1.S7, t F 25a (( I �1j a� "�^g {�I t.(_L l rrv• III �i i ({ ��,-Iffl.Np .r a� (��L� a i {jy� �4if{j„'�� �4k.!� .. P u I.r I I �.u..,:�{{ { I V I.( 1 iQ7 '.1..-J .ipr �,r drdr ii �I.;:.0 C �i ”" � t1 �' j:•./ �', � TBI -�� �':i�l' ENS �� ��..��w . �` �i '� � III�I��I�!�'I wf';� '�GI+�C4�@I�'� d' � � �.h�a•��fic����f��-1`�;�r "" °�Q�� 1 77* JA Md. J11 a ' II °,___ L fix$ � 3 o o r"fF Bv,� L++'..,.'""TM ,rdy.+ •F }- "1:`r`� 2 wa , s r � ., .. .._ - ,. - � .. :. ,..... ..,,...._ ....... MON$"m 1, tL . { W,0I F Ti$ v HIGH Sta?1fk4".E PUG�19�kQ'IdiSE e - STRUQr Ttb#,trA,k.IXETAILS �.21 ,�146 NOTEig : arE«s xnvsravunssahtrrt nxs R9 ia[cxrt °�AooAo�.H°N,. a,'C Rp �:n� �awcw lass axecr am vas n a shwas THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS •— -- A WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, y isiain AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. Fi -41, IM j a II FFFFF {I �r 25 w ,f 0�a 7 .Pcfl `. Rs 7 N,w n n 1 � :Ol, is Q� � � dt- i r � ,II� - ul �—�:� a III I v,�:I q -� ➢'E !I `I i I �6� t� s: nv�� _ T,.� z �,a � \Tra�ll) � ur a V z '10 �o d iT +4�..i r � f i°.�... bf ��y � Y ft .Y' a�S.°� d Yx �N. §$ I�` "�'.� � ^'�Cfr�; .� ,.� ,�k'i✓n� �� ,,r'""� rye � W>2 �N s�HPos3C txM3 77 � nr`- �nx � *"k _ fi �� twT4�e fn raatirtrN wLANm' o e 'F$re i es � l vd [ �I� s� 57Rk�CrTWY�iX4I..1£�IfWYLS. £ 'yPrr a a` A� s e x ,ea b"" n«a L_,t?r $f c. ,t'"va .- rmmt aX � gtw+sursesuA uiarags e.r< THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS A WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, " isiain AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. C> eat lZ � � i �i'���r�I�f° :rp`f�r'1fi I�"� �r�r�r'1i"T�T"`� �f�sT��'� i �1���I �x•, � � ��., q Pffl4l.. 4 IDI k 3r ff tfa � tfiT � ,v g a9 l r - Pyy�. e e. ,C9 WPPx i..•h .., r" .�"�".. a U�ti R y All t y O " �m zF s I re. 0 s ^^;^. .kFftfl Ffl-TRA'H4N PI..P.ti? HLQtV SERVICE PUMP, FItDl.168'. STRUCTURAL DETAILS 23 146 m NOTE ta✓�,K�sx taArs Mnxcn vaa- sacro ee oe�r4. eueFru ° xx°, THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, - "" AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. °w°�°D13xE�x° r w L �E l U I � ( tAL F J.r. r01 � 0 Y ra W w 3� LnN- Y Gid eyS� dA G42L UM IR/a r C 4 O j � r r E // /o zV r r wN �a� <0 'r �Z r .w v w w ,� WRPU=CHR-1. exN. As ��� -- xi.. J r" � 4• ��y k WATER FILTRATNT ION PLAO 4 '?wm ' CLEARWELL DETAILS ulG xttx9 s•^ E.27 ,�148 WIF .R 1.54 eN Ef a_'.Tll eN¢eR n en[ THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS - ---- -" -- ---- --- --- -- WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. d a `P 't^S' «« ;,al kCsa,kµ[barW`a(,«nCe s {vzy e X ,,:kw�.dFaaifi tTi5x 4 •# A u W Ar rs y H✓at4tFe..Wr•C ana D14wEE ««.s�� ,, � -„y„,e � m%n=F.are�aueiWw3,1�[kr: a�o-kM,1? ,= awo- *✓wrs; - �%o ty � � 'r f"•.�pa � I. W �'l.9ck"'ri-�� %,1 � � '= A'�bau, d A, r+r: *; A yk R* { �,A " %a m� � �s� ��.+me r '. d� .� .,r�y� � � �. z �r -'w'• '�xt t�sv' W �u'' c ,� �'4� �' .�o- { ��, 5� I Yi 1y �I f ?A d4 N^Ya 4 R - r ✓��>=�-1�'"��,,.i'} -».eau"�� �=.- =..w € �-.y.�`�Nn+ nay r � � ✓W i P 2,ry, � ,�. 1 e '""„�.3,�h F�r^ � `r ':,d,cl a r.a W w35 j y„I,a a a i s,,r. � �fir'"�d `uJr,^✓rus s«,4 '5,�� a i a:,. P rea x•1 s �era ou a d 'si �g ia,r`,�r✓nrz�nr«nak ua�v rr.' -�„y!ax.' �/-'r` ��- n) r,�x:'k t 4 � � ,� „a �� w' �' !, _-- J. -,1,. �- _+d rvk AA lLL II €resvx as vas raw,a«s;pp � � Arr'�N p I A"k"tWC i JS"RR- d I a u.�`w'•Ck�,�...���.'yiL'9�9N n� I ,,rF4J��JLG'�rar�. .�iP��.,�.`a a.._�. €Lam ,ixgyt'�taaramtsst.� m��c;a�L-a i» k�x r, T f ' -"%` d' - - �, "rr�§ - I av x,„-w--.� +,df >°`w«��cw�ca`iw«w��a�mu: �. rq?wTre, -k 'v✓''«w` +rrerasrr mus r<a marw w%F cy T ✓ o'F s pp 7.r + •"` TI' ~ r 4a%wjW 7ssa +; Pf ✓ a f )«y� f t {E% 3 K a h� I �� _ �xa.r � t � i 1 aW, r ✓ � � ,.. r} r � .,.� y r �} 2 � � �e at r{' _Y � a �"-�<. � � ;✓ w Sui ��« a ,.va,ntu�rajs .—c�aa.ta�r�� �':it«�,8 w,�s � 'oa �a a i. �ACdY/€k„YR.:f ¢&4'f&SY �J � dC K hP AOtlP^ k Ak& 3"-f ,ym .�' ., •...� n�ry �� U + T AA m:.W8 L sg ' - zG�aa ati aer veurrw;saG uT s, -r v-x (E,15T 'F WATER,Su(kFAfE 1”{ `ska Vtlt, FLOOR PIAN _ -- ;="n,. 5Fu / ,';R7Ua 4AlA L E TJ%Py SC�k.E •` 1 0°:�� �.�ro naw+tr m� �?� ,AmW wa �. r �� \4..���I� m 2� � �+ r I � _ t �" r I X. }6 rtar i a7".T'1'W key,✓ ,,,., IN 2 a a' s zo re :mkms au�'IRsYPwms %' arsacv,+rzvw wm+n a h �Tj a I ,re avAelr=s&maarerw 4 MJ�W s$s(rsiw"4 A'% re dsaea w i �,-� a 1 x ra cwro wx x v a V a ks ra aaeti ez stie"3•+v r .gd' :� ( t :w 44 fy pA � T��' ITT ddd ✓,F "' � '' '�,;I��' Aeu d �,f w" a aa2R..Ea me viii w imtt s�+'�`hr �wm;�.�n,:" � - l�• ��;� �w j i 4`�4i "�'Y' r�' �.�,G I ,_-,V3.r1t&JiA Ak•�&:4`t9 CMN+f� k�54 � I I ..-s"dsP%p4uk462°i$A„d' xl,�!_ 1 II� �kII � � Q Q N �U ceau rh•rxwec, a "% I r".' J„�, � �¢ak yAo-a . r 3 � w z � "�-,✓r•;J J 'rz}°umw e,rai. I I ya�1x° � .&�_w h% '`a me^sw. � ai- � �� '' z�Q w ' F"���� ^� � � ,�v sAa ° � ��,.,: a dm¢+�sirL PA "kyr a✓ f”`� � � F - 5 I• �� ,�-µ`'.1r, aW. ��� ,ac,M,W �{ F tm,bitruttarak tnrutW ^�(' �! �' E �,r .,�y..._ -�."-'_V �.�,•� r=#d�.G.L""6 _m: _},. i..a _ , � """ ^rw or 1vm' xw r n. m �_. 4 :vM ,, ._..`___..,.. _..,_....,. ,J'f �rcyavarnvr✓<r€n«`r. sa+^ ,.'_5re"'"`" a m ., F=grCy fiMP, .. d F9 CJYaT(hP71,E v"Yia i7, 5f GT PaW - M}�iaTui-ugA4r3N gf�`trrF F�k3�' i.� '. £ ATE . N eUtn - : sav "� za 146 °�AooAwv.H°N�. THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS A WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED JUNE 19WTR-477 81, y is AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. nv`, 4 . AA 41 x i � '.� r iul'l a...uhy y It + I n as t 'M 12 w ( t ''terry laa.� Ka re °a� �77,, *'_". "*. �. a i t a ,, �.ra' a t 'Du W L ,�• I�J � T J 4'. h CA � � LITIIU WA>UL '4 �` �Ra T.�qf GLfcVVi tb{T,°& Garo H !'a3 w 4- x Nil-:W. taGrzu RNirbc0! �,w46rrr"lneW,x e� ;2 , � �saFr4 �xuy ,��A �_ .�- . . ,•. .. ,_ ,.+..:.a,.,F vufa43 3 3 r�„ /,u9 S SPb M^ _ ''„'*, 1_,�It "-�' g 'H4iditR F �., 94G @3.M" 6JS 41 1" p✓` F (. ,..,. r `A.. ,}, W 1 "su aCat 5 S&53 YnB *y 41} fib` W= atr;sl�s'€au•,M MkLEF Gt74 viV 7345 _..f'4,,.T@dGF A14 Gt1F1.-Y PrD Tt '_F�,IIrIG lY al a_al lop,' a_ w_. a U w i- zrmx,x os aM`ar rau raza 'tqe {' `" a Wt'+Lk `�-/air srxasYuar �. t s '.+rawSeYf f II ' j P* fi i `R p{i+yT EA44 { tt a•�a a fa, , TREd TER STQ 5E a WA L '3R,.p6 LUMN faETWLS, AR rrAL g bov,OL w a �nEE.29 146 a� F.A ETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS WTR-477 R FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED JUNE 1981,RE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. — I D1fi _ L J i 4 Li I I- ng .F �. � t ------r.. a' ox W ° t I F, _..— _ A�.I_ AIF 1,1=(. TY(IC.AI_ p,C)0( (AR Nr INV F l v 0u a �a p " ..._ _. o .. � w cII r r 6 flF k n )I �J U4 H dJ 0 c N w kF TYPK tI 1111 +fir` ow 1� .;,".�_.._..LFYWDThfRT16krU2nTFIEDItATWATER_Nt S TFXCPFtdNA9G10F SLAB PLAN N E� DETAH-S, D r _ " - kOOF f Fl,IV YN e I'= rX)nJo7 sCAl.L °F 30 a,146 ...__ ...aw..�_.W.._.�.,._..._.. _... ___ THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS L WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED JUNE 1981, AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. VP"°""" isiain TYPICAL LEGEND/SYMBOLS ErC�x LINETYPES SYMBOLS `.... 11 aco w reow Bwxr o,rE�BrE xx .^^... rere xox,Exrmesr a„, rePP xere rare E----------7 cwxa rBB ° wt uxE -------- BwrBe< ® x xorE: •. 9 swx es PUP tarn nBe XMe ® Fl P�Pr xmE Bur wLL eE CwID ai--Y.a FlxE xmrwr wn Box '3 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM SYMBOLS = aP pE B. U—ram e `° .„Eo eBor BEvnW �� E.�n�rv°EUEM���wEB,�ory � E.nry orv.arery EaU,o” 4 �eromxBxw�ttBW ------ —E .......P°MP BWoFl Bz '^ 4K W[fig BxoBBsnn supe are O 2�W HATCH PATTERNS GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS �4� ''wswa corv,reoE uru� T____T Be pQ Ex�sirva cuE/Bu,*EarEv vu�E L____J m ExATING(PLAN) PROPOSED(PLAN) n*'�.�rwsuxsMErvn Fwsirva eurvo rwuc� o EeRt O ws U :11 LEIT E—♦sB truer BaFvfxr o 8 ew ne 11NIo iry PucEuree M ung pow wn�Ea L—� rn —E—Y LFI 11—N ME o E Br o� . a o° B°Ere"ry �re EP.°�MEB �P =PEre MI 11 1p o PE N ..: B ern xwwx moss v pp s rvo=, uE .nsoE 11MEry r z ID 3 re °xP °u<rexE,�P°wEre,�°ry a `M o Iry X _jj�F 11 6/Y8m ° �7 Ill IN E _IE DETAIL/SECTION ID SYSTEM - w Ya.�o" x re11 EN e�'�;d;a(`trv°,LS�EI€rv— SECTION/PROFILE E.wn°'Ex Ewsirv� x W I o: —L EEE. 1 PLAN VIEW TITLE z U r B�war esr /xacx 5 rem *rereuwu urvi* NORTH ARROW < rnwExr swB x cnuoN"'E we 'Tf sm(st os(sIEEE are snrvi*,a+1-1a�-�Er.TUN w sow xxx ZO EssureE "E"' *iory EASEmE X DETAIL TITLE 1HIEE,11-ElEl.irvsoE ouErvsioryuE—El LEIEL rv .AP �re°ry PAPE s�rE Erv= reg° Er 31 �,146 v n»,w.: rsnw axwe wwvnP x„„EEa..„.Ere 11-MEN'P— WTR-477 d �P'.El 18131A PROJECT SCOPE CURB&GUTTER WATERLINES C2 exx .w 'M Z., 1 1 2 02. .........................�11 UTILITIES 11"MIX 1 21,m— ,4,YVrL-- *LA I'm,ILI W GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES A. W� 8uc— =V ?. Mr -m.—M """wv""v"'ro X x = Z=TML:2-11i U.1.1- W= 111g. -tL1.1 I AllTl ml mllver x ixg= u. m. Mlm. iu_ wu nm e[skim a sroowuv mw mm.-- M X M STREETS --w- -W. STORM WATER WASTEWATER 2. 0... 0. —m...mum—1-.1 7—;7. o.— U.1nor ff ucsu.a FM M'-- m— PX =M— MA.. u.u-1. M. FMINN=�— =L%T llgWI ZW— ail I xr,r.D1OxEE.x 4�a ID� e® s e Am xg SECTION A SECTION B III w........ YTT W i ❑ fs + + III + + III + + $ z O CLE ryR U-NO.1 COLUMN DEMO DETAIL ro w °P III III rue r rs wz1 0 0 ---- +PBOP ir.xou=-nu _ X00 e ¢ - O o O o au Oo A BE cBr Donn x egax cxwB 3 J a z ZUo i.mangrure mm mxve ro aux IT roxP�e�¢r. 0 _ rea k WT TO 1!WEE`WU—RWW DQ ? a� m x5 ro BE.noon 0 uSxm ro FlxSxm Flom i6 z U R oFaO O Op0�wl muFlert,COU—ro PUI- iS 9sB M ixq TEM w uqe m $eumt nano n 1 CMLEARWEroLL a¢.1 ROOF DEMO PLAN 4�. xonnu�wx mou ¢o E—BEaBPiroirBr ERRE I&®I p" 4�xcxo146 xinn �i 'a o mE %m IS mP ours c anon ePeno li xE m ca a "b n.mxmcmB s"•xw1 m.qB ro ox.,....wo s®.nu cPox o WTR 477 cwnnax. -� cPxaEc.. iei ain ,r p S � � ;� .rrau�svuxeue..a tee» �'� �e�� ', � "• � � W U W I a y ✓< . � `.-� 1 � JJ '^"h4 h � CORP!)$ WATER F1 0A MN Py.ANT' O � 9I..ur d3^ ft�sM'KAd� "Y ni 6 ekzco:Rmra Vnrxn iss.n,swn¢e sa a., s>rswxs 25 146 NOTE: THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS A WTR-477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, y 3s3ain AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. D12 c � u r.' a . ,uu I n —_ , ..... a I � C u _ El Ing ----- --------- - I I d _ I « C 11 4 Z ��1m ww w�F, El J w < Ej w r, i —_-�—' EJ T , ..I a.._ T I __ I •r_ .I- .".i .� ✓r 5..%._F J� >E///r*,(.'M`y�, COOUN STEVENS ? WATER FILTRATION PLANT O o �•" CLEAR WELL ROOF 1 �,.. d FLOOR PLANS ,..m„ .. �. �,.. a - areas a uores<ao nss"cares mN�uL,«o Esc xE<<� ; __ on,e ma:.cx se4 srcee.ao ea seeE,° A p„�,26 146 THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET ARE FROM THE O.N.STEVENS --- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- L WTR 477 WATER FILTRATION PLANT PLAN SET DATED MARCH 1954, HENCE ONLY. - AND ARE FOR REFE r�Mr s,„,ox ra a q cs .ve as°Imm c8� /. §I Po sa ............. �. I a 4o I y V t I I L K ---"--4, _ ec 11 ill a ' I I 4 YI CJ I—1-Q g `I I I . I , i i 1 F I I' I � ,PPOPmF➢uEVNflt xGl� � � { U � i• \ 1 1 , � I I t a i I 3 E I , i i i I , I c l 2 ; , I Im roam mm �• mo s i10 zzz m + m w a� acro � w O AV a � _ cu nm mac wuzr o.11rtx d 1 OZ w w / �,GLEARWELL N0.3 SITE/GRADING PLAN � a - a Ia1a1H ,cn Pr° c�uwsu xos � ° aw r..C4 nss,n° t G o m enoraarz nnn amore F evm ro erccnanon �m m rox rcruu gy� U O / 3 z 2 Q z A 28 o z a W c�eenA4.n n 146 GLEARWEll N0.3 PIPING PLAN �'\ / r�'u`„c�•-n s end o WTR-477 rvs E.��s~EE.ry >a o s«w.s.aa�wn s ssa can-tlilE 55.a �§ e3 i 5 ma d-sIA d-51a �E � 3� [kls wn�[al rv[ f5r.91m axMC 5a.a � &" ..nn NNna ..,�NNxa ,aa w,srew,.mreyi rvE A CLE ;. ,....i ARWELl 4 K In w L NO3 SECTION AA OURti� - ],.Y O � U na �5.a VIII E ° VIII o ba w m d ao� w e .Z w 0 x az g r� U O� a v Z U m Q h v Sw 00 G wa w. r U m ba Z a � ¢„ E. 35 ",146 B CLEARWELL N0.3 SECTION B-B - � .V".:I�-ia•plxs sz vmsl mxoorwwwcrvo. °& I-5 (Nu sz n.ns� mnm nEaNmmn.,u oErNu xE WTR-477 �� a �axaEo. lel aln >o e ~U a iwn / . :E.r"? u, om sa:wn i�) 4 r'°e a � aP wA.rnr r ��� EIF 11- rlrvr c �a E'll 11 a.A: p= W U - Q 1 PAVEMENT ANO DRAINAGE STA O+OOcTO STA 4+25� Qi - __ wm -e'irixs sia sn¢n) nnisnm mme r z ¢ � o x r I yw l 'azr oO — — — � --I— — zo ----- -- — --- <+ z a U >Q I1�Ir` I1Y�Ir` �4� W j d N V [r�-ss.s V fry-sm Z U Q w W Tl, 's $ e y a �R ON NR G. Gst' `�:s az ores z a £' I E.36 146 g WTR 477 STATION STATION - aRa+Ec.x 1a1a1A o In�Ind !_ C7=reEE.ry 5474 11 B oBaoP,` �rv5� r rvEg e „5 f5rvi 6n1 r:arerors wv�wso =IA.E 306.05 4451 11, 21- sV 5 e0� x � € m� s 5 1„2�r°m o s`„21 a8'n s�po Ill) �Ea6 rere °.P rz.re w ����������������soinx0.u nsE�ara asoc u„ ❑����.E=.<E.s�,w��Brzre 6rv6�rere6�ryry,6�6rv.E ��������e�� „©�; -- -II----II----fl_--4— II ---- -------- -------- -- - —__-----_-_--r---_—'711113 seJ1741 mre�E 21 11 $ d 4 K 2 t j (2)sPAVEMENT ANvD DRAINAGE STA 4+25 TO STA 8+00 O sreeo cre<oE ® o 0 crpG`ii zo ,-e awL ss EE,si U o - � ������iS( E w� w---LrerecRRRmPPP 3E ` II�/ 71 8 Goo G`_`o Z Ex sEurvE W O (DO 5 66 a � i a x z NL� – �m o0 �xE 8 DTZ BE reEreE ��E6 L'I w zz z N E-11 e 3 U a 0 a a �1—.Ellp o oz i i z am R � O w�E,rrz w� E. 37 0,146 es4— L- WTR-477 s�ATONsTATON a xEreaEc.. iei ain ew/..CB nEE.np Exon .,.snm oEEpE .].....r vuoc� .].. 5•a„n�voc� x•; 4•;a prep/E as 5a s p 5p �� °eflOP a ores ems° t mpn m-mv �v cwn 33 Me].s-------------- wa - ____ __—___- -- L- ------ ESA I sxis sre recti.... E5E ". `3 r/=ss.p sxis .. c�xvrtu rvp� ` 5sa ��sx xxx sxrns sa acw `\ russ.s 55p - ¢n �vn urvc `e:in tie wnre[nurvc - ` semre[re C �9 a=n/2a jn t ..5.E .5A A SECTION A-STA 2+21.34 ti X�� `m U e aE�a�m pm a 75E �- E PEaP].�« e� �iEEn�-Exn •xcr lam n.E:E� ma .E•�.oso: m o nim woe �� r -----�. - z ____ Ex�57 xcP '-_--_- �_ ____ ____ e5a e5p F a z w <0 M n W z �a� z = ¢�r .0 d ma n-Exw rxro m•mmunc Epp � ¢w¢ m U e ¢Q N 0 p SSA 55E U 0 N w a w s w/�,rux=rre/nr -mso w U a U wa i _ wp Z Q ua .s.p v/-9819 reT 38 146 SECTION 6-STA 5+74.41 ��ap pau/Ene rv�. . i s¢.a i Are WTR-477 d /ano�sc/x 1a1— .e•rcr�asos s..s«n.o�...s'an von s:.• . >aa --- .o• a aso: <- ;«b.s.�wKon; e• �i n�_e.so � s•xa lours Mai es --- Fl.�m w„ 4 �e soa ' i d sa -.... -..-. -... -.. -.... -.. -.... -.. -.... -.. -..-. -... -..-. ,so o= W w m G `m �SEG: moiTIGNG-sSTA'+¢ 76.01 ti X i'-�'( zsans) U Z d Z Q O Q W N �a� z F tWi1 0 U ZU¢ U1 O Lw U U U y Q Z # U �,39 146 �� WTR-477 d �ano�Ecrx 18131H aP ao x.,eE o�a xcrvRry<,�ary drvox��.v ry ry A Preop`wo'recc B aaaP Preop wucreurve B C10 P Preop ao Eµ wiaa,.a reeaucerervry�Es�re`Miw o Ex, .—IE reoPCa-R �o of $'.........saai...-:'. n.eo SEE aEowaE ,on' owls ouEaysm cne,e sop oN vrewmeo iryaox � 're"" coNsaucnoN sEouENcmc �o� owls,z'wucreuNc __ aunsE 1 c.,s e oawN .— —- - - uNc �-— _ - erPrssrva vnLL ' e aEuov[o n mzmz �'_____ _ _ __ ___________ __ __________________________ aaa i� w w Q & 3m d pp m -El k�a� a�rvEo E° � g ree. �c �rvo, Asn D _FLTIrve —� �s eeere e.eeueM rerv.ary reo EITI e ,a rvn o. � Q P � 1a �e= F a a. IIII ER d o F , E-1.a o 11 z. m w� Pe aN= exs,ae wn,ere,ne- w j �j�PROPOSED 48 WATERLINE IMPROVEMENTS 402 w W } srs"a,ee ^-.o'mill szec xEi �'Q ti ` O IIN C,ioN e[a[uov[o cauN[cnoN e[a[uov[o U cs.o i ¢o;"" reso sow"' reso � Preop xis re w lull ,oe' o•`u¢ Preop ucess reoro lull ae'vuve ------------------- ------ --------------- as.o sz.o Fxsa so— yea, vuve ss.o is a^wnc Fxsa so— a, soo e ex an soo ---- --_ _—_— n_ _---_ _—_ —_- 11 41 1 Z QQ m W SECTION A SECTION B-B a p r 0 11Z -o Mur ss -.o'�ruu sze sxFe=s� -�o'�ruu sze suFe=s� o y O els,z—11L w i O U U *o ee recuoveo dmpIop Nl.N --------------- --------------- ------------------------------------------------- ------ exs 111 OU 0 6 _________ ______r_______________________________________________�_____ PaP so^vuve U f INPE ary a,ee as o ®ti ao i as a �reoo�wry rva SECTION C-C WTR-477 of o i�� E;si e �Preae�.. lei ain O�,TT�r�EreEET N ... s werereca0 coeu_.nb carvrvmT ory B '¢°re"o.�sa,s Q. -A lua ,�3 s0 ore -reEreu D � § 0 au0a n.n,EE �S - - Preop rew re� Preop=w reu_, � � � o � 111 U e j PROPOSED 60 WATERLINEIMPROVEMENTS O 1—ILIEll �J E -o «r s�zE suEETsc SUE onVs,o scuEou�Eo woak-is rtNccHEPa0m aoi"nE u�H�uuu`.1 E0 z o a ^w G N eoc .. ...... ..... ..... ...... O LL 1 L 1 1 [ [ 1 4171 � �O w zE w re ore v _. 70.0 ............................ reuP o 60 Ea 60 waTEAu�E _ s=0 � — -- !re 600 N . 1 I I s=0 = o loo '00 41 146 ea SECTION A SECTION B-B WTR-477 E,s� s,reaEUT. ieiain Eln rv�e C12 EE.ry LJ. Q srere}ocwry:o�s e�oc 8 9w w�, rhes ca�f�. "q-�-- ryll � }' _W. aaaa aia�suaaam uu�s or niG,scrrvic� w cts ,iPws vwo wu�,ervoren,iory a�� aao d JJ 4 • osnn co I _ _ - _�__'__ reo uiry l T--' -•- --• ----- ���— -----� - «�° I-E 1111 E, PErv�,ren.�°ry�ry ory=nre � -- -- —J — — °�«EnrewEee � o N Fmk Jti K ��PROPOSED 12"WATERLINE IMPROVEMENTS ��MANHOLE AND VALVE ADJUSTMENT DETAIL U R d �W �J sc�,moo'F1111su I'�ns U \YrE!) 'QOE�M 11 xe vuuv sxn�1 ee e'pci ewe ® e wca a wca n,s ae(aM a= - 5 °ry ry nore�wn.Ere °ewe Pry°�o�°°ry�,E���.n�°°Kn� e a� �«rvre , z oo / �WU a a,o z Z U f~/1 - _ _ - _ - _ Z 5 rv�(sna za wc) s — _ _— cxs res wn��rec rvE uU O R o PRory rvc O Preop rv-T-unrvnoee ¢- N PROPOSED CHEMICAL TRENCH N e. 42 0,146 �scDRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS PROPOSED CHEMICAL TRENCH DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS mreo or,ww rvc rvo. �i si s�esj -4��s e.�-re i�uiis a :�re WTR-477 roM.reE�rvToreare o:a ire. E Q corvo,orvEo Ea;E°L PEry srMroe '� �d° .. reo,x EreEE — �, �. I Hill 11 Hill 11 Hill I Hill I I 11E 11—Ell M� ,1EExs, IIIIHIII o, � ��9 ' - —III-11 "s ,ER xs �EeE Terve PROPOSED 7"CONCRETE & PROP CONCRETE PAVEMENT \^ PAVEMENT DETAIL 1q PAVEMENT REPAIR DETAIL 2 TO EXIST CONCRETE TIE-IN DETAIL �o �J sraEE Ms �J cs scxE Ms h 5�ME �rvaTE1 �E E=rve 5—a LE=npNa reE—Gree erorv—e—°PEee�°e IEe.EE urv�IPEll- � _nd o rvee�EEre I w .erv�E anERErv—IE—° = RE E,I—IED e ry° _re —e—ns crvere E°M�ry 1`— I—El ervrere ®,z er — s M ery l -ll , z <ryrere> ll1 wi E ,E rerere�E s ory ,z wn,EreEry u o I—E—El LINE °_ s, A-2Illf N PROP MONOLITHIC CURB DETAIL CONC PAD FOR RELOCATED ANALYZER BLDG RELOCATED ANALYZER BLDG DRAIN LINE �J�.Ms �J11LE (r.0 Ms �J ssc - E - -osuszF suEE,s> � z a z E—I—IETE �P�nm> IIrvereETE reE,o�Eren ar EPe-sEwur " rii s L- I PrvE r,.Prv�c,,,Eo PnM corvervaE MPEG _ -E �o aE+ezE awe ow.i_auo z ¢J F Z.. - - tiu.�Ereal wreEs muPxrEo suecreroE oe(m) o N rvuruPureEiss nn ,z znon,arvs w uuo n O -El PPE wTl E wo,wE,o 50 voM rvu us w U U O sup N—L—N.$ nrPl � EE aory NEI PPE PsPE�. P co ww ii Z O 00 O 's 1 ory eu E Ta E,E+s,ry o�nuE,Eu ns uEau uEo y� rvT rvuous I Exsrvc cuu uuE = z O PPE caouP oe , of P Tn nPPre N° ,E mreE oreu oPEry rvc. a III III scE rvms Prva eo rvw — a 1111 III III III E+s rvo veep Pary wo P Ea To EmasFo -� -. -. c rvc mau w+o rvs of o,wnEre ar Exn wuE asw rvc 5EU eE of a rvEw srEELs sE.u,ry To TxE szE aEcouuEn°E H I4IVTPCI141 To En TUE °' _ - _ _ _ _ _ 111 . o a PEEErvsuree 1117 I'LL 1 rvory-suamw—1 v n DE-OnsTEre oo vi[w b VIII,„l Ill Ill I,SEcT aN vEw1 Ill Ill r IFa laoaEe.NE reoreo�ry T 43 146 EXISTING PCCP TO NEW STEEL/DIP/PRESTRESSED WALL PENETRATION THROUGH mreooraawwcrvo. e CONCRETE CONNECTION DETAIL 7 EXIST.CMU WALL DETAIL e8 PROPOSED 5.0'CONCRETE VALLEY GUTTER DETAIL WTR-477 e ,GEE.M, GEE M, U sG<E.NT, a .....T. iei3in C14 re� .� res res res res res aresre � e a 000�e4® re.o c 4 a.- 4a<�4reunEac _ - ?reoo. so w4 sn i .�4 s asm 14 0.E s reE e,�II F IIII ' SECTION A-Are �.. B � ssssosre e w4�rm� it re,ws,iv re rere,14® c4 a tioti �3 - . B j \ « II °a41 z 14 c'c SECTIONBB L 14 4 Iff I IIIj Ud~jd A� A U Wo 41 1 Pre - ¢ / reE ,. ° .. �Ems�cu-1I« - / / rerews�ti uEcwx¢ui�noRIP ssreRAP re�BsreA,C.moKw F:sIreLffL GEOGRID REQUIREMENTS sasa mcaio w z a%F Qz B 4°.so / \ ,.00 re�«r�<<a�GBMrereeMo re,rerere�reLtire„ti:[o,aptireres,w�resrerere�rereG.,Ew rere,.E,.a reEa�resosresrescs..s,re...,,..rv.re..o.oa woP.. O� O g '� �,.o° .o Ap.ti, �� �a,tiK�ti vwicie.uwrviw s,�w�osrcn.o.uirviuuu.o awcem,.K��.ti c �o � � msxuoxc,w,<�«afire retire,w�reareti�re. a — -- / / m ..aa9.�.wzwwio w��ti,..pww.�..e,,.aare,Q.,roti,.wa.voti�.a ,.titiatiti r,ewa,tiwti�ti� areoP sn colic •rea=o, are�awE EI e �� sare4 M sse—Ee 11 sxawaorea,�.a°ovation u,tirearetire.reu,ti�,tisre,°�o,ti resrererere,re�rere s,app4 rere.°rere boos tiretireu„tis. res O B 4 146 eCLEA,, g3/CONC RIP-RAP DETAIL .��rv,orec�o�.,",.�„ff a,e<,ti..a�eo.e...o,Ere ti�s rem,re Axa o re ww�re,.°tire cretia.��reti�:res a rere„awwsre,.,.w are mreo ora1 Us s. o i�uMre psi tisaoxw,mtiaal��sreti�atisti,�re re,m. rere reti�atiti„re�nareu,m,ti�tiN vnre°tire rere reE tireti�ti. s 4 WTR-477 e{ � reatiare,s,re<<rew.,re,x.�K reo�titio�mtire,rereti,�M a vPreaEa iei ain F—A awcr.C�5-EE.-a _ �.nxs x' :amr s uiurcon S SECllOry suRR A-A t ly� Mnoo SECnOON Sffl-RE R Kll/,m l' u f'u uxVs OIrEAxsE xo rm '�' l em � �, e e rmJ '�' me uNoln Of IrE Foonno-b.x a Suck FPo eu9 no.♦ 5 Q sxx-ores �A SECTION A-A (s•xan rvj� t )XUOYmx _ \ eee SEC110N-ISOLATED SDPPfMf .-aoR SFCT(IN SMUMREnxi n u•ss•Fe/s'.r s/r. CONCRETE VALLEY GUTTER &DETAIL AT PROP ACCESS ROAD r '!2W 3 "&48"DIA.CONCRETE PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL 4 12"DIA CONCRETE PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL c�'-i(nLL sie i�s1 x .r.s.InLL azx sms> x.cs(nLL sa s,ms1 nms� SECTION"A-A" U Q U�IW tiQ _ d � d W z Y z z w � I .I o ..•.} . xr �xac .......................................................... g I � a .K. ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... y........ c ....??' rvNnx 3 Z a S.............................I 1 z m �a w a — �m w x �a w r LL >2 O u w� U .pi eKi w N " " ....m:4.......................................................................................................gg;;. ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................m:a. Ek C # z U¢ xe.Y xzi' iax' Z e ... z u.n:................................................................................................................................................................................................................... U U 's i i W U a as w - I I I ma. z PROPOSED 72"WATER LINE PROFILE nore er 45 ............................................................................... ...................................1................................................................................................. ...................................... ax ?:....v,u.................. ... .. .... c. �.i'-w'(xxr sia�s�¢rs� �.wMr n•wruuxx s"�,rwrrtxn.a' w:u. Fa .�'-�^'(nLL sz cou.s w-cm of conrus awsn = WTR-477 .....w,n............................................................................................................'........................................................R........................................^,............................................................................................. .....................................b:N 5 5 d +PRo�Ecix 18131A aw�LTC�fi tti xa aE� GENERAL NOTES n,'....... .........: = TRAVEL LANE TRAVEL LANE 1.DETAILS FOR PAVEMENT WIDTH,PAVEMENT THICKNESS AND THE CflCWN INA SHOULDER TRAVEL LANE TRAVEL LANE OR SHOULDER CROSS-SLOPE SHALL BE BROWN ELSEWHERE IN THE PLANS.PAVEMENTS �^ TABLE NO.1 LONGITUDINAL STEEL WIDER THAN 10 TWO FT.WITHOUT A FREE LONGITUDINAL JOINT ARE NOT gB COVERED BY THIS STANDARD. FIRST ADDITIONAL STEEL e' SLAB THICKNESS REGULAR SAPAC UNG BARS AT TRANSVERSE Z Z Y T 2.USE COARSE AGGREGATES WITH A RATED COEFF ICIENi OF THERMAL _ yE ANO BAR SIZE STEEL BARS i EbCE CONSTRUC itON JOINT EXPANSION ICOTEI OF NOT M AE THAN 5.5 X IVO IN/IN/'F AS g DR JOINT (SECTION%-%) LONGITUDINAL LONGITUDINAL LISTED IN THE CONCRETE RATED SOURCE W41TY CATALOG(CBS=). Se CONTRACTION JOINT CONSTRUCT N JOINT 8 T OAR SPACING SPACING SPACING LENGTH 3.ALL THE REINFORCING STEEL AM ilE BARS SHALL BE OEFCALED C O STEEL BAPS CONFORMING i0 ASTM A 615(GRADE 605 ON ASTM A 996 gg t[N.) SIZE IIN.I i[N.i SIN.) 1I N.1 - - e TIME 60)OR ASOVE.STEEL BAR SIZES AID SPACINGS SHALL CONFORM - @a T.0 a5 6.5 3 TO 4 TRANSVERSE 0 TAKE NO. D TABLE NEL 2. G' 13 50 CONSTRUC TIME X ADDITIONAL E5 JOINT 4.STEEL BAR PLACEMENT TEAL SHALL BE•f-i IN.HORIZONTALLY 2. 7.5 %5 6.0 3 TO 4 12 50 STEEL BARS AND•/-G.5 IN.VERTICALLY.CALCULATED AVERAGE BAR SPACING P44"�r (CONCRETE PLACEMENT WIDTH/NlB.6ER OF L-TUG RAL BARS)SHALL 8.0 a6 9.0 3 TO 4 18 50 CONFORM TO TABLE NO.' PC 8.9 a6 8.5 3 TO-0 17 SO X , e S h 5.PAVEMENT WIDTHS OF MORE THAN 15 FT.SHALL HAVE A LONGITUDINAL 9.0 a6 8.0 3 TO 4 16 50 JOWL(SECTION Z-Z ON SECTION Y-Y). THE JOWLS SHALL BE ¢k LONG TIOINAL LOC TED WITHIN 6 IN.OF TIE LANE LINE UNLESS TIE JOINT LW4ilOV - p[ TO 4 50 STEEL IS SHpNN ELSEWHERE ON THE PLANS. e 2 10.0 a6 7.0 3 TO 4 14 50 6.THE SAW CUT DEPTH FOR THE LONGITUDINAL CONTRACTION JOINT $b 10.5 a6 6.75 3 TO 4 50 (SECTION Z-SMALL BE ONE Tx IED OF TIE SLAB THICKNESS Ir/31. 13.5 _ 9X 11.0 a6 6.5 3 TO 4 13 50 TRANSVERSE T BARNLENCTH OR PO$ITI OlTNAY B111 E AD'USES..PROVIDE I3T IN..HOOF[E i N CONCRETE COVER FROM THE BACK OF GUTTER TO THE END OF TIE BAR. Pp 1.5 a5 6.25 3 TO 4 12.5 50 L` O1 W 2 CI., C G C 0, REPLACE MISSING OR DAMAGED TIE OARS WITHOUT AOD[i ZONAL _ W 12.0 a6 8.0 3 TO 9 12 50 [ONPENSATION By DRILLING MIN.10[N.DEEP AND GRNITING TIE U Q 12.5 a8 S.TS 3 TO 4 BARS WITH TYPE III,CLASS C EFOXY.MEET THE PULL-OUT TEST ti Ol W i g^ 11.5 50 REOUI0.E1.fENTS IN ITEM 361. B 13.0 a6 5.5 3 TO 4 11 50 $_ 9.OMIT TIE OARS LOCATED WITHIN 10-[N.OF IN TRNSYERSE G, p CONSTRUCTION JOINTS(SECTION%-X!.USE HAND-OPERATED c ^ 0 INNERS]OH VIBRATORS TO CONSOLIDATE THE CONCRETE ADJACENT U SINGLE PIECE 0 TIE BARS TO ALL FORDED JOINTS. -p TABLE NO.2 TRANSVERSE STEEL AND TIE BARS 2 TIE BARS )0.OF 2ITU01 NAt RE INFOiC[NC STEEL SPLICES SHALL BE A MIN IMU,I III E TIE BARS TtE BARS OF Z5 iN.STAGGER THE LAP LOCATIONS SO THAT NO MORE THAN 1/3 LONG TUDINAL AT LONGITUDINAL AT LONG!DO NAL O[ uE LON liu INA STEEL IS SPLICED IN All CI VFN 12-IT.W[Dix .� SLAB TRANSVERSE PAVEMENT OR CONTRACTION JOINT PAVEMENT OR AND z-F r.LENGTH OF TIE PAVEMENT. - III THICKNESS STEEL CONTRACTION JOINT CONSTRUCTION JOINT SHOULDER EDGE LONG ITUOINAL SHOULDER EDGE T O L [ (SECTION Z-21 (SECTION Y-Y) INN,) CONSTRUCTION JOINT il.THE DETAIL FOR THE JOINT SEALANT AND RESERVOIR IS SHOWN ON BAR SPCING BAR SPACING BAR SPACING STANDEE SHEET'CONCRETE PAYING DETAILS,JOINT SEALS." SIZE TAN.) SIZE IIN.) SIZE IIN.1 TYPICAL PAVEMENT LAYOUT .Ta 7.0-7.5 a5 48 a5 40 a5 24 PLAN VIEW (NOT TO SCALE) p5 8.0- 13.0 a5 48 a6 48 a6 24ED g og MaOiNETR eLAtiNo1. 4 B W Oz~ ❑ t•SO• AoOtii ens AX 4Y Fat.5 BAN w'Fat.6 HAS,42'Fat n BAR c STEEL r w r[E BARS Mnr N[ S-L _ F .wF IN SAAE PLANE A5 JoI NT SEAL[NG S ¢ ZO m oxO MATERIAL FOR MATERIAL zs'Fdt BeN i� TflANBYERSE BNs 1^F SHEET I OF 2 2 :0 SIN spWaT w w h N TOR IN E-TE -• F i U ~ 'TmWW flenWaW T o Nt CLEAN 2" h ....... Z tMp+eNltaaf�TimrePdMNiw+ W N 2 LLINGITUDINZ..ASc c o li c SVERSEc CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED z N W SPLICES ALLOWED WITHIN 10 FT OF TIE JOINT. LOXGIitA1N4 BARS TRANBANS C C 1 1 C R NSYERSE BARS CONCRETE PAVEMENT o ONE LAYER STEEL BAR PLACEMENT TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINT LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT LONGITUDINAL BNS FGR EWAS IN.io 13.8 1n.aAJ)s. T • z SECTION x-x SECTION r-r LON IN.IN 9.5 N GLABG.MAY BE LAG 7 iO 13 INCHES >- 0 LONGIT)D]NAL CONTRACTION JOINT CROP t 1 20 SECTION Z-Z �� WTR-477 d iano)ECTx 18131H aw�LTC�7 EEi xa CAST-IN-PLACEIG 11 CONCRETEE IRA FFIC 15 1%� BARRIER �6 iii k SAWED CONTRACTION E F 0 L ' 1{i"EXPANSION J01 HT JO[NT5 �F1BG FELT OR 112° FOP A1N11111TEE OLTA I RS STANDARD (SEE NOTE 12> SAW CVT DEPT PPEFCPodEO DITIAItNOlS ALL TIE BARS IN ANY Cd1T INV0U4 FIBER MATERIAL MAY C BE VSED ON THE FREEOA HI.SHAD BE.TRTHEISAME a CONCRETE' a o. S[OE JOINT. - SIDE OF THE JOINT. 3 PAVEMENT' EB e e o n VARIES a PA�vE"xE E s %i(OGE APPROACH E� SLAB /2'MIN.ASPHALT TWO LAYERS FREE LONGITUDINAL JOINT IMPREGNATED O ASTNOARD DO \ I FMAC lUNOERL AYMENiI CONFORMING i0 ASTM D 99A. ( a 30 LB ROC(NG FELT a A. LOCATION GF INT TTIE iJOINT BW III BE AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. _ Q N TRANSVERSE EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL 1 Q AT BRIDGE APPROACH FREE LONGITUDINAL JOINT DETAIL e .p EXISTING CROP NEW CRCP '2 ti y }A NUN.30" EDGE OF CKP PAVEMENT p= W W a 2-66 MiN.10" .{ OR LMGITLAI.I.JOINT EXISTING PAVEMENT EDGE PROPOSED PAVEMENT U Q A ° CONCRETE CURB TO BE k € a,n C49LE SEALING INATERIAL U d U a PENOVED tiF dPPLI q Rg€W A TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINT E LL c P LONGITUDINAL a '/ •" THE B1HE O o gF RE[NFORC INC STEEL .' @@ SPLICES EDGE C CROP PAtlEMENT n n 2 EE OR LONG IiUD[NAL JOINT Ip VIII IT. DRILL B GROUt WITH MINI 33"1.-BA: - -- OEIONSTRATE iHATWIHE BON'SiAENGTH&CTHE%Y IP IIT.CL$S C EPDXY ip 77 21'Fqt PS BAR ERPDXY-GRGUTED LONGITUDINAL BARS AEETS THE h EOU(REMENi4 C PULL-WT TEST SPEC IF lEO IN i.BEFONE WIDENING Wim%,DEMGNSTRATE THAT THE BOND STRENGTH g ITEM 361. CF THE EPDXY-GROUTEDI TIE BARS EWETS THE REGLRIVENTS OF OPT TOM A9 DRILL AND EPDXY 2.SPACE TIE BAR5 At 2A'ESPRCING.MUBE v6 TIE BARS FOR 5' D .FS PLAN VIEW I NOT TO SC4EI THICKER SLABS,USE v5 YIE DAR FOR LESS THAN B"THICK SLABS. Z XS LONGITUDINAL WIDENING JOINT DETAIL a 1 I F 01PARTIAL ex�sr�eacxvi rWw c�DEPTH SAW-- f a F W r Q 1 � g NI N.36" G, HE LONGITUDINAL STEEL BARS SHEET 2 OF 2 ILL __ T • o <W j fY m EXP05ED EXISTING STEEL BARS T/2 �Tew OM'A'anN�TmmPaNabm WmmnN Z U 2 N CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED a a - -------- ---- -- ---- CONCRETE PAVEMENT � o LN THIS AREA,THE BRE4%ING OF TTE EXI Sit STUNG { 12-FT WIDTH BY 1-FT LENGIH 12-Fi WIDTH RY 2-Fi LENGTH T ONE LAYER STEEL EO[ INCHESSBACEKNT z STAGGER E LAP LOCATIONS SOT T NO MORE THAN /3 OF THE JACR�xAAMEA5LA5 MAPRO ED BYETHE ENGINEER. Q LONGI GUTFDI NAL STEEL 15 SPLICED IN ANY CI YEN 1Y-LT.WIDTH OPTION B. BREAKBACK AND LAP CRCP(I)-20 IAAILIE.",EETINGNiH15 AEOIINEAENi N[LL BE ALLOWED. EXAMPLES OF LAP CDNFIGURATIOi TRANSVERSE TIE JOINT DETAIL ® W PLAN VIE'I NOT TO GCALEI EXISTING CRCP TO NEW CRCP g- 47 146 WTR-477 d ianolECTx 18131H � ups ClBrerere.N s;:• �o rere�zre renoorere i c�wnu srem � \ 55h13ae�;owJ"± �S I . . . . 0 0 0 0 0 IFUIW, r x 0 0 0 0 o o s, re ._. �. TYPICAL TANK WALL scare PRESTRESS SECTION DETAIL e El E o 0 0 ,M= 0 0 0' screen Frvsw E ie�o.°o A,wwz ccs urea, _ w re P�rere o reTreo 1 0 0 0 0 °°zDu re°PI'E. =Q W . . 0 0 —E zreY„m,„ VIII E PLAN VIEW PLAN VIEW re �2�PRECAST WALL PANEL DETAIL =ire.Ms =L.M ��_Lre.NTe NE T.,N�<oTzzN Iwo Tool No°TszN To aT�oND�„re w.re ate,,,azI oN,eY T, 5 a z a a o r 0 �°rere oT N11mz _ n O n au<rennw re�re ryD-seeiNu 11o1T EL IIIHI a al 1 prem w i Z O ore zKreaow EL-11 11 ,.Na srere ore, sia^.z/ Mzwa kre P� zre,are 3 w O w rewsrerere sreD, — O O -EL D-0 z R rere llLllLF Pc-I— O IE 1101111 Pre� ` wore sre�Es e 1 DaP zwcu TZN zreare uzSsremren 1reoTsoc -ET 48 0,146 TANK SECTION&ELEVATION ��WALL PANEL AND JOINT �4�WALL SLOT DETAIL mreD zraawwc No. stere.Ms ��Ire.NTe �'�stere.Ms rere WTR-477 aYsrearecT. iRi A x��C19xEE.x �i. eh s J4b r�au xo ) �,I; s�a� E x m , e I � 1 i d I � f 5 COLUMN STRIP ROOF REINFORCING 6 SECTION �U Q�� ., I xrs F x � tt w w o � U 4 a 6 3 9 � ow rii imw..s s�.m rmxr..s sxoui��x n o.s�.ao /, sxoui�,r m -s�.mi w z O LL a 7 INs SET DETAIL 8 OsCUTLEsT DETAIL �! 9 DsCRsAI ry DETAIL cie cie � eie ¢= E. 49 01 146 a� �xoox�w�xcxo. WTR-477 e{ a �PxaEw. iei ain oNS.,r.C20xEE.x Fuamm aanun. m 94� n a.naere ❑ s e e pam soa VENTxnDETAIL '" g sag 13 scF�: .ne.anxa m gg fI annmxcnc �•7 umnnPw�xc crsar n.sa. ti ss.l�irn•olwmur mxe aw E �n aE aaa ar ids � ,xa.Io ,�•��..nix iro naf ,tea�x� �� alagyaa a o ss SVEnr I PE�wE� � ,. FfR ,•,.. ,, SE�n n finn3rn5 a .wa wn: � m ex aAm r / am RPE 9eE vFA axmsnns b •' ]a'm PPE SaE�E Q anF�nr sa neoa sr`nnn wars —u- -WO 2 ~ / � - I •.o c�u.I w.In.s.s uwwr 1 �-��/.• �Y m.sFne VI W W UQI-1E— _ 5mmueee tl s sous O a~j a O 10 OVERFLOW DETAIL CCESS HATCH DETAIL xrs xrs of nx.vu Pva�1Xe nme urxur ansa /1r����� E 14 KA NWAY DETAIL m Fn aMO o� o € .'/r..gRx- nnn ^a� 5 I' 31/r.�n. mus an'n P ! na,.a�.nnr aP. nrennn.mxlnax xnam wiener ISI !' n _ Way oci ff cnP� �ro wno �cnax IaaR.n �� I i a l �w.oEr.a 1 �e 3 w� w„ we o u�ro ff .g m Iama/ _ m , m„oma nnr o o 3.xs m"«� n s amu."°" � If W _ �_ R sa Ina aur m aE w;g��o MOgmP.i z a'rn us j go s �x o 15 INTERIOR LADDER DETAILS 16 EXTERIOR LADDER DETAILS r'a HSN D'RAIL DETAIL moxr eowo pr xn xn aan cis a<.,.. o� / re scF� w ea _ _,_.._ �.Fina.ren roe w.no m ee Rarom ax Rnxr cRwxFeiennPe nnnx.,� „/�.",;a� _ n WTR�-477 rPxaE�.. 1e1a1n ��e C21reEE.� WATERB/STR/BUT/ONSYSTEA9GENE.PAL NOTES SEPARAT/ONOFWATERANBWASTEWATER LINES lCIN OF CORPUS LHRKn WARR BIVKpN a61RIBU1pNiMIEN STANDARD.£E wiM l ��CO� S�RYAS xaR1¢aL dhF�.�'ai�)ja��l N:C0.9aNME wiM O[ru1KxK f64 PUBLK'waRR MRL' ,aysoa,o e[vreov�aca S,' .:r a RHE.BUT ME OAIE a<O£F/LLLL ACLEPTAACE OF ME MIEN WILL BE UPoN r a.WHENEVER WARR@ NAS2R LWES CROS£ONE�1 Of 0.900 PLC WATER WL SHALL BE c an rra/ua,c♦u rre crrsc/(/�also sacv N) .s.....ro°!.w!!... CONPLERGI OF ME PRO/ECT AND SA_AClORY LEST RESULn. REOuwENmn AS OCia1E0 By NEN l v nou cor..vacvr0 ±a"" 1 puT EKKnMIEN£HALL RELA6V/N SERVICE UNRL ME PROPoSm SYSRL K �� os e)�rex,0ae�cNn,rercu a / PUWTO SERVICE ME CONTRACTOR SHALL PRORLT ME ENSIbC MRL UNTIL avcrocm sccv�ov 1. ME COYntAClOR SHAM NRmSH ALL LARRLL LAIR ANO EOUIPNEN!R£0u'RED ro WSTAu ME PROPoSm MIEN. BE REICH a DIE waRA DmSmx WSPr,i, ® 3 7 777 nncvr/c 33 5. —.A OF ONES(SIERWUIpN AND PRESSURm)SHALL BE GONE BYME GNATswGs M ExKMC HAIAROOuS PROOLCi ROwuxEs. sono)acrouvn c0�o 3� CONTRACTOR UNDER ME sUPERVKION a<THE WARR dVKIOx WATER FOR _ xsnv Fr2uccasa) ��g��re�E caxsmcucrlDH rrilrrERGmNxEcrIBH.P siA�vB w�IEx cnxsmie�mH uErzR Axa r.�m wxrKL � � FE"� re m����x s a cAunE xu BE suPPLLn Br ME Gn AFTER ME�coNmAcraR HAs PAID Au �°�e°J� ��mLN., ,�Nomv em, � ¢ $" N NEIm x acs ARccuuE 2 ,'V lrmRAxnAwvm'v�Bmvcs MASY £H,u�W£Pn9m�=c::--PRmRroMEJA�LwRPEnrox ARETAxmroi�£mWtE DR�EN,RRLL£Nar�£,L ,�Gr. ' m;,ERLwE B WATERL/NEA1/N/AfUAfCOVERREQU/REAfENTS au rxrsea rrs of ME Pmvnsm MRu Ixro ME Exrsmvc wartxLwE siuLL wn Ere,reE a, rR REcawvECRn axD rR NaDE uxDm su=ERws%v a<ME waRR DIVKnx ryo,,o s�E '.. wsPmroR. ME T.lsocroR sHau PURIWSH RR au DxKmx cREWs Na I'arm au Eovuwmr �= t Dur/s REDwRm Lw:E Ir-Ws. Grr wawru N«E raps ° k ON GN NNxS ARRAxOm MAnuCH wa1ER bWSWv evSPECroR(/a xOUF /. aLL Lows w ME slRa!5/w J.HAVE A NmauuN M]e"OF "T.._ •.,... LL K NOnfK.AMWJ. U S' a. ALL IRANSNKSpN NA4YS111a"DLALEIER R AWVEJ/N ME SIRE£! -la wx.rae PAcs:le aw F x ALL Ex: 5ER490E—.MA �U%.REt AC S ExKmC warm unrRS SHALL luvE AB'OF ro Ai au Powe x Q n sIULL eE ME covMAcroas soLE RESPaKmwn ro xonrr AND eaORDuulE J, ALL NAevs xor UYO£R ME SIRES!SHALL HAVE A LWWUL a< TVP.P/PETRENCN/NG BE00/NGANO r£!xD sa'aRw7E rosrsl w ]^ rovER Al Au Powe BACKF/LL FOR Ar4B"WATERL/NE o 0 la _ _ as REauwEa _ F-�mmrarir vA om» K umvm sena LOG>xwlaREnuev vawu r 5xua AS a ll. miss VNLVEs.JnsE mnBAxrs.EIc 49—IMO L VOreSFORAFACAWLZ sa m�vr wn>sm umsaxEevs— Arlo a RE scs acoowc a�oLixLinu Lon rnu p (f:RF /. Au vu "•„ UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS M a as a xwPLEs ernvmx nrmNcs AxD vEs NaNc NAws s rR arclnr e9Gv Au DLrIxE IRax PIPES'vuvEs.ANa umNcs sHau BE wRAPPm wM(aJ Au�"N'A^w""�NAcrJu srNu ' u RxLamxc Rum m "f0�a'�rmsm"'£i 10 A m Jou oJ'�im.o asc:'ace�u sx.0 z v MemvEs'sEs aF a Nx "F0i1°°1012 ,wmnVm..,mJ NAmNa er sLvcr.Wmxm maN LrcwnaN n ' uEcxaxKUL]nxr RESMawi G.v EneevEm aPPRovm muAL ar au n sNw a Ns'�inuL rRaN nc LreswmN,n Vsw,c smNE w /mnmm NAmxN: i'/i'/i �i i�i�i�� a F O My ax uwzm uNrcss o_saEcurm � w��� �,�0�, �,O Off, � , z rn-- w g /•. qGx Bmas seAu BE N>Wrm mR Air nx R Ix w "", '°N"' ro"�*,;, rnwACJ sn anxmv �,Y�U,�j�,f U,�i���r U,��� Q°ul _ wz� m /s. rs a•Asn naTI. _ - _ a 1 muAL,avAL w„rR RELronn J m�s REovuE�sr wA1ERmnx a m:a a•mu.,N "F9i""s.Eefw"s'sLr �a"s`- w smENOM La m x.n"rrzv OIOR Pm ocseH 1 B :' ¢ U U rn %vmAeroR slue COORDVIAR-wrM wARR Dm£px WssmroR Axa AFFECTED LUSroLERS N fpURS PRpR ro KR1WT OF ENSNK WARP MRL. PAssuc ry'sNVi_IanJ g .oR _ Z U 0 >O>0 I). WARP O5IRIBUIpN MIEY STANOARAS CALL FOR NNOYUY 9B'LOVER ON PAssm¢/A sm-]as J [aril nuuam - U F Q +e roVER 10 Avco msIRLCnax ME u£m PurNsrr won(wl-xv m/a mAmJnm-nav m ry sr/cr�o)www smu Nm D/r U 's wARRux6 wxm OREOuwE0.m Z 6 /& CONTRACTOR SfNLL KEEP ALL EXKI6IG VALVES ACCEYSI&E aLWe1'L ALL PI415Y 6x ������O� �l�m�-/��� 'x"� mar nr®a.o Z y 2 COMIRLYIkML � orrvuiw. R /A m DNJ P/PE mmPf)Glx.W uARxuCS w /po c ALL NEW wAlEF NAINS SHALL B£wsiALLm a AR£IG09/ED ON THE roP CF THE PIPE (, m DmJ �, E � A w rm l0 i b. ALL SERVKE LdYES UNDER PAVELENT SHN1 B£6NE NCH WSIOE DLYE2R, „, ,...., ..................� LWWUL. As PLR uLsxN TYP.P/PE TRENCH/NG,BEBB/NGANB cwLa/m.aNsmxr,Wm cmn owwcr m sss cr man/.asmnE m Z ; 0 51 0,146 ep sJANmJm sNm As sAaNx � BACKF/LL FOR_48"WATERL/NE e NE NLNs,a m r+i aw w oaNw,N �""• %� SPEC/AL NOTE.• .....,.. ..... ryo,.o,o.eE reEaore o�w NONo. ENGWEER swuL roxracr nv anon aEPaRILr r WTR-477 gf FOR WATER VAULT DESIGN COOROWAIpN. a c vPreaEax 18131A dry" o uverv�exeer rva ro fiCE rJapa EN.Higrwi/IX1EAD��.!�� � � r i/," �]i/,"�� • �'i•22�w .. s�^`x ,arcn x.0.+� � r� d�n'xn mMu[ ��•r.�wsr n�sau.as Svdx. t x,-x�,.��..�.�'+ eWi uxE swu 1DP o<wK ear 9uu M„�.'FETx.YA n ]E Sn rD nn.wasm J.iwE xrowxr ra BE nxmrm ,. nu xm¢wrs sxw .gum BYtlfl �� 5.:: ,: e�a 5.uncE x.�rn£wetY.ex{uxESS oMdws[.w2e. �/].. °..�, � } �• �I � Y 9u9r uxE e�, mlmEiF 6wx rmES �• �.�..� 1�wxr,� eA�xx eowern a,�e�x, mwaovr�x.r w! w.c!]•,r,e-car�wux., s»na xm! �r� p..` EXJENS/ONOETA/L �� .wmeu � Borax o!swcreror a�� �� aw cone.rnr.n � �e ,,.ewxr,ewer ww<xxem_•• enxw�,e»axnr e�e�,w m t3 ��� d � _ z srm/ee -mJ/e" :� 02�W F/RENYORANTASSEA/BLYOETA/L/TYPE f/ ��� °°1e >"x J� rlm ro sw�[ CJ�IW—1=Q cmKn[rl euu.°.. O O VAL YEBOXDETA/L YAL VEBOXOETA/L �PAYEAMAIr 91AMMRAL OROLWO - ro I P/CXNOTCH uax wmxs.wm xxw�cs w rym,o s�E z v maxr�„ a ?w U U Q ,ux +•. ...., e•-sx'ei eam wen wx � mr.i rerno,�.wn .,,,ff r•maxr„ - '.n• z"� LLo❑ vu�hr) ><� n� � U❑ Z � Z e�ww.�mwxr.uwr�,wwrxeem xie 1XP15r BL0bt aann.wr LIP OETA/L rya,a sir .,52 146 F/REHYORANTASSEiL1BLYDETA/L/TYPE2/ F/REHYORANTASSEAM YOETA/L/TYPE2/ p cWTR—ry477 d �ano�Ecrx 18131H srm s4Acm sms ss rar ra cocw.s sys >«cocwss s„s arv���.C23xEE.rva CASING SPACERS A. xmx rvrc rswucn evc.ma sxvax wm a� � ���~^;��'f"�^ wmarm cwir. nmw av:.�mvr w ...... _ n.caava�Accxs rox wx evsrAum w cvxs sw.rsrr A swsnvc rvx,xm xsuw avc.xiwr a< �....:...............__..""...`' d §� rtun1m suwner rp wcx':`ircxac!>r4.1 asrxc rvrr wrx uexxc axc � � wnr.mrxa xen a� wx n. P/PE/NSULAT/ONOETA/L _ rr ""^""'',m�`r s�sra - •� x,�, � IVATEA'L/NEAOJUSTAfENTOETA/L g �w1 m�v .w ar_lI e.r-— �orc gum �w s4,riw Ans swccvs s m arr n,wr ne�n mamw.n,Es _ -_ ssvccr rc aymm —� �g r lux c smm�rwc sr x=4rravAc Q I INSULATOR SPAC/NOOETA/Lc ,m 1 —e mans Ar mm cans o<usmx. -nAfA6S y i'�aau"°" i e� sloe 1"' aA9.s wsa nr ssa 't TYP/CAL CAS/NOOETA/L o 2 W s w i•F•' U�tii—Q i 0-0 t Bass ruvne p O U ��� � msrxim Ar nc avvr w c dQG r ti f4.i.1 a•mr case wevvcx aameir. "'rc"r"°"10 s`""" c wrsn a<.P.Axrer�ur foa TM/CAL VALVE/NSTALLAT/ON THREE TO SMWATER CONNECT/ONS AT/NTEBSECT/ONS resr sex . m..sssrusr s�eaw z v o ry raa cxinen aAv t a mwssmm cuow a F p 2— 2112- Z h m �n^nr foe snuncs �wwxc sAvwcs z ¢N � er,.s wsx w""J L a w.x �A�a•mass cw s'vx�c g,�r a,..e �a_ =a U w unsex t ,.. E= 2 2 < 4uv.NPF 4u5 a auu NC brs raara a W U OU Q a^ra[ Z U� �❑ smn`"sssA^oran"'�n'a�ws"'rw."""x"01mxcn."rc" a �¢ mvmrsmvcm °14i nc-t1l'a'mss .Am`wi AOV- ���' '•E* :caw.,: .,t sass wv4cs z � 2-- =1 „ x w nA - rn„uws son,x„xi.� a - are eon: sass so-ssaw 1,53 146 OETA/L A,• "ss°n""m"`sa'c 2'-- OETA/L B" META/L C,• TESTRISERASSEAIBL YCONNECT/ON TESTB/SERASSEAfBLY TESTR/S—IRASS—EMM Y p WTR-477 d �ano�Ecr 18131H III , uIII a�x�.,rv,�,rvEE.rva i u�a 71 us 1 r 4 s/aem a BRASS-W-RETAIL RfARN_iV LOCA T/ON - rmv�rmwws rune csmx m ernes euw Pn.�SETSER!//CEL/NEAfARKER!_7A/LS SERV/CEiY/TNS1M ALK smncc rtr - rvo,,o s�aE rvx.,x s�� wnx cwx cmvxmarrov srro - /\� Q� ,xm m TYPICAL CUL-BESACSERV/CE \ a II—I SERV/CEL IME AMr-'R/ALS 2 ore,ter. m exim em rer�m moao"°mom.naor _rxwcr _ st s c�aue n-crt.».moo,ws rme r e,xs a co»,moo^,•.w,,.�mx so xw ce xxmrcxn�xc >Eo�.�'"sm� ...owro r�e••ew�wecx e...s � o U �w .r�crort. es«,wac..ex, <oaanaanox<roa< v,w� axscc ecax wm�x ax , ,:, ert,wen vurr essmar ntsmwr ntwm'u[muu"av ,ar�sm u��i au save[,aas j W� me x mrod,s/,'art,'.u'rtmunm uwmrm ca+4 vuu er usm � o-,e°- � 01 (cmv»wus mae uw ro ueux) ltxc'as[wxn rrxu'mnde) �s muss rzr xc ro ue,m sus xc U�1—j� - screw vo,rcmncnc axxm ransraxtssmrxcw�)s ecrwm�um - axx[o s/,':,".,,/rt': me v �a x if evass xvxc ew�.� � w cmenaanav nm� covxre � ANCLE uETE � a-u rxee,rawzaxu O mroru n L+"a,"-exan�u L+'uwess nwccrzx o„crtw,s- w/cues xat,er unu cauvaeb xu,aunty. ysF mx ass/ertmxu / snexr sig aIE2x/er o EFS) SERV/CEiV/TNOUTS/OEiYALK �`r� a�1 a�wrnx roua/ onrcas rvo.,o:«<E xo..ax mw con exmc u eu,cn xrt csmAl /...,^�-rm.s.<.er me coxvses:,w. JYP/CAL CONNECT/ONBETA/L axe,xm cuncz, rvo,•x sof sass nmw.s s,wc mwcr wm a.ww,.vao-ee axo ec wxwm�x raxmwc r ol / z _ � n x .I ,., cc,crt mxoxnr,"rw,nmca'r1»,xn, wm rtao„s ro° z x ¢o xvoxxrr cevcJ _�""ecc ��- u�w � �r-rtx rte._� rtm rtmEcxr awr � �w CPPP6VanmY silts 1.015 tees emV¢LW! IO eEIEA)�w� c U_ COP Ro1-11-1111 mx n Z U Q �❑ ` a � s _�Nse av fsx xeq s5/exmva cawoa„mv ;`^�m' N U Z wanx ueN Z o SERV/CE iY/THS/OEiVALKT/ED TO CURB � rvo,=o sr�E roPPEre £- nmewcwacx v,e.mrt rsvx,ar xos wun a a `°""n..��``°'"n., ,cr.>:K,..my,• 54 146 'rt�xaa"�Aca`a`u�xca ncanmxr xsaxxm/ xoxA.�.ry ry. 2. m BOLLAROOETA/L `s � Ldazim TYP/CAL CONNECT/ONBETA/L WTR-477 smrau. was sa sra�e � ,ano�scsx 18131H a...�e � a awx�iC25xEE.na LE a�vror ccMcrvi cs on Pnow LNE EEL( / RmaR I.—MER, [a oR MANHOLE REQUIREMENTS Ell, Puce AIrx-s To Tar o.case ( 9 Sec cancecrc Tc oP F coxa.3 � ��~"``k4, rax All.(r- ° ° APPROVED COATINGS TABES ix 3s _ HE a vRrn __ fium 3 Asxu1 nMw+.nEs a r xcmnn - _-_ srcxs a= i coRE vcsf veov o. -arc rw,eeounE - r�nocne wz '_. nvnn c Ewmxc apiacoii ease R�Pt o R r'is m x sv PRocion BUVDm Joint h _ 11 6RE EEI IVE xx� ALL—1— LLL—11l RA-11AR 1LEE Q: {{ J M C J RE 4�: lr ✓/ }j .—L.Mosturrt—I ALLR \�fiv�O+Y�\\ �L ornuuM sync AttM Dasa Ql� �W 02�W nau+i ee ocex t,. \\ .��1 - as acea x—� .vas + .rrns eons R as-z' — FIBERGLASS MANHOLE--- ---- ---- CONCRETE MANHOLE a a a 4br ro eEVE ----- - NaT io srsie ---- ----- ------- rc W w` o � MAHxox + 7 U PooiE /ro°� l Mwxo�c wx ( o .u. Asn waeewsio Svc MX� i x ry s El nwx. E a IF FlnSH ow.3 cancRxrn�- ::: o(z xEoius(ttP.) v ux- F LL �Z a C4C T PnOiEi LN O LL,11 I L .I S 1A CA .vk.Al 4 WASTEWATER MANHOLE BOTTOM nEs"�'� `� wx°=E-rE oa r�n�u$x (BOTTOM) PIPE SEAL DETAIL To j MANHOLE PROTECTION IN UNPAVED AREAS N fr + / t GENERAL WASTEWATER CONSTRUCTION NOTES: (CULTIVATED/SPECIAL) .LmI— ��� ow n ¢y U _ con oe RN.SED mxc xczrwnrn fr `°/° t i z ao cm3 _ < g '—as xao 7 w r f riJf <. M.n x« Na z°masRV> F a cEvi45- Pax OR -IC&A nxc s - Alc.,n 31 '11T om c.00.;., ce�c caunR x es)m.fMnl _ :.+ ss as ", „ -i r"4"+_1 114 r`i , MANHOLE PROTECTION IN UNPAVED AREAS °"EE' xr FORCE MAIN DISCHARGE MANHOLE DETAIL rz_.�°n. x *"� r�t=�oo.°,. 4.4 iT 11,©E 's—, (RESIDENTIAL) NOT To sl Il NOT TE SCALE WTR 477 d iPno�Ecrx 18131A �a�R�r,Rm,REE.Ra. 11 ,A czs ro �R RaxraxM -r, M «xR Ra"o«o mos xos� z 1I-I EA11 ax:P--Al M—_r 3=� mar_x {. _ o CEM/CY) T. 1.a mMrrTK ox waLL \ — -T n U .IlT{ EW) x5 Y oa a U R EX 5nx9,An,RFtFr0 RE..0 R.D =W O w U FRP INSERT REHABILITATION OF EXISTING MANHOLE FRP INSERT PIPE SEAL DETAIL xor To or s� VIII € a 01 Ohl —Eo K« avo OF S9 a ✓ 7/ R sR� FOR W m a Mix Eo �mx e ��� �� � zw / F g COVER PLAN VIEW �asM <� r �,o. s as Nor m scuE 0 0< ,�,•OM. k� �< o a �3 w a ? Z Z ._ r-cR Mari lruniR[8 k Y 56 146 SECTION OF RING&COVER RING&COVER APPROVED LIST WTR 477 «or To—1 ----. ----. ----. ----. ---_ ----. ---- ----. ----.----. d �ano�Ecrx 18131H awv�.C27 EE.„a APPROVED ARY MMI—DER MODEL UME A.MI. is Z1. M.. nrwx..omoa. E(ss) oa{ ) ID DEO Enm ung s t ass ss mscwo ssi o acEs�uxcs ws uocE�ac , ..... xo Nnnrau F vuu,t�c- va aars oR vu.ws ' amr s uwrcon S ov R a¢Knii(. s a s 101 P.—DID V_ �v o.ooasurJcrl \ M. _ n„v .t -1 vuv�FER rs� DA� ia�.E '�' is I. L,u \ 11 D'A E „HOE w� u`nD x � SLOPE x000 -- .,.. asi \ nt r S j u'— — ' --,E FRONT VIEW_ SIDE VIEW aa. of colic Svae s°i -c„c°v.v„D iou o M o„w.ao.. _ .�ivE eRourvowucR r✓,r”n .,a P�1n6 4 K �2 i,roa s'or suecarcE to U Q s �1M D s9a.,t3z BOLLARD DETAIL DEEP CUT SERVICE CONNECTION > �, o Dw om.: re T r EEE W AIR RELEASE VALVE AND MANHOLE vD m s� »- p o w U SERVICE CONNECTION NOTES: oR.E,iEv.EH. e „E z o 'MED 0 —� A, 1111 w11— Q . „�EDou m Eo 'p ,A E�� --- � �ao���mE� �i 7-D A., wJs•of < \ a a f t � r mer awv ow n � � LOWLI ME SOIE ° °`M"" Es �` - - PLAN CLEAN-OUT BOOT z v Q o 3 sEa b•v)� ��� 1 ,� r,o �e a ....... .....__ ED o — s V A t: i ! x wfwue os ss caK ore cc) D „D,E oR�A ED roa s --—3J,8 a+. - SECTION A-A SECTION B-B 57 146 eF SERVICE CONNECTION DETAILS STANDARD SERVICE MARKER TYPICAL CAST IRON CLEAN-OUT BOOT WTR-477 ” YOi i0 S:KE .Ci m.O WIRED EaCN S,REEi WN....TO S-E � ;,�ano�Ecix 18131A "wDLTC28RLLT N" DEPAUE-- A—B; "RN,IF—DIS I I.DOE,S—, —,BE AIRSOPEOPI ONE C ESS E.—NE—E, 0. I 'IT CP4 —N—AIFE-A-1.EUDI— —.B OR PIPE REPAIR 111Z.P11,111PI.A.11N1 I —F,"PAIR 9E THE TFIRN AP ESPRIND NEBDIDTF -11P-D II`—1�k: 11.1.1.1TO1, DO .I,OJt I(DI B-1— .1. IMMIT EUNIENI .DN I—I RUBRINS AREAS PAYESIBIT I'D NO-1E I P.—E I ON APPROSEED E)1 10"CASING DETAIL IT -2)11 NO CASE ,gO,7 TEA 2—E A,GRADE I .1—11—OF T.1—Al I ENI—N T.1 _OFF U_1"IlDFE I- 111—11,PASE, CF MENT STMT I]ID IPAPEO oR SUNNIUSA A-,=P, FAREIIT D I INSID,.1 INE. ..ED STEEL IN —E—I m--EPEB NEEN III, A, 10—.1-1 IDNNEII III DIFTI I I—ED U-N"P-N—D', w I RAINEEDmT,"S, LE z TEM A "I-I ,I'D,IF, B, E,0,11 NP�111 "I POP, a Com. OP F,�I............ 12"TO 36"CASING DETAIL "T!' .......... 111,11T < IIINI I'll DPSII1,11'IT,',,, NPT I. ZEN ,I MAN. OOF,I,Al— an E N. OITI:,Il U'l D2 OARREI OPE�,, ODO 0, sEE POIDIIIA1 =T' —U I 111R 11 N III 1ROU.I,D., 1� ARE P. 2 P�D P—1 ATI P IF —1PAIEN DDNIn 1-/ " TRENCH BACKFILL FOR WASTEWATER LINES DE IF_I III_I SI -AT CASING DETAIL AND PAVEMENT REPAIR FOR UTILITIES NOT TO INI 1 1— GENERAL NOTES FOR BACKFILL VIII TABLE I TABLE 2 BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL FINAL BACKFILL (BELOW PIPE TO 12"ABOVE PIPE) (GREATER THAN 12"ABOVE PIPE) UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS E, l A PRE.IS'—1111'D 3 11— o RdFERTT1`E=P 0roM 111F DID-_.I UR�ENNED.—ON I—L BE 0',B 11FED, 'IN—BE I E� �D Il LINN OF NA X DI AD.B--; - DO. I.INE E-- MFORIES 1ATERNAL IN E R;,A, ED 111,11—I-INAL, —I-A— 7PN`11`4� I.BE I ROD ED CASING NOTES: DIERS,OB BE, I. I.E. BIAE-1,--.I—,ARE WALL TNICINES S E—BE 1.I-PUT A% -I F.—ESS- r�-11-FINENTS,(IRAND.L.IDD—LEWOF U4 NUEA . I BE 2UP I lI PELT—STYLE CANINO SPACE DS',-A:�INSTAJ-EN 1$', 11 ED �E,4 ...DO. .—lG SEDDRINS-UP A-IIES1 FOR, N OR ED. —1 TO DO BE -ID I`%lIZZU�VE'-'I R'E`=='k I APPEODEFDOIS �w PE NO c- DIUY"Q�N IABRIMP RD I EU L F.BR.), 6�1 11 11——11AL FREN.—I BE `F C&GIOM SFASUF BE NZED TS 511-1-IN'I—DAPNER IRS QDIII. 211�11. RDISTURE TO BE ADENSTED I. DUES NOT o ABD SFAIL NI DINNIIIEN REIN A IIIONP.NONAII HINU,I,NANIIN 1 11 IF I11U1, NI NE�(D-�EMPT5.—OPE CEMEND ODNADI ED ;, AND I � — I— _P_I.BE BEE ABLE I—I OULD., ED 'o A SURE TRA THE CARRIER PIPE 15 SEOP R-RI ROLATOY ORREFFED TF00-IN— I EFUNDEND AI—END 1111 NOT IN FURTHER TNN 11'FROM THE DID .-1 INNO.OPO-N,.1.BUD, III.111,111N.B DO RawBEIN TO ROUGH --F TO EXISPIRE 'WNkERS IN-RE NSIUN-I-ED IN TFE—TIN OF T11 PIPE-- I L OFF.T. III'—I OPPENT—IF C UP SIDDIEE�ElC—A I>111IIOYNEG— ATERITA E H', BE, INS BUSHED D— ONLTIN C IF�,"US ED B,THE.0 IN I IN I M I 1'�PIM `�,X-'BIRIKY—1A IL"I W1 A N A EJO B I, NE.—1 11-—1 IN N.11 I III NO AD —I—AE—: RPU—S, P,.-URFI, AND IHAI II E—ANNU APPROVED EOt1W ORADICH'MIDIFID-Ti0 eE OP INIL I.D.— r,�PIANP- ON 0.SP NG-- ED OR 8.DBUS.E.UNUSUFNI PER ixN,rtEu III.DRAPE 3 D, I'D .-1. s" paoo 58 146 MRIET TO 9=OF IDA5,101""TO WTR-477 BE ADNUEUE.I. °wure.C29xEre,rva ne',�ti /I ,nx�.],]` '� na•,�aw ��� °rvc.<xxxry "°"'.�?.;�.�=:",". irmJu��a. _ � BART 5 ,.�.. 1 - �m ox�rv�rve ° �Mm-���o`�f�.�•,n y ews-ser sa,mac _ _. s,���•,� �a�A�m>rxe-mgr a L MUM s„.,ff oenccan u me es sons m�°rvxo - v. —"j LA PLANOFS'STANOARO/NLET +� +i+o� n a'-]� v'<� PLANOFPOST/NLET}-re s<xwex, -� -�-gg- NOTE rvo,,o scaE v= v.•-a an,•-e �i'-r ena'-es- rvo,,o srP,E 3 w>rrre n�,,.,�ao oE.Nre stirs]or s dcrcrz,o soau e-na,e.e-e.w. eea rur m-s docs rvr< rvo°za s.lxxwoouE °P /ere x,w ® neanm ®�iorv,x _ ns-r nstv.c L �e may IIIInq/fNQ N/�� r�J caarvrea poll ��� � �'� �mxx nm �,o���fl����a,u �Dune xmr � ou„e*vivrervw/rea°u au,�re,vive iry ury°irerecno �j k�� ` PLAN VIEW /ssm o GRATE BLOCK emc.mevagran �� SECTIO-1 3/v � 3 rm�] PICKSLOT DETAIL sre• oAAooo�o E"ire c o---- c z Mo u �—s �I�-- une•o--I� e c°rv�ror� � ____ s m z w - SECJ/ONA-.7 �•)n"0XL"'� �a� c�� s<I GRATE SECTION RING SECTIONw PLANOFSTANOARO GRATE/NLET srn a 4 tetviri'e¢av xwa lnnxm>wx mea sixsxm !+)y{is eo ivav�i wears ?w j U Q {slsv,•w s. �,�,,,/•� sa<»anr C/TYSTANDARO/NLETANO S/O{Y.4LK �'i+" r, z Q 00 M4A(11 LER/NG&COMER CAST/NG DETA/LS a mvLSm� n£A rvos,o sra,[ U Q U m a as v aunts ex]uuts cays[wrz � e ]. e[mut rs n]rmn,roroe,exo nutxnexs,m¢exou w]ci¢,snmcxtss exo .mr lmrroan) � £ r nwvcxr s nn. W reo"rm. •nm�rs re.58 148 mFLOiYL/NETRANS/T/GNAT/NLETFOR es sxovx ax lxis sxxrµo vxo]om omm a nms a �,x°°x,,,,,rv�rv�. 4-ORS-SM.C!/R6ANOGUJTERo�mercwnscommxs"asvw.' SECT/ONC-C ry°,.°sc«re e. vxxx.weirs rr stimcn asnxes.me eowe-m roxwx mt n.w-us rwrm, ry°,,°sc,« WTR-477 d tvno�recrx 18131H I'll Pw,Exre III, a"P> x xrrC30reEE.rv° o°arn�nre nrP.i"E 'Wr'u"r ary�E�i .. kwr axc �.r �y4 m m m 7.7 ux.mm c,pEx s® h— �aCO I m re rv�� re re n n I rs I Ere � NC MANHOLE NOTES E s�,a,xamxon..no PLAN PLAN PLAN '' XEriYAYOETA/L TYPE A-AfAMMOLE TYPE 2VAMA/NOLE TYPE VWAAWOLE TYPE O'AMA/NOLE o 2 W w K 1-1 rva* scar rva*1�I—F s:ac reN THI-1 opus*M[ rvm�0 E c c uOFF—1 v,"oar NNI e c°uE N0 rreuimeic c°rvsreucri°ry rotaZ/'4` r/e' Pa®arenis,m anvcxrrv, ro =[ ITIa " Eirvisxe°a 7AN-Im°gg°o, acN° x rrvsa onoxoa I covER BACKMn. o=x°a�za1E1s��_®,°xt re.,= _° 4N.'Llrv°x°rr aoIE11151D FLOSN n — R'rem xre rem. am9°x F3 PLAN VIEW PICKSLOT DETAIL v Ps afar® Z Q ErE rem,A,°E,<r rA oE,ar e AolToo IF m ILE �nnou SII I—,re•xFl a.• _ ` N 54 = r ! A. MExrrv.s.�rE°`o`-s+ .°�,,,r rt a re aaE.,a xn. °E°°nre Axa °.re.baE xrv. a re. w s°- 1«x o"-e;roe are x°� < m r=FE no,r�i TIE DII COVER SECTION FFAMEa SECTION Ear orP1 w o 6 wmx rox cvwry ,� e' �w U ZUQ 00 CMISTAWOARO ROARMAYAfAWWOLE SECTION SECTION - 1— AI SECTION a R/NGd CODER CAST/NGOETA/L TYPE 6'dLONWOLE TYPE C'A9AWWOLE TYPE D'AfAWWOLEro C' rvo,.x A—E rvo,,°IIALE NII_°A—E 1—No=r,r1 ry°.,o ENI a z 5'pma a�vsu,m cm srREi,urm xolm on me wm on rverimn in vwnna ar .n......•r ww�ss xx�icEP"a;ic., oxcx we ro<Exma 12.z !rc mcxEm. £ nm mxEl�s" .w)in m[tom wr M �am�alE!nU sxm�cM�n,u��ac"��n s Com[xcmai 3.I —EFl!. „. no!x mE. oxx x.rs�m mE Eo a-.maiPumm"9 m!o K m Krl'— °o�arvc ry 146 Rrq exo V`AEA 9�ui ff oFaFn inxnW'+Rli M aSPrir! a io 9uEPM!M w IRVFK mmxG LwE¢us4xm S`m—/+ 51Mx v..im �a.invert rf ix£!9eui ff 9um i.w M ceo�l. o WTR-477 wxnof xxc mo corm F E.1 a,e ix[!. ;,�anoreEcrx 18131H =Ile =10—W 11 ' a-I.mxr.(.nrp'o) Ewv _EwELL�rva EEaL<rv= ""' -' M v anrm s re s xE o�,Ere �rM was aam snnowos rnor.rvva �M micut n � �R �s _ �� xxx nm In ——, iEve) L J SEs) I orrt e s weiclyc � o Ca L— — 1----- PLAN 1111 ILEL � a � mnor�nn «rov„ xi�rr°rvBkE, nom. �, / affswn s1 CURB/MET TNROATEXTENS/ONPLANILI, `,�o.r°X"`tea ane nu, `r` En�srTE ..a ro ff isLL cT°.i s` nw `ms's! E 5 um To A-, <L i' •o oc. RE5004EAN0 REPLACE TOP PROP.P/PE YO EX/ST/NG l s.r1.a s•oc. _ ��� n,.r re ore aErvswr —— OFEX/ST/NG CURB/NLETDETA/L R.C.BOXCONNECT/ONOETA/L - \ p�� MP— I tps7nns`ossa)a� � I•k N eonma Mart `r o'so nE,E renx _ o vsi cxrvcac.E e eox aLwm rvi x 4 K 2 I.<trvr. xro ror'NII Pwo neat E we PP vreov.re.c.vvE O W i ` I�swc tyro xwmnn�wm) — — O =� SECTION ,V,. SECTION" AMAIIER/SERBETA/LA�°""' "�°°S OA n EX/ST/NGA:C.P/PEPLUG CONCRETECOLLARBETA/L UNPAYEO AREAS PAVEOAREAS UNPAYEO AREAS PA✓EOAREAS rvm.o srxE rva*.o seas psvwL*are corvcreE*E vpEPE11T psvwL*are corvcreE*E vpEPE11T ,ovEn�L=a sE vreo�oEx s EEre Ewrre ,oPso'L T,sE vreo�oEx s EEre Ewrre GENERAL NOTES FOR BACKF/LL EoxaL EoxaL AN 1 z t.'Merv_oEP=w E.res I-Merv_EPA,') ' m 3EooiNc alloaLe encuEiEL Niru EiNaL encuEiu LL (BELOW PIPE r0 12 aeovE PIPE) (cREnrER rupN it AN VE PIPE) Z O UNPAVED AREAS PAVEDAREAS a n Ervss. xc nu anroi�me srvsnvT' x vreoc*ore _ Ptps�M o�e)�a s� "` ss fsa recdre reErvs p 011 1-1 1'11911 MpErew ,aaMEx�,creryacoaMrevreErvc.s. .urzxxL me rtt.Lsannm mc.wn�i�mx raLrr use sw>_oA um rxc rwaueva ~an X K�' W .,.... g IEEE BELE z-ITEM a IEE IBEEL az P ITEM ore 1-11sw_se cn m ra.... 1O°C care er nsr assn sm axanan t9 G 1 ron r u sn' aaunux rnen w�' 0 IELEV <re<; a ;.reiasp` s<^`�EnL) ,o:'�a. r se raryae z�� 00 EE,IEL(E 2-LEM E D—)III°aaEE�BEz 11,E're_E'ELV fEWMrvc<se1 -` ErexRcre aErvsr'fps�"oese) _ENT- ,ro roar„n,.1 a�a.a ' »e rwe.a y o f Prex are reEry 5!`o o)` PEE ,'PEM III rcaa � zassrs o z are L a are La � ... - ... - NOTE (CONCRETE PAVEMENT ONLY) %10 £- 6galu xnrw.LL Miro xy-ra u.m sEIFGI Er 61 ��146, W. ]sKn4 K.v.a�.uw. ciao oau�arvc rv�. $. TRENCNBACKF/LL FORSTORAfWAT,?P/PES x.o.uao ro�;i-i�r m rO WTR-477 rvaE*a I—E �ano�ECTx 18131H -1 .....A.sxowx_ 1 —-1 — DIK-D.aron ED mom C32 U'EUE, I-AIR—Al 1HEE" MULPM C, C, ................... oi -E 3, TYPICAL 6"CURB&GUTTER DETAIL 4"CURB&GUTTER DETAIL 6"REVERSE CURB&GUTTER DETAIL TYPE'A'HEADER CURB DETAIL 111TI E 1 1111 1AAl InI.% I'll T "lllUF"EMl:TMFl w I 3 T. kLl - Iv ''E,1111EIT E EEI T5 —'. M=— A A mMnE R, u. CAP SEAL DETAIL CAP SEAL DETAIL PLAN SECTION AA U NEW CONC.TO NEW CONC. NEW CONC.T EXIST.CONC. 5'VALLEY GUTTER DETAIL rvm Ta SATE NRT 7-E NGI 1.I—E G, R� —1 N� NTTI I um PE'B'HEADER CURB DETAIL =mmw —11EIE SlE. NET 1-1 —1—DE.11DUL RAY S-1 /,c— snr. F.- -E-L CURB&GUTTER AND HE� 6 1. 3—F.�.,. 7 IG—NT 111 1-- 1. N.I L—EL 12,NL,�NG�,ON.E ..E E 01.91� EDL Eon^ ,.r T I�Z IT IE IRNI,1— INI l_,D F— U S EE- 3. 31, —NE.EL—E _A4 ".0 m—r -r 14 L.11 4, T'S E XE� —E. m I lUG IE 11 = ..E R—C w —E 1...:7 BE w PLAN c CURB AND GUTTER TIE-IN DETAIL SIDEWALK RETAINING CURB DETAIL PLAN FOR SIDEWALK SIDEWALK DRAIN NET I—E N.'TR I—E NET 1.I—E NGI w, .SATE lug. wo— 1 onnns. use 11 su.—. 0 z 7. =L=lZniiEW F�VR 'EC=%U=� dy`�aINTZ�ft NIXT&NZ�'101 /I—E IE r 0 w 11-1 P-11 I-EA 11H ENII 11PP: 'A'N'LE'ALI�E,GE ETR P' 5G N' ®a R 1� E— 11 El L� NE RN"EE S RNIIEIE S:—1 MLELN�D�,El LN I=E, r AM- w Do SIRATI 1EINTRI—ENT 'E'�A'1Z'IEEE'�'�U 3/4- L4: z. EZ,r7 Q DF DF M_. P"r �u&N�SURFACE&SIDEWALK SLOPE BEHIND CURB SIDEWALK TIE-IN DETAIL SECTION B-B 4— OFR mti+enE f . � Z .T ./4' 19 '—Z 14�i6� ,=.7 _ n. —E NEW TO EXISTING GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS PROCESS PIPING LEGEND SYMBOLS MATERIALS t."T NAALL.1 �T. THIN. E'q Q1 A-- 771 VALVE FITTINGS ETC E, GENERAL ALITES 1. AIFE.FRUFNA A—L IF ITE ITAINLESEASTEEL,IIIE IN INTEGRAL 11TTERIPITE1 AND IF TYPE TPI ER I.I.F.IIIIIIATILIN hl.11 III E TFRE I BY THE BILIAL IIMPANY E° r ZE, LE'L I ILL AIIESS IIURR SH ILL HE EIUIIIEI 1ITH A TALI HILIGUGH IRLIENTILIN SISTER.SAIESS ITIFIS SH ILL RE IEUIIIFI 1111TH A P NE IN L 111N=� E1"IA'N T STEN .I FI.LNS HTIH-UHATPE—LIT-I ANITE SISTER THAT P-11FEA A.NTIN—I SAFETY—NI-E IN EDTH ITS LLIA I NID I AH, E G Ay EM IHALL BE MADE WITH FIR AND BE DEITINED FIR A III RIF MINIMUM LIVE LIAD .TT MEI�A=E UNLESS NITEI ITHERIISE. 1. 1 EIIAIIERI 1. FEE TEIHIIIAT SPEAK IATIIN IEITIII 11 11 11 ILAII HIE1 All IEIIN FIIIIIITIONI FIR FIR LAIIEII. NINE, y F I IRS UNE R BIEEPA DIIII SHALL IF PROVIDE I 11ITI LIIIEILP IIIET LUI UP IILIN CIIUANLI TIE EITER11— ' NNE U C. TH TAN A THE SAM IF—IT IS TH I...FGAR IATH TELES—INI TLE-1 SAITKINA THAT I-FIRA LY,',,IHE,,N F Ly N111 . L ALL I I LGE,'=N �UELIENT`1' NTI11 LE F'I A STA I E=SIR INI BF L I I L ' E—FR_�WK " GIMME T", E. SAFEII N.STS SHALL RE A.EHINLEI IN TI T I E H ANIF E E=" < I EAG,AVIT10I SU FRUIT 1. ITUTUIE=FLT-11E EIIAVITIIN G R I I=AS REQUINEI,111INI IINITN HANITIN TI MAINTAIN TH E INTEI III IF TIE E I TIN TRE H` `L`T`A ME 'T"N I FF EIIAVATKAN IIGPIIT IIALL RE TIE 11"PLETE RE'UINII"Ll-IF THE IINTRAITIR.DRIVING INPPANALTE.EKESRI IS INI ITHER NT.Al THAT NEUEES�BUIRTLEN SHALL BE IT RIETLY P FINISHED IINTRAITIF SHALL 1HJI1IT IEIILIN I—EINGS All IALIULATILANI FAR ILL Ell 11 AT I IUPUAIT TI THE ENGINEER FAR FEIIIEA ILL ED By A 'INEEG'T D R PWI N EA AN D I ATIU L ATIINI A H ALL I F IF AT PRIFEIIIINAL EN RREN—RELF11TERED IN FILE ITATE IF TEXAS. I. SEE ITANDARD IPECIFIIATIIN ISITTIN 112121 AND 117211 FIR ARDITIIN AT EX—TIIN RRIHIREMENTI. U, < F- EE < N ED 4. REINATERINI IS 4. THE IINTRAITIR SHALL DUE ALL RELVATERING AS FEIUIRED FIR THE 1IMPLENIN IF THE MIN.NATIEDURES FIR DEWATERING IF IS IARIIIEI ILI THE GINTRACTUR IHALT RE 11 IIINTE1 TI THE ENIINEEI TIE NEI IEI INIAR TI ANY EART11111 IFERATIANI. 1. THE IEIATERINI VIITEI INALL 1E IF ILLFFIIIENT SIZE ANN IIIAGITF`Al REQUIRED TO GINTRIL IROUNIIATER R SEEPAGE TO < PIPE MATERIALS PE11ITPRIPEREIGAVATIBAN IPEIITIINI EIIANKIEITIINITRUITIINANI 1-INITITRUILIN.IURFRAIE PREPIIATITIN,ANITI ALUIW RIENIFETE IN BE PLAIED IN A DFUI IINDITIIN.TH E—TRAITIR SH ALL GRAW—N IRAUNDUVATER T�AT LEAST Ill EELFW ED THE UITTII�IDI,EAGAVATIINI AI JUIR IIE1,11 El THE ENTIRE EIIALALLIKH AREA AT ALL TIMES IN INIVI TI NAINTIIN A Ill ANN nrENNDRTUNE -ZT11 ES INDITIIN. p x. C. SEE STANDARD IPECIFIIATIIN IEITLIN 1-21 AND 112111 FIR 4DDITIINAL DEFIVATERINI'ElUIREAENT, "AN 'RE'A'T MANHILE HR, 4. IINTRAITIR SHALL PRAIVIDE DIMPLETE LARANUT AND INSTALLAHIN DRAWIN GS AND SINEDHILES WITH ITEARLY MARKED DIMENSILINS. 2E B. IINTRAITIR SHALL SUBMIT STRUIT—L DESIGN CALIUL-INS BY A PRIFESSIAINAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE IF TEFOS. IEIIIN IALIIIITIIN.=PAElAVTE1AN�,LNE IUNIILFT��T��H�LL HIL-E GINFIRRATILAN SINTENTRE.IFE—TE1 NEINT 63 146 FLITITKAI IGHIN THEY TITA'y Lp I A AT EGT RIINIIIITEI FULL LE111H IF ATITITURI. F ANN I LE WALL'IH ALL BE RE"'NEI"'A VERTI'AIR IIRIH 4RIE RESULTING IN 4 11 RIF HIRIIINTAL L.AD. I-1 I,-P:Na A PEI, I. IT, "I I BFULTHINAL MANHILE NESU_.EN7A D IF TANDARRA FIIAT NAE IN 12 2 F R E. MANHILE TIP ILAR WALL BE PRILIDED WITH FAIL LIFTINI AN CHIRI TI ALUIW FIR REM—F WTR-477 3. IPST-IN-PLAIE GINIRETE SHALL BE4111 PSI IN AIUAFFDANCE WITH TEcAIL SPECIFIAAHIN SEcN o3 3111. lax,✓E,r 18131A / G / o E/a"PVC BALL VALVE UPSTREAM ofE E CONNECTION U N / PRoaoseD SAMPLE PUMP �.1 1 GLOCATED INSIDE AriAwzEre iSE fV I Ol ROOM SEE DRAW NG INC ' „r,,,yN,,,f ,r W,Six", D t� P --- PROPOSEC SAMPLE "\ \ A5. S a SERVCE PSG2IT L 60 SERVICE '� INSTALL 72 SERVICE SADDLE Q �n sEE owM Ms Dc 'BOP SADDLEPEREcry of coeaus��� N N!�ti /N /» pi'v, i'D r b wq of aaPus aaswcOT Pc�a STANDARD DETAIL ON ON Dwc 2a AVE i, _gym �SDETAIL _ c2EArewELL \` ¢zA pz �J E, UTILIZE PENETRATION N 7 s E 5 _ / 7AND RX , M �'��)1 N D os�F EE No.'/4� O 1 e EE N07E DDS RG ��l J 7 } �At iN7oExs7NG6Ess / �� j5„ N iE i R O B DR S/ E-1269017 43 f 3/4 5 ANAL ZER DU LD NG J 11 SEE 0 DWG M REFER 1 G T'llPROPOSED NJEC ON I. DRAW G R W Jr C ] 1 CONCRETE FOUNDA ON DETAL / ROAD C OS�NG 0 W �7 1 SEE DWG MB.... 1 'N b _ 1 y CLS GAS p ExcnvnnaN suPPom n PRoaosED.. 1 .�•1 NOTE 2 . .„„� P ....«� - III a �2�, �s �Ih o SEED DEiA PIPE f tl�r) 377 ! REFER i0 NO ES ON SRENCN PROPOSEO 84 LF L DR AWNG n C1/M10 TVP v ENCN ttP. E G C C F d� 3 SEE DETAIL 4 M10 �P PEuNE.P1� ECAC �r N NfM lZ DU LD NO.SEE DWO MS 1 e 04 J Ir n/ PROPOSED NJECi ON a Z 'r a wir O PROPOSE N i0N 1 5 �, �� NG ANp NG CAS 3 C G M5 Z LOCAS ONB�A ° �S ABANDONED F PPING, N-17201811,55 cs S ¢ p 9 �7 D6 2689 M SEE A P A MnrvED PEre E FGsE Po.ory ory LIES, w N-711 1114 A �i AS IN 1 F TIE—IN E 26880851 7 r /r E 1 / re sPECFus ary ssR ory ro rc ic, suLnreeo 2 J y 6 N { If �l 1 ) 03E %/'.re seo corvcree.e.nrvn yore ¢2,U U Y J r;. i MM c TO AND c u Y ,,)�7)I 7 /� �FaF BFAUBFAFMsND E11w e i TEC TO BE r ALXCEF nnEDULFs FAre FPFM�PPrvV z d ,f tXT E N ...mre, f), URNI INLDRN �B Nc � B°°o orvE DRAwrvAs`oarvreRRrvRUreEre o PROTECT FOISTING a c E s Nc PLANT ®� d NJEc oRs q N c LrICAL c • IAF v PIPE I ) NJE ON MANHOLE f! 'N t ° ,110WO,11u6 Igo �� � � f lIM i v 7 i aio n 7 i 1 64 146 1 u i AF I lop Y } d., r,cru . / 3 � � ,- ooBn.rorva. UA �o } 7A' �P�%e�e,,,�N „ GN Loe oN zA ,,,� s CLS TIE-IN oa 6n, � WTR 477 — pre�E. 18131A � 1 Iii` it I1 'Lp ° II u r SEE PHOTO 01 FOR I"AS 2"C- 3' corvnrvwrlaN �1Q/{ /�.. /��/n MANHOEE JECTIXJ SEE PHOTO � NIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIWhl�Y. j ' CONPNUATON � � PUNT I �j f ryIry H^R REO CER r( = x BPLL VE I GS i0 1NJECTON 2B =�w u •J 1VP OF 2 l I1 Iom F x cLs nE-Iry N,w /2. /BPLL E BO SPVC / SEt / II A xll I�.�., IO IIN / F- AddllBPLL VPLVE I"EAS TIE-IN 01 //OENO /4'CAS II(`'r'/Td, NOTE I 1 F AND 1' AS i0 BE INS—IN BELOW G-8'PVC CARRIER PIPE CHASE i0RRIQ2 PIPE 1!1 NI%NT]FlE DISCHARGE O BO%. p=N W W m T 01 PLANT 1 GHLDRINE SOLUTION AND LAS TIE-IN p2 1"FLUORIDE AND 1"LAS TIE-IN PLANT 1 p3 1"GAUSTIG TIE-IN FOR INJEGTION LOGATION 26 W �J srxE. 1-1, srxE. Er W W 0 � U III pores: ... III a 1 ALL PIPING SHOWN IS RO TED IN O CHEMIC PIPE TRENCH. L I" 'i I EXISTING (21-1 a g F i (2)1 I/] GS iTO 0 SENPIEVSINS I"F.PWJi I�.F TE-114. FQ 4 y PWii] WQ j GS CORRENT RO TED / U a li � i0 P i JECi OIi � W C) Z 9 MANHOLE NEPR CW I J� ,� ) O 13 END I CAS IN CHASE AND UP i01PE q W U E STNC P_T I x N GOMBINED z O / EFFLUENT CHEMICPL // / �// OENOOSH PNO CPP I" O Z NJECnON NPNHOLE. w ![8 NPNHOLE 2B ECnON ���lll Err 65 ,r 146 p 1"SIN E10 PVC—L VALVE I"CAS TE—IN,i0 ,.onoonn�:� N.. INJECTION LOCATON IB 1"CAUSTIC TIE-IN,TO INJECTION LOCATION 1B �OS1"FLUORIDE TIE-IN PLANT 2 �OGDEMO 1"FLUORIDE PLANT 2 - �E WTR-477 svuE.NTs srxE. 3333= . 18131A I e DEMO ABANDONED PIPE V r PENETRAT ONN SEEEP—M2 l{ l JF� oma= � FOR CONT NBATON. '4 f ��� "f � F DEMO(2) B NDONED A� NOEWO ASS.AFTER `li NN PIPING, G. I 4 LED AND" S �j "L1 � a�� I T' N TVTE ALONG Ex5 NG 2 ELLS ONLNE1 BALL VALVE ANB BOFLT //�� M2 FBFIT O CONTINUATION,E DWO ✓,,L h� I 90 y INSTEAEL OW PVC N 2 I�'�fA,, x ,. i/,�r/I I',✓Sf(YW41. i (N^ BNESMSoALCSPPPINON ExTNGPIPE te � 1 W W 1p'7I PENETRATION. CAUSTIC PIPE AND DEMO(2)ABANDONED FLUORIDE PIPES \p'.8��I2"CHLORINE SOLUTION TIE-IN AND 1"FLUORIDE INJEGTIGN 2A O 0 WALE.— �% SCALE.NTA U : - o z BPECECATaN SECTRBN 4o xs aT wS, w AR K B �M a TAN' z� o�N t a w Q¢ ULJ a DEMO U N BONE PIPING a a z pg GLEARWELL2 SAMPLE PIPING ~ iU S—`rnA E<66 s 146 E`WTRM 477 18131A PRECAST TOP MANHOLE N e2 ux�uLrMS„urrvc COVER 12 3fi'x36 SST WATERTIGHT WALL MOUNTED FRP TOP ACCESS PRECAST MANHOLE TIC myyq"e PIPE ER BE 1 0 ABOVE SURROUNDING SPEC CION FINISHED GRADE 40 05 OI P o 2 GRA O01 g - Br Llw rtu 2"PVC n FIBERGLASS ACCESS 3 q^S Hap ,e Y CAS NG PIPE / µR'NuwiW,„"M,}.n✓” i ODER SEE NOTE a 5-06-0201 f 12" 36'x36' 9s'DIAMETER "' m VENT -' PRECAST MANHOLE OO DRS' BACKFILL PER III OF CORPUSCHRISTI CONCRETE CAS ^N o MANHOLE DETAIL ON GEE 2"CLS A A CONC CUB TO 2-O^ orvc P CURB d 5-03-06030 /6"AERO FT k5®e'EST wE'co Nwo - w i � Ms p I N SLOPE FOR REINR u T T&B.TYP ,ww ip � SUMP ECT A 3 SE ' EL 49.10E w - u �°uw PPE TRENCH = M-46-0100 -. �— s p REFER To ' DRAW NG M2 F/ EIRANDINA 1.1.0"SUMP /�, \ % � ........ ... / a. � w WA ERSTOP RUBBER gM-40 0208 CL EL 45.D2F �... a i cAsr-N PUCE ).� IFi= / WNCRETE MAT DIRECTION OF/ ` 2�:..MIN O= NZ 1a {'s a a'OR,T&B \/ 3 MAN"ALEHOLE 26 TOP PLAN '" 1 I 4 a MIN k qs BARS 3/4' a ~ e r Ls v a��a ®2 ®'I2 M c46-0100 M-46-0100 O W EXISTING I2" W T Hs®12.TIP STEEL U EEL PPE ° CHEM CAL SOLUTION LINE w 14 0 EXTENDS TO APPRox z' q SECTION E ABOVE PPE NVERT _ g SECTION D III t SUMP sW4[}e D Ems TT=," (1 x1 xfi) N { WELD IN SEES SCHEDULE FA E 0 FLANGE TO BE NO EExISTING 72-IN TEEL PIPE WLL EMAN OUT FLANGE UTLE, 6'CMIN FABOVE FINISHED OUGHOUT TH FLOOR OF MANHOLE CONSTRUCTIONHR E cURATION OF g SEE DWG j TIP OF 3 316 SST NTINR ATION V 90'E DIAMETER STILLING WELL _O 2.REFER ION M-46-0100 FOR ADDITIONAL F W a U MANHOLE CASTDPD AT METED ER EDGE OF FLANGE TO BE 8" PIPEICINNECTIONS ON ASSEMBLIES AND SIZE 0 W SCHEDULE N 6" L 2�Z 3.FOR CHEMICAL LINES LOCATED INSIDE CARRIERARE PPlVDP D N FR PE I ANG S CAAST-IS P OF ALL MANUFACTURER CMBY PIPELIN NDCE aa Q F U J N Q CE LAB - FLANGE GASKET INSULATOR.OR APPROVED EO UAL.A N { 3/4"S COMPATIBLEC 4,PROVIDE FLEXIBLE RUBBER SLEEVE PC OFW U 2 U Q Q Q v ROUTE TO WITH CH MANHOSSH LE RUBBER BOOTAT S"ALL BE PS%FAL0 U W BU LD NGPENEIRATINR EXISTING 72 SERNCE EM MANUFACTURED BY PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION, 3i W STEEL PIPE FLANGE OR APPROVED EQUAL. U g aGOF 12 F AFFIENEAL B, WITH PLO ON NOR E L—DISHI AND 11,AT" ED 12 PC' SEE NOTE 3. o Si CA NO PIPE COATNG NOT cml rvc B EaEN"EVEcs Z DDIRECTION OF OUTDED ON G F LINO fFLOW COLLAR SHOWN FOR of uwluoL A PER AWWA M11 CtARITv_ ".1/1i&4 FAR PIPE SUPPORT.TYPA _ WELDED !} CEMENT MORTAR uNING ORIFICE(SIZE PER sCHED)SEE M-46-0100 E.67 s 146 3 2g/MANHOLE 26 BDTTOM PLAN CHEMICAL DFFUSER lanoo _gym �/ mus_T/a'=1'-o REFER TO SPECIFICATION 1 L]ETAIL 2 INJECTOR SECTION TIP4CONFIGURATION ET,1r NII FOR ALE.Ms _ R WTR-477 ECTO TI C 18131A e ®Z D x3e�Access DOOR COVER FOR 11 NEE111 PRECAST 101 MANHOLE RL.M i FIELDLOCATE B ABOVE SURROUNDINGNFINISHED GRADE HOLE 11 IF I G ,Poa?ry UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL LURpC L TO AVOR CONFLC WTH UN DERGROU SE EDETAIL CAL g puciaANu SEE DETAIIOLL GRADE EL es.oc>~ E ...OF Fns ON DWG C24 S ttP OF 2 CIVIL� YQ REFER TG FD6my 12 VENT DRAGINGS PAVEMENT ROP W,.✓w n R 3IEFEII ------ SEE NOTE 4 ACCESS :- EXISTING UNDERGROUND f DOOR J LL DRAWING ELEER 'EMp CAL,PROVIDSUPER IT, WALL MOPPED FRP _= NONE OIARONSDRAWING M1E sP CIFCAT SECTION p� PIPE SUPPORT PER A A FB ACCESS LADDER 46E651 oT IOVP o Ex PAVOAT ION 1 GAS ------ SE 06-0201 CC Su N'o TER ION MNOTEs _ 9aE DIAASELT MANHOLE E CLS PR CAST MAN 30"FLANGE p"BUND FLANG WTI I DRAWRINR O CH FOR HE MLICALTS E N Q G M2 SUC PORTION N 16O"H x CURB INJECTORS g VINIM US ONPM1SEEoTEs CSN03C 0603 e DISTANCE RETENEN Ex Sr G 36" MANHOLE WALLANDN � p Ma RCP PPE 63®8 EW 1/6 PER i TIP,TIP C PER o wCT oz "CAS "'111 TO SUMP SEE FEA ECT A 9.pp± MANHOLE 1 B TOP PLAN �� �� � �m� � M 48 0100 y Z� sruF.T/s"�'o" �ExPPNp NG RUBRER c'=1/�W3 T T _ M 40 0208p 4 SDMP�,x,xG a PER CITY GF -. CL EL 446PE A� 15 p w CORPUAs`Ac�es coNCRETE DIRECTAN, ,sEe y o MANHOLE DETAL ON C25 OF FLOW ,,NOTE 2 2 � E EXISTING 3e`RCP q6 BARS 2 CS U 3/4"S PIPE _ 12 M-46-o100 M-46-0100 �. N 13._4.. PCCP NPPE2 R5112' TIP TENDS FOR CHED FLANGEEM CAL E Ex ST NG]2"PCCP PIPE OOEM C4L SOLUT ON VL PIPEXINVER T2'TAPPING 2SEE NOTE, 30'WIT BWELD D OUT APPRGx 2 ABO E PIPE INVERT Z INJECTo ON PPE S. SUMP(1 x1 x6) A SEGTION P F z SEE NGT g SECTION g w 12�CAS E HOLE R so4 scuF ~ X z i 96' TDIAMETER a�a M W Q D CGPNUATON ¢Z F Q U Z U 14 114 CAST-IN WELD ON 316 WpW J N ¢U N { PLACE SUB ZZ 3/4 S OUTE TO OUTLET FLANGE, TVP F¢ED U W Z ANALYZER R BUILDING SCH NOTES. 6 W y N SPECFGi ON d E o EC SING SECT ON 4a 41 42 ONCPESE P DRE P To z g s PIPE.SEE MD. BAER oev"AMP GN Pae creouP�E a a TAPPINGS SLEEVES SHALL BE MINIMUM 6" U U OF IT ON ED PIPE SUPPORT rvP A ND FLANG ADDITIONAL 3L6:ltz iTn F SPEC CAT GF EFLGWEpCONOFOCTOF TE 00 FOES IN 2 U MANHOLE LE TINGE P aN S O INSULATING EOORDNATEOPUCEMENT OFMANHOLEWITH SEE DETAIL KIT FIGHTING SLOPE, 1 D M-46-0100 ca TV FOR To FELp Lo oTE PPE Jami FLOW G SOLUTION LINE nry PR vpE MNMUM 4 'FROM 3 oFDP Pe ENcasEMEP To JOINT ON eaiuES 68 s 146 E �@ MANHOLE 1 B BOTTOM PLAN Slpcs RE ER a 19e1 C FFaap H u v Na. �_J msLc�s/a"=�'-o' e FLANGE OUTLET DETAIL DRAW NGSFFOR PPEL NE NSTALLAT oN. Pp 1( M WTR 477 18131A NOTFs WALL M UN ED FRP P C N e 1.OUTLET FLANGES SHALL BEWELDED TO —INII 40E 05 5007.TP�CP, MAI 60NUFACTURER.LIFE SHOP R v PPE SECTION COVER PREC ST TOP MANHOLE REFER TO CIVIL 'Er ♦. 36'X36 ACCESS DOOR DRAW NGS FOR REFER TOC L ® O SHE cEcas MANHOLE i0 PAVEME eoLRARDs DRAW NGL FOR f BE P100PABOVE SURROUNDING LOCAS ON OFEXISTFN D RADE ar L�ry L CLEARWE L 1 BACUFLL PER SEE DETAL ON C 24 r°M i B BOLLARD Civ OF 0 DRAWL 66.02~ 3 0 my W } Aw OF 2 CORPUS LE RSA CONCRETE GRADE E nn MANHOLE DETAL ON C25 SEE NOTE 4 M N ON NG MS 1A R3L RECAST 3MIN E MAN RCROUND CP HOLE 1..UW 2 BL ND FGE EUW R PPE 1\FISTINA \\ ACCESS DO T2 VENT ELECTRICAL ER \. 1G6'HP 16'W URB DMEA ER CF MN�Fo FIBERGLASS �Nz T SLOPEPAO 2-0„ - - P OF 3E SEEA NOAE iP ABOV DAOSBRONG ¢=N2 A A accEss UDDER Ns�a'Ew. ECE LANCE e D E FLOOR FMA HOLE N rc 1 F TIP o M-46-0'100 EXPANDING RUBBER - 1 SUMP CL EL 5 B D STAN E EISEEN H MD AND 4 N m FLANGE.T O 2 H W MANHOLEIATOP PLAN H6RA '" UC SCALE: 0" 2 RS 48-010 W (/3®RF AVP-Af 71 M W 6o FTE B eEGTION A SECTION IIALE, ) S 14'-0' SCa1F-T/a'=�-o' PSiPEPA CASING PIPE, f SEE NOTE 3 ON M5 Z 3j{ 3 i CAST-IN PLACE MAT a F4 1' LAs Qo DwGM IONTINUATION FOR z D, } SUM 1 zom P(1..6") 3? Toa MANHOLE 2 w vRECASTT EMAN w v w j z U ¢a CHEMICAL INJECTION O U EE,AVP OF 3, SE RETAIL z W N 2 U ( DI—TION OF O AFIT 60 FTE i} E�69 ,, 146 $tt 1q MANHOLE IABOTTOM PLAN �OnDo Na n,HE TTH' REWTR-477 8131A UQR DE ANALYZER MT ALANALVZFR Ulllirmrw » ����m»g UyJJ�J j Ma TORE ANE REDNCERwTM„< 1 1 we rEEw TR % sE RARRF'l Pl p v , PREssURE REDUCNTIMING 2 EgU STINb AMPLE PUM1P INNE RoaE VALVE AND NTECRAL IANNEOTII PREssuRE caucEro�aP n ANAivlz�a ,V tP A—ER �EERE �Nvs Y SAMPLEPuUP % �,NUI Wff o TY1.1 Ah MP SEE DETAILQ8 i. QLLEjsMFAUTE ALL CQNTRR NE„sAMP EPR,P TUMP EMILR NI MME BRAIN y Q a RAINS RG "is IG REPAIR ' �Iomr� 'I"AINIT NN"A1IT1 M-111 L,11HARGE BAIR PRESSURE c IQURATION vALVE a,a eALLVAL�E PHOTO IUEATQN VA LVE,INICTEAE PHOT02 vcTEEwITH sTRaINENc,ISQLR TO FxISTINO ANITILE ausMMC REDUCER IMITINI INALPTELE1- CONRITIONINQ UNIT F- ��PLANT 1 ANALYZER BUILDING BOTTOM PLAN NOTES'. >2 y W\En W m ,���NnN3P.�� ,moo ra eEsu Pu�,N.� a a a DITA,SEE NATE O WQ W _ U LALT 1EN'IE cMEMICAL aaucae�sre,a,.annu src.mru. E, ExISTWc ANALvtER VALVE,TYP YP A REI.,AIN IN PLACE PLE RN ,z sA, TQ ExST NG m ® EPUTE ANAL�R _ DRAIN TO EGVTwD Ru Lowy IIAIN TVP = 2 RR LDINQ Hua RRNN e UN srauT IPE Q II INLINE PH PRIDE FLUOR DE ANALYZER ORT.TVP BEE RETLIP L B PMP IL INLINE 1111TH ,_ a Z I DETAILS DETAIL E � s a i, Fz F zo FLUORIo ��- � UORIQE.ANALYZER a F J a w � . 0 FEFINCEFIIIT D, R,,,rt' <z TUBING SAMPLE URAN INSIN6 ANnwzNRE TUBING�1; ECTON Q U U INLET„RM QUICK IYU.III NL LE a z IS PUMP TVP PH ANALYZED _NN :S NEEDLE 111E z v Q g z SE 9 ' ANDEnNo INSiARLNEw POLv ENE F;, .. I ED ” 2 m TRMNcc BRAN 'M H Ns vzrQFEEL A 1 � a r J.... J.... 2 /ALVEEFOR 9 Q wNc coNNEcrION. �} TYP ISTING BAMPLE PU.D TVP 7UnN_"0146 } �2�PLANT 2 ANALYZER BUILDING BOTTOM PLAN q SECTION � HE__ T,-I. N. PHOTO x 18131A A nwuvzG / �.h PAMPLE wna TT uan,rzea _ mcaa Nr 1 R�-TsrN,HISEsaRa - 1 ® �MPs�PEE SAMPLE PUMP ��PSPaa:PNPP 2 NT�aNANN o�NN��RNETNB�Na „q IALL A s ,N N TVP i_ c Nan N In Z ` .iia en�vuEE NEII 0 2 y yNj W m Pu P ' �n III SUCTaN P11 Nc ENNN tV iF-� e Enn,FOR(:u TlNu11- . PHOTO 1 -BAIA PE—URB 0 e ��PLANT H 2 ANALYZER BUILDING BOTTOM PLAN NOT To scn,s O e scue TTa-, A SECTION o � 3 ¢ a aNTP LEE i S, Q EE T U 2 N—Pu AP ii ¢ I2 Q INSTA Q W U W U N a L I IsouTINN VALVES 2 CR TOPOMP ;, p aNNN—E w a wsTu, LP�TLPN j$ SA L d a 1EIT1Nn3117.1 r l �} y PHOTO 2 euMe _ f No,To scA,E _ E`WTRM 477 18131A 11111EI 111UNG 11 1E.UlEl 1. UIL N'TH -E N I �2 CHEIVICALIN ECTIGN QUILL M-4�QlDO TYPICAL REIN FORCING AT OPENINGS S-03-0109 e ELEVATION DDER In SECTION FRP LAQER ik S-06-0201 ax,vaEt H- IT I --DNUL-1 N-UT Zoo �l E-L CONCRETE CURB S-03-0603 D F111 UN "7"T I MN 4 "/' `LT N, . . . . . .. IIS .......... ----------------- UN-11-1 �1-NIL r3 �o Oppo"' o IL-L�N I L11D�lL LIE_�EE,��N,�E�� L�E%LL,BE=51NEMEL L D11 D 1-11--IE 11E 1-11 pl 1PE11FE1 1ry INLINE pHUORP PR BE [DETAIL III IIT �Q 1-40-0503 7 NVPPORT < EE FIN < < F i U, 1. -`1 Fl IlEll INIH,1��NELL�%111 III III IIIILL ILL I±±:�l I IEE I IE IELIL IHEEI I III II liUm 4 ND FLL lf�IN/L�l LINI S-1 .1-1 1,- 1 SIL11 I'LL 1,11011DE-N IF-N�N 1-1, CONCRETE CHEMICAL LINE TRENCH DETAIL_N, r3-'\ CHECKERED PLATE DETAIL O�RETE PANEL DETAIL n l—,`-LE N11 ONELINE SCHEMATIC PLAN LIGHTING -T..wE.E1R"QTR °Z ��°MN No<rereEEDre RSNc EmEE EosE°N lLNre T TLINED I-N P DEETLLE PT Ea Row m Tre�sEDreMEre DIE°N � T-E- Y°N°°�T T°PNED°P IEED°..I°E IIHE°ILE, ; °N o— °MER° E °_° DLIL-1 °-T_w E Twz Eozza°E uTER DE-ENER°izaLioN I,ME RUN coNCEUED II(LP I10DENOEs m EaioE a DLIL EE_ TRaKSEOR R iNoreEaarv°PreEssvreE IN -DEIE-IONT - sEEEnmureE�seHEE-E°uicl 11E-IN PINNEcnoN TAME°Eu.°N ENErecznTiaN E ONDE aouND EE111i coNDwT LEEIE E DENITEsre LILTIlE TmE. oTED) RECEPTACLE ICA ss-soET slam uoTOR sTamER LIEL TME DEL"'E"LMTTlN RELIED aw"EN N TIME°NEIM1 °ry ENE-11-"h -° Ew s•ma°vere"Eaoo*uEERwire cnN , E Ex,uLE saEouzREE SEE NIL ,YNR ¢E iNDicaTED LMTTNI RELIED "zrylEN ----- °re°urvD crew are-LE //�� IiETLLE scuED��ILTI vPE.IEE wP� 'uv.aoa°µEEµrezcEv,aaE g MOTORWsaR Yx r%�" cEigr a w --3iE-- a Ej ure ® NP o°_�°Ns~_` � DN INN°TE°PE1101E1E 1111 E °E.°ry°E-ErvEre°� T�°ry ITPI °"NDµEEE �x ; °DE II"E LLIHT IL-LIE I LEE zNs ,DID°DEcEP acEE�N° �IIIIIIII� TME DEIELEI IONT �P aNPER €�Po°EEL��Ra�€"L�zE 10,11 °N re�s�NE TENPErea,°RE �� NE°N DE-ENEDo�zaT�oN _Lp lNDalY LEwEDE EwPP°LT EPN SEE°v.T�reEN IN � NPRN "NDEPIPOIND TEEEP"DNE cNND°" E PD EE Tre" LINED UNDER°Ro"ND TE��N °TNE° a oN`oR �;D 10 °°TMMEN �E rNN RDw D,LME ETN oR ac E E rereEre omc reEE oTs,rvv°° — < > MRDMDl% aE D I 1IN-Il D.Lw Po R POSE SPP LEE re ref L ED°EE �} arH Mmoe rwD NoesEPowee eaTiNc 11-M`ZoLEN"`TlEl`Ll`lL.lL PE-11 EEEI-0 cEEE �a s''NDTTED umoR11. ws"owNi LlPILL - INEELE_ r w °ENzeaTOR " - ore SMo<E"oreLEPowEre o T S o nv oNEN-R aMPEREs w,Tm° NPIMIl y aoLED L LrJ ao sR - Eou PuIEL�NT caourvDINEIND �oNNEmoN f""1 cm RELONED ONE—N°TED f c L_d .w v'Poi,"a�°R"s RONoaRPR1oi*ncE. JYr TaERMn�ovoRPoaD RE�aY v°�,OEs as No,ED.E�zE a m RUMENTa,oN°E.so ar�P �LE L QED of ARL GENERAL SYMBOLS ES°N�N oE;a°re(Tref�E„Ere ILII.'; Illi , n ITLEIND 11 Pll� 1HI-N El INITINMEN1 ELEOTreicLL mrvNEOTi°N 1 DETAIL NAME A SECTION TITLE - iTa (n i-RceEN)c"T ■ oTOR O T"ERM°sa� 2 oETw�sc 2 3 10 sa�E��°ETw�sc ~ r=w��MRTEa swneu (°c°REE 1 wrv,rea�¢N,Ere coNDuiT N°MPER 01 ILLY TwE 0.L iNDiG�ED %Lo- ar rvoreuuLv cYosc° OPEN DencE�°pTED ory�vmvE O P=EN PIN ENL �y� uER[DEL NL �5H uERE DETAIL LEIIE IE 2 O �w�ETE 0.5 iNDirRTED ENI T !-,vav°s"awry) 0 �T IN F cu DRNMNa is SmaVM EIE �pp ERE W N 0 ° re M Ere °DDE°mT Ea E�°m �mreDE P EE © c°0M"N�INNI PILELL L re N°�L _N 101 w z lEllIN N1101111 11 LETTEP) E RE1L°�RE �,IEIIIIN 11 1 RET PN �oMRa�sA;�o�DN,P°EE re°, ❑®® re f°°PMEN,N°TED \ ® w � m � oj] RAP LIIE w — N EZ w o;oo rereE re wT,aP TN° °N \ \ w o w o TP E°°PMEN,1 1 N°TEre DETa re " R°m s EEER ® T°E°DPMENT N°TED °N ERE DETa z 0 ❑ My E LEP ag FEE—PILE GENERAL NOTES IYMPE�s HAVE PEEN°IED IN Tws PawEa. 1L0Erea,�°N°E ETMre°s DOES-No,MMPs.a« ET 73 n 146 N EMPTY corvou�TI stiau PE Pe NED wNv PILL servo a PE c FED oa PLI.ED. yy7R-477 IELI Il E�IEI REoo ED To oPERazE"'Co" a ure"TirvR az reccmTPczE mrvouns,wo mrvoucrores - _ PR UEtEcr 16131/+ ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES: GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES (APPLICABLE TO ALL SHEETS) (APPLICABLE TO ALL DRAWINGS) •AL.,,E2�uE I. THE EOMFAGiOF SHALL REFER 10 11.COCRANALS UTILITY SERVICE 19,PANELBONDS.CLEAN EXPOSE 2T CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE . CONTRACTOR SHALL CGOPONATE ]. THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS THE 1,ALL OUTAGES OF ELECTPCAL 22.CONTFACTOF TO PROVIDE NSTALL THE NFCH IECIURAL,STRUCTURAL OUTAGES WITH UTILITY COMPANY. SURFACES AND CHECK DECIDED- ROUTNG OF NEW ELECTRICAL ALL WORK WITH ARCEHECURAL CONTRACTOR MAY USE UTLIES.ELECTRICAL SERVICE i0 AND TERN NATE A9 REOU RED ANY REP LAL CONNECT ONS SI NG BRANCH STRUCTURAL,MECHAN('A4 PLE SMOKE CABLES FOR AREAS N THE PPM,OUTAGES OF AND ALL NEI EOU PM M AND , CVL MECUM GLL AND PWMB NG OF ELECIRC FEEDERS WHu Ex U NUM/LOW _ i( ' a = MBING ND mECVAL SYSTEMS CIAS9 1 POWER LINKED CIRCUITS �'-TY"��SiooiiS D DRAWINGS. COORDINATE COMMUNICATIONS ESVSTEMS. DRAWIDNGSCALLNA OUE INAlHEIS p[I�ERMIN[NpLFGN FC00RDINAIE THE F DRAWINGS TV 2 CONNEClIONSPREPS RE POTOAMAINTAING N BREAKERS AND FIRE UPROIEC IONN PLUMBINGw GAS, METHODS INDICATE BELOW SECURItt SVSNS,AND REJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND r IECLAN CAL D PWMBING IF'HE LT' QC S y REST RE FOR ZHE PROJECT EQUIPMENT SIZES AND LOCATIONS � T LEPHONE NO DATA SYSTEMS DESCRIBED IN THC SCOPE OF w„L [SI G SYS EMS N 1E'ICE COVER PLATES FOR VACANT PR ND 0 [R SPECPL SYS CMS. Durewa CON AT WHEN POCFIT DIRECTORY TYPE EXMreE THE sums Nm SEE ND WORK MUST BE PERFORMED ON CIRC FIT DIRCCTORY SHOWING EXAMINE THE PROPOSED ROUTING uANIGPL AND PLUMBING A COMMUNICATIONS WIRING OJECI IN 2 B.TELEPHONE WIRING R WNN PRIOR /1 L vlm THE NNmzN ED UIPMDM OF REVSN(1FCUIFNG NRANGEM[M. PATH OF NEW FEE[R DRAWINGS mH UES N ADDS D BY T ORD R TO DELIVER A AL CONTE SITE IMPINGING BODING PERIOD GRCUIT9,119E PERSONNEL ALL SPARE BREAKERS SEL BE CQMRACIORS SHPLL ER,DV SPEGFIED ELES CAL DIS TO HE OMPGE. AND FULLY OPERATIONPL CONTROL 0 COHE SCALE AMIUAR ZE SILL SUCH FF Np LABELED AS [LISTING LOM FIXTURES.DEVICE REQUIRE USES,CCI DISCONNECT SPRING METHODS. SYSTEM, WFHCONDITIOENS,A AND VERIFYFIELD OPERATIONS SUCH CIRCTIC UITS. FEEDERS,BRANCH BREAKERS.FSTARTERSFCUIT ANDCO 12,THE WINCS NDOSPDEC uITEONS IN THE CIRCUITS.i[L/DATA FIRE ALARMS CONTROL B I)PROVIDE INDEP[NDEM SUPPORT DR A 13.ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ARE LL 1MANDAN 2 RANCH CIRCUITS, FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE IMPLI[S TH[COMFAC OF IST pIAGRAMMATICAL AND DO NOT MEA UREME TS ND IRC R N Ex STAG EXEC RICA STEM LUMINA RES CLEAN STI RELOCA ION,CONTRACTORE SHALLG FEEDERSS E LEC TRI EOUIPMEM IRING SYSTEMS AT FURNISH,TRANSPORT�INSTALLO NECESSARILY SHOW EVERY ICA M O ANDS INCLUDE INFTHETBIDUALL JEC I SERVICE UNTIL NEIN SYSTEMISD DETERGENT TO CLEANN, USE MILD IN AND WIRING NOT TO EXCEED 36 INCHES CONNECT WARRANT AND COMPONENT AND/0R ACCESSORY NECESSARYVCFIR ACM OGNED CAMPLEIE AND READY FOF ELTER OR A D INTERIOR SURFPCFS, AALL DNEAT ANDLOCATE DWOFKMANNTIFIED DLRI REQUIEM F ETE CLOSER IF REQUIRED INHHEOR SIN3T-UP,INCLUSNELY. REQUIRN FOR A COMPLETE Np ZO W H COMPLE110NSOF THE VON K IG CA Il9PBLE SYSTEM ONLY RINSE WDHNCLEN WATER AND MANNER AS RCOUIRED To FUNCIIONPL SYSTEM P L ELECTRICAL CODE OSWTIHIVER1 AND AMPERAnONPL INSIPLWION_THE S ACNMMOMT[NEW WORK AT NO (NFPAwEVALL]O). IPING AT LEAST S6 DIAGRAMMAIIING EONLV,OWN SINDICAIING AND ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO I ONMCASUAL FIELDOUTIN AOBSERVAIIONGS ARE ED TEMPORARY NTRACTOR SHALL NCLIDE ANY CONNECTSCEN[RAIORE FOR ELECTRICAL ELECIRICALAPARIS OR ALENSES. ODIFa/ExBALiENA”LOD CONDUwAND 2 SHALL COMPLY WITH, 1ATEXALI AND UI�HE SH P 2(INCHES A!NAY FROM ANY HEAT EMS NDIII LONGER THAN WIRING AS REOUIFED. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,(INCLUDING PRODUC G HENS S ALL EnEM DE HST NDE NR CONTROL SAYST ME IS NNCH GAIN (7 ONE(SS HOUR. OBTAIN 2 FOR WING ND RACEWAYS CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE BOTH DRAWINGS AND IN SWITCH-LEG IN CAMPLIANCCD WDH APPLICABLE REPORT NGIINEIERAND EXISTINGDBEEFOREM REUSE. TERMINATE Ore DROVING INDICATING PROPOSED SPECIFICATIONS),IND STRY A7 WINDIE RACCWAVS FOR ALL CONDUCTO S TO PLL ELECTRICAL CODES,ACCEPTED INDUSTRY AROR C PERMISSION FROM OWNER C RUNS IN INACC[SSIBLE BEGINNING OF DEMONIIONAMEANS PNFTTILLV FOR COMPLETELYA CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAYS WITH ROUTING OF FEEDER WITH OPULLBOX SINDARDS,AND ALL CODES WALLS. PETS,0 CEILING EQUIPMENTUINDICATED l0 PROVIDE STANDARDS.ANp OWNERS ON GO - STING SERVO ESIBEING ND SPACES SHPROVIDEFADEOUATE NATALLER ACCEPTS EXISTING ISNLIPC SYSTEM M NIM ZE DENHFICAHON TAGS INDICAHNG �A 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE ND STURDY SUPPORT FORA A FIT Ll FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION IFFTHE KERS U ED cONDMONS. ARD/CIFCUH NUMBER OR RELOCATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL PARIS OF RACEWAY SYSTEMS. Id.PROVIDE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING o EEMPORARYFCONNECTIONS TO CONDUIT TERMINATION POINT, EOCAnONSASHOWN EON AT D IN 2 P CORE,CUT PATCH,SEAL AND DRAWINGS AND SHALL C00RDINhE NSPLL MLO PULL C L'ILWER AND LGIn NG PLL COM CIS,WHI H MAY DEMT`N WORK CONSISTS OF MAIMNN ERNCE IN AREA PROVIDE RS FOP ALL PNM AL WPLLS LOGRS ALL EMPTY RACEWAYS D [SIZE MALL E PREVENT THE COMPLETION OF AND IS NOT UMHD TO NE NJPCENTSTO WORK N3E0.5 ,LBO%FSEV CEILINGS REOUIREpFTO INSTALL COME LY WDHNNlIONAL R MINIMUM OFW%12 THWN IN 3/d'A WORK N IMENRED SHALL BE STORNE.AN DISPOSAL NEW FEEDER ARCEITECTUFPLN FAWINGS. ELECTRICAL CG MI OF METALLIC FLEXIBLE BROUGHT THE ENGINEER'S R[MOVPL. D DEX AT US E ALL IT IMILLWoBK SHOP DE(MPA-]O1 PROVIDE MTD WIRE Fare ALLEN CAMBACioe DISTRIBUTION ELECT'CAL LIGHT n MAINTNN EXISTINGFSYSTEM SYSTEM12 22 SHALL EC DONE DINMA NEAT AND REOUIREMENTS. CAN. nCIRCUITSRCARTHE THAN 0 SHALL NOT PR GEED WITH v d. ALL MATERALS&EOUIPMENT NI RUN WIRING PARPLLEL i0 FEET, ALL RACEWAYS SHALL O REWTED WORK UNTIL PLL N ERVE MIL NEW SYSTEM ORKMANLIKE MANNER. N BUILDING ARCHRECTURAL AND CONFLICTS PRE RESOLVED AND ~ OUTLETS VONTN' TOPPWE' MAKE SWRCHOVERS AND DISABLE SYSTEM ONLY CONSTRUCEION ORAFINISHESNY CENT SSHALL ACCORDANCESWr ED IN STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. GROUND WIP[TSZED S EE NI. THE CLARI YING INFORMATION IS 0 I N=W M PUBLIC ADDRESS,TCEPH R F SYSTEMS AND ANY CO ROL CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE IRE BE REPN D NF H MNUFACN RER'SHPUBLISIED BRANCH GRCUITS STALL HAVE ISSUED TO THE COMRPCIOR BY ()Q ROWER WIRINGTO EXISTING WAIGI AS REAL RED PQtFLOGL ARCHHECI OWNER'S-REACHING REC A DA IONS FOR ERNE A COMRACIDR SILL TAKE PR DER FULL SIZE DEDICATED NNTRALS. THE ENGINEER. T ECHAN SOL AND PLUMBING LOSING JURISDICTION AT NO CAST TO THE OWNER INTENDED INTERPRETED BYTHEPFECAHH0N5 TO PROTECT AL N GO�K EOUIPMEM. DUREND OWN TIME NATTY MENT EXISTING FACILITIES UTILITIES,ND qS 2 PLL LGMING WIWNO SILL BE X11 M U d OWNER ND LOCAL FIRE SERVICE EN IN[ER THE SIALIAHON OMADF PCOPTv T H PROVIISOIJIDE AR ER CONDUCT RS 5 WN 10 OND.INA RSA' CONDUIT 5 STING BRANCH AT LEAST 21 HOU BEFORE 2 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROM BY ALLEXPEESTRIENCED CRAFTSMN IN A ALSO TAKE PFO[REPR CA TON DERATING OF CONDUCTORSRDOE TO FREE' N TED 0T FWISE O w OR CIERCUITINO Np EOUIPM[Nl PARTIALLY OR COMPLETELY I CONTAINMENT Np DISPOSE OF E OVEER PROPERTY SW ECHMHE MAY S O (STARTERS,AGCONN[CTS,DEVICES, DISABLING SYSTEM PLMINIMIZE MAiERIPLSE0015E COSISEND NSPS' GOND ONS TEMPERATURES NOTE GRAFIN COMB CTOR SHALL FOVDE MATERIAL,EQUIPMENT,ND DEBRIS WIRING AS EESTIRERAFO A N C) WIRING.CABLES,AND CONDUII)CETO EEMPORARYFCONNECTIONS TO D[MOLmON AND CONSTFUCnON. SERVICES NECESSARY TO TV A N.E<�AMPACHV TABLES AND FOR ALL LOADS THAT AGE EOMPRICAL WORK KNSTA9HALL BE SANSFACIIONRPLL RDAMAGESHITECT S VOLTAGE DROP. SYSTEM, N E LETE y R[MOVED BACK l0 THE ESOURCE GO THE COMFACTO SHALL PHASE URING CONSTPUCHED 2 A REC LESS NOTED ADJACENT TO WORK AREA. n DEMOLITION ANDFCONSTRUCTION FURNISHED BY THE COMPACTOR CAUSED D _REGARDLESS OF DRILLING L E ACLE WIRING SHALL BE GNORNINFL NOR SHALL THE INDICATE 0 THE DRAWINGS THE 6.2X10.WM10 OND.IN 3/A THSUPPLY w�oB ro onYlovE NO w 0 EF.NSE. 1 PUBLIC - - FATIONIICNJ 5. ALL CEILING MOUNTED HEMS SNPLL CONTRACTORSHALLBPEWCE THE GHNDMIT UNLESS NOTED [LISTING TELEPHONE,P KING OWNER FOR PPPFOVPLAS 6 D[OLSH D EXTEN EXISTING 6 ADDR6S, RIIY,ttOCx ACCOMPLISHED WITHOUTDELAY 6E BE INSIPLL D N A CtlRDN E BUI LOADS GETWE N HASEE QIHERWl9E. SYSTEIMLS:MAINTAIN CARLINO WITH THE RCHITEc UFPL ND SCHEDULING OF ANY BANNING EXISTING AND NEW PANE ALL ORE NOTED.WREMOVEG(RELOCUS 1ATATE, SYSTEMS IN SERVCE UN IL N COOFDHNA EAIPH SINOM ND REFLECTIVE CCIUNGTRE PC CIF A SYSTEM INTERRUPTION. WITHIN SCOPES OF WORK BO 2 EMPTY CONDUnS SHALL BE ANDSVSTEM9 ARE WMPLETE AND EW SCHEDULING OFAWORKAWITH OWNER LOCAnE FOR N TEM IS NOT PROVIDED WHH PULL SIRING AND IN9TALLATIONSETO AN&MMODATC LE SEOWN ON THEAN3CHDECIURPL 9. DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD,THE IZ.PROVIDE ELECTRIC SERVCE BE CAPPED OR PLUGGED. NEW CONSTRUCTION. SNITTCHOVERSYATV MAKE Np CONNECTIONS. AS REST RED FBY OWNER'S PHASING P NS V[R COMRPC OR SHALL SIT TUSH 'PE UIR D By ALL TRADES G MF PRO.IEC S E ND 4tlNFIRM E%LSIING GONDHIONS BY APPROVED INVOLVED IN THE VENSIRUCHON ?g,NONgFACTOR TO PROVIDE AND J REMOVE EXPO SED ABANDONED OTFY LLM OWNER ND TELEP ON C PWM. ECT/ENG ER N ATIN'S IS als NOTED IN THE OF TEE PROJECA RECEPTACLES LIGHIING&REEFTACLE EHE SHALLDES'WITu H[ARCH CONDUITS AND CONDUCTORS CONDUIT ND WRING TO SOURC HOURS BEFORE PARTIALLY,OR TEMPORNAA POWER AND MING REOUIREMENlS APPLY TO ALL ME CORDS LIGHTS'HALL AND CONFIRMLEVELS 0 TO OPEATE GRCDITS. INCLUDPNG APANDONEED CONDUIT COMPLETELY DISABLING SYS M. 5 DURING DEMOLITION ND PGO CpUNGS'TIES IN ALL AREAS CNFPA AIDE ANDFAVAILKE LLY OF CAL IN AND LOCAL CODES AND R OZERED A RIGD`AL CO OF Z ABOVEACCESS BEE CE MINIMIZE OMAOE pURATIONC6 MAKE (MINIMUMo SURFAC q FINISHES. CUT CANDUEFLUSN TEMPoRARv COE ENT NNECn0I SAFETY STANDARDS. USR 6. PROVIDE COMPLETE RACEWAY CRCEHTMBREAK[R/NSEPSWHCU ND POWER l0 IHEPSHE WHENMPORAR GIDE T ELECTRICPL ROOM. n LLQ PLL WIPINIT 1ALG ND PATCH SURFPES NJPCENTAN DSTO WORK N360.S 2 PLLJ MATERIPLS ISCOAD SYSTEM FOR PLL WIRING UNLESS DS ND REQUIRED_ 2 PROF TO INSTALLATION,UTHEAND NNECTED AND SPECIFICAL NOTED PIHERWLSE. EOUEPMENT SHOWN ON THE W O H 6 RCMOVED SNPLL RCMNN THE ,BUT IS NOT DISCREPANCIES I&PROVIDE ENGRAVED NAMEPLATESF O DRAW NGS PNY E 9 CONTRACTORSHALL HEN VERIFY Z B. 6 [LECTRICALCINSIALNTIONS WHICH HAL BE NEATLY PPC AGED AND A,FEEDER WIRING NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE H D i P&JJDONm OUTLETS PRL�SATTACHED WHH SS,SCREWS ON LL pppUCNLE G AY-0N ~ N AND REMOVE DEVICES. PEMOT/L S K ALL NEW AND NLDENG PANELS. IONS MHUZINO THE w U DM ABANDONED OUTLETS IF GONDUD REMAN ACTND. MOD% THE COMRACTOA FOR REUSE BBY B BRA CH CIRCUn WOOD (NFPY]D)OR THE CONSfRUCII ENCLOSURES AND EQUIPMENT pppROV[p MNUFPCIURER'S S INSIPLWTION OR PROVIDE ACCESS DOCUMENTS SHALL BE BROUGHT N WITHIN THE SCOPE OF WORK. S P&WDONm DRAW AND MNUFPCIUR[RHOP w h W VIRE THEM THE OWNER AT 0 VIER N C CONTROL WIRING El ND REMOVED. PROVIDE BLANK N APPROPRIATE DEINMINC KHAT DEMOLITION R FIRE ALARM WIRING TO THE ATTENTION TO TH SPECIFIC INSIALLATION COVER FOP ABANDONED MATERIAL ARE H 10 BE SALVAGED, ARCHHECI AND ENGINE EREIN 11 WHICH ARE NOT REMOVED OUTLETS 17.EXTEND EXISTING INSTALLATIONS STOCK LLE SELF"D MATERIALS M E SECURITY SYSTEMS WRITING DURING TUE BIDDING ARO BREAKERS SERVINGDLES FDR REQUIREMENT THE CONTRACT' Z U 2 USING MATERIALS AND METHODS AREAS BY THEROWNDF. G N PER OF FOR RESOL DION H EMEROENY ND EXIT LIGHTS SHALL BE RE PONSBLE OR O T uER NxIUPRv ADJUSTMENTS REVSIONSFANp W 9. DISCONN[IT AND RNOV NCHITECI AND ENGINEER, PROV DE SWHCHIN U ABANJ NED CLECTRICAL INSTAEATONS OR AS H.PUBLIC ADDRESS CONT ACTOR SHALL ALM TRAM IT BREAKERS FOR ALL UUNSVITCEN AGPROVEDAELECTED NCLUSINS ED WITH DISIRIDBUTIONPEDUIPMENT ADD INDICATED OTHERWISE. TO THE AFCHHECI IN THE BID LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAN FPMUFER. ALL CHANGES LEM ;OEM A p D19NCP a�IESO AND AREUSUBIECY TO ENGINEERING SIEM9,RHA GESOEM AN OTHER S 1 SLING 1)RPR P 0 20,INSTALLATION SNPLL COMPLY WITH APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION EDDRIALS ANDPEEQUIPMNT WHICH SURD E SUPPORTEFOP ALL OF - PCC[SSORES. IS TO REMAIN OR IS TO BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACTOR CITY CODES. NEG AND PARTS OERACCWUL SYSTEMS,I BID, 1Q CONTRACTOR SHALL CIRCUIT TRACE REUSED. INSTALL LY RA PULL CORD M a ALL CIRCUHS AND DDUIPMENT HAS PLL EMPIV RACCWAV9. 10.CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR 2 [ 'g ARE BE NG MOVED PRIOR TO IASALIATION N EXISTING WORK AND WITH THE SCOPE OF DEMO`L..S GO Ts SFRmNc pANENONp91 SHALL BE Br THE woBiHrNaNO Ns H4EoEEaR THIS E.74 n 146 AREAS NOT PROJECT PRIOR TO 9TARI OF BCII REMOVED SHALL REMNN PANELB PFD. MATCH THE SHORT U nooArnTrvs rvc FUNCTIONAL, MODIFY CDNDMT A NOT, CIRCUIT RATING OF THE EXISTING CDNSIRUCTIDN_ Gg A P"TN� " MGA WTR-477 CONT NU 1VFNG TOTa REINAMAMNANcNGrecuT AREAS __ EXST IING EOUIPMENT,AN RNING PANELS RAS REOIINED. E4E�3ZA -H SERVICE q3 ; E6 la I o!�o I CLEARWELL�� ! �,w `;7 m CLEARWELL 43 N w -a VE5 ! o o U � I I dI�m lUl E ll.. I I Vru I n c III l 0 �w' I I - - — PSR-z - , s � I CLEARWELL#1 O I 12 I -- �E, <o_ W= w< x N q, \ y J HIGH SERVICE(P9 D o _ U U Q �wN (LW � — o ag o N ®Z ILLECTRICAL oKEY PLAN-OVERALL AREA GRAPHIC SCALES I� UILI �� II I �I IlL L d/ice f__ t_1 r h I--t tHt-I Zo o REFERENCE DRAWINGS Ell IINEL I11ED1LE1 �2 H N W J K a �w 0 0 I I I I U GENERAL NOTES llI` E �EE,NE, EE REND REEED,D III FRD REN—L N,E= a a CONDND SNDA FOa�.v RNLvY�L CRN�D aDL.ND a c , F�ELD I'LL'y "NONN AND 1ILE 11 REDD1DED. No, PL'aLL DE uLUE RP PENE,a,�RN IF,RN��RN a E1 g w No`N o"wN"REEN`N` w E �nER ED DEDD�RED Dv NINNEL ELEN.D��LODE. �N,E z a° D°F"O"RD,m,N,E IN,m a y CON5EROC7ION NOTES w Z Q Z P 0 Na s�L NEw=�PLE PNNP N EKn No N,�nEa s ED RRD, NoNEo 11NO11,,D PNNP EDRM EK�E,�ND PENEE , RNs° 1—�NRRRD�. o �E ---�-- ------------------�— O LLNEwciaai*11EIEENEIiNIlNELN1L_ �w� �w R EDs�NSRRSRNs N,D.E�1EM� NN PNNP.PER z 3> 0 EDDPNEN.Low*�oN 1 IToNDD�.DO��NN,wE D�w„�NA,�I. � o z c U w w N ' O msauc*ioNs a Locti.,E rvEw vuMv iry e�oa vcre ovmEres U = O ® ENLARGED AREA PLAN-HIGH SERVICE#2-ANALYZER SHED 0 AIRING III owNER s NINIiON' rex rnNTIOL IOND ITS k Q = L GIIALE, I/° r TII T11111 INT IL 11 g 76 46 °. oN LEGEND cRnPwc SCALES - aA.�Ec, 16131/ S o � CLEAR•ELL 3 GENERAL NOTES I III IINIIIL N-1 —1111——INI 1-1 K I El O 2 N U w E Al,uN� cy�eEL /•M1s suuL DBuuLawEp"N"T AND cDs,Es Al aEDE a[o. EDN W�K B u f' ANY oP PENE,D<=�oN �oN ooxEs o A Ell U a~w w LOOID l— 0 w CONLDENAlAYITEM NN, AND EN s'E',i�LOLwic�RDar�xms A N. caouNomc-EoD�DED ev N110—EEEN.D��roDE. �N,E .I E ll' N a L3oa�� -20 03 _ .fru CONSTRUCTION NOTES o Ell ,A,;�oi 51�E NEw'IY'I Nc EDON I N`l *ED PCMP Docs},o TIIII ---- 0 ��INELo DER�i=N.,00RITALL "DEEo'A,Eo N Ly,EIo3„Ep,ocN P� g 2.1 11 I—NED�NIILL NEI I�I'l�.�2111 IN IONocIs AND ocIDAND m z EwDE ulRm, ° Nwc - w� wL so e,p e a°�`asEnN w�wD3P`e - w1EI euUINo AND - _ w 'IN - N NEw E Eo Ewa 3 D eoo3. ` J ¢ w�i o3 „N/3E L / ¢U 1 O o uL e oN ow E e aEouiaEo "ouore re PEre W w O �7111 ¢Do / Z U Q g U O Z U Z � ENLARGED AREA PLAN-CLEARWELL#3 LEGEND O ®G I—E, v -30-0 N w wore" ag GRAPHIC SCALES £A o..,Io. s.,ioN -o^Ell — —� �oNooA.r,NS No. W7R-477 x E6 --� ---------— --- a REFERENCE DRAWINGS oETALs � :;: EiT ELEc�reicAL oETAiLs _E .r.. aiL�--- yL./FF Z O O GENERAL NOTES y w HIGH SERVICE J3 «—E�T11 IO recore�reEo. � FIELD 101LE—1-11L AND LEI �IIIIIIIII IIII ��a,EEE1w„ A-1QF A ALL RE--El. ETRA,IDN DE EreNSEER.IreN � � PNL.T,-L�zIOE.I,.ez kL oT EN EN,a�N o NNa w�E RFTL �oN 1111 AND,re�E-H A—oE`Al N Low wL„EL DEDSLE z os w HSTx— pH4111 ll-P,° XT'ovLpA CONSTRUCTION NOTES S —�F E ILI °8LV_ r- C' reNN�NA aE,wEEN NEw AHH Ennwc ARwEre AANELS '�`� a o e3 R- o 44111 P-s oeP-31- - -NIENTE - - -o�T-TT re Al HENHIED.MEAL coNDHT wLL aENnenTloN Al A - - - - reeou�rem. sNpT a 2. z-i'ic"a,o�c-' O pcse"D.p"PANELMoo EE`°�li;"-P�zooMINII LED - ELECTRICAL ROOM _ NaTE NEw sawLE vuuP To eE I � I 3 ¢ z PM113I p ozo, a o;- - o 'wR=-�Tco �° ao� '<IEE RNs. E w z �T,-VN-zDD HI-11 € ¢ W W U ¢ W W N g A LEGEND — NLIE 2 NI wore" O = ag ENLARGED AREA PLAN-HIGH SERAN MIEET VICE#3 ELECTRICAL ROOM El I EE ®2 s1AE: Two D reSL 78�NS No146 GRAPHIC SCALES f� _ WTR-477 REFERENCE DRAWINGS E� CONTINUED ON E6 L_-- --� ------------- ------- -----� HCH EERw Ela-aoow oE111 GENERAL NOTESd�� 1-111 11-N Fll IN D"IN ,NoN11�_E,A REorv�REA �oa.o rvELo Ro E DDS \ �EDwED DP PENS RN AN DE TDN�ory BD E__"E eE ZAM NIEEN —N�DDND�N�ARE ERD�EEE,roNDDT�I N�"w/ o ��NN,�DN PDM= REDD�RED N<,�DNAEEERR�u DDE. �IIIIII ITNT ��_STN R�ER�N Law wET E�E HEID D o �I� o ®I 0 o N, �LE�wELL a3 — �° o=�,w U Q;7� H N W J K U r r Q a �w K O 0 U s E�Pz ll A—Ea Fll AN Ea IlED -- coNsrRucnoN NOTES g OcornROL ssTEx�uaoN 1111ECT rIN E`�TioN pi1arvu ¢ / O SE—NT All E Tyr uRE o�aL e oN sn.11E, LLE 9151— wz� 3 �a "N�s D . N .�uREtN�oET FrlyDoN ..E;S AN a a� z O NDD D NElE'�'P Ew/AND —N—INA w¢U w H wN a��NND AND DR AS NES °_(1)P— w/e1/1 z Q 3 DND�E NEw ETEEE ETRD�DRE�N,w ® ENLARGED AREA PLAN-LIGHTING PLAN A aE.n w O Z Z —LE. = o-0 0 mrvou To DE uauNTED aN 10.F aE'IN'_ U O LEGEND fr ag LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE NEw woek �nWDEu.,DP.Ea <.,T,wDD NDDDEP. ,n E, o6...RiPmN ET 79 n 146 _ N GRAPHIC SCALES NooN.��NS No. fl _ WTR-477 31-o - aA.�Ec. 16131A Ea Z2 E A GENERAL NOTES p F— — — —— — --------- OE D RRNTR�,RR GALL PRONDE CLL TERM REODIRED ° RIGH SERVICE�E DR cDMo E GRDDNRINR—TEM �IIIIIIII TIE 11 D Looe RINDDCTOR sau IE#1/1-E — � D � p p 4 0 y CONSTRUCTION NOTES D O co n mruL — 10MI TE 0 c NDRDL s—ELE 11 P IN LL%R—ELE ry reourvo uasTRa� 12 - D D D D oNoucNORns GO NECE Rv. o G N w x1111 REL 'D O e IE a r r o(21DL s w/p2/o F N w S>Hrs BOazo uuN GRRDNo cGNDDRVOR PS NECESS+Rv. �F U D a ■� - q'i-,r.�eaorz p o 0 ELECTRICAL ROOM D I a p a a I 0 I 3 D LEGEND Z m W a z w 10111H" 2- --2112 FD 21 1 2 D Doo C oR w pz F Exo=1E-1 cRouND coNNGI-N o DNNER_N NIG„L EONIPMENT DRDDND w o U D r— GE'R ErIsnND DRRRNo DRIo ore caeLE------ ------------------- }- -- EORTNERRIR GRODND I—E—N Y RERN„NI AL ERDIPNENT GRDDNDGONNEGTION DA —-- NROurvo creo Dl RceLE aO�NS Ne146 E GRAPHIC SCALES £P _ W7R-477 TS UPS TS UTIL LT �oa1A N ' - - 31-LP-200 ry31 31-EJB-2001 .� oiA to 2 -FPS-2001. - - _ _ TH 0oLo 5 2(K 'ELL(As 01B 10 7 6 BRN31—UPS-2001. 6�A E U BLL OF MATEPIAL DESCRIPTION(PER NCLOSURE) 2D(H)N 20"(W)N 12'(0)T6 S.SNEMA 4N ENCLOSURE W/PANTED STECL 6ACK PLATE 2 96 PHOENI%CONTACT,FEED—THROUGH TERMINAL,UK 5 N, Y3004362 pp,ry 12 UK gsooszz4 MMMM'M 5 PHOENIX OUNTIN PART TI N]5/15E RERFOR M,#12X17}X z0 0 PHOENIX MEND BRACKET,EG PAIL. S K, 1201442A E 5 5 6 PHOENI%TERMINAL STRIP MAM KLM—A 1004341 4'x6"PHENOLIC TAO WHITE W BLACK LETTERS ATTACHED TO ENCLOSURE DOOR 61?11 61T 1A w TO IlEl TO 29'1 920 1 N07E5 1 CUNFU n n N- reaUTEECTANT ONLY ALL C NONO EcaLLs rl 2223 1 2223 2A 24 CUNIDA-1 T� 2526 1 2526 1A AS'EN" RED. 3 ALL GONNUT STALL FIT FOOM BOTTOM OU 0 RE OF 2829 1 2829 1A EDNIRlUIT 5 LA �T BAD10 1 IN 30 DEID#10 w/E�REENEN ION O 2 Z a E7 E 3 32 3 32 accrrelcaL cootNFX AX. REQUIRED A'NATIONIL W J 33 33_ _ b F N aFE r 3435 3435 RILL OF MATEaIAs FOR Tac DETALc � p NEM 3]38 1 373 1A mRFvis ns RLau cFo TA To ENCLOSURE VmH S.S. �U 11 31 411 41 IlIrIIII l 4 1A AD 0 4 44 cDA 4 aro, g U WWF�- <m a'w a R, P-31-LIT-2001A T/c q12 E/c q10 P-AREA LTG <¢w "Z P-31-EJB-2001-1 P-31-EJB-2001-2 3 w X- P-31-LI-2001 T/c H1z A/C q1X P-RECE PT O P-31-LIT-20018 T/c 112 7/C#12 W/GND 7/C q1D W/GND Z U Q m W O Z To FIELD DEVICES TO TO To FIELD DEVICES REFERENCE DRAWINGS U O EXISTING HS-3-UPS PANEL NEW LIGHTING PANEL nT -ELRFAll scHEDILCS N z F )�31—UPS-20X1) 31—LP—2 —LP-2 02 Z LOCATED IN HS,N3 ELEC.ROOM LOCATED IN HS#1 ELEC.ROOM O f CONSTRUCTION NOTES a O3 EJB-2001 WIRING DIAGRAM T ,- - , T HI H ICE ga cA ED ON T sR zoo A c sERv 0(G)MIME'-1 INI TEIMIN-I.Nl INP ILL oACRAMs N sc„oc RED FORwEe PER T�E Assoc AT o wRNCPTHER RD��,11N�HP.146 111E 0 TC E°LLL LFN TIONM'N soMUMx OF 211 SPARE TERMINu caPamv IN _ WTR-477 T - aA.VECT 16131/ p"c"f�P"F ac ocure"�re.areu " a.R®+R rec"�rec"c e euu�ED A"u ue M"HlHlPJl GIN ee��cure"Ere u Noy e�ee,e e ec. ANI EZEc.R CAe eECENN RslEl TP LL ET AIuEo reu.n s �ThA HE —, s'u�e PRc,EI.PR cR.o 1111.ce 11Ne.RN1.cN �o�oa IC /o� o. o a E`«°IE FILL o ,~o HI P M P'-111E c,=Eo/aaE, N 11"ou.= � o " 1N8�c.,"o eeTNIL NANCREle a PNn"re"Ne reeN NxNe Pere �IIIIIIII� lAlHR"a=�ooa Seo�"aE""=.cFF�,=,""E�aow= """H"u"01 L 0 APA 7T C.W.N3 TO 'e''- - �"eue000re aNca,No .EPI I AND. m NN"P ARE'I" � H.S. N3 FEED LINE U/G SECTION"B" - s.n e w y, aev.sneer yes IOIE IN IAA7TEI IMPPEAENT�e INAL wNNece�oN,o EbOPMeIHER Ne�s N �z o� w H N W J K U�rr� .— a �w 011 ILAMP 0 repo-,Ap „M IE lljlll�I O ar u/c SECTION "A' �A HE slew es eeco-u�s.A'nuoezenusumeesEYPANPoHre'H pare AT, ws"re<ro-es CONUITDSUPPORT DETAIL ARu Nu.3 U owe. 3 z u n¶NurD HIGH sEreNcs w N, ¢O~ U N"�naN,=11"I 11-RAR N-zoo A F w?F O z 2 ¢ m U O w U w A 3 w ¢U Y E PROP fANCRERIP-RAP11sM PR ury sxc�iary'<see suis sut- -111 Z U Q Q Z W OU d m H U x Z O vsee ixe nINDIID1 ae sn.io-ee-of-soee u/c ouc,eervv ww ise-w aoADJ cws zs wAcseuNs E.82 n 146 ` U recti s cS CTON ,.C.. uEcW7R,��"477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ 480V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE TAG CABLE OR OPERATING ROUTING NOTES NO DESCRPTON GND VO LTPGE FUNCTION METHOD FROM TO iPP Roo4 s...RS)T..W No a 2G lAUTNG1) REF.DHT.EG,Ell r� Qe )y-A 1 TR 2)R 1. RE T REF.11T.E EIT pF+„'vc 81 TR-2» 11 .T V11-.No ul ae0 POWER DueTRANK ee N-1 311Re003I30K 11) 81MPLE XLOG Ell.—.EI< —1 Ia B.TC WINO #o aev POWER —1 TRAY see 3'I PF-2oo2 .—ING RECEPTn„LE,g RI-s'R-2pM REF.sXT.E[,E11, Z O N �Z Ox w HN W JO' UZrr� ., a �w oo 0 U 3 w a � w �mW' U ¢O ¢N w?F w w EE w N m Q w¢U >U w w Z CQ ZUQ F wI Z Z ~ O g z O O E.83 146 s$ _ WTR-477 ..u�o �I..ILN _ pq.O¢, 16131/ 120/208V POWER/INSTRUMENTATION — CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE TAG CABLE OR WIFE NSTA OPERATING ROUTING NOTES NO DESCRPTON GND VOLTPGE FUNCTION METHOD FROM TO 3,EJaapp, ,Pc,,OTc,I NO ,0 z0 PwER TRnvazc 11-8-110,A HG.ELECTRICAL A— 11EJa_p1 T-11 PFF.,,HT.Al F1,13 Illlr �e riR°it� 9I11B dp, ,Ts,Te.. ND , 12 P NEB TRFlV fixe 31-LP-1001¢y HE p3ELEGTRIGHL Roots o1-EJB epp,,T0.UTIL REF.11T.11 y`i�/fi -AREA LTr ,a2 n I I Te i.INIA nIo '+(1p PowER OII.TBFlNK,2.,1e 31E1—I TBJTR q]C11,g3 cLEARWELL na HREHLGHTN REF.HT.E EI BFA LTG 1311 n,0 Tc.I GNO p,0 1ue PowER ou..TBFlUK? 1'c 31- 1-1111 TB-UTIL Qq Gw%t ILI II—ILL 13 IRErLGHT UG RIF.,.HT.15 E1 O P-BF„FPT ,GI,Tc..GNI , 12 P NEB ou..TBFlUK="G,,'c 3I-F1B-a I T 11 CIFABLIFLL.A-FITBILFS REF.SnT.Eu,ET O P 1LP-Aor I1ctta11 Tc IMENA m 1x0 PowER TRFlV 321 El11-]D_ S n3 FLFITRI..AL Roots 11-LPG1_ S S3 FLFITRI..ALRJOM RFF.l.T.EI,F11 w P-1901 ,al[,p1 Te I INIA , 120 PowER U PANEL HA"All onMPLE PUNPEll B01 REF.SIT.Ea.E,5 -011 ,a211 i.INIA p, ,10 POWER ,c „PP2pp1®Ho N3 FLEGTR.ICnLROOM .SIMPLE PUMP SF-2111 REF.IL E] o,-LI11511 ,.,2 n,1Tc i.GNO ,20 PONEF - Lay.11 Q 1AG'R WATER GUPPLV BLDG 0RM4IATER LI L T-NIII-IR REE IHIF3,F,a.F,a O 2 W 1LIT-1001 31.11 TC it GNI 120 1—F, ou,.TBFlNK._,..Ic 31EJU 1TP IJ Ci E Ell 111ELL#LEI EL T11-1TTE13I LIT-]001 FFF.I.T.Al F1,I3 UQE7 $,11-1 ,Gl El TG I.INIA 120 PowER ou..TBANK._...iC 11-A-1 T-1N.C1 LFIR-11 BE LE/EL TRRFF...RT.EC F1,3 a la ?w P,Lc , ,alcull Tc i.INIA 12 PowER OII.TBnNK2,.1G 3,EJU1pp,TPJJPs@CiY nJ GLEARWELLBS LE/EL NO ATOR,L , REF.,HT.EC E],13 O O U 11Rs1oILowon HLOT C A 1-1-1111011— ATERGUPPLVBLOG OR,wATERL ITTRAN11 TF GEF.,HT.Ell np mtlT..pp, ,-1PRxsoHLowloA„HLo,T. "FIF sIGN„L ou..TBANK..C 1'0 21-1—T11 C,l na LEARwELL na LEVEL TRANSMITTERa,LIT-111, REF.III Fam _ ,-LIT-app, I-1PRn„HLB11111—TE HGC 8IGNIL C,C ,1,—T CwRIF.11T.EL,F,,u pp, Rn,L,HLBwI ASHLOTIF, 8IGNIL oB.TBANK1.,c S11-11 T11 011 ll—L1l1LINGICATORa,LI wn REF.E.—Fl,u z 3 ow z �o w,-uB-2aa, 1-2<aRx,3„RLoe11o H,BE PLC FN.Lo,uRE s,uB awn REF. w z F c ti IBE BE 1, a o 3 w N w U W ww U 22 O Q o Ip ~ N Q g z NU O fr E.84 n 146 s$ _ WTR-477 _TAF..u,o awo�.E13sEE,wa S C O HS (. K SC_..-- US SWITCHBOARD HS 3 LP #9 LP 20Dij SCHEDULE S lT— 31-PP--T--DH- pourvo eus 6 LL z uN .L�.,no o YA 0E Sao A H 12 Tn�LOA. ,rvn ova s a�o- �� rcvc a a wN Baa 'r 6 LoetC Pna5L'G o vn Wx6xFERsn c.,n_Ys.sm, E_ _ tK Ta4. P E cs axry ro Cc za t i t t ..vL w _.... .... ..._ a ..... .. ..... .................... .< .. e .w. saga c u j . ._ ._. , 5_ 6 _ u _ rn o c a „p t4.s e z< veo-ae _vn IIL 11 � F Z an o -iea _... _+ ... .. _ . ... z n~ .. v~i a y }" re s,wx o B";3 i { + s.xi� ,awe U a a .,: s.xm,omrs .. ... .a w =s ( T '....ow.w ._a �rnP�m,,,a ��„w,a sP a,: '{'« N =o - { -- -- {-- SJilITCH60ARD 31 LP 20D2 SGHEDUL.EJ _ IX w „ m �_a a, .PoaMER a a HF -will_ III 3 a0 e �N a PA eL s Ps{ ae o 1 c En Le ra oraoor,o do z— v x ooannF.zoa„za - , w —A 12 IITe H Tw Z , W O , K h k e� eM v eaa UU F W ISI c LEGEND a > m m i =a - N 11 aaE wI I sau, � saw d � s NOTEA ALL S p U a sru+onsin„ —1 wwn,[EErI*01 aulc[n(Eocl�Paac[ss`uR�s� r7 85 �r 146 IE Ill ooarnLrna,�ow. nnaH,eEnnEw o,ooE areoorss WTR-477 - saa,w,, 1slain ��NEf E14EEE.Na PANEL DPWWS NZMA z° ego 0 z=„ � am a Nim s onrc,uvE s^ a "' saanr n a�� d y oda a v � h n o pox � oa 00 � c y m ...... 1 ` ...... w m FVIwJW m s ernrx � o rvsisor ro V m U d~�Q m OW D U PANEL"LP-W WS" Q a ruaeN ur aE�bPOWm. �x IIIct i 0 3 Ihf a VIII z � ucn�ore iuvvr, o '?� a "^ o raNss nscsrncsss a F m N Nos uiNu n � Z y w W rn W J svres a sunt[ ¢�¢ Q K state a srnce Z U d ¢W LEGEND ¢ ya z � 0 is o1Es o -nsu„, —1.—E.EN.of I—E( ll I-ss`EN� r7 86 �,146 ,_,EN_,,N. MaH,eeMeN mr 1-1 ErenNrss lEl— NI 3r-eM-III, WTR-477 .naan�., iaiain aw�✓.E18 EE.tia PANEL"DP-1" ��R.; PANEL"HS2-DP" ^^"�,sER"�Eaz P"^^roe✓��� PANEL"HLA" ���^a�Rv o�+�-P"^^=����«� ,w ✓. ro ro ,ro ✓ a� , -a _ - CAM " , a rooms.✓ , dnaa ti �.�,ro o _ a 00 , o- a roroaroro �� sro>« ,✓ >r �. w z ro� ," .row , w „ ✓ �, a d w. ,o ->ro. vada roti, .... v€ PANEL"HXL" U m app „o, t,�a "rF Az.ro�ryroe�oo.kz � �w w roro „ a, rn w o < % U x a so xva,ra �r sr ro,eo, to z i z o � � iu sr.u+E 0 z � 5 u u s °° e fo ur ao XILI a s � U F Z All; PANEL LP 1 ro�a3 t tirow,ati. ," .,w,�.✓,.. ,a a ,- .,,E ro ro �t�"ro a. roma � ro✓" � � ,» z „ w m w ro �nro ro �✓" �",✓, ,""„ v,,",": rororo roW,.aro.✓,� t, roroa,ro , roro"✓✓. � �w tr n ✓o c xe ".. __ _ _ �n W W sou �x "a' •" urn z<o,.iv.,nw � U' o m�N 2 W as r o �. Ero"r aoi� Toa F .�, ,� s,aae ronrvu a U N W o � rvw w N01ES _� _ __- - __- _- ___ -- �W o C7� atu ,uro br un —rn a,�x: x ..,..�,-. � .>a. .� >as N� �rF ,.�._.a w — Z � =Z _jos oreow rva s vorer or*o�car or carevus c,res �vu r ° o o a Z U a arvsvry uu✓a,�xtcrv,or w—E(Moe)vreaeEss 'tu zan p '*f' usa ro oocuxt�v,n�orv. xtwa.[u[rrt or rs„wc[aaac[ss cnv ti t6 o b„ =w Q U U d v LEGEND roa« < roa« ti zro ro " ,ronw - --- e s �^ _ rn.xEcnoF��uscxre.,r ro, a €xNT—T 'LL .a%a, ro Ha. :e ,� � rota"�� a .�a.a✓a",,, a .,roFa.. ssxsv"s.. sro � � "5�—e o - we No ei �^ roa _—a ,row >a ^^19p1 WTR 477 4 0 z o NETE'�6NEET. I IDI E� I N No EwoTR�EI woENo REFER ToIIIEII d vR I 111 11 1111111 IINNEIIIINI 11 s 0 «<NONNTNEEN<111 ow<R1111IIIINEE . 1111EOEo 4.-D.. ._�. 5.-�.. CO NSTFUCTION NOTES 0 NaN11OE ETETEM HORN oRR,ET,TRMowT�RN. NTEoNIN ND rNRaoE NA<o (D'aE"", 3 sw�,NNaANN w�O"T N"o, as REoo�RON ED IIB NE w �ENI REON REo. RREoo REo,wo,wwNR,E NROTR ENUON,RDs,w 0 - - - N RERN�REo TERM�N<,E N r. III EN=IIlEl Il IDEIDE1, INITIII IND T—INITE IN'IND III—I-1 IND III 0 - ERRwNNN E�,rtw,Ra UcDEwzwE w uD�IT Ra a cD �w ��RUN O, -. N<TE,w RERNRER,w oauwow xaws us o NNITI RINI—T INITILI IND TE IN'IND ° L ° IT,D#EoDoa�RED Io TNNNsaxa DID in J �CLEAWwLN#331—EJB-2001 & 31—IJ8-2001 RACK DETAIL re E� lILE _ l`= TIl LCLIND a,Two(1)aow,s wT e.ro,RRN o oo 6.. 8' 231 1'200 IIE o ENo i - g z uggq�mqqq J �TNP� ETR„oaawEDR a o F F wzF w �a — �o EE INP LEI, mP.D a-isio DI PLY cvWB I D T To-11 El W N g o. E (IJ ag NaLHINR wEIT "N',o,oN�ETROT ET 88 146 DoowNN 9ooTN yv wnoonnN�Ns rvc. £g �1 - U # 31—LI-2001 RACK DETAIL N3 BASE PLATE DETAIL LIFT STATION RACK DETAIL AE WTR-477 sCLcEeAILN3 ICIVEWwN scue ns suowN = - aA.�ECT 16131/ P-wR 2001 lAElsE sE'lP.Es .a-u,Is sEE sM.EE a�u ;lP CAMo o- � ns 7 d ospe sEE su..Ea .aansrPesw cu (11—P-2001) c cP zI /.P LEGEND rna,-A,s-suu,) oxN„7 �"� NEw ureAA �a_ H N W J K U a ?w 0 s op,zw s-3 CONSERUCTION NOTES K O �NusE-Fa .srvn120uR O E- - - , O ;j (43,-a-2oAl) x�sirvc�,s P3,rexJSEEre swi,ocw pPVE(3o 1Fnau.1, 0 i�`uauFac,ua[as eEcomuENoan'N —F PEA lllr; IIII�I' An TL - - - EOUIPMENT ELEVATION SECTION "A" F-11 e MIE AND PPEPDE REE sNEEF_Es 3 o .IPE of Ins*AssA,Ion w a PLATE,E EunP w z LIE wELo P PIPE EO egs u U ILIE AFCl "—,,LaPE u Eu o w i EN-E T IIED o o— �PP E�� 4 n � 'ti'•riae of--� 1 nnu.amu_ 89 146 P mns,reu".N ITE°2 B TASK LIGHT DETAIL _ _ EWTR-477 � EF.SFIEE?.E� aA.�Ec, 16131/ �a�E Pw°Virec°°Cam ,wc EEE=re��K EECErvo reEEEre.o Lf No7Es IIEE71 El I El 1,IN ��ore u�su NI Nccreuro EP 7o aE a s ss o 0 �gs Ere c CONSiRUCiioN NOTES*mc ti'u�rvoEE. HSM aE cE,Cc cp Nc 0' eEEoeE Ere EE wwreo�.c rel.-11-11#re 0 Eu ore 10 1 � aaio awc ce ���Aaurvo a a j:cNP ce �z o� w U Q— T creourvo wao'J b ~N W J U�r r - a �w U ELECTRICAL MANHOLE DETAILS—ELEVATION K 0 �e As sNowN lllh �l,' e �5-0- 6 -- -- I I ao� w _ _ T ELECTRIC --� woo II I _ � a H — — w o w J fr EE.90 146 ELECTRICAL MANHOLE DETAILS—PLAN VIEW ��reorvrer�Ns rv�. £$ e sCA�E.As s�OIN WTR-477 - are.�Ec. 16131/ y OTES NINIIII P S ICA 0. OETPPOPTa ,APNE,"Os,P AN, EP TORT„s ww CONSTRUCTION NOTES EOOPMENOPPPONA www r,n ew P«�orPa�au�e� 0' 'AN'EN,REo��REo EOR A POPPEETE 'oPERAT�oNAE o -- - D. w -------- - - --------- �oN RaE=mEP�PaN PRo,E��MPa,�oN. =E ,-P11-1111 O'o�7�� �sm o��T���s�RE 000���n�Pa o=wo��A Eo - PA O 70 1 ID PSR T„E T'EN<,�P. Pl—AND TE-NATE rao � r.n I p � ,aozPoN ,®awN P �------- o x w m H U Q U r r a w ---- nP�,Eo aN a a Q `c ou 3 - llll`�illll�l' STORMWATER LIFT STATION SUMP PUMP SCHEMATIC NAE V V �IIIct 3 a IIiS �mw ao� z '_J U w Z F 4it Q � w U _ ZUQ W 4 Q w O < O F ,n -A 1,711 IIAINI I fr Nw+ecEMEM of EP,NNEITiNo�P`°PONE=; Nnr ��Po 91 N N 146 'g ooENNENT„,yaw ""°""NEUENT of NwwNE PaoNEss EIIID D l N WTR-477 - aA.�ECT 16131/ INSTRUMENT LINE PRIMARY ELEMENT INSTRUMENT FUNCTION GENERAL INSTRUMENT GENERAL NOTEST,., SYMBOLS SYMBOLS (FLOW) SYMBOLS SYMBOLS EEEEEcn-—I Erere,nE LATINN,Ererere Tre EF.reE cDLIBI N FF w,MreoL ore« ;)W11 NITNIID�MPEn11�ALL s.MPreEs xnEA PEEN re=Ere ren,x�E.Ll PPreTEc, r, �,�, NCE �,��renrexry ---- � l�.. o x�xa ® ..x^ �re.,�n, w<EsrePM�„ n,io" reEEc,� PEPeE�En, ,.�- �TxTxrv � O 11 D O «�lP<Tx Pa °;'s,n<s BB �n=TrexLre,sn.Lx ILMILL Tl x.,Es,E11110n rex n E 1,renre ll,.IFFEs. °oPR" 8 ore re EPT�ns<EEn�on PErere�PEMEn s rePren creMPEE renrex xE Px IC o o� xrery ❑ weAFSN ET sxnEE 111NAx TPnnEPreP,N T111F �nsTnEE.crennEc,,NI wnPPnn, o mo G � � xLA I ENA DF ND W MISCELLANEOUS P°-'^w AN111AIE1 TI P11111,INITILL IND TFIMINATI Fl ILL �IIIIII x x�xs,Txa a�ouv,x oanx�nc sT nno chum ouT w,xE P-11T mEcncnTions nrvo Y x x.xrewuT scaPE ofµ°rev. SYMBOLS x,.xT�xT nTs ory Er sTnc PEc DNEEs eEDNE uN EreMNAT rvc nrvv Powere EEE°Al o �uw sumiwxvo-w wm� SELF ACTUATED Pic wwwc. DEVICES ,�O =rex"� xEo nno TxE anxu.wc wroawnT�on s ol,�a,l�o.D µEo To TxE<an,re<eTare an,xE En nEEre IN CT "I19 aa W �, , T 11 10—AlTo,_LL FELI —INNI IN °,O®m xrMnu�M x�x xxux�x r k„xxon °°"°°� ¢'rexre”'=+•'� INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION IILL EEE PFST Eare nEu,nuueErewcV osM ML�T�anµaxeE reE�nuueEremreacLn sx��s<no <reos �w $ oTAEFO, U Q RS m�w,um wx¢uc�x v�v..nx•�"'wmrm vuk v NNTNEE>1 onus w F W J~ sue,msreems Pov�w¢.,wo snuE oa�ury�wPreovu Preiare Eare sucn ou,w'Es S —N — r _ wxuu a�vo-vax nuu _�f n i�r eEcaME Preov[reTv of TnE corvTreAeT0 Two snug eE reE TD Ereou siTE awrvEa sxu� U O =O NNE xiwnrew wa _'ZT - snE wowEEre-NE1 S SnsixncTIFN ns NO cos TA TIE F-1 u"u eE reEPurem so U mwxxrw ax x�w�w�x�x, f,17G E u vxmc�n V µ,rex 1xen11TP E1reM1EE1ory OF opo-N1 IrvE,nEEEn nceEP,E ET�S,�no corvreI,�oDA s'.EE N, Erecn,E.nnre E TEnre En�ET�'A�nE,nEMnT�reITS Tre nncreMMreren,E NIN crenE,rerec,�ren A n,„uE MrereIET wT,nEEnTIren rere ErerewreE nceE,T Al<EErereENATE yen nreE,re reEMnw �a rex-xwnT Eo-,«M�x�m Ew<,�ren ErereM „x.re�Tn nT EnnEE reEreI�IE rewNEA nnre rere Enre�nEEre nPPrerexnE �,xaxnx „x"xxT„� DErex�E reox�nre DEMEELT�on'D conETxneT�ory nre re,EresE reE.n,AND ALL onTT AND x AD crenETrerecT�ren PEre�nrereE,re.EnEE„ETnnrenreoE AND ENxTwc rerePNn reEMrenTIren nnre o DEMOE�T�on worn nEoo�nED Eon TIE Pnre,Ec, M�nE.nre crerererewn,E TnE E.TEnT reE TnE 21,IE con,Pnc,oP sx<EE EocnTE ALL ununss PDDI,o nnn E.ennn,Ion nno,PEnexInc. w w m �5LFEPDLl NI IN LE Al 1ELETC171"'I xEa, xxxxre xEo..,xx aIEo"ioano,sEPourewc�ns<rereo,�rery AND MonE,�,res<MEnTs 11 rvECE�,�. z -- Eare 111LEOM�PM,EI,PreowoEre. w o N g d D BE ATE I �g T 92 146 - Pre-SECT 16131/ o o ZA A,' F 0 A A CLEARWELL#, o= w w U Q;7 ., 0 0 �1 U w reEaoR -------- -- ❑ g z i7L m" ❑ o — — __ ceNeenL NOTes � — °P;PE ao� ,�PEre TRENT l—11ENas "�°<ea;H__T nazai w w wo_ .Es. RMP.mT„ <TEs R TRN R.NEI � w¢l o w W w w w ® ENLARGED ' AREA PawEa Paine,o sam or wNsauaioN Eo Eore,Rs ENLARGED AREA PLAN-ELECTRICAL WAREHOUSE&GW.#1 CON Z z g= w w� NTAND .11 -RK ERR 111=PRR,El, RENNa�eEN�N——PE RE a d „E ENR�NEER AVON 11—El,R,aE ION-1—al ag !a FOR DEMOLITION ONLY R93„NG`„c'46 y Tk �N �RAPH��s�A�Es £g DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION1 20 _ A WrR-477 o Pa.N,6sH \ a�rh PRP,Tss„M'o \ f R°65 P „ . II NOTES ONE ELE-11OL LEOENI aEEErc LE �IIIIIIII� ®I 1HEE,=E,I Ez 11. o PR.�ss IDMOE.-H Erc�IrcN rcE I E I — �rcN,rc�rcrc��L rcE��rc aE ElllA��L�� N THE=�PE N PssrcLD 11 PlOIElT P�rcrc TO s-T rcE roN=TR-1- D EDrc TN�= CLE�wELL a3 IEI LP THERA,�rcN rcDN,rcrcL E�- A�a�PLE E`,oR�LLEENI r xE7 x�aEEaius aEauiPEN To ENsvaE THAE TH[rnuPLETH A N w —Q a mrvT'o sysEnn is 1`10N'EN iry wMvuANc U a~ w 0 0 PL, C Ns1AODE oN I PIEIEMENTs rcPON lNoMlTDE' N or'HE oerc. o EPRnssMED. rc.OIL C.NIL—,wHNl—PIE—L LIE oowPLELIoN rcE—1 I w�ErNI�NErcrcNLNTA,�rcN�s ED Trc THE lPNTIAI,rcrc rc.NTl OPE f° E ll rcrc EMPL'CINMPT�SP L BE PrcrcwoEo TN PNS src�Nrc�o O -D ALL NEW-E�-11—E=Al NEE . ` f E ELECL T, SN`ESNN�PPrcorcrcL Prcarc,o 3 AS—A—Ess PPrc g �zw .xw �zw .xw �zw �zw w iNs.uw,i � z Z CONSTRUCTION NOTES z No ErcM�E N 1—ANrc N=,rcrcMEM��rcErcrc rcEo 0 a� ,,LO PEER 0111 P NEL 1.11 N—1 WATER w¢U D Z Q W W 6 V� ('j am w 2 ®� EN LNI AREA PLAN-INSTRUMENTATION PLAN U p w z LEGEND O NEW orev nA NN T 94 146 GRAPHIC SCALES -n�orc^n,Ns rve. TB-1 TB-2 � F 31 FT2001A(+) B F �. 2 2 E' --0o1 p7 DK --001 p)AT L SPARE 31 L 2001 31-IJB-2001 1' cb 31-LIT-2001B(1)arc a _ _ B(,( 11 31-LIT-2001B p7 11 11 11 e 9 9 AL(PER URE) ZMZ'M SPPRE ITEM Ott 0 ATEDESCRIPTIONN� WH 21"(1)N 21'(W)N 12'(0)316 SS NE E W/PAINTED AH— _NIX PLATE 1 1 PHOENIX CONTPCI,FCEO-TH O111 TERMINAL 11 1 N R OSE-62 BE 3 n -UK/.1003224 CA 3 SPPRE 3 'D PHOENI%MOUMING RAIL,NSU 11 11 PERFORATED 111M. 1201111 w MARKER 13 15 PHINUIC AG(WHILE E W/BLPCK A[RS)4AnACHEO TO ENCLOSURE ODOR17 v K 11 5 RE 21 21 9 9 22RE FBI I AS 21 K 22 - 23 wx 23 Be U1 Z 24 A 24 o OC A CA 21 ;7 25 K 25 SEARS U=F_K ` b E- 27 �SO 0 0 U 21 30 3A 32 12 33 1 lllrIl�I' PARE 36 36 L,� 3 x GENERAL NOTES m m Q 1ALL FARE FEAR AIALL ME A LETE6.06 THRE, DILL E OF RATE6IALs u F m 5 EOR TAO FEARTO _ _ x a 2_I'All N RIPLATE/T To ENOLOOUAE Al AEOUIREO_ o 3-2PR.416 SHIELDED -31-IJB-200) UR,,A ENLAF No TOP PENEFFAMARE SHALL Z 1,ACH EO R w z z 1-24PR 416 SHIELDED ALLOWED. Z U Q U� W/OA SHIELD w � Z TO FIELD DEVICES TO 31-PLC-2000 CONTROL CABINET CONSTRUCTION NOTES LOCATED TEo IN IS a3 ELECTRICAL ROOM �A,ERI PK El REQUIALL ENCHISHIE1.RED EOR INLLEFFINNSAIMINCH AND LLOTIT d ft31-IJB-2001 WIRING DIAGRAM OO oNceAMs s sOKFMATIOs NTROLs PER THE nssoaATEo WRING EE owo.Ea L-6o:: LACK®Ks.41 A _ >L 0 eE ALLOWED. o6E oNL..NA TOP Cl SACK PENESECTEN1 lHALL T 95 146 Yd A'AT- F 2Dr.SPARE TERMINAL.—IN EACH uLow fg OO FUNCTION ET, _ E WTRN N477 - PA.�ECT 16131/ Y CD No"IT 11 ICA O IR 2- © TBAI-5 TB -5 OO O mweo" w o 'u O P"C&"o�f4S5� 4x�,t1 z Cfi a —� oLao e o C-7) 11171 CID lll�IE- "&WQ,d 1W�w.S�G �'^w O —� �" o O —� "�' N_ o r"Q; ' � C, RiN �, R,N S U ~=w0 W 1p"MVI-2o1 - U IArl C: _ o m RN- (ID o Q llljli l e O 0 RamR" �a}N"8 — N R�sKtwPNk'�I " O — "o O - ��" �N-z o III Cl D #1 IEI "'E O WGmadB�Wx��R3G 9 m°�,oT� O O w 21 - r CO)CID z R,N s © 6 w WGmoiftllfi�ddW�R6G20 E o z ¢ w 90 O O —� N- T� w �,� o Q w U a =Z C7 Q 0 Rtu 0 mN = -- Z fr ae C224) 0 NOTES — 0 O RNs�PN,,E"EN=R"�NoE°<Mo')°oRa"Eu "� .96 146 - <om -xe O - oR�MErn<,�"N- rnaNacern"M or ctiaNc""eoJess ""� s,-c-zms WTR-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ Y O „ a21ICA M o 11 TBAI-6 TB -6 '4 - ANI s o*°bcsi u i,,,3,�TIAT,,2°'� a �N o°= xaw"B°aa's.-z�°° ( ) oo �� I CK CDT- O - o oIINVAO ze as �N a 2 _ O L �a, C1IN , '^w O - ° �N- o O aa�a - �-31 1 N-11 o v a H N W J K S U�rr� ITIll U O -- N_ o sP�a - -_31 111371 u - o cn o 0 d o g O �N- o ITN- o x �cl,oll E O ( = llil; llll o IN O —� '° °o O aa°,a —� 3 N_,°o4-4 I O NT-N- II ° „ — LLL ° � �N- z= IIS z o 11 41 IN-13 � x �w m ow a� C4 - _ LL 111411 w- w O - 1-11 N o sP°,a - �N No o a - -- w - _ - xz O ® L5 a X g - z OO O a (24) (1-1) NOTES - 4 ua° r�oc�`P o�Ess`�Rm E.97 146 ® ° -- O °NSP wwa°EDEN.oa £p ® - ° --aa sOz - °o�urnEMa,oN. M�WEMEM o. °E oRa�Ess °,° 7�-is-so,s WTRN N477 .� A ;;, O O ICA0 ® ® Gp o ��aru ruRusM ou ��aw.muuTm ou 000Ps3o 000P33o `w a O a TBAO-1 ® e TBA0-2 O E=-�oToO o 1o,o ::OO N o- o——— t"SGt a�IoM"aur"ID O N — o——— Ifo iYGoCtdo�P pis - © O111331 s o O O o �o„ a � =A IlW111s LL22 I 3, f u. Ti lug _ n s "� z o- ———— - ——— ID m1R=d3aP[N/a — o--- T / SPP[ CC3 O o ,i � rc O o „ o—{}---- _ ® ,-3 --- x w E — o--- m ��� o oPWoa w o - -- 0 12 0 O o T-< ,3 o-tT————- tT--- } — O H — o-- _ O o O II122 3 u u IIIS �w OO T_3 — ——— a �O� ,-3 j _ �t z X d `dw �IDo o J 17 a o wzF O o ,s ,g o-fr---- - 0--- J t" Pkv"=;C��aP�xi�asz — o——— J —E a o O - o-- �� <wN >o Bio >O tt Z U �� 6D3 Q w OU =Q 7 Z s„za, rzo 6„asi rza ,s m n Ing ism n Ing zo�ouT—,s„u, zz 0 ,o — NO �D z =Q T3 z,3 Paoa,.,aaau w _o d O o a 0 0 NOTEs - § "E” )`IIIIEss"R�s.� ET 98 146 O OO oN11P wwusu1r,T os 3uA zg ® — O — oocurnema,�oN. M,ur,.3EMsm"3 3 3E oR"«s al 31—io-2on WTR�"477 - aA.�ECT 16131/ HIGH SERVICE#3 ELECTRICAL ROOM FIELD O.N.STEVENS PLANT CTRL RM HIGH SERVICE#3 31-PLC-2000 m 1769-IF11 - �y 16 CHANNEL ANALOG INPUT A *(5A) 12oVAC(H) 4 '120VAC(N) 20DO-05 I� LT 5 + 120VAC(G) 31-IJB-2001 TBAI-5 IN-13 �IIIII� 2001-A ° o LI CLEARWELL g3 - w 15 1 GlA) iV-13 2661-A LEVEL INDICATION 6 2 41 ULTRASONIC LAN CLEARWELL}(3 _ 4 LEVEL ALARM NIGN 2-11#16 SHIELDED 3 2 0 2661 A CLEARWELL f3 le TRSHIELD +24 VDC II LEVEL ALARM LOW 17fi 9-OF8C 2661-A 8 CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT o LIR CLEARWELL!!3 CLEARWELL q3 AO 2001-A LEVEL RECORDER - 31-IJB-2001 2000-08 LALL CLEARWELL!!3 �^w LOCAL LEVEL INDICATOR TB-1 TBAO-2 gD LEVEL ALARM LOW LOW r U Q ooh-A r TBI 3 4 4(1 A) a s r i a ._ LI 4 TS-UPS 5 5 U a w tom (aA)4120VAC(H) 6 6 o 1 AR TRA 2 TRSHIE LD -24 DC d`5 s 20VAC(G) VC PC 3 -24 WC1]69-IF16 16 CHANNEL ANALOG INPUT w(sA) 12ovnc(H) AI o - 4 n + 120VAC(N) 2600-06 LI CLEARWELL 3 F- LT 31-IJB-2061 8 2001- 3 ' 120VAC(G) TB-1 TBAI-6 IN-0 y 2061-B LEVEL INDICATION U 15 ] 1(1 A) iRIN-0 LAN CLEARWELL 43 16 8 2 2061-B LEVEL ALARM HIGH VIII Z p ULTRASONICle 2-PR R1fi SHIELDED 9 3 LAL CLEARWELL 43 LO ¢ U LEVEL ALARM LOW TRSHIELD 2061-B LIR CLEARWELLA'3 r w z 2061-B LEVEL RECORDER w ~J¢ W N CLEARWELL q3 LALL CLEARWELL 13 w 20�J1-B-B LEVEL ALARM LOW LOW w j � Jo ZU2 LLlm LEGEND REFERENCE DRAWINGS W SOFTWARE LINK PLC MODULE IDENTIFIER 31-PID-2061 CLEARWELL 3 PRO *-TO BE DETERMINED U PROCESSOR NUMBER 31- CUT&TAPE 31-IIC-2615 NS,A3 31-PLC-2060 Al MODULE p5 O (d) C-2016 NS,A3 31-PLC-2000 Al MODULE p6 SHIELD MODULE TYPE(SEE LEFT) 31-IC-2017 ITS,A3 31-PLC-2000 AO MODULE#1 SLOT pg AO ANALOG OUPUT Al ANALOG INPUT 99 n 146 DO DIGITAL OUTPUT llD6-04 c-no oAnnws ne. DI DIGITAL INPUT fg DCC DC COMMON -IN] INPUT/OUTPUT POINT si-ur-zoos - WTR-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ NOTES FTEI I EE 1-IIAl Tl TIE I—E FEELPRO,EEL P oR TO s Ro O�CONsrRUC,ONo RE"`"'°R E"� 44 45 = ° IIIA—===== 43= ® o o II ILII 4 = CON5LRUC71ON NOTES 2 41 .. VIII II AND ALL—ElAA�U 40 °gar II ILII 0 PEDURE U.1 A ION ,E^"D OPEIIIIN4L I.NUIDL SEN UPON �, 39 _ IEa'UU`°E El Nc 38 VIII F II ,�Nw<,EH PLS T-PLI lU ENs �ND�oS,S 37 ��b' 0�wE,A El 111111. R,/N, o 36 - ... H,�n,�oN L IN 11-PL-11I P EN-111Eo 1�reEON�reEH o 35- VIII D 0'"U,L NEw MP PUMP„-P-s,O 0 U,RUM PLC - II 34 0 IIII 0 N -z TwMwus n ,L,L=REOUIREo,� 33 - OwN ON EnEE,n0. = •_-__�� ® 0 V°I1O IIIII N, IUOU,-�v UTEHRNIN �P 2530 a a HEOHEG 0 ON EE,32 Ow, HINc OM ze 29 00 III 2s 27 - OF - - VIII 25 VIII II o 24 0 22 23 VIII IIII 21 j 20 19III SII oxNww 18 16 7 VIII II IIII =ww�a U�rra a 1413 15= 111111 111111 0 =0 5 12 11 10 s 7 VIII IIIIilil s SII q — �� VIII II II 2 3HilVIII o IIII — II 0 ------ — — 111 ------------------- 3 3�I� 9�I� 39� �3 �9 31 �3�3 - ----------------- � z 21 25 27 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 � {(/ NEW WORK F m W A 31-PLC-1501 ENCLOSURE DETAILS A 31-PLC-1501 ENCLOSURE DOOR OETN LS w BE ¢a REE.s-IeETx,... 'EE.AHEEL�Tggg 3 w Z U Q =a w CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT AND BILL OF MATERIAL O F GROUP OUANTITY MPNUFACTURED DESCRIPTION Z ALLEN-BRADLEY HEAW-DUTY CONTROL RELAY.20A RATING,4-N.0.CO—TS,DIN RAIL MOUNT,P/N 700DC-PK400DZ24 iO P/N CHCC2GI FUSE,EGA,125-FAST TING.P/N L R ALLEN BRADLEY PILOT LIGHT,24VDC,RED LED WITH RED COLOR CPP,BA 1s BASE MOUNT-NAMEPLATE PER LAYOUT ag 2(] ALLEN BRADLEY SELECTOR SWITCH,3-POSITION.TWE 4/13,METAL,1 N.0-1 N.C,-NAMEPLATE PER LAYOUT ALLEN BRADLEY PUSHBUTTON,TWE 4 13.METAL.1 N.C.CONTACT-NAMEPLATE PER LAYOUT Er 100 a 146 s? _ W7R-477 - PA.�Ec, 16131/ 1U.1-1 ISR oRI-1RI-1I�M RI-1 ICA AM M � o x 11-1�EzNN P°, IS, _1111-12�M„MD11—CIE) „ PMP MAR” I. o1. a „ IIN-11 IN I 1111E EIATEI� -��� © MSM WEE�UPPE.PUMP pI U AIN I -11 IN Io MUM ,E,11-PUMP a,M ANIN 2 IN 17. o 1 11 1. �, M M„EN EU111 NA1E« i UE.E-11 �N 1 o N ao wgEM PM MMPI UDEN-11 N IMU o � N o 12 LI o wgU,UPPUMP#I MAR. ' P1 111. w IN A aw;�N o M �o �wd z�Q I'l1UR a wuu W11 SUM PUMP P Ni UA.E 1Z ELN o � � N eo [n o 0 0 SPARE I wnsN wn,Ee NJPEEP PUMP IEU PuvE N o N UMrn �uu°<� SPARE����-.°a o USE nAIUs IN P o N } I o .11 11 NA,,,PPE. �E � 22 141111 IN 11 o �[ 4-2 L o NUM PPEIPII,-US IS o ����� � D 21 14 w NEEUEPUMP,,M.UMENnA �� o oo IIl�l�i g s o 111172 o E � � N eo w <i11v � sP,E � CL— IN 11 E2 waMN�s,PPNPUMP asU1m21 21 1 141112 E NN �o zS1.1 11 WARE 77 W11 NJIIII NIAI 11 IW—E—1 -'A 141111 11 141112 sPAR ® wux W11 NJIII 11A1 11 oi �1 m s N 0 N eo w Q � m 11 11 OO UUN 2 IT 1E111E11E NUN2 U �a w 3LD CONSTRUCTION NOTES ° 5T .L ISETI 11-111113).PIPE 0 PUU,EI.IUMPEEII.N 101 A .E,uvU UPENP,UN,�roMUaE SmEM MPUN _ d UUM, NEw sUUMw<,EU P�„s,..�UN NMMP PMMP N a O N�N� UMPNMNSNU�ME'P�o-«<P°Pi PI`=M�N,�ssP�, NOTES �a 4 0 EE TD PPr`fmo�iPasMPEouwEo as SHOWN ON sMEE*No.e rMN E ENS aE cMaNCE PaacEss CITY c.noon..nw�nc.. NEW WORK ON-1 wNPOEESENT of 11.1E(POE)`PINIE11. .� . 101,,146 2AW 11 11 11 Gg © UONMMEM<.�oN. so;: WEER-477 - PA.�Ec. 16131/ IAN C::,) MEw 0 w o �� s CD w aG S OO - v-1 a,o� o K © o E moi., oEasE oomTRaE �sE-IE -- CD �o E s _ No�a1- sP RE - �z O o ,. 0 11 �MRol �v-1 d3 o�sE„�,ME-IE v a _N w O o 04, E _ Noy., s� � E -SEooN.RaE v-1 d3 IISII-E-IE a V U =O O o s�;i �<,� sP.wE o v� v O o141121E oo-a urs 1E WE Q o w ail E O o E e �� .PES fft El.MROE E.-1 es o�s1'-E-E " 00 mP ds o�sa,aRSE-IE O o E mMP0, PmMP„-P-,E u O o o, oo- � �<,�sE IIIct 3 IIIS z w O 0 , _ maul- oo�-IN 4 -fig- ini13 rze 141111 —12 v reE O a o o O o12 E _ Noon- D. �„��- 0 w.aE ® o E Noy.,zo o�,- Nis sP.aE <¢ ¢S O zUo <a F D NEW WORK C, a 0 wa O � CONSTRUCTION NOTES �= O' re �E ENT IND 1—IT—L TONT—--—N NOTES O 100TEETSTEO ITII�.ITEom: N M P�„s„.Rti�'1ao�P«MN Lill°a�PmN-1—lEMEN=mE c"'E IE(Mac)veoass Ear � �Amo��MNM.146 °. - E,izz<E.,w,i m.Ea��m�s:3iE.rnoP)Al .. REmm�REm,�s„mw"IN,„E7�,� M'A-EM of o�NNE PRONE fg © D-MEN1110N 3,-�c-,so;: WTR-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ _ CONSTRUCTION a�Noses O, 2 „om N� -�ara< as oNaE ( a ,E,IN oPEaaI�LL N 1-11L 1-1.N N11111-1- IN z ICA 11 LT 1111 1 F w m�noPT oN8�6aE �n�CN bN EET I IN Nz Ta EE E,n nTER REON�REo If c D VI IN o a 1 IN 11NEW WORK '� v O waw wmm auP� a� OO „,N I- o O IIN 1,I IN 11 - OW w w ms EN,PT,NP��a a N w; S — a V IN- 0 I U d~ w V I IN 11 O _ —11 LIl l1IM u1nO U o LIlI iiN (L Q 0 w E CID WI IN 0 - ~ o Cwu O 11-1CD r L"" � o �e N IIIct 3 IIIS z s Q N �� x �m J� TD �e am W- 2 � a p w¢ wa U w w Q Z U 2 3Q w OU �Z gC, a z Z C, �o O CD �a pg NOTES of O aNsw,a-1EMENT aE-loEv iN-)'1RaOESll.Rs ET 10.3,,146 YNIHE MaND'-Nl,aE e�aNCE aaocEss env eenoonnN,Ns rve. fg © =T-IELo =Tes 1- D-MEN111IN 111 111 N1, WTR-477 1— 16131/ LEGEND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTESTNT NH- -•�.�E..�S�ti E.. ,�° N w�°k 'PNOT TON. ER°,E�ER°R,°_,�°° 1 ., HN, RE EIEM IE IEI ILL N-EG, ENT ONE sN°EE°E�R.. IN,NE PaaEIT Ec°NaloNs % ATcHEIN --SII - -- -- -- - z LEGEND ICA Oo °a=oEos, opo 0 ��IIIIII mow= ,,��, Cl) ILB 0 00 �Px :�aEw°P°a P:a�� 0 00 - 000 UZD o=N U Q E7� - _- mucro I -- ,E T �(THIS WING) F � ` s a w z oo , z U 0 d GO o~ Il olll �L III g AIEA es"` F AREA 9 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ROUTING PLAN I�I z z scasE I. o < U z a ------------------ l --------------------------------------� - @ E 3 4 - W¢U O g v W j Y z �\ Ag ZUQ 0 6O0 o 0 -- TO REAS -- -- -- s:v ,\ 3O O aEn SITE PLAN �' z CONTINUED DOWN TO AREA 9 WASH WA ER RECYCLE BASIN c rv�.s. (THS DRAWING) °- A—LEREA 7 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ROUTING PLAN pao°cs oocuuEMn,�owEM°""°0"`Po(°`cGW°N0 SEA c�nooAnnws ne. AlE o E 104 n 146 CA E S°® n-Iv-moT W7R-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ CONSTRUCTION NOTES GENERAL NOTES ILIAI-"I OINIE Il.11 N AIL IEIINENI 11EINON11.1 1111EI III I'll-lEOL 1�qAll 11 Nqllll., (D ALl"lElEI 1IT1_1,11 I.. ....1,ILE-ELL 41 A'_ "1,11 11 LO I-I-— A NTIAMI 11 1-LE NATAIL.1'El-E Al 1-INEI ALL-AN111-IIINNIEI ON I'll 1-1.ANI OALIEN ILL IN ILL 111-11EIN-111.1-11�l- jj�OLITION ONLY PANIE,L"l,PP'L,9LlANLNL PTLICI'1'�0�2 LT�CELLOIOLN ER JOB COMPLETION AN, I I 1-ILL - �11 11 1.1 11.111-111ENT -11- 111 A I.-ElE 11-LAT1.1- l�E,NT�,LYIEP:p3HpI'Dl2�N�'wAF,�IA,El"lp,�PLL%'lEAAlD AND "A"N E A'AND A""E'I'A"'EN�lol�IPIL'o ENN ENIII 1-11 FINATIWN�IN-P-E--1-LE IEl.-ELLEN N11-I-Al.,AND IE I I I L, -111 N-L-N 1ENI-IN IIIN NT IN F I wore, wn.8-121-11 NT ILI 10M L'O,rvEN OF�11K Al NINIED 11AIL IE 11011,rvE11 10 ILE INIEll�11ENTONL ILE-1-1 I'All I-EEI IEIATEI ALL `'AI .11 INIL IL ANNII IE A__.N� N__LN. ..... _OIJNa",NNE" =11=TILINTINAL- 'N III ILE'T"-- 8=11 `T� 1 -1-1 I-L 11--11 INI NNIINENT�LL FINLI wNNI.1 111MIN-NI IN IIANI Al IINIL-NNE -.-N.11 I-L reE 111..Ere-I -111NATE ALL-.11-1.11 1.-VILE NILANI 1-111 Nll.11 lEllLll II-E 111ILE Plljl-.AN 11-10N PCR�l(A.,11-1-121 Pw (D-1-1) P110 - I11) F (D -F-F ICA -1 L ---- L -----J�] P11#1(N-1-F—) ...A -------- PU.P IOUIE F E! -IN 11-1--) L I- I--------- I L-1 EEP' L CO) L------J ;7 2 - " LLI# -11EI-LA-f-1 'lD-`A7AFTlE22NA LDN, eEres ---------- A F F , �� ;� RE1111 II a ————————- L 10 IIILLNI#1 1-F-0110) A IENrERATU (I—ELL IL]F-1111) #1 OLD ELE z (11 I-T F ED, I FINEII 1,"Ell L < xw� A MEP�,'A E-LAI ILI RAILL(lEE 11EET 11 1. T C) Ej IS NN- IETEIINI IAAI(-IEE- '--FEE-T- 11-1-121) << 0< 1-IEIIIE-I�IELE--—P-.1 11.51EET FOO) < F, F z -------- ABBREVINALIONSMOM'E��ILLIE: L------- �Z-Nll�%M FNE�'E�l���MoNl�m's�F�lNouL�eINILE MQ MNPN`�NNIETIEI OdA- N" NENMN`lEEllLFTl.LE P-II F1015 146 'E,Go,ore FAN'LL 11-111-NIN1. F IEIIID A.NO, L-------- 31-IF-0111 WTR 477 CONSTRUC71ON NOTES GENERAL NOTES (D I III IE I"III IIIIE 11.11 111�l II-E.IIE1111.1 III III-El IIII IIlE 11IIIIEI IIE1111111.1 III IIIIE 11.11, ELI 1�YIER 5HED III IEEI IIH,� EFTE ENTCE III-TITIE'—CIII-1111TI 70 7 i, N WATER ... 1, "Ell NIIENIII�N I-N11 IE 1——.1 I� 11111LI I-IlNENI.1/,l �ILIE NIN 111--1 1 11 IIIEIII IEEl 11 EIIIIE III III EM 11 1 11IILIIIIE w111 IILIIIII IIIEI,EIIEI 111 1-1, RE TRE ,EE_ ...LEIN IE'T TIE 101�IETT,I �Tl IIII IE. TNITTIEI�11�1ETE'lEl'NI,�ITII III IT-11 I-IOT IEEI El II EE IT 1, IL II-El I' NEI TIEIILE 1.—N 1-11-El I-El.-E'IIIEIILE. INT-Il I-L FIELI IE1111.1 IIIIINT IL FIELI.11NI.1 TEII.T11NI IN EIIIINI -IL-.Il llTRN.11 I-L RE IElIEI, IIIJI-IN (I., w I- --) 1110(1--IF-11) "0 F_ F ........ ICA I L ------I L ----- m L as Cl) ---------- I F11111-1 _gL ---------- L------- IE�--El(-11-IF-011I) s „RRA L------- ;7 ;7 �Er (D-11 O]l II) FILTE1 0 qE "III`7�I�71EAI" L< 11#1 A.lIEI-LD-NSR,I Fl�E'll NEI, ---------- 10 (ow > ANIYI3,R N,�)I— IENrEW�E-I(I-IL]F-1111) #1 ILD ELE 1——(11 1-T I— --TI IIIOle g z I F1-1 I F1-1 -- -- ------ o E-III 111 1-(IEE lHEET &L, LEGEND w o > Z F i 96 was IS 0(5 Ej NITEI jj.EIE - 1-114) IIII 1EIIIE #1 ELEITI PllP (IEE IIEET III) �Z Nll�%M FNE�'E�l�.oNl�rvm'sFINouINILE 3m Q III IIN-El 1E. 106,,146 --- ---- FIE1 I- 11-111-IN1. IEIIIlFDll NI, WTR 477 LEGEND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES Fos �Oware C-'- re wurorek 'ONOU TON. Preo,El Preore,o 111 oF ,ND TOOPE OE N,reT Pao EOT�TCOOa,IONs e N�ENS OENEM O,TOre�EL III, ICAm w eo - NEre - ,Ere PreaOE==ore�,NEM<,�rere. o 4l Eye R N;; - re rereEreT F-e,T3 F==d�T3NO PINT T 3 zs a sre -- �sEIreEres ——————— reOreEres -- ------- reEIreOs eeo rd8� H U w E Q r N H _ T X— I 0 0 ANALYZER BUILDING 1201 ANALYZER ENCLOSURE 1025 ANALYZER ENCLOSURE 1021 nu0 e Ms s^ase NTs s�,wse NTs X ou llll` II 0 r � zr III z o ao� z— rie a q�Tisanreu psis s0 ar�E,Ns�s m sr�eEres w z F p w r--— ———————— F-—-- -------� res '�-- -----------� ;-- llff w f o ga m� a w— zo p ANALYZER ENCLOSURE 1013 ANALYZER ENCLOSURE 1017 WASHWATER PUMP STATION BUILDING 3 4 srue_Ms wase_NTs sxse-"Ts _ ET 107 n 146 31-IF0125WTR-477 - are.�ECT 16131/ GENERAL CONSTRUCTION : FOR DEMOLI■oN ONLY \'\ /m\ , « ,_ _, z=, . _" � \ _ ~ -s�,_s.�.c-ate_ ` ^ ~ „ D-NG AND Z S P-EIT°=t'° \ � AOF( ' - ILI a . ` a ` 2 ; `\ � " \----- \\ F'TC, < \ , \ --y - -------\ c a _ \ < F : ® -- - - - : 11 }NL :/ �BLDG. war « wry. y� METERING \\ ( \ \ FOR ! t+> \ \� ( m \ \, \\ \W\ \\ } \ (\ { N -NIL° ^ �� } d« / °I N 2 ( WTR ^ LEGEND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES F8� �o se aN - N wuroNk 'ONsreocT ON. TreNre�TNON,o s�of FENE IE IEI ILL E_ ENI AND s oT N .. m,NF PewecT SPFcncn,�oNs 4,,,lAM ����e; �a o wswn.Ev vuua mrk.oWe—�e, �s II ���� ILI --z e01 N ;" ers;� IIFe s;aR�OFaPANEL d F---- ----- --Irl— � IFeNs L ---------- :eo:ea wo LL�F LUr ---------- L------------ o=N z H U Q;7 ., H N W J K s a w CLEARWELL N3 ANALYZER BLDG. HIGH SERVICE N2 ANALYZER BLDG. CAUSTIC METERING RACK U K o s^xF.Tris sra�F.NTs scwF.NTA O d 0 ~ 3 lllli �I E 0 V w o o III g z w z Ili o 00 o x UW W Z F O @ H n H Q m w¢¢ U LL U Z L w h N QQ _ W O Oa Y� fL Q O C7 W Q Z� g 3 109 146 T�NTTs P FNFM of IMNC)I—L IE'OIN All NI, N�Nor,A.N�NS N�. $ NE—ENT of IH—E 31-iF-0j E WTR-477 IINIAII.—EN—N. - aA.�ECT 16131/ GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES F7 1111T, FOR DEMOLITION ONLY111EP FPI � FROR,o 111 of DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION �������� Ow CALLED 4 00 ;ro TE 'NP E�.PE of uroR.. N,�E PaoJF�T EPEc�,NA,�oNs y y; FIBER CONDUIT & CABLE SCHEDULE IC CD �N/A NI EPP#s FPP#I., I - 2D N/A -- LAP PlUDNIFPP#2n FP112 1 12 �33 O NEA -- FULE1 OFOIE FlPllINNI FP— 12 El ® N/< FPP#,2 F11111 w O wA -- rPPae FPPIe, 12 1a o N/A — — 111TH ELEPATEA-AH—El IN'F11#1 oOO wA 1, PN#a N/A E„IPP# �F#, E1 PP#P, N/A A #,PF FPP#9.2 AF#,P 0 N/A -- CE#,Pc FPP#sz Ns#,E, FPPgs.a Ns#,a FPP# FPP l,I 11 0 11 00) © WNE I,111 11UNNA FP— IE 11 PCP NlU - — �z o N/< -- lEllE#= PP#2s Hl#2 A — o i ® WA E 12 Pll PlUNNA FP— LINALTNNU Q w m r ;� D N/A FlEl AALLE11 ANALIIERI FPPJII a W O N/A -- FlEl OALLE11 ANALIIEII FPP#,3PlEll - 0 o N/A -- F11#1 RNa lljI.l 11 N o NILALL 21 FINER U ® NEI -- FPPgs FPP#sA, I - 0 o > 0 o FPP#F.F ANAIIEI ENILEIIIE OIN,FPP# z oOPEN PIN ALIM FLIIMETEI FPP,l.l ANOlIEl ENILEINIIE"1— 0 1III 3 0 o FPP#>> PPP#11 z o -- PlEl I ANALlIEl ILEI FIPI, PPa, vz z O w g PP#, 1 2 FULEI E INILIEI SHED F111— INE—El PANEL 1111 F111 -- PPP#I. PPP#I. /2' W 0 -- FULEI 11-2FPPN— FFPPX �N PlEl 11-12 - PPp2PPI, — W N 2 ZZ W U O J 0 -- FULEI 11-12FPPN,2, I— P2EFPP#,zs 1/2' 3¢ U m 0 -- P.I9.,2 11 41 PC EL 41.2 21 2 Z¢ E O -1/r' -- FPP#s.,o —LE T— OPEN PIN oeola� ” Nc#z moFoa � Nc#�moFoa11 m O -- a tFzl " a e39uIIII E-1 Al N E xi E'PlEs pg FPPXz�e ITR LE FPPYILI o'w'iPT NLPFieE EL ONE E-1 Al NALED OTECTNONONLI NOT LO N -- oe(F2, NI 12 FPv#s.s IE 91 cELE11icAL reaau FPP#s,e 21 E.110 146 NATE' aE`n^a�i P �s cwisi amsxnF ��NooN.r,NS NO N . ,�,�F�FM of w� ATI=�. a,-iF-II N WTR-477 ANY""oNA E11111 I'll N.IMINI 11 1-11 IOCIEINIIION LEGEND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES F$E a,o s_"N wuroPk 'ONOU TAN. ERo,E�EROR,o=,�of ,ND=NOPE of�R.. N,NE Pao EST ECNNA,IoNs � FIBER CONDUIT & CABLE SCHEDULE IC CD �N/A N EPPAs EPPAs., I - o N/A EPPAI, EPPA2 1 12 ® N/A EPPA,E F11111 I IE, O wA -- EPPAe EPPwe, 12 1a o N/A1, PPA N/A P P E ,CPAs a� A,PN EI EPPAP' o N/A AEA,PN EPPAP.z 11A1 P D N/ACE A,PN EPPAP.z NSA,EP EPPAP.a -1a EPP— A-INIE P-1 EPPAse11 1 o N/A NIJ, PPAPs PPAP,G1 2 - — © WA -- CE B,Pc EP— IE 11 Pck NIU— I 1 11 D — �z o N/A -- 1EIIE A= PPAPS HIAz INILIEI I — o i ® WA E Ns P PPA9 a —INN 2U Q w m r ;� Q:) N/A -- ULIE1 IILEI F111llj. � � ���— 0 N/A PPA,3 o LL w O N/A -- EPPA,3 - o -- F11#1 R1111.1 Na o � N/A © -- FIPAi, PPd�.s Q N/A c O N/A -- rPPA%, E11A33 o N/A EPPAs EPPAs 0 o ooo u EPPNE.E EPPA 1 N EPP,E.E EPPA 1 PPA>> PPA I III g Z- - - PPa, A, w vz z w g (] -- PPA, PPA i W Z z W PPA, PPA III IJ~ U -- EPPN A� EPPN A EPPN>> EPPN 1.9 /z" - - PPA, PPN U F—I 11- - PPp,2., IMPLE ENILOIIIE I— /2� ZrZ Z U O W 0 UEEI 11-1-1— - I--r11Al2, EPPN,z i/2' 3 Q U m O Z LL UIEI 1111 11-1-1— v_A9, ��AE PPAss Z O - __ E PQ E 77 1 m O 0e la� 111-IE NT IA c Az mo�oa Nc Al M-121 EN — O -- a tEzl " F e�91 E xi E s pg EPPXz Ie ITR vo EPP IMI1 o'w'iPwren PFie ,Oa11—F-111«i No A=EPPAPs Paa CELE �reaaN EPPAP,a E.111 n 146 NOTEI N°`r�a�i P NE�R�s,�o��P N�NooN.r,NS N�. N,ur.NENEM of�,� reo a,-iE-. WTR-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ ESE E( E 11- 1) ----------- �a-------a A ICA ISSUED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 1 «ESEE,r� "------ ——————— ,------11 .(rEE 1,-�E--) �z �" ---n�wn.—� o� __ — — ——— — — {e°il -------rE �Nw rni,E1 s—1 rni,ot s 1 r n*Ere r 1 rFLIEre e 1 -- — — I S J Q rFIL1E WnEna Q rps r,�s I FILT lEllE rp�erE ac a w a,i7.'lll E R�w11=aE T-1-1111 111 --------------- azE�eEus —L -�-rfsEEs - EEi xERxEnxEanE�r,-�E } o, Ir_—1 -------OJ Ilii og -- -- L-- -- ------ — i zm Im `---J yap Ll araws uoxn , � F cv � NS/NOMENC-UFE: rricz—_1rncZ_— (SEES ——iP1) -------LW� — aures rvau euxoic — �WU �� ---IF uc—ucoucouvcmcx Q arc amoreo-uuo-ecc camc cvrreorrcn Z 2 x rams uoxn � _ �- - _ o-xo-czcn nxo�nc 2C p 3� w U jy�U (s[ �E)� e riecns L_ re———— J •q_WeEriecn ao-,co-ao-xc� o o Z m _-- PiC�or3 S _ nE �Miis—_—_—_--� ws g Llo a--- -- "— --- � ar. n�E�,EM of cn`..�(R.PI 112„ 146 �g a ani n,aHa4Ew,En.of�n,ur s,-�E WTR-477 - au.�Ec. 16131/ ISSUED FOR 06 REFERENCE ONLY � I --I ' AFF a f'PF� ) FaFa "��"E.IIe,I PI""P #, PR„oaAEET 1--1 — — o Ptll 6 ILII u a eeee�� eeee�e a r a; x� lo U Q L------- ---------- U lllru 0 _ y Fro oF��Fs �8 F- F D-I IF-0 0= 0 III ---- ---- ----- —� �� � m HE oo� Ili zw o; 000eeoEl 1� _ _ ------ Eo�«��RF w� <LL R NET � L — �Fa, F22-1 aoo LL w 5 o z o z " a�= m a, F -1 oo� 2E w E:------------------ -------------------J �` oa IMEL AOA NE. g a o,o,a„ o0 °°moi F-IFI]-] - d wo „ 000000 ' L-- ----- --- ------J --------- ------J o 13,,146 EEM aF Axa”oI—) OFFFFI N s RACK as°�Fss < f M�NI I—L ',-iF-onz WTR-477 - aA.�Ec. 16131/ CONSTRUCTION NOTES �LFF11 SEE 0 Pte. N slmn SmF. ��-11 eRRRF�oR Rro _„�� mm�EFE—Eo ww TIN Hse Prn e nc aFw SPP pe,)e,. �s,aca F�eFR anc�PUFF nP (FII Ns, an:R waTFe,owes F�eFe euaFc ga ts�. F- (snF T,-IF-o�s� 11E.I—FIeEe P— �F.F se c a„ �mPab meZAM r---------� ------------------ EVAa ao��---�1 I s F���I� PRow" = R — a I smss a �s moss a L—— -- r U =� a I� �I� 1RUumFaol� �I� m — r x� J Q aL�. 0 9L� err aFl a �� o0 U L� — —- — L L — _eeJ � r —————— FiLTFR OFFICE d Q Fn.F paFFicF FieFa eacH aar�FP q,o z—L——— ——— �F`PPR3i�A No r�e,as a — (saa.oz . a �I �N,e --------------- -�) _ - FaFa� I m a s aFP m a y — a�a " �o v aFl IIIt � w� L JIIIS z w --------------- �FiFPPTFa�E1,sies °a ,PERF [sH ,-1F-o ezi a o r z O cP FPai ------- FP FR 8 S Q e m 8 y R am ,w Ly—q,e ,waCnF1 dz uNIia� S Ea Q <Fw iU CS U� �W Krz w re w ��eU ro� ee e. es ze ———— 3 71® Q > U ULL R°°1 m � ISSUED FOR F o I I REFERENCE ONLY s s a �a IL — -- ——— -eE z V .114 146 GALLERY RACK as°ass P FPFM IF 11-11-) o�RooR.�,HS Ro. furxwwwr aF��.. T,-IF-o„T WTR-477 - PA.�Ec. 16131/ ISSUED FOR REFERENCE ONLY `x �� �� ' AFF EIL.ER L.F.ER—11 P�E�a_ I PAPP�Ro�Ell Fo�� wR �— A ElIFIII — ------------- —� — o of- s ICA I ;uII 01 -1 L L -1E FI �i �E11A c—ER,Ea o -----1 F ��E -1 F—��3--1 ��, F—�E°L Iaoo--zE�aE=— — m L_ -1 L-- -1 L-- -1 - - -- — — x»x a �E l "6 �EaNE.PA,�P E� LFI—I IIIIE1 11FIF Es u2 ------ - -] ----_- --�(FPP� )EOP s ���;7 �w ,�f ^� 0� ISM ,� I � o wN Pain " x ,��I E PSI NE PES x� o, Efl ll��. u --- — ---- �l' rNE � I F — — 0 000®00 000000 oaa„ 00 > tea— ---- ------ u �o 00 — L —1 xE P� s�x, --------- xE��Kx1111 �Nfl�x. IIIct 3 wU G,s Lam ----- IIIS z¢ ---- ---------- ----------- — — o ' �6PPa iNE -1 �,❑I,❑Ix; _ �41 TTTTTT WAV Z_U tnUa W e,u,ues Z c s,o Zi U U wax vam as sunm-gas noo — Y Q 2 a Clsro 3500 Z �V N ¢ 000so o•000== z a� �w 000000 000000 �I PxocEss. - E.115 n 146 "I ITF lF-111 1111111 'g PPxcEss-1-111- N,urwE�EM xE�x,�aE Rye Ns �,-iE-ops _ E�WTR-477 - au.�sc. 16131/ r o ___ �oa oQwo rieExs �xaExs aa" �.ER rieER 1111 awaEL xz., ELEc rieEa vn,c--a s -- Hs2 rieEa anc�awaE�xz.s — w II x ry ww � I� II xry �71 � U N =� Q T X~ b e — J Q �W U - a�5� I7HEa o IzzI I I I I Q I I I xw E w �w ll cru L w—E a owry JI JI a JI 0 ------ ---- -- — --- ----- ----- --- } � rva,x ISSUED FOR ¢¢w �a 3w REFERENCEONLY � ue� wx ue� y U a Z 2 U y 3 Q > Y 3 w U x� � I I � z I I I I I I w— --- — ----w — 116 146 ry Prvrva� v ,rv,M c.c�aHc�iMoci c�rvorvrv.��rvs rv�. PCR BLDG k2 ,,,„,���,x.o.�x.x a�—ir—ons WTR-477 px,�Ec* 16131/ DEMO meov � �! : 2 \ - \ ^2 :« � d : m ) \) ( \§\ k/ / §!°( `[ FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION ) 3 DEMO ) , 9E Ex® /T~ I — ° % ,g�®,� «ee _ � 2 ( eey `«®x, ® - \ MIMI- L,xk7> { , ,,�� m / : , ,�> 1, ` �m SITI IILI °\ ^ , - » 4 ) HOLD { ^ i ® 11-111-1 NI ) D 2 ) � « 31-PID-0604 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION „ VN .w, „rz „rz tLL-1° `fes ICAo m,a. .�,,�� . ,�o �o,�ol .�o«° '���� .� � '��«° '�,«..� ��IIIIII .,�� � � �a I � m JKosa o L Josa L J osoMJ oso k J oso L J oso L J oso L Jos L oar?7 �O p N d Q a o llUI E 3 v Ali w n Z F w �'o W Z F K E m�vaz g i ,,, F J¢ o0 a w o o a F F r r osoa F r o 6o Ko6o �� Ko6o4 Ko6o4e oso aso oso — z '0p o 0 0 0 "�„0 � 0_ 61 0 y� 119,. 146 � -eF-+ -eF--'€- -"f- -:€-eF =F=F rl�h P111h p1l h MI5' `-, -Pio-o 4 of �E WTR-477 - - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31�PID-0604 `VILI ICA Baa. _ � o 0 0 �IIIIIIII I HT o 0 0 N a "" a ii I „oIII 3 � �mW wzF w t Q<u LL 0 0 w U 2 r rr F -116r r Kao r -1 N g Pioso4e PKao Qv PKoe aN oe a �� o 4F aoo4 - z o _ Y'„ '„� ":„ _ lo 1— 146 INI £$ _.....w � � �� �� � � Irh F F s,-Pio-asoa W7R-477 WTR 16131/ 31-PID-1401 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY ON w DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION �'� To'MS1'T s wn*R010 r reroreocre�*rere RE,uaN wn �omc.w�u ,.Pic-wvmian^u o. 0 VV411 —PD u4aN _ v Ua~ww - — F 1 re D.-zoa R DaN wA, 0 o 3-PD-O 0 U SVeoRaN — � a Q � m 0 ER«ow1 v R o llUl l E O �9az4�re� } -- M woore Ore ao�N P1401 a�E� re� �P1aos III P1402P1 aoa W P1403 Pic uuNCHiNc - �a reR auua srarioN �~�. s. n< O TK1401 o ate.rl^J'��I reu v[uns[ ¢O o Z Z ZZ F~ g 0 fr P1401 P1402 P1403 P1404 P-141 P1406 ag REs .Ea ree, .ere ree, .ere a a rEEo PIMP Pur�P s Pur�P, Pur�P ausre PDr�P ausre Pur�P E.121 146 £$ -PID-1101 DE _ reEcWTR\1N477 - areaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1401� —1111— 11E PU�Hlfll MS1401 TK11 401 CAM �.Dreacre�=rere RnuaN wn zomc,aNu ,.azc-wxm/�^-u o. - o DRP ----- 31-PIID-4 — oaaN 4 � N 5 w — — i—Po ID—, 3, aIc 040, Q m o ER«owI n,l 5 5awA,ER o ll E 4 Ll 12 D III oRUN "z rz wv am o r"us v s1z4 1pR MS 0 P1x406 U mmwowm�v-11ILL#2 P1401-- _— — — rz.�rz /Iunal ° — 3 rs `1 aoz `1 aoa o a Ili oveRrzow W`1403 Pic uunlDcaulNc - �e z A.PIMP o TK1401 p[ugg ¢O v,m ` F w N ¢a ir.�iz RR P1405 s�H�asz�� � M 3 w U ¢z HOLD FOR INFO $ wa zoo z d P1401 P1402 P1403 P1404 P-1405 P1406 pg R� reR an ,Ea an .ER a a rEED POMP Puna 3 Puna, Puna z aus�aDr�P aus�aur�P $ 31-PID-110 _ DEcW7Rz\1N477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31-PID-1501 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION 1=1. s1. F n Fes^ n Fes, n �� r 1 „ M, o w - ---- ----1 ll, 0 t— z P1 505 4, P1503s 4, P1501� ads .0 aouas --- �'r---------- P��o� -------- '— ------ ---� wz �� A wnsHwnTER 0 wnsHwnTER i � w�u �o - SUPPLY STATION SUPPLY STATION H. j r p Q a a W O =a <n P1505 FUTURE P1503 FUTURE P1501 3 p v Wtufa�acx11M1 I P sHu �El PIMP s w,s�wa.ere vuMv. WfuER�11 arxP s�u�El PIMP, wash waren PPmP WMR°P Ps—.) 3 E.123 n 146 t. 11-Pio--1 of _ WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31�PID-1501 M c� 11111 ELE11111 31 1 5D2> 1=1. S1. 11 - - _ — � ,o n F n F n ;7 PL 0 —J r MIL osa III 1—„ e, I I I I – - -I n_ —I111 �---� L i5 w P1505 4, P1so3 4, PPL� 1so1 d ------ --------�'— ------ ----T A WASRWATERos WASRWATER Vii. U C SUPPLY STATION SUPPLY STATION �LJ v ZUQ � < m � P1505 FUTURE P1503 FUTURE P1501 3 p v wfuER IsUams wa.ere PUMP. wfvERr°arxI sUam, wash waren PPmP2 wcvERPTEaISPIMI 3 E.124 n 146 NI $ 5,-Pio-soy _ �EcNI WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31�PID-1703 n u,P1711 u, -1� P.p, � uPrea 31 PPID-1801 [1-712 P l 71 ua Ell N - u,Pwx7 vuw [n U o (L Q c u�PRrv<o GP I I I o J o Pwx7 3 Pwx7Px1u n ¢o W o 0 o 31— 'a, Q w¢U >F P17auu o �wj => y o' oa ZUO _7 ISSUED FOR �J N o Pw.23 REFERENCE ONLY d uP - o pg P1711 P1712 P1713 P1721 P1722 P1723 P1731 P1732 P1733 to —N#1 P ., —N q,Pu _z —N�,p Pu _3 —IN Nz llMP o, ,aaN#p a _z ,aaN pe vuMa _s s* _, sr z srn _3 4 25 146 ye 11ppm cPu115o ,e9ppm cvuillo ,2PpM�avu ,z3 cPu ,z3 cPu ,z3 cPu ,v cvu ,z�cvu ,v cau cenD onnN�Ns rvo. fg 3,-PSD-,Pa3 _ AE WTR-477 - PuaE.c. 16131/ 31-PID-1705 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION 11710 Ki 711 111712 P11701 PK1702 Flaw r�ooulE q, rLaw r�aoV1E Nz 41, uomrva wua w,rvvuxw 3 _ 2-cPVi-6a6 PK1 701 Raw...... , CP C RVrtLL J1 PI 1801 'r,7Y TK1710 �- - 2 ri em,�E 0 oa Ys+� neiva ,uewc �'cam tis. pq � a r r N W J V2"P[,uBiNa = W o 11711PK1702—= tT Oa,�E,�v az as 2'11,z0z waRa,aN a, ra, „oa IIL,Eaa°° o a m O ,2 III v2 III ,/ �a1 m x 0 112'11 <61 w w z 1112' ao TK1712 w _—— — — — — — — Oo_s ¢N ¢a O P1711 o5 �o2�aa aa�o z a d w o 2 2„/< z x,/a- wo exwnsn 126,,146 yv IL- P1711 ceno oAnnws rvo. zo carp. 1111 --1701 oe _ AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c, 16131/ 31��PID-1705 HoDoH �, �An :;, 7K1710 71 TK1 712 PK1701 PK1 702 " 7— LII TIIK ooVPF N, F—.—LE Nz V 9o- ICA cu -cvvr'sn ,s V uF� oia ,z FaP ,5 o u, oin ca� rvmF, `P! 5 ,u�mxc wux xm xxw�x xua - o J — — — PK1701 — 2- Ill r III � .� rzv, aaw uoouP[n - 6u,ua[7 �P—/l TK1710El'Tw�.uav x, o,eFoaF w TM /rw ,s,n.- v' 31-PID-1901 - r;7a z Pnus� z a 'iueivaF — — 's vrz' N U o 0 TK1711 _ PK 1702 _ VLE 11 Q ,usE tow uoo s<c�E,�v Nz `� f 11—E 31-PID-1901 r 1/1 IE �,/rs, vu,vuru ,yr -sic atic , c�uc u,, 4III g Y rmP1` Ili z �mx — T, �s „ , ,�x� w� TK1712 — — — — — — o-s o ¢j ¢a n—I ZU2 O �P 171 L1 � ,„Nk � � �� w o mur,aR eouo Xe � g Z < O EA W zs 1,/< zs,yr ,woNE'Z E.127n 146 yvP1 71 7111E1—11-1 vNIj j zo TPAPEP„o v s,-Pio-nos _ WTR-477 - aAaE.c, 16131/ 31��PID-1706 'E EFEEN TKi]13 wxs LI—I n4 TK1716 Mscnwo wMv ss - muess rware of 71 6nr�u wet CVNN[CiioN rwareos reuux vasmxncrvsICA � snro au "ou snoo cu. s uc�xµK v s m.�on zso ws stagy/soC'u�`� O w ,„�,ri rerexNw�Rx —t �e—o NreE, Y QLE EL 1.,x re �P�rere= `Krex,�w���re��.,x u 1— L LI-11, — Llr"� FTL �T� R'$; T /. � IL�L. �,sE�,n�PNNPNre � env x �aw� pK `aNna F nR o z x — — — — ;7 1l" _ S w x �x r.m o E i - �. E �eo0oe � �w� ic� M51]01 cowu O CuuC ssicci��p/e T � 'I IIS � VYi 1p /'- .— ITK1 71 wi it vuuvs`N' 3jvxcl°5u ea[ W nNo newnsn -Ift � <� z o ° 3- _ o MSi]06 ° Ift PI12 PI13 MS1707 Pmi IA e PnisA e Ms]o6 allo Ew�x s,a TT128 146 Eo. l—o1-1N IE g rv. „ww vx n. ��Nre `" a�-Pio-nos _ WTR-477 - vwaE.c. 16131/ 31-PID-1801 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION_; s o MS 01 y w SE H P,0 R ET S — U N X J E —Q U U o 0 m (n U o Q n Ilc e 3 F1111 } rvmc e- c(rvo*EEo—El U 3 ` lVIIIe1 n X Z ao� �0 w?F 31 ID- 01 w p a w¢¢ �w U W� �wN Z U 2 d 3 Q w OU g > Z O fr E.129 n 146 $ -a1-1-of _ �EcWTR\1N477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1801� .,rvo O ;;:• ICA o uo a IITFIIIE——11 it - } U .'E - c(rvo rvory a�IM g wzF �wN zoo 3Q 3� w OU Z g w O fr E.130,,146 £P a,-P�o-,ao, _ �EcWTR\1N477 - aAasc. 16131/ 31-PID-1802 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION VOID DRAWING AFTER DEMOLITION A E ZAM �IIIIIIIIIIII o��Ja Up ?o o - } ao wzl�ti a Q¢ — U� 3 Z J J J III W(7 p P 04 P 03 P 80 1 1 �`S I P111 N PI ag 18 4 18 1 2 P 801 P�a IF' R1 P d3FINR1 P <DN R1 «� .131 146 yvR" � `� �xDDD.�,Hs�o. -PSD-,.D1 DEM. AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31�PID-1802 IC o �wE urovren ® H Pzrem� _ � o om w w Q � o 0 o E El P, I po p p� - p 3 = V �Illt g 13 o 0000. Geo I I oo I II I II z Pp1804 on P1803ov P1802 s5v J 1801 �5v J a W oU = :7 fr ag P1804 P1803 P1802 P1801 �s PP p.(— ,Ea1 �. PP Xa�r 11oEo MIIER1 �s PP dz�r�N� ,Ea) �. .P d,(11 ,EI) 132 n 146 yvNE °° M �o�`,—' oo:P� � ��s° PM no r �xooA.��Hs�o. f31 -Pio-j.,IMID _ AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31-PID-1803 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION VOID DRAWING AFTER DEMOLITION E MOVE TO 31—PID-1804 ZAM �+- o o N �z UUw =w 0O O o Q llllllil e 0 3 IIS z o 6t n GG� GG` i o i i Jo w w�— �� ao 0 — a_ 8 P 6 5 ¢U w xi - oce Y� ma 3wN ?a tt Z U 2 Q� 3Q =� O fr pg P 06 8 o (,FIN s o 11 133 n 146 xoo 11-N rvo PD�rvP oo��° yv £g —PiDso —l3 DE _ E WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1803 r o IN L YoFo/F os � ; W9 ,s5o_os o_os �9o a � 3 in z a 3m mo a E an -- PLI ___ -- o 21 11 IIII - VIII � o GGwo 9 JII JI JII z wz_ A wa �a = a N pg P1807 Pi 806 to us .P Al 6iNi D *ER1 u. .P ys frmi IEal HS P1805 4 PivEe:'�'°s°Hain"H Ps�°,E"m�ca�,000c°�r�" rn°HP.<E�w e ,Eai 134 146 P�NEa,ic>I'oOUi P)m n yv £g -PID-1.1-D AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY ~ DESTROY_s.�.COMPLETION \ Ow�m '�7 � _ 2 ( z ` ' - .� D - � � (;p m \ ^ ©^ \ , / j,/ \\ wm © \ y ( \§\ wm `� : \ �\ ( ^ d® } l 32 S } WT « , ` III I ` w . y���_ � /�m '�7 � 2 ( FINIIHED-El } � ) ` ~ 3�~ � O�® m / ® \ E 11-1 ( ^ 136,,146 } 11 D 2 } � « 31-PID-1901 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION � E `�''° P1901 P1902 PK1901 PK1902 MS1901 - 'ITT... 11TIS5 11 22 IFIRSSILL N., (Fi.E eoxl wA.E—EF PREUMATIF, 0 noN HIS11 recE Mix�iX e01 zso L2zon�2 z�reP��No�°,ore ere�.,�o re.amu ��a�c,varvEu r� Vis„ o w -FID 1B 1 PK190172-1-1 FINISHED -vuuv"naOAo`z _ E., nc 31-PIN-1902 ER NITtee. E 2 J1- 6 FL RIDE E HE 31"1 oIE ._'H-� S U U d W W 60-N-1003 FILTERED o� U FP W �< n c RFF 31-Pio�no3 - , O NOre aus2 ,v� �°sre MSv901 r qe U P1901 III) z gmx ¢o J m W 7 w IT 11 11 wE Are°wasps:',E° w¢v ¢a 3< ' NN O D o.i.tsvaorewry w.Ereu Z U¢ cp IF ,,/z'cavc-003-AMMO PK 1902 Lill 17 a w �U -DI-567 OVERFLOW__ z z w 31�}PIDRV1301 -- -- ag E.137 146 $ -vioreEcWTR,\1N477 - areaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1901� "IN—11"IT 111111N NNIA 11E NUP TF �Hlfll PPUMP1901 P190P'Mp2 PK El P1, PNEUMATIC 0901 D H�GF190 c eox z oszno0» _ w (Fi�.E .aoxl —E noN d �N'F'TreN z-DWDWcac-seo Fwoe _ _ A x o ° z cwc-ss-aMMory uM su�Fn F ��� A ITT i._EL SNP,_L__o ary N-1 g PK1901 urvu - INEN —1 CA —,a re.E, r Ul-DI z P190N.T3 E z Ox U Q�' .;7' J IA m I r U Q Y Y o re 'NN x caul re E re c�.MM an _ lllll' II Y o MS1901 r cLE—ELL qz U aP1901 • III) w IT 11 11PN 11 31 UL ¢oma m wzF � .o.�.�stireDrewry a,EreW1 z v� U >>/z'cwc-os3- w �d PK1902 -- z a �U TT __ z z 31-PID-1301 -DI-1012 ELTE11D WATE wUlMllM O ag _ _ -DWoavc- Fwoa DF I 31-PID-1 "" E-Pio-1e01 reEcW7R,\1N477 - areaE.c. 16131/ 31-PID-1902 DEMO FOR DEMOLITION ONLY DESTROY AFTER JOB COMPLETION ICA . ° , . , ° M , ° ,En, ,0 N E ------�` , ° °ten-Pio-aooz ppl P1 908 tt m IIS z <o it mw so - ' - P1909 P1908 P1909 ag ,soo lv iea000�caM�wzsoRl ,soo Na'�s;oo�cvxi o�wz,�a) - - 139,,146 gP -Po-,say of _ �EcWTR\1N477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1902 ITINI ,�:off 'aCd° ICA g III—El ° .a a �IIIIIIIIIIII �m r, °0,,, a,❑ ❑ Q o P19D8 n° �° . a° ° o w Z 11 „< F_ L <o� U Pio a9I W� L-1ce` wry o„, � �� ¢w Ua i u 3w xo= av m Z U¢ W sag ro - - P1909 P1908 P1909 ag ,aoo�v iea000��wM e zsoR1 1—Nv 1-1. iNi E@wz.Ea) - - E.140 146 "a 3,-P�o-,say W7R477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-1903 IC EKED- °sa,a °oho , °off oo — — —------ — - 6° a3,Ro-,� o� ---- ------ !Ll ----- h ;7 P 191 o z.n° a. �a.- a° as ° r= s a w ~ llli' II 00 pp a o P1911 ag P1910 P191111'XI'l—P - 141 146 yv _ - ceno onn,n,rvs rvo. f a1-PiD--1 AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c. 16131/ GENERAL NOTES DEMOLITION NOTES 1I-El-111L 111111NIR-1E.11 Wl--1171�l O.N.E,N-VINI-11-1-F IRNF m1711.1-INN-IL-111L-N-El ElVlLFl.lNF 1-11 N, F.L 1-1-1-1 1— 1 F-FIDN-11 ILALL-111F IT11 ANI AND ALL FILE -PID-2001 �l lEl ILIENF llElElENlEl. -N E1111 91 ILI 11-11 D. E-TINI III 1�IN-LINN 11-1UPLI w171-El ENTI.N of NE I-1171 IEFEE 1.I-EIT.1 11-1AD N E I.L'Al w171 FILE 11EPE of.11 N-PEVINEN7 IPEIIII-INNI IIIIEF'El 7111 P—P-7N-17 of 1-1111EN, I DE-E 'IL'j"I'Ll 1p�LIL EOOP�OEN��,�NDD"���NGSSI���OM OED 1-TIDIL RLAA N, lEl NEI lIPEEN7 F 01EIRLI NEANNOEN NN 7111 11LEN-IN FILE PINIEIF IPEIIIIIIINNV DE111I.El IN TIE 11EPE al-1 7111 E-TINI I1 1-11.111 AND IA 11 ILI T'L N'7 "EDTN'LL LLNl A AN�Dl�EETTINDEI"- 1,TLESE N-ME ON DRWN0A-T' FEEL��L �DD 0 -ES LY 0-FOMPONET�NDlOV E E RA NDID T�'N... ...T =,FD,NNT,�L M �N N' FN' EN,� OE oODEAAocID,,_,AANIFAW�ND%_", ALLAT MNA NA1M,L1N1 �'' 6 *F F,�M YNP�,E�,ENF 711�'O'M'PLE'.0INE.0 0��YK TIl,'MEN�DED,I-L BE E101IFF 70 TIE ENNINEEI I 17EMION FILE FONT-01 11-NOT PlElEEN WDF IRLIED-1 UNTIL WL 10-111 E lElElED MD N MS2001 O-REELM,-I ICAo M R 0 QNOTE I 5,FL,NElE,�,ENCE`NlMCl`lPFYL VII TlEl N AN N IM ELECTREAL W.D-5 DEVE-MENT PRA-7 N,E11111 11- _M"L (All P101RAL 12111)W PEI ILIEM PlElElENlEl E7 DO W .-E7 E 0 U O r 11 A Y CUE lljiilil R MS2C01 0 "M' EL-1. A FFLP EL"T DOEN's IN 1L 1sD "BORAINDO G! ETBD RE w < NI,110EDIEN-E- F,I <V E-1 12-DI-566 DRAIN LED ZUQW 36'-DI-567 OVERFLOW TBD 0 HOLD FOR INFO 0 142 n 146 111-11-1 NO IE WTR-477 31��PID-2002 rrin\ /� _ �Z i•,��,re �,rrew n-iaoe O 2 w 'yoli L�zo,a-dx —� s ��rvw niaoa s�sL °s F N w;7 31 P-2013 O �° �,�Go. x as z re°,�„re„G .°x GxaHre p ~ 3 = lllllili ,M , ° I °T T °�°T°—ol —°T°— —°T° T°—off`°-7 ,�E e—D --°—°- °re 'nw, III g ---- ----�� ,e — °jour'pros w VP0 w¢ a 1 W a :o U 31—sP�2012 ° dao IE zo z P = — _ C7 g �--so,✓, v -- _ _ ZO re si Pio zoos eo . Y� 31—P-2012 31—P-2013 11 Hpa'11 orm.Pwso,Ee P.'i13o cNPstifHE®o wn,E EIIID D” ,ocpti.z15P , , zs3,—P�o-2112 AE WTR-477 _ aAaE.c. 16131/ 31��PID-2003 , a rz M M ,� rzm, z� �IIIIIIII w '°-�° L2 11 E Lam' s o, Q o°SPro-B r �rz n,w Y �y j tl E.144 n 146 31—P-2014 31—P-2015 ceno oAnnws no. € ;soo POP',a..°oP�r��- POP',3'.�0o oP�r�—z0"n'.e IEI.ID D. WTR-477 'o0 2 . 11.0 � - aAaE.c, 16131/ 31��PID-2004 .,,Ho :off ....... ®R Via^ � _ a3 , a T e Y el o—o— ? ;7 - /01 sPolrl iP� � 31 vuua,P-200 17 (n b� oX MI, E ; a o= -eTee_o� eo MO I a o aJa a� n °' v n,w W <a� �a E.145 n 146 s^ 31—P-2016 31—P-201711 ceno oAnnws no. �1 �soo _ P'3s« or P'3n o sIeo we> o � ,..— za 1—H , o >, pzona _ PFaEc* 16131/ 31�PID-2005 11 Ll 11 ICA ���LJ � �} F w so � �z � r X;72� ;7 v nY `Y o p (n U 0 (L Q a c E ' > o0 � III 3 a z x09-1 - lll� , eQ IL.I.LL 11 J N QpF m J zx x n a 8 Q 2 U W o5 w � W w U �' g O H LL Y 146 n 146 31—P-2018 (FUTURE) ceno oAnnws no. 11.1 p,e(Fm-eo—EI) IE 3,—P�o-zaas AE WTR-477 - aAaE.c, 16131/ 75/2/2023 E(MM/DD/YYYY) A�" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Jenn Morris Artex Risk Solutions, Inc. PHONE FAX 2850 Golf Road, 5th Floor A/C No Ext): 630-438-1564 A/c,No): E-MRolling Meadows IL 60008 ADDRESS: jenn_morris@artexrisk.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA: Old Republic Insurance Company 24147 INSURED INSURER B:Travelers Property Casualty Co of America 25674 CSA Construction, Inc. INSURERC: Illinois Union Insurance Company 27960 2314 McAllister Rd Houston TX 77092 INSURERD: INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1906171952 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICYNUMBER MM/DD MM/DD A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y MWZY 307203 23 4/1/2023 4/1/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $2,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $300,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $4,000,000 PRO- POLICY� ECT 1:1 LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $4,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y Y MWTB30710523 4/1/2023 4/1/2024 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $2,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIREDX NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident Comp.Ded:$250 $Coll.Ded:$500 B X UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR CUP-1T762588-23-NF 4/1/2023 4/1/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $15,000,000 EXCESS LAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $15,000,000 DED X RETENTION$n $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION Y MWC 307104 23 4/1/2023 4/1/2024 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEE.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ❑ N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C Contractors Pollution Lia CPYG24541216006 4/1/2023 4/1/2025 Cond.Lmt./Agg. $2MM/$2MM Agg-All Poll.Cond. $2,000,000 SIR-Per Poll Cond. $25,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) OPT, Owner and other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions are included as additional insureds on the General Liability and Auto Liability policies where required by written contract.The insurance provided in the General Liability policy is primary and any other insurance shall be excess only,and not contributing.Waiver of Subrogation applies to General Liability,Auto Liability,umbrella Liability and Workers Compensation policy pursuant to and subject to the policies terms,definitions,conditions and exclusions where required by written contract. Umbrella Liability follows form.30 Days notice of cancellation provided to certificate holder CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi—Engineering ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 4�� @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016103) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 7EIMMIDDIYY" ALCOR" EVIDENCE OF COMMERCIAL PROPERTY INSURANCE 5/9/2023 THIS EVIDENCE OF COMMERCIAL PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW.THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. PRODUCERNAME, PHONE COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS NAICNO:40142 CONTACT PERSON AND ADDRESS A/C No Ext 713-880-7100 Bowen,Miclette&Britt American Zurich Insurance Co. Insurance Agency, LLC 1400 American Lane P.O. Box 922022 Schaumburg, IL 60196 Houston,TX 77292 FAX C No:713-880-7166 ADDRESS : IF MULTIPLE COMPANIES,COMPLETE SEPARATE FORM FOR EACH CODE: SUB CODE: POLICY TYPE AGENCY Builders Risk CUSTOMER ID#: NAMED INSURED AND ADDRESS LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER CSA Construction, Inc. 2314 McAllister Road EC78619582 Houston TX 77092 EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE CONTINUED UNTIL 06/05/2023 06/05/2026 El TERMINATED IF CHECKED ADDITIONAL NAMED INSURED(S) THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: PROPERTY INFORMATION ACORD 101 may be attached if mores ace is required) ❑x BUILDING OR ❑ BUSINESS PERSONAL PROPERTY LOCATION/DESCRIPTION 13101 Leopard St, Corpus Christi,TX 78410 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. COVERAGE INFORMATION PERILS INSURED I I BASIC I I BROAD X I SPECIAL COMMERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE AMOUNT OF INSURANCE: $36,454,000** DED:10,000 AOP YES NO N/A ❑ BUSINESS INCOME ❑ RENTAL VALUE X If YES,LIMIT: Actual Loss Sustained;#of months: BLANKET COVERAGE X If YES,indicate value(s)reported on property identified above:$ TERRORISM COVERAGE X Attach Disclosure Notice/DEC IS THERE A TERRORISM-SPECIFIC EXCLUSION? X IS DOMESTIC TERRORISM EXCLUDED? X LIMITED FUNGUS COVERAGE X If YES,LIMIT: DED: FUNGUS EXCLUSION(If"YES",specify organization's form used) X REPLACEMENT COST X AGREED VALUE X COINSURANCE X If YES, % EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT: DED: ORDINANCE OR LAW -Coverage for loss to undamaged portion of bldg X If YES,LIMIT:lncluded DED: Demolition Costs X If YES,LIMIT:1,000,000 DED: Incr.Cost of Construction X If YES,LIMIT:1,000,000 DED: EARTH MOVEMENT(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT:35,590,000 DED:25,000 FLOOD(If Applicable) X If YES,LIMIT:25,000,000 DED:100,000 WIND/HAIL INCL ❑X YES ❑ NO Subject to Different Provisions: X If YES,LIMIT:36,454,000 DED:10,000 NAMED STORM INCL ❑X YES ❑ NO Subject to Different Provisions: X If YES,LIMIT:36,454,000 DED:3%/150k Min PERMISSION TO WAIVE SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF MORTGAGE X HOLDER PRIOR TO LOSS CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ADDITIONAL INTEREST CONTRACT OF SALE LENDER'S LOSS PAYABLE LOSS PAYEE LENDER SERVICING AGENT NAMEAND ADDRESS MORTGAGEE NAME AND ADDRESS City of Corpus Christi Contracts and Procurement AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,TX 78401 ©2003-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 28(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Policy# MWTB 307105 23 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 04 43 11 20 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) AUTOMATIC WHEN REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: AUTO DEALERS COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement,the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. The Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us Condition does not apply to any person(s)or organization(s) for whom you are required to waive subrogation with respect to the coverage provided under this Coverage Form, but only to the extent that subrogation is waived: A. Under a written contact or agreement with such person(s)or organization(s); and B. Prior to the"accident'or the'loss." ©Insurance Services Office, Inc. ©Insurance Services Office,Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organ izations : Location And Description Of Completed Operations All persons or organizations as required by written contract or The locations as specified in the written contracts or agreements agreement Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products- completed operations hazard". CG 20 37 07 04 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 MWZY 307203 23 CSA Construction, Inc. 04/01/2023-04/01/2024 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 53 12 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) - AUTOMATIC This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART DESIGNATED SITES POLLUTION LIABILITY LIMITED COVERAGE PART DESIGNATED SITES PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK POLICY DESIGNATED TANKS The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV— Conditions: We waive any right of recovery against any person or organization, because of any payment we make under this Coverage Part, to whom the insured has waived its right of recovery in a written contract or agreement. Such waiver by us applies only to the extent that the insured has waived its right of recovery against such person or organization prior to loss. CG 24 53 12 19 O Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 1 MWZY 307203 23 CSA construction, Inc. 04/01/2023-04/01/2024 Policy Number: MWTB 307105 23 UU �� ������ OLD REPUBLIC U��������� ��|�������� .~ .� x .���~,x ~�.-~~ .~~-. .�~~.-.~~ ..~~~~~.~~...~~~- COMPANY . THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ [TCAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED/DESIGNATED INSURED AMENDMENT _ PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM SCHEDULE Designated Person(s) or0rganization(n): All persons ororganizations where required by written contract. WHO IS AN INSURED (SECTION U) is amended to include the person(s) ornrgonizotion(n) shown in the above Sohadu|e, but only with respect to "accidents" arising out of work being performed for such pereon(a) ororgan izaUon(a). As respects any person(s) nrorganizadon(o) shown in the above Schedule with whom you have agreed in a written contract to provide primary insurance on a non-contributory baoio, this insurance will be primary to and non-contributing with any other insurance available to such person(s)urorganizadonn(a). PCA 0481O13 Pogo 1 of POLICY NUMBER: MWZY 307203 23 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 26 03 05 09 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE, READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED CONSTRUCTION PROJECT(S) GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMIT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Designated Construction Project(s): The locations as specified in the written contracts or agreements. Information required to complete this ScheduIe, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. A. For all sums which the insured becomes legally 3. Any payments made under Coverage A for obligated to pay as damages caused! by "occur- damages or under Coverage C for medical rences" under Section I —Coverage A,arid for all expenses shall reduce the Designated Con medical expenses caused by accidents under struction Project General Aggregate limit for Section I — Coverage C, which can be attributed that designated construction project. Such only to ongoing operations at a single designated payments shall not reduce the General Ag- construction project shown in the Schedule gregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor above: shall they reduce any other Designated Con- 1. A separate Designated Construction Project strUction Project General Aggregate Limit for General Aggregate Limit applies to each des- any other designated constructiuri project ignated construction project, and that limit is, shown in the Schedule above. equal to the amount of the GenerdlAggregate, 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Limit shown in the Declarations, Occurrence, Damage To Premises Rented To 2. The Designated Construction Project General You and Medical Expense continue to apply, Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the However, instead of being subject to the sum of all damages under Coverage A, ex- General Aggregate Limit shown in the Decla- cept damages because of "bodily injury" or rations, such limits will be subject to the appli- "property damage" included in the '"products- cable Designated Construction Project Gen- completed operations hazard", and for imeldi- ural Aggregate Limit. cal expenses under Coverage.C re,gardliess of the number of: a. Insureds; b. Claims made or"suits"brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims,or bringing"suits". CO 25 03 05 09 0 Insurance Services Office, Inc,, 2008 Page 1 of 2 'i B. For all sums which the insured becomes legally C. When coverage for liability arising out of the obligated to pay as damages caused by "occur- ""products-completed operations hazard" is pro- rences" under Section I —Coverage A, and for ali vided, any payments for damages because of medical expenses caused by accidents under "bodily injury" or "property damage" Included in Section I — Coverage C, which cannot be attrib- the "products-completed operations hazard" will uted only to ongoing operations at a single des- reduce the Products-completed Operations Ag- ignated construction project shown in the Schedl- gregate Limit, and not reduce the General Ag- ule above: gregate Limit near the Designated Construction 1. Any payments made under Coverage A for Project General Aggregate Limit. damages or under Coverage C for medical D, If the applicable designated construction project expenses shall reduce the amount available has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned) under the General Aggregate Limit or the and then restarted" or if the authorized contract- Products-completedOperations Aggregate ing parties deviate from plans, blueprints, de- Limit,whichever is applicable; and signs, specifications or timetables,the project will 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Desiigi- still be deemed to be the same construction pro- nated Construction Project General Aggre- ject, gate Limit. E. The provisions of Section III — Limits Of Insur- ance not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to apply as stipulated. Page 2 of 2 Q Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2008 CG 2.5 03 06 09, COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 10 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s): Location(s)Of Covered Operations All persons or organizations as required by written The locations as specified in the written contracts contract or agreement or agreements Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional exclu- organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only sions apply: with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or damage" or "personal and advertising injury" "property damage"occurring after: caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equip- 1. Your acts or omissions; or ment furnished in connection with such work, 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your on the project (other than service, maintenance behalf; or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location of the the additional insured(s) at the location(s) desig- covered operations has been completed; or nated above. 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its in- tended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor en- gaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 10 07 04 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 MWZY 307203 23 CSA Construction, Inc. 04/01/2023-04/01/2024 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 00 03 13 (Ed. 4-84) POLICY NUMBER: MWC 307104 23 WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule WHERE REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT DATE OF ISSUE: WC 00 03 13 (Ed.4-84) ©1983 National Council on Compensation Insurance. INSURED COPY CSA Construction, Inc. Policy Number: I MWZY 307203 23 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 01 12 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to the Other Insurance (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or Condition and supersedes any provision to the agreement that this insurance would be contrary: primary and would not seek contribution Primary And Noncontributory Insurance from any other insurance available to the additional insured. This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other insurance available to an additional insured under your policy provided that: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other insurance; and CG 20 01 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: BA814EA6-663D-4797-A6EB-14F901814534 NOTICE OF AWARD FINANCE - Contractor: CSA Construction, Inc. PROCUREMENT Project: ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. 3 (Re-Bid) Contract No. 4578 PO Box 9277 Corpus Christi This notice serves as confirmation of award of the referenced Project, to your firm, by Texas, 78469-9277 the Corpus Christi City Council on April 25, 2023 in the amount of $36,454,000 Phone: Contractor is instructed to execute all necessary forms and submit all required 361.826.3160 documentation as outlined in the contract document. All required insurance and bond submittals are due back to this office within 10 calendar days of receipt. The following document submittals are required to execute the contract: • Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties • Performance and Payment Bond — Required bond forms have been provided to you for execution. Submit one set of original hard copy performance and payment bonds. • Insurance — Refer to the contract documents, Section 00 73 00, for insurance requirements and submit proof of coverage. Submittals will include a Certificate of Insurance referencing the project name and number and all applicable endorsements to the policies. Please contact the Procurement Officer if you have any questions regarding this information. EDocusign}edd by: l � U - 4/26/2023 F7IlGdRFiriFF�Rfl Ff: Josh Chronley Date Assistant Director of Finance and Procurement RETURN DOCUMENTS TO: Clarissa Johnson City of Corpus Christi — Procurement 1201 Leopard St. - City Hall, First Floor Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 006113 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 61BCSIW7038 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: CSA Construction,Inc. Name: Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 2314 McAllister Road One Hartford Plaza Houston,Texas 77092 Hartford,CT 06155 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Hartford Plaza Hartford,CT 06155 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address(principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. (860)547-5000 3,Proiect No.18131A Telephone(for notice of claim): (888)266-3488 Local Agent for Surety Name: Stacy Owens Award Date of the Contract:April 25,2023 Address: 2800 North Loop West,Suite 1100 Houston,TX 77092 Contract Price: 536.454.000 Bond Telephone: (713)880-7100 Email Address: sowens@bmbinc.com Date of Bond: April 26,2023 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll-free number.-1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3,Project No.18131A 2023 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully,performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269,of the,Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces; County, Texas for any legal action. ........... Contractor as PriSurety Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Stacy Owens OMTO C Title: -Via L-J!rQ3idkdJ1----.- Title: Attorney-in-Fad Email Address: Arai _(d)csaconstruction.corn Email Address: soweiis@brnbinc.o (Attacli Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) -TRUC //,,, 'Y b C07 S .......... END OF SECTION! Performance Bond 006113-2 ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell:No.3, Project No. 18131A 2023 • ,1 r r •rttrrt(1t tttµttt�t 006116 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 61BCSIW7038 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: CSA Construction,Inc. Name: Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 2314 McAllister Road One Hartford Plaza Houston,Texas 77092 Hartford,CT 06155 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Hartford Plaza Hartford,CT 06155 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address(principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No. (860)547-5ono 3.Project No.18131A Telephone(for notice of claim): (888)266-3488 Local Agent for Surety Name: Stacy Owens Award Date of the Contract:April 25,2023 Address: 2800 North Loop West,suite 1100 Houston,TX 77092 Contract Price: 536.454.000 Bond Telephone: 713-880-7100 Email Address: sowensQbmbinc.cam Date of Bond: April 2s,2023 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept.of insurance by calling the following toll-free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant Clearwell No.3,Project No.18131A 2023 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, anal'their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2,253 and Chapter 2269,of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractoras Principal Surety S Signature. Si nature: Name: G C&t Name: Sta V Owens Title: NJ�—�Xoi J�11 ------ Title: Attomey-in-Fact Email Address: geraigy(bcsacoiisli-uctioti.corii Email Address: sowens@bMbinq,com (Attach Powerof Attorney and place,surety seat below) 0\A S TSR JJ :0= END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 006116-2 ON Stevens Water Treatment Plant ClearweH No.3, Project No. 18131A 2023 • • L t r ' ' • • 1. • _. ... ..• .. t - .a. .. .. .. ... .�. •t•i .._ "F • r t. . zc .. .t ...� -. _ r � . • . . .. , ttUlttitNl��tit t ff ! - +.♦fir' '.l /�. 03 J ;� Direct InquirieslClaims to: THE HARTFORD BOND,T-11 One Hartford Plaza POWER OF, ATTORNEY Hartford,Connecticut 06155 Bcjnd,C1a1h1S thqIhanfonic(nn KNO�W ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: BOWEN MICLETTE & BRITT INS AGY LLC enc Code: 46,-504809, 61-61,3558, T21-225344 Hartford Fire insurance Company,at corporation duly organized under the laws ofthe State of Connecticut Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, as corporation duly organizQd under the laws ofthe Stale ol'Indiasia Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company, a corporation duly ivgarazed under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company, are corporation duly organized undcr the laws ofthe State ofConnecticul Twin City Fire Insurance Company, as corporation duly organized under the laws of the State oflndiana Hartford insurance Company of Illinois, a ccaporation duly organized under-the ktwsi of the Slate ofillinois Hartford insurance Company of the Midwest, a corporation duly organized under the laws ofthe State ofIndiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State ofllorida having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make, constitute and appoint uptothearnountof Unlimited . David T. Miclette, Ashley Britt, Alyson Carmichael, Robert C. Davis, Tabitha Dorman, Rita G. Gulizo, Nilrole Jeannette, Barry K. McCord, Susan Zapalowski, Lauren 0. Moudy, Robert M. Overbey jr. , Lacey Mayfield, Stacey Bosley, Stacy Owens of Fort Smith AR, New Orleans LA and Houston, TX Mary R. Butcher, Gail S. Barr, James J. Drew, Matthew S. Mlles, Lenita W. Wright of Maitland FL, their true and lawful Attorneys)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies) only as delineated above by 0, and to execute, seat and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 23, 2016 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seats to be hereto affixed,duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to, Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and wwilll be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to,this Power of Attorney. to ;awry l Q'79 Shelby Wiggins,Assistant Secretary Joelle L. LaPieirre,Assistant Vice President STATE OF FLORIDA Ss. Lake Mary COUNTY OF SEMINOL6 On this 20th day of May,2021,before me personally came Joelle LaPierre,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say:that (s)he resides in Seminole County,State of Florida; that (s)he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that (s)he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seats affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that(s)he signed his/her name thereto by like authority. Jcq,6ca Ciccone My Conunission 1111 122280 Fxpi res June 20,2025 l,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies,, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and fore?oh-ig is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still in full force effective as of Apri 1 2 G 2 02 Signed and sealed in Lake Mary, Florida, Twp Keith C. Dozois,Assistant Vice President ' "•4, L � , - ? r1 ""W oil Owunu :r�, ,i.i'. , .. .... to won Svc, Vaz '<.•'• t .. I.I.i. .. ..I I. ..,..,j.; -t e. ..,. �.-,..r`, '•..is _ `��`,1 �•. � .f•rte•r ' ... .,.... .".. . �• _tom��=�_ �.. .= , HARTFORD „(('��,THE E �ir�rarfol�ll�11�1�1..1.�Jji !II/,UAI/I��H�N//y T(� .tiF�' ��1f'lJ K!"� CII gLihics Notice Ildoflrrd F° re h1surrgnc cssnip”' y L°v"in City Insurance C°ompally fWraWI I"mrsrrs:rltyr Insarrmrnce Company I Iartf6r,d IsrSr.rr•srr�rcc! C°r;rrnparr of'III h-saris Ito Rud Aaci darmt and hgadenrrruty C%VanyHartArd Inmrr°rrrscc (Unpany r;rp"the N40vest HarlI mil 9.)rrala:rmiters IrIararr«�gr CC, (_`0111,I)ILM Y I lartlfrrd Irrsrmrarize CAmnparrry of the Southwest est Please address dmdr ries regarding ChA s 6kar all stwel r rrrrsl fiadelky Imsducts issued by The H<rm•rsa s un dswimrdfirrg con-iprrnrrl s to the ILrplo"rrr& Phone Numbicr: 888-260-3488 Fax Uaims 860-757 -5835 or 800-22 1 -3965 d:-r r��am¢I l�s�r�rr I.�°I r:g 1 rg a;tif'dtl'&Ir�I�u rrr�t fyara�.a°anr ar Mai N inn AddrcssI _L"hc I dam f6rmd I, 4.,.e 1',, I.W,, ..I,..,„„1 Um m I IarrtAnd pozar I4m i Ihrr°d, p...T 06 15 5 C lahas Inagmmk lim Nasdee 2003 IMPORTANT NOTICE 'ro obtairi inforrnation 01- Make a COMP(aiflt: You rnay contact YOUr Agent. YOU r'Tiay ca[4 The Hartford's Consurner Affairs to[I-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at,, 1-800-451-6944 YOU n-my contact the 'Texas Departffient of Ira W'Anc-e to obtain jr1f0l'Madon on corripardes, coverages, rid ghts, or complaints at: '1-800-252,-3439 You rnay write the Texas Departrnent of Insurarce'. P.O. area '149104 At.istiin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Web: tdt exas.gov E-Mait: C'on,sfiii)ietotectiopµ@tdi.texp PREMIUM, OR CLA,IM DISPUTES: Shou[d you have a djSpUte coincerninLN' preri'iium or about a claim, YOU ShOUid caritact the (agent) (cora ipany) ( attest or Ll"ie company) first. If the CHSPUte is not reso[ved, you may contacL the Texas Departrnent of 41SUrance. ATTACH "'rmS NO'"TICE TO YOUR POLICY: r'his notice, is, for inforrnation only and does not become a Part or condition of the attached dOCUment. ./T`XA275-`I